Specifications Vol 1 Div 1-6

US Army Corps of Engineers Baltimore District
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
USAMRIID Replacement
UNITED STATES ARMY MEDICAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE OF INFECTIOUS DISEASES (USAMRIID) FT. DETRICK, MD
Phase I - Primary Building Package

VOLUME 1: DIVISIONS 1 - 6 REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL W912DR-08-R-0075 CONTRACT NO. DATE 19 SEPTEMBER 2008
CUH2A Smith Carter Hemisphere (JV) CUH2A CN 5380, Princeton, NJ 08543 1000 Lenox Drive Lawrenceville, NJ 08648 Smith Carter Hemisphere Engineering 1123 Zonolite Road Suite 25, Atlanta, GA 30306
F.O.U.O. - For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 00 05 07 11 20 27 31 31 31 32 33 33 33 33 35 41 41 42 42 45 45 45 45 51 57 57 60 61 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 15 19 01.00 00 10 29 40 29 50 60 00 13 02.00 10 35 70 00 20.00 23.00 00 23 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS JOB CONDITIONS CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING SUMMARY OF WORK WARRANTY REQUIREMENT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT SUSPENDED LOADING - COORDINATION AND LIMITATIONS CONTAINMENT CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION PROJECT MEETINGS PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SPECIAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES LEED(TM) DOCUMENTATION COLOR/FINISH SAMPLE BOARDS SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS SEISMIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS WIND LOAD DESIGN CRITERIA SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS REFERENCE STANDARDS, ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS) CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL SPECIAL INSPECTION ROOM INTEGRITY TESTING TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ITEMS ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION MEASURES PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED (CFCI) EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS GOVERNMENT FURNISHED GOVERNMENT INSTALLED (GFGI) EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE MATERIAL/PRODUCT RESISTANCE AS-BUILT DRAWINGS - CADD CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT STARTING AND ADJUSTING CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING INDOOR AIR QUALITY COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING COMPONENT VERIFICATION COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST COMMISSIONING INTEGRATED SYSTEM TEST COMMISSIONING FUNCTIONAL OPERATIONAL SYSTEM TEST
10
10
10 10
01 62 35 01 64 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 67 72 74 75 77 78 79 81 91 91 91 91 91 00 00 19 00 00 23 00 19 00 01 02 03 04
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 19 September 2008 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 08 11 15 20 31 31 35 41 45 00 13.00 13.00 01.00 00.00 05 13 33.00 01.00 10 10 10 10 COMMISSIONING OF CONCRETE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK EXPANSION JOINTS, CONTRACTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE HIGH CONTAINMENT CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE FLOOR AND ROOF UNITS PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
10 10
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 20 00 04 43 30 04 72 00 MASONRY CUT STONE CAST STONE
DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 08 12 30 40 50 50 51 71 72 13 00 00 00 00 00 10.00 00 00 00 FACTORY-APPLIED METAL COATINGS COMMISSIONING OF METALS STRUCTURAL STEEL STEEL DECKS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING METAL: MISCELLANEOUS AND FABRICATIONS SPECIAL METAL FABRICATIONS METAL STAIRS ORNAMENTAL STAIRS ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 06 06 06 06 10 20 41 51 61 00 00 16.00 10 50 16 ROUGH CARPENTRY FINISH CARPENTRY LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK FIBERGLASS (FRP) GRATINGS SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 08 13 14 16 18 21 21 21 21 22 41 42 42 52 55 00 53 00 19 00 00 16 19 29 00 13 13 50 00 56 COMMISSIONING OF THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING METALLIC OXIDE WATERPROOFING TRAFFIC COATINGS BUILDING INSULATION MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION SPRAYED POLYURETHANE INSULATION SPRAYED THERMAL INSULATION ROOF AND DECK INSULATION NON-STRUCTURAL METAL ROOFING METAL WALL PANELS ALUMINUM AND PLASTIC COMPOSITE PANELS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING RUBBERIZED ASPHALT PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING
Ft. Detrick, MD
07 07 07 07 07 07 07
60 71 81 81 84 92 95
00 00 00 23 00 00 13
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING FIRESTOPPING JOINT SEALANTS EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 05 06 08 11 11 11 12 14 15 31 33 34 38 39 41 41 44 44 44 55 62 71 71 81 91 00 00 00 13 16 19.00 16 00 00 13 23 59 13 15 13 23 00 13 23 00.00 00 00 01 00 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR OPENINGS (FOUO) DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE COMMISSIONING OF OPENINGS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES STAINLESS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES WOOD DOORS PLASTIC DOORS ACCESS DOORS OVERHEAD COILING DOORS SECURITY VAULT DOOR STRIP DOORS PNEUMATIC AIR PRESSURE RESISTANT DOORS METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS FIRE RATED GLAZED WALL ASSEMBLIES GLAZED CURTAIN WALL GLAZED CURTAIN WALL (INTERIOR) STRUCTURAL GLASS CURTAIN WALL AIR PRESSURE RESISTANT WINDOWS SKYLIGHTS DOOR HARDWARE SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE (FOUO) GLAZING METAL WALL LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 05 08 22 27 29 30 51 57 60 61 64 65 66 66 67 68 69 83 90 97 00 00 00 13 00 00 00 13 05 10 13 00 13 23 00 00 13 13 00 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FINISHES (FOUO) COMMISSIONING OF FINISHES METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS GYPSUM BOARD CERAMIC TILE ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS SANITARY CEILINGS VAPOR TRANSMISSION TESTING CONCRETE FLOOR TREATMENT WOOD FLOORING RESILIENT FLOORING PRECAST TERRAZZO RESINOUS TERRAZZO FLOORING FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING CARPET RIGID GRID ACCESS FLOORING ACOUSTICAL WALL AND CEILING TREATMENTS PAINTS AND COATINGS SPECIAL COATINGS
Ft. Detrick, MD
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 14 14 21 21 22 22 25 25 26 28 44 45 51 56 56 00 01 02 13 23.16 13 26 00 13 13 13 16 40 00 26 26.13 VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS SPECIALTIES EXTERIOR SIGNAGE INTERIOR SIGNAGE TOILET COMPARTMENTS CUBICLE TRACK AND HARDWARE WIRE MESH PARTITIONS OPERABLE PARTITIONS SERVICE WALLS PATIENT BED SERVICE WALLS WALL AND CORNER GUARDS TOILET ACCESSORIES FIRE EXTINGUISHERS OPTICAL PEDESTRIAN SECURITY LANES LOCKERS MOBILE STORAGE UNITS MANUAL MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 05 08 13 19 24 47 52 52 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 60 72 72 73 73 94 13 00 10 00 33.01 00 00 13 13 36 53 59 63.00 64 67 69 73 91 93 00 00 13 23 24 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING OF EQUIPMENT DOCK LEVELERS DETENTION EQUIPMENT ROOF MAINTENANCE SYSTEMS ICE MACHINES AUDIO VISUAL EQUIPMENT PROJECTION SCREENS FUME HOODS DUST COLLECTION SYSTEM BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS CLASS III BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINET LINES STERILIZERS ETO STERILIZER DEPYROGENATION OVENS TISSUE DIGESTER SYSTEM MODULAR STAINLESS STEEL WALLS TUNNEL WASHERS PIT MOUNTED WASHER GLASSWARE WASHING EQUIPMENT EXAMINATION AND TREATMENT EQUIPMENT MEDICAL EQUIPMENT, MISCELLANEOUS VACUUM BEDDING AND DUST COLLECTION EQUIPMENT BEDDING DISPENSER DECONTAMINATION MISTING TUNNEL
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 08 24 35 35 35 48 93 00 13 53.13 53.19 53.26 13.13 00 COMMISSIONING OF FURNISHINGS ROLLER WINDOW SHADES METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK ADAPTABLE LABORATORY CASEWORK SYSTEM CUSTOM STAINLESS STEEL LABORATORY CASEWORK ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS SITE FURNISHINGS
Ft. Detrick, MD
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 13 13 13 13 08 21 48 49 49 00 00 00 19 23 COMMISSIONING OF SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION CONTROLLED ENVIRONMENT ROOMS SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT RADIATION SHIELDING MRI, RF SHIELDED ENCLOSURE
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 14 14 14 21 24 42 83 23 00 00 16 ELECTRIC TRACTION PASSENGER ELEVATORS HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS WHEELCHAIR LIFTS SCISSOR LIFT
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 08 00 21 10 01 21 30 00 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS COMBINED STANDPIPE AND WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION FIRE PUMPS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 00 05 05 05 05 05 05 07 08 10 10 10 11 14 15 31 33 33 36 42 62 63 64 67 00 19 29 33 48 53 75 00 00 05 06 19 23 29 19.19 00 00 30.00 10 00 00 16 17 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE PLUMBING THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PLUMBING HEAT TRACING SYSTEM PLUMBING SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS THERMAL INSULATION FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES PLUMBING, PIPING SPECIALTIES WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM WASTEWATER PUMP NONLUBRICATED ROTARY SCREW AIR COMPRESSORS WATER SOFTENERS, CATION-EXCHANGE (SODIUM CYCLE) WATER HEATERS SOLAR WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT CHEMICAL SHOWER SYSTEM COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES MEDICAL AND LABORATORY GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEM LIQUID NITROGEN SYSTEM BREATHING AIR SYSTEMS PURIFIED WATER GENERATING EQUIPMENT (REVERSE OSMOSIS WATER SKID/TANKS) AUTOMATIC ANIMAL WATERING SYSTEMS DETERGENT TRANSFER SYSTEM
22 71 00 22 72 00
Ft. Detrick, MD
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 23 03 00 23 05 48 23 05 93.00 10 23 07 00 23 08 00 23 25 00 23 40 00.00 10 23 64 26 23 65 00.00 10 23 70 03.00 10 23 81 23 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC DUCTWORK, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING OF HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF WATER FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, AND RADIOLOGICAL (CBR) AIR FILTRATION SYSTEM CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, PROCESS AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS COOLING TOWER HEATING AND UTILITIES SYSTEMS, CENTRAL STEAM COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 25 25 25 25 06 08 10 10 00 00 00 01 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) POINTS LIST COMMISSIONING OF INTEGRATED AUTOMATION SYSTEM BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) - OPTION 15A (LNS Based LonWorks) BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) - OPTION 15B (Non-LNS Based LonWorks/Non-Native BACnet) BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) - OPTION 15C (Native BACnet) BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) FIELD EQUIPMENT ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEM BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
25 10 02 25 10 03 25 30 00 25 50 00 25 90 00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 00 05 08 08 09 09 09 11 20 23 28 28 29 32 33 36 41 42 51 56 60 00 48.00 00 00.13 13 23 23.13 16 00 00 00.00 01.00 23 15.00 10 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING POWER MONITORING SYSTEM INTEGRATED LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM SWITCHBOARDS AND SWITCHGEAR MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS AND PANELBOARDS COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS DIESEL-GENERATOR SET STATIONARY 100-2500 KW, WITH AUXILIARIES STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) SYSTEM AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AND BY-PASS/ISOLATION SWITCH LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE) INTERIOR LIGHTING EXTERIOR LIGHTING LOW-VOLTAGE MOTORS
10 10 10
53 00.00 10 01.00 10 14.00 10 00 00 13
Ft. Detrick, MD
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 27 27 27 05 10 53 54 28.36 00 16.23 00 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM RADIO FREQUENCY REPEATER SYSTEM (RFRS) COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEMS
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 08 00 28 20 01.00 10 28 31 76 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM (FOUO) INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 00 00 31 40 00 31 63 26 EARTHWORK SHORING AND UNDERPINNING DRILLED PIERS (CAISSONS)
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 05 11 11 12 12 16 16 17 31 31 92 92 93 33 10 23 17 23 13 15 24.00 10 13.00 51 19 26 00 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT PAVEMENT DRAINAGE LAYER (RDM) AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (DGA) BITUMINOUS PAVING - MARYLAND (SUPERPAVE) CONCRETE GRID (GRASS) PAVERS CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS CONCRETE BLOCK PAVEMENTS PAVEMENT MARKINGS CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES INTEGRATED BARRIER SYSTEMS (FOUO) SEEDING SPRIGGING EXTERIOR PLANTS
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 08 11 30 40 46 46 60 61 00 00 00 01 00 16 01 00 COMMISSIONING OF UTILITIES WATER DISTRIBUTION SANITARY SEWERS STORM DRAINAGE SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEMS SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEM (AND WALL DRAIN) VALVES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT IN VALVE MANHOLES PREFABRICATED UNDERGROUND HEATING/COOLING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PRE-ENGINEERED UNDERGROUND HEAT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)
33 61 13 33 70 02.00 10 33 82 00
DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT 41 22 03.13 41 22 03.19 MONORAILS WITH MANUAL HOIST MONORAILS WITH ELECTRIC POWERED HOISTS
-- End of Project Table of Contents --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 00 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Title Evidence Proof of purchase for equipment and/or materials. Invoice Copies Proof of rental equipment costs. Payment Evidence Proof of full payment. Photographs Digital images showing construction progress. SD-03 Product Data Cost or Pricing Data Proof of actual equipment costs. Equipment Data An itemized list of serial/model numbers and equipment installed by the Contractor under this contract. SD-05 Design Data Project Schedule; G, AR A schedule that shows the manner in which the Contractor intends to prosecute the work. SD-07 Certificates DIACAP; G AR Provide documentation with completed forms
Issued for Construction 19 September 2008
Section 01 00 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data O and M Data A list of proposed maintenance and instruction manuals that is mainly used for but not limited to customized equipment. Commissioning Activity for HVAC; G AR Additional Commissioning Requirements; G AR The Contractor shall provide separate activities for commissioning.Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING and related commissioning sections for commission requirements. 1.2 1.2.1 PROGRESS SCHEDULING AND REPORTING 1998) Project Schedule
The Contractor shall submit for approval a practicable project schedule in accordance with specification Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE showing the manner in which he intends to prosecute the work. 1.2.2 Software Package
The Contractor shall utilize an industry recognized QCS-W compatible scheduling software package to implement the requirements of Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE. 1.3 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTORS: (NOV 1976)
For payment purposes only, an allowance will be made by the Contracting Officer of 100 percent of the invoiced cost of materials or equipment delivered to the site but not incorporated into the construction, pursuant to the Contract Clause (FAR 52.232-5) titled "PAYMENTS UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS". The Contracting Officer may also, at his discretion, take into consideration the cost of materials or equipment stored at locations other than the jobsite, when making progress payments under the contract. In order to be eligible for payment, the Contractor must provide satisfactory evidence that he has acquired title to such material or equipment, and that it will be utilized on the work covered by this contract. Further, all items must be properly stored and protected. Earnings will be computed using 100 percent of invoiced value. (CENAB-CO-E) 1.4 IDENTIFICATION OF EMPLOYEES: (OCT 1983)
Each employee assigned to this project by the Contractor and subcontractors shall be required to display at all times, while on the project site, an approved form of identification provided by the Contractor, as an authorized employee of the Contractor/subcontractor. In addition, on those projects where identification is prescribed and furnished by the Government, it shall be displayed as required and it shall immediately be returned to the Contracting Officer for cancellation upon release of the assigned employee and or completion of project. (CENAB) 1.5 PURCHASE ORDER: (SEP 1975)
One readable copy of all purchase orders for critical items of material and equipment, showing firm names and addresses, and all shipping bills, or memoranda of shipment received regarding such material and equipment, shall Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 00 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
be furnished the appointed Contracting Officer's Representative as soon as issued. Such orders, shipping bills or memoranda shall be so worded or marked that all material and each item, piece or member of equipment can be definitely identified on the drawings. Where a priority rating is assigned to a contract, this rating, the required delivery date, and the scheduled shipping date shall also be shown on the purchase order. At the option of the Contractor, the copy of the purchase order may or may not indicate the purchase price. (CENAB-CO-E) 1.6 EQUIPMENT OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING EXPENSE SCHEDULE (EFARS 52.0231.5000 (OCT 1995)) A. This clause does not apply to terminations. settlement of proposals and FAR Part 49. See 52.249-5000, Basis for
B.
Allowable cost for construction and marine plant and equipment in sound workable conditions owned or controlled and furnished by a contractor or subcontractor at any tier shall be based on actual costs data for each piece of equipment or groups of similar serial and services for which the government can determine both ownership and operating costs from the contractors accounting records. When both ownership and operating costs can not be determined for any piece of equipment or groups of similar serial or series equipment from the contractors accounting records, costs for that equipment shall be based upon the applicable provisions of EP1110-1-8 Construction Equipment Ownership and Operating Expenses Schedule, Region East. Working conditions shall be considered to be average for determining equipment rates using the schedule unless specified otherwise by the contracting officer. For equipment not included in the schedule, rates for comparable pieces of equipment may be used or a rate may be developed using the formula provided in the schedule. For forward pricing, the schedule in effect at the time of negotiations shall apply. For retroactive pricing, the schedule in effect at the time the work was performed shall apply. Equipment rental costs are allowable, subject to the provisions of FAR 31.105(d) (ii) and FAR 31.205-36. Rates for equipment rented from an organization under common control, lease-purchase arrangements, and sale-leaseback arrangements, will be determined using the schedule, except that actual rates will be used for equipment leased from an organization under common control that has an established proactive of leasing the same or similar equipment to unaffiliated leasees. When actual equipment costs are proposed and the total amount of the pricing action exceeds the small purchase threshold, the contracting officer shall request the contractor to submit either certified cost or pricing data, or partial/limited data, as appropriate. The data shall be submitted on Standard Form 1411, Contract Pricing Proposal Cover Sheet. CENAB-CT/SEP 95 (EFARS 52.231-5000) REAL PROPERTY EQUIPMENT DATA: (APR 1975)
C.
D.
1.7
At or before the time of completion of the contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer a complete itemized list, including serial and model number where applicable, showing the unit retail value of each Contractor furnished item of mechanical, electrical and plumbing equipment installed by the Contractor under this contract. Itemized list shall include equipment scheduled under Section 01 61 23 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED (CFCI) EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE.For each of the items which is specified herein to be guaranteed for a specified period Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 00 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
from the date of acceptance thereof, either for beneficial use or final acceptance, whichever is earlier, against defective materials, design, and workmanship, the following information shall be given: the name, address and telephone number of the Subcontractor, Equipment Supplier, or Manufacturer originating the guaranteed item. The list shall be accompanied by a copy of the specific guarantee document for each item which is specified herein to be guaranteed if one had been furnished to the Contractor by the Equipment Supplier or Manufacturer. The Contractor's guarantee to the Government of these items will not be limited by the terms of any manufacturer's guarantee to the Contractor. Baltimore District NADB Form 1019 may be utilized for the itemized listing and will be made available to the Contractor upon request. (CENAB-CO-E) 1.8 O and M DATA: (JUL 1979)
The requirements for furnishing operating and maintenance data and field instruction are specified elsewhere in the specifications. The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer, at a time prior to the 50 percent project completion time, a list of proposed maintenance and instruction manuals to be furnished the Government and the scheduled dates of all required field instructions to be provided by Contractor furnished personnel or manufacturer's representatives. All maintenance and instruction manuals must be furnished to the Contracting Officer at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled dates of any required Contractor furnished field instructions or at least one month prior to project completion if no Contractor furnished field instructions are required. (CENAB) 1.9 1.9.1 A. FACILITY SECURITY CLEARANCE: Contractor Security Access: Large construction vehicles shall enter Fort Detrick through the Old Farm Gate on Rosemont Avenue. Smaller vehicles such as pickup trucks with temporary passes may enter by the 7th Street gate, but will be searched at each entry. Drivers shall be licensed, have registration and vehicle insurance. Drivers and passengers shall be able to furnish one official form of photo identification. Long term (greater than three months) driver/vehicle combinations may obtain temporary vehicle passes, and may not be searched upon every entry. This means such vehicle is owned/driven by that registered person. Vehicles without passes will be searched at each entry. No illegal aliens are permitted on Fort Detrick. All aliens must have appropriate documentation, and those found to be illegal will be apprehended. There will be no exception for this requirement. Prime Contractor shall contact Security Office at 301-619-2216/6060 for additional information or questions on these procedures. Handling Classified Contract Documents
B.
C.
D. E.
F.
1.9.2
The classified documents issued as part of this contract shall be handled and controlled per the provisions of AR 380-5, Department of the Army Information Security Program, and other procedures established by the local Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 00 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Security Officer. All procedures and Non Disclosure Agreements established during the solicitation period remain in effect throughout the contract period. 1.9.3 Handling Unclassified Contract Documents
For the unclassified contract documents, all procedures and Non Disclosure Agreements established during the solicitation period remain in effect throughout the contract period. The Contractor shall take reasonable steps to minimize risk of access by unauthorized personnel, to include storing documents in containers, desks or cabinets when not in use. Electronic sharing of documents is generally prohibited, however sharing the documents on a secured project web site may be allowed after Government approval of the specific provisions of the web site. 1.10 HOT-WORK PERMIT
A hot-work permit, DA Form 5383-R, must be submitted to the COR before using heat-producing equipment. Additional instructions are found on " Fort Detrick Fire Department Pre-Construction Conference Report" form, which also includes a requirement to attend a briefing conference and provide a signature acknowledging receipt of briefing. 1.11 NEGOTIATED MODIFICATIONS: (OCT 84)
Whenever profit is negotiated as an element of price for any modification to this contract with either prime or subcontractor, a reasonable profit shall be negotiated or determined by using the OCE Weighted Guidelines method outlined in EFARS 15.902. (Sugg. NAB 84-232) 1.12 PHOTOGRAPHS
Provide monthly, and within one month of the completion of work, digital photographs in JPEG file format showing the sequence and progress of work. Take a minimum of forty digital photographs prior to the seventh day of each month of views and points located by the Contracting Officer, in coordination with Garrison requirements and USAMRIID "For Official Use Only" restrictions for photographs taken on site. Submit a view location sketch indicating points of view. Submit with the monthly invoice two sets of digital photographs each set on a separate CD-R, cumulative of all photos to date. Photographs for each month shall be in a separate monthly directory and each file shall be named to indicate its location on the view location sketch. The view location sketch shall also be provided on the CD as digital file. All file names shall include a date designator. (CENAB-EN) 1.13 PARTNERING: (NOV 92)
In order to most effectively accomplish this contract, the Government is willing to form a cohesive partnership with the Contractor and its subcontractors. This partnership would strive to draw on the strengths of each organization in an effort to achieve a quality project done right the first time, within budget and on schedule. This partnership would be bilateral in make-up and participation will be totally voluntary. Any cost associated with effectuating this partnership will be agreed to by both parties and will be shared equally with no change in contract price. (CENAB-EN-DT)
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.14 A.
PERMITS The permits listed below have been obtained by the Government or are in the approval process and may require additional action by the Contractor to become complete. After final approvals by the respective state agencies are received, the Government will furnish approval letters and permits to the Contracting Officer who will furnish the Contractor all such permits before or during construction. The Contractor shall abide by all permit requirements. 1. Erosion and Sedimentation (E and S) Control Plan: The E and S control plans were submitted to the Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE). Permit number is: MDE No. - (TBD). Stormwater Management (SWM) Plan: The (SWM) Plans were submitted to the Maryland Department of the Environment. Permit number is: MDE No. - (TBD).
2.
1.15 A.
DEFENSE INFORMATION ASSURANCE CERTIFICATION AND ACCREDITATION PROCESS Provide completed documentation, using forms with required supplemental information, for work associated with Division 25 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION, and Division 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY for DoD Information Assurance Certification and Accreditation Process (DIACAP). The DoD process for identifying, implementing, validating, certifying, and managing IA capabilities and services, expressed as IA controls, and authorizing the operation of DoD ISs, including testing in a live environment, in accordance with statutory, Federal, and DoD requirements. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Department of Defense Information Assurance Certification and Accreditation Process (DIACAP). Provide DIACAP compliant components and completed forms documenting the level of compliance for each component. Acceptance of components not fully documented as compliant with the MAC II Vendor Controls are subject to case-by-case review and approval by the Government. MAC II Vendor Controls requirements are following this Section 01 00 00. ARCHITECT ENGINEER REFERENCES
B.
C. 1.16
With the exception of coded items on the submittal register and unless otherwise directed, all references to "AE" or "Architect-Engineer" in the contract documents shall be understood to mean "the Government". PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Applicable.
Ft. Detrick, MD
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Applicable. -- End of Section --
HOT-WORK PERMIT
For use of this form, see AR 420-90; the proponent agency is ACSIM
1. LOCATION
2. DATE
3. PERMIT NO.
4. TYPE OF WORK
5. START TIME
6. FINISH TIME
7.a. NAME OF PERSON RESPONSIBLE FOR HOT-WORK AT JOB SITE (Contractor/Government Employee)
7.b. SIGNATURE
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATIONS

CHECKLIST 8. Did Fire Department Inspector inspect site? 9. Are there procedures for Fire Department emergency notification? (Emergency No.) 10. Are combustibles in area noted? 11. Should combustibles be covered? (If yes, note in remarks) 12. Are proper extinguishers on hand? 13. Is wet-down necessary? (If yes, note in remarks) 14. Is smoking permissible at work sites? 15. Is continuous fire watch required? 16. Is Fire Department standby required? 17. Are other precautions required? (If yes, note in remarks) 18.a. FIRE DEPARTMENT INSPECTOR'S SIGNATURE 18.b. DATE CHECK ONE YES NO
PRECAUTIONS AFTER OPERATIONS

CHECKLIST 19.a. Was Fire Department notified after hot-work operation was completed? 19.b. Time: 20.a. Did Fire Department inspector inspect work site? 20.b. Time: 21. Are after work conditions safe? (If no, note in remarks) 22. Are heat producing devices safe if left at work site? 23.a. FIRE DEPARTMENT INSPECTOR'S SIGNATURE 23.b. DATE CHECK ONE YES NO
24. REMARKS
NOTE: PERMIT VALID ON DAY OF OPERATION AT ONE LOCATION ONLY
DA FORM 5383-R, SEP 92
EDITION OF JAN 85 IS OBSOLETE
USAPPC V1.00
USAMRIID Replacement MAC II Sensitive Controls

Control Number DCCT-1 Control Name Subject Area Compliance Testing Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm easure Most information systems Security Design A comprehensive set of procedures is throughout an organization and Configuration implemented that tests all patches, are unique. Patches, upgrades, and new AIS applications upgrades, and new prior to deployment. applications can behave quite differently when applied Are there documented procedures in across disparate systems. It place to test patches and upgrades in is paramount that steps be a test environment before implementing taken to maintain the them in the production environment. stability of the production IS. Proper compliance testing provides a reasonable level of assurance that system changes will achieve expected results. Description General Implementation Guidance 1. Each component shall implement a comprehensive set of test procedures that verify modifications to fielded systems will not be negatively impacted by the introduction of patches, upgrades, or modification. 2. Identify need for upgrade by monitoring appropriate channels such as vendor sites, mailing lists, third party sources, vulnerability scans or other means of detection. 3. Patches shall come from an approved trusted source and be tested and deployed in a timely manner. 4. Follow all prescribed installation procedures associated with the upgrade. Impact Code NIST SP 800-40, Medium Procedures for Handling Security Patches. August 2002 DoDI 8500.2, Information Assurance (IA) Implementation, para E3.2.4, E3.2.5.7, 06 February 2003
FT. Detrick, MD
DCFA-1
Functional Security Design Architecture and Configuration for AIS Applications
For AIS applications, a functional architecture that identifies the following has been developed and is maintained: - all external interfaces, the information being exchanged, and the protection mechanisms associated with each interface - user roles required for access control and the access privileges assigned to each role (See ECAN) - unique security requirements (e.g., encryption of key data elements at rest) - categories of sensitive information processed or stored by the AIS application, and their specific protection plans (e.g., Privacy Act, HIPAA) - restoration priority of subsystems, processes, or information (See COEF). An Interface document will need to be provided (main system with all interfaces), information gathered or transmitted, user roles for access (especially if a DB)
Information systems without proper architectural documentation may be difficult to troubleshoot in a timely manner. Additionally, continuity of operations is seriously degraded when system architecture is undocumented. Having complete and accurate functional documentation for an AIS application architecture ensures all unique aspects are captured.
1. Each Component shall identify standard and unique characteristics of their AIS applications to develop a functional architecture that identifies the following: a. All external interfaces, the information being exchanged, and the protection mechanisms associated with each interface; b. User roles required for access control and the access privileges assigned to each role (See ECAN); c. Unique security requirements (e.g., encryption of key data elements at rest); d. Categories of sensitive information processed or stored by the AIS application, and their specific protection plans (e.g., Privacy Act, HIPAA); and e. Restoration priority of subsystems, processes, or information (See COEF). 2. Components shall maintain and keep current their functional architecture documentation through disposal.
Medium DoDI 8500.2, Information Assurance (IA) Implementation, 06 February 2003
1 of 13
For Official Use Only

Control Number DCHW-1 Control Name Subject Area HW Baseline Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm easure Security Design A current and comprehensive baseline Organizations without a valid and Configuration inventory of all hardware (HW) (to hardware baseline inventory include manufacturer, type, model, are vulnerable to the physical location and network topology introduction of unauthorized or architecture) required to support hardware to their IS. enclave operations is maintained by Additional concerns include the Configuration Control Board (CCB) not knowing what HW to use to and as part of the SSAA. A backup copy rebuild a system after of the inventory is stored in a firecatastrophic loss. A current rated container or otherwise not hardware baseline enables collocated with the original. consistency within the environment and the A table listing all Hardware rebuilding of information associated with the system and a systems. system network diagram. Description General Implementation Guidance 1. Each Component shall develop a current and comprehensive baseline inventory of all hardware (HW). 2. At a minimum the baseline shall include manufacturer, type, model, physical location and network topology or architecture required to support enclave operations. 3. Physical and logical location of hardware shall be recorded. 4. The baseline shall be maintained by the Configuration Control Board (CCB) and as part of the system security documentation. 5. A current and comprehensive backup copy of the inventory shall be stored in a fire-rated container or otherwise not collocated with the original. 6. Regular updates to the HW baseline shall be managed through the CCB. 7. The HW baseline shall be validated during turnover of duties to include but not limited to: management and operations. 8. The HW baseline shall be validated not less then annually. 1. Non-repudiation is accomplished by employing various mechanisms or techniques (e.g., digital signatures, digital message receipts, and time stamps). 2. Each Component shall ensure proper nonrepudiation implementation on all systems. 3. Follow system specific and FIPS guidance for latest approved non-repudiation methods. 4. NIST FIPS 140-2 validated cryptography (e.g., DoD PKI class 3 or 4 token) shall be used to implement encryption (e.g., AES, 3DES, DES, Skipjack), key exchange (e.g., FIPS 171), digital signature (e.g., DSA, RSA, ECDSA), and hash (e.g., SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512). 5. Newer standards shall be applied as they become available. 1. User interface services (e.g., web pages) are physically or logically separated from data storage and management services (e.g., database management systems). 2. Separation may be accomplished through the use of different computers, different CPUs, different instances of the operating system, different network addresses, combinations of these methods, or other methods, as appropriate. Impact Code ANSI/EIA-649 High Configuration Management, National Consensus Standard for Configuration Management, July 1998
FT. Detrick, MD
DCNR-1
Nonrepudiation
Security Design NIST FIPS 140-2 validated cryptography and Configuration (e.g., DoD PKI class 3 or 4 token) is used to implement encryption (e.g., AES, 3DES, DES, Skipjack), key exchange (e.g., FIPS 171), digital signature (e.g., DSA, RSA, ECDSA), and hash (e.g., SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512). Newer standards should be applied as they become available. Does this system support Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) authentication?
Without the ability to ensure proof of sender identity as well as proof of delivery, organizations foster an environment of lawlessness where individuals can deny having processed data. NIST FIPS 140-2 validated cryptography provides a means to provide for nonrepudiation.
FIPS 140-2, Security Medium Requirements for Cryptographic Modules, 25 May 2001
DCPA-1
Partitioning Security Design User interface services (e.g., web the and Configuration services) are physically or logically Application separated from data storage and management services (e.g., database management systems). Separation may be accomplished through the use of different computers, different CPUs, different instances of the operating system, different network addresses, combinations of these methods, or other methods, as appropriate. Are the Interfaces to the system physically or logically separated?
Unauthorized users as well as malicious insiders who gain access to a particular service will find it relatively easy to gain access and exploit another service on the same hard drive. As part of the defense in depth methodology, services must be separated to provide an additional layer of protection between them.
DISA Web Server STIG, Low Version 5, 26 July 2004
2 of 13

Control Number DCPD-1 Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm easure Binary or machine executable public Public Domain Security Design Public domain software Software and Configuration domain software products and other products introduce an element Controls software products with limited or no of uncertainty to DoD warranty such as those commonly known information systems due to as freeware or shareware are not used their public and unsupported in DoD information systems unless they nature. Organizations should are necessary for mission not use public domain accomplishment and there are no software products unless alternative IT solutions available. required for a mission Such products are assessed for critical purpose and as information assurance impacts, and approved by the DAA. approved for use by the DAA. The assessment addresses the fact that such software products are difficult or impossible to review, repair, or extend, given that the Government does not have access to the original source code and there is no owner who could make such repairs on behalf of the Government. Does this system utilize freeware or shareware? DCPP-1 Ports, Security Design DoD information systems comply with Protocols, and Configuration DoD ports, protocols, and services and Services guidance. AIS applications, outsourced IT-based processes and platform IT identify the network ports, protocols, and services they plan to use as early in the life cycle as possible and notify hosting enclaves. Enclaves register all active ports, protocols, and services in accordance with DoD and DoD Component guidance. Open, undocumented, and unnecessary ports, protocols, and services increase the risk of data compromise and system unavailability. Adhering to DoD guidance minimizes the inherent risk associated with ports, protocols, and services. 1. DoD information systems shall comply with DoD ports, protocols, and services guidance. 2. A port, protocol, or service that does not explicitly support a business function shall be disabled or removed. 3. A list of ports, protocols, and services shall be documented and regularly updated and maintained through the CCB. 4. Organizations shall identify the network ports, protocols, and services they plan to use within AIS applications, outsourced IT-based processes and platform IT as early in the life cycle as possible and notify hosting enclaves. 5. Enclaves shall register all active ports, protocols, and services in accordance with DoD and DoD Component guidance. 6. Components shall monitor emerging threats and vulnerabilities to the ports, protocols, and services they use. 1. Libraries shall be controlled by the CCB. 2. Access to libraries shall be restricted to a minimum number of individuals. 3. A library access log shall be maintained, preferably automated. JTF-GNO PNP Update Medium Message, 14 March 2003 ASD/C3I Memorandum DoD Ports, Protocols and Services, 28 January 2003 DoD Ports, Protocols and Services Security Technical Guidance, 05 November 2005 Firewall Guidance Message. September 2002 DoDI 8551.1, Ports, Protocols, and Services Management (PPSM), 13 August 2004 http://iase.disa.mil/p orts/index.html DoDD O-8530.1, Computer Network Defense (CND), 08 MIL-STD-498, Software Medium Development and Documentation Control Name Subject Area Description General Implementation Guidance 1. Components shall establish local policy governing freeware or shareware. 2. The CCB shall ensure freeware or shareware applications are distributed and used as directed. 3. Such products shall be assessed for information assurance impacts, and approved for use by the DAA. 4. The assessment addresses the fact that such software products are difficult or impossible to review, repair, or extend. 5. If such software products are determined to be warranted, the organization shall limit the distribution of software to those that have a legitimate business need. 6. Periodic audits shall be conducted to ensure such software is being used for its intended business purpose. Impact Code Open Source Software Medium (OSS) in the Department of Defense (DoD) Memorandum., 28 May 2003 CJCSI 6510.01D, Information Assurance (IA) and Computer Network Defense (CND), Enclosure B and D, 15 June 2004
FT. Detrick, MD
DCSL-1
System Library Management Controls
Security Design System libraries are managed and and Configuration maintained to protect privileged programs and to prevent or minimize the introduction of unauthorized code.
Without appropriate library management controls, unauthorized code can intentionally or inadvertently be added to Is the source code for the application information systems. protected? Software versioning, access rights, etc. all work towards
3 of 13

Control Number DCSP-1 Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm easure The security support Security Security Design The security support structure is infrastructure of an Support and Configuration isolated by means of partitions, information system, Structure domains, etc., including control of Partitioning access to, and integrity of, hardware, particularly in the form of an enclave or application software, and firmware that perform security functions. The security suit isolated from the rest support structure maintains separate of the system, performs essential functions in execution domains (e.g., address spaces) for each executing process. guarding the confidentiality, integrity, and availability What is the security posture of this of the system. For this system? How is access being reason, the system is subject controlled? to compromise if the security support infrastructure is not appropriately isolated from the rest of the system and access granted only to appropriately authorized administrator personnel. Control Name Subject Area Description General Implementation Guidance 1. Review the system architecture documentation or other relevant functional architecture. 2. Ensure that the security support structure is isolated by means of partitions, domains, etc., including control of access to, and integrity of, hardware, software, and firmware that perform security functions. 3. Verify that the security support structure is maintaining a separate execution domain (e.g., address space) for each process that it is executing. Impact Code Medium DISA Network Infrastructure STIG, Version 5, Release 2, 29 September 2003 DISA Web Server STIG, Version 5, 26 July 2004
FT. Detrick, MD
DCSQ-1
Software Quality
Security Design Software quality requirements and and Configuration validation methods that are focused on the minimization of flawed or malformed software that can negatively impact integrity or availability (e.g., buffer overruns) are specified for all software development initiatives. Is there a software development life cycle, and if so, are there provisions for quality checks?
Poor software quality can introduce problematic behavior to DoD systems. Degradation to integrity or availability can negatively impact mission success. To promote software quality, strict requirements and validation methods must be established and followed.
1. Components engaged in software development initiatives shall develop local procedures and checklists to insure software quality. 2. Formal software test methodologies shall be adhered to during all phases of product lifecycle.
DCSW-1
SW Baseline
Security Design A current and comprehensive baseline and Configuration inventory of all software (SW) (to include manufacturer, type, and version and installation manuals and procedures) required to support DoD information system operations is maintained by the CCB and as part of the C&A documentation. A backup copy of the inventory is stored in a firerated container or otherwise not collocated with the original. Provide a list of all software that comprises this system.
Without a comprehensive software baseline, it may not be possible to identify unauthorized changes to system software or to successfully rebuild network equipment after facility loss. Maintaining a SW baseline allows for periodic software consistency checks and dependable system rebuilds.
1. Each Component shall develop a current and comprehensive baseline inventory of all software (SW). 2. At a minimum the baseline shall include manufacturer, type, model, physical location and network topology or architecture required to support enclave operations. 3. Physical and logical location of software shall be recorded. 4. The baseline shall be maintained by the Configuration Control Board (CCB) and as part of the system security documentation. 5. A current and comprehensive backup copy of the inventory shall be stored in a fire-rated container or otherwise not collocated with the original. 6. Regular updates to the SW baseline shall be managed through the CCB. 7. The SW baseline shall be validated during turnover of duties to include but not limited to: management and operations. 8. The SW baseline shall be validated not less then annually.
Medium CJCSI 6510.01D, Information Assurance (IA) and Computer Network Defense (CND), 15 June 2004 MIL-STD-498, Software Development and Documentation IEEE 12207.0, Industry Implementation of International Standard ISO/IEC 12207: 1995 (ISO/IEC 12207)) Standard for Information Technology Software Life Cycle Processes, 01 March ANSI/EIA-649 High Configuration Management, National Consensus Standard for Configuration Management, July 1998
4 of 13

Control Number EBRP-1 Control Name Subject Area Remote Access Enclave Boundary for Defense Privileged Functions Description Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm easure Remote access for privileged functions Remote access for privileged functions is especially is discouraged, is permitted only for dangerous due to the compelling operational needs, and is strictly controlled. In addition to transmission of administer usernames and passwords over EBRU-1, sessions employ security measures such as a VPN with blocking non-DoD media and devices. Compromised privileged mode enabled. A complete audit trail of each remote session is recorded, credentials can cause network and the USAMRIID IAM/IAO reviews the denial of service and of log for every remote session. unauthorized use of sensitive DoD information. Proper Ensure that no remote access is security precautions such as necessary or given correct use of VPN and auditing minimize the risk of network compromise and attack. General Implementation Guidance 1. If needed for a compelling operational need, remote access for privileged functions shall be used only with VPN. 2. Auditing of each remote VPN session shall be enabled. 3. The USAMRIID IAM/IAO shall review the audit log for every remote session. 4. Refer to DoD or other applicable guidance for proper connection requirements and procedures. Impact Code CJCSM 6510.01, High Defense-in-Depth: Information Assurance (IA) and Computer Network Defense (CND), 10 August 2004 DISA Network Infrastructure STIG, Version 6 Draft, 29 October 2004 DISA Secure Remote Computing STIG, Version 1, Release 1, 14 February 2003 DISA Enclave Security STIG, Version 2, Release 1, 01 July 2004
FT. Detrick, MD
EBRU-1
Remote Access Enclave Boundary for User Defense Functions
All remote access to DoD information systems, to include telework access, is mediated through a managed access control point, such as a remote access server in a DMZ. Remote access always uses encryption to protect the confidentiality of the session. The session-level encryption equals or exceeds the robustness established in ECCT. Authenticators are restricted to those that offer strong protection against spoofing. Information regarding remote access mechanisms (e.g., Internet address, dial-up connection telephone number) is protected. Ensure that no remote access is necessary or given
Remote access allows users to interact with enclave resources from afar. This convenience introduces inherent risks such as spoofing and brute force attacks. Proper security precautions such as a properly configured remote access server in a DMZ along with approved encryption techniques minimize the chance of network compromise and attack.
1. All remote access connections shall authentic network users and encrypt transmitted data by using approved access controls and cryptographic means. 2. Components shall establish a process for managing remote access user accounts to include prompt account removal or disablement as warranted. 3. Components shall take steps to ensure remote access numbers or Internet addresses are secure. 4. Refer to DoD or other applicable guidance for proper connection requirements and procedures.
High CJCSM 6510.01, Defense-in-Depth: Information Assurance (IA) and Computer Network Defense (CND), 10 August 2004 DISA Network Infrastructure STIG, Version 6 Draft, 29 October 2004 DISA Secure Remote Computing STIG, Version 1, Release 1, 14 February 2003 Public Law 106-346, Section 359, Attachment 1, Memorandum to Executive Departments and Agencies, Congressional Federal Telework Mandate 2001, 23 October 2000 DISA Enclave Security STIG, Version 2, Release 1, 01 July 2004 UNIX STIG, Version 4, Release 4, 15 September 2003
5 of 13

Control Number ECAR-2 Control Name Subject Area Description Audit Record Enclave Computing Audit records include: Content Environment User ID. Sensitive Successful and unsuccessful Systems attempts to access security files. Date and time of the event. Type of event. Success or failure of event. Successful and unsuccessful logons. Denial of access resulting from excessive number of logon attempts. Blocking or blacklisting a user ID, terminal or access port and the reason for the action. Activities that might modify, bypass, or negate safeguards controlled by the system. Ensure the system meets the auditing requirements set forth in the appropriate STIGS Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm easure Insufficient security related information recorded in the audit trails cannot support system forensics effectively and efficiently. This implementation guide is aimed to help system administrators implement the system audit mechanisms properly to provide effective monitoring and detection of the security problems, and security fixes can be implemented in a timely manner. General Implementation Guidance 1. The system administrator shall select audit events against security files of individual system components in accordance with DISA STIGs related to operating system, database, and application, such as excessive number of logon attempt; blocking or blacklisting a user ID; and bypassing or negating safeguards controlled by the system. 2. The system administrator shall configure each audit event to record sufficient information in the audit trails such as date/time of the event, user ID, source, target, type of event, and success/failure. 3. If the system does not provide the capability of recording DOD required security events, the system administrator shall identify and install a DOD approved 3rd party product and configure it in accordance with DISA STIGs and vendor documentation for auditing. 4. The system administrator shall test the auditing capability to ensure that the audit trails record required security events; each event contains sufficient information to support system forensics; and the auditing functions do not affect system operations. Impact Code CJCSI 6510.01D, Medium Information Assurance (IA) and Computer Network Defense (CND), 15 June 2004 CJCSM 6510.01, Defense-in-Depth: Information Assurance (IA) and Computer Network Defense (CND), 10 August 2004 DISA Windows NT Security Checklist, 10 December 2004 DISA Windows 2003 Security Checklist (draft), 10 December 2004 DISA Unix STIG, 15 September 2003 DISA UNISYS STIG, 22 July 2003 DISA Solaris Security Checklist, 20 January 2004 DISA Database STIG, 24 July 2004 DOD OC/390 RACF Checklist October 2004 DOD OC/390 ACF2 Checklist October 2004 DOD OC/390 TSS Checklist October 2004 NSA Microsoft SQL Server Guides, 02
FT. Detrick, MD
6 of 13

Control Number ECAT-2 Control Name Subject Area Audit Trail, Enclave Computing Monitoring, Environment Analysis and Reporting Description An automated, continuous on-line monitoring and audit trail creation capability is deployed with the capability to immediately alert personnel of any unusual or inappropriate activity with potential IA implications, and with a user configurable capability to automatically disable the system if serious IA violations are detected. If an intrusion were to happen, is there a mechanism to alert personnel? Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm easure Lack of automated, continuous on-line monitoring and audit capability would cause the delay of detection of security violations, and further damage to the system would not be prevented in a timely manner. This implementation guide is aimed to help network administrators implement an automated auditing tool that can provide continuous online monitoring and audit report generation to provide effective and efficient detection of minor and/or major security violations that affect critical system operations. General Implementation Guidance Impact Code
FT. Detrick, MD
CJCSI 6510.01D, 1. The system engineering team (consisting of Medium Information Assurance project manager, system engineer, network (IA) and Computer administrator, security engineer, IA personnel) Network Defense (CND), shall identify a list of DOD approved automated, 15 June 2004 continuous on-line monitoring tools (e.g. CJCSM 6510.01, intrusion detection system). Defense-in-Depth: 2. The system project management team shall Information Assurance perform an analysis of advantages and disadvantages of individual monitoring tools based (IA) and Computer on tool functions, system environment, and fund. Network Defense (CND), 3. The system project management team shall select 10 August 2004 an automated, continuous on-line monitoring tool DISA Network Infrastructure STIG, 29 that is the best suitable to the system environment. September 2003 4. The network administrator shall install the NIST SP 800-31, selected automated, continuous on-line monitoring Intrusion Detection tool in a lab environment and configure the tool Systems, November 2001 properly in accordance with vendor security NIST SP 800-36, Guide checklists and/or industry best practices. to Selecting 5. The network administrator shall test the tool, Information Security at a minimum, the following capabilities: Products, October 2003 Recording and monitoring security events on real-time Alerting personnel immediately of any unusual or inappropriate security activity Disabling the system if serious IA violations are detected based on detection signatures. 6. The network administrator shall determine the options of alerting via pager, email, or cell phone and 7. If the tool works as planned, the network administrator shall implement the tool into the system in th
7 of 13

Control Number ECCD-2 Control Name Subject Area Changes to Data Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm easure Lack of proper access Enclave Computing Access control mechanisms exist to controls would allow Environment ensure that data is accessed and unauthorized users to gain changed only by authorized personnel. Access and changes to the data are access to the system. This would impact the integrity, recorded in transaction logs that are reviewed periodically or immediately confidentiality, and upon system security events. Users are availability of the system notified of time and date of the last and its data. This change in data content. implementation guide is aimed to help system administrators Ensure the system has adequate access implement proper access controls that meet or exceed the controls through user applicable STIGS privileges, file permissions, auditing, and user notification. Description General Implementation Guidance Impact Code
FT. Detrick, MD
ECDC-1
Data Change Controls
Enclave Computing Transaction-based systems (e.g., Environment database management systems, transaction processing systems) implement transaction roll-back and transaction journaling, or technical equivalents. Ensure transaction handling meets or exceeds applicable STIGS
CJCSI 6510.01D, 1. The system, database, and/or application High Information Assurance administrators shall create user accounts only (IA) and Computer upon approval of System Access Request by Network Defense (CND), authorized personnel (e.g., user 15 June 2004 manager/supervisor/USAMRIID IAM/IAO). CJCSM 6510.01, 2. The system, database, and/or application Defense-in-Depth: administrators shall determine user privileges Information Assurance required to perform their job functions. 3. The system, database, and/or application (IA) and Computer administrators shall configure the system software Network Defense (CND), (e.g., operating system, database, and 10 August 2004 application) to which users have access to read or DISA Windows NT modify data to perform job functions in accordance Security Checklist, 10 with DISA STIGs applicable to the software based December 2004 on the least privileges and need to know. DISA Windows 2003 4. The administrators shall configure the audit Security Checklist trails and transaction logs to capture user access (draft), 10 December to the software/application. 2004 5. The administrators shall configure the system DISA Unix STIG, 15 to display and generate audit reports for regular September 2003 reviews or immediate reviews upon system security DISA UNISYS STIG, 22 events. July 2003 6. The system administrator shall research and DISA Solaris Security Checklist, 20 January determine if the system software provides the 2004 capability of notifying users of time and date of the last change in data content and perform the followi a. If the system provides the capability, the system administrator shall enable the capability. DISA Database STIG, b. If the system does not provide the capability, Version 7, Release 1, the administrators shall implement other means (e.g., 7. The system administrator shall generate and review the audit trails and the transaction logs on a regu 29 October 2004 DOD OC/390 RACF Checklist October 2004 DOD OC/390 ACF2 Checklist October 2004 DOD OC/390 TSS Checklist October 2004 NSA Microsoft SQL Without implementing 1. The database administrator shall identify and DISA Database STIG, Medium transaction roll-back and determine if the database systems (e.g., Oracle, Version 7, Release 1, journaling, unauthorized or Microsoft SQL Server) implemented into the system 29 October 2004 unintentional modification or provide transaction capabilities (e.g., NSA Microsoft SQL destruction of data stored in transaction roll back and transaction journaling). Server Guides, 02 the database would cause the 2. If the database systems provide the capability October 2003 loss of critical data. This of transaction roll back and journaling, the NSA Oracle Database implementation guide is aimed database administrator shall enable the capability Server Guides, 02 to help database in order to log database updates to either files October 2003 administrators ensure the or disk partition according to DISA Database STIG Center for Internet recovery of database data and organization specific database guides. Security Database that was modified or deleted 3. If the database systems do not provide the Security Checklist, 06 unintentionally or by transaction roll back and journaling or technical April 2005 unauthorized users. equivalent, the database administrator shall: Vendor Security Identify a DoD approved 3rd party product that Administration Guide, provides transaction roll back and journaling or (Refer to if no DSSA/NSA/NIST/USG technical equivalent Configure the product and test it in a lab guidance is available) environment to ensure it functions properly Install the product on the database system in
8 of 13

Control Number ECLO-1 Control Name Subject Area Logon Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm easure Enclave Computing Successive logon attempts are Without proper user account Environment controlled using one or more of the lockout policies in place, following: unauthorized users could Access is denied after multiple continually attempt to gain unsuccessful logon attempts. system access and not be The number of access attempts in a noticed by the system given period is limited. administrator. This A time-delay control system is implementation guide is aimed employed. If the system allows for to help system administrators multiple logon sessions for each user implement the account lock ID, the system provides a capability policy and a limited number to control the number of logon of logon sessions for each sessions. user ID. Ensure logons are controlled and monitored and that the systems meets or exceeds applicable STIGS Description General Implementation Guidance 1. The system administrator shall configure the account policy of the operating system, database, and/or application that authenticates users to access the system. For example, for Windows operating system, the User Account Lockout Policy in the User Manager can be set as follows: Account lockout duration: 0 Account lockout threshold: 3 bad login attempts Reset account lockout counter after: 60 minutes 2. For the implementation of a number of logon sessions for the same user ID, a. If the system software (e.g., Novell Netware) provides the capability of restricting a number of logon sessions, the system administrator shall configure the feature to the limited number (e.g., one or two). b. If the system software does not provide the capability of restricting a number of logon sessions, the system administrator shall use an approved method (e.g., scripts) that restricts simultaneous login sessions for the same user ID. Otherwise, the system administrator shall review the audit trails regularly to monitor and detect simultaneous logons with the same user ID. Impact Code Medium CJCSI 6510.01D, Information Assurance (IA) and Computer Network Defense (CND), 15 June 2004 CJCSM 6510.01, Defense-in-Depth: Information Assurance (IA) and Computer Network Defense (CND), 10 August 2004 DISA Windows NT Security Checklist, 10 December 2004 DISA Windows 2003 Security Checklist (draft), 10 December 2004 DISA Unix STIG, 15 September 2003 DISA Unisys STIG, 22 July 2003 DOD Database STIG, 24 July 2004 NSA Microsoft SQL Server Guides, 02 October 2003 NSA Oracle Database Server Guides, 02 October 2003 NSA Guide to Securing Windows 2000 Policy Toolsets, Chapter 3, 05 March 2003 NSA Guide to Securing
FT. Detrick, MD
9 of 13

Control Number ECLP-1 Control Name Subject Area Least Privilege Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm easure Enclave Computing Access procedures enforce the Unauthorized users could gain Environment principles of separation of duties and access to critical classified "least privilege." Access to and/or sensitive data through privileged accounts is limited to the improperly granted privileged users. Use of privileged privileges. This could accounts is limited to privileged result in unauthorized functions; that is, privileged users disclosure, modification, and use non-privileged accounts for all destruction of classified and non-privileged functions. This control sensitive information. This is in addition to an appropriate implementation guide is aimed security clearance and need-to-know to help system administrators authorization. implement proper access privileges based on user job Ensure the system conforms to the functions and need to know policy of least privilege and maintain privileged accounts securely. Description General Implementation Guidance Impact Code
FT. Detrick, MD
ECML-1
Marking and Labeling
Enclave Computing Information and DoD information Environment systems that store, process, transit, or display data in any form or format that is not approved for public release comply with all requirements for marking and labeling contained in policy and guidance documents such as DoD 5200.1R. Markings and labels clearly reflect the classification or sensitivity level, if applicable, and any special dissemination, handling, or distribution instructions. Ensure system labels data or information at the appropriate classification level
High 1. The Information Assurance Manager (IAM) shall CJCSI 6510.01D, determine the number of roles/groups that are Information Assurance associated with specific functions required for (IA) and Computer the system. Network Defense (CND), 2. The USAMRIID IAM shall determine the names of 15 June 2004 the specific roles/groups (e.g., Engineering, IA, CJCSM 6510.01, Configuration Management) and assign users to Defense-in-Depth: specific groups based on users job functions. Information Assurance 3. The system administrator shall grant least (IA) and Computer privileges to individual users within the group Network Defense (CND), (e.g., read, write, execute) only based on user 10 August 2004 job functions and need to know and upon the DISA Windows NT completion of background investigation. Security Checklist, 10 4. The system administrator shall grant access to December 2004 privileged accounts (e.g., root, administrator) DISA Unix STIG, only to a limited number of privileged users Version 4, Release 4, (e.g., system administrator, database 15 September 2003 administrator, application administrator). DISA Application 5. The system administrator shall assign Security Checklist, individual unique user accounts (e.g., johndoe1) Version 2, Release 1.5. to users with privileged functions, which must be 28 January 2005 used only to perform non-privileged functions. NSA Guide to Securing 6. The system administrator shall review audit Windows XP, Chapters 2 trails regularly to ensure that privileged users use the non-privileged accounts to perform non-privilege and 4, 22 October 2004 7. The system administrator shall create non-privileged accounts for privileged users to perform non-priv NSA Microsoft SQL Server Guides, 02 October 2003 NSA Oracle Database Server Guides, 02 October 2003 NSA Guide to Securing Windows 2000 Policy Toolsets, 05 March 2003 DoD 5200.1R, High Without proper markings and 1. The information owner shall identify and Information Security labels, classified and/or determine if the system stores, processes, transits, or displays data in any form or format, Program, Chapter 5, sensitive information could which is not approved for public release. Marking, January 1997 not be handled properly. 2. If the system has data not approved for public CJCSM 6510.01, This could result in Defense-in-Depth: unauthorized disclosure, release, the information owner shall perform the Information Assurance modification, or destruction following prior to marking classification levels of data. This implementation in accordance with DoD 5200.1R: (IA) and Computer Network Defense (CND), guide is aimed to help a. Determine the overall classification of the 10 August 2004 information owners implement document. proper markings and labels b. Identify specific classified information and Organizations labeling and marking that reflect the its level of classification within the document classification or sensitivity c. Identify information that should be included policies and/or level of information. in the marking and labeling process guidelines d. Determine the type of standard markings and labeling format that is specified in DoD 5200.1R and/or organizations classification labeling guide. e. Determine the specific pages where markings are displayed (e.g., front page, outside of back cover) f. Apply the labels and markings on the classified and sensitive documents as determined.
10 of 13

Control Number ECPA-1 Control Name Subject Area Privileged Account Control Description Enclave Computing All privileged user accounts are Environment established and administered in accordance with a role-based access scheme that organizes all system and network privileges into roles (e.g., key management, network, system administration, database administration, web-administration). The USAMRIID IAM tracks privileged role assignments. self explanatory Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm easure An organizations network and the integrity of stored information are at risk if the control of actions, functions, applications and operations of legitimate users are not managed with a role-based access scheme. The unnecessary allocation and use of system privileges significantly increases the vulnerability of systems. Role-based systems are designed to minimize the potential for inside security violations by providing greater control over users' access to information and resources. Also, by assigning individuals to predefined roles, the administrative process of establishing privileges is streamlined and management time for reviewing privilege assignments is reduced. General Implementation Guidance 1. An analysis of how an organization operates shall be accomplished for the basis of defining user roles and privileges. 2. Systems shall employ a role-based access scheme that enforces separation of duties and network privileges. 3. Privileged user accounts (administrators, root/super users on UNIX, routers and LAN servers, SANs, etc) shall be limited to the absolute minimum number needed to manage the system, and the USAMRIID IAM shall document all privileged role assignments. 4. Privileged user accounts shall be limited to the minimum number of privileges needed to perform their assigned duties. 5. Where technically possible, privileged users should initially log on with a personal user ID and only be granted privileged access by way of group assignment. 6. Privileged and guest accounts shall be renamed from any default. Impact Code CJCSM 6510. 01, High Defense-in-Depth: Information Assurance (IA) and Computer Network Defense (CND), 25 March 2003 NSA Guide to Securing Windows 2000 Policy Toolsets, 05 March 2003 NSA Guide to Securing Windows XP, 22 October 2004 DISA Unix STIG, Version 4, Release 4, 15 September 2003 DISA UNISYS STIG, 22 July 2003 NSA Windows 2000 Security Recommendations Guide 16 January 2004 NSA Windows NT Security Recommendations Guide 18 September 2001 DISA Database STIG, Version 7, Release 1, 29 October 2004 http://csrc.nist.gov/rb ac/
FT. Detrick, MD
ECSC-1
Enclave Computing For Enclaves and AIS applications, all The computer hardware and Security Configuration Environment DoD security configuration or software systems used within implementation guides have been the DOD have varying amounts Compliance applied. of risks. Security configuration or Self explanatory implementation guides are created to minimize the security risks associated with the hardware or software products.
1. All IA and IA-enabled applications deployed within the enclave (C&A boundary) shall be configured or implemented according to the information within applicable security guides (e.g., STIGs, SNAC Guides). 2. If security guides are not available for deployed IA products, waivers shall be obtained and commercial best practices shall be applied.
High http://www.nsa.gov/snac / National Security Agency, Systems and Network Attack Center Security and Configuration Guides http://csrc.nist.gov/pc ig/ Defense Information Systems Agency, STIGs http://csrc.nist.gov/pc ig/ppsp.html Public and Private Security Practices
11 of 13

Control Number ECWM-1 Control Name Subject Area Warning Message Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm easure Enclave Computing All users are warned that they are The use of warning banners on Environment entering a Government information computers and networks system, and are provided with provides legal notice to appropriate privacy and security anyone accessing them that notices to include statements they are using a U.S. informing them that they are subject Government system that is to monitoring, recording and auditing. subject to monitoring, recording, and auditing. Ensure the latest DoD Warning Banner Users also being notified of is display prior to logging into the possible sanctions, such as system loss of privileges or even prosecution, if they misuse or access the network without authorization help mitigate malicious activity. Description General Implementation Guidance 1. A warning banner shall be displayed after a successful log-on and this includes banners for internal and local logins as well as external logins. 2. The following elements shall be included in the warning message: a. use of the application constitutes the users consent to monitoring, b. use of the application is limited to official US Government business only, c. unauthorized use is subject to criminal prosecution, and d. notice that this is a DOD system. Impact Code CJCSM 6510.10, Low Defense-In-Depth: Information Assurance (IA) and Computer Network Defense (CND), 15 March 2002 NIST SP 800-18, Guide for Developing Security Plans for Information Technology Systems, December 1998 DISA Instruction 630230-19, Security Requirements for Automated Information Systems, 09 July 1996 DISA Computer Services Security Handbook, Version 3, 01 December 2000 DISA Defense Switched Network STIG, Version 1, Release 1, 12 March 2003 DISA Network Unattended workstations and Database STIG, Unless there is an overriding 1. Unless there is an overriding technical or Medium servers are at risk to technical or operational problem, Version 7, Release 1, operational problem, workstation screen-lock unauthorized access to workstation screen-lock functionality functionality shall be associated with each 29 October 2004 sensitive and classified is associated with each workstation. workstation. Secure Remote When activated, the screen-lock information if there is not a 2. When activated, the screen-lock function shall Computing STIG, Version function places an unclassified screen-lock function in place an unclassified pattern onto the entire 1, Release 1, 14 pattern onto the entire screen of the place. screen of the workstation. This functionality February 2003 workstation, totally hiding what was shall totally hide what was previously visible on Department of previously visible on the screen. Such the screen. Transportation Solaris a capability is enabled either by 3. Such a capability shall be enabled either by Secure Baseline explicit user action or a specified explicit user action or a specified period of Configuration period of workstation inactivity workstation inactivity (e.g., 15 minutes) in Standards, 20 January (e.g., 15 minutes). Once the accordance with agency standard operating 2004) workstation screen-lock software is UNIX STIG, Version 4, procedures. activated, access to the workstation 4. Once the workstation screen-lock software is Release 4, 15 September requires knowledge of a unique activated, access to the workstation shall require 2003 authenticator. A screen lock function knowledge of a unique authenticator. Windows NT STIG, is not considered a substitute for 5. A screen lock function shall not be considered Version 4, Release 2, logging out (unless a mechanism a substitute for logging out (unless a mechanism 18 September 2001 actually logs out the user when the actually logs out the user when the user idle time Addendum to Windows user idle time is exceeded). is exceeded). NT STIG, Version 3, Release 1, 24 November Ensure the system employs a screen 2002 lock feature that will activate within Windows XP STIG 10 minutes of in-activity Version 1, Release 8, 03 December 2002 Windows NT/XP/2000 Addendum Version 4, Release 1 STIG, 26 February 2004 Department of Transportation Windows 2000 Secure Baseline Configuration Standards, Section 1,
FT. Detrick, MD
PESL-1
Screen Lock
Physical and Environmental
12 of 13

Control Number Control Name Subject Area Description Threat/Vulnerability/Counterm General Implementation Guidance easure Impact Code
FT. Detrick, MD
Acronyms: AIS IS IA IAM DAA CCB DoD IT STIG IAO DMZ C&A VPN SW HW Automated Information System Information System Information Assurance Information Assurance Manager Designated Approving Authority Configuration Control Board Department of Defense Information Technology Security Technical Implementation Guidelines Information Assurance Office DeMilitarized Zone Certification and Accreditation Virtual Private Network Software Hardware
13 of 13
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 05 00 JOB CONDITIONS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL LAYOUT OF WORK
LAYOUT OF WORK: The Contractor shall layout its work from Government established base lines and bench marks indicated on the drawings, and shall be responsible for all measurements in connection with the layout. The Contractor shall furnish, at his own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools, materials, and labor required to lay out any part of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for executing the work to the lines and grades that may be established or indicated by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall also be responsible for maintaining and preserving all stakes and other marks established by the Contracting Officer until authorized to remove them. If such marks are destroyed by the Contractor or through its negligence before their removal is authorized, the Contracting Officer may replace them and deduct the expense of the replacement from any amounts due or to become due the Contractor. 1.2 PHYSICAL DATA
Data and information furnished or referred to below is for the Contractor's information. The Government shall not be responsible for any interpretation or conclusion drawn from the data or information by the Contractor. 1.2.1 Transportation Facilities
Fort Detrick Maryland's main post is north and contiguous to the city of Frederick, with access via city streets and county roads. The Frederick by-pass, U.S. Route 15, connects with Interstate 70 and 270, U.S. Routes 40, 15, 340 and Md. Route 26 and provides easy access to West Seventh Street approximately one-half mile south of the main gate of Fort Detrick, to Opossumtown Pike which serves as access to the East Coast Telecommunications Center area and to Rosemont Avenue (West 4th Street) which serves the west gate of the installation. Montevue Lane and Rocky Springs Road connect the main post with Area "B". There is no direct rail access. 1.2.2 Explorations
The physical conditions indicated on the drawings and in the specifications are the result of site investigations by surveys and borings. Foundation exploration logs are available for inspection in the Baltimore District, Corps of Engineers, Geotechnical Engineering Branch, Room 9250, City Crescent Building, 10 South Howard Street, Baltimore, Maryland. Soils and rock samples are also available for inspection; however, prospective bidders are required to call (410) 962-4045 between the hours of 9:00 a.m. and 3:30 p.m., Monday through Friday (excluding Federal Holidays), a minimum of 24 hours in advance to arrange a time and date for the inspection of the samples.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.3 1.3.1 A.
UTILITIES Availability of Utilities Including Lavatory Facilities Prior to June 30, 2011: 1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all utilities he may require during the entire life of the contract. He shall make his own investigation and determinations as to the availability and adequacy of utilities for his use for construction purposes and domestic consumption. He shall install and maintain all necessary supply lines, connections, piping, and meters if required, but only at such locations and in such manner as approved by the Contracting Officer. Before final acceptance of work under this contract, all temporary supply lines, connections and piping installed by the Contractor shall be removed by him in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer. Utility Connections shall be approved by USAG Directorate of Installation Services (DIS). Backflow prevention devices for connections to Water Systems shall be approved by DIS.
2.
B.
After June 30, 2011: Starting on 30 June 2011, the Central Utility Plant (CUP) will be operating at sufficient capacity and will be fully connected to provide permanent steam, chilled water and electricity to this facility. As of this date, and for the remainder of the construction duration, the government shall purchase steam, chilled water and electricity from the CUP as required for the contractor's use in accordance with a utilities phase-in plan agreed between the government and the contractor at that time. Interruption of Utilities: No utility services shall be interrupted by the Contractor to make connections, to relocate, or for any purpose without approval of the Contracting Officer. Request for permission to shut down utility services shall be submitted in writing to the Contracting Officer not less than 17 calendar days prior to proposed date of interruption. The request shall give the following information: Nature of Utility (Gas, L.P. or H.P., Water, Etc.) Size of line and location of shutoff. Buildings and services affected. Hours and date of shutoff. Estimated length of time service will be interrupted. Services will not be shut off until receipt of approval of the proposed hours and date from the Contracting Officer. Shutoffs which will cause interruption of Government work operations as determined by the Contracting Officer shall be accomplished during regular non-work hours or on non-work days of the Using Agency without any additional cost to the Government.
1.3.2 A.
B.
C. D. E. F. G. H.
I.
Ft. Detrick, MD
J.
Operation of valves on water mains will be by Government personnel. Where shutoff of water lines interrupts service to fire hydrants or fire sprinkler systems, the Contractor shall arrange his operations and have sufficient material and personnel available to complete the work without undue delay or to restore service without delay in event of emergency. Flow in gas mains which have been shut off shall not be restored until the Government inspector and/or Washington Gas has determined that all items serviced by the gas line have been shut off. Buildings 1408, 1412, and 1425 are mission critical to the Government. Contractor activities shall not impact nor delay each Building's operations. Additional mission critical buildings will be determined by the COR. LSS sewer lines are a biohazard sewer and the Contractor shall exercise care while working adjacent to active lines and the new USAMRIID Sterilization Plant. Alterations to Utilities: (AUG 1968)
K.
L.
M.
1.3.3
Where changes and relocations of utility lines are noted to be performed by others, the Contractor shall give the Contracting Officer in writing at least thirty calendar days advance notice of the time that the change or relocation is required. Project schedule as specified in Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE shall identify activities of work performed by others for coordination of work under this project. Any modification to existing or relocated lines required as a result of the Contractor's method of operation shall be made wholly at the Contractor's expense and no additional time will be allowed for delays incurred by such modifications. (CENAB) 1.3.4 Utility Markings:
The Contractor shall notify the COR a minimum of 15 calendar days prior to any excavation. The COR will contact the Installation/DIS and the One-Call Service to request utility location markings. The Contractor will be required to have a representative present while the utilities are being marked. The Contractor shall not proceed with any excavation until all utilities, including abandoned utilities, have been marked to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. Prior to requesting the marking of utilities, the Contractor shall stake out proposed excavations and limits of work with white lines ("White Lining"). It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all permits (excavation or otherwise, including DPW permits) are current and up-to-date without expiration. In addition to the above requirements the Contractor shall: A. Visually survey and verify that all utility markings are consistent with existing appurtenances such as manholes, valve boxes, poles, pedestals, pad-mounted devices, gas meters, etc. prior to any excavation. Hand dig test holes to verify the depth and location of all utilities prior to any mechanical excavation within the limits of work. Other non-damaging methods for utility verification may be considered subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Also, verify that any abandoned utilities are not active.
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
C.
Preserve all utility markings for the duration of the project to the furthest extent possible. When excavation is performed within 2 feet of any utility line, a non-damaging method of excavation shall be used. The non-damaging method shall be hand digging. Other non-damaging methods, such as, soft digging, vacuum excavation, pneumatic hand tools, may be considered subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Regardless of the type of excavation, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of 72 hours prior to any excavation activity. Failure to notify the Contracting Officer can result in the issuance of a "Stop Work" order, which shall not be justification for contract delay or time extension. The Government reserves the right to have personnel present on site during any type of excavation. The Contractor's Quality Control System Manager shall ensure that all excavation requirements herein are met at the time of the preparatory phase of quality control, and that the excavation procedures are reviewed during the preparatory phase meeting. This preparatory phase of control shall also establish and document contingency plans and actions to be followed in the event that existing utilities are damaged or interrupted. Locations of shut off or isolation devices along with other safety features shall be established and their operation reviewed. Any work other than excavation in the vicinity of a utility, that could damage or interrupt a utility, such as, exterior or interior work near transformers, power lines, poles, above ground gas lines, gas meters, etc., shall be done with extreme care. The Contractor shall specifically note during the preparatory phase of quality control, the construction techniques to be used to preclude damaging or interrupting any utility. This preparatory phase of control shall also establish and document contingency plans and actions to be followed in the event that existing utilities are damaged or interrupted. Locations of shut off or isolation devices along with other safety features shall be established and their operation reviewed. The Contractor shall complete a risk assessment, using the attached checklist, at least one week prior to the start of any excavation or other work in the vicinity of a utility. The risk assessment shall be submitted for government approval prior to any excavation or other work in the vicinity of a utility. A risk assessment shall be completed for each definable feature of work encountering utilities and shall include all utilities anticipated to be encountered. DISPOSAL OF EXISTING MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT:
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.4
All removed, dismantled or demolished material and/or equipment including rubble, scrap and debris not specified or indicated to be Government salvaged, reinstalled under this contract or otherwise retained for disposal on Government land will become the property of the Contractor and shall be promptly removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor at his own expense and responsibility. The Contractor shall provide a letter from the location where they will be disposing of the soil to state that they agree to accept it. 1.5 COMPLIANCE WITH POST/BASE REGULATIONS:
The site of the work is on a military reservation and all rules and Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 05 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
regulations issued by the Commanding Officer covering general safety, security, sanitary requirements, pollution control, traffic regulations and parking, shall be observed by the Contractor. Information regarding these requirements may be obtained by contacting the Contracting Officer, who will provide such information or assist in obtaining same from appropriate authorities. 1.6 MAINTENANCE OF ACCESS:
The Contractor shall not block passage through sidewalks, roads or other entranceways or access to adjacent buildings or structures during performance of work under this contract. 1.7 1.7.1 PROTECTION OF GOVERNMENT PROPERTY AND PERSONNEL: Protection of Equipment
All existing Government owned equipment within the work area shall be protected by the Contractor from damage caused by construction operations. As a minimum, the Contractor shall cover non-Contractor owned equipment in the work area with dust barriers and protect such items from any damage due to dust, vibration, water, heat or other conditions resulting from construction activities. Existing work damaged by construction operations shall be promptly repaired by the Contractor at his own expense. 1.7.2 Protection of Personnel
The Contractor shall protect personnel by installing safety rails and/or barricades as applicable to prevent injury from unauthorized entry of personnel into work areas. Warning signs shall be erected as necessary to indicate Construction areas or hazardous zones. Work shall proceed in such manner as to prevent the undue spread of dust and flying particles. 1.7.3 Measures to Prevent Damage/Injury
The Contractor shall take such additional measures as may be directed by the Contracting Officer to prevent damage or injury to Government property or personnel. 1.8 STREET CLOSINGS:
When operations in connection with contract work necessitate the closing of streets, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to arrange in advance with the Contracting Officer for such street closings and to provide appropriate barricades, signs, markers, flares, and other devices as may be required by the Contracting Officer's Representative for traffic guides and public safety. (CENAB) 1.9 A. ORDER OF WORK AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS: Several projects are under construction around the building site, other contractors are presently working in the same area. Construction site will be shared from time to time with other projects construction activity. After award of this contract a meeting will be held with all contractor representatives and the Contracting Officer to develop a plan of work coordination. Attendance of twice monthly meetings shall be required for the continual coordination of the various construction projects In case of disagreement regarding use of an area the decision of the Contracting Officer will control. (CENAB) Section 01 05 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
B.
Contractor shall relocate staging areas including the Contractor's trailers if required by the Government. Relocation will be within 1/2 mile of the indicated site and will be considered a modification to the contract and will be reimbursed in accordance with "CHANGES" CLAUSE and contract modification procedures. The following projects will be under construction at time of this project's solicitation, are planned to be substantially complete prior to Notice to Proceed (NTP) on this contract and their new structures are indicated as "existing" on contract documents. Existing temporary contractor parking areas, construction trailers, mock-up buildings and temporary utility connections associated with these projects will be removed prior to this contract's NTP and are not indicated on contract documents: 1. 2. 3. 4. National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases Integrated Research Facility. National Bio-defense Analysis and Countermeasures Center. Storm water pond and connecting pipe. Reroute and removal of sanitary, water, electrical, and telecommunications lines currently within the construction limits of disturbance.
C.
D.
The following projects will be under construction at the time of Notice to Proceed on this contract and will continue concurrently with the initial construction under this contract. Areas allocated for these projects are included on the contract drawings. Close coordination with these projects will be required. Key milestone dates associated with these projects are listed under Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE, Subparagraph "Government Activities": 1. Central Utility Plant (CUP) Utilidor (thermal): This project is a private development by Chevron-Texaco under the Army's Enhanced Use Lease (EUL) program. This construction will complete the NIBC utility loop for steam and chilled water. The Utilidor will be within the area allocated for staging on this project. 1408 Loading Dock: This project is managed by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers and will relocate the existing loading dock on the east side of Building 1408, allowing less restricted access between Building 1408 and the new construction. Demolition of Buildings 1423, 1432, 1419, 1419a and associated utilities: This project is managed by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, General Contractor is Mascaro Construction. These buildings and utilities are within the area allocated for staging and construction on this project. Steam Sterilization Plant (SSP): This project is managed by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, General Contractor is John C. Grimberg Construction. This project will provide thermal treatment for laboratory wastes, initially for the existing USAMRIID facilities and ultimately for the new USAMRIID facility. The initial staging area for the SSP is within this contract's construction area and will be relocated prior to NTP on this contract. The connecting tunnel between the SSP and the new USAMRIID facility will be constructed under this contract.
2.
3.
4.
E.
The following projects will start construction after the Notice to Proceed on this contract and will finish construction and start operating concurrently with the construction under this contract. Section 01 05 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Areas allocated for these projects are included on the contract drawings. Schedules for these projects have not been determined, however their construction activities are to be restricted to the areas shown and these areas will not be available for use as part of this contract. Close coordination with these projects will be required. 1. Medical Bio-Defense Research Laboratory: This project is managed by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers as part of the Base Realignment and Closure (BRAC) Program and will construct a 37,000 gross square foot research facility for the U.S. Navy within the area depicted on the contract drawings. Gateway: This project is a private development by Detrick Properties under the Army's Enhanced Use Lease (EUL) program and will construct retail and office space for commercial lease within the area depicted on the contract drawings. CUP Utilidor (electrical): This project is a private development by Chevron-Texaco under the Army's EUL program. This construction will complete the NIBC utility loop for electrical and will also make final connections to this project for all utilities. The Utilidor will be within the area allocated for staging on this project, running along the same route as the thermal Utilidor described above.
2.
3.
F.
The Government will furnish and install equipment on the project site using several separate contracts at times to be determined. The contractor will make provisions for the government contractors installing this equipment to have reasonable access to necessary portions of the building during normal working hours. This equipment will include, but is not limited to: Imaging Equipment (MRI, PET, SPECT, NMR), information management equipment, telecommunications equipment, systems furniture, water-cooled freezers, LN2 freezers connected to LN2 distribution system, and electron microscopes. The contractor shall integrate these government contract actions into the project schedule as the government develops firm schedules for their execution. CONTRACTOR USE OF HVAC SYSTEMS: Utilization of the Installed HVAC System
1.10 1.10.1
The Contractor shall request use of the HVAC system installed under this contract to provide temperature control prior to the time of completion of the building. 1.10.2 Operations Statement
The HVAC system shall be operated only by qualified personnel and shall be operated with all auxiliaries and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and good operating practice. If at any time the Contracting Officer determines that the equipment is being improperly operated or maintained, the Contractor may be directed to discontinue its use. 1.10.3 Controlled Temperature
HVAC systems shall be operated and controlled to prevent temperature in any room or space in the building from exceeding 90 degrees F
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.10.4
Renovating the New Heating System
The Contractor shall, prior to the time of final acceptance of all work under this contract, place the HVAC system and related equipment in a condition equal to new. Warranty of work shall be in accordance with Section 01 20 00 WARRANTY REQUIREMENT. 1.11 ASBESTOS HANDLING AND REMOVAL
Through site investigations, friable asbestos has not been found, however if asbestos is encountered, its testing, removal and disposal is covered in "CHANGES" clause of the Contract Clauses. 1.12 1.12.1 TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER Procedure for Determination
This provision specifies the procedure for determination of time extensions for unusually severe weather in accordance the contract clause entitled "Default: (Fixed Price Construction)". In order for the Contracting Officer to award a time extension under this clause, the following conditions must be satisfied: A. The weather experienced at the project site during the contract period must be found to be unusually severe, that is, more severe than the adverse weather anticipated for the project location during any given month. The unusually severe weather must actually cause a delay to the completion of the project. The delay must be beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the contractor. Anticipated Adverse Weather Delays The following schedule of monthly anticipated adverse weather delays is based on National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or similar data for the project location and will constitute the base line for monthly weather time evaluations. The contractor's progress schedule must reflect these anticipated adverse weather delays in all weather dependent activities. MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER DELAY WORK DAYS BASED ON (5) DAY WORK WEEK FORT DETRICK JAN 7 B. FEB 7 MAR 7 APR 5 MAY 4 JUN 3 JUL 3 AUG 3 SEP 3 OCT 4 NOV 4 DEC 4
B.
1.12.2 A.
Impact: Upon acknowledgment of the Notice to Proceed (NTP) and continuing throughout the contract, the Contractor will record on the daily CQC report, the occurrence of adverse weather and resultant impact to normally scheduled work. Actual adverse weather delay days must prevent work on critical activities for 50 percent or more of the contractor's scheduled work day. The number of actual adverse weather delay days shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather (even if adverse weather occurred in previous month), be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day of each month, and be recorded as full days. If the number of actual adverse weather delay Section 01 05 00 - Page 8 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
days exceeds the number of days anticipated in paragraph "Monthly Schedule", above, the Contracting Officer will convert any qualifying delays to calendar days, giving full consideration for equivalent fair weather work days, and issue a modification in a accordance with the contract. 1.13 WORKING HOURS
Regular working hours shall consist of a period established by the Contractor Officer, between 7 a.m. and 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding Government holidays. 1.13.1 Work Outside Regular Hours
Work outside regular working hours requires Contracting Officer approval. Make application 15 calendar days prior to such work to allow arrangements to be made by the Government for inspecting the work in progress, giving the specific dates, hours, location, type of work to be performed, contract number and project title. Based on the justification provided, the Contracting Officer may approve work outside regular hours. During periods of darkness, the different parts of the work shall be lighted in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer. Make utility cutovers after normal working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, and Government holidays unless directed otherwise. 1.13.2 A. Occupied and Existing Building(s) The Contractor shall be working around existing buildings which are occupied. Do not enter the buildings without prior approval of the Contracting Officer. Construction under this contract will be adjacent to the National Interagency Bio-defense Campus (NIBC). The NIBC is a collection of facilities engaged in bio-defense research, collocated within a secured perimeter inside Ft Detrick, as shown on the contract drawings. This perimeter will adjust as additional facilities are completed. The construction access, staging area and limits of disturbance for construction of this project will remain outside the NIBC perimeter and contractor personnel will not normally access the NIBC security perimeter. When necessary, contractor access to the NIBC will be coordinated through the contracting officer. Due to the sensitive nature of the research at these facilities, specific requirements for and limitations on construction activities are included in this contract and additional requirements and restrictions may be imposed by the contracting officer throughout the construction. The following facilities are within the NIBC and will be operational throughout the construction period: 1. Department of Defense (DOD), U.S. Army Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases (USAMRIID): Buildings 1425, 1412, 1408, 1443, 1444. Conducts research for protecting warfighters from biological agents. U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) Foreign Disease Weed Science Research Unit: Buildings 1301-1306. Develops methods leading to improved, sustainable weed control practices in agricultural systems with reduced dependence on chemical herbicides. National Institute of Health (NIH), National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases Integrated Research Facility (NIAID-IRF): Building 1437. Develops medical countermeasures for potential Section 01 05 00 - Page 9 For Official Use Only
B.
2.
3.
Ft. Detrick, MD
4.
5.
agents of bioterrorism and naturally emerging infectious diseases related to public health issues. Department of Homeland Security (DHS) National Bio-defense Analysis and Countermeasures Center (NBACC): Building 1440. Provides threat characterization and bioforensic research to benefit civilians, responders and policy makers. Central Utility Plant (CUP): Building 1465. A private utility that provides steam, chilled water, and electricity to facilities within the NIBC. Utility Cutovers and Interruptions
1.13.3
Make utility cutovers and interruptions after normal working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, and Government holidays. Conform to procedures required in the paragraph "Work Outside Regular Hours." 1.14 LIMITS OF WORK AREAS
The limits of work areas as shown on the drawings are necessarily approximate. In case of doubt as to the actual limits of any work area, determination as to the actual limits will be made by the Contracting Officer. 1.15 GOVERNMENT ACCESS FOR GFGI EQUIPMENT
See Schedule of equipment, (Pre-FOST) attached to Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE, which will require Government access. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Applicable
Ft. Detrick, MD
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Applicable -- End of Section --
RISK ASSESSMENT FOR EXCAVATION AND OTHER WORK IN THE VICINITY OF UTILITIES
PROJECT NAME:_____________________________________________________________________ CONTRACT NUMBER:_________________________________________________________________ PROJECT INSTALLATION AND LOCATION:________________________________________________ PROPOSED EXCAVATION START DATE:__________________________________________________ 1. 2. 3. ESTABLISH EXCAVATION DETAILS AND DRAWINGS (check when completed) PROPOSED EXCAVATION AREA MARKED (white lining) (check when completed) CONTACT APPROPRIATE ONE-CALL SERVICE FOR PUBLIC UTILITIES: MD: Miss Utility 1-800-257-7777 N Y : New York City - Long Island One Call Center 1-800-272-4480 N. VA: Miss Utility 1-800-552-7777 PA: Pennsylvania One-Call System Incorporated 1-800-242-1776 VA: Miss Utility of VA 1-800-552-7001 DC: Miss Utility 1-800-257-7777 ONE-CALL NATIONAL REFERRAL CENTER: 1-888-258-0808
CONTACT INSTALLATION/OWNERS OF ALL PRIVATELY OWNED UTILITIES (NON ONE-CALL MEMBERS) 4. DATE UTILITIES MARKED AND METHOD OF MARKING ONE-CALL LOCATORS ______________________________________________________________ OTHER LOCAT ORS _________________________________________________________________
5. CONTACT APPROPRIATE DPW REPRESENTATIVES AND COMPLY WITH INSTALLATION PERMIT REQUIREMENTS: _____________________________________________________________________ 6. UTILITIES IDENTIFIED ON-SITE: NONE ELECTRIC GAS WATER TELEPHONE CATV SEWER OTHER __________
7.
LEVEL OF RISK: (Based upon personnel safety and consequences of utility outages.) SEVERE: Excavation required within the immediate vicinity (<2-ft) of a MARKED utility. MODERATE: Excav. required outside the immediate vicinity (> 2-ft) of MARKED utility. MINIMAL: Excavation required in an area with NO utilities.
8.
EXISTING FACILITIES/UTILITIES IN VICINITY: NON-CRITICAL MISSION CRITICAL HIGH-PROFILE CEREMONIAL OTHER_________________________________________________________ CONSEQUENCES IF EXISTING UTILITIES ARE DAMAGED/DISRUPTED _________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ 9. ENGINEERING CONTROLS REQUIRED: NONE HAND EXCAVATE TO LOCATE UTILITY EXCAVATE WITH DUE CARE OTHER_______________________________________________________________ ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROLS REQUIRED: Notification of Contracting Officers Representative, NOTIFIED on: _____________________ Notification of Installation/DPW Representative, NOTIFIED on:________________________ EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION AT INSTALLATION: POC & PHONE NUMBER ______________________
10.
11.
THE INFORMATION NOTED ABOVE IS ACCURATE AND THE WORK IS READY TO PROCEED SIGNED and DATE _______________________________________________________________CQC MANAGER 12. ON-SITE GOVERNMENT REP. RECOMMENDATION FOR APPROVAL TO EXCAVATE: YES NO SIGNATURE AND DATE: _______________________________ Comments :_____________________________________________________________________ AREA ENGINEER APPROVAL TO EXCAVATE: APPROVED DENIED SIGNATURE AND DATE: _______________________________ Comments :_____________________________________________________________________ CHIEF,________________ DIVISION APPROVAL TO EXCAVATE: APPROVED DENIED SIGNATURE AND DATE: _______________________________ Comments :_____________________________________________________________________
13.
14.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 07 00 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL Description
This section pertains to the provision of all cutting, removing, replacing, patching, repairing, restoration, refinishing and similar type work as necessary to existing work scheduled to remain and to new work required to be cut or uncovered. All existing facilities damaged as a result of the construction activities shall be restored to a condition equivalent to that prior to the start of work, except where otherwise shown or specified. 1.2 Work Execution
Extent of work includes uncovering work to provide for installation of ill-timed work, removal and replacement of defective work or work that does not conform to the contract documents, installation of new work to be installed in existing construction, and as necessary to make several parts fit. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Procedures; G, AR The accomplishment of cutting, patching, and repairing of the work. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS
Materials for replacement, repairing, patching, restoration, and similar type work shall conform to applicable sections of the specifications for new materials or work. Where existing materials and/or installations are not covered by the specifications, such materials shall match existing. All excess materials resulting from cutting and removal work shall be removed from the job site. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 EXECUTION INSPECTION AND PREPARATION Inspection of Conditions of Work
Inspect all existing conditions of work, for possible movement or damage during cutting or uncovering procedures. After uncovering work, inspect Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 07 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
conditions affecting installation of new products. Do not proceed with any further cutting, patching or repairing work if defects are observed; or if any unsafe condition exists. 3.1.2 Preparation of the Work Site
Prior to cutting or uncovering work, provide all shoring, bracing and supports as required to maintain the structural integrity of the project. Prior to restoration work, properly prepare existing surfaces to receive new materials such as to provide a proper bond or joining. 3.2 CUTTING AND DRILLING
Contractor shall do all cutting and drilling of existing walls, partitions, ceilings, floors, etc., as necessary for installation of the new work as shown, including cutting of holes and other openings for new plumbing, mechanical and electrical work. Cutting shall be performed by hand or small power tools; holes and slots cut neat and to size required, with minimum disturbance of adjacent work; cut holes in concrete slabs for pipes and conduit with core drills of proper sizes. Openings shall be covered temporarily when not in use and patched as soon as work is installed. 3.3 3.3.1 PATCHING AND REPAIRS Performance of Work
Existing work shall be cut, altered, removed, temporarily removed and replaced, or relocated as required for the performance of the work indicated on the drawings. Work remaining in place that is damaged or defaced by reason of alteration or demolition shall be restored to a condition equivalent to that prior to the start of work. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all patching and repairing involving the various trades, whether or not specifically mentioned under the respective sections. 3.3.2 Alterations
Where alterations or removals exposes damaged or unfinished surfaces or materials, such surfaces or materials shall be refinished or replaced as necessary to make continuous areas uniform. Where new work by any trade occurs in an existing finished area the entire wall or ceiling surface in which such work occurs shall be refinished. Where such new work occurs in an existing unfinished area, the work shall be done to render the new work inconspicuous. 3.3.3 Utility Removal
Where utilities are removed, relocated, or abandoned, they shall be capped, valved or plugged to make a complete and working installation as required. Resulting holes and damaged surfaces shall be properly patched to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces or prepared to receive new finish as applicable. 3.3.4 Restoration of Existing Surfaces
All surfaces affected by patching and repairing work shall be restored to match existing adjacent surfaces. Repainting of affected areas or surfaces shall match color and shade of existing painted surfaces. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 07 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.4 3.4.1
PROCEDURES Procedures
The procedures proposed for the accomplishment of cutting, patching, and repairing work shall be submitted when such work affects: A. Work of Government employees or Contractors working under separate contract. The structural value of or structural integrity of any element of the project. Integrity of effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems. Efficiency and operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. Submittals Identification of the project. Description of affected work. The necessity for cutting, patching or alteration. The affect on work of the Government or any separate Contractor. The affect on the structural or weather proof integrity of the project. Description of proposed work: 1. 2. 3. 4. G. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration and repairing. Trades who will execute the work. Products proposed to be used. Schedule of work.
B.
C.
D.
E. 3.4.2 A. B. C. D. E. F.
Alternatives to cutting, patching and repairing.
-- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 1.1 1.1.1 A.
GENERAL WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Project Description The U.S. Army Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases (USAMRIID), located at Fort Detrick, in Frederick, Maryland, is the premier biodefense laboratory for the Department of Defense (DoD). The USAMRIID Replacement facility project will provide for the decompression of existing functions and staff currently located at Fort Detrick. This Phase 1 - Primary Building Package is one of several separate contracts to deliver the USAMRIID Replacement Facilities at Fort Detrick's National Interagency Biodefense Campus (NIBC). The other separate contracts, not included in the scope of this package, include an Early Site Package to be awarded prior to this package, and a Phase 2 - Site & Demolition Package, to be awarded at a later time. The existing USAMRIID Buildings 1408, 1412, 1425, 1443, and 1444 will remain intact during and after the completion of the Phase 1 - Primary Building Package contract. The proposed new USAMRIID Replacement facility is approximately 950,000 gross square feet (gsf) of constructed area, including all mechanical and other support spaces. The functional programs include, but are not limited to the following types, as indicated on the documents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Headquarters and Administrative offices Research offices to support laboratory areas Amenity areas such as conference, training, and break areas Division of Medicine clinic and offices BSL-2 standard laboratories, specialty core laboratories and lab support areas BSL-3e laboratories, specialty core laboratories and lab support areas BSL-4 laboratories, specialty core laboratories and lab support areas Veterinary Medicine offices and support areas, including ABSL-2, ABSL-3e, and ABSL-4 animal housing, procedure and logistical/operational support areas Building operations, logistics and facility support areas
B.
6.
7.
8.
9. C.
The proposed new USAMRIID Replacement facility is part of the existing NIBS setting, with existing operating facilities, as well as new facilities under construction, that have been identified for coordination with this contract. The USAMRIID Replacement facility Section 01 11 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
will be supported by a Central Utility Plant (CUP) located within the NIBC perimeter, with both CUP generating systems and distribution of central utility feeds to the USAMRIID facility provided under separate contracts. 1.1.2 Location
The work shall be located at Fort Detrick, Maryland, as indicated. Exact location will be shown on the Construction Drawings. 1.2 EXISTING WORK
In addition to "FAR 52.236-9, Protection of Existing Vegetation, Structures, Equipment, Utilities, and Improvements": A. Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent injury or damage to any portions of the existing work which remain. Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been altered during construction operations to match existing or adjoining work, as approved by the Contracting Officer. At the completion of operations, existing work shall be in a condition equal to or better than that which existed before new work started. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
B.
1.3
Obtain digging permits prior to start of excavation. Scan the construction site with electromagnetic or sonic equipment, and mark the surface of the ground, pier deck or paved surface where existing underground utilities are discovered. Verify the elevations of existing piping, utilities, and any type of underground or encased obstruction not indicated to be specified or removed but indicated or discovered during scanning in locations to be traversed by piping, ducts, and other work to be conducted or installed. Verify elevations before installing new work closer than nearest manhole or other structure at which an adjustment in grade can be made. Additional requirements are specified in Section 01 05 00 JOB CONDITIONS 1.3.1 Notification Prior to Excavation
Notify the Contracting Officer, in accordance with time period specified under subpart "Utility Markings" specified in Section 01 05 00 JOB CONDITIONS subparagraph E, prior to starting excavation work. PART 2 PART 3 PRODUCTS -- NOT APPLICABLE EXECUTION -- NOT APPLICABLE -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 20 00 WARRANTY REQUIREMENT
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 1153 (1997; R 2003e1) Standard Practice for Location of Wet Insulation in Roofing Systems Using Infrared Imaging
1.2
WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall warranty all materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract Clause (FAR 52.246-21), "WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION" 1.3 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY:
The Contractor shall provide manufacturer's warranties on equipment for at least one year past the date of facility acceptance by the Government(Beneficial Occupancy Date BOD), with all other warranties of greater duration to also be provided, as specified within the technical sections.. Any warranty offered by the manufacturer for periods greater than one year or required by other sections of the specifications shall also be provided. If the contractor has standard specified warranties that extend beyond the warranty period above, those warranties do not need any modification. If there are standard specified warranties that expire prior to the one year after BOD warranty period, they will need to obtain extended warranties to comply with the duration for the warranty period. 1.4 PERFORMANCE BOND:
The Contractor's Performance Bond will remain effective throughout the construction warranty period and warranty extensions. 1.4.1 Failure to Commence
In the event the Contractor or his designated representative(s) fail to commence and diligently pursue any work required under this clause, and in a manner pursuant to the requirements thereof, the Contracting Officer shall have the right to demand that said work be performed under the Performance Bond by making written notice on the surety. If the surety fails or refuses to perform the obligation it assumed under the Performance Bond, the Contracting Officer shall have the work performed by others, and after completion of the work, may demand reimbursement of any or all expenses incurred by the Government while performing the work, including, but not limited to administrative expenses.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.5
PRE-WARRANTY CONFERENCE:
Prior to contract completion and at a time designated by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer to develop a mutual understanding with respect to the requirements of this specification. Communication procedures for Contractor notification of warranty defects, priorities with respect to the type of defect, reasonable time required for Contractor response, and other details deemed necessary by the Contracting Officer for the execution of the construction warranty shall be reviewed at this meeting. The Contractor shall provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of all subcontractors, equipment suppliers, or manufacturers with specific designation of their area of responsibilities if they are to be contacted directly on warranty corrections. This point of contact will be located within the local service area of the warranted construction, will be continuously available, and will be responsive to Government inquiry on warranty work action and status. Minutes of the meeting will be prepared by the Government and signed by both, the Contractor and the Contracting Officer. The minutes shall become part of the contract file. 1.6 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-04 Samples Sample Tags; G AR. To identify the warranty for all Contractor and Government furnished equipment which the Contractor installs. 1.7 1.7.1 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS Roof Survey
The Contractor shall during the ninth (9) month following the Beneficial Occupancy Date, conduct an infrared roof survey. This survey will be conducted in accordance with ASTM C 1153, "Standard Practice for the Location of Wet Insulation in Roofing Systems Using Infrared Imaging". Contractor shall be required to replace all damaged materials and to locate and repair sources of moisture penetration. 1.7.2 Equipment Warranty Identification Tags:
The Contractor shall provide warranty identification tags on all Contractor and Government furnished equipment which he has installed. 1.7.2.1 Format and Size for Tags
The tags shall be similar in format and size to the exhibits provided by this specification, they shall be suitable for interior and exterior locations, resistant to solvents, abrasion, and to fading caused by sunlight, precipitation. etc. These tags shall have a permanent pressure-sensitive adhesive back, and they shall be installed in a position that is easily (or most easily) noticeable. Contractor furnished equipment Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 20 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
that has differing warranties on its components will have each component tagged. 1.7.2.2 Sample Tags
Sample tags shall be filled out representative of how the Contractor will complete all other tags. These tags shall be submitted to the Government. 1.7.2.3 Tags for Warranted Equipment:
The tag for this equipment shall be similar to the following. Exact format and size will be as approved.
________________________________________________________________________ | EQUIPMENT WARRANTY | | CONTRACTOR FURNISHED EQUIPMENT | | | | | | MFG: ____________________ MODEL NO.: ____________________ | | | | SERIAL NO.: _____________ CONTRACT NO.: ________________ | | | | CONTRACTORS NAME: __________________________________________ | | | | CONTRACTOR WARRANTY EXPIRES: _______________________________ | | | | MFG WARRANTY(IES) EXPIRE: __________________________________ | | | | | |________________________________________________________________________|
Ft. Detrick, MD
________________________________________________________________________ | EQUIPMENT WARRANTY | | GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT | | | | | | MFG: ____________________ MODEL NO.: ______________________ | | | | SERIAL NO.: _____________ CONTRACT NO.: ___________________ | | | | DATE EQUIPMENT PLACED IN SERVICE: ____________________________ | | | | MFG WARRANTY(IES) EXPIRES: ___________________________________ | | | | | |________________________________________________________________________| 1.7.2.4 Execution
The Contractor will complete the required information on each tag and install these tags on the equipment by the time of and as a condition of final acceptance of the equipment. All tags shall be mechanically attached to the equipment as directed by the Contracting Officer. 1.7.2.5 Equipment Warranty Tag Replacement.
The contractor shall provide new tags on repaired or replaced equipment during the warranty period. The tag shall be identical to the original tag, except that the Contractor's warranty expiration date shall be updated to show the correct warranty expiration date. 1.8 1.8.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSE TO WARRANTY SERVICE REQUIREMENTS. Notification to Warranty Service Requirements
Following oral or written notification by authorized representative of the installation designated in writing by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall respond to warranty service requirements in accordance with the "Warranty Service Priority List" and the three categories of priorities listed below. 1.8.1.1 A. Categories of Priorities
First Priority Code 1: Perform on site inspection to evaluate situation, determine course of action, initiate work within 2 hours and work continuously to completion or relief. Second Priority Code 2: Perform on site inspection to evaluate situation, determine course of action, initiate work within 8 hours, initiate work within 24 hours and work continuously to completion or relief. Third Priority Code 3: All other work to be initiated within 3 work days and work continuously to completion or relief. Warranty Service Priority List
B.
C.
1.8.1.2
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS: Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 20 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Code 1: A. Service to ABSL-2, 3 and 4 Vivarium and BSL-2, 3 and 4 Laboratory areas. Air conditioning leak in Building, if causing damage. Air conditioning system not cooling properly.
B. C. Code 2:
Admin offices with ADP equipment not on priority list. DOORS: Code 1: A. Interior, exterior personnel doors or hardware, not functioning properly, causing a security, fire, or safety problem. Overhead doors not operational, causing a security, fire, or safety problem.
B.
Code 3: A. B. Overhead doors not operational. Interior/exterior personnel doors or hardware not functioning properly.
ELECTRICAL: Code 1: Service to Equipment and systems in and serving high containment areas of ABSL-4 and BSL-4, and containment areas of ABSL-3E, BSL-3E. A. Power failure (entire area or any building operational after 1600 hours). Security lights. Smoke detectors.
B. C. Code 2: A. B. C. Code 3:
Power failure (no Power to a room or part of building), Receptacle and lights. Fire alarm systems.
Street lights. GAS: Code 1: A. B. Leaks and breaks. No gas. Section 01 20 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMS: Code 1: Division 28 systems including electrical systems for operation of system and equipment. LABORATORY EQUIPMENT: Code 1: A. Code 2: A. Code 3: A. Equipment, including Controlled Environment Rooms specified in Section 13 21 00, not listed under Code 1 and Code 2 Cage Washers, Tunnel Washers, Tissue Digester, and Glass Washers. Sterilizers.
PLUMBING: Code 1: A. Service to Equipment and systems in and serving high containment areas of ABSL-4 and BSL-4, and containment areas ABSL-3, and BSL-3E.
Code 2: Items outside of Code 1 areas, including: A. B. C. Code 3: Leaky faucets. REFRIGERATION: Code 1: A. B. Leaks and breaks Service to Equipment and systems in and serving high containment areas of ABSL-4 and BSL-4, and containment areas ABSL-3, and BSL-3E. Flush valves. Fixture drain, supply line, or water pipe leaking. Water closet leaking at base.
Code 2: Items outside of Code 1 areas INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION: Code 3: (1) (2) Floors damaged. Paint chipping or peeling. Section 01 20 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
(3) ROOF LEAKS:
Casework.
Code 1: Roof LeaksTemporary repairs will be made where major damage to property is occurring. Code 2: Where major damage to property is not occurring, check for location of leak during rain and complete repairs. UTILITY SERVICES Code 1: A. TO Entire Building (Exterior):
WATER, HOT (and STEAM): Code 1: A. No water to Entire Building
Code 2-Water (Hot) No hot water in portion of building. COMMUNICATION, DATA AND TELEPHONE: Code 1: A. Service to Equipment and systems in and serving high containment areas of ABSL-4 and BSL-4, and containment areas ABSL-3, and BSL-3E.
Code 2: A. Items outside of Code 1 areas
SPRINKLER SYSTEM: Code 1: A. Sprinkler systems, valves, manholes, deluge systems, and air systems to sprinkler.
Code 2: A. Items outside of Code 1 areas
Code 3-All other work not listed above. 1.8.2 Availability of Required Parts
Should parts be required to complete the work and the parts are not immediately available the Contractor shall have a maximum of 12 hours after Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 20 00 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
arrival at the job site to provide authorized representative of the installation with firm written plan for emergency alternatives and temporary repairs for Government participation with the Contractor to provide emergency relief until the required parts are available on site for the Contractor to perform permanent warranty repair. The Contractors plan shall include a firm date and time that the required parts shall be available on site to complete the permanent warranty repair. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Applicable
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 27 00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
Where language in the Construction Specifications refers to Section 00 41 00 Bid Schedule or BID SCHEDULE it means refer to PART I - THE SCHEDULE SECTION 00100 - SUPPLIES OR SERVICES AND PRICES. 1.1 LUMP SUM PAYMENT ITEMS
Payment items for the work of this contract for which contract lump sum payments will be made are listed in the BIDDING SCHEDULE. All costs for items of work, which are not specifically mentioned to be included in a particular lump sum or unit price payment item, shall be included in the listed lump sum item most closely associated with the work involved. The lump sum price and payment made for each item listed shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment, and performing any associated Contractor quality control, environmental protection, meeting safety requirements, tests and reports, and for performing all work required for which separate payment is not otherwise provided. 1.2 UNIT PRICE PAYMENT ITEMS
Payment items for the work of this contract on which the contract unit price payments will be made are listed in the BIDDING SCHEDULE. The unit price and payment made for each item listed shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment, and performing any associated Contractor quality control, environmental protection, meeting safety requirements, tests and reports, and for performing all work required for each of the unit price items. 1.3 OPTIONAL BID PAYMENT ITEMS
Payment items for the work of this contract on which the contract optional bid payments will be made are listed in the BIDDING SCHEDULE and briefly described below. The amount and payment made for each item listed shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment, and performing any associated Contractor quality control, environmental protection, meeting safety requirements, tests and reports, and for performing all work required for each of the optional bid items exercised. 1.3.1 Option #01
Low Exhaust Registers in ABSL-2/3 Vivarium Areas. Base bid will provide for ceiling exhaust registers only. Line item cost to add the scope of additional ductwork extended vertically to floor level and side-wall exhaust grill, as indicated on the documents. 1.3.2 Option #02
Roof Top Solar Thermal Heating System. This line item cost to add the scope of rooftop solar thermal heating system, structural supports, solar thermal steel support framing and system components, piping and pumps, as Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 27 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
indicated in documents. 1.3.3 Option #03
Program fit-out of Clinic Area (Part 1 - Block E) First and Second Floor. Base Bid includes shelled-out space for this program area, as indicated on documents. This line item cost to add the complete fit-out of this program area for all trades, as indicated in documents. 1.3.4 Option #04
Security/Monitoring items. 1.3.5 Option #05
Stainless steel exhaust stacks in lieu of Painted Galvanized Steel. Base bid to include painted Galvanized material for roof-top exhaust stacks, indicated on documents. This line item is for the additional cost for stainless steel material exhaust stacks as indicated in documents. 1.3.6 Option #06
Intake Air Plenum Sound Barriers at Air Handling Units. Base bid to exclude the sound barriers at AHU's. This line item is for the additional cost to add air plenum sound barriers at AHU's. 1.3.7 Option #07
CMU Partitions in BSL-3 laboratory in lieu of Impact Resistant Gypsum Board. Base bid to include impact resistant gypsum board partitions in BSL-3 lab areas only. The partitions surrounding each BSL-3 suite (pressure zones) to remain as CMU, as per documents. This line item cost is for Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) partitions in lieu of metal stud and gypsum board construction, as indicated in the documents. 1.3.8 Option #08
Epoxy Resin Countertops in BSL-2 Laboratories in lieu of Phenolic Resin. The base bid to include Phenolic Resin material countertops in BSL-2 labs. This line item is for the additional cost for Epoxy Resin Countertops where indicated in documents. 1.3.9 Option #09
Rubber Tile Flooring in BSL-2 Laboratory Areas in lieu of VCT. The base bid condition to include Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) flooring in the BSL-2 Labs, where indicated on the documents. This line item is for the additional cost for the Rubber Tile flooring as indicated in documents. (See Option #18 below for Sheet Rubber flooring option in BSL-2 Labs). Government's exercise to award this option will eliminate option #18. 1.3.10 Option #10
Increased Condenser Water Riser from First Floor Mechanical Rm to Roof for future Chiller & additional cooling tower capacity. Base bid does not include the additional condenser water riser. This line item is for the additional cost to add the increased capacity for condenser water for a future chiller and/or increased cooling tower capacity from the first floor mechanical room to the roof, as indicated in documents. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 27 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.3.11
Option #11
Secondary Pressure reducing valves (PRV stations) and associated piping connections at Mechanical Penthouse. The base bid does not include the secondary Pressure Reducing Valves (PRV) and associated piping connections. This line item is for the additional cost to include the secondary PRV stations and associated piping connections at the mechanical penthouse, as indicated in documents. 1.3.12 Option #12
Heat recovery system coil and piping sections for units serving BSL-3 Stand-by Exhaust Systems. The base bid does not include the Heat Recovery system coil and piping within the heat recovery unit(s). This line item is for the additional cost to include the heat recovery coil and piping sections within the unit(s), where indicated in documents. 1.3.13 Option #13
Walkable decking in above ceiling connection zone over BSL-3 areas. Base bid does not include walkable decking over BSL-3 ceiling. This line item is for the additional cost to add a corrugated metal decking over the ceiling framing to allow future maintenance access over the BSL-3 Areas, as indicated on the documents. 1.3.14 Option #14
Upgrade HEPA filter housings to No. 316 grade stainless steel in lieu of No. 304. The Base bid includes #304 Grade Stainless Steel material for HEPA Filter housings & connections typically, with exception to the Class III biosafety cabinets (BSC). This line item is for the additional cost to upgrade the balance of HEPA Filter housing material throughout to #316 Stainless Steel, as indicated in documents. 1.3.15 Option #15
Optional Building Management Systems (BMS) Control Equipment. The base bid does not include any of the three Optional Building Management System (BMS) approaches in the pricing, with only one of the three approaches to be awarded for submittal, review and installation, based on the best value under this option. For the purposes of evaluating the Contractors pricing proposals for Best-Value, the highest of the three costs to be carried as the Optional amount for this item. 1.3.15.1 #15A
Optional "LNS Based LonWorks" BMS Approach. This line item is for the total additional cost to the base bid (which does not include the BMS system pricing) for the contractors price, if provided, for a LonWorks-based BMS system approach, as indicated in documents.
1.3.15.2
#15B
Optional "Non-LNS Based LonWorks/Non-Native BACnet" BMS Approach. This line item is for the total additional cost to the base bid (which does not include the BMS system pricing) for the contractors price, if provided, for a BMS manufacturers recommended BMS system approach, as indicated in Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 27 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
documents. 1.3.15.3 #15C
Optional "Native BACnet" BMS Approach. This line item is for the total additional cost to the base bid (which does not include the BMS system pricing) for the contractors price, if provided, for a Native BACnet BMS system approach, as indicated in documents. 1.3.16 Option #16
Additional Laboratory Casework and utility service extensions in the BSL-2 Laboratory Access Corridor. The base bid does not include the casework, nor utility services extension in the BSL-2 lab access corridors towards the Atrium only. This line item is for the additional cost to include the casework and utility services for this area, as indicated in documents. 1.3.17 Option #17
Plastic Doors (Section 08 15 00) in ABSL-2 vivarium areas in lieu of galvanized steel doors. The base bid to include the galvanized steel (GSTL) doors for the animal rooms, etc. in ABSL-2 vivarium. This line item is for the additional cost to change the GSTL doors to a Fiberglas door material as indicated in documents. 1.3.18 Option #18
Sheet Rubber Flooring in BSL-2 Laboratory Areas in lieu of VCT. The base bid condition to include Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) flooring the the BSL-2 Labs, where indicated in documents. This line item is for the additional cost for the Sheet-Rubber flooring with integral base as indicated in documents. (See Option #9 above for Rubber Tile flooring option in BSL-2 Labs). Government's exercise to award this option will eliminate option #09. 1.3.19 Option #19
Additional Flexible Base Cabinets in BSL-2 Laboratories. The base bid to identify specific lab base cabinets that are in the flexible system that can be provided as an option or under a later contract. This line item is for the additional cost to add these same optional-price flexible base cabinets into the project. 1.3.20 Option #20
Re-classification of non-containment BSL-2 Class IIA BioSafety Cabinets from Government Provided Category C (GFGI) to Contractor Provided Category A (CFCI) equipment. Base bid to include all non-containment (BSL-2 only) Class IIA - Biosafety Cabinets (BSC's) equipment as Cat. C, Gov. Furnished and installed. This line item is for additional cost to provide the BSL-2 Class IIA - BSC's as Cat. A, Contractor furnished and installed, as indicated in documents. 1.3.21 Option #21
BSL4 electrical brass fitting with field applied epoxy in lieu of elastomeric clamp down type. Base Bid to include the elastomeric clamp-down approach for the sealing of the communication wiring penetrations at the BSL-4 area. In the event that the technical Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 27 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
feasibility and application of the base bid is not viable, this line item is for the application of a brass fitting with a field applied epoxy sealing approach, as identified in documents. 1.3.22 Option #22
Re-classification of BSL-2 Sterilizers from Category C (GFGI) to Category A (CFCI)equipment. Base bid to include all BSL-2 Area Sterilizers (autoclaves) as Cat. C, Government furnished and installed. This line item is to provide the additional cost for all BSL-2 Sterilizers as Cat. A (Contractor furnished and installed) Equipment items, identified in documents. 1.3.23 Option #23
Transfer ports in ABSL-3 Vivarium Doors. Base bid to reduce by 1/2 (approx. 24 doors) the number of ABSL-3 animal holding room doors that have animal transfer ports. This line item is for the additional cost to add back the same quantity of doors (approx. 24) with the transfer ports, as indicated in documents. 1.3.24 Option #24
Not Used. 1.3.25 Option #25
Terrazzo Floor Finish in lieu of Polished Concrete at Atrium and Knowledge Green. The base bid to include an architectural polished concrete finish floor surfacing and limited area terrazzo flooring, with precast terrazzo base at the atrium and knowledge green,as the base bid as indicated in documents. This line item is for the additional cost to provide the entire area indicated in documents with terrazzo floor finish. 1.3.26 Option #26
Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Atrium Feature Wall Light Fixtures. The base bid to exclude the floating acoustical ceiling and the wall feature lights in the atrium, as indicated in drawings, including the revisions to the smoke detectors and sprinkler heads, in the base bid condition without the ceiling. This line item is for the additional cost to provide the acoustical ceiling and wall lights as indicated in documents, including the scope of the smoke detectors, and sprinklers heads, etc., as indicated in documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 31 11 SUSPENDED LOADING - COORDINATION AND LIMITATIONS
PART 1 1.1 1.1.1
GENERAL APPLICATION OF THIS SECTION Suspended Loads
This Section applies to all Sections of the Project Manual where work involves suspended loads from roof, floor decks and concrete floor slabs. 1.1.2 Exceptions
The following categories of work are excluded from restrictions of this Section, and are subject only to requirements of their respective Sections: A. B. C. Section 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD for Gypsum Board Ceilings. Section 09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS. Section 09 57 13 - SANITARY CEILINGS and Wall Panels, for Sanitary Ceilings. Section 23 00 00 - AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMSDucts, for Ductwork Systems. Exception: Dust Collection System is subject to work of this Section. Section 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING. INTENT Suspended Loading
D.
E. 1.2 1.2.1
Intent of this Section is to establish installation methods and procedures to ensure that suspended loading is uniformly distributed so as not to overstress any portion of the structure. 1.2.2 Hanging Requirements
This Section is not intended to reduce specific hanging requirements specified elsewhere. 1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
Follow Section 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS. 1.3.1 Schedule
Schedule one or more pre-installation meetings to specifically review each provision of this Section. 1.3.2 Plan and coordinate work
Plan and coordinate work, so that collective loads (from one or more trades) superimposed on building floor, roof deck or concrete floor slabs Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 31 11 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
does not exceed maximum concentrated loads specified. 1.3.3 Attendance Required
All parties as appropriate to accomplish the work of this Section. 1.4 1.4.1 DEFINITIONS Primary Structural Steel and Concrete Framing All
Columns, Girders, Beams, and Concrete Floor Slabs and Shear Walls. other members are considered secondary. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Applicable PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 EXECUTION HANGING FROM DECKS Steel Roof Or Floor Decks
Do not hang directly from steel roof or floor decks. Where suspensions are required, hang directly from primary structural steel framing, and provide supplemental framing attached to the primary structural framing, as required. Do not suspend from secondary members. 3.1.2 Roof Decks With Structural Concrete
Hang from steel roof decks with structural concrete fill as specified for floor decks. 3.2 HANGING FROM FLOOR DECKS OR CONCRETE FLOOR SLABS
The following spacing and load limitations are collective and apply to ALL specifications Sections (except those listed above as being excluded), regardless of size or use, or whether the load is hung singularly or collectively in a trapeze. When calculating piping or conduit loads, include contents of pipe or conduit. When calculating dry pipe systems, assume pipe is filled with water. Spacing of Insert or Deck Attachment 24 Inches 36 Inches 48 Inches 3.3 3.3.1 RESTRICTIONS Concentrated Loads Over 500 Pounds Maximum Concentrated Collective Load from One or More Trades 150 pounds 280 pounds 500 pounds
Inserts or deck attachments are not permitted. Suspend these loads directly from primary structural steel and concrete framing, and provide supplemental framing attached to primary framing, as required. Do not suspend from secondary members.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.3.2
Rotating and Reciprocating Equipment
Same as concentrated loads over 500 pounds. 3.3.3 Inserts or Deck Attachments
Locate inserts or attachments at bottom flutes of deck only. 3.4 CRITERIA FOR SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT IN NORMALLY OCCUPIED SPACES
Standards referenced below do not preclude the need to design equipment mountings for forces required by other criteria specified such as seismic standards. 3.4.1 Overhead Mounted Architectural Features
Follow UFC 4-010-01; B-3.6 Standard 15. Overhead Mounted Architectural Features: Overhead mounting features/systems weighing 31 pounds or greater shall be mounted to resist forces of 0.5 times the component weight in any direction and 1.5 times the component weight in the downward direction. 3.4.2 Equipment Bracing
Follow UFC 4-010-01; B-4 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL DESIGN, B-4.5 Standard 20 Equipment Bracing: mount overhead utilities and other fixtures weighing 31 pounds or greater to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 31 15 CONTAINMENT CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SUMMARY
Containment laboratory construction does not necessarily follow typical or normal construction methods or schedules. The work is unique and exacting requiring a high level of contractor coordination to achieve the required results. 1.2 1.2.1 DEFINITIONS Containment Laboratory
Rooms specially constructed as laboratory and associated spaces within which Biosafety Level 4 (BSL-4), Biosafety Level 3 Enhanced (BSL-3E), Animal Biosafety Level 3 Enhanced (ABSL-3E) and Animal Biosafety Level 4 (ABSL-4) work is performed. A. Refer to Key Plan drawings for locations of Containment rooms: reference number AO.2 Series. End-to-End Sheet
1.2.2
Consideration of a service run from the beginning of the service distribution point to the end connection point at the equipment in use. 1.3 A. COORDINATOR Provide containment coordinator as follows 1. Qualifications: Technically qualified and administratively experienced in field coordination for the type of architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, communication, IT and containment laboratory construction work required for this project, for the duration of the Work. B. Coordinator's prime responsibility: coordination of containment laboratory. Coordination of containment laboratory work shall begin early in the construction process allowing sufficient time for all coordination activities. Coordinator shall work closely with all other Contractor staff, the AE, Government, testing agencies and Commissioning team members. Coordinate the incorporation of Pre-FOST Government provided equipment into schedules and work. This equipment would be equipment items that are indicated to be incorporated into the containment laboratory areas of the building.
C.
D.
E.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Coordinator Proposal; G AR Coordination / Interference Documents Containment Construction Schedule; G AR Coordinator Proposal Provide proposal to the Contracting Officer, within 90 days of Notice to Proceed, outlining how the coordination of the containment construction will be achieved. The outline shall include Coordinator(s)' CV showing pertinent past experience; roles and responsibility; and schedule of coordination tasks and activities. Coordination / Interference Documents Prepare coordination / interference documents to be used by construction trades. Government will provide base drawings to the Contractor for initial information. Use base drawings to begin coordination process. All base information shall be confirmed for accuracy by the Coordinator. Create coordination and construction drawings using the specific profiles and dimensions of actual materials and equipment to be incorporated into the construction. The information shall be obtained from previously approved shop drawings and product data. Submit Coordination / interference documents in format as follows: Hard copy full size drawings, in quantity specified under Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. Electronically in PDF format as specified for electronic submittals in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. Containment Construction Schedule Prepare and submit Containment Construction Schedule to Contracting Officer and AE for review and comment. Containment Construction Schedule must be incorporated into overall construction schedule therefore allowing time for preconstruction activities. Containment Construction Schedule shall integrate review process for items to be incorporated into cast-in-place concrete floors, wall and ceilings. These reviews include but are not limited to:
Ft. Detrick, MD
Concrete mock-up. Containment concrete mix design, selection and testing. Concrete reinforcement. Cast-in-place wall, floor and ceiling penetrations. Embeds for cast-in-place doors and windows. Cast-in-place junction boxes, deviceS, and conduits. Concrete repairing and patching materials and methods. Cast-in-place equipment including sterilizers, dunk tanks and pass-through chambers. Mechanical and electrical equipment located above and below the containment laboratories (size, position and services). Containment barrier wiring penetration cross containment prevention methodology. Allow for and indicate curing period of concrete in Containment Construction Schedule, and coordinate work of other trades that would be affected by curing methodology. Allow for and indicate patching and repairing of surface defects of concrete walls in Containment Construction Schedule. Containment construction schedule shall show time allocated for all reviews including reviews required by the Commissioning team. Coordinate containment construction schedule with commissioning activities. Investigate and incorporate actual delivery time of materials, equipment, and components to be included in containment construction work into Containment Construction Schedule. 1.5 A. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Submittals, tests, reports, product data, shop drawings, mock-ups, meetings, acceptance criteria and commissioning activities defined within the individual specification sections of the projection manual must be submitted, reviewed, successfully performed and demonstrated. Deletion of requirements, products substitutions and changes to acceptance criteria and installation procedures will not be considered by the AE unless it can be demonstrated by the Contractor the change will be beneficial to the work. 1. Changes will not be considered unless sufficient lead time is provided for complete evaluation by the AE. Provide all information, product data, mock-ups, test results, independent evaluation as required for complete evaluation by the AE. Any cost associated with the evaluation shall be paid by the Contractor. Additional work by the AE to evaluate changes proposed by the Contractor shall be charged to the Contractor, removed from the contract amount and paid to the AE.
B.
2.
3.
1.6 A.
SCHEDULING Coordination of containment construction work requires a complete detailed schedule of activities and milestones.
Ft. Detrick, MD
B.
Begin coordination of containment laboratory work very early in construction process to allow sufficient time for coordination activities. Before start of on-site construction activities, products data, shop drawings, tests, reports, mock-ups, coordination/interference drawings, must be produced, reviewed and approved. All these preconstruction activities shall be incorporated into Containment Construction Schedule. 1. The schedule must be prepared and submitted to the AE for review and comment. The schedule must be incorporated into the overall construction schedule therefore allowing time for all preconstruction activities. The schedule shall show time allocated for all reviews including reviews required by the Commissioning team. Coordinate schedule with commissioning activities.
C.
2.
3.
D.
Start of containment cast-in-place concrete work is considered an important milestone in containment construction. 1. Cast concrete work cannot commence until all associated items as listed above have been reviewed, approved and assembled into coordination/interference construction drawings. Submittals for scientific, mechanical and electrical equipment must be submitted, reviewed and approved for servicing requirements prior to cast-in-place concrete work. This will ensure correct sizing of all services end-to-end. Cast-in-place service penetrations cannot be reviewed until all scientific, mechanical and electrical equipment shop drawings have been reviewed.
2.
3.
E.
Incorporate starting and balancing of major and minor mechanical and electrical systems. Coordinate certification of equipment, preliminary proving of room pressure decay tests and final room pressure decay tests with the availability of completed building systems. Refer to individual specification sections for correct environmental conditions to be met prior to testing of components, equipment or systems. COMMISSIONING Be familiar with commissioning activities and allow a reasonable allotted time for them in the creation of and execution of the Construction Schedule. PRODUCTS
1.7 A.
PART 2
Not Applicable PART 3 3.1 A. EXECUTION PREPARATION General: Meet with the AE to discuss the architectural, structural and engineering systems, equipment and integration system design intents. Section 01 31 15 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Become familiar with all aspects of the project early in the construction schedule in order to avoid conflicts between design intent, construction documents and construction activities. B. Coordinate a minimum of two meetings between the AE and the construction workers. The purpose of the meeting will be to brief the workers on the unique aspects of and the high degree of workmanship required while working on the containment laboratory. 1. Those in attendance must include: a. Contractor project managers, coordinators, superintendents and foremen. b. Major subtrade managers and coordinators. c. Affected trade foremen. 3.2 A. COORDINATION / INTERFERENCE DOCUMENTS Prepare coordination drawings to organize installation of products for efficient use of available space, for proper sequence of installation, and to identify potential conflicts. Where the term "interference drawings" appears in the Contract Documents it shall mean "coordination drawings". Provide drawings showing surface mounted devices (i.e., casework, hose reels, sinks, mop rails, monitors, security devices, etc.) and laboratory equipment to eliminate conflicts with cast embed locations. Prepare coordination / interference drawings verifying position and clearance of all mechanical and electrical devices and equipment above the Containment Areas. 1. Drawings must be prepared using AutoCad version 2007 with appropriate layering as defined by the Government's AutoCad Drawings Standards to allow for identification of individual systems. Provide Coordination Drawings at minimum scale 1/4 inch equals 12 inches. Provide layering system for approval prior to submitting drawings. Coordinate mechanical and electrical concrete slab penetrations into the Containment Areas. Coordinate electrical boxes, embeds and conduits cast into concrete floors and walls. Provide drawings indicating cast-in-place components of walls to eliminate problems of 'back to back' arrangement. Provide drawings showing all conduits runs "end-to-end". Provide drawings showing areas of concrete reinforcement congestion which will eliminate any cast-in service runs. Provide 'back-to-back', 'butterfly' or 'end-to-end' drawings required to identify and eliminate conflicts.
B.
C.
2. 3.
4.
5.
6. 7.
8.
D.
Identify electrical power characteristics and control wiring required for each item of equipment. Section 01 31 15 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
E.
Identify the production and resolution of coordination / interference drawings in the containment construction schedule. Maintain documents for the duration of the work, recording changes due to site instructions, modifications or adjustments. After AE review of original and revised documents, reproduce and distribute copies to parties. COORDINATION MEETINGS Conduct meetings among Subcontractors and others concerned with the Work in the containment areas, to establish and maintain coordination and schedules, and to resolve coordination matters in dispute. Refer to Section 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS.
F.
G.
3.3 A.
B.
Participate in progress meetings. Report on progress of Work to be adjusted under coordination requirements, and any required changes in schedules. Transmit minutes of meetings and reports to parties. Refer to Section 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS.
C.
Coordinate pre-installation meetings. Refer to Section 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS.
3.4 A.
COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS Review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples for compliance with Contract Documents and for coordination with work of the Project Manual. Transmit for review, copy reviewed documents to the AE. Check field dimensions and clearances and relationship to available space and anchors. Check compatibility with equipment and Work of other sections, electrical characteristics, and operational control requirements. Check motor voltages and control characteristics. Coordinate controls, interlocks, wiring of pneumatic switches, and relays. Coordinate wiring and control diagrams. Review the effect of any changes on work of other sections. Verify information and coordinate maintenance of record documents. COORDINATION OF SUBSTITUTIONS AND MODIFICATIONS Review proposals and requests for substitution prior to submission to the AE. Verify compliance with Contract Documents and for compatibility with Work and Products of other sections.
B.
C.
D. E.
F. G. H. 3.5 A.
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
C. 3.6 A. B.
Submit with recommendation for action. OBSERVATION OF WORK Observe Work for compliance with Contract Documents. Maintain a list of observed deficiencies and defects. correction to Contracting Officer with copy to AE. DOCUMENTATION Observe and maintain a record of tests. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Record: Submit list for
3.7 A.
Specification section number and product name. Name of Contractor, Subcontractor, and others present at test. Name of testing agency and name of inspector. Name of manufacturer's representative present. List of testing tools used and date of calibrations Date, time, and duration of tests. Type of test, and results. Retesting required.
B.
Submit copies of documentation to the Contracting Officer and AE upon request. EQUIPMENT START-UP Verify utilities, connections, and controls are complete and equipment is in operable condition as required by technical sections as applicable, and commissioning requirements. Observe start-up and adjustments, test run, record time and date of start-up, and results. Observe equipment demonstrations provided to Government; record times and additional information required for operation and maintenance manuals. INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT Prior to inspection, verify that equipment is tested, operational, clean, and ready for operation. Assist the Contracting Officer with review. be completed and corrected. Refer to Commissioning Requirements. -- End of Section -Prepare list of items to
3.8 A.
B.
C.
3.9 A.
B.
C.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL SUMMARY
The requirements of this Section apply to, and are a component part of, each section of the specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Project Submittal Schedule; G AR A Project Submittal Schedule shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Project Meetings," of this section. SD-06 Test Reports Monthly Progress Report; G AR The Contractor shall submit a Monthly Progress Report at the first meeting of each month. 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
The Contractor shall attend a preconstruction conference scheduled by the Contracting Officer. Work shall not commence prior to the conference. The Contractor shall address project orientation, personnel contact, safety issues, permits, deficiencies, and the location of the Contractor's office. Agenda: A. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, and progress schedule. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and AE. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, or equals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, change orders and contract closeout procedures. Scheduling Scheduling activities of Government provided equipment, Third Party Testing, Inspection, and Geotechnical Engineer.
B. C.
D. E.
Ft. Detrick, MD
F. 1.4 A.
LEED Requirements. PROJECT MEETINGS The Contractor shall attend weekly project meetings scheduled by the Government and special progress meetings as required. Contractor shall make physical arrangements for meetings. Contractor shall prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes and distribute copies within three days to participants and those affected by decisions made. Attendance Required: Contractor, major subcontractors and suppliers, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. The Contractor's Superintendent shall attend scheduled project meetings. A Monthly Progress Report shall be submitted with the progress schedule, and shall address potential factors of delay, deficiencies, material delivery schedules, submittals, and safety issues. A Project Submittal Schedule shall be submitted showing full coordination with the project schedule. All products and tests under each submittal number shall be prioritized and linked to the progress schedule. Site Mobilization Meeting
B.
C. D.
E.
1.4.1
Agenda: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Construction facilities and controls provided by Government. Temporary utilities provided by Government. Security and housekeeping procedures. Schedules. Procedures for testing. Procedures for maintaining record documents. Requirements for start-up of equipment. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. Progress Meetings
1.4.1.1 Agenda: A. B. C. D. E.
Review minutes of previous meetings. Review of work progress. Field observations, problems and decisions. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. Section 01 31 19 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. 1.4.2 A.
Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. Maintenance of progress schedule. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. Planned progress during succeeding work period. Coordination of projected progress. Maintenance of quality and work standards. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. Safety. Review RFI's. Other related business. Pre-Installation Meetings When required by specification, convene a pre-installation meeting prior to commencing work of the Section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by the work. Notify Contracting Officer one week in advance of meeting date. Contractor shall prepare agenda, preside at meeting, record minutes and distribute copies to participants within three days after meeting, with copy to Contracting Officer and all attendees. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related work. PRODUCTS
B.
C. D.
E.
PART 2
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE) ER 1-1-11 (1995) Progress, Schedules, and Network Analysis Systems
1.2
QUALIFICATIONS
Designate a Lead Scheduler to be responsible for the preparation of the schedule and work specified under this Section 01 32 01.00 10. The Lead Scheduler shall be experienced in scheduling projects similar in nature to this project and shall be experienced in the use of the scheduling software that meets the requirements of this specification. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Applicable PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Prepare for approval a Project Schedule, as specified herein, pursuant to the Contract Clause, SCHEDULE FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS. Show in the schedule the sequence in which the Contractor proposes to perform the work and dates on which the Contractor contemplates starting and completing all schedule activities. The schedule must be a forward planning as well as a project monitoring tool. The schedule shall be cost loaded, resource loaded, and activity coded. The schedule will provide the basis for all progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit any schedule within the time prescribed, the Contracting Officer may withhold approval of progress payments until the Contractor submits the required schedule. 3.1.1 Approved Project Schedule
Use the approved Project Schedule to measure the progress of the work and to aid in evaluating time extensions. At contract award, the Pre-Award Project Schedule shall be the basis of the Approved Project Schedule. Thereafter, the Approved Project Schedule shall be the most recently Government approved submittal, in sequence: preliminary schedule, initial schedule, and periodic updates. 3.1.2 Schedule Status Reports If, in the
Provide a Schedule Status Report on at least a monthly basis. Issued for Construction Section 01 32 01.00 10 - Page 1 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
opinion of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor falls behind the approved schedule, the Contractor shall take steps necessary to improve its progress including those that may be required by the Contracting Officer, without additional cost to the Government. In this circumstance, the Contracting Officer may require the Contractor to increase the number of shifts, overtime operations, days of work, and/or the amount of construction plant, and to submit for approval any supplementary schedule or schedules as the Contracting Officer deems necessary to demonstrate how the approved rate of progress will be regained. 3.1.3 Default Terms
Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the Contracting Officer shall be grounds for a determination by the Contracting Officer that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with sufficient diligence to ensure completion within the time specified in the contract. Upon making this determination, the Contracting Officer may terminate the Contractor's right to proceed with the work, or any separable part of it, in accordance with the default terms of the contract. 3.2 BASIS FOR PAYMENT AND COST LOADING
Use the schedule as the basis for determining contract earnings during each update period and therefore the amount of each progress payment. Lack of an approved schedule update or qualified scheduling personnel will result in an inability of the Contracting Officer to evaluate contract earned value for the purposes of payment. Failure of the Contractor to provide all required information will result in the disapproval of the preliminary, initial and subsequent schedule updates. In the event schedule revisions are directed by the Contracting Officer and those revisions have not been included in subsequent revisions or updates, the Contracting Officer may hold retainage up to the maximum allowed by contract, each payment period, until such revisions to the Project Schedule have been made. Activity cost loading shall be reasonable, as determined by the Contracting Officer. The aggregate value of all activities coded to a contract CLIN shall equal the value of the CLIN on the Schedule. 3.3 a. PROJECT SCHEDULE DETAILED REQUIREMENTS The computer software system utilized to produce and update the Project Schedule shall be capable of meeting all requirements of this specification. Failure of the Contractor to meet the requirements of this specification will result in the disapproval of the schedule. Scheduling software that meets the activity coding structure defined in the Standard Data Exchange Format (SDEF) in ER 1-1-11 are Primavera Project Planner (P3) by Primavera, and Open Plan by Deltek. Scheduling requirements shall conform to QCS specification Section 01 45 02.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS). These requirements include, but are not limited to, the submittal schedule, categories of work and features of work coding's. The Contractor's scheduling program shall be compatible with RMS-W, Contractor QC Module and importable into RMS-W. The website for GCS-W (Contractor's QC Module) is: http://winrms.usace.army.mil/contractor's.htm. Critical Path Method
b.
3.3.1
Use the Critical Path Method (CPM) of network calculation to generate the Project Schedule. Prepare the Project Schedule using the Precedence Issued for Construction Section 01 32 01.00 10 - Page 2 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
Diagram Method (PDM). 3.3.2 Level of Detail Required
Develop the Project Schedule to an appropriate level of detail. Failure to develop and update the Project Schedule and provide data to an appropriate level of detail, as determined by the Contracting Officer, will result in disapproval of the schedule. The Contracting Officer will consider, but is not limited to, the following characteristics and requirements to determine appropriate level of detail to be used in the Project Schedule: 3.3.2.1 Activity Durations
Contractor submissions shall follow the direction of the Contracting Office regarding reasonable activity durations. Reasonable activity durations are those that allow the progress of ongoing activities to be accurately determined between update periods (usually less than 2 percent of all non-procurement activities shall have Original Durations (OD) greater than 20 work days or 30 calendar days). Procurement activities are defined herein. 3.3.2.2 Procurement Activities
The schedule must include activities associated with the submittal, approval, procurement, fabrication and delivery of long lead materials, equipment, fabricated assemblies and supplies. Long lead procurement activities are those with an anticipated procurement sequence of over 90 calendar days. A typical procurement sequence includes, but are not limited to the following string of activities: submit, approve, procure, fabricate, and deliver. 3.3.2.3 Mandatory Tasks/Critical Activities
The following activities shall be listed as separate line activities on the Contractor's Project Schedule; included and properly scheduled, and each task shall be assigned a reasonable time, duration and cost: 1. 2. Start Project / Notice To Proceed (NTP). Specification Section 01 31 11 Initial "Suspended Loading Coordination and Limitations Pre-Installation Meeting. 3. Specification Section 01 31 15 Pre-construction Submittal: Coordinator Proposal. 4. Specification Section 01 31 15 Pre-construction Submittal: Containment Construction Schedule. 5. Specification Section 01 35 29 Pre-construction Submittal: APP and Crane Critical Lift Plan. 6. Specification Section 01 35 29 Pre-construction Submittal: AHA. 7. Specification Section 01 57 20.00 10 Pre-construction Submittal: Environmental Protection Plan. 8. Specification Section 01 64 02 required Dates for Government to satisfy Coordination of Activities 9. Specification Section 01 81 19 Pre-construction Submittal: Construction IAQ Mgmt Plan during Construction 10. Specification Section 01 81 19 Pre-construction Submittal: Construction IAQ Mgmt Plan before Occupancy. Note: Parts A through E below refer to sections of the building as indicated on A0.2 series drawings and as follows: Part A = BSL-2/Atrium (PARTS 6 THROUGH 9). Issued for Construction Section 01 32 01.00 10 - Page 3 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
PART PART PART PART 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62.
B C D E
= = = =
ABSL-2/Logistics (between BSL-3 (including biowaste BSL-4 (including biowaste Clinic/Headquarters (Part
column lines W19 and W25. level and mechanical areas. level and mechanical areas. 1)
PART A: Steel ABM Concluded & Issued to Foundry. PART B: Steel ABM Concluded & Issued to Foundry PART C: Steel ABM Concluded & Issued to Foundry PART D: Steel ABM Concluded & Issued to Foundry PART E: Steel ABM Concluded & Issued to Foundry PART A: Structural Steel Shop Drawings submission PART B: Structural Steel Shop Drawings submission PART C: Structural Steel Shop Drawings submission PART D: Concrete and Steel Shop Drawings submission PART E: Structural Steel Shop Drawings submission PART A: Start Structural Steel Delivery PART B: Start Structural Steel Delivery PART C: Start Structural Steel Delivery PART D: Start Structural Steel Delivery PART E: Start Structural Steel Delivery PART A: Complete Structural Steel Delivery PART B: Complete Structural Steel Delivery PART C: Complete Structural Steel Delivery PART D: Complete Structural Steel Delivery PART E: Complete Structural Steel Delivery PART A: Start Structural Steel Erection PART B: Start Structural Steel Erection PART C: Start Structural Steel Erection PART D: Start Structural Steel and Concrete Erection PART E: Start Structural Steel Erection PART A: Complete Final Slab on Deck (SOD) PART B: Complete Final SOD PART C: Complete Final SOD PART D: Complete Final SOD PART E: Complete Final SOD High Containment Mock Up Submittals Ready for Government Approval High Containment Mock Up Ready for Government Approval Start Caissons @ High Containment Block Complete Caissons @ High Containment Block Start Cast-In-Place (CIP) Concrete @ High Containment Block Complete Cast-In-Place (CIP) Concrete @ High Containment Block Complete Curing @ High Containment Block Start Steel Erection above High Containment Block Commencement of critical GFGI Equipment deliveries for @ BSL 2 Mobilize @ SSP Interface/Establish Right-of-Way (ROW) Start Excavation @ SSP Interface Start SOE @ SSP Interface Tie In CIP Concrete Tunnel @ SSP Tunnel Stub-Out @ SSP Interface Complete backfill above CIP Concrete Tunnel & Utilities @ SSP Interface Demobilize from SSP Interface surface & return SSP Interface to SSP GC Start Basement Excavation outside of SSP Interface Start SOE @ Basement Walls out of SSP Interface Start Basement Wall Foundations outside of SSP Interface Complete Basement Walls outside of SSP Interface Start Caissons within Basement Wall excavation layback @ PART B/4-5 Start Caissons within Basement Wall excavation layback @ PART A/8-9 Structural Concrete Ready for PART B Steel Erection @ Basement Wall
Issued for Construction Section 01 32 01.00 10 - Page 4 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
excavation layback @ PART B/4-5 63. Structural Concrete Ready for PART A Steel Erection @ Basement Wall excavation layback @ PART A/8-9 64. Steam Sterilization Plant (SSP) Tie In Complete 67. SSP Needed for Commissioning 65. CUP Steam Tie In Complete 66. CUP Steam Needed for Commissioning 67. CUP Chilled Water Tie In Complete 68. CUP Chilled Water Needed for Commissioning 69. CUP Electricity Tie In Complete 70. CUP Electricity Needed for Commissioning 71. USAG Water Tie In Complete 72. USAG Water Needed for Commissioning 73. USAG Gas Tie In Complete 74. USAG Gas Needed for Commissioning 75. Specification Section 01 91 02 - One Activity for each of the specified System Tests 76. Specification Section 01 91 03 - One Activity for each of the specified Integrated System Tests 77. Specification Section 01 91 04 - BSL 3 fully completed with NO punch list items remaining 78. Specification Section 01 91 04 - BSL 4 fully completed with NO punch list items remaining 79. Substantial Completion Certificate 80. Specification Section 01 91 01 - FOST Start of Steady State Baseline Monitoring 81. Specification Section 01 91 01 - FOST End of Steady State Baseline Monitoring 82. FOST Acceptance/Project Complete 101.Other Critical Submittals. 83 Temporary Construction including trailers, fencing and services to trailers. 84. Each Unit Price item established in Bid Schedule. 85. Each Optional bid Item awarded. 86. Submission of mechanical/electrical/information systems layout drawings. 87. Submission and approval of O & M manuals. 88. Submission and approval of as-built drawings (Record Drawings). 89. Submission and approval of 1354 data and installed equipment lists. 90. Submission and approval of testing and air balance (TAB). 91. Incremental funding milestones per contract clause LIMITATION OF GOVERNMENT'S OBLIGATION 3.3.2.4 Government Activities
Show Government and other agency activities that could impact progress. These activities include, but are not limited to, approvals, inspections, utility tie-ins. Key milestone dates for specific Government activities include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. CUP Thermal Utilidor Completion: 1 January 2010. 1408 Loading Dock Relocation Completion: 31 May 2009. Demolition of buildings 1432, 1423, 1419, 1419a and associated utilities Completion: 31 May 2009. SSP Operational: 30 June 2011. CUP Steam available: 30 June 2011. CUP Chilled Water available: 30 June 2011. CUP Electrical Service available: 30 June 2011.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.3.2.5
Standard Activity Coding Dictionary
Use the activity coding structure defined in the Standard Data Exchange Format (SDEF) in ER 1-1-11, Appendix A. This exact structure is mandatory, even if some fields are not used. A template SDEF compatible schedule backup file (sdef.prx) is available on the QCS website: www.rmssupport.com. The SDEF format is as follows: Field Activity Code WRKP RESP AREA MODF BIDI PHAS CATW FOW1 FOW2 FOW3
Length 3 4 4 6 6 2 1 10 10 10
Description Workers per Day Responsible Party (e.g., GC, subcontractor, USACE) Area of Work Modification or REA number Bid Item (CLIN) Phase of Work Category of Work Feature of Work (used up to 10 characters in length) Feature of Work (used up to 20 characters in length) Feature of Work (used up to 30 characters in length)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3.3.2.6
Activity Responsibility Coding (RESP)
Assign responsibility Code for all activities to the Prime Contractor, Subcontractor or Government agency responsible for performing the activity. Activities coded with a Government Responsibility code include, but are not limited to: Government approvals, Government design reviews, environmental permit approvals by State regulators, Government Furnished and Installed Equipment (GFGI) and all activities listed in paragraph Government Activities. Activities shall not have more than one Responsibility Code. Examples of acceptable activity code values are: DOR (for the designer of record); ELEC (for the electrical subcontractor); MECH (for the mechanical subcontractor); and GOVT (for USACE). Unacceptable code values are abbreviations of the names of subcontractors. 3.3.2.7 Activity Work Area Coding
Assign Work Area code to activities based upon the work area in which the activity occurs. Define work areas based on resource constraints or space constraints that would preclude a resource, such as a particular trade or craft work crew, from working in more than one work area at a time due to restraints on resources or space. Examples of Work Area Coding include different areas within a floor of a building, different floors within a building, and different buildings within a complex of buildings. Activities shall not have more than one Work Area Code. Not all activities are required to be Work Area coded. A lack of Work Area coding will indicate the activity is not resource or space constrained. 3.3.2.8 (MODF) Contract Changes/Requests for Equitable Adjustment (REA) Coding
Assign Activity code to any activity or sequence of activities added to the schedule as a result of a Contract Modification, when approved by the Contracting Officer, with a Contract Changes/REA Code. Key all Code values to the Government's modification numbering system. Any activity or sequence of activities added to the schedule as a result of alleged constructive changes made by the Government may be added to a copy of the current schedule, subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer. Issued for Construction Section 01 32 01.00 10 - Page 6 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
Assign Activity codes for these activities with a Contract Changes/REA Code. Key the code values to the Contractor's numbering system. Approval to add these activities does not necessarily mean the Government accepts responsibility and therefore liability for such activities and any associated impacts to the schedule, but rather the Government recognizes such activities are appropriately added to the schedule for the purposes of maintaining a realistic and meaningful schedule. Such activities shall not be Responsibility Coded to the Government unless approved. An activity shall not have more than one Contract Changes/REA Code. 3.3.2.9 Contract Line Item (CLIN) Coding (BIDI)
Code all activities to the CLIN on the Contract Line Item Schedule to which the activity belongs. An activity shall not contain more than one CLIN Item Code. CLIN Item code all activities, even when an activity is not cost loaded. 3.3.2.10 Category of Work Coding (CATW)
Assign Category of Work Code to all Activities based upon the category of work to which the activity belongs. Category of Work Code must include, but is not limited to: Construction Submittal approvals, Acceptance, Procurement, Fabrication, Delivery, Weather Sensitive Installation, Non-Weather Sensitive Installation, Start-Up, Test and Turnover. Assign a Category of Work Code to each activity. Each activity shall have only one Category of Work Code. 3.3.2.11 Definable Features of Work Coding (FOW1, FOW2, FOW3)
Assign a Definable Feature of Work Code to appropriate activities based on the definable feature of work to which the activity belongs. Definable Feature of Work is defined in Specification Section 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL under Part 3 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN. An activity shall not have more than one Definable Feature of Work Code. Not all activities are required to be Definable Feature of Work Coded. 3.3.3 Scheduled Project Completion and Activity Calendars
The schedule interval shall extend from NTP date through the required contract duration. The contract completion activity (End Project) shall finish based on the required contract duration in the accepted contract proposal, as adjusted for any approved contract time extensions. The first scheduled work period shall be the day after NTP is acknowledged by the Contractor. Schedule activities on a calendar to which the activity logically belongs. Activities may be assigned to a 7 day calendar when the contract assigns calendar day durations for the activity such as a Government Acceptance activity. If the Contractor intends to perform physical work less than seven days per week, schedule the associated activities on a calendar with non-work periods identified including weekends and holidays. Original durations must account for anticipated normal adverse weather. The Government will interpret all work periods not identified as non-work periods on each calendar as meaning the Contractor intends to perform work during those periods. 3.3.3.1 Project Start Date
The schedule shall start on the date the NTP is acknowledged. Include as the first activity in the project schedule an activity called "Start Project"(or NTP). The "Start Project" activity shall have an "ES" Issued for Construction Section 01 32 01.00 10 - Page 7 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
constraint date equal to the date that the NTP was acknowledged, and a zero day duration. 3.3.3.2 Schedule Constraints and Open Ended Logic
Constrain completion of the last activity in the schedule by the contract duration. Schedule calculations shall result in a negative float when the calculated early finish date of the last activity is later than the contract completion date. Include as the last activity in the project schedule an activity called "End Project". The "End Project" activity shall have an "LF" constraint date equal to the contract completion date for the project, and with a zero day duration or by using the "project must finish by" date in the scheduling software. The schedule shall have no constrained dates other than those specified in the contract. The use of artificial float constraints such as "zero fee float" or "zero total float" are typically prohibited. There shall only be 2 open ended activities: Start Project (or NTP) with no predecessor logic and End Project with no successor logic. 3.3.3.3 Early Project Completion
In the event the Preliminary or Initial project schedule calculates an early completion date of the last activity prior to the contract completion date, the Contractor shall identify those activities that it intends to accelerate and/or those activities that are scheduled in parallel to support the Contractor's "early" completion. The last activity shall have a late finish constraint equal to the contract completion date and the schedule will calculate positive float. The Government will not approve an early completion schedule with zero float on the longest path. The Government is under no obligation to accelerate activities for which it is responsible to support a proposed early contract completion. 3.3.4 Default Progress Data Disallowed
Do not automatically update Actual Start and Finish dates with default mechanisms that may be included in the scheduling software. Activity Actual Start (AS) and Actual Finish (AF) dates assigned during the updating process shall match those dates provided from Contractor Quality Control Reports. Failure of the Contractor to document the AS and AF dates on the Daily Quality Control report for every in-progress or completed activity, and failure to ensure that the data contained on the Daily Quality Control reports is the sole basis for schedule updating shall result in the disapproval of the Contractor's updated schedule and the inability of the Contracting Officer to evaluate Contractor progress for payment purposes. Updating of the percent complete and the remaining duration of any activity shall be independent functions. Disable program features which calculate one of these parameters from the other. 3.3.5 Out-of-Sequence Progress
Activities that have progressed before all preceding logic has been satisfied (Out-of-Sequence Progress) will be allowed only on a case-by-case basis subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Propose logic corrections to eliminate all out of sequence progress or justify not changing the sequencing for approval prior to submitting an updated project schedule. Correct out of sequence progress that continues for more than two update cycles by logic revision, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.3.6
Negative Lags and Start to Finish Relationships
Lag durations contained in the project schedule shall not have a negative value. Do not use Start to Finish (SF) relationships. 3.3.7 Calculation Mode
Schedule calculations shall retain the logic between predecessors and successors even when the successor activity starts and the predecessor activity has not finished. Software features that in effect sever the tie between predecessor and successor activities when the successor has started and the predecessor logic is not satisfied ("progress override") will not be allowed. 3.3.8 Milestones
The schedule must include milestone activities for each significant project event including but not limited to: milestone activities including funding milestones; foundation/substructure construction complete; steel superstructure construction complete; concrete superstructure construction complete; building enclosure complete to allow the initiation of finish activities; permanent HVAC complete; permanent power complete; Commissioning Integrated System Testing complete; FOST complete; Beneficial Occupancy Date complete. 3.3.9 Date Constraints
The Contractor shall explain to the Contracting Officer by written narrative the rationale for any and all date constraints such as "Early Start", "Early Finish", "Late Start", "Late Finish", "Mandatory Start" and "Mandatory Finish'. Date constraints shall only be implemented by the Contractor after the Contracting Officer approves their use. 3.3.10 Float Constraints
Use of Float Constraints such as "Zero Free Float", and "Zero Total Float" are prohibited. 3.3.11 Relationships
The Contractor shall explain to the Contracting Officer by written narrative the rationale for any and all Relationships other than "Finish-To-Start" relationships and any and all "Lagged Relationships" and these relationships shall only be implemented by the Contractor after the Contracting Officer approves their use. 3.3.12 Resource Loading
The schedule shall show the planned workforce (crew size and number of crews) and the major pieces of equipment required for each activity on the schedule. 3.4 PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMISSIONS
The Pre-award Project Schedule shall form the basis of these submissions with updates/revisions as required. Provide the submissions as described below. The data CD, reports, and network diagrams required for each submission are contained in paragraph Issued for Construction Section 01 32 01.00 10 - Page 9 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS. 3.4.1 Preliminary Project Schedule Submission
Submit the Preliminary Project Schedule, defining the Contractor's planned operations for the first 90 calendar days for approval within 15 calendar days after the NTP is acknowledged as a revision to the Pre-Award Project Schedule. The approved Preliminary Project Schedule will be used for payment purposes not to exceed 90 calendar days after NTP and for evaluating time extensions until approval of the initial project schedule. Completely cost load the Preliminary Project Schedule to balance the contract award CLINS shown on the Price Schedule. Detail it for the first 90 calendar days. It may be summary in nature for the remaining performance period. It must be early start and late finish constrained and logically tied as previously specified. The Preliminary Project Schedule forms the basis for the Initial Project Schedule specified herein and must include all of the required Plan and Program preparations, submissions and approvals identified in the contract (for example, Quality Control Plan, Safety Plan, and Environmental Protection Plan) as well as permitting activities, and other non-construction activities intended to occur within the first 90 calendar days. Schedule construction activities planned for the first 90 calendar days after NTP. Constrain planned construction activities by Government acceptance of the specified Program and Plan approvals. Activity code any activities that are summary in nature after the first 90 calendar days with Responsibility Code (RESP) and Feature of Work code (FOW1, FOW2, FOW3). 3.4.2 Initial Project Schedule Submission
Submit the Initial Project Schedule for approval within 30 calendar days after approval of the Preliminary Schedule as a revision to the Preliminary Project Schedule. The schedule shall demonstrate a reasonable and realistic sequence of activities which represent all work through the entire contract performance period. The Initial Schedule shall be at a reasonable level of detail as determined by the Contracting Officer. 3.4.3 Periodic Schedule Updates
Based on the result of the meeting, specified in PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS, submit periodic schedule updates. These submissions will enable the Contracting Officer to assess Contractor's progress. If the Contractor fails or refuses to furnish the information and project schedule data, which in the judgment of the Contracting Officer or authorized representative is necessary for verifying the Contractor's progress, the Contractor shall be deemed not to have provided an estimate upon which progress payment may be made. 3.4.3.1 Periodic Schedule Updates Definition
Updating shall be defined as consisting of only: a. b. Inserting an "Actual Start" date against an "As-Planned" activity Inserting an "Actual Finish" date against an "As-Planned" or "In-Progress" activity. Inserting a "Percent Complete" value against an "As-Planned" activity. Modifying a "Percent Complete" value against an "In-Progress" activity.
c. d.
Issued for ConstructionSection 01 32 01.00 10 - Page 10 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
e.
Modifying a "Remaining Duration" value of an "In-Progress" activity, if the modified "Remaining Duration" value does not exceed the already approved "Remaining Duration" value. Inserting a "Remaining Duration" value of an "As-Planned" activity, if the inserted "Remaining Duration" value does not exceed the already approved "Remaining Duration" value. Changing the Data Set "Data Date". Periodic Schedule Update Reviews
f.
g.
3.4.3.2
"Actual Start" dates, "Actual Finish" dates, "Percent Complete" values, "Remaining Duration" values and the changed "Data Date" shall be mutually established and signed off by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer on a pencil copy basis prior to the Contractor performing computer data entry. Update Submission packages shall then be transmitted by the Contractor to the Contracting Officer within 5 calendar days of the changed Data Date. 3.4.4 Schedule Revisions
Any and all Data Set changes other than for items in Paragraph 3.4.3.1 are defined as "Revisions". To implement Revisions, the Contractor must adhere to the following procedure: a. Within 5 Calendar Days of transmitting an Update Submission package to the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall transmit a written narrative of requested revisions together with an electronic copy (PRX) of the requested Revised Data Set. Within 5 calendar days of receiving the written narrative and the electronic copy, the Contracting Officer will render a determination as to which requested revisions are acceptable and approved. Within 5 calendar days of receiving the Contracting Officer's determination, the Contractor shall implement acceptable and approved revisions and shall transmit a Written Narrative and electronic copy (PRX) of the resultant approved Data Set. This Data Set shall be used for the next Update. SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
b.
c.
3.5
Submit the following items for the Preliminary Schedule, Initial Schedule, every Periodic Schedule Updated, every Revision Request and every Revision As-Approved throughout the life of the project. 3.5.1 Data CD's
Provide two sets of data CD's containing the project schedule in the backup format. Each CD shall also contain all previous update backup files. File medium shall be CD. Label each CD indicating the type of schedule (Preliminary, Initial, Update), full contract number, Data Date and file name. Each schedule shall have a unique file name as determined by the Contractor.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.5.2
Narrative Report
Provide a Narrative Report with the Preliminary, Initial, and each Periodic Update of the project schedule, as the basis of the progress payment request. The Narrative Report shall include: a description of activities along the 2 most critical paths where the total float is less than or equal to 20 work days, a description of current and anticipated problem areas or delaying factors and their impact, and an explanation of corrective actions taken or required to be taken. The narrative report is expected to communicate to the Government, the Contractor's thorough analysis of the schedule output and its plans to compensate for any problems, either current or potential, which are revealed through that analysis. Identify and explain why any activities that, based their calculated late dates, should have either started or finished during the update period but did not. All Narratives shall include a current explanation of Cost, Manpower/Crew Sizes and Equipment Resource-Loading. 3.5.3 Approved Changes Verification
Include only those project schedule changes in the schedule submission that have been previously approved by the Contracting Officer. The Narrative Report shall specifically reference, on an activity by activity basis, all changes made since the previous period and relate each change to documented, approved schedule changes. 3.5.4 Schedule Reports
The format, filtering, organizing and sorting for each schedule report shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer. Typically reports shall contain: Activity Numbers, Activity Description, Original Duration, Remaining Duration, Early Start Date, Early Finish Date, Late Start Date, Late Finish Date, Total Float, Actual Start Date, Actual Finish Date, and Percent Complete. The following lists typical reports that will be requested. One or all of these reports may be requested for each schedule submission. 3.5.4.1 Activity Report
A list of all activities sorted according to activity number. 3.5.4.2 Logic Report
A list of detailed predecessor and successor activities for every activity in ascending order by activity number. 3.5.4.3 Total Float Report
A list of all incomplete activities sorted in ascending order of total float. List activities which have the same amount of total float in ascending order of Early Start Dates. Do not show completed activities on this report. 3.5.4.4 Earnings Report by CLIN
A compilation of the Contractor's Total Earnings on the project from the NTP to the data date. This report shall reflect the earnings of specific activities based on the agreements made in the schedule update meeting defined herein. Provided that the Contractor has furnished a complete schedule update, this report shall serve as the basis of determining Issued for ConstructionSection 01 32 01.00 10 - Page 12 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
progress payments. Group activities by CLIN item number and sort by activity number. This report shall: sum all activities coded to a particular CLIN and provide a CLIN item percent earned value; and complete and sum CLIN items to provide a total project percent complete. The printed report shall contain, for each activity: the Activity Number, Activity Description, Original Budgeted Amount, Total Quantity, Quantity to Date, Percent Complete (based on cost), and Earnings to Date. 3.5.5 Network Diagram
The network diagram is required for the Preliminary, Initial and Periodic Updates. The network diagram shall depict and display the order and interdependence of activities and the sequence in which the work is to be accomplished. The Contracting Officer will use, but is not limited to, the following conditions to review compliance with this paragraph: 3.5.5.1 Continuous Flow
Diagrams shall show a continuous flow from left to right with no arrows from right to left. Show the activity number, description, duration, and estimated earned value on the diagram. 3.5.5.2 Project Milestone Dates
Show dates on the diagram for start of project, any contract required interim milestone dates as specified under Milestones subparagraph above, including funding milestone dates, and contract completion date. 3.5.5.3 Critical Path
Clearly show the critical path. 3.5.5.4 Banding
Organize activities as directed to assist in the understanding of the activity sequence. Typically, this flow will group activities by category of work, work area and/or responsibility. 3.5.5.5 S-Curves
Earnings curves showing projected early and late earnings and earnings to date. 3.5.5.6 Duration Values
When the Contractor presents, for any one Activity, an "Original Duration" value and/or a "Remaining Duration" value, then the Contractor is deemed to be stating that eight work hours of productive work shall be accomplished by the crew/crews associated with the Activity each and every work day stated net-net of transport/break/security clearance time. 3.6 MONTHLY SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS
Conduct monthly schedule update meetings for the purposes of reviewing the Contractor's proposed revisions, determining causes for delay, correcting logic, maintaining schedule accuracy and determining earned value. Meetings shall occur at least monthly within five days of the proposed schedule data date and after the Contractor has updated the schedule with Government concurrence as specified under Periodic Schedule Updates Issued for ConstructionSection 01 32 01.00 10 - Page 13 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
Definition. Provide a computer with the scheduling software loaded and a projector during the meeting which allows all meeting participants to view the proposed schedule update during the meeting. The meeting and resultant approvable schedule update shall be a condition precedent to a formal submission of the update as described in SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS and to the submission of an invoice for payment. The meeting will be a working interactive exchange which will allow the Government and the Contractor the opportunity to review the updated schedule on a real time and interactive basis. The Contractor's Lead Scheduler shall organize, sort, filter and schedule the update as requested by the Government. The meeting will last no longer than 8 hours. A rough draft of the proposed activity logic revisions and narrative report shall be provided to the Government 48 hours in advance of the meeting. The Contractor's Project Manager and Lead Scheduler shall attend the meeting. 3.6.1 Update Submission Following Update Meeting
Submit a complete update of the project schedule containing approved progress, revisions, and adjustments, pursuant to paragraph SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS not later than 4 working days after the periodic schedule update meeting, reflecting only those changes approved during the previous update meeting. 3.6.2 Status of Activities
Update information, including Actual Start Dates (AS), Actual Finish Dates (AF), Remaining Durations (RD), and Percent Complete shall be subject to the approval of the Government prior to the meeting. As a minimum, address the following items on an activity by activity basis during each progress meeting. 3.6.2.1 Start and Finish Dates
Accurately show the status of the AS and/or AF dates for each activity currently in-progress or completed since the last update. The Government may allow an AF date to be assigned with the percent complete less than 100% to account for the value of work remaining but not restraining successor activities. Only assign AS dates when actual progress occurs on an activity. 3.6.2.2 Remaining Duration
Update the estimated RD for all incomplete activities independent of Percent Complete. Remaining Durations may exceed the activity OD or may exceed the activity's prior update RD if the Government considers the current OD or RD to be understated b deficiencies that must be corrected that restrain successor activities. 3.6.2.3 Percent Complete
Update the percent complete for each activity started, based on the realistic assessment of earned value. Activities which are complete but for remaining minor punch list work and which do not restrain the initiation of successor activities may be declared 100 percent complete. To allow for proper schedule management, cost load the correction of punch list from Government pre-final inspection activity(ies) not less than 1 percent of the total contract value, which activity(ies) may be declared 100 percent complete upon completion and correction of all punch list work identified during Government pre-final inspection(s). Issued for ConstructionSection 01 32 01.00 10 - Page 14 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.6.2.4
Logic Changes
Specifically identify and discuss all logic changes pertaining to NTP on change orders, change orders to be incorporated into the schedule, Contractor proposed changes in work sequence, corrections to schedule logic for out-of-sequence progress, and other changes that have been made pursuant to contract provisions. The Government will only approve logic revisions for the purpose of keeping the schedule valid in terms of its usefulness in calculating a realistic completion date, correcting erroneous logic ties, and accurately sequencing the work. 3.6.2.5 Other Changes
Other changes required due to delays in completion of any activity or group of activities include: 1) delays beyond the Contractor's control, such as strikes and unusual weather. 2) delays encountered due to submittals, Government Activities, deliveries or work stoppages which make re-planning the work necessary. 3) Changes required to correct a schedule that does not represent the actual or planned prosecution and progress of the work. 3.7 REQUESTS FOR TIME EXTENSIONS
In the event the Contractor believes it is entitled to an extension of the contract performance period, completion date, or any interim milestone date, furnish the following for a determination by the Contracting Officer: justification, project schedule data, and supporting evidence as the Contracting Officer may deem necessary. Submission of proof of excusable delay, based on revised activity logic, duration, and costs (updated to the specific date that the delay occurred) is a condition precedent to any approvals by the Government. In response to each Request For Proposal issued by the Government, the Contractor shall submit a schedule impact analysis demonstrating whether or not the change contemplated by the Government impacts the critical path. 3.7.1 Justification of Delay
The project schedule shall clearly display that the Contractor has used, in full, all the float time available for the work involved with this request. The Contracting Officer's determination as to the number of allowable days of contract extension shall be based upon the approved schedule in effect for the time period in question, and other factual information. Actual delays that are found to be caused by the Contractor's own actions, which result in a calculated schedule delay, will not be a cause for an extension to the performance period, completion date, or any interim milestone date. 3.7.2 a. Submission Requirements Submit a justification for each request for a change in the contract completion date based upon the most recent schedule update at the time of the NTP or constructive direction issued for the change. Such a request shall be in accordance with the requirements of other appropriate Contract Clauses and shall include, as a minimum: 1. 2. 3. 4. A list of affected activities, with their associated project schedule activity number. A brief explanation of the causes of the change. An analysis of the overall impact of the changes proposed. A sub-network of the affected area.
Ft. Detrick, MD
b.
Identify activities impacted in each justification for change by a unique activity code contained in the required data file. Additional Submission Requirements
3.7.3
The Contracting Officer may request an interim update with revised activities for any requested time extension of over 2 weeks. Provide this disk within 4 days of the Contracting Officer's request. 3.8 DIRECTED CHANGES
If the NTP is issued for changes prior to settlement of price and/or time, submit proposed schedule revisions to the Contracting Officer within 2 weeks of the NTP being issued. The Contracting Officer will approve proposed revisions to the schedule prior to inclusion of those changes within the project schedule. If the Contractor fails to submit the proposed revisions, the Contracting Officer may furnish the Contractor with suggested revisions to the project schedule. The Contractor shall include these revisions in the project schedule until revisions are submitted, and final changes and impacts have been negotiated. If the Contractor has any objections to the revisions furnished by the Contracting Officer, advise the Contracting Officer within 2 weeks of receipt of the revisions. Regardless of the objections, the Contractor shall continue to update the schedule with the Contracting Officer's revisions until a mutual agreement in the revisions is reached. If the Contractor fails to submit alternative revisions within 2 weeks of receipt of the Contracting Officer's proposed revisions, the Contractor will be deemed to have concurred with the Contracting Officer's proposed revisions. The proposed revisions will then be the basis for an equitable adjustment for performance of the work. 3.9 a. WEEKLY PROGRESS MEETINGS The Government and the Contractor shall meet weekly (or as otherwise required) as described in paragraph PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS for the purpose of jointly reviewing the actual progress of the project as compared to the as planned progress and to review planned activities for the upcoming two weeks. The then current and approved schedule update shall be used for the purposes of this meeting and for the production and review of reports. The Contractor's Project Manager and the Authorized Representative of the Contracting Officer shall attend. The weekly progress meeting will address the status of RFI's, RFP's and Submittals. Provide a bar chart produced by the scheduling software, organized by Total Float and Sorted by Early Start Date, and a two week "look-ahead" schedule by filtering all schedule activities to show only current ongoing activities and activities schedule to start during the upcoming two weeks, organized by Work Area Code (AREA) and sorted by Early Start Date. The Government and the Contractor shall jointly review the reports. If it appears that activities on the longest path(s) which are currently driving the calculated completion date (driving activities), are not progressing satisfactorily and therefore could jeopardize timely project completion, corrective action must be taken immediately. Corrective action includes but is not limited to: increasing the number of work crews; increasing the number of work shifts; increasing the number of hours worked per shift; and determining if Government
b.
c.
Ft. Detrick, MD
responsibility coded activities require Government corrective action. 3.10 OWNERSHIP OF FLOAT
Float available in the schedule, at any time, shall not be considered for the exclusive use of either the Government or the Contractor. 3.11 TRANSFER OF SCHEDULE DATA INTO RMS/QCS
The Contractor shall download and upload the schedule data into the Resident Management System (RMS) prior to RMS databases being transferred to the Government and is considered to be additional supporting data in a form and detail required by the Contracting Officer pursuant to FAR 52.232-5 - Payments under Fixed-Price Construction Contracts. The receipt of a proper payment request pursuant to FAR 52.232-27 - Prompt Payment for Construction Contracts is contingent upon the Government receiving both acceptable and approvable hard copies and electronic export from QCS of the application for progress payment. 3.12 DOLLAR AMOUNTS APPLIED TO ACTIVITIES
The Contractor shall incorporate the following requirements in addition to those specified above. The dollar amounts specified are to be applied to the Contractor's scheduling activities "schedule of values". these are not bid amounts. Additional Scheduling Requirements: 3.12.1 Preparation of Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals
The Contractor shall provide a separate activity for the preparation and submission of all O and M manuals. The associated cost assessed for this activity shall be determined by the Contractor, but not less than $250,000 shall be scheduled for the activity of O & M manual preparation, with Contracting Officer approval of amount established. 3.12.2 Commissioning Activity for HVAC
The Contractor shall provide a separate activity for commissioning of the HVAC system. The activity shall be a minimum 180 days long. The associated cost shall be a minimum scheduled value of 3 percent of the total HVAC Cost in an amount established by the Contractor and approved by the Contracting Officer. HVAC activity shall be broken down into subsidiary activities according to the systems listed in Section 23 08 00 Commissioning of Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems. 3.12.3 Additional Commissioning Requirements separate activities listed a minimum duration of 15 the Contractor and approved by indicated below.
In addition to activities for HVAC, provide below. Each additional activity shall have working days. Cost shall be established by the Contracting Officer. Minimum costs are 3.12.4
Commissioning Activity by Specification Division AMOUNT COMMISSIONING OF CONCRETE COMMISSIONING OF METALS $32,000 $16,000
Activity Section 03 08 00 Section 05 08 00
Ft. Detrick, MD
Section 08 08 00 Section 09 08 00 Section 11 08 00 Section 12 08 00 Section 13 08 00 Section 21 08 00 Section 22 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF OPENINGS COMMISSIONING OF FINISHES COMMISSIONING OF EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING OF FURNISHINGS COMMISSIONING OF SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
$64,000 $85,000 $553,000 $5,000 $40,000 $90,000 $760,000 $2,200,000
Section 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS Section 25 08 00 SYSTEMS Section 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
$550,000
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
$810,000 $50,000
Section 28 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE ALARM AND MASS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS Section 33 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF UTILITIES
$60,000
EQUIPMENT INSTALLED PRIOR TO FOST (Government Furnished Government

Installed) TAG DESCRIPTION
I (CAT F)
I3580 I3581 I3582 I3584
GFGI EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
MRI Super conductor, BSL3 Animal Research System Positron Emission Tomography (PET) Scan Imaging Scanning System, Containment Prototype NMR, 800 mHZ
N (CAT C)
N2521 N2522 N2523 N2524 N2531 N2532 N2540 N2555 N2556 N2590 N2591 N2592 N2593 N2594 N2595 N2596 N2597 N2598 N2599 N3158 N3181 N3551 N3552 N4310 N4420
GFGI EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

Switching Module, SM Gigabit Ethernet Server Switching Module, MM Fiber, Gigabit Ethernet Server Switching Module, Desktop, Fast Ethernet Switch, Local Area Network (LAN) Management Processor Module for LAN Switch Power Supply, 725 W, for LAN Switch Relay Rack, Aluminium Power Supply, Uninterruptable, Rack Mounted Battery Pack, Extended for use with UPS (A0911) Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line Telephone Switching System MDF Batteries Rectifiers Equipment Racks FOPP MDF Connector Cables MDF Blocks, Horizontal MDF Blocks, Vertical Freezer, -80C, water cooled Freezer, LN2, Rate Electron Microscope Scanning Electron Microscope Transmission Dispenser, Bedding, with Conveyor Isolation Cubicle
Section 01 32 01.00 10 PreFOST Equipment (GFGI)For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 1.1 1.1.1
GENERAL DEFINITIONS Submittal
Contract Clauses "FAR 52.236-5, Material and Workmanship," paragraph (b) and "FAR 52.236-21, Specifications and Drawings for Construction," paragraphs (d), (e), and (f) apply to all "submittals." 1.1.2 Submittal Descriptions (SD)
Submittals requirements are specified in the technical sections. Submittals are identified by SD numbers and titles as follows. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Construction Progress Schedule. Containment Construction Schedule Submittal register. Health and safety plan. Quality control plan. Environmental protection plan. Construction IAQ Management Plan LEED Implementation Plan SD-02 Shop Drawings Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of the work. Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for integrating the product or system into the project. Drawings prepared by or for the Contractor to show how multiple systems and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated. SD-03 Product Data Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment for some portion of the work. Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended product warranties. SD-04 Samples Fabricated or unfabricated physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship that illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of a material or product and establish standards by which the work can be Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 33 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
judged. Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom color samples if specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for the project. Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish standards by which the ensuring work can be judged. Includes assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be incorporated into the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of the work. SD-05 Design Data Design calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to a part of work. SD-06 Test Reports Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a material, product or system identical to the material, product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements. (Testing must have been within three years of date of contract award for the project.) Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by the Contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared for the project before shipment to job site. Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on sample taken from the job site, on portion of work during or after installation. Investigation reports. Daily logs and checklists. Material Status Report. Final acceptance test and operational test procedure. SD-07 Certificates Statements printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material attesting that product, system or material meets specification requirements. Must be dated after award of project contract and clearly name the project. Document required of Contractor, or of a manufacturer, supplier, installer or subcontractor through Contractor, the purpose of which is to further quality of orderly progression of a portion of the work by documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel qualifications. Confined space entry permits. Text of posted operating instructions. SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 33 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or material, including special notices and Material Safety Data sheets concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions. SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's representative at the job site, in the vicinity of the job site, or on a sample taken from the job site, on a portion of the work, during or after installation, to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions. The documentation must be signed by an authorized official of a testing laboratory or agency and must state the test results; and indicate whether the material, product, or system has passed or failed the test. Factory test reports. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Data that is furnished by the manufacturer, or the system provider, to the equipment operating and maintenance personnel. This data is needed by operating and maintenance personnel for the safe and efficient operation, maintenance and repair of the item. This Data is intended to be incorporated in an operations and maintenance manual or control system. SD-11 Closeout Submittals Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism. 1.1.3 Approving Authority
Office or designated person authorized to approve submittal. 1.1.4 Work
As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by contract documents, including labor necessary to produce submittals, construction, materials, products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction. 1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with this Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Submittal register; G, AR SD-06 Test Reports
Ft. Detrick, MD
Material Status Report 1.3 1.3.1 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS Electronic Submittals
Electronic Submittals and Documentation. Comply with QCS Contract Administration as specified in Section 01 45 02.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS). a. Use of Government Web-based Server In an effort to reduce initial quantities of shop drawings and product data submitted to the government for review/approval. The Contractor, in cooperation with the government, shall submit one electronic copy, with required QC Manager approval, to the government for review/approval through the use of a secure website. The Government will provide the Contractor with access to a secure web-based server, which has a software based tracking system to manage, track, and post electronic submittals. Government approved electronic documents will be returned to the Contractor for his distribution through the website. It is understood that not all shop drawings and product data will be submitted using this website. Hard copies in quantities noted below shall be the method used if electronic submittal is not used. Provide preferred Microsoft application software files (Word, Excel, etc.) or provide Adobe portable document format (pdf). Provide more specific electronic requirements, if required, as indicated in specification Sections. Documentation shall include submittals as indicated. Submittal Quantities below and any additional submittals indicated in technical specification. Number of Copies of SD-02 Shop Drawings
b.
c.
d.
1.3.2
Submit minimum of four copies of submittals of shop drawings requiring review and approval only by Contractor's QC Manager and four copies of shop drawings requiring review and approval by Contracting Officer. 1.3.3 Number of Copies of SD-03 Product Data and SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings. 1.3.4 a. Number of Samples SD-04 Samples Submit three samples, and where requested three sets of samples showing range of variation, of each required item. One approved sample or set of samples will be retained by approving authority, one will be retained at the project site, and one will be returned to Contractor. Submit one sample panel. section or as directed. Include components listed in technical
b.
c. d.
Submit one sample installation, where directed. Submit one sample of non-solid materials.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.3.5
Number of Copies SD-05 Design Data and SD-07 Certificates
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings. 1.3.6 Number of Copies SD-06 Test Reports and SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports Submit in compliance with quantity with quality requirements specified for shop drawings. 1.3.7 Number of Copies of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit six copies of O&M Data to the Contracting Officer for review and approval. 1.3.8 Number of Copies of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals and SD-11 Closeout Submittals Unless otherwise specified, submit administrative submittals compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION
Submittals are classified as follows: 1.4.1 Government Approved
Government approval is required for extensions of design, critical materials, deviations, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer. Within the terms of the Contract Clause entitled "Specifications and Drawings for Construction," they are considered to be "shop drawings." 1.4.2 Information Only
Submittals not requiring Government approval will be for information only. They are not considered to be "shop drawings" within the terms of the Contract Clause referred to above. 1.5 APPROVED SUBMITTALS
The Contracting Officer's approval of submittals shall not be construed as a complete check, but will indicate only that the general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information are satisfactory. Approval will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error which may exist, as the Contractor under the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of this contract is responsible for dimensions, the design of adequate connections and details, and the satisfactory construction of work; including dimensions, all design extensions, such as the design of adequate connections and details, etc., and the satisfactory construction of work. After submittals have been approved by the Government, no resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or equipment will be considered unless accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is necessary. 1.6 DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall make all corrections and promptly furnish a corrected submittal in the form and number of copies specified for the initial Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 33 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
submittal. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the submittals to constitute a change to the contract, a notice in accordance with the Contract Clause "Changes" shall be given promptly to the Contracting Officer. 1.7 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT
Payment for materials incorporated in the work will not be made if required approvals have not been obtained. 1.8 GENERAL
The Contractor shall make submittals as required by the specifications. The Contracting Officer, or his/her assigned Representative may request submittals in addition to those specified when deemed necessary to adequately describe the work covered in the respective sections. Units of weights and measures used on all submittals shall be the same as those used in the contract drawings. Each submittal shall be complete and in sufficient detail to allow ready determination of compliance with contract requirements. Prior to submittal, all items shall be checked and approved by the Contractor's Quality Control (CQC) System Manager and the Designer of Record, if applicable, and each item shall be stamped, signed, and dated by the CQC System Manager indicating action taken. Proposed deviations from the contract requirements shall be clearly identified. Submittals shall include items such as: Contractor's, manufacturer's, or fabricator's drawings; descriptive literature including (but not limited to) catalog cuts, diagrams, operating charts or curves; test reports; test cylinders; samples; O&M manuals (including parts list); certifications; warranties; and other such required submittals. Submittals requiring Government approval shall be scheduled and made prior to the acquisition of the material or equipment covered thereby. Samples remaining upon completion of the work shall be picked up and disposed of in accordance with manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and in compliance with existing laws and regulations. 1.8.1 Coordination
Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance construction activities and with the Submittal Schedule specified in Division 1 "Schedules and Reports." 1.8.2 Submittals
All submittals (excluding samples) shall be submitted for information and review in the electronic format using the following guidelines: a. Be originally authored in electronic media and not scanned versions with hand mark-ups unless specifically approved by the Project Officer. Be provided in Portable Document Format (*.pdf) with selectable text and graphics that are readable. Generally the documents shall be merged into one bookmarked document up to 500 Mb. Merged documents shall use hierarchical bookmarks to form a table of contents and provide hyperlinks to the subject topic. For submittals larger than 500 Mb, provide a summary document in PDF or HTML format with relative hyperlinks to the associated document files within the same directory or in directories subordinate to the summary document. Include all final ratings, parameters, specifications, options, etc. Section 01 33 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
b.
c.
Ft. Detrick, MD
In the case where the Architect returns the submittal "Approved As Noted, Resubmission Not Required" and includes mark-ups or comments that change the originally submitted ratings, parameters, specifications, options, etc., the Contractor shall correct the documents in the original electronic document prior to submitting the final electronic documents. d. Highlight the specific rating, parameter, specification, option, etc., when the original document includes multiple alternatives. For instance when a range of performance parameters are given, or various sizes are shown, or various options are listed, the applicable item shall be indicated by highlight, circle, pointer, etc. Not necessarily include generalized direction from the AE that does not relate to ordering and purchasing the equipment. For instance, notes like, coordinate with xxx for final motor horsepower are not to be transferred to the electronic submittal. In that example only the final coordinated sizes would be indicated. References within this specification that indicate sheet size will refer to electronic sheet (printing) size. SUBMITTAL REGISTER
e.
f.
1.9
The Contractor shall maintain a submittal register for the project in accordance with Section 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL.The electronic list provided by the Government is not all inclusive and additional submittals shall be required by the contract and the Government. The Government will provide the initial submittal register in electronic format. Thereafter, the Contractor shall maintain a complete list of all submittals, including completion of all data columns. Dates on which submittals are received and returned by the Government will be included in its export file to the Contractor. The Contractor shall track all submittals. 1.10 SCHEDULING
Submittals covering component items forming a system or items that are interrelated shall be scheduled to be coordinated and submitted concurrently. Certifications to be submitted with the pertinent drawings shall be so scheduled. Adequate time (a minimum of 30 calendar days exclusive of mailing time) shall be allowed and shown on the register for review and approval. No delay damages or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late submittals. An additional 30 calendar days shall be allowed and shown on the register for review and approval of submittals for Division 25 Building Management System and Environmental monitoring systems. 1.11 TRANSMITTAL FORM (ENG FORM 4025)
The sample transmittal form (ENG Form 4025) attached to this section shall be used for submitting both Government approved and information only submittals in accordance with the instructions on the reverse side of the form. These forms will be furnished to the Contractor. This form shall be properly completed by filling out all the heading blank spaces and identifying each item submitted. Special care shall be exercised to ensure proper listing of the specification paragraph and/or sheet number of the contract drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.12
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Submittals shall be made as follows: The submittal process will require conversion from hard copy format to an electronic format, and from electronic to a hard copy, by the Contractor and Government in various forms throughout the submittal process, based on the submittal requirements, as well as hardcopy file/reference copies required for field use, for record (as built) documents and for archiving. 1.12.1 Procedures
The following is a general description of the sequence of the submittal process with use of both hard copy and electronic material requirements for the project. 1.12.1.1 Subcontractor or Vendor Preparation
Submittals required to be submitted to the Government can be prepared in either a hard copy format or electronic format, as determined with the Contractor, based on the submittal process identified by the Contractor. 1.12.1.2 Review of Submittals by Contractor
As per requirements for submittals, Contractor shall review sub-contractor and vendor submittals and shall provide receipt and review stamp on each submittal, including comments or additional notations to the submittal as required. The Contractor shall create an electronic file of the stamped, reviewed, and notated submittal and post the submittal files to the Government web site. An agreed upon format will be established for format of titles of submittals, electronic file name protocol, and hierarchy of posting procedures. The accuracy, completeness, and clarity of the electronically formatted submittal that is posted to the web site is the responsibility of the Contractor to insure ability of the Government to receive a viable submittal to be output for review. 1.12.1.3 Receipt of Submittals by Government
Upon notification and receipt of the Contractor's submittal through posting of the electronic submittal data to the web site, the Government will download and create a hardcopy archive of the submittal data for record purposes, and create a received version of the submittal, with the Government date received stamp and review status stamp/marking for return of the submittal to the Contractor. After review, the Government will provide additional annotated markings and mark the submittal review status stamp accordingly, and create an electronically formatted return copy. 1.12.1.4 Return of Submittals to Contractor
Government will post the reviewed version to the web based server, with notification to the Contractor. The electronic accuracy, completeness and clarity of the electronic formatted submittal that is posted to the server will be the responsibility of the Government to insure ability of the Contractor to receive a viable submittal for review. 1.12.1.5 Review of Returned Submittal by Contractor
Upon notification and receipt of the posted material, the Contractor shall download and file a hard copy record of the submittal for their records and review the submittal, as required, to provide the necessary action by the Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 33 00 - Page 8 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Contractor or forwarding of the same to the sub-contractor/vendor for their action. It is the option of the Contractor as to the method and format(hard or electronic copy) for distribution of the returned submittal to the sub-contractor/vendor. 1.12.2 Deviations
For submittals which include proposed deviations requested by the Contractor, the column "variation" of ENG Form 4025 shall be checked. The Contractor shall set forth in writing the reason for any deviations and annotate such deviations on the submittal. The Government reserves the right to rescind inadvertent approval of submittals containing unnoted deviations. 1.13 CONTROL OF SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall carefully control his procurement operations to ensure that each individual submittal is made on or before the Contractor scheduled submittal date shown on the approved "Submittal Register." 1.14 GOVERNMENT APPROVED SUBMITTALS
Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval, the submittals will be identified as having received approval by being so stamped and dated. Two copies of the submittal will be retained by the Contracting Officer and one copy of the submittal will be returned to the Contractor. 1.15 INFORMATION ONLY SUBMITTALS
Normally submittals for information only will not be returned. Approval of the Contracting Officer is not required on information only submittals. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to resubmit any item found not to comply with the contract. This does not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to furnish material conforming to the plans and specifications; will not prevent the Contracting Officer from requiring removal and replacement of nonconforming material incorporated in the work; and does not relieve the Contractor of the requirement to furnish samples for testing by the Government laboratory or for check testing by the Government in those instances where the technical specifications so prescribe. 1.16 STAMPS
Stamps used by the Contractor on the submittal data to certify that the submittal meets contract requirements shall be similar to the following:
Ft. Detrick, MD
________________________________________________________________________ | CONTRACTOR | | | | (Firm Name) | | | | | | | | _____ Approved | | | | | | _____ Approved with corrections as noted on submittal data and/or | | attached sheets(s). | | | | | | | | SIGNATURE: __________________________________________________________ | | | | TITLE: ______________________________________________________________ | | | | DATE: _______________________________________________________________ | | | |________________________________________________________________________|
PART 2
PRODUCTS
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
G O V T O R A / E DATE FWD TO APPR AUTH/ C O D E (o) A C T I O N A C T I O N CONTRACTOR: SCHEDULE DATES CONTRACTOR ACTION APPROVING AUTHORITY
A C T I V I T Y P A R A G# R A P H R E V W R SUBMIT (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) APPROVAL MATERIAL NEEDED NEEDED BY BY C O D E DATE OF ACTION DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER (f) DATE OF ACTION (p) (e)
T R A N S M I T T A L MAILED TO CONTR/
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
C L A S S I F I C A T I O N DATE RCD FRM APPR AUTH (q)
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
01 07 00 3.4 1.7.2.2 G AR G AR G AR
01 20 00
01 31 15
G AR
01 31 19 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.9 G AR G AR G AR G AR
01 33 00
01 33 29 1.4 1.5 3.1 1.6 G AE G AR G AE G AE
01 33 40
01 35 29
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Procedures SD-04 Samples Sample Tags SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Coordinator Proposal Coordination / Interference Documents Containment Construction Schedule SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Project Submittal Schedule Monthly Progress Report Monthly Progress Report SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Submittal register SD-06 Test Reports Material Status Report SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals LEED Implementation Plan SD-11 Closeout Submittals LEED Documentation Notebook SD-04 Samples Color/Finish Sample Board(S) SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Accident Prevention Plan (APP)
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
PAGE 1 OF 154 PAGES
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
01 35 29
1.7 1.6.1 1.5.1.4 1.11 1.11.1 1.11.2 1.11.3
G AR G AR G AR
1.8 1.8 1.3 1.4
1.8 1.6 1.7
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) Crane Critical Lift Plan Crane Operators SD-06 Test Reports Reports Accident Reports Monthly Exposure Reports Crane Reports Regulatory Citations and Violations SD-07 Certificates Confined Space Entry Permit Hot work permit 01 45 35 SD-07 Certificates Special Inspector Quality Requirements Plan 01 45 70 SD-06 Test Reports Reports SD-07 Certificates Certificate 01 51 00 SD-02 Shop Drawings Site Plan Office and Parking Layout Plan Temporary Electrical Work 01 57 20.00 10 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Environmental Protection Plan G AR G AR G AR G AR
PAGE 2 OF 154 PAGES
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.1.3
1.6
G AR G AR
1.6 1.7
G AR
G AR G AR
G AR G AR
01 57 23.00 10 SD-07 Certificates Mill Certificate or Affidavit 01 72 00 SD-11 Closeout Submittals Progress Prints Final Requirements CADD Files 01 74 19 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Waste Management Plan SD-11 Closeout Submittals Records 01 75 00 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Verification of Prior Experience Documentation of Manufacturer's Prior Experience Quality Control Plan Manufacturer's Sample Warranty Operation and Maintenance Data Provide Evidence SD-02 Shop Drawings Drawings, Diagrams and Schedules Diagrams and Instructions SD-03 Product Data Catalog cuts Samples of warranty language SD-05 Design Data
PAGE 3 OF 154 PAGES
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
01 75 00
01 77 00
Design Calculations SD-06 Test Reports Factory Tests Field Tests 1.2.4.2 Start-up Test Acceptance 1.2.4.3 Test Procedures SD-07 Certificates Qualification of Manufacturer Qualification of Installer SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Manufacturer's Administrative Requirements Demonstration and Training Information Manufacturer's Procedural Requirements SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports Documentation of the Testing and Verification Actions SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Data Safety and Security Data or Posters SD-03 Product Data
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 4 OF 154 PAGES
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
01 77 00
1.3.1 1.3.3 1.3.2
G G G G G
1.2
G G
01 79 00 G G
G G
01 81 19
Warranty Management Plan Warranty Tags Final Cleaning SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Equipment/Product Warranty List SD-11 Closeout Submittals As-Built Drawings Record Of Materials Utility As-Built Drawings Equipment/Product Warranty Tag Monthly Project Waste Summary Report Hazardous Material Reporting Certification of EPA Designated Items SD-07 Certificates Facilitator Qualifications Instructor Qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Training Plan SD-11 Closeout Submittals Training Documentation SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
PAGE 5 OF 154 PAGES
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
01 81 19 G AR
G AR
01 91 00 1.10 3.3 1.8 1.8 1.8 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AR A
3.11 3.3 1.10 1.10 1.8 G AR A
Construction IAQ Management Plan during construction Construction IAQ Management Plan before occupancy SD-07 Certificates Certify Narrative List SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Commissioning Execution Plan SD-02 Shop Drawings Component Verification Forms (CVF) System Tests (ST) Integrated System Tests (IST) Functional Operating System Tests (FOST) SD-06 Test Reports Final Cx Report Component Verification Forms (CVF) System Test Forms (ST) Integrated System Test Forms (IST) Functional Operating System Tests (FOST) G AR A
PAGE 6 OF 154 PAGES
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
01 91 00 3.11 1.10 1.6.2 1.9 1.4.1 1.4.2 2.1.5 G AE G AE G AR G AR G G G AR
2.1 2.1.6 2.1.5 3.1.1 G AE G AR 2.3 3.1 G AE G AE
SD-07 Certificates System and Design Document Identification Sheets Certification of Work Conditions 02 41 00 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Existing Conditions SD-07 Certificates Demolition and Deconstruction Plan Notifications SD-11 Closeout Submittals Receipts 03 11 13.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Removable Tie Rod Details Layout Drawings SD-03 Product Data Form Materials Form Releasing Agents Form Ties Formwork Calculations Letter of Certification 03 15 13.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Waterstops Joints SD-03 Product Data
PAGE 7 OF 154 PAGES
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.1 2.3 2.3.1 2.1 2.3 3.1 1.3 2.1 G AR 3.5.4 3.5.3 3.6.1 1.8 3.10.3 2.3 2.10 2.6 2.13.1 G G G G G G AR AR AR AR AR AR
G AR G AR
G AE
G AR G AR G AE
03 15 13.00 10 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler Waterstops SD-04 Samples Materials SD-07 Certificates Preformed Expansion Joint Filler Waterstops 03 20 01.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Reinforcement SD-03 Product Data Welding SD-07 Certificates Reinforcing Steel Mechanical Couplers 03 31 00.00 10 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Hot Weather Requirements Cold Weather Requirements SD-02 Shop Drawings Construction Joint SD-03 Product Data Mixture Proportions Curing Compounds Admixtures Vapor Retarder Grout Expansion Anchors
PAGE 8 OF 154 PAGES
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.13.1 2.10 3.14 1.8.2 1.5 1.6.2 2.13.1 2.13.1 2.13.1 2.13.1 1.6 2.4.2 G AE G AE G AE G AR G AR
G AR
1.4 2.2 G AE
03 31 00.00 10 Chemical/Epoxy Adhesives SD-04 Samples Vapor Retarder SD-06 Test Reports Testing and Inspection for Contractor Quality Control Average Compressive Strength SD-07 Certificates Qualifications Admixture Manufacturer Expansion Anchors Chemical/Epoxy Adhesives SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Expansion Anchors Chemical/Epoxy Adhesives 03 31 05 SD-03 Product Data Mixture Proportions Burlap and Cotton Mat Moist Curing Plan and Procedures SD-04 Samples Field Test Mock-ups 03 35 13 SD-03 Product Data Polishing Materials and Equipment SD-04 Samples
PAGE 9 OF 154 PAGES
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
03 35 13
3.2 1.4.3 1.4.1
G AE
3.2 1.3 1.3 1.4.6 1.4.7 2.2 G AE G AR G AE
3.1 2.2 1.4.7 G AE G AE
Polished concrete Mock-ups SD-07 Certificates Certified Applicators SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Polished concrete 03 41 33.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Precast/Prestressed Units SD-03 Product Data Precast/Prestressed Units SD-05 Design Data Calculations Mix Design SD-06 Test Reports Tests Laboratory test reports Mill tests Test data Fire Resistance Rating 03 45 01.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Erection SD-04 Samples Precast Concrete Units Mock-up SD-05 Design Data G AE
PAGE 10 OF 154 PAGES
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
1.4.5 1.4.6 1.3 2.1 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.5 G AE G AR G AR G AR
G AE G AE
1.7.1 2.2 2.5.4 2.12 3.1.2 G AR/A G AR/A G AR/A 2.2 2.7 2.11 2.8 1.3 2.5.5 G AR/A G AR/A G AR G AR/A G AR/A
03 45 01.00 10 Calculations Mix Design Manufacturer's Qualifications SD-06 Test Reports Materials SD-07 Certificates Installer Qualifications Field Auditor Qualifications Fabricator Qualifications 04 20 00 SD-02 Shop Drawings Vertically Reinforced Masonry SD-03 Product Data Local/Regional Materials Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) Cement Flashing Cold Weather Installation SD-04 Samples Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) Anchors, Ties, and Bar Positioners Expansion-Joint Materials Joint Reinforcement Sample Masonry Panels SD-05 Design Data Pre-mixed Mortar
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
04 20 00 3.15.1 3.15.2 3.15.3 2.2.3 1.5.1 2.2 2.10 2.7 2.11 2.8 2.9 2.5.2 2.3 2.5.1 2.6.1
1.5.2
3.14.2 2.5 2.5 G AR G AR

04 43 30
Unit Strength Method SD-06 Test Reports Field Testing of Mortar Field Testing of Grout Prism tests Fire-rated CMU Special Inspection SD-07 Certificates Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) Control Joint Keys Anchors, Ties, and Bar Positioners Expansion-Joint Materials Joint Reinforcement Reinforcing Steel Bars and Rods Mortar Coloring Precast Concrete Items Admixtures for Masonry Mortar Admixtures for Grout SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Take-Back Program SD-02 Shop Drawings Stone SD-03 Product Data Stone
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
04 43 30
2.4.1 2.3.2.4 2.4.2 2.3.2.5 1.4 2.5 2.4.1 2.4.8 2.5 2.4.1 1.6 2.1 2.1 2.6 2.2 G AR G AR G AR G AR G AE G AR G AR
04 72 00
1.4 1.7
05 05 13
Anchoring Devices Mortar Adhesive Grout LEED SD-04 Samples Stone Anchoring Devices Transition Strips SD-06 Test Reports Stone Anchoring devices SD-07 Certificates Qualifications SD-03 Product Data Materials SD-04 Samples Materials Mortar Reinforcing, Anchors and Accessories SD-06 Test Reports Test Reports SD-07 Certificates Qualifications SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
05 05 13 1.5 1.6.1 2.4 2.3.1 2.2.4 2.3.2 G AE 2.4 2.2 3.8 2.1 2.2 2.5 1.5 1.6.2.1 3.8.2.1 1.3.4 G AE
1.4
05 12 00 G AE
05 30 00
Special Warranty SD-11 Closeout Submittals LEED Submittals SD-02 Shop Drawings Fabrication drawings SD-03 Product Data Shop primer Welding electrodes and rods Load indicator washers Non-Shrink Grout SD-05 Design Data Calculations SD-06 Test Reports Class B coating Bolts, nuts, and washers Field Quality Control SD-07 Certificates Steel Bolts, nuts, and washers Galvanizing AISC Quality Certification Welding procedures and qualifications Inspector SD-02 Shop Drawings Fabrication Drawings
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
05 30 00
2.4 2.4.2.1 2.4.2.2 2.4.2.3 2.2 2.3 1.3.1 2.2.3.1 2.2.5 2.3.11 2.4 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 2.4.2 2.2.6 2.4 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.6.1
G G G G
AE AE AE AE
05 40 00
Metal Floor Deck Units Cant Strips Ridge and Valley Plates Metal Closure Strips SD-03 Product Data Materials Accessories Deck Units Galvanizing Repair Paint Galvanizing Repair Paint Mechanical Fasteners Metal Floor Deck Units Welder Qualifications Welding Equipment Welding Rods and Accessories SD-04 Samples Roof Deck Flexible Closure Strips Flexible Closure Strips SD-05 Design Data Deck Units SD-07 Certificates Welding Procedures SD-02 Shop Drawings Framing Components SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
05 40 00
2.1
1.6.2
G AE G AE
1.4 3.1.1 1.5.2 2.15 2.5 2.6 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.1 2.8 2.9 2.10 G G G G G G G G G AR AR AR AR AE AE AR AR AR G G G G AE AE AE AE
05 50 00
studs SD-05 Design Data Structural Calculations Metal framing calculations SD-07 Certificates Mill Certification Load-bearing cold-formed metal framing Welds SD-02 Shop Drawings Transition Zone Structural Steel Door Frames Cover plates and frames Platform, ramps, and landing gratings Fixed Ornamental Bollards Removable Ornamental Bollards Bollards Guardrails and Handrails Ladders Angles and Plates Elevator Guide Rails Elevator Counterweight Supports SD-03 Product Data Cover plates and frames 2.5
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
05 50 00 2.8 2.9 2.15 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.1 2.2.4 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.3.5 1.4.3 2.2 3.1 2.2 2.1.8 G AE 2.1 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G G G G G G G G G G AR AR AE AR AR AR AR AE AE AE
2.6
G AR
05 50 10.00
05 51 00
Platform, ramps, and landing gratings Guardrails and Handrails Ladders Structural steel door frames Fixed Ornamental Bollards Removable Ornamental Bollards Bollards Malleable Iron Concrete Inserts Masonry Anchorage Devices Coatings SD-05 Design Data Structural Calculations SD-02 Shop Drawings fabrication installation SD-03 Product Data Fabrication SD-04 Samples Hardware SD-07 Certificates Special Coatings SD-02 Shop Drawings Iron and Steel Hardware
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
05 51 00 2.16 2.2 2.3 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.13 2.14 2.17 2.18 2.16 1.4 1.4 G AE G G G G G G G G G G G AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR G AR G AR G AR G AE
Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips Metal Stairs SD-03 Product Data Structural Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars Structural Steel Tubing Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strips Cold Finished Steel Bars Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheets Cold-Drawn Steel Tubing Gray Iron Castings Malleable Iron Castings Concrete Inserts Masonry Anchorage Devices Protective Coating Steel Stairs SD-05 Design Data Metal Stairs SD-07 Certificates Welding Procedures Welder Qualification SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions
2.1
G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
05 51 00 2.3 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.17 2.14
2.2
05 71 00 1.2.1 1.6 2.1.1 G AE 1.7.1 G AE G AE
Structural Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars Structural Steel Tubing Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strips Cold Finished Steel Bars Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheets Cold-Drawn Steel Tubing Gray Iron Castings Malleable Iron Castings Protective Coating Masonry Anchorage Devices SD-11 Closeout Submittals Recycled Content SD-02 Shop Drawings Ornamental Stairs SD-03 Product Data LEED SD-04 Samples Metal SD-05 Design Data Design Calculations SD-07 Certificates Fabricator/Supplier/Installer
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
05 71 00 05 72 00 2.2 2.3 2.4 G AE G AE G AE
1.7.2
2.2 2.3 2.4
G AE G AE G AE
2.3.2 2.3.3 3.3 G AE G AE 2.4.1.1 1.11.1 1.8 2.4.2 G AR
G G G G
AE AE AE AE
06 10 00
Welder qualifications SD-02 Shop Drawings Glass Railing at Atrium Stairs Wall and Glass Railing System Steel Railing with Decorative Design Grating Panel SD-03 Product Data Glass Railing at Atrium Stairs Wall and Glass Railing System Steel Railing with Decorative Design Grating Panel LEED Submittals SD-04 Samples Glass Railing Wall bracket Wood Handrail Grating Panel Infill SD-05 Design Data Structural calculations Seismic control calculations SD-02 Shop Drawings Nailing Strips SD-03 Product Data Local/Regional Materials Fire-retardant treatment Adhesives
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
06 10 00 1.4.2 1.11.3 1.9.1 1.7
3.3 1.11.1 2.4.2 1.11.2 1.11.3 1.3 G AE
06 20 00
2.7 2.1 2.2 2.1.12 2.1.12 G AE G AE
SD-06 Test Reports Preservative-treated SD-07 Certificates Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification Certificates of grade Preservative treatment SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Take-back program SD-11 Closeout Submittals Local/Regional Materials Adhesives Certified Wood Certified Wood SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings SD-03 Product Data Accessories Hardware Panels Wood Trim SD-04 Samples Veneer Solid Hardwood G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
06 20 00
2.1.12 2.1.12 2.7 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.7.2
G AE G AE G AE
1.5 1.8 3.1 2.1 G AE 2.9 G AE 2.13.8.3 G AE 2.3 2.6 1.5 1.4 2.9 3.1 G AE G AE G AE
Transparent Finish Transparent Finish Hardware SD-07 Certificates Certificates of grade Certificates of compliance Certificates of flitches Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification 06 41 16.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Shop Drawings Shop Drawings Installation SD-03 Product Data Wood Materials Wood Finishes Finish Schedule SD-04 Samples Plastic Laminates Cabinet Hardware Mock-ups SD-07 Certificates Quality Assurance Laminate Clad Casework Laminate Clad Casework 06 51 50 SD-02 Shop Drawings G AE G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
06 51 50
2.3 3.1 2.2 2.1.1 1.7 3.2 2.1 1.6 2.3 2.1 2.3.4 2.1 2.3 1.6 G AR G AR G AR G AR G AR
G AR G AR
06 61 16
3.3 1.3.1 G AE
07 13 53
Fabrication installation SD-03 Product Data Grating SD-04 Samples Fiberglass SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings Installation SD-03 Product Data Solid polymer material Qualifications Fabrications SD-04 Samples Material Counter and Vanity Tops SD-06 Test Reports Solid polymer material SD-07 Certificates Fabrications Qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Clean-up SD-02 Shop Drawings Shop Drawing Requirements
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
07 13 53 2.1 2.3 2.1 2.1 G AR G AR G AR
07 14 00 2.1 2.2 2.8 2.10 3.3 3.4.1 2.11 2.7 2.12 1.4 1.3 1.3 3.3
G G G G G G G G G AR AR AR AR AR
AR AR AR AR
07 16 19
SD-03 Product Data Elastomeric waterproofing sheet material Protection board Primers, adhesives, and mastics SD-06 Test Reports Elastomeric waterproofing sheet material SD-03 Product Data Fluid-applied membrane Membrane primer Elastomeric sheet Flexible foam-backed elastomeric sheet Solvent Moisture meter Protection course Bond breaker Drainage Mat SD-04 Samples Metallic waterproofing SD-06 Test Reports Iron content Oxidizing agent content SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Mixing
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
07 18 00 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.1 2.2 G AR G AR G AR
07 21 00
07 21 16 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.5 2.6 3.3.1 2.1 2.1 1.12 1.6 G AR G AR G AR
07 21 19
SD-02 Shop Drawings Pedestrian Deck Coating SD-03 Product Data Pedestrian Deck Coating SD-04 Samples Pedestrian Deck Coating SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Pedestrian Deck Coating SD-03 Product Data Rigid board insulation Semi-rigid mineral fiber insulation system SD-03 Product Data Blanket insulation Sill sealer insulation Vapor retarder Pressure sensitive tape Accessories SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Insulation SD-03 Product Data Sprayed Urethane Foam SD-04 Samples Sprayed Urethane Foam Warranty Mock-up
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
07 21 19 3.7.2 3.7.1 1.4.1 1.4.2 2.1
3.7.2 1.12 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.1.4 G AE G AR G AR 2.3 2.1 G AR G AR
07 21 29
07 22 00
SD-06 Test Reports Core sample SD-07 Certificates Compliance Qualification of Manufacturer Qualification of Applicator SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Sprayed Urethane Foam SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports Daily Log SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranty SD-03 Product Data Sprayed thermal insulation SD-04 Samples Sprayed thermal insulation SD-06 Test Reports Sprayed thermal insulation SD-02 Shop Drawings Wood nailers Tapered roof insulation SD-03 Product Data Fasteners Insulation SD-06 Test Reports
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
07 22 00
1.4.1
1.3 2.3 2.1 1.7 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.8 G AE G AE G AE
07 41 13
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.8 G AE 2.7
Flame spread and smoke developed ratings SD-07 Certificates qualifications SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions fasteners insulation SD-02 Shop Drawings Metal Roofing SD-03 Product Data Roof panels Factory Color Finish Accessories Fasteners Underlayments Gaskets and Insulating Compounds SD-04 Samples Roof Panels Color Charts Accessories Fasteners Gaskets and Insulating Compounds Sealant SD-05 Design Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
07 41 13 1.2.2 2.3.1
1.2.2
G AE
2.2 2.6.1 1.4.1 1.4.2 2.9 3.2 1.6 3.7 2.1.1 2.1.1 3.1.1 3.1.1 2.3 2.4 G AE G AE
07 42 13
Wind Uplift Resistance SD-06 Test Reports roof assembly Factory Color Finish Performance Requirements SD-07 Certificates Roof Panels Self-Adhering Modified Bitumen Underlayment Qualification of Manufacturer Qualification of Applicator SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Insulation Installation SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranties Information card SD-02 Shop Drawings Wall panels SD-03 Product Data Wall panels Closures flashing Accessories Fasteners
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
07 42 13
2.6
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.7 2.6 2.5 2.2.1 2.1.1 2.3 2.7 3.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.3 G AE G AE G AE
G G G G G G G AE
AE AE AE AE AE AE
07 42 50 G AE
Gaskets and Insulating Compounds SD-04 Samples Wall Panel Color Finish Accessories Fasteners Insulation Gaskets and Insulating Compounds Sealant SD-06 Test Reports Salt Spray Test SD-07 Certificates Wall Panels Accessories Insulation SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Installation SD-02 Shop Drawings Composite Panels SD-03 Product Data Composite panels SD-04 Samples Composite panels Finishes
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
07 42 50
3.1 2.2.2 1.5 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.4.5 2.1 2.3 G AR G AR G AR G AR 2.1 2.5 2.6 2.9 2.8 1.8 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.4 1.4.3 G G
G AE G AE G AE G AE
07 52 00 G AE G AR G AR
Finishes Fasteners Mock-up SD-05 Design Data Composite Panels SD-07 Certificates Composite Panels SD-11 Closeout Submittals Composite Panels SD-02 Shop Drawings Roof plan SD-03 Product Data Modified Bitumen Sheets Cold-Applied Membrane Adhesive Fiberglass Felt Primer Modified Bitumen Roof Cement Pre-Manufactured Accessories Fasteners And Plates Warranty SD-07 Certificates Qualification of Manufacturer Qualification of Applicator Wind Uplift Resistance Fire Resistance
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
07 52 00 G G G
G G
07 55 56 G AE
SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Modified Bitumen Membrane 3.3.4 Application Flashing 3.3.5 Cold Adhesive Applied Modified 3.3.2.1 Bitumen Membrane Primer 2.5 Modified Bitumen Roof Cement 2.6 Fasteners 2.8.1 Coating Application 3.3.7 Cold Weather Installation 1.6 SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranty 1.8 Information Card 3.8 Instructions To Government 3.7 Personnel SD-02 Shop Drawings Hot fluid-applied reinforced 1.2 waterproofing membrane system SD-03 Product Data Membrane 2.2 Primer 2.3 Protection 2.3 Drainage Mat 2.3 Insulation 2.4 Porous Protection (Filter) Fabric 2.3 G G G G G G AR AR AR AR AR AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
07 55 56
2.5 2.3 1.6 1.6 1.5 2.2 2.3 2.5 2.5 2.4 3.7 2.3 1.6 1.3 G G G G G G G AR AR AR AR AR AR AR
G G G G G
AR AR AR AR AR
3.8 3.1.16 3.1.10 3.1.11 3.5 G AE G AE G AE
07 60 00
07 71 00
Paver Gravel Product Test Reports Sample Warranty LEED Submittals SD-04 Samples Membrane Waterproofing System Paver Pedestal Insulation Board Protection Fabric Drainage Mat SD-07 Certificates Qualification Performance SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports Field Quality Control SD-02 Shop Drawings Splash pans Counterflashing Reglets SD-11 Closeout Submittals Quality Control Plan SD-02 Shop Drawings
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
07 71 00 2.1 2.2 2.1 2.1 3.3 2.1 1.7 1.7 3.5 1.5 3.1 3.5.3 G ED G ED G AE G AE
2.1 G AR G AR
G AE
07 81 00 G AE G ED G ED
G ED
07 81 23 2.1 2.1
Roof specialties and accessories SD-03 Product Data Roof specialties and accessories SD-04 Samples Flashing and sheet metal items SD-11 Closeout Submittals Roof specialties and accessories SD-02 Shop Drawings Spray-Applied Fireproofing SD-03 Product Data Fireproofing Material SD-04 Samples Spray-Applied Fireproofing SD-05 Design Data Fire Resistance Rating SD-06 Test Reports Fire Resistance Rating Field Tests SD-07 Certificates Installer Qualifications Surface Preparation Report Manufacturer's Inspection Report SD-02 Shop Drawings Intumescent fireproofing SD-03 Product Data Intumescent fireproofing
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
07 81 23 2.1 2.2 3.5 1.4.1 2.2 3.5 2.1 2.1 1.5 3.3 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 1.7 3.3.6 2.1 G AR/A G AE G AE
07 84 00
07 92 00
07 95 13
SD-04 Samples Intumescent Fireproofing SD-05 Design Data UL Testing SD-06 Test Reports Thickness testing SD-07 Certificates Applicator Primers Testing Laboratory Services SD-02 Shop Drawings Firestopping Materials SD-07 Certificates Firestopping Materials Installer Qualifications Inspection SD-03 Product Data Sealants Primers Bond breakers Backstops Special Warranty SD-07 Certificates Sealant LEED SD-02 Shop Drawings
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
07 95 13 Part 2 Part 2 1.4 2.1 2.4 2.3 2.1 2.4 2.3 2.5.1 G AR/A G AR/A 2.1 2.1 2.8.1 2.8.1 2.8.1 G AE G AE
Part 2 G AR G AR
G AE
08 11 13 G AR/A G AR/A G AR/A G AR/A G AR/A
08 11 16
08 11 19.00 G AE
Expansion joint devices SD-03 Product Data Expansion joint devices SD-04 Samples Joint cover assembly SD-11 Closeout Submittals LEED Submittals SD-02 Shop Drawings Doors Frames Accessories SD-03 Product Data Doors Frames Accessories Fire Rating SD-02 Shop Drawings Doors and frames SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Doors and frames SD-02 Shop Drawings Doors and Frames SD-03 Product Data Doors and Frames SD-04 Samples Doors and Frames
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
08 11 19.00 2.8.1 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 G G G
2.8.1 1.8.1 1.4 G AE
G AR
08 12 16
1.4
G AR
1.4
G AR
1.4 1.4 2.1 G AR

08 14 00
SD-06 Test Reports Doors and Frames SD-07 Certificates Qualification Qualification performance characteristics SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Doors and Frames: SD-11 Closeout Submittals warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Aluminum Door and Glazing Frame system SD-03 Product Data Aluminum Door and Glazing Frame system SD-04 Samples Aluminum Door and Glazing Frame system SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Aluminum door and glazing frame system Glazing SD-02 Shop Drawings Doors
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
08 14 00 2.1 2.2 1.4 2.1.2 G AR 2.1 2.3.6.3 G AR 2.1.2 2.4 2.4 2.4 1.6.2 G AR
08 15 00 2.2 2.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 G AE G AE G AE
SD-03 Product Data Doors Accessories warranty Fire resistance rating SD-04 Samples Doors Door finish colors SD-06 Test Reports Fire doors Split resistance Cycle-slam Hinge loading resistance SD-07 Certificates Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification SD-02 Shop Drawings Plastic Doors SD-04 Samples Colors SD-05 Design Data Plastic Doors SD-07 Certificates Plastic Doors SD-11 Closeout Submittals Plastic Doors
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
08 31 13 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.3.1.12 3.1 2.3.1.12 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.5 1.6 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.1
G AR G AR G AR G AR
08 33 23 G G G G G AR AR AR AR AR
SD-02 Shop Drawings Access Doors SD-03 Product Data Access doors Floor Hatch Schedules Warranty SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Installation SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Overhead Coiling Doors Counterbalancing Mechanism Manual Door Operators Electric Door Operators Installation Drawings SD-03 Product Data Overhead Coiling Doors Hardware Counterbalancing Mechanism Manual Door Operators Electric Door Operators Fire-Rated Doors SD-05 Design Data Overhead Coiling Doors
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
08 33 23
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
1.6 1.6
08 34 59 1.3 3.1 2.1 2.1 3.1 2.1 1.6 2.4 G AE G AE

G AR G AR
G AR
08 38 13 G AE
08 39 15
Hardware Counterbalancing Mechanism Manual Door Operators Electric Door Operators Fire-Rated Doors SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies SD-02 Shop Drawings Vault door Unit Day gate SD-03 Product Data Vault Door and Frame SD-07 Certificates Vault Door and Frame SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Installation SD-03 Product Data Strip Doors SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Early Submittal Package SD-02 Shop Drawings Air Pressure Resistant Doors
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
08 39 15
2.5
G AE
1.11 2.2 2.4.2 2.5.2 2.5.2.3 2.5.2.3 1.8.2 2.13.1 1.8.1 1.8.1 2.2 G AE G AE G AE G AE G G G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE AE AE
G AE
2.4 1.11 1.4 G AE
G AR
08 41 13
Air Pressure Resistant Door Frames SD-03 Product Data Warranty SD-04 Samples Materials Door Frame Emergency Exit Button Flip Cover Lights Mock-up SD-06 Test Reports Air tightness SD-07 Certificates Installer Manufacturer Materials SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data air pressure resistant doors SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Metal Framed Storefront system SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
08 41 13 1.4 1.4 1.4 2.1 2.1 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.2.4 2.1.2 2.1.1 2.2.4 2.1.1 2.1.2 1.6 1.4 G AE G AE G G G G AE AE AE AE G AE G AE G AE
1.4
G AE
08 41 23
08 44 00
Metal framed storefront system SD-04 Samples Metal framed storefront system SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Metal framed storefront system Glazing SD-02 Shop Drawings Fire Rated Glazed Wall Assembly SD-03 Product Data Fire Rated Glazed Wall Assembly SD-04 Samples Finish Anodic Coating Fluoropolymer Glazing SD-07 Certificates Fire Rated Fire-Resistive Framing System Glazing Material SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Framing System Fire Rated Fire-Resistive SD-02 Shop Drawings Glazed curtain wall system Sunscreen SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
08 44 00
1.6 1.4 1.5.2 1.8 1.4 3.5 1.5.2.1 1.6 3.2.6.6 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.5 2.2.7 2.1 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE
G AE G AE
08 44 13
08 44 23
Glazed curtain wall system Sunscreen SD-04 Samples Mock-up at Testing laboratory Exterior on-site mock-up SD-05 Design Data Calculations SD-06 Test Reports AAMA 501.2 testing laboratory SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Glazed curtain wall system Insulating glass SD-02 Shop Drawings Glazed curtain wall system SD-03 Product Data Glazed curtain wall system Glazed curtain wall system SD-05 Design Data Calculations SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Glazed curtain wall system Glazing SD-02 Shop Drawings Structural glass curtain wall system
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
08 44 23 2.1 G AE
2.1
G AE
1.6 2.1
08 55 00.00 1.4.1 1.2.1 2.10 2.10.1 2.5 1.7 2.8 2.9 2.4 G AE G AE G AE G AE
08 62 00
SD-04 Samples Structural glass curtain wall system SD-05 Design Data Structural glass curtain wall system SD-07 Certificates Qualifications SD-11 Closeout Submittals Structural glass curtain wall system SD-02 Shop Drawings Windows SD-03 Product Data Frames and Glazing SD-02 Shop Drawings Skylight Systems SD-03 Product Data Skylights Sealant Warranty SD-04 Samples Coating Coating Glass Glazing Materials
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
08 62 00 2.10 2.10.1 3.4 2.10.1 1.5 G AE
2.10.1 1.3 2.8 2.6 2.5.2 2.11 2.12 G G G G G G AE AR AE AE AE AE
08 71 00
2.1 2.12.1 2.5 3.2 G AR
SD-05 Design Data Skylight Systems SD-06 Test Reports Skylights AAMA 501.2 SD-07 Certificates Skylights Qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Skylights SD-02 Shop Drawings Hardware schedule Keying Exit Devices Electro-Mechanical Locks Electro-Magnetic Holders Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operators SD-03 Product Data Hardware Power Door Operators SD-04 Samples Locks and Latches SD-06 Test Reports Operational Tests G AE G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
08 71 00 2.1 2.1
3.3.2
1.3 1.8
G AR G AR
08 81 00 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.3.4 2.4 G G G G AE AE AE AE
SD-07 Certificates Hardware and Accessories SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Hardware SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports Inspection Report SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Hardware Schedule Operation and Maintenance Manuals SD-02 Shop Drawings Installation Installation Installation Glass Smoke Shelves at Water Curtains SD-03 Product Data Insulating Glass Glazing Accessories Warranty SD-04 Samples Insulating Glass Glazing Compound Tape 2.2 1.3 1.8 2.2 2.3.2 2.3.5
G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
08 81 00 G AE
2.3.3.1 1.4 2.2 1.3 2.3 3.2 1.7.1 1.4 2.3 2.3.4 1.5 2.1 2.3.1 2.4 1.4.1 G AR G AR G AE G AE G AR G AR G AE
08 91 00
09 22 00
09 27 13
09 29 00
Sealant Mock-up SD-07 Certificates Insulating Glass Glazing Accessories SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Setting and sealing materials Glass setting SD-11 Closeout Submittals Local/Regional Materials SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings SD-03 Product Data Metal Wall Louvers Screens SD-04 Samples Color Samples SD-02 Shop Drawings Metal support systems SD-02 Shop Drawings Glass fiber reinforced gypsum SD-04 Samples Finishes SD-07 Certificates No asbestos containing material SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
09 29 00 2.1.2 2.1.4 2.1.4.1 2.1.5 2.1.1 2.1.1 2.1.10 2.1.5 1.5.1 2.1.8 3.5 2.1 2.1.1 G G G G AE AR AR AR G AR G AR G AR
2.1.3
G AR
3.8 1.8 1.5.1 G AE
G AR
09 30 00
Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Tile Backing Board Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing Sealant Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Board Gypsum Board Gypsum Board Accessories Warranty Local/Regional Materials Adhesives Fire-Resistant Assemblies SD-07 Certificates Asbestos Free Materials Mold Resistant SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Waste Management SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings SD-03 Product Data Local/Regional Materials
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
09 30 00
2.1 2.2 2.4 2.1 2.5 2.4 2.1 2.4 1.3 2.1 2.1 2.1 3.1 2.1 2.2 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE
G AE G AE G AE
09 51 00
09 57 13
Tile Setting-Bed Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive SD-04 Samples Tile Marble Thresholds Grout SD-07 Certificates Tile Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive SD-02 Shop Drawings Approved Detail Drawings SD-03 Product Data Acoustical Units SD-04 Samples Acoustical Units SD-07 Certificates Acoustical Units SD-02 Shop Drawings Approved Detail Drawings SD-03 Product Data FRP Liner Panels Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Suspension System SD-04 Samples FRP Liner Panels 2.1 G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
09 57 13 09 60 05 3.1 3.1 2.2.1 2.1 1.6.1 2.1 G AE G AE G AE 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.1.1 2.2.3 2.2.5 1.6.2 G AE G AR
2.2
G AE
09 61 10
09 64 13
Suspension system SD-06 Test Reports Concrete floor slabs Floor plan diagram SD-03 Product Data Sealer/hardener SD-02 Shop Drawings Hardwood strip flooring SD-03 Product Data Local/Regional Materials Hardwood strip flooring SD-04 Samples Strip flooring Hardwood base Vapor retarder Cushions and pads Sleepers and nailers SD-07 Certificates Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions system Adhesive SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data strip flooring 2.1 3.2.1 2.2.1 G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
09 65 00 2.13 G AE
2.13 2.8 2.2 2.3 2.4 1.7.1 2.13 G AE
G AE
3.3
3.2 3.1
SD-02 Shop Drawings Resilient Flooring and Accessories SD-03 Product Data Resilient Flooring and Accessories Adhesives Vinyl Composition Tile Rubber Tile Rubber Sheet Flooring Local/Regional Materials SD-04 Samples Resilient Flooring and Accessories SD-06 Test Reports Moisture, Alkalinity and Bond Tests SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Surface Preparation Installation SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Resilient Flooring and Accessories SD-11 Closeout Submittals Local/Regional Materials 2.13 1.7.1
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
09 65 00 2.8 2.1.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.1 1.3 2.5 2.5.2 2.2 3.2 3.4 1.3 3.3 1.4 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE
2.13
09 66 13
09 66 23
09 67 00
Resilient Flooring and Accessories Adhesives SD-02 Shop Drawings Precast Terrazzo SD-03 Product Data Precast Terrazzo SD-04 Samples Stair Treads Base SD-02 Shop Drawings Approved Detail Drawings Strips Control Joint Strips SD-03 Product Data Resin Mixing, Proportioning, and Installation Cleaning and Sealing SD-04 Samples Resinous Terrazzo Flooring SD-07 Certificates Conductive Resinous Terrazzo Flooring Qualification of Applicator SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
09 67 00
1.5 2.3 2.1.3 2.1.3 G AE G AE
G AE G AE
2.1.3 1.7.6 1.7.2 3.2.5 3.2.5 3.5.1 3.5.1 3.6
G AE G AE
2.1.2 1.11 2.1 2.1 G AE G AE
G AR
09 68 00
Early Submittal Package Schedule SD-02 Shop Drawings Flooring SD-03 Product Data Flooring LEED Documentation SD-04 Samples Flooring Mock-Up SD-07 Certificates Installer Report Report Report Report SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Application SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Flooring System SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranty SD-03 Product Data Carpet Carpet
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
09 68 00
2.3 2.4 3.2 3.5 1.3 1.7.1 2.6 2.1 2.3 3.3 2.1 1.3 G AE G AE
G AE G AE
2.1 3.6 1.6 1.3 2.4 1.6 G AR G AR G AR
G AR G AR
09 69 13
Carpet Moldings/Transition Strips Base Surface Preparation Installation Regulatory Requirements Local/Regional Materials Adhesives and Concrete Primer SD-04 Samples Carpet Carpet Moldings/Transition Strips SD-06 Test Reports Moisture and Alkalinity Tests SD-07 Certificates Carpet Regulatory Requirements SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Carpet Cleaning and Protection SD-02 Shop Drawings Detailed Installation Drawings SD-03 Product Data Access Flooring System Access Flooring System SD-04 Samples Finish
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
09 69 13
2.2 1.4.1 1.3 1.3.7 2.6 3.2.2 3.2 1.3 2.4 2.1 3.2 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.1.8 2.1.1 G G G G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE 2.1.5 G AE
G AR G AR
09 83 13
Panel Support System Accessories SD-05 Design Data Compliance with ICC-ES AC300 Seismic Calculations SD-06 Test Reports Factory Tests Electrical Resistance Field Tests SD-07 Certificates Access Flooring System Access Flooring System SD-02 Shop Drawings Approved Detail Drawings SD-03 Product Data Installation Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Fiberglass and Plaster Wall and Ceiling Assemblies Non-Acoustical Wall Panels SD-04 Samples
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
09 83 13
2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.1.8 2.1.1 2.1.5 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.1.8 2.1.1 2.1.5 3.10 3.10 2.1 2.1 G AE G AE G AE
G G G G G G G
AE AE AE AE AE AE AE
09 90 00
Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Fiberglass and Plaster Wall and Ceiling Assemblies Non-Acoustical Wall Panels SD-07 Certificates Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Fiberglass and Plaster Wall and Ceiling Assemblies Non-Acoustical Wall Panels SD-02 Shop Drawings Piping identification stencil SD-03 Product Data Coating Manufacturer's Technical Data Sheets
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
09 90 00 1.11 1.4.2 1.4.4 1.4.6 1.4.3 1.4.5 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE
1.13
1.3 1.4.1.2 3.6 3.6.2 1.7.2
2.1 1.9.1 2.1
09 97 00
Special Warranties SD-04 Samples Color HighBuild Epoxy Wall Coating System Textured Wall Coating System Sample Metallic Paint System Sample HighBuild Epoxy Wall Coating System Mock-Up Sample Textured Wall Coating System Mock-Up SD-07 Certificates Applicator's qualifications Qualification Testing SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Application Mixing Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Coatings SD-11 Closeout Submittals Local/Regional Materials Materials SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
09 97 00
1.5 2.4 2.3.1 2.3.1 1.7.6 1.7.2 3.2.5 3.2.5 3.4.2 3.4.2 AE AE AE AE G G G G G G AE G AE G AE
G AE G AE
2.3.1 1.11 1.3 2.2.4 2.2.1 2.2 1.3 G AR G AR G AR G AR
G AR
10 10 00
Early Submittal Package Special Coatings Schedule SD-03 Product Data Special Coatings SD-04 Samples Special Coatings Field Sample Mock-Up SD-07 Certificates Installer Report Report Report Report SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Special Coatings SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranty SD-03 Product Data Visual Display Boards SD-04 Samples Aluminum Porcelain Enamel Materials SD-07 Certificates Visual Display Boards
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
10 14 01 3.1 G AR G AR 2.1 3.1 1.3 1.4 1.3 G AR G AR
3.1.2 3.1 3.1 1.3 G G G
10 14 02
3.1 3.1.2 3.3 1.3 G AR
10 21 13
SD-02 Shop Drawings Approved Detail Drawings SD-03 Product Data Modular Exterior Signage System Installation Exterior Signage Wind Load Requirements SD-04 Samples Exterior Signage SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Protection and Cleaning SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings SD-03 Product Data Installation SD-04 Samples Interior Signage SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Approved Manufacturer's Instructions Protection and Cleaning SD-02 Shop Drawings Installation Drawings Fabrication Drawings
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
10 21 13 1.3 1.3 2.6 2.1.1 2.1.3 2.2 2.1.4 2.1.6 2.1.5 2.1.7 2.3 2.6 2.2 3.2 2.1.6 2.1.4 1.7 G AE G AR
3.8 1.4
G AR G AE
10 21 23.16
SD-03 Product Data Toilet Partition System Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions Colors And Finishes Galvanized Steel Sheet Sound Deadening Cores Partition Panels and Doors Anchoring Devices and Fasteners Hardware and Fittings Brackets Door Hardware Ceiling-Hung Partitions SD-04 Samples Colors and Finishes Partition Panels Partition Panels Hardware and Fittings Anchoring Devices and Fasteners SD-07 Certificates Certification SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Waste Management SD-02 Shop Drawings Cubicle track layout
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
10 21 23.16 3.1
2.1 2.2 1.5 1.5 3.1 3.1.1 1.2 1.2 2.5.1 G AR G AR G AE G AE
G AR G AR
10 22 13
10 22 26
SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions installation SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Cubicle track system Curtains SD-02 Shop Drawings Wire mesh partitions SD-03 Product Data Wire mesh partitions SD-02 Shop Drawings Installation Layouts SD-03 Product Data Operable Partitions SD-04 Samples Operable Partitions SD-06 Test Reports Flame and Smoke Development Tests SD-07 Certificates Materials Operable Partitions SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operable Partitions 2.1 1.2 1.2
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
10 25 00 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 G AR G AR G AR G AE G AE G AE
10 25 13
2.2
G AR
10 26 13 2.2 2.3 2.3.1.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1.1 G AR/A G AR/A G AR/A G AR/A G AR/A G AR/A
SD-02 Shop Drawings Service wall units SD-03 Product Data Service wall units SD-04 Samples Service wall units SD-02 Shop Drawings Medical Headwall SD-03 Product Data Medical Headwall SD-04 Samples Medical Headwall SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Medical Headwall SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Corner Guards Wall Guards (Bumper Guards) Bed Locators SD-03 Product Data Corner Guards Wall Guards (Bumper Guards) Bed Locators SD-04 Samples
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
10 26 13 2.2 2.3 2.3.1.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1.1 2.1.2 2.2 1.4 2.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 3.2 G AR
2.5
G AE
10 28 13 G AR G AR
G AR G AR
10 44 16 G AR G AR
10 45 40
Finish SD-06 Test Reports Corner Guards Wall Guards (Bumper Guards) Bed Locators SD-07 Certificates Corner Guards Wall Guards (Bumper Guards) Bed Locators SD-03 Product Data Finishes Accessory Items Warranty SD-04 Samples Finishes Accessory Items SD-07 Certificates Accessory Items SD-02 Shop Drawings Cabinets SD-03 Product Data Cabinets SD-04 Samples Cabinets SD-02 Shop Drawings Shop Drawings
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
10 45 40 1.5.4 2.1.1 1.5.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 1.11 1.11 2.1 2.2 1.11 1.11 2.1 2.1 2.1 G AE G AE G AE G AR G AR G AR
1.7
G AR
10 51 00
10 56 26
Wiring SD-03 Product Data Product Options Products SD-07 Certificates Installer Qualifications turnstile SD-11 Closeout Submittals turnstile SD-02 Shop Drawings Fabrication Drawings Installation Drawings SD-03 Product Data Locker Materials Hardware and Accessories SD-04 Samples Color Chips SD-07 Certificates Certificates SD-02 Shop Drawings Mobile shelving system SD-03 Product Data Mobile shelving system SD-04 Samples Mobile shelving system SD-11 Closeout Submittals
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
10 56 26 10 56 26.13 1.5.1 1.5.1 2.4 1.5.1 1.7.1 G AE G AE G AE G AE
1.7
1.5.1 1.11 1.8.1 2.1 2.1.5.3 2.6.1 2.6.3 2.6.4 1.8.1 G G G G G G AR AR AR AR AR AR G AR
G AR
11 13 10
Special warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Storage System SD-03 Product Data Storage System SD-04 Samples Paint Finish SD-05 Design Data Storage System SD-07 Certificates Qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Storage System SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings SD-03 Product Data Loading Dock Levelers Dock Bumpers Restraining Device Weather seals Insulation Locks SD-04 Samples
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 13 10
1.8.1 2.6.5 2.1.5.3 2.1.5.3 1.8.1 2.1.5.3 2.6.5
3.4 2.1 2.6.1 3.4 2.1 2.2 2.1 2.2 G AR G AR G AR G AR G AR G AR
G AR
11 19 00
Fastening Materials Angles Dock Bumpers Rubber SD-07 Certificates Fastening Materials Rubberized Fabric Angles Hardware Items SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operating and Maintenance Instructions Loading Dock Levelers Restraining Device Instruction SD-02 Shop Drawings Weapons Container Gun Clearing Device SD-03 Product Data Weapons Container Gun Clearing Device SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Weapons Container Gun Clearing Device 2.1 2.2 G AR G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 19 00 1.8 1.4.1 2.3 1.4.1 2.3 G AE 1.7 G AE G AE G AE G AE
11 24 33.01
1.9 1.9 1.9 1.8 2.2 2.3 2.4 G AR G AR G AR
11 47 00
SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Fall arrest safety anchors Lifeline system SD-03 Product Data Fall arrest safety anchors Lifeline system SD-05 Design Data Design calculations SD-07 Certificates Qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Equipment Manual Inspection Log Book As-Built Shop Drawing SD-11 Closeout Submittals Fall Protection SD-02 Shop Drawings Ice Flaker Ice Storage Bin Compact, Undercounter Ice Machine SD-03 Product Data Ice Flaker 2.2 G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 47 00
2.3 2.4
G AR G AR
1.3 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 1.11 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4
11 52 13 G AR G AR G AR G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE
11 53 13
Ice Storage Bin Compact, Undercounter Ice Machine SD-11 Closeout Submittals Special Warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Motor Operated Screens SD-03 Product Data Motor Operated Screens SD-04 Samples Motor Operated Screens SD-02 Shop Drawings Fume hoods Fume hoods SD-03 Product Data Fume hoods Fume hoods SD-04 Samples Mock-up Fume hoods Fume hoods SD-05 Design Data Fume Hoods Fume Hoods SD-07 Certificates Fume hoods
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 53 13
2.4 2.10
G AR
11 53 36 2.1 2.1 1.8 2.2 G AE G AE
2.1 1.8 2.2 2.3 2.2 2.3 G AE G AE G AE G AE
G AR
11 53 53
Fume hoods testing Octave band analysis SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Videotape Operating and maintenance manuals SD-02 Shop Drawings Dust Collector SD-03 Product Data Dust Collector SD-07 Certificates Manufacturer Qualifications Materials SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Dust Collector SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Biological safety cabinets Biological safety cabinets SD-03 Product Data Biological safety cabinets Biological safety cabinets
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 53 53 2.2 2.3 3.3 2.2 2.3
2.2 2.3 3.4 1.7 1.6.1.1 G AE G AE
G AR G AR
11 53 59
1.6.1.1
G AE
1.6.1.1 1.10
G AE G AE
SD-05 Design Data Biological safety cabinets Biological safety cabinets SD-06 Test Reports Test SD-07 Certificates Biological safety cabinets Biological safety cabinets SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Biological safety cabinets Biological safety cabinets Demonstration and instructions SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Early Submittal Package SD-02 Shop Drawings Class III Biological Safety Cabinets SD-03 Product Data Class III Biological Safety Cabinets SD-04 Samples Class III Biological Safety Cabinets Mock-Up SD-06 Test Reports
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 53 59 1.9.2 1.6.1.1
3.4.1
1.6.1.1
G AR
1.14.1 1.5 2.10 2.10 1.7.2 2.13.1 2.8.3 2.13.2 2.13.2 1.7.1 2.13.5
G AR G AE G AE G AE
11 53 63.00
Testing SD-07 Certificates Manufacturer Qualifications Class III Biological Safety Cabinets SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Class III Biological Safety Cabinets SD-11 Closeout Submittals Special Warranty SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Early Submittal Package SD-02 Shop Drawings Sterilizers SD-03 Product Data Sterilizers SD-06 Test Reports Biological Challenge Test Biological Challenge Test Biological Barrier System Biological Barrier System Quality Assurance Test SD-07 Certificates Manufacturer Qualifications Report
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 53 63.00 3.2
3.3
2.10 1.10 1.10.2 2.2 2.2 G AE G AE
G AR
11 53 64
1.4.1 3.3
2.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 G AE G AE

11 53 67 G AE
Start-up SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Installation SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Sterilizers SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranty Warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Sterilizer SD-03 Product Data Sterilizer warranty SD-07 Certificates Manufacturer Qualifications Start-up SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Sterilizer SD-02 Shop Drawings Depyrogenation Ovens SD-03 Product Data Depyrogenation Ovens SD-05 Design Data Depyrogenation Ovens
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 53 67 3.8.3 3.8.1 1.10.1 1.10.2 2.1 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8
2.1 3.9 1.5 2.2.1 G AE G AE
G AR
11 53 69
SD-06 Test Reports Control System Tests Site Acceptance Test (SAT) SD-07 Certificates Manufacturer's Qualifications Installer Qualifications SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Depyrogenation Ovens Factory Acceptance Test Surface Finish Test Testing SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Depyrogenation Ovens SD-11 Closeout Submittals Demonstration and instruction SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Early Submittal Package SD-02 Shop Drawings Alkaline Hydrolysis Tissue Digester SD-03 Product Data Alkaline Hydrolysis Tissue Digester SD-06 Test Reports 2.2.1 G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 53 69
2.2.1
2.2.1 3.4.3 3.2.2
2.2.1
G AR
11 53 73 2.2 2.2 2.2 1.11 3.2.1 1.5.1 1.13 3.3.3 G AE G AE G AE
11 53 91
Alkaline Hydrolysis Tissue Digester SD-07 Certificates Alkaline Hydrolysis Tissue Digester Certification SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Recommended Specifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Alkaline Hydrolysis Tissue Digester SD-02 Shop Drawings Modular Wall SD-03 Product Data Modular Wall SD-07 Certificates Modular Wall Warranty installation instructions SD-02 Shop Drawings Tunnel Washer SD-03 Product Data Warranty SD-06 Test Reports Start-up
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 53 91
3.3.3 1.13 1.8 3.3 1.11.1 1.5.1 3.4.3 1.5.1 G AE
11 53 93
1.8 3.3.3 1.9 3.3
1.12.1
Data Warranty Installer Qualifications Installation and Start-up Factory testing Tunnel Washer Training and instruction SD-02 Shop Drawings Pit Mounted, Double-Length, Pass-Through Rack Washer SD-03 Product Data Warranty SD-06 Test Reports Start-up SD-07 Certificates Installer qualifications SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Installation and Start-up SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports Factory Testing SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Pit Mounted, Double-Length, Pass-Through Rack Washer Training and instruction 1.5.1 3.4.3
G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 60 00 2.2 2.2 1.6 3.4 2.2 G AE G AE
2.2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 G G G G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE
G AR
11 72 00
SD-02 Shop Drawings Glassware Washer SD-03 Product Data Glassware Washer Warranty SD-06 Test Reports Test SD-07 Certificates pH SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Glassware Washer SD-02 Shop Drawings Down Draft Necropsy Table Orbital Exam lights Isolation Cubicles Surgical Scrub Sink Ultrasonic Cleaning System X-Ray Illuminator X-Ray Illuminator Down Draft Necropsy and Procedure Tables SD-03 Product Data Down Draft Necropsy Table Orbital Exam lights Isolation Cubicles 2.1 2.2 2.3 G AE G AE G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 72 00
2.4 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14
G G G G G
AE AE AE AE AE
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.1.6 2.1.6
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3.3 2.2.1 G AR
G G G G
AR AR AR AR
11 72 13
Surgical Scrub Sink Ultrasonic Cleaning System X-Ray Illuminator X-Ray Illuminator Down Draft Necropsy and Procedure Tables SD-04 Samples Down Draft Necropsy Table Orbital Exam lights Isolation Cubicles Surgical Scrub Sink SD-06 Test Reports Test SD-07 Certificates test SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Down Draft Necropsy Table Orbital Exam lights Isolation Cubicles Surgical Scrub Sink SD-11 Closeout Submittals Demonstration and Instruction SD-02 Shop Drawings Narcotics cabinet SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 72 13
2.2
G AR
2.2.1 1.6 1.5.2 G AE G AE
G AR
11 73 23
1.5.2
G AE
1.9
1.5.2
G AR
3.6
11 73 24 1.4 1.4 G AE G AE
items SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Narcotics cabinet SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Early Submittals SD-02 Shop Drawings Vacuum Bedding Delivery System SD-03 Product Data Vacuum Bedding Delivery System SD-07 Certificates qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Vacuum Bedding Delivery System SD-11 Closeout Submittals Demonstration Warranty SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Bedding Dispenser SD-02 Shop Drawings Bedding Dispenser SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
11 73 24 1.7 3.3
1.10
1.4 3.3 2.1 2.1 1.5.2 1.3 G AE G AE
G AR
11 94 00
2.1 1.8.1 1.3 3.3 G AR
G AR
12 24 13
Warranty SD-07 Certificates qualifications SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions installation SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Bedding Dispenser SD-11 Closeout Submittals Demonstration SD-02 Shop Drawings Decontamination Misting Tunnel SD-03 Product Data Decontamination Misting Tunnel SD-07 Certificates manufacturer qualifications performance SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Decontamination Misting Tunnel SD-11 Closeout Submittals Special warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Hardware Installation SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
12 24 13
2.1 1.3 2.1 1.3 2.1 2.1 1.3 G AR G AR
G AR G AR
2.1 1.3 2.3 2.2 2.12 2.4 2.5 2.7.1 2.6 2.6 2.8 2.9.1 G G G G G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE G AE
G AR G AR
12 35 53.13
Window Shades Hardware SD-04 Samples Window Shades Hardware SD-06 Test Reports Window Shades SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Window Shades Hardware SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Window Shades Hardware SD-02 Shop Drawings Casework SD-03 Product Data Casework Materials Hardware Table Frames Work Surfaces Strut Framing System Sink Cup Sink Mechanical Service Fixtures Storage Cabinets
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
12 35 53.13 2.11 2.8.2 1.11 2.8 2.3 2.2 2.5.1 2.2 1.6.3 1.6.3 2.5 2.7 2.6 2.8 3.4 1.9
2.9.2 G AE
G AE
12 35 53.19
12 35 53.26 G AE G G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE AE
Storage Cabinets SD-04 Samples Finishes and Colors SD-06 Test Reports Test Report SD-07 Certificates Qualifications Mechanical service fixtures SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Casework SD-02 Shop Drawings Support Structures SD-07 Certificates Compliance Statement SD-02 Shop Drawings Casework SD-04 Samples Leg frame assembly stainless steel top Mobile Shelves cabinet hardware service fittings and fixtures SD-11 Closeout Submittals Cleaning Warranty
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
12 48 13.13 2.1 2.2 2.1 2.2 2.5 2.6 2.5 2.6 2.3.4 3.3 1.5.2 1.5.3 2.3.5 2.3.5 2.3.5 G AE G AE G AE G AR G AR
12 93 00
13 21 00
SD-03 Product Data recycled material content Mat protective flooring materials SD-04 Samples Mat SD-02 Shop Drawings Bicycle Racks Waste/Ash Receptacles SD-03 Product Data Bicycle Racks Waste/Ash Receptacles SD-04 Samples Finish SD-06 Test Reports Testing SD-07 Certificates Primer certificate Powder coatings certificate SD-02 Shop Drawings Controlled Environment Rooms SD-03 Product Data Controlled Environment Rooms SD-04 Samples Controlled Environment Rooms SD-05 Design Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
13 21 00 3.2 3.2 2.4 2.2.1 1.4.6 1.7
2.3.5
G AE
2.3.5 2.3.5 3.1 3.4 1.4 3.1 1.4 3.1 3.1

G AR
13 48 00 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE
13 49 19
Controlled Environment Rooms SD-06 Test Reports Field Test Reports SD-07 Certificates field test refrigeration panels control panel Qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Controlled Environment Rooms SD-11 Closeout Submittals Controlled Environment Rooms SD-02 Shop Drawings Bracing Resilient Vibration Isolation Devices Equipment Requirements SD-03 Product Data Bracing Equipment Requirements SD-02 Shop Drawings Materials SD-03 Product Data Materials
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
13 49 19 3.3 3.1 2.3 2.2 3.4 2.2 1.6 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE

13 49 23 G AE G AE
14 21 23 1.3 2.1 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 2.1 1.3 1.3
SD-06 Test Reports Testing and Certification SD-07 Certificates Materials SD-02 Shop Drawings RF Shield Assembly SD-03 Product Data Material SD-06 Test Reports Testing SD-07 Certificates Material Qualifications SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings Passenger Elevators accessories Supporting systems Machinery and controls Heat Loads Wiring diagrams Sequence of operations SD-03 Product Data Passenger Elevators supporting systems Data sheets
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
14 21 23
1.5.2 2.4.2 3.2 1.3 1.3 3.2.2 1.4 1.4.3 G AE G AE G AE
G AE G AE
2.1 1.7.1 1.7.1 1.5.2 3.3 1.3 2.1 2.9 G AE G AE G AE G AR G AR G AR
G AR G AR
14 24 00
Maintenance and diagnostic tools Logic control Field Quality Control SD-05 Design Data Reaction loads Heat Loads SD-06 Test Reports Field Test SD-07 Certificates Quality Assurance Welders' Qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Passenger Elevators Maintenance and Repair Action Plan Operation and Maintenance Manuals Maintenance and Diagnostic Tools Training SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings Elevators Accessories SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
14 24 00
2.1 2.9 3.2 2.4.1 1.3 1.3 3.2.2 1.4.3 1.4 G AE G AE
G AE G AE
2.1 3.3 1.5.3 1.7 3.3 G AR G AR G AR
G AR G AR
14 42 00 2.2
Elevators Accessories Field Quality Control Logic Control SD-05 Design Data Reaction Loads Heat Loads SD-06 Test Reports Field Tests Reports SD-07 Certificates Welders' qualifications Qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Elevators Operation and Maintenance Manuals Maintenance and Diagnostic Tools Maintenance and Repair Action Plan Operation and Maintenance Training SD-02 Shop Drawings Lift SD-03 Product Data G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
14 42 00 1.7 G AR
2.2
G AR
2.2
G AR
14 83 16 2.1 2.1 1.4.1 G AR G AR
2.1 2.1 1.13.1 1.13.2 1.13.3 1.16 G AE F G FPE G FPE G FPE
G AR
21 10 01
Lift SD-07 Certificates qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Lift SD-11 Closeout Submittals Warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Scissor Lift SD-03 Product Data Scissor Lift SD-07 Certificates qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Scissor Lift SD-11 Closeout Submittals Scissor Lift SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Fire Protection Specialist Sprinkler System Installer System Technician SD-02 Shop Drawings Shop Drawings SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
21 10 01 2.5 2.5.1.2 2.6 3.2.13 2.7.2.2 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.6 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.10 2.4 1.16 2.3 3.9 1.6.1 G AE F G AE F G FPE G G G G G AE F AE F AE F AE F FPE G AE F G G G G AE F AE F AE F AE F G G G G G AE F AE F AE F AE F AE F
Fire Protection Related Submittals Aboveground Piping Components Mechanical couplings Pressure gauge Signs Electrical attachment control valves Pipe hangers and supports Valves Riser check valve assembly Sprinkler Waterflow Indicator Switches Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switches Backflow Prevention Assemblies Underground Piping Components Sway Bracing Materials and Equipment Final Acceptance Test SD-05 Design Data Hydraulic Calculations Seismic control calculations SD-06 Test Reports Preliminary Test Report Preliminary Tests 3.9 3.8
3.1
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
21 10 01 3.9 3.4 G FPE G FPE
3.8.2.4
G FPE
3.10 3.10 1.15 3.9 1.11.1 1.12 3.3 3.1 3.3 3.9.3 3.9 3.10 G G G G AE F FPE FPE FPE
G FPE G FPE G FPE G FPE G FPE G FPE G AE F G AE F
21 30 00
Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test Final Acceptance Test Report SD-07 Certificates Inspection by Fire Protection Specialist SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operating and Maintenance Instructions On-site Training Spare Parts SD-11 Closeout Submittals As-Built Drawings SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Fire Protection Specialist Manufacturer's Representative SD-02 Shop Drawings Installation Requirements SD-03 Product Data Fire Pump Installation Related Submittals Installation Requirements Preliminary Tests Field Tests Field Training
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
21 30 00 3.9.3 3.9.4 3.9.2 G FPE G FPE
3.9.4
G FPE
1.11.1 1.11.2 1.11.3 1.11.4 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.15
G G G G
FPE FPE FPE FPE
3.9.3 2.13 1.6 3.14.1 3.14.1 1.18.1 G AE G AE
G FPE G FPE G FPE
22 00 00
Final Acceptance Test SD-06 Test Reports Preliminary Tests Final Acceptance Test Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test SD-07 Certificates Fire Protection Specialist Qualifications of Welders Qualifications of Installer Preliminary Test Certification Fire Pump UL listed FM approved Pre-fabricated Fire Pump Shed SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Fire Pumps Flow Meter Spare Parts SD-02 Shop Drawings Plumbing System SD-03 Product Data Plumbing System Local/Regional Materials Environmental Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 00 00 G AE G AE
2.1 3.6 1.9.1 3.9 3.14 3.6 1.7 2.5.3.1
3.14.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 G AE G AE G AE
G AR
22 05 19
22 05 29
Materials Backflow prevention Welding Vibration-Absorbing Features SD-06 Test Reports Tests, Flushing and Disinfection Backflow Prevention SD-07 Certificates Materials and Equipment Bolts SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Plumbing System SD-03 Product Data Thermometers And Temperature Indicators Gauges And Pressure Indicators SD-02 Shop Drawings Pipe Hangers, Supports And Attachments SD-03 Product Data Protective Coatings And Finishes Pipe Hangers, Supports And Attachments SD-05 Design Data 2.1 2.2 G AE G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 05 29
2.2
G AE
22 05 33 2.1 3.2 G AE
2.1 1.3 1.3 2.7 2.6 1.3 G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE
G AR
22 05 48
Pipe Hangers, Supports And Attachments SD-03 Product Data Heat tracing system SD-06 Test Reports Testing SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Heat tracing system SD-02 Shop Drawings Installation Drawings Outline Drawings Inertia bases Machinery bases Contractor Designed Seismic Bracing SD-03 Product Data Equipment and Performance Data Isolators Flexible connectors Pipe guides Seismic snubbers Vertical stops Thrust restraints Inertia bases 1.3 2.3 2.8 2.10 2.9 3.1.3 2.11 2.7 G G G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE AE AE
G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 05 48
2.6 3.1.11 1.5.2 G AE
G AE G AE
2.7 2.6 3.1.7.7 3.2 3.2 G AE G AE 3.2 3.1.7.7 3.2 1.3 G G G G AE AE AE AE
G AE G AE
Machinery bases Machinery foundations and subbases Machinery manufacturer's sound data SD-05 Design Data Inertia bases Machinery bases Riser diagrams Riser diagrams Piping Isolation-Total Floating System Concept Piping Isolation-Total Floating System Concept Calculations Calculations machinery over 300 pounds Contractor Designed Seismic Bracing SD-06 Test Reports Seismic snubbers Equipment vibration tests Equipment sound level tests Protected spring isolators SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions 2.9 3.3.3.1 3.3.3.2 2.4
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 05 48 2.12 2.2 G AR
3.1.1
22 05 53
1.6 2.2 2.2.11 2.3 2.2.1 2.2.17 3.1 2.2 2.2.11 2.3 2.2.1 2.2.17 G G G G G AE AE AE AR AR
G AR
22 05 75
3.5
G AR
22 07 00
Vibration and noise isolation components Seismic protection components SD-03 Product Data Materials SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Spare Parts SD-03 Product Data Drains Floor Sinks Cleanouts Roof Drains Roof Drains SD-07 Certificates Listing of Product Installation Drains Floor Sinks Cleanouts Roof Drains Roof Drains SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals SD-02 Shop Drawings
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 07 00
3.2.2.4 2.3 2.3 2.2.1.3 3.2 G AR
G AR G AR
22 10 06 1.2 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.1 G AE
1.2 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 G G G G AE AE AE AE
G AR
22 10 19
MICA Plates Pipe Insulation Systems SD-03 Product Data Pipe Insulation Systems SD-04 Samples Thermal Insulation SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Pipe Insulation Systems Installation SD-03 Product Data Piping system components SD-06 Test Reports Field test SD-07 Certificates Field test Disinfecting SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Installation SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Piping system components SD-03 Product Data Hose Washdown Stations Hose Washdown Stations Hose Washdown Stations Hose Washdown Stations
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 10 19
G G G G G G G G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G G G G AE AE AE AE
Hose Washdown Stations 2.6 Hose Bibbs 2.7 Hose Bibbs 2.8 Hose Bibbs 2.9 Hose Bibbs 2.10 Water Hammer Arresters 2.13 Pressure Reducing Valves 2.14 (Water Service, Direct Acting) Pressure Reducing Valves 2.15 (Water Service, Hydraulic Control) Pressure Reducing Valves (Air) 2.16 Strainers 2.17 Flow Balancing Valves And 2.18 Meters (Indicators) Backflow Preventers (Reduced 2.19 Pressure Type) Backflow Preventers 2.20 (Atmospheric Type) Backflow Preventers (Continuous 2.21 Pressure Type) Double Check Valve Assembly 2.22 Trap Primers 2.24 Fixed Air Gaps 2.25 Thermostatic Mixing Valve 2.11 Station
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 10 19 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.31 2.32 3.11 3.11.1 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE
2.12
G AE
3.1.3 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.7 2.1.9 1.7.1 3.2 2.1 G G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE AE G AE
G AR
22 11 23
Tempered Water Loop Mixing Valve Station Relief Valves Water Meters Flushing Nozzles For Flushing Trenches Trench Flushing Solenoid Valve In-Line Vent HEPA Filters In-Line Vent HEPA Filters SD-06 Test Reports Tests Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data piping specialties SD-02 Shop Drawings Water Pressure Booster System SD-03 Product Data Pumps Control Panel Variable Frequency Drives Welding Vibration-Absorbing Features Water Pressure Booster System SD-06 Test Reports
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 11 23 1.5
1.9
2.1 2.1.1 2.2 2.2 2.6 3.1 2.9 3.3 2.9.2 3.3.2 1.9 G AE G AE
G AR
22 14 29
3.3.2
G AR
22 15 19.19 1.7.1
Installation and Start-Up Engineer SD-07 Certificates Materials and Equipment SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Water Pressure Booster System SD-11 Closeout Submittals pumps SD-02 Shop Drawings Wastewater Lift Station SD-03 Product Data Wastewater Lift Station Spare Parts Installation Instruction Manual Factory Test Pump Field Tests SD-06 Test Reports Factory Test Report Field Test Report Installation and Start-Up Engineer SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operating and Maintenance Instructions SD-02 Shop Drawings Air compressor system G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 15 19.19 2.4 2.4.11 2.4.12 2.5 2.6 2.4.11 2.7.1 3.3.1.2 3.3.1.1 2.7.1 3.3.1 1.10 1.5.1 2.7.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 3.3.1 1.5.4 1.7.1 1.5.5 G AE G AE G G G G AE AE AE AE
SD-03 Product Data Air compressor Inlet air filters Line silencer Air flow rate and pressure recorder Carbon monoxide monitor Housing SD-06 Test Reports performance tests Sound level tests Air compressor performance tests Sound level and run-in tests Air compressor system test Installation and Start-Up Engineer SD-07 Certificates Work plan Factory test procedures Factory testing certification Qualifications of field supervisors Field test procedures Training material Air compressor system system installation SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 15 19.19 1.13 3.1 2.2 1.5.4 3.3.2 2.2 3.2.2 G AE G AR G AE
1.7.1
G AR
22 31 00
3.3.2
G AR
22 33 00 2.2.1 2.2.1 3.2 2.2.1 2.2.1 3.1.4 G AE G AE
Air compressor system SD-11 Closeout Submittals Posted operating instructions SD-02 Shop Drawings Installation SD-03 Product Data Softening Equipment Spare Parts Field Instructions SD-06 Test Reports Softening Equipment Piping SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operating and Maintenance Instructions SD-02 Shop Drawings Water Heater SD-03 Product Data Water Heater SD-06 Test Reports Tests, Flushing and Disinfection SD-07 Certificates Water Heater Water Heater Bolt
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 33 00 2.2.1 1.3 1.6 1.3 1.5 3.2 G AR G AE G AE G AR
3.3
G AR
2.1.1 2.1.1 G AE
G AE
2.1.1 1.5 1.5 G AE G AE
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Water Heater 22 33 30.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Solar Energy System SD-03 Product Data Spare Parts Solar Energy System Welder Qualifications SD-06 Test Reports Inspection and Testing SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Procedures 22 36 00 SD-02 Shop Drawings Chemical Shower System SD-03 Product Data Chemical Shower System SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Chemical Shower System 22 42 00 SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings Connection Diagrams SD-03 Product Data G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 42 00 2.1 G AE
2.2
G AE
3.6 3.2 2.2
3.7
G AR
22 62 16 2.2.3 2.2.4 G AE 2.1.7.16 G AE 2.1.10 2.1.8 2.2.3.2 2.1.7 2.1.2 1.6.5.1 2.1.5 G G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE AE G AE
Plumbing Fixtures and Trim SD-04 Samples Manufacturer's Standard Color Charts SD-06 Test Reports Tests SD-07 Certificates Listing of Product Installation Plumbing Fixtures and Trim SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals SD-02 Shop Drawings Waste Anesthesia Gas Disposal (WAGD) Vacuum system Vacuum system Equipment foundations SD-03 Product Data Manifolds Station outlets and terminal units Vacuum Pumps Specialties Valves Vibration isolators In-line Gas HEPA Filters
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 62 16
2.1.6
3.3.1
1.6.1 3.3 1.6.1 1.6.1 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.2.3 2.2.3.2
BSL-2 Vacuum System HEPA Filter Assembly SD-06 Test Reports Medical and Laboratory Gas and Vacuum System Performance Tests SD-07 Certificates Field Testing Procedures Field Testing Procedures Medical gas systems testing agency qualifications Welder and brazer procedures and qualifications In-line Gas HEPA Filters BSL-2 Vacuum System HEPA Filter Assembly Waste Anesthesia Gas Disposal (WAGD) Vacuum system vacuum pumps SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Vacuum Pumps SD-11 Closeout Submittals Piping systems diagrams Pumps Pumps 2.2.3.2 1.6.5.2 2.2.4.3 2.2.8.3
G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 63 17 2.1.1 2.2 G AE 2.1.1 2.2 G AE 3.3 2.2 2.2 3.5.4 1.5.4 G AE G AE
22 64 00
2.2 3.3 3.4 Part 2 G AE
G AR
22 67 00
SD-02 Shop Drawings equipment piping and valves SD-03 Product Data equipment piping and valves SD-07 Certificates Piping System SD-02 Shop Drawings Breathing Air System SD-03 Product Data Breathing Air System SD-07 Certificates Test Results Inspection Special Warranty SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Breathing Air System SD-11 Closeout Submittals Field Service Demonstration and Instruction SD-02 Shop Drawings Purified Water Generating Equipment SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 67 00
2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.14 2.12 2.13 2.11 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 2.19 2.20 2.22 Part 2 1.7
Multi Media Filter Water Softeners Carbon Filter Reverse Osmosis Concentrate Reclaim Pump Mixed Bed Deionizers Ultra-Violet Sterilization Unit Ultra-Violet Sterilization Unit RO Water Storage Tank Distribution Pumps Ultraviolet Sterilization Unit Ultraviolet Sterilization Unit Submicron Filter Resistivity Controllers And Cells Flow Meter Water Meter Pressure Gauges Mounting Skids Main Control Panel SD-07 Certificates Purified Water Generating Equipment Qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Multi Media Filter 2.4 G AR
G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G
AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 67 00
2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.14 2.12 2.13 2.11 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 2.19 2.20 2.22 1.2 2.2 1.5 2.2.4 2.2.5 G G G G AE AE AE AE
G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G AE
AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR
22 71 00
Water Softeners Carbon Filter Reverse Osmosis Concrete Reclaim Storage Tank Concentrate Reclaim Pump Mixed Bed Deionizers Ultra-Violet Sterilization Unit Ultra-Violet Sterilization Unit RO Water Storage Tank Distribution Pumps Ultraviolet Sterilization Unit Ultraviolet Sterilization Unit Submicron Filter Resistivity Controllers And Cells Flow Meter Water Meter Pressure Gauges Mounting Skids Main Control Panel SD-02 Shop Drawings Watering System SD-03 Product Data Piping Materials and Equipment Manual Valves Solenoid Flush Valves
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 71 00
2.3 2.4 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 G G G G AE AE AE AE
G AE G AE
3.4
1.5
2.2 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.4 2.3 2.8 2.13.6.2 3.5.2
G G G G G G G G
AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR
22 72 00
Pressure Reducing Stations Interconnect Station Assembly Portable Sanitizer Recoil Hose Flush Station Chlorine Injector Station Controls Automated Watering System Controller SD-06 Test Reports Start-up and Field Service Reports SD-07 Certificates Statement of Manufacturer/Installer Qualifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Piping Manual Valves Solenoid Flush Valves Interconnect Station Assembly Pressure Reducing Stations Recoil Hose Flush Station Filters Instructional videotapes SD-02 Shop Drawings
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
22 72 00 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 1.4.1 G AE 3.5 3.4 G AE G G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE AE
1.4.1
G AE
1.4.1
G AR G AE
23 00 00
Detergent Transfer System SD-03 Product Data Detergent Bulk Tanks Detergent Day Tanks Transfer Pumps Control Panel Emergency Stop/Start Panel Emergency Stop/Start Pushbutton Momentary Pushbutton (Alarm Silence; System Reset Timer Relay Timer Relay Relays Alarm Light Alarm Annunciator Remote Bulk Tank Fill Station SD-06 Test Reports Field Service Report SD-07 Certificates Field Tests SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Detergent Transfer System SD-02 Shop Drawings Shop Standards
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
23 00 00 2.1 2.7.6 2.7.7 G AE G AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE 2.7.8 G 2.7.10.1 G 2.7.10.2 G 2.7.10.3 G 2.7.10.4 G 2.7.13 G 2.7.14.1 G 2.7.14.11 G 2.8.1.1 G 2.8.1.3 G 2.8.1.6 G 2.8.1.8 2.9 2.11 2.10.2 2.10.3 2.10.4 G AE G AE
3.1.2
G AE
Drawings SD-03 Product Data Components and Equipment Metallic Flexible Duct Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts Duct Connectors Duct Access Doors Fire Dampers Manual Balancing Dampers Bubble Tight Dampers Sound Attenuation Equipment Diffusers Registers and Grilles Centrifugal Fans Axial Mixed Flow Fans Panel Type Power Wall Ventilators Air-Curtain Fans Air Handling Units Room Fan-Coil Units Constant Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units Variable Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units Dual Duct Terminal Units G G G G
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
23 00 00
2.10.5 2.10.8 2.8.4 2.14 2.11 3.1 2.10.5 1.8.2 3.13 3.6 3.5 3.1.2 1.7 3.5 3.1 G AE G AE
G G G G
AE AE AE AE
Air Valve Reheat Coils for Terminal Units Humidifiers Energy Recovery Devices Test Procedures Diagrams SD-04 Samples Air Valve Factory Tests SD-06 Test Reports Performance Tests Damper Acceptance Test Duct Pressure Decay Leak Test SD-07 Certificates Bolts Welding Duct Pressure Decay Leak Test SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Manufacturer's Installation Instructions SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals Fire Dampers Manual Balancing Dampers 3.13 G AR 2.7.10.2 G AR 2.7.10.3 G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
23 00 00
2.7.10.4 2.8.1.1 2.8.1.2 2.8.1.3 2.8.1.6 2.8.1.8 2.9 2.11 2.10.2 2.10.3 2.10.4 2.10.5 2.10.8 2.8.4 2.14 3.13 G G G G G G AR AR AR AR AR AR G AR G G G G AR AR AR AR
G G G G G
AR AR AR AR AR
23 05 48 1.2 1.2 1.2 G AE G AE G AE
Bubble Tight Dampers Centrifugal Fans In-Line Centrifugal Fans Axial Mixed Flow Fans Panel Type Power Wall Ventilators Air-Curtain Fans Air Handling Units Room Fan-Coil Units Constant Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units Variable Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units Dual Duct Terminal Units Air Valve Reheat Coils for Terminal Units Humidifiers Energy Recovery Devices Operation and Maintenance Training SD-02 Shop Drawings Installation Drawings Outline Drawings Contractor Designed Seismic Bracing SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
23 05 48 2.1.3 2.1.2 G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE
1.2
G AE
1.2
2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 3.3 G AE
Equipment and Performance Data Bases Isolators Floor-Mounted Piping Vertical Piping SD-05 Design Data Contractor Designed Seismic Bracing SD-06 Test Reports Type of Isolator Type of Base Allowable Deflection Measured Deflection 23 05 93.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms SD-03 Product Data TAB Related HVAC Submittals TAB Procedures Calibration Systems Readiness Check TAB Execution TAB Verification SD-06 Test Reports Design Review Report 3.2 3.5.1 1.4 3.5.8 3.5.1 3.5.10 3.1
G AE G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
3.5.8 3.5.9 3.5.10 1.5.1 1.5.2 3.2.2.4 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.13 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.2 2.1.8 2.1.1.3 2.6.3.1 2.5 1.6.3 3.5 3.3 3.5 G AE G AE G G G G G G G AR AR AR AR AR AR AR G AR
23 05 93.00 10 Systems Readiness Check TAB Report TAB Verification Report SD-07 Certificates TAB Firm TAB Specialist 23 07 00 SD-02 Shop Drawings MICA Plates SD-03 Product Data General Materials Adhesives Sealants Duct Insulation Duct Insulation Jackets Pipe Insulation Materials Jackets SD-04 Samples Thermal Insulation 23 25 00 SD-03 Product Data Water Treatment System Water Analysis Spare Parts Field Instructions Tests Demonstrations SD-06 Test Reports
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
23 25 00
3.3.2.1
2.6.3.1 3.5 1.6 3.1 G AE G AE
G AR
2.1 1.6 2.4 2.8 2.8.1 2.11 2.3 3.7 3.2 3.5 2.1.1 3.8 G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE 3.5 3.5
Condenser Water Quality Assurance Tests SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Water Treatment System Training Course 23 40 00.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings CBR Air Filtration System Installation and Erection SD-03 Product Data Standard Products Filtration System Filtration Elements Isolation Dampers Damper Operators Pressure Gauge Quality Assurance Program Testing Agency Welding Acceptance Tests Factory Tests Field Training SD-06 Test Reports Acceptance Tests SD-07 Certificates Acceptance Tests
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
3.6
3.8 3.8
G AR G AR
1.7.2 3.1 3.1.12 2.2.1.5 2.2.2.3 2.6 2.9 2.10 2.4.11 2.4.12 2.4.13 2.4.14 2.4.15 G AE G AE G AE G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE G AE G AE
23 40 00.00 10 Preparation for Shipping SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Filtration Unit Manuals Operating and Maintenance Instructions 23 64 26 SD-02 Shop Drawings Drawings Installation Pipe Anchors SD-03 Product Data Grooved Mechanical Connections For Steel Grooved Mechanical Connections For Copper Pumps Expansion Tanks Air Separators Water Temperature Mixing Valve Water Temperature Regulating Valves Water Pressure Reducing Valve Pressure Relief Valve Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves SD-06 Test Reports G AE G AE G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
23 64 26
3.1.1.3 3.4.2
3.1.1.1 3.1.1.2 2.2 2.2.1.1 2.2.1.2 2.2.2.2 2.2.1.3 2.2.2.2 2.2.1.3 3.9
Piping welds NDE report Pressure tests reports One-Year Inspection Report For Cooling Water SD-07 Certificates Employer's Record Documents (For Welding) Welding Procedures and Qualifications Piping Fittings Unions Unions Flanges Flanges Gaskets SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Lesson plan for the Instruction Course SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Pumps Expansion Tanks Air Separators 23 65 00.00 10 SD-03 Product Data Cooling Tower 2.6 2.9 2.10 2.6 G AE
G AR G AR G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
1.5.3 3.4 3.4 3.3
2.1
3.4
G AR
2.4.1.1 3.1 3.1.7 1.4.6 2.4 3.2 3.3
23 65 00.00 10 Spare Parts Posted Instructions Demonstrations SD-06 Test Reports Summer Season Operational Performance Testing SD-07 Certificates Service Organization SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals 23 70 03.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Drawings Installation Pipe Anchors SD-03 Product Data Welding System Equipment Framed Instructions SD-06 Test Reports Adjusting, Balancing, Testing and Inspecting SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance G AE G AE G AR 3.6 G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
23 81 23 2.1 2.2.2 G AR G AR
2.1 3.2.4 3.2.3
3.1.2
2.1
G AR
25 10 00 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.11 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE
SD-03 Product Data Computer room air conditioning units Space temperature control system drawings SD-06 Test Reports Factory test Field test SD-07 Certificates Credentials of the manufacturer's field test representative SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Installation manual for each type of CRACU SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Computer room air conditioning units SD-02 Shop Drawings BMS Contractor Design Drawings SD-03 Product Data Manufacturer's Catalog Data Programming Software GPPC Application Programs SD-05 Design Data Network Bandwidth
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
25 10 00 3.4 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.6 G AE C G AE C G AE C
1.14
G AE
1.16 3.7.1 2.3.1 1.4 2.3.2 1.6.2 1.2 1.2 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AR
G AR
25 10 01
25 10 03
25 30 00 2.2 2.3
Network Bandwidth SD-06 Test Reports Performance Verification Test Point Checkout Sheets NIST traceable instrument reports Performance Reports Pneumatic Leak Test Results SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Instructions Training Documentation SD-03 Product Data XIF files LNS Database LNS Plug-in SD-05 Design Data Network Bandwidth SD-03 Product Data Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks SD-03 Product Data Automatic Control Valves Control Dampers G AE G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
25 30 00
2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.8.4 2.8.5 2.9 2.8.6 3.1.2.3 G AR G AE
G G G G G G G G G G
AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.9 3.1 2.2.7.2 G AE G AE
G G G G G G G
25 50 00
Sensors And Instrumentation Indicating Devices Output Devices Compressed Air System Control Enclosures Space Pressure Probe Instrument Test Port In-Line HEPA Filter Transformers Lighting Control System SD-04 Samples BMS Pressure Monitor Panel SD-06 Test Reports Calibration SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Automatic Control Valves Control Dampers Sensors And Instrumentation Indicating Devices Output Devices Compressed Air System Lighting Control System SD-02 Shop Drawings Wiring Layout
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
25 50 00 2.2 3.3 3.2 3.1 G AE
3.2
G AR 3.6
G AE G AE 3.2 1.4 3.2

SD-03 Product Data Components SD-06 Test Reports Start-Up SD-07 Certificates test SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Installation SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports Field Service SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operations and maintenance data SD-11 Closeout Submittals Demonstration Project Record Documents 25 90 00 SD-02 Shop Drawings sequence of operation SD-11 Closeout Submittals Project record documents 26 05 48.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Lighting Fixtures in Buildings Equipment Requirements SD-03 Product Data Lighting Fixtures in Buildings G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
1.4 1.3.3 G AE 3.1 1.3.1 1.3.3
1.9.2 1.9.3 G
26 05 48.00 10 Equipment Requirements Contractor Designed Bracing 26 08 00.13 SD-06 Test Reports Acceptance tests and inspections SD-07 Certificates Qualifications Acceptance test and inspections procedure 26 09 13 SD-02 Shop Drawings Outline Drawings Connect Diagram Completed data sheets Data Package 1 Data Package 2 SD-03 Product Data Data Package 3 SD-06 Test Reports Data Package 4 Data Package 5 SD-07 Certificates Certifications SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Instructions SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Training Data G AE G AE G AE G G G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
26 09 13
26 09 23 2.1 G AE
2.1
G AE
2.1
G AR
2.1
26 09 23.13 Part 2 2.5 1.2 Part 2 2.5 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE
Data Package 6 SD-11 Closeout Submittals Recommended spare parts and price list. Warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings Integrated Low Voltage Lighting Control System SD-03 Product Data Integrated Low Voltage Lighting Control System SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Integrated Low Voltage Lighting Control System SD-11 Closeout Submittals Integrated Low Voltage Lighting Control System SD-02 Shop Drawings Lighting Control Devices Dimming System SD-03 Product Data Installation Drawings Lighting Control Devices Dimming System SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
26 09 23.13 Part 2 1.5.1.1 1.5.1.2 1.5.1.1 2.2 2.2.2 3.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE
Part 2
26 11 16
2.6.2 2.6.3
1.6.1
G AR
26 20 00 2.13
Lighting Control Devices SD-11 Closeout Submittals Lighting Control Devices SD-02 Shop Drawings Unit Substation Drawings Transformer drawings SD-03 Product Data Fuse curves Secondary unit substation transformer vacuum cast coil type SD-06 Test Reports Acceptance checks and tests SD-07 Certificates Paint coating system Transformer Losses SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports Load Interrupter Switch production tests Design Tests (Dry-Type) SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals SD-02 Shop Drawings Transformers G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
26 20 00
2.5
G AE G AE
2.12 2.9 2.13
2.20 2.6.3
G G G G G G G
3.5.2 3.5.5 3.5.3 3.5.4 2.11
Busway Wireways SD-03 Product Data Receptacles Circuit breakers Switches Transformers Enclosed circuit breakers Manual motor starters Surge protective devices SD-04 Samples Outlet Boxes for High Containment SD-06 Test Reports 600-volt wiring test Grounding system test Transformer tests Ground-fault receptacle test SD-07 Certificates Fuses SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports Transformer factory tests SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Electrical Systems 2.22.1 1.6.1 G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
26 23 00 1.5.2 2.2 2.5.2 2.5.3 3.5.1 G G G G AE G AE
1.6.1 1.6.2 G AR
G AR
2.5.1 3.5 2.4.2 2.2.1 2.5 2.6 1.4 2.8 G AE G G G G AE AE AE AE
SD-02 Shop Drawings Switchgear Drawings SD-03 Product Data Switchgear SD-06 Test Reports Switchgear design tests Switchgear production tests Acceptance checks and tests SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Switchgear Operation and Maintenance Operation and Maintenance Manuals SD-11 Closeout Submittals Equipment Test Schedule Request for Settings 26 28 00.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Drawings Shop Drawings Motor Control Centers Panelboards SD-03 Product Data Equipment Factory Tests SD-06 Test Reports
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.8 2.5 2.5 2.3.1 1.4.1 3.3.4 3.2 3.3 2.1 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 2.1 2.3 1.5.4 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G G G G AE AE AE AE G AE G AE
26 28 00.00 10 Factory Tests 26 28 01.00 10 SD-03 Product Data Fault Current Analysis Protective Device Coordination Study Equipment System Coordinator Protective Relays Installation SD-06 Test Reports Field Testing SD-07 Certificates Devices and Equipment 26 29 23 SD-02 Shop Drawings Schematic diagrams Interconnecting diagrams Installation drawings SD-03 Product Data Variable frequency drives Wires and cables Equipment schedule SD-06 Test Reports VFD Test Performance Verification Tests Endurance Test SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
26 29 23
1.5.5
2.4.1 1.5.6
G AE
2.1 1.4.14 2.9 1.4.10 1.3.1 3.5.1.2 2.5.2 2.5 2.13.5 2.9 2.2 1.4.6 1.4.15 3.7 2.7.3.2 G G G G G G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE
G AR G AE G G G G AE AE AE AE
Installation instructions SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports VFD Factory Test Plan Factory test results SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Variable frequency drives 26 32 15.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Detailed Drawings SD-03 Product Data Performance Criteria Sound Limitations Harmonic Requirements Engine-Generator Parameter Schedule Power Factor Heat Exchanger Cooling System Time-Delay on Alarms Generator Manufacturer's Catalog Site Welding Spare Parts Training Battery Charger
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
1.4.14 3.6 3.5.4.1 1.4.12 1.4.13 3.1 2.20 2.20.2 3.5 1.4.14 2.20.2 1.3.4 2.6 1.4.4 2.9.1 2.1 3.5.3 2.5
G AE
26 32 15.00 10 Vibration Isolation Posted Data and Instructions Instructions Experience Field Engineer General Installation SD-06 Test Reports Factory Inspection and Tests Factory Tests Onsite Inspection and Tests SD-07 Certificates Vibration Isolation Prototype Test Reliability and Durability Emissions Sound Limitations Site Visit Current Balance Materials and Equipment Inspections Cooling System SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals Maintenance Procedures G AR G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.8 2.4.2 1.3 3.1 1.3 1.3.4 2.7 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.1 G AE G AE G AE
G AR G AR
3.4 1.9
G AR G AR
26 32 15.00 10 Special Tools Filters 26 33 53 SD-02 Shop Drawings UPS System Installation SD-03 Product Data UPS System Performance Requirements SD-06 Test Reports Factory Testing Field Supervision, Startup and Testing Field Tests Full Load Burn In Test Battery Discharge Test SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Instructions SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Training Operation and Maintenance Manuals SD-11 Closeout Submittals Spare Parts 26 36 00.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings 1.10 1.3.3 G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 2.4 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.4 G AE G AE
G AE
1.3.4 3.2 1.3.3 2.1 1.3.9 1.3.2 1.3 3.9 3.5

G AE
G AR G AR G AR
26 36 00.00 10 Equipment SD-03 Product Data Material Equipment SD-06 Test Reports Testing SD-07 Certificates Equipment Material Switching Equipment SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Switching Equipment Instructions 26 41 01.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings SD-07 Certificates Materials 26 42 14.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Drawings Contractor's Modifications SD-03 Product Data Equipment Spare Parts SD-06 Test Reports Tests and Measurements
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
1.3.8 3.5.5.2 3.5.5.3 3.5.5.4 1.3.2 1.3 1.3.1
1.3 3.6 3.6 2.2.1.1 2.4.1 2.4.6.1 2.2.1.2 2.4.6.2 2.11 2.12 2.7 2.1 G AE G AE G AE G AR G AR G G G G AE AE AE AE
26 42 14.00 10 Tests of components Casing tests Interference testing Holiday test Contractor's Modifications SD-07 Certificates Cathodic Protection System Services of 'Corrosion Expert' SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Cathodic Protection System Training Course Training Course Curriculum 26 51 00 SD-03 Product Data Fluorescent lighting fixtures electronic ballasts Fluorescent lamps Incandescent, HID and Compact Fluorescent Fixtures Incandescent lamps Exit signs Emergency lighting equipment SD-04 Samples Finishes Lighting Fixtures 26 56 00 SD-02 Shop Drawings G AR G AR G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
26 56 00
1.4.1.1 1.4.1.2
G AE G AE
1.6.1 2.2 2.4 2.5 2.6.1 2.7 G G G G AE AE AE AE 2.2 1.4.2 G AE G AE
2.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.3 G AE G G G G AE AE AE AE G AE
G AR
26 60 13
Luminaire drawings Poles SD-03 Product Data Energy Efficiency Luminaires Lamps Ballasts Aluminum poles Brackets SD-04 Samples Luminaires SD-05 Design Data Design Data for luminaires SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Luminaires SD-02 Shop Drawings Motors SD-03 Product Data Motors Motors Motors and enclosures Catalog Data SD-05 Design Data Motor Design Data SD-06 Test Reports
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
26 60 13
2.9 3.3 3.4 2.9 2.1 2.1.3 2.9 2.8 2.5 2.9 2.3.1 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 3.1 2.1 2.2 3.2 3.1 2.3 G AE G AE
27 05 28.36 G AE G AE
Factory tests Electrical tests Vibration tests SD-07 Certificates Factory Test Results Efficiency Efficiency Power-Factor Service Factor Temperature Rating Noise Full-Load Locked-Rotor Insulation Resistance Winding Resistance High-Potential Tests SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Equipment manufacturer's instructions Motors SD-02 Shop Drawings Fabrication Drawings Installation Drawings SD-03 Product Data Cable Trays Supports
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
27 10 00 1.6.1.1 1.6.1.2 G AE G AE
2.3 2.4.4.1 2.4.4.3 2.4.4 2.5 2.4.2 2.4.4.2 3.3.1 G AR G AR G AR G AR G AR
G AR G AR
SD-02 Shop Drawings Telecommunications drawings Telecommunications Space Drawings SD-03 Product Data Telecommunications cabling Modular Copper Cable Patch Panels Fiber Optic Patch Panels Patch cords Telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies Equipment support frame Connector blocks SD-06 Test Reports Telecommunications cabling testing SD-07 Certificates Telecommunications Contractor Key Personnel Manufacturer Qualifications Test plan SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports Factory reel tests 1.6.2.1 1.6.2.2 1.6.2.3 1.6.3 2.10.1
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
27 10 00 1.10.1 1.10.2 1.4.4 G AE G AR G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE G AR G AR
27 53 16.23
1.4 2.1 1.8 1.4.1.5 3.6.4.1 3.6 3.6.4.1 3.6.6 3.6.4.1 1.5.1 3.4
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Telecommunications cabling and pathway system Record Documentation SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings Coordination Drawings SD-03 Product Data System Description Material and Equipment Warranty SD-05 Design Data Design Test Plan SD-06 Test Reports Testing Acceptance Test Report Inspections and Testing SD-07 Certificates Certificates of Compliance Qualifications SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Installation SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
27 53 16.23 3.7.1 1.9.2 3.9 1.8 1.5.1 1.3.2 2.4.8 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.7 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4
3.7.4
G AR
27 54 00 G AE G AE G G G G G G G G G G AE AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR
Operating and Maintenance Manuals Training Plan Maintenance Service SD-11 Closeout Submittals Closeout Warranty SD-02 Shop Drawings wiring diagrams and installation details system components SD-03 Product Data Attenuators Amplifiers Amplifiers Cables Terminators Splitters Directional Couplers/Taps Outlets Connectors SD-05 Design Data CATV System Loss Calculations SD-06 Test Reports Operational test plan Operational test procedures
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
27 54 00
1.5.5 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.2
2.2 2.3 1.5.1 3.3.2 3.2.1 1.4.1 2.2 2.17 2.13 2.9.2 1.9 2.12 2.11 G AE F G AE F G AE F G G G G G G AE F AE F AE F AE F AE F AE F
G AR G AR
28 31 76
Test Equipment System pretest Acceptance tests SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Installation SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Amplifiers Amplifiers SD-11 Closeout Submittals Wiring Diagrams and Installation Details Acceptance Tests SD-02 Shop Drawings Wiring Diagrams System Layout System Operation Notification Appliances Amplifiers Air Sampling Smoke Detectors SD-03 Product Data Technical Data And Computer Software Fire alarm control units Fire Alarm And Mass Notification Control Panel (FACP)
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
28 31 76
2.15 2.14 3.2.2 2.16 2.10.1 2.9 2.20 2.17 2.4.3 2.11.14 2.6 2.13 2.18.1 G AE F G AE F
G G G G G G G G G G G
AE F AE F AE F AE F AE F AE F AE F AE F AE F AE F AE F
2.2 G AE F 2.10.1.2 G AE F 3.5 2.9.4 3.5.1 1.5.1.4
Printers Graphic Display Unit (GDU) Terminal cabinets Manual stations Batteries Smoke sensors Wiring Notification appliances LED Signs LED Signs Addressable initiating device circuit interface Amplifiers Radio transmitter and interface panels SD-05 Design Data System Operation Battery power calculations SD-06 Test Reports Field Quality Control Testing Procedures Testing Procedures SD-07 Certificates Installer SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
28 31 76
1.5.3.2
1.7.1 3.6 G AR
G AR
31 00 00 3.11 3.7.2 G ED G AR G AR G G G G G G G ED ED AR AR AR ED ED
3.7.2.3 3.9.5.3 3.9.5.2 3.9.6 3.9.5.3 3.9.5.4 3.9.5.5 3.9.7 3.5.1 3.5.3 3.24 G ED
Fire Alarm/Mass Notification System SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Instructions Instruction of Government Employees SD-05 Design Data Shoring and Sloping Dewatering Discontinuing Dewatering Notification Dewatering Plan Blast Monitoring Plan Pre-blast Survey Blasting Schedule Seismograph Blasting Safety Plan Post Blast Reconnaissance Blast Records SD-06 Test Reports Core Borings Basement Subgrade Inspection Notification Testing
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
31 00 00 G ED G ED
3.3 3.6.4 3.6.4 3.24 3.6.2 3.24.6 3.24.6 G ED G ED G ED 3.3 1.9.5 3.1 G ED 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2 3.5.1 3.5.3.3 3.1 G ED 1.6
31 40 00
31 63 26 G ED G ED
Rock Mix Design Records SD-07 Certificates Testing Lab Qualifications Flowable Fill Flowable Fill SD-02 Shop Drawings Details SD-06 Test Reports Reports SD-02 Shop Drawings Drilled Piers Osterberg Cell Load Test SD-05 Design Data Concrete Mix Design SD-06 Test Reports Concrete Concrete Grout Rock Evaluation Coring Concrete Coring Osterberg Cell Load Test SD-07 Certificates Survey
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
31 63 26 G ED G ED G AR
1.4 3.1 3.5.4 2.4
32 05 33
1.6.1 2.1 2.2.1 2.3 2.3.1 3.4.1 3.4.2
1.7 3.4.3 1.5.1
32 11 10
Qualifications Osterberg Cell Load Test Crosshole Sonic Logging SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Integrated Pest Management Plan SD-03 Product Data Local/Regional Materials Fertilizer Hose Mulches Topdressing Organic Mulch Materials SD-07 Certificates Maintenance inspection report Plant quantities SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Maintenance SD-11 Closeout Submittals Tree, staking and guying removal SD-03 Product Data Plant, Equipment, Machines, and Tools SD-06 Test Reports Sampling and Testing Approval of Materials 1.7 1.7.6 G ED
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
32 11 10 1.7.1 2.1.1 2.2 1.8 G AR G AR
3.2.7
G ED
32 11 23
2.2 1.6.3.1 1.6.3.2 2.1.1 G ED G ED 2.2 1.6 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.5 3.4 2.6 G ED
G ED G ED
32 12 17 G G G G G G AR AR AR AR AR AR
Evaluation SD-07 Certificates Testing Lab SD-03 Product Data Coarse Aggregate Stabilization Geotextile Plant, Equipment, Machines, and Tools SD-04 Samples Stabilization Geotextile SD-06 Test Reports Initial Tests In-Place Tests Coarse Aggregate SD-07 Certificates Stabilization Geotextile Testing SD-03 Product Data Bituminous Courses Composition of Mixtures Prime Coat Tack Coat Tack Coat Aggregate Base Course SD-05 Design Data Asphalt Mix Design
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
32 12 17 3.5 2.3 2.5 3.4 2.4 2.1.2 2.1.2 2.2 G AR G AR
32 12 23
32 16 13 2.1 2.2 2.2 3.8 2.1.2 2.1.2 G AR G AR
32 16 15
SD-06 Test Reports Density Testing Plant Control SD-07 Certificates Tack Coat Tack Coat Prime Coat SD-03 Product Data Concrete Grid Paver SD-04 Samples Concrete Grid Paver SD-06 Test Reports Tests, Inspections, and Verifications SD-03 Product Data Concrete Coloring Admixture SD-04 Samples Color SD-06 Test Reports Field Quality Control SD-03 Product Data Concrete Walk Paving Blocks SD-04 Samples Concrete Walk Paving Blocks SD-06 Test Reports
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
32 16 15
2.2
1.4 2.2.1 1.7 2.4 2.2.3
2.1.2 3.2.1 3.2.1
G G G G
AR AR AR AR
2.1 2.1.4 1.5.1 1.5.1
Tests, Inspections and Verifications 32 17 24.00 10 SD-03 Product Data Equipment Composition Requirements Qualifications SD-06 Test Reports Sampling and Testing SD-07 Certificates Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) 32 31 13.00 SD-02 Shop Drawings Gates Turnstiles Post spacing Location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts SD-03 Product Data Chain-link fencing Accessories SD-06 Test Reports Weight in grams ounces for zinc coating Thickness of PVC coating G AR G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
32 31 13.00
1.5.1
2.1.1 2.1.3 2.1.3 2.1.2 2.1.3 3.2.5 2.1.2 2.1.7 3.2
32 92 19 2.1 2.5.3 2.4 2.2.3 2.1 2.7 G AR
32 92 26
Chemical composition and thickness of aluminum alloy coating SD-07 Certificates Fabric Posts Braces Framing Rails Tension wires Gates Padlocks SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Fence Turnstiles SD-03 Product Data Seed Wood cellulose fiber mulch Fertilizer SD-06 Test Reports Topsoil composition tests SD-07 Certificates seed SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Erosion Control Materials SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
32 92 26
2.1 2.5 2.3.3 2.2 2.1 2.8 1.4.3 1.6
G AR
32 93 00
Sprigs Fertilizer SD-06 Test Reports Topsoil composition tests SD-07 Certificates seed sprigs SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Erosion Control Materials SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals State Landscape Contractor's License Time Restrictions and Planting Conditions SD-03 Product Data Local/Regional Materials Peat Composted Derivatives Rotted Manure Organic Mulch Materials Gypsum Mulch Ground Stakes Ground Stakes Recycled Plastic Edging Hose 1.8.1 2.3.5 2.3.8 2.3.10 2.7.2 2.3.9 2.7 2.8.1.2 2.8.1.2 2.9.1 2.12.1 G G G G G G G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
32 93 00
2.5 1.5.2.4 2.8.1 2.8.7 2.10 2.11 1.4.4 2.7 1.4.1 2.2.4 1.4.5 1.8.3 1.4.2 2.1.1 G AE
G G G G G G G
1.8.2 2.1.1 2.1 2.2 2.1.2.2 G G G G AR AR AR AR

33 11 00
Fertilizer Weed control fabric Staking Material Metal anchors Antidesiccants Erosion control materials Photographs SD-04 Samples Mulch SD-06 Test Reports Topsoil composition tests Topsoil composition tests Percolation Test SD-07 Certificates Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification Nursery certifications Nursery certifications SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Plastic Identification SD-03 Product Data Piping Materials Water distribution main Water service line Hydrants
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
33 11 00
2.1.2.3 2.1.2.4 2.2.2.3 2.1 2.2 2.1.1.1 2.1.2.2 1.4 3.1.1 1.6 2.3.1 2.3.4 2.3.4.1 2.1 2.4 2.2.2 2.1 3.3
G AR G AR G AR
33 30 00 G G G G G AR AR AR AR AR
33 40 01
Indicator posts Valve boxes Valve boxes SD-07 Certificates Water distribution main Water service line Lining hydrants SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Delivery, storage, and handling Installation SD-02 Shop Drawings Drawings Precast concrete manhole Metal items Frames, covers, and gratings SD-03 Product Data Pipeline materials SD-06 Test Reports Reports SD-07 Certificates Portland Cement SD-03 Product Data Pipe for Culverts and Storm Drains Placing Pipe G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
33 40 01 3.7 2.5 3.6.4 2.3.4 G AE G AR
33 46 00
33 46 16 2.3 2.1 2.3 2.1 2.2 G ED G ED G ED G ED
2.3 2.1 1.3.1
G ED
33 60 01
SD-07 Certificates Pipeline Testing Hydrostatic Test on Watertight Joints Determination of Density Frame and Cover for Gratings SD-02 Shop Drawings Subdrainage system SD-03 Product Data Subdrainage system SD-11 Closeout Submittals Subdrainage system SD-03 Product Data Filtration Geotextile Pipe for Subdrains SD-04 Samples Filtration Geotextile Pipe for Subdrains SD-05 Design Data Geotextile/Penetrations Connectors SD-07 Certificates Filtration Geotextile Pipe for Subdrains SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings G AE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
33 60 01 2.4 2.5 2.10.2 2.12 G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE
3.5 3.5.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.6 G AE G AE
G AR G AR
33 61 00
1.2 1.2.1 2.4 3.4.7 3.1.1 G AE G AE G AR G AE
G AR
33 61 13
SD-03 Product Data Piping and Fittings Valves Insulation Sump Pumps and Drainers Expansion Joints SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Valve Manholes and Accessories Data Package 2 SD-02 Shop Drawings Distribution System SD-03 Product Data Distribution System SD-07 Certificates Distribution System Welding SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Distribution System SD-02 Shop Drawings Heat Distribution System SD-03 Product Data Expansion Loops and Bends Cathodic Protection Installation Interruption of Existing Service
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
33 61 13
1.5.1 1.5.1 3.4.4 3.1.3 3.5.2.3 3.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.4.2 3.4.4 1.5.4 3.3 G AR
1.2.1 1.7.1 2.2 2.1 3.9 3.9.1 G AR G AR G AE
Work Plan Quality Assurance Plan UHDS Manufacturer's Representative Reports Connecting to Existing Work SD-06 Test Reports Operational Test Tests SD-07 Certificates Manufacturer Manufacturer's Representative UHDS Design Certificate of Compliance Testing Firm Welding SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Heat Distribution System 33 70 02.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings SD-03 Product Data Nameplates Material and Equipment SD-06 Test Reports Field Testing Tests G AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
3.2.1.4 2.1 3.3
G AR
1.7.2 1.6.1.1 1.6.1.2 G AR G AR
33 70 02.00 10 Cable Installation SD-07 Certificates Material and Equipment Cable Joints Installation Engineer SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals SD-11 Closeout Submittals As-Built Drawings 33 82 00 SD-02 Shop Drawings Telecommunications Outside Plant Telecommunications Entrance Facility Drawings SD-03 Product Data Wire and cable Cable splices, and connectors Closures Building protector assemblies Protector modules SD-06 Test Reports Pre-installation tests Acceptance tests 2.7 2.4 2.3 2.2.1 2.2.2 3.4.1 3.4.2 G AR G AR G G G G G AR AR AR AR AR
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
33 82 00
G AR
G AR G AR G AR G AR G AR G AR
G AR G AR G AE G AE G AE G AE G AE
41 22 03.13
Outside Plant Installation, 1.6.3 Cutover, Test and Demolition Plan SD-07 Certificates Telecommunications Contractor 1.6.2.1 Key Personnel 1.6.2.2 Manufacturer's Qualifications 1.6.2.3 SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions Building protector assembly 2.2.1 installation Cable tensions 3.1.7.1 Fiber Optic Splices 3.1.8.2 SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports Factory Reel Test Data 2.14.1 Record Documentation 1.8.1 SD-02 Shop Drawings Hoist 2.2 Load Chain 2.2.4 SD-03 Product Data Hoist 2.2 Load Chain 2.2.4 SD-05 Design Data Calculations 1.5.2 SD-06 Test Reports Magnetic-Particle 2.2.3 SD-07 Certificates
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
41 22 03.13
2.2.4
2.2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.10 2.11 2.1 2.2 2.8.1 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 2.1 2.13
G AR G AE G G G G G AE AE AE AE AE
41 22 03.19
Load Chain SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Hoist SD-02 Shop Drawings Overhead Monorail System SD-03 Product Data Electric chain hoist Trolley Pendant pushbutton station Electrification SD-05 Design Data Overhead Monorail System SD-06 Test Reports Load chain proof test Hook and hook nut magnetic particle inspection Post-erection inspection Operational tests Hook test No-load test Load test Rated load speed test SD-07 Certificates Overhead Monorail System Painting system
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
USAMRIID
S P E C
DESCRIPTION
N O
N O
S E C T
ITEM SUBMITTED
REMARKS (r)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
41 22 03.19
Overload test certificate 1.7.1 SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Overhead monorail system 2.1 G AR
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 33 10 SPECIAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SUMMARY
Individual specification sections call for validation of specification compliance of materials prior to acceptance. Only the potentially successful product/systems specified in Part 2 will be subject to independent testing. This Section describes the required submittal procedures for manufacturers to obtain "acceptable product" status for their proposed materials. 1.2 A. B. C. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS Section 01 67 00 - MATERIAL/PRODUCT RESISTANCE. Section 09 67 00 - FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING. Section 09 97 00 - SPECIAL COATINGS. SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. A. Provide a letter requesting validation of specification compliance testing. Clearly indicate in the letter the specification section number and the material designation (example: SPC3) for validation as described in the specification. Provide samples representing total fully cured material system proposed including sealers, primers, waterproof membranes, fillers, mineral aggregates and topcoat(s). 1. When providing samples on concrete, the concrete substrate must meet the minimum tensile strength requirements noted in the individual specification sections.
B.
C.
Provide complete manufacturer literature and specification for all components and installation instructions with recommendations and restrictions. Submit materials in a timely fashion to allow for testing, analysis and reporting prior to tender close. Full testing may require five weeks after the testing agency receives the samples and acknowledgement of payment. Report will be prepared by the testing agency with the cost borne by the manufacturer.
D.
E.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.4
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Submit samples listed in Part 2 below, materials and information prepaid to, but not limited to, one of the following testing companies: Attention: Dr. Amal Al-Borno Project No. USAMRIID - Replacement Charter Coating Services Ltd. #6, 4604 13 Street N.E. Calgary, Alberta, Canada T2E 6P1 Telephone: (403) 250-3027 Fax: (403) 250-1254 Attention: Project No. USAMRIID - Replacement KTA-Tator, Inc. 115 Technology Drive Pittsburgh, PA, USA 15275 Telephone: (412) 788-1300 Fax: (412) 788-1306 PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 A. PRODUCTS SPECIFICATION SECTION 09 67 00 FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING RES5 and RES6 Provide 12 samples of each material system applied to 12 by 12 inch by 1-1/2 inch thick minimum concrete slabs. Provide 1 gallon of each topcoat material for recoat application by testing agency. SPECIFICATION SECTION 09 97 00 SPECIAL COATINGS SPC3 Provide 12 samples of each material system applied to 12 by 12 inch by 1-1/2 inch thick minimum concrete slabs. Provide 12 samples of each material system applied to 12 by 12 inch by 3/16 inch thick plate Type 304 stainless steel. Provide 1 gallon of each topcoat material for recoat application by testing agency. EXECUTION TESTING PROCEDURES
B.
2.2 2.2.1 A.
B.
C.
PART 3 3.1
Materials will be tested in accordance to procedures described in the individual specification sections and in specification Section 01 67 00 MATERIAL/PRODUCT RESISTANCE.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 33 29 LEED(TM) DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL (FSC) FSC STD 01 001 (2000) Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship
SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD) SCAQMD Rule #1168 (1989; R 2005) Adhesive and Sealant Applications
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC) (2007) LEED-NC Reference Guide for New Construction
LEED Reference Guide
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals LEED Implementation Plan; G, AE SD-11 Closeout Submittals LEED Documentation Notebook; G, AE 1.3 DESCRIPTION
This project has been designed for, and shall be developed for a minimum sustainable rating of certified in accordance with LEED Version NC 2.2. Table 1 (see paragraph Table) identifies the LEED credit items that are designed into or otherwise required for this project. No variations or substitutions to the LEED credits identified for this contract shall be allowed without written consent from the Contracting Officer. Should there be a case where there is any problem meeting the full requirements of a LEED Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 33 29 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
credit identified for this project in Table 1, the Contractor must bring this to the attention of the Contracting Officer immediately. 1.3.1 Credit Validation
This project is registered with USGBC for validation of credits earned. Contractor is not responsible for registering the project with USGBC or for paying project registration fees to USGBC. Format and content of all construction documentation must be in accordance with the LEED Reference Guide requirements for supporting data required in event of USGBC audit of the particular credit. Contractor is required to coordinate through the Contracting Officer with Government's LEED consultant on assuring assembled data is acceptable to USGBC and responding to USGBC requests for additional construction data in the course of seeking project certification. 1.3.2 a. Contractor Responsibilities Some LEED credits are inherent in the design provided and require no further submittal or documentation. For these credits, the Contractor notify the Contracting Officer in advance of selection of any specified material or use of any permissible construction methods that may result in a deviation from the LEED design intent. Some LEED credits involve material selection and are generally identified within the technical sections with the notation "LEED," though not specifically identified in all occurrences. Some LEED credits are dependent on construction practices. All LEED credits identified in Table 1 not inherent in the design provided shall be documented by the Contractor. Table 1 provides a general summary of applicable credits. Detailed submittal requirements are contained in the LEED NC Reference Guide Version 2.2 and in the technical sections. Where a material, product, or execution requirement is identified by " LEED" in the contract documents, additional data or certificates shall be submitted with the individual component or process validating the material or component to the respective LEED credit item. These additional data or certificates shall be separable from the other submitted data and a copy shall be included in the LEED Documentation Notebook in addition to the distribution indicated in the submittal register. Document requirements for low-emitting materials using Form V2.2. Document requirements for MR credits 4, 5, and 7 using form attached. LEED IMPLEMENTATION PLAN
b.
c.
1.4
LEED Implementation Plan shall be submitted within 30 days after notice to proceed. The plan, when completed, shall provide a detailed description of all activities that relate to accomplishing project LEED requirements, including construction practices, procurement practices, and proposed submittals and documentation for each LEED credit. Plan shall also include the following: a. Name of individuals on the Contractor's staff responsible for ensuring LEED credits and prerequisites are earned and responsible for assembling documentation. A responsible LEED Accredited Professional shall be identified. This individual may fill the role of QC Administrative Assistant specified in Section 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR Section 01 33 29 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
QUALITY CONTROL. b.. Templates to be used for tracking LEED credits. Listing of documents to be provided for each credit and schedule for their inclusion in LEED Documentation Notebook. Include proposed materials, associated estimated costs, and details necessary for LEED calculations in order to determine if the listed materials can be expected to achieve the project goal. List of all plans required in the technical sections for LEED credit. Proposed submittal date of each plan. These shall be added to the LEED Implementation Plan as they are completed. Implementation plan for cumulative materials credits, which shall use applicable template with proposed materials, associated estimated costs, and details necessary for LEED Calculations added in order to determine if the listed materials can be expected to achieve the project goal. Submit cumulative materials implementation plans before materials purchasing begins. LEED DOCUMENTATION NOTEBOOK
c..
d.
1.5
The Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive notebook documenting compliance for each LEED credit identified in Table 1. LEED Documentation Notebook shall be formatted to match LEED numbering system and tabbed for each credit and prerequisite. LEED documentation in notebook shall contain up to date information through the previous month's work, and at least one set shall be available on the jobsite at all times. The Notebook may be maintained and available for reference electronically if preferred. Completed pages shall be prevented from being altered. If the Contractor fails to maintain the LEED Documentation Notebook as specified herein, the Contracting Officer will deduct from the monthly progress payment an amount representing the estimated cost of maintaining the Notebook. This monthly deduction will continue until an agreement can be reached between the Contracting Officer and the Contractor regarding the accuracy and completeness of the Notebook. The original, one copy, and an electronic version on CD of the notebook shall be submitted at project closeout. 1.5.1 Content
Notebook shall include Table 1, applicable product data for material selection, final calculations, certifications for construction practices, procurement data, cumulative calculations and other items as identified in the approved LEED Implementation Plan. Notebook must contain all required data to support full compliance with the indicated LEED credit. LEED credits that are inherent to the design will be documented by the designer of record. 1.5.2 LEED Calculations
Calculations showing compliance with a required LEED credit identified in Table 1 or within the LEED Implementation Plan. Calculations shall be current and available for monthly review. Final calculations shall be included in the LEED Documentation Notebook under the appropriate tab. 1.5.3 Submittals
All "G" designated submittals required for inclusion in the LEED Documentation Notebook shall be separable from other submitted data and Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 33 29 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
shall be included in the LEED Documentation Notebook in addition to the distribution indicated on the submittal register. 1.6 REQUIREMENTS
LEED credits as identified in Table 1 shall be incorporated and documented as required by the Contract documents and in full compliance with the LEED Reference Guide. LEED credits not identified elsewhere in the Contract documents and those requiring further instruction are specified below. Refer to the LEED Reference Guide for further definitions and requirements. Calculations for Materials and Resource Credits 4,5 and 7 only include products and materials specified in Divisions 3 through 10 and Divisions 31 through 33. 1.6.1 Materials and Resources Credit 4, Recycled Content
Not withstanding the requirements of Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED/RECOVERED MATERIALS, Contractor shall select materials so that the sum of post-consumer recycled content value plus one-half of post-industrial recycled content value constitutes at least 20 percent of the total materials cost for the project. EPA Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines has a supplier database. California Integrated Waste Management Board (CIWMB) Recycled Content Directory also contains product and supplier data at www.ciwmb.ca.gov/rcp. 1.6.1.1 Calculations
LEED Letter Template forms shall be used for tracking and documentation. Recycled content value of project materials shall be determined by the method described in the LEED Reference Guide. For this credit, performance is measured for the entire project. 1.6.1.2 Substitutions
In the case of conflict between this requirement and individual technical section requirements, Contractor may submit for Government approval proposed alternative products or systems that provide equivalent performance and appearance and have greater contribution to project recycled content requirements. All such proposed substitutions shall be submitted with the LEED Implementation Plan accompanied by product data that demonstrates equivalence. 1.6.2 Materials and Resources Credit 5, Regional Materials
Contractor shall select materials so that a minimum of 20 percent (by dollar value) of materials and products for the project are extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, regionally within a 500 mile radius of the project site. 1.6.2.1 Calculations
LEED Letter Template forms shall be used for tracking and documentation. Amount of regional project materials shall be determined by the method described in the LEED Reference Guide. For this credit, performance is measured for the entire project 1.6.3 Materials and Resources Credit 7, Certified Wood
Contractor shall select materials so that a minimum of 50 percent (by Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 33 29 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
dollar value) of permanently installed wood-based materials and products for the project are certified in accordance with FSC STD 01 001. 1.6.3.1 Calculations
LEED Letter Template forms shall be used for tracking and documentation. Amount of FSC-certified project materials shall be determined by the method described in the LEED Reference Guide. 1.6.4 1.6.4.1 Indoor Environmental Quality Credits 3.1 and 3.2 Photographs
Contractors shall provide photographs during construction to show compliance with the SMACNA approaches outlined in the SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3. 1.6.5 Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.1
Low Emitting Materials, Adhesives & Sealants: For interior applications (defined as within the weatherproofing system and applied on-site) use adhesives, sealants and sealant primers that comply with the South Coast Air Quality Management District SCAQMD Rule #1168 as defined in the LEED Reference Guide. Use attached LEED Low-Emitting Materials Submittal Form v2.2 for tracking. 1.6.6 Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.2:
Low Emitting Materials, Paints and Coatings: For interior applications use paints and coatings that comply with Green Seals Standard GS-11 as defined in the LEED Reference Guide. Use attached LEED Low-Emitting Materials Submittal Form v2.2 for tracking. 1.6.7 Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.3
Low Emitting Materials, Carpet Systems: Use only carpet products which meet the Carpet and Rug Institutes Green Label Plus Indoor Air Quality Test Program and carpet cushion products which meet the Carpet and Rug Institutes Green Label program as defined in the LEED Reference Guide. Use attached LEED Low-Emitting Materials Submittal Form v2.2 for tracking. 1.6.8 Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.4
Low Emitting Materials, Composite Wood & Agrifiber Products: Do not use composite wood and agrifiber products that contain added urea-formaldehyde resins as defined in the LEED Reference Guide (all other types of resins, such as phenol-formaldehyde are acceptable). Use attached LEED Low-Emitting Materials Submittal Form v2.2 for tracking.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not used. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION COORDINATION MEETINGS The first will be a
There will be three onsite coordination meetings. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 33 29 - Page 5
Ft. Detrick, MD
preconstruction meeting to review the LEED Implementation Plan. The requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the coordination and mutual understanding meeting outlined in Section 01 45 02.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM and Section 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. The second will be a pre-closeout meeting to review LEED Documentation Notebook for completeness and identify any outstanding issues relating to final score and documentation requirements. The third is a closeout meeting to review the final LEED Documentation Notebook. All meetings shall be attended by Contractor's designated individual responsible for LEED documentation, Government representative and Installation representative. At closeout meeting a final score for the project will be determined based on review of project performance and documentation. Contractor shall make a set of contract drawings and specifications available for review at each meeting as well as an updated LEED Documentation Notebook. 3.2 TABLE
LEED credits as identified in Table 1 below are contract requirements and shall be incorporated in full compliance with the LEED Reference Guide. 3.2.1 Project Checklist: 0723.01602
USGBC Project Registration Number:
Sustainable Sites (SS) SS Prerequisite 1 Construction Activity Pollution Prevention SS Credit 1 Site Selection SS Credit 2 Development Density & Community Connectivity SS Credit 4.2 Alternative Transportation: Bicycle Storage & Changing Rooms SS Credit 4.3 Alternative Transportation: Low Emitting & Fuel Efficient Vehicles SS Credit 4.4 Alternative Transportation: Parking Capacity SS Credit 5.1 Site Development: Protect or Restore Habitat SS Credit 5.2 Site Development: Maximize Open Space SS Credit 6.1 Stormwater Design: Quantity Control SS Credit 6.2 Stormwater Design: Quality Control SS Credit 7.1 Heat Island Effect: Non Roof SS Credit 7.2 Heat Island Effect: Roof SS Credit 8 Light Pollution Reduction Water Efficiency (WE) WE Credit 1.1 Water Efficient Landscaping: Reduce by 50 percent WE Credit 1.2 Water Efficient Landscaping: No Potable Water Use or Irrigation WE Credit 3.1 Water Use Reduction: 20 percent Reduction WE Credit 3.2 Water Use Reduction: 30 percent Reduction Energy & Atmosphere (EA) EA Prerequisite 1 Fundamental commissioning of the building energy systems EA Prerequisite 2 Minimum Energy Performance EA Prerequisite 3 Fundamental Refrigerant Management EA Credit 1.1 Optimize Energy Performance - 10.5 percent EA Credit 1.2 Optimize Energy Performance - 14 percent EA Credit 3 Enhanced Commissioning EA Credit 4 Enhanced Refrigerant Management EA Credit 5 Measurement & Verification
No
Ft. Detrick, MD
USGBC Project Registration Number: 0723.01602 Materials & Resources (MR) MR Prerequisite 1 Storage & Collection of Recyclables MR Credit 2.1 Construction Waste Management: Divert 50 percent from Disposal MR Credit 2.2 Construction Waste Management: Divert 75 percent from Disposal MR Credit 4.1 Recycled Content: 10 percent (post-consumer plus 1/2 pre-consumer) MR Credit 4.2 Recycled Content: 20 percent (post-consumer plus 1/2 pre-consumer) MR Credit 5.1 Regional Materials: 10 percent Extracted, Processed and Manufactured Regionally MR Credit 5.2 Regional Materials: 20 percent Extracted, Processed and Manufactured Regionally MR Credit 7 Certified Wood: 50 percent certified FSC Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ) EQ Prerequisite 1 Minimum IAQ Performance EQ Prerequisite 2 Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control EQ Credit 1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring EQ Credit 2 Increased Ventilation EQ Credit 3.1 Construction IAQ Management Plan: During Construction EQ Credit 3.2 Construction IAQ Management Plan: Before Occupancy EQ Credit 4.1 Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives & Sealants EQ Credit 4.2 Low-Emitting Materials: Paints & Coatings EQ Credit 4.3 Low-Emitting Materials: Carpet Systems EQ Credit 4.4 Low-Emitting Materials: Composite Wood & Agrifiber Products EQ Credit 5 Indoor Chemical & Pollutant Source Control EQ Credit 6.1 Controllability of Systems: Lighting EQ Credit 7.1 Thermal Comfort: Design EQ Credit 7.2 Thermal Comfort: Verification Innovation in Design (ID) ID Credit 1.1 Indoor environment safety, from Labs 21 performance criteria. ID Credit 1.2 Laboratory Ventilation (Meet ANSI/AIHA 29/5) ID Credit 1.3 Chemical resource management ID Credit 1.4 Energy Supply Efficiency, from Labs 21 performance criteria ID Credit 2 LEED Accredited Professional -- End of Section --
LEED Low-Emitting Materials Submittal Form v2.2

Project Manager: Scope of Work:
Subcontractor Name: Specification Number: Date Submitted:
For ALL Adhesives, Sealants, Paints, Coatings, Carpets, and Composite Wood Submittals include: Item Name or Description: Application (Interior or Exterior):
For Paints call out and highlight on submittal:
VOC level
g/L
Interior Paints must not exceed the following VOC limits 150g/L VOC non-flat 350 g/L VOC varnish (clear wood) 50g/L VOC flat 550 g/L VOC lacquer (clear wood) 50 g/L VOC paint primer 100 g/L VOC floor coatings 250 g/L VOC Anti-Corrosive Coatings 250 g/L VOC waterproofing sealer 275 g/L VOC sanding sealer 250 g/L VOC stains 200 g/L all other sealers
For Adhesives call out and highlight on submittal:
VOC level
g/L
Interior Adhesives must not exceed the following VOC limits 30 g/L VOC Wood Glues 70 g/L VOC Multi-Purpose Construction Adhesives 30 g/L VOC Metal to Metal Adhesives 80 g/L VOC Fiberglass Adhesives 50 g/L VOC Adhesives for porous materials (except wood) 100 g/L VOC Structural Glazing Adhesives 50 g/L VOC Subfloor Adhesives 100 g/L VOC Wood Flooring Adhesives 50 g/L VOC Plastic Foam Adhesives 80 g/L VOC Contact Adhesives 50 g/L VOC Carpet Adhesives 250 g/L VOC Plastic Cement Welding Compounds 50 g/L VOC Carpet Pad Adhesives 325 g/L VOC ABS Welding Compounds 50 g/L VOC VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives 490 g/L VOC CPVC Welding Compounds 50 g/L VOC Cove Base Adhesives 510 g/L VOC PVC Welding Compounds 50 g/L VOC Gypsum Board Panel Adhesives 550 g/L VOC Adhesive Primer for Plastic 60 g/L VOC Rubber Floor Adhesives 65 g/L VOC Ceramic Tile Adhesives 250 g/L VOC Special Purpose Contact Adhesive 250 g/L VOC Top and Trim Adhesives 140 g/L VOC Structural Wood Member Adhesive 65% VOC's by weight Aerosol Mist Adhesives 850 g/L VOC Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Operations 55% VOC's by weight Aerosol Web Adhesives 70% VOC's by weight Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesives (all types)
For Sealants call out and highlight on submittal:
VOC level 450 g/L Single Ply Roof Sealant
g/L
Interior Sealants must not exceed the following VOC limits 250 g/L Architectural 250 g/L Architectural Sealant Primer (non-porous) 300 g/L Non Membrane Roof Sealant 775 g/L Architectural Sealant Primer (porous) 420 g/L Other 250 g/L Roadway Sealant
For Carpet call out and highlight on submittal:
Carpet Products must meet Carpet and Rug Institute's Green Label Plus IAQ test program
Does carpet product have CRI label? (yes or no)
Carpet Padding Products must meet Carpet and Rug Institute's Green Label IAQ test program
For all Composite Wood call out and highlight on submittal: Must NOT contain urea-formaldehyde Formaldehyde: (None or alternate such as phenol formaldehyde)
LEED Submittal Form

(provide copies of form and relevant submittals to XXX at XXX)
Subcontractor Name:
Specification Number:
Date Submitted:
Project Manager:
Scope of Work:
Total Material Cost:
Itemized list of all materials within scope of work:

*Per LEED requirements, "Manufacturing refers to the final assembly of components into the building product that is furnished and installed by the tradesmen
Material Manufacture Location
Material Cost Harvest Location

$
Distance: Manufacturer Location - Jobsite

Miles
Distance: Harvest Location - Jobsite

Miles
Recycled Content %
FSC Wood
Product Name & Model #
Complete Name and Address
Complete Name and Address
PostConsumer
PostIndustrial
Certification Number
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 33 40 COLOR/FINISH SAMPLE BOARDS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-04 Samples Color/Finish Sample Board(S); G AE PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS COLOR/FINISH SAMPLE BOARDS
Color/finish board(s) shall have attached samples of all exterior and interior appearance related construction items the Contractor proposes to furnish, including, but not limited to, such items as masonry, coping, downspouts, roofs, interior and exterior paints and finishes; wall covering; carpet; floor, wall and ceiling tiles; floor edging, floor base; doors; plastic laminates for cabinet work, signage, bathroom partitions, window treatments, electrical fixture plates, misc. trim items, etc. Each sample shall indicate color, texture, and finish; and, if patterned, shall be large enough to define full pattern. Samples shall be identified as to type of material, area of installation, manufacturer, and transmittal number under which certification of the material represented has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. Samples shall be mounted on minimum 1/16 inch thick mat boards. Each board shall be labeled with the facility building number, the title of contract, contract number, and name of Contractor. If necessary and as approved by the Government, more than one board may be provided for a building. Epoxy glue, hot-melt glue, or contact cement shall be used to attach samples; Scotch tape, double-backed tape, or rubber cement will not be acceptable. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Four (4) complete sets of coordinated color/finish sample board(s) shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval within a period of time not to exceed 110 calendar days after receipt of Package 3 (Building Renovation and Construction. Contractor shall ensure that interior finish item technical data submittals are timely and that submittal actions have been completed before submitting sample board(s). Samples shall not be submitted with technical data, as approvals will not be given for samples submitted separately from the color/finish sample board(s). Upon receipt Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 33 40 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
of the sample board(s), a 60-day review period by the Government can be anticipated. 3.2 GOVERNMENT APPROVAL
Approval of the total color/finish sample board(s) shall be obtained before start of finish work involving items included on the board(s). 3.3 FINAL SUBMITTAL
After receipt of final approval from the Government, two set of approved and corrected color-finish sample boards shall be prepared and submitted one to the Contracting Officer and one to the AE. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 35 29 SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI A10.32 Personal Fall Protection - Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition Operations (1992; R 1999) Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and Components (2001) Protection of the Public on or Adjacent to Construction Sites
ANSI Z359.1
ANSI/ASSE A10.34
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME B30.22 ASME B30.3 ASME B30.5 ASME B30.8 (2005) Articulating Boom Cranes (2004) Construction Tower Cranes (2004) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes (2004) Floating Derricks Cranes and Floating
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 10 (2006; Errata 2006) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers (2003) Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work (2007) National Electrical Code - 2008 Edition (2004; AMD 2004) Electrical Safety in the Workplace U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE) EM 385-1-1 (2003) Safety -- Safety and Health Requirements
NFPA 51B
NFPA 70
NFPA 70E
Ft. Detrick, MD
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 29 CFR 1910.146 29 CFR 1926 Permit-required Confined Spaces Safety and Health Regulations for Construction Fall Protection
29 CFR 1926.500 1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. AR = Area Engineer. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: Government acceptance is required for submittals with a "G, A" designation. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Accident Prevention Plan (APP); Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA); Crane Critical Lift Plan; G, AR G, AR G, AR G, AR
Proof of qualification for Crane Operators; SD-06 Test Reports Reports
Submit reports as their incidence occurs, in accordance with the requirements of the paragraph entitled, "Reports." Accident Reports Monthly Exposure Reports Crane Reports Regulatory Citations and Violations SD-07 Certificates Confined Space Entry Permit Hot work permit Submit one copy of each permit/certificate attached to each Daily Report.
1.3 a.
DEFINITIONS High Visibility Accident. and/or high visibility. Any mishap which may generate publicity
Ft. Detrick, MD
b.
Medical Treatment. Treatment administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a physician or registered personnel. Recordable Injuries or Illnesses. that results in: Any work-related injury or illness
c.
(1) Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the length of the illness; (2) Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness onset); (3) Restricted work; (4) Transfer to another job; (5) Medical treatment beyond first aid; (6) Loss of consciousness; or (7) A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in (1) through (6) above. d. "USACE" property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1 should be interpreted as Government property and equipment. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.4
In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this contract, work performed shall comply with USACE EM 385-1-1, and the federal, state, and local, laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations USACE Baltimore District requirements, and Ft. Detrick requirements. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements shall apply. 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.1.1 SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES AND MEETINGS Personnel Qualifications Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) shall be provided at the work site at all times to perform safety and occupational health management, surveillance, inspections, and safety enforcement for the Contractor. The Contractor Quality Control (QC) person cannot be the SSHO on this project, even though the QC has safety inspection responsibilities as part of the QC duties. The SSHO shall meet the following requirements: Level 6: A
Certified Safety Professional (CSP) A minimum of 10 years safety work of a progressive nature with at least 5 years of experience on similar projects. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 35 29 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 years. An average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 years with training for competent person status for at least the following 4 areas of competency: Excavation; Scaffolding; Fall protection; and, Confined space. 1.5.1.2 Certified Safety Professional (CSP)
Provide a Certified Safety Professional (CSP)at the work site at all times to perform safety and occupational health management, surveillance, inspections, and safety enforcement for the Contractor. The CSP shall be the safety and occupational health "competent persons" as defined by USACE EM 385-1-1. The CSP shall have no other duties 1.5.1.3 Associate Safety professional (ASP), Certified Safety Trained Supervisor (STS) or Construction Health and Safety Technician (CHST) Provide an Associate Safety Professional (ASP), Certified Safety Trained Supervisor (STS) or Construction Health & Safety Technician (CHST) at the work site to perform safety management, surveillance, inspections, and safety enforcement for the Contractor. The ASP, STS or CHST shall be the safety and occupational health "competent person" as defined by USACE EM 385-1-1. The ASP, STS or CHST shall be at the work site at all times whenever work or testing is being performed and shall conduct and document daily safety inspections. The ASP, STS or CHST shall have no other duties other than safety and occupational health management, inspections, and enforcement on this contract. 1.5.1.4 Crane Operators
Crane operators shall meet the requirements in USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 16 and Appendix G. In addition, for mobile cranes with Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacitates of 50,000 pounds or greater, crane operators shall be designated as qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators (i.e., union, a government agency, or and organization that tests and qualifies crane operators). Proof of current qualification shall be provided. 1.5.2 1.5.2.1 a. Personnel Duties Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
SSHO shall conduct introductory employee orientations for new employees arriving at the site. SSHO shall issue a project specific hard hat sticker that visually identifies employees who have received the new employee orientation. Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of corrections. Safety inspection logs shall be attached to the Contractors' daily report. Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports. the OSHA Form 300 and Daily Production reports for prime and sub-contractors. Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site. Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including Section 01 35 29 - Page 4 For Official Use Only Maintain
b.
c. d.
Ft. Detrick, MD
preparatory inspection meeting, and periodic in-progress meetings. e. f. Implement and enforce accepted APPS and AHAs. Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution. A list of unresolved safety and health deficiencies shall be posted on the safety bulletin board. Ensure sub-contractor compliance with safety and health requirements.
g.
Failure to perform the above duties will result in dismissal of the superintendent and/or SSHO, and a project work stoppage. The project work stoppage will remain in effect pending approval of a suitable replacement. 1.5.2.2 Certified Safety Professional (CSP) and Associate Safety Professional (ASP), Certified Safety Trained Supervisor (STS), or Certified Construction Health & Safety Technician (CHST). a. Perform safety and occupational health management, surveillance, inspections, and safety enforcement for the project. Perform as the safety and occupational health "competent person" as defined by USACE EM 385-1-1. Be on-site at all times whenever work or testing is being performed. Conduct and document safety inspections. Shall have no other duties other than safety and occupational health management, inspections, and enforcement on this contract.
b.
c. d. e.
If the CSP or CIH is appointed as the SSHO all duties of that position shall also be performed. 1.5.3 1.5.3.1 a. Meetings Preconstruction Conference
Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant role in accident prevention on the project shall attend the preconstruction conference. This includes the project superintendent, site safety and health officer, quality control supervisor, or any other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs) and special plans, program and procedures associated with it). The Contractor shall discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans, programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will be developed and implemented during the performance of the contract. This list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference and an agreement will be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting Officer's representative as to which phases will require an analysis. In addition, a schedule for the preparation, submittal, review, and acceptance of AHAs shall be established to preclude project delays. Deficiencies in the submitted APP will be brought to the attention of the Contractor at the preconstruction conference, and the Contractor shall revise the plan to correct deficiencies and re-submit it for Section 01 35 29 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
b.
c.
Ft. Detrick, MD
acceptance. 1.5.3.2 a.
Work shall not begin until there is an accepted APP.
Job Site Safety Meetings
Safety meetings shall be held at least once a month for all supervisors on the project to review past activities, to plan ahead for new or changed operations and to establish safe working procedures to anticipated hazards. An outline report of each monthly meeting shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer or COR. At least one safety meeting shall be conducted weekly, and whenever new personnel begin work on site. Appropriate Field supervisor or foreman shall conduct meeting for each group of workers. An outline report of the meeting giving date, time, attendance, subjects discussed and who conducted meeting shall be maintained and copies furnished to the designated authority on request. ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP) The Contractor shall use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements in USACE EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, "Minimum Basic Outline for Accident Prevention Plan". Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are described below. The APP shall be job-specific and shall address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The APP shall interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program. Any portions of the Contractor's overall safety and health program referenced in the APP shall be included in the applicable APP element and made site-specific. The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the "controlling authority" for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors. Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out. The APP shall be signed by the person and firm (senior person) preparing the APP, the Contractor, the on-site superintendent, the designated site safety and health officer and any designated CSP and/or CIH. Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP. Once accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments will be enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP will be cause for stopping of work, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified. Once work begins, changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project superintendent, SSHO and quality control manager. Should any hazard become evident, stop work in the area, secure the area, and develop a plan to remove the hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery. Eliminate/remove the hazard. In the interim, all Section 01 35 29 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
b.
1.6 a.
b.
c.
d.
Ft. Detrick, MD
necessary action shall be taken to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ANSI/ASSE A10.34,) and the environment. e. Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained at the Contracting Officer's resident engineer's office and at the job site. The APP shall be continuously reviewed and amended, as necessary, throughout the life of the contract. Unusual or high-hazard activities not identified in the original APP shall be incorporated in the plan as they are discovered. EM 385-1-1 Contents
f.
1.6.1
In addition to the requirements outlines in Appendix A of USACE EM 385-1-1, the following is required: a. Crane Critical Lift Plan. Prepare and sign weight handling critical lift plans for lifts over 75 percent of the capacity of the crane or hoist (or lifts over 50 percent of the capacity of a barge mounted mobile crane's hoists) at any radius of lift; lifts involving more than one crane or hoist; lifts of personnel; and lifts involving non-routine rigging or operation, sensitive equipment, or unusual safety risks. The plan shall be submitted 15 calendar days prior to on-site work and include the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1, paragraph 16.C.18. and the following: (1) For lifts of personnel, the plan shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.550(g). b. Site Demolition Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with Section 02 41 00 DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION and referenced sources. Include engineering survey as applicable. Excavation Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA) The Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) format shall be in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1. Submit the AHA for review at least 15 calendar days prior to the start of each phase. Format subsequent AHAs as amendments to the APP. The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the activity's safety and health controls. The AHA list will be reviewed periodically (at least monthly) at the Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated as necessary when procedures, scheduling, or hazards change. The activity hazard analyses shall be developed using the project schedule as the basis for the activities performed. Any activities listed on the project schedule will require an AHA. The AHAs will be developed by the contractor, supplier or subcontractor and provided to the prime contractor for submittal to the Contracting Officer. DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION
c.
1.7 a.
b.
c.
1.8
Within 2 calendar days after commencement of work, erect a safety bulletin Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 35 29 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
board at the job site. The safety bulletin board shall include information and be maintained as required by EM 385-1-1, section 01.A.06. Additional items required to be posted include: a. b. 1.9 Confined space entry permit. Hot work permit. SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS
Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including those listed in the article "References." Maintain applicable equipment manufacturer's manuals. 1.10 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT
Contractors will arrange for their own emergency medical treatment. Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment. 1.11 1.11.1 a. REPORTS Accident Reports For recordable injuries and illnesses, and property damage accidents resulting in at least $2,000 in damages, the Prime Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause(s) of the accident, complete the USACE Accident Report Form 3394 and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 5 calendar day(s) of the accident. The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any required or special forms. For any weight handling equipment accident (including rigging gear accidents) the Prime Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause(s) of the accident, complete the WHE Accident Report (Crane and Rigging Gear) form and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of the accident. Crane operations shall not proceed until cause is determined and corrective actions have been implemented to the satisfaction of the contracting officer. The Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the accident report form. Monthly Exposure Reports
b.
1.11.2
Monthly exposure reporting to the Contracting Officer is required to be attached to the monthly billing request. This report is a compilation of employee-hours worked each month for all site workers, both prime and subcontractor. The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any special forms. 1.11.3 Crane Reports
Submit crane inspection reports required in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, Appendix H and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections. 1.11.4 Certificate of Compliance
The Contractor shall provide a Certificate of Compliance for each crane entering an activity under this contract (see Contracting Officer for a blank certificate). Certificate shall state that the crane and rigging Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 35 29 - Page 8 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
gear meet applicable OSHA regulations (with the Contractor citing which OSHA regulations are applicable, e.g., cranes used in construction, demolition, or maintenance shall comply with 29 CFR 1926 and USACE EM 385-1-1 section 16 and Appendix H. Certify on the Certificate of Compliance that the crane operator(s) is qualified and trained in the operation of the crane to be used. The Contractor shall also certify that all of its crane operators working on the DOD activity have been trained in the proper use of all safety devices (e.g., anti-two block devices). These certifications shall be posted on the crane. 1.12 a. HOT WORK Prior to performing "Hot Work" (welding, cutting, soldering, brazing, etc.) or operating other flame-producing/spark producing devices, a written permit shall be requested from the Ft. Detrick Fire Department. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS ISSUED. The Contractor will provide at least two (2) twenty (20) pound 4A:20 BC rated extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". All extinguishers shall be current inspection tagged, approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal. It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any "Hot Work" done at this activity. The Fire Watch shall be trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of 30 minutes after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work permit. When starting work in the facility, Contractors shall require their personnel to familiarize themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in memory the emergency Ft. Detrick Fire Department phone number. ANY FIRE, NO MATTER HOW SMALL, SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE RESPONSIBLE FT. DETRICK FIRE DEPARTMENT IMMEDIATELY. PRODUCTS EXECUTION CONSTRUCTION AND/OR OTHER WORK
b.
PART 2 PART 3 3.1
Hazardous material issues shall be coordinated with Ft. Detrick Garrison Hazmat Personnel. 3.1.1 Hazardous Material Exclusions
Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract, radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material and devices used in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 such as nuclear density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury or polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocynates, lead-based paint are prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded materials. 3.1.2 Unforeseen Hazardous Material
If additional material, not indicated, that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction operations is encountered, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine if the material is Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 35 29 - Page 9 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification pursuant to "FAR 52.243-4, Changes" and "FAR 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions." 3.2 PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING
Contractors are required to apply for utility outages at least 15 days in advance. As a minimum, the request should include the location of the outage, utilities being affected, duration of outage and any necessary sketches. Special requirements for electrical outage requests are contained elsewhere in this specification section. Once approved, and prior to beginning work on the utility system requiring shut down, the Contractor shall attend a pre-outage coordination meeting with the Contracting Officer to review the scope of work and the lock-out/tag-out procedures for worker protection. No work will be performed on energized electrical circuits unless proof is provided that no other means exist. 3.3 FALL HAZARD PROTECTION AND PREVENTION PROGRAM
The Contractor shall establish a fall protection and prevention program, for the protection of all employees exposed to fall hazards. The program shall include company policy, identify responsibilities, education and training requirements, fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection, storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and evacuation procedures. 3.3.1 Training
The Contractor shall institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall Hazard Protection and Prevention Program, the Contractor shall provide training for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards. A competent person for fall protection shall provide the training. Training requirements shall be in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, section 21.A.16. 3.3.2 Fall Protection Equipment and Systems
The Contractor shall enforce use of the fall protection equipment and systems designated for each specific work activity in the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan and/or AHA at all times when an employee is exposed to a fall hazard. Employees shall be protected from fall hazards as specified in EM 385-1-1, section 21. In addition to the required fall protection systems, safety skiff, personal floatation devices, life rings etc., are required when working above or next to water in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, paragraphs 05.H. and 05.I. Personal fall arrest systems are required when working from an articulating or extendible boom, swing stages, or suspended platform. In addition, personal fall arrest systems are required when operating other equipment such as scissor lifts if the work platform is capable of being positioned outside the wheelbase. The need for tying-off in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment during raising, lowering, or travel. Fall protection must comply with 29 CFR 1926.500, Subpart M, USACE EM 385-1-1 and ANSI A10.32. 3.3.2.1 Personal Fall Arrest Equipment
Personal fall arrest equipment, systems, subsystems, and components shall meet ANSI Z359.1. Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing lanyard Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 35 29 - Page 10 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest body support device. Body belts may only be used as a positioning device system (for uses such as steel reinforcing assembly and in addition to an approved fall arrest system). Harnesses shall have a fall arrest attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system. Only locking snap hooks and carabiners shall be used. Webbing, straps, and ropes shall be made of synthetic fiber. The maximum free fall distance when using fall arrest equipment shall not exceed 1.8 m (6 feet). The total fall distance and any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion) that can occur during a fall shall always be taken into consideration when attaching a person to a fall arrest system. 3.3.3 Fall Protection for Roofing Work
Fall protection controls shall be implemented based on the type of roof being constructed and work being performed. The roof area to be accessed shall be evaluated for its structural integrity including weight-bearing capabilities for the projected loading. a. Low Sloped Roofs: (1) For work within 1.8 m (6 feet) of an edge, on low-slope roofs, personnel shall be protected from falling by use of personal fall arrest systems, guardrails, or safety nets. (2) For work greater than 1.8 m (6 feet) from an edge, warning lines shall be erected and installed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.500 and USACE EM 385-1-1. b. Steep-Sloped Roofs: Work on steep-sloped roofs requires a personal fall arrest system, guardrails with toe-boards, or safety nets. Existing Anchorage
3.3.4
Existing anchorages, to be used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment, shall be certified (or re-certified) by a qualified person for fall protection in accordance with ANSI Z359.1. Exiting horizontal lifeline anchorages shall be certified (or re-certified) by a registered professional engineer with experience in designing horizontal lifeline systems. 3.3.5 Horizontal Lifelines
Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed, certified and used under the supervision of a qualified person for fall protection as part of a complete fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 ( 29 CFR 1926.500). 3.3.6 Guardrails and Safety Nets
Guardrails and safety nets shall be designed, installed and used in accordance with EM 385-1-1 and 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M. 3.3.7 Rescue and Evacuation Procedures
When personal fall arrest systems are used, the contractor must ensure that the mishap victim can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur. A Rescue and Evacuation Plan shall be prepared by the contractor Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 35 29 - Page 11 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
and include a detailed discussion of the following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue; equipment used; training requirement; specialized training for the rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and transportation routes to a medical facility. The Rescue and Evacuation Plan shall be included in the Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work, in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and the Accident Prevention Plan (APP). 3.4 3.4.1 SCAFFOLDING Stilts
The use of stilts for gaining additional height in construction, renovation, repair or maintenance work is prohibited. 3.5 3.5.1 a. EQUIPMENT Material Handling Equipment Material handling equipment such as forklifts shall not be modified with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating instructions. The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks shall be licensed in accordance with OSHA. Weight Handling Equipment
b.
c.
3.5.2
a. Cranes and derricks shall be equipped as specified in EM 385-1-1, section 16. b. The Contractor shall comply with the crane manufacturer's specifications and limitations for erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the work. Erection shall be performed under the supervision of a designated person (as defined in ASME B30.5). All testing shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures. The Contractor shall comply with ASME B30.5 for mobile and locomotive cranes, ASME B30.22 for articulating boom cranes,ASME B30.3 for construction tower cranes, and ASME B30.8 for floating cranes and floating derricks. Under no circumstance shall a Contractor make a lift at or above 90% of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration. When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines, operators and riggers shall be alert to this special hazard and shall follow the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 section 11 and ASME B30.5 or ASME B30.22 as applicable. Crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) shall not be used unless the Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible. Personnel shall not be lifted with a line hoist or Section 01 35 29 - Page 12 For Official Use Only
c.
d.
e.
f.
Ft. Detrick, MD
friction crane. g. Portable fire extinguishers shall be inspected, maintained, and recharged as specified in NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended loads. The Contractor shall use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers. The crane hook/block must be positioned directly over the load. loading of the crane is prohibited. A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel from entering the counterweight swing (tail swing) area of the crane. Certification of the person identifier of for review by records which include the date of inspection, signature performing the inspection, and the serial number or other the crane that was inspected shall always be available Contracting Officer personnel. Side
h.
i. j.
k.
l.
m.
Written reports listing the load test procedures used along with any repairs or alterations performed on the crane shall be available for review by Contracting Officer personnel. Certify that all crane operators have been trained in proper use of all safety devices (e.g., anti-two block devices). EXCAVATIONS
n.
3.6
The competent person shall perform soil classification in accordance with 29 CFR 1926. 3.6.1 Utility Locations
Prior to digging, the appropriate digging permit must be obtained. All underground utilities in the work area must be positively identified by a private utility locating service in addition to any station locating service and coordinated with the station utility department. Any markings made during the utility investigation must be maintained throughout the contract. 3.6.2 a. Utility Location Verification The Contractor must physically verify underground utility locations by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent construction work is expected to come within three feet of the underground system. Digging within 0.061 m (2 feet) of a known utility must not be performed by means of mechanical equipment; hand digging shall be used. If construction is parallel to an existing utility the utility shall be exposed by hand digging every 30.5 m (100 feet) if parallel within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the excavation. Contact Ft. Detrick Directorate of Installation Services to coordinate utility location verification work.
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.6.3
Shoring Systems
Trench and shoring systems must be identified in the accepted safety plan and AHA. Manufacture tabulated data and specifications or registered engineer tabulated data for shoring or benching systems shall be readily available on-site for review. Job-made shoring or shielding shall have the registered professional engineer stamp, specifications, and tabulated data. Extreme care must be used when excavating near direct burial electric underground cables. 3.6.4 Trenching Machinery
Trenching machines with digging chain drives shall be operated only when the spotters/laborers are in plain view of the operator. Operator and spotters/laborers shall be provided training on the hazards of the digging chain drives with emphasis on the distance that needs to be maintained when the digging chain is operating. Documentation of the training shall be kept on file at the project site. 3.7 UTILITIES WITHIN CONCRETE SLABS
Utilities located within concrete slabs or pier structures, bridges, and the like, are extremely difficult to identify due to the reinforcing steel used in the construction of these structures. Whenever contract work involves concrete chipping, saw cutting, or core drilling, the existing utility location must be coordinated with station utility departments in addition to a private locating service. Outages to isolate utility systems shall be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be positively identified. The use of historical drawings does not alleviate the contractor from meeting this requirement. 3.8 3.8.1 ELECTRICAL Conduct of Electrical Work
Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe for entry before entering to conduct work. Cables that will be cut must be positively identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut. Positive cable identification must be made prior to submitting any outage request for electrical systems. Arrangements are to be coordinated with the Contracting Officer and Station Utilities for identification. The Contracting Officer will not accept an outage request until the Contractor satisfactorily documents that the circuits have been clearly identified. Perform all high voltage cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting tool. When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers, no additional person other than the switch operator will be allowed in the space during the actual operation. Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized to the fullest extent possible. Use of electrical outages clear of any energized electrical sources is the preferred method. When working in energized substations, only qualified electrical workers shall be permitted to enter. When work requires Contractor to work near energized circuits as defined by the NFPA 70, high voltage personnel must use personal protective equipment that includes, as a minimum, electrical hard hat, safety shoes, insulating gloves with leather protective sleeves, fire retarding shirts, coveralls, face shields, and safety glasses. In addition, provide electrical arc flash protection for personnel as required by NFPA 70E. Insulating blankets, hearing protection, and switching suits may also be required, depending on the specific job and as delineated in the Contractor's AHA. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 35 29 - Page 14 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.8.2
Portable Extension Cords
Portable extension cords shall be sized in accordance with manufacturer ratings for the tool to be powered and protected from damage. All damaged extension cords shall be immediately removed from service. Portable extension cords shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70. 3.9 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements in Section 06.I of USACE EM 385-1-1, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146 and OSHA 29 CFR 1926.21(b)(6). Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a permit system to be used.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 41 50 SEISMIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC) ICC IBC (2006; Errata 2006; Errata 2007; Supplement 2007; Errata 2007) International Building Code U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD) UFC 3-310-01 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES Load Assumptions for Buildings
1.2.1 Seismic control requirements for architectural, mechanical and electrical building components. 1.3 1.3.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Seismic Design
Design, select, construct, and install work and equipment to resist seismic forces as required by ICC IBC, as modified by UFC 3-310-01: Structural Load Data and as established by the USAMRIID AE. Seismic Design for: A. B. C. 1.3.2 Occupancy Category III, Seismic Design Category B. Site Class D, Ss = 0.161 g, S1 = 0.051 g. IE equals 1.25 Direct Supervision
Design seismic restraint system under direct supervision of an experienced Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Maryland. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 41 60 WIND LOAD DESIGN CRITERIA
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC) ICC IBC (2006; Errata 2006; Errata 2007; Supplement 2007; Errata 2007) International Building Code U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD) UFC 3-310-01 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES Load Assumptions for Buildings
Wind load design criteria for exterior enclosure assemblies. 1.3 1.3.1 DESIGN CRITERIA Systems
Design systems to withstand wind loads in accordance with ICC IBC, as modified by UFC 3-310-01: Structural Load Data and as established by the USAMRIID AE. Deflection limits, if any, are shown in the related technical specification Sections for the systems involved. 1.3.2 A. B. C. D. E. Wind Loads Basic Wind Speed ( 3 second gust ) equals 90 mph (144 kmph). Importance Factor 1w = 1.15 Building Category: Exposure Category C Design of components and cladding shall be per ICC IBC and FEBR criteria under separate cover. Refer to Drawing A0.27 and S0.12 for components and cladding wind pressure zones. PRODUCTS I
F.
PART 2
Not Used.
Ft. Detrick, MD
PART 3
EXECUTION
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications to establish requirements for the work. These references are identified in each section by document number, date and title. The document number used in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing organization, (e.g., ASTM B 564 Nickel Alloy Forgings). However, when the standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document, an identifying number has been assigned for reference purposes. 1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION
The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below, and if the source of the publications is different from the address of the sponsoring organization, that information is also provided. Documents listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by title rather than by number. ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI) 38800 Country Club Drive Farmington Hills, MI 48331 Ph: 248-848-3700 Fax: 248-848-3701 E-mail: bkstore@concrete.org Internet: http://www.concrete.org AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (ARI) 4100 North Fairfax Drive, Suite 200 Arlington, VA 22203 Ph: 703-524-8800 Fax: 703-528-3816 E-mail: ari@ari.org Internet: http://www.ari.org AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA) 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893 Ph: 847-394-0150 Fax: 847-253-0088 E-mail: amca@amca.org Internet: http://www.amca.org ALLIANCE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS (ATIS) 1200 G Street, NW, Suite 500 Washington, D.C. 20005 Ph: 202-628-6380 Fax: 202-393-5453 Internet: http://www.atis.org Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA) National Headquarters 1525 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600 Arlington, VA 22209 Ph: 703-358-2960 Fax: 703-358-2961 Internet: http://www.aluminum.org AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA) 1827 Walden Office Square Suite 550 Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268 Ph: 847-303-5664 Fax: 847-303-5774 E-mail: webmaster@aamanet.org Internet: http://www.aamanet.org AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) 444 North Capital Street, NW, Suite 249 Washington, DC 20001 Ph: 202-624-5800 Fax: 202-624-5806 E-Mail: info@aashto.org Internet: http://www.aashto.org AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF TEXTILE CHEMISTS AND COLORISTS (AATCC) 1 Davis Drive P.O. Box 12215 Research Triangle Park, NC 27709-2215 Ph: 919-549-8141 Fax: 919-549-8933 E-mail: quantem@aatcc.org Technical Questions: hammona@aatc.org Internet: http://www.aatcc.org AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA) 2025 M Street, NW, Suite 800 Washington, DC 20036 Ph: 202-367-1155 Fax: 202-367-2155 E-mail: info.abma@smithbucklin.com Internet: http://www.abma-dc.org AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH) 1330 Kemper Meadow Drive Cincinnati, OH 45240 Ph: 513-742-2020 Fax: 513-742-3355 E-mail: mail@acgih.org Internet: http://www.acgih.org AMERICAN GEAR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AGMA) 500 Montgomery Street, Suite 350 Alexandria, VA 22314-1560 Ph: 703-684-0211 Fax: 703-684-0242 E-mail: webmaster@agma.org Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Internet:
http://www.agma.org
AMERICAN GLOVEBOX SOCIETY (AGS) P.O. Box 9099 Santa Rosa, CA 95405 Ph: 800-530-1022 Fax: 707-578-4406 Internet: AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA) c/o Composite Panel Association 18922 Premiere Court Gaithersburg, MD 20879-1574 Ph: 301-670-0604 Fax: 301-840-1252 Internet: http://www.pbmdf.org AMERICAN INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ASSOCIATION (AIHA) 2700 Prosperity Ave., Shite 250 Fairfax, VA 22031 Tel: 703-849-8888 Fax: 703-207-3561 E-mail: infonet@aiha.org Internet http://www.aiha.org AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC) One East Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60601-1802 Ph: 312-670-2400 Fax: 312-670-5403 Publications: 800-644-2400 E-mail: pubs@aisc.org Internet: http://www.aisc.org AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI) 1140 Connecticut Avenue, NW, Suite 705 Washington, DC 20036 Ph: 202-452-7100 Fax: 202-463-6573 Internet: http://www.steel.org AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS COMMITTEE (ALSC) P.O. Box 210 Germantown, MD 20875-0210 Ph: 301-972-1700 Fax: 301-540-8004 E-mail: alsc@alsc.org Internet: http://www.alsc.org AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) 1819 L Street, NW, 6th Floor Washington, DC 20036 Ph: 202-293-8020 Fax: 202-293-9287 E-mail: info@ansi.org Internet: http://www.ansi.org/ --- ANSI documents beginning with the letter "S" can be ordered from: Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Acoustical Society of America (ASA) 2 Huntington Quadrangle, Suite 1NO1 Melville, NY 11747-4502 Ph: 516-576-2360 Fax: 516-576-2377 E-mail: asa@aip.org Internet: http://asa.aip.org
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API) 1220 L Street, NW Washington, DC 20005-4070 Ph: 202-682-8000 Fax: 202-682-8223 Internet: http://www.api.org AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE) 1801 Alexander Bell Drive Reston, VA 20191-4400 Ph: 703-295-6300 - 800-548-2723 Fax: 703-295-6222 E-mail: marketing@asce.org Internet: http://www.asce.org AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE) 1791 Tullie Circle, NE Atlanta, GA 30329 Ph: 800-527-4723 or 404-636-8400 Fax: 404-321-5478 E-mail: ashrae@ashrae.org Internet: http://www.ashrae.org AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE) 1800 East Oakton Street Des Plaines, IL 60018-2187 Ph: 847-699-2929 Fax: 847-768-3434 E-mail: customerservice@asse.org Internet: http://www.asse.org AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE) 901 Canterbury, Suite A Westlake, OH 44145 Ph: 440-835-3040 Fax: 440-835-3488 E-mail: info@asse-plumbing.org Internet: http://www.asse-plumbing.org AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 Ph: 800-926-7337 Fax: 303-347-0804 Internet: http://www.awwa.org AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) 550 N.W. LeJeune Road Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Miami, FL 33126 Ph: 800-443-9353 - 305-443-9353 Fax: 305-443-7559 E-mail: info@aws.org Internet: http://www.aws.org AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION (AWPA) P.O. Box 361784 Birmingham, AL 35236-1784 Ph: 205-733-4077 Fax: 205-733-4075 E-mail: email@awpa.com Internet: http://www.awpa.com APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA) 7011 South 19th Tacoma, WA 98466 Ph: 253-565-6600 Fax: 253-565-7265 E-mail: help@apawood.org Internet: http://www.apawood.org ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI) 146179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120 Potomac Falls, VA 20165 Ph: 571-323-3636 Fax: 571-323-3630 Internet: http://www.awinet.org ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) Three Park Avenue, M/S 10E New York, NY 10016 Ph: 212-591-7722 or 800-843-2763 Fax: 212-591-7674 E-mail: infocentral@asme.org Internet: http://www.asme.org ASPHALT ROOFING MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (ARMA) 1156-15TH Street, NW, Suite 900 Washington D.C. 20005 Ph: 202-207-0917 Fax: 202-223-9741 Internet: http://www.asphaltroofing.org ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC) 1518 K Street, NW Washington, DC 20005 Ph: 202-737-0202 Fax: 202-638-4833 E-mail: info@aabc.com Internet: http://www.aabchq.com ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION (AAMI) 1110 North Glebe Road, Suite 220 Arlington, VA 22201-4795 Ph: 800-332-2264 or 703-525-4890 E-mail: customerservice@aami.org Internet: http://www.aami.org Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC) 600 North 18th Street P.O. Box 2641 Birmingham, AL 35291 Ph: 205-257-2530 Fax: 205-257-2540 Internet: http://www.aeic.org ASSOCIATION OF THE WALL AND CEILING INDUSTRIES - INTERNATIONAL (AWCI) 513 West Broad Street, Suite 210 Falls Church, VA 22046 Ph: 703-534-8300 Fax: 703-534-8307 E-mail: info@awci.org Internet: http://www.awci.org ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700 West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 Ph: 610-832-9500 Fax: 610-832-9555 E-mail: service@astm.org Internet: http://www.astm.org BAY AREA AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (Bay Area AQMD) 939 Ellis Street San Francisco, CA 94109 Ph: 415-771-6000 Fax: 415-928-8560 Internet: http://www.baaqmd.gov/ BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA) 355 Lexington Avenue 17th Floor New York, NY 10017 Ph: 212-297-2122 Fax: 212-370-9047 E-mail: assocmgmt@aol.com Internet: http://www.buildershardware.com CSA AMERICA INC (CSA/AM) 8501 East Pleasant Valley Road Cleveland, OH 44131-5575 Ph: 216-524-4990 Fax: 216-520-8979 E-mail: cathy.rake@csa-america.org Internet: http://www.csa-america.org CSA INTERNATIONAL (CSA) 8501 East Pleasant Valley Road Cleveland, OH 44131-5575 Ph: 216-524-4990 Fax: 216-642-3463 E-mail: certinfo@csa-international.org Internet: http://www.csa-international.org
Ft. Detrick, MD
CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS COMMISSION (CBSC) 2525 Natomas Park Drive, Suite 130 Sacramento, CA 95833 Ph: 916-263-0916 Fax: 916-263-0959 Internet: CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE (CRI) P.O. Box 2048 Dalton, GA 30722-2048 Ph: 800-882-8846 or 706-278-3176 Fax: 706-278-8835 Internet: http://www.carpet-rug.com CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI) 5959 Shallowford Road, Suite 419 Chattanooga, TN 37421 Ph: 423-892-0137 Fax: 423-892-0817 Internet: http://www.cispi.org CAST STONE INSTITUTE 813 Chestnut Street P.O. Box 68 Lebanon, PA 17042 Ph: 717-272-3744 Fax: 717-272-5147 Internet: CEILINGS & INTERIOR SYSTEMS CONSTRUCTION ASSOCIATION (CISCA) 1500 Lincoln Highway, Suite 202 St. Charles, IL 60174 Ph: 630-584-1919 Fax: 630-584-2003 E-mail: info@cisca.org Internet: http://www.cisca.org CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTROL AND PREVENTION (CDC) 1600 Clifton Road Atlanta, GA 30333 Ph: 404-639-3311 Internet: http://www.cdc.gov CHEMICAL FABRICS & FILM ASSOCIATION (CFFA) 1300 Sumner Avenue Cleveland OH 44115-2851 Ph: 216-241-7333 Fax: 216-241-0105 E-mail: cffa@chemicalfabricsandfilm.com Internet: http://www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com/ COMPOSITE PANEL ASSOCIATION (CPA) 18922 Premeire Court Gaithersburg, MD 20879-1574 Ph: 301-670-0604 Fax: 301-840-1252 Internet: http://www.pbmdf.com
Ft. Detrick, MD
COMPRESSED GAS ASSOCIATION (CGA) 4221 Walney Road, 5th Floor Chantilly, VA 20151-2923 Ph: 703-788-2700 Fax: 703-961-1831 E-mail: cga@cganet.com Internet: http://www.cganet.com CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI) 933 North Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 Ph: 847-517-1200 Fax: 847-517-1206 Internet: http://www.crsi.org/ CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION (CEA) 2500 Wilson Blvd. Arlington, VA 22201-3834 Ph: 866-858-1555 or 703-907-7600 Fax: 703-907-7675 E-mail: cea@CE.org Internet: http://www.CE.org COOLING TECHNOLOGY INSTITUTE (CTI) 2611 FM 1960 West Suite A-101 Houston, TX 77068-3730 Ph: 281-583-4087 Fax: 281-537-1721 Internet: http://www.cti.org COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA) 260 Madison Avenue New York, NY 10016 Ph: 212-251-7200 Fax: 212-251-7234 E-mail: questions@cda.copper.org Internet: http://www.copper.org DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI) 14150 Newbrook Dr. Chantily, VA 20151-2232 Ph: 703-222-2010 Fax: 703-222-2410 E-mail: infor@dhi.org Internet: http://www.dhi.org
ELECTRICAL GENERATING SYSTEMS ASSOCIATION (EGSA) 1650 South Dixie Highway, Suite 500 Boca Raton, FL 33432-7462 Ph: 561-750-5575 Fax: 561-395-8557 E-mail: e-mail@egsa.org Internet: http://www.egsa.org ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ALLIANCE (EIA) 2500 Wilson Boulevard Arlington, VA 22201-3834 Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 8 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Ph: 703-907-7500 Fax: 703-907-7501 Internet: http://www.eia.org U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE) 1000 Independance Ave. SW Washington, DC 20585 Ph: 800-342-5363 Fax: 202-586-4403 E-mail: dmteam@hq.doe.gov Internet: http://www.eh.doe.gov/ ETL TESTING LABORATORIES (ETL) Intertek Testing Services, ETL SEMKO 70 Codman Hill Road Boxborough, MA 01719 Ph: 978-263-2662 Fax: 978-263-7086 E-mail: info@etlsemko.com Internet: http://www.etlsemko.com EXPANSION JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (EJMA) 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 Ph: 914-332-0040 Fax: 914-332-1541 E-mail: inquiries@ejma.org Internet: http://www.ejma.org FLUID CONTROLS INSTITUTE (FCI) 1300 Sumner Avenue Cleveland, OH 44115 Ph: 216-241-7333 Fax: 216-241-0105 E-mail: fci@fluidcontrolsinstitute.org Internet: www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org FM GLOBAL (FM) 1301 Atwood Avenue P.O. Box 7500 Johnston, RI 02919 Ph: 401-275-3000 Fax: 401-275-3029 E-mail: information@fmglobal.com Internet: http://www.fmglobal.com FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL (FSC) 1155 30th Street NW Suite 300 Washington, DC 20007 Ph: 202.342.0413 Fax: 202.342.6589 E-mail: info@fscus.org Internet: http://www.fscus.org GEOSYNTHETIC RESEARCH INSTITUTE (GRI) 475 Kedron Avenue Folsom, PA 19033 Ph: 610-522-8440 Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 9 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Fax: 610-522-8441 Internet: http://www.geosynthetic-institute.org GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA) 2945 SW Wanamaker Drive, Suite A Topeka, KS 66614 Ph: 785-271-0208 Fax: 785-271-0166 E-mail: gana@glasswebsite.com Internet: http://www.glasswebsite.com GREEN SEAL (GS) 1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW Suite 827 Washington, DC 20036-5525 Ph: 202-872-6400 Fax: 202-872-4324 E-mail: greenseal@greenseal.org Internet: http://www.greenseal.org GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA) 810 First Street, NE, Suite 510 Washington, DC 20002 Ph: 202-289-5440 Fax: 202-289-3707 E-mail: info@gypsum.org Internet: http://www.gypsum.org HARDWOOD PLYWOOD AND VENEER ASSOCIATION (HPVA) P.O. Box 2789 Reston, VA 20195-0789 Ph: 703-435-2900 Fax: 703-435-2537 E-mail: hpva@hpva.org Internet: http://www.hpva.org HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE (HI) 9 Sylvan Way Parsippany, NJ 07054-3802 Ph: 973-267-9700 Fax: 973-267-9055 E-mail: webmaster@pumps.org Internet: http://www.pumps.org HYDRONICS INSTITUTE DIVISION OF GAMA (HYI) 35 Russo Place P.O. Box 218 Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922-0218 Ph: 908-464-8200 Fax: 908-464-7818 E-mail: information@gamanet.org Internet: http://www.gamanet.org/publist/hydroordr.htm ICC EVALUATION SERVICE, INC. (ICC-ES) 5360 Workman Mill Road Whitier, CA 90601 Ph: 562-699-0543 Fax: 562-695-4694 E-mail: es@icc-es.org Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 10 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Internet:
http://www.icc-es.org
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA) 120 Wall Street, 17th Floor New York, NY 10005 Ph: 212-248-5000 Fax: 212-248-5018 E-mail: iesna@iesna.org Internet: http://www.iesna.org INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA) 1901 North Moore Street Arlington, VA 2ee09-1762 Ph: 703-525-1695 Fax: 703-528-2148 E-mail: isea@safety equipment.org Internet: http://www.safetyequipment.org/ INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) 445 Hoes Lane Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331 Ph: 732-981-0060 Fax: 732-981-1712 E-mail: customer-services@ieee.org Internet: http://www.ieee.org INSTITUTE OF ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND TECHNOLOGY (IEST) 5005 Newport Drive, Suite 506 Rolling Meadows, IL 60008-3841 Ph: 847-255-1561 Fax: 847-255-1699 E-mail: iest@iest.org Internet: http://www.iest.org INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA) P.O. Box 1568 Carrollton, GA 30112 Ph: 770-830-0369 Fax: 770-830-8501 Internet: http://www.icea.net INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ALLIANCE (IGMA) 1500 Bank Street, Suite 300 Ottawa, Ontario CANADA K1H 1B8 Ph: 613-233-1510 Fax: 613-482-9436 E-mail: info@igmaonline.org Internet: http://www.igmaonline.org INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC) 5360 Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601 Ph: 562-699-0541 Fax: 562-699-9721 E-mail: webmaster@iccsafe.org Internet: www.iccsafe.org INTERNATIONAL CONCRETE REPAIR INSTITUTE (ICRI) 3166 South River Road, Suite 132 Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 11 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Des Plaines, IL 60018 Ph: 847-827-0830 Fax: 847-827-0832 Internet: http://www.icri.org INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA) P.O. Box 687 106 Stone Street Morrison, CO 80465 Ph: 303-697-8441 Fax: 303-697-8431 E-mail: neta@netaworld.org Internet: http://www.netaworld.org INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC) 3, rue de Varembe, P.O. Box 131 CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland Ph: 41-22-919-0211 Fax: 41-22-919-0300 E-mail: custserv@iec.ch Internet: http://www.iec.ch INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO) 1, rue de Varembe' Case Postale 56 CH-1211 Geneve 20 Switzerland Ph: 41-22-749-0111 Fax: 41-22-733-3430 E-mail: central@iso.ch Internet: http://www.iso.ch INTERNATIONAL WINDOW CLEANING ASSOCIATION (IWCA) 6277 Franconia Rd. Alexandria, VA 22310 Ph: 800-875-4922 or 703-971-7771 FAX: 703-971-7772 E-mail: IWCA@aol.com Internet: http://www.iwca.org L.H. BAILEY HORTORIUM (LHBH) Dept of Plant Biology c/o Cornell University 228 Plant Science Building Ithaca, NY 14853 Ph: 607-255-4477 Internet: http://www.plantbio.cornell.edu/Hort.php LONMARK INTERNATIONAL (LonMark) 550 Meridan Ave. San Jose, CA 95126 Ph: 408-938-5266 Fax: 408-790-3838 E-mail: info@lonmark.org Internet: http://www.lonmark.org MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS) 127 Park Street, NE Vienna, VA 22180-4602 Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 12 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Ph: 703-281-6613 Fax: 703-281-6671 E-mail: info@mss-hq.com Internet: http://www.mss-hq.com MAPLE FLOORING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MFMA) 60 Revere Drive, Suite 500 Northbrook, IL 60062 Ph: 847-480-9138 Fax: 847-480-9282 E-mail: mfma@maplefloor.org Internet: http://www.maplefloor.org MARBLE INSTITUTE OF AMERICA (MIA) 28901 Clemens Road, Suite 100 Westlake, OH 44145 Ph: 440-250-9222 Fax: 440-250-9223 E-mail: info@marble-institute.com Internet: http://www.marble-institute.com MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI) 4090 Graveley Street Burnaby, BC CANADA V5C 3T6 Ph: 888-674-8937 Fax: 888-211-8708 E-mail: info@paintinfo.com Internet: http://www.paintinfo.com/mpi METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MBMA) 1300 Sumner Avenue Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 Ph: 216-241-7333 Fax: 216-241-0105 E-mail: mbma@mbma.com Internet: http://www.mbma.com MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA) 16712 elm Circle Omaha, NE 68130 Ph: 800-747-6422 Fax: 402-330-9702 E-mail: info@micainsulation.org Internet: http://www.micainsulation.org MONORAIL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MMA) 8720 Red Oak Boulevard, Suite 201 Charlotte, NC 28217 Ph: 704-676-1190 Fax: 704-676-1199 E-mail: mma@mhia.org Internet: http://www.mhia.org/mma NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE) 1440 South Creek Drive Houston, TX 77084-4906 Ph: 281-228-6200 Fax: 281-228-6300 E-mail: firstservice@nace.org Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 13 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Internet:
http://www.nace.org
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM) 8 South Michigan Avenue, Suite 1000 Chicago, IL 60603 Ph: 312-322-0405 Fax: 312-332-0706 E-mail: naamm@gss.net Internet: ht tp://www.naamm.org NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF CHAIN MANUFACTURERS (NACM) Post Office Box 89014 Tucson, AZ 85752-9014 Ph: 520-886-0695 E-mail: NACMoffice@att.net Internet: http://www.nacm.info NATIONAL CABLE AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS ASSOCIATION (NCTA) 1724 Massachusetts Avenue, NW Washington, DC 20036 Ph: 202-775-3550 Fax: 202-775-1055 E-mail: webmaster@ncta.com Internet: http://www.ncta.com NATIONAL CONCRETE MASONRY ASSOCIATION (NCMA) 13750 Sunrise Valley Drive Herndon, VA 20171-4662 Ph: 703-713-1900 Fax: 703-713-1910 E-mail: ncma@ncma.org Internet: http://www.ncma.org NATIONAL COUNCIL ON RADIATION PROTECTION AND MEASUREMENTS (NCRP) 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Suite 400 Bethesda, MD 20814-3095 Ph: 301-657-2652 Fax: 301-907-8768 E-mail: ncrp@ncrp.com Internet: http://www.ncrp.com NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) 1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752 Rosslyn, VA 22209 Ph: 703-841-3200 Fax: 703-841-5900 E-mail: webmaster@nema.org Internet: http://www.nema.org/ NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB) 8575 Grovemont Circle Gaithersburg, MD 20877 Ph: 301-977-3698 Fax: 301-977-9589 Internet: http://www.nebb.org NATIONAL FENESTRATION RATING COUNCIL (NFRC) 8484 Georgia Avenue, Suite 320 Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 14 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Silver Spring, MD 20910 Ph: 301-589-1776 Fax: 301-589-3884 E-Mail: info@nfrc.org Internet: http://www.nfrc.org NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 1 Batterymarch Park Quincy, MA 02169-7471 Ph: 617-770-3000 Fax: 617-770-0700 E-mail: webmaster@nfpa.org Internet: http://www.nfpa.org NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES (NICET) 1420 King Street Alexandria, VA 22314-2794 Ph: 888-476-4238 E-mail: tech@nicet.org Internet: http://www.nicet.org NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST) 100 Bureau Drive Stop 2100 Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2100 Ph: 301-975-NIST Internet: http://www.nist.gov Order Publications From: Superintendent of Documents U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO) 732 North Capitol Street, NW Washington, DC 20401 Ph: 888-293-6498 or 202-512-1530 Fax: 202-512-1262 E-mail: gpoaccess@gpo.gov Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov or National Technical Information Service (NTIS) 5285 Port Royal Road Springfield, VA 22161 Ph: 703-605-6585 Fax: 703-605-6900 E-mail: info@ntis.gov Internet: http://www.ntis.gov NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA) 900 Spring Street Silver Spring, MD 20910 Ph: 301-587-1400 Fax: 301-585-4219 Internet: http://www.nrmca.org NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NRCA) 10255 West Higgins Road, Suite 600 Rosemont, IL 60018 Ph: 847-299-9070 Fax: 847-299-1183 Internet: http://www.nrca.net Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 15 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
NATIONAL TERRAZZO & MOSAIC ASSOCIATION (NTMA) 201 North Maple Avenue, Suite 208 Purcellville, VA 20132 Ph: 540-751-0930 or 800-323-9736 Fax: 540-751-0935 E-mail: info@ntma.com Internet: http://www.ntma.com NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF) 789 North Dixboro Road P.O. Box 130140 Ann Arbor, MI 48113-0140 Ph: 734-769-8010 or 800-NSF-MARK Fax: 734-769-0109 E-mail: info@nsf.org Internet: http://www.nsf.org PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA) 800 Roosevelt Road, Building C, Suite 20 Glen Ellyn, IL 60137 Ph: 630-858-6540 Fax: 630-790-3095 Internet: http://www.ppfahome.org PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI) 800 Turnpike Street, Suite 300 North Andover, MA 01845 Ph: 978-557-0720 or 800-589-8956 Fax: 978-557-0721 E-Mail: info@pdionline.org Internet: http://www.pdionline.org PLUMBING-HEATING-COOLING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (PHCC) 180 South Washington Street P.O. Box 6808 Falls Church, VA 22046 Ph: 800-533-7694 or 703-237-8100 Fax: 703-237-7442 E-mail: naphcc@naphcc.org Internet: http://www.phccweb.org PORCELAIN ENAMEL INSTITUTE (PEI) PO Box 920220 3700 Mansell Rd., Suite 220 Alpharetta, GA 30022 Ph: 770-281-8980 Fax: 770-281-8981 E-mail: penamel@aol.com Internet: http://www.porcelainenamel.com PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE (PCI) 209 West Jackson Boulevard Chicago, IL 60606-6938 Ph: 312-786-0300 Fax: 312-786-0353 E-mail: info@pci.org Internet: http://www.pci.org
Ft. Detrick, MD
SCIENTIFIC EQUIPMENT AND FURNITURE ASSOCIATION (SEFA) 1205 Franklin Avenue, Suite 320 Garden City, N.Y. 11530 Ph: 516-294-5424 Fax: 516-294-27582 SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (SMACNA) 4201 Lafayette Center Drive Chantilly, VA 20151-1209 Ph: 703-803-2980 Fax: 703-803-3732 E-mail: info@smacna.org Internet: http://www.smacna.org SINGLE PLY ROOFING INDUSTRY (SPRI) 77 Rumford Avenue, Suite 3B Waltham, MA 02453 Ph: 781-647-7026 Fax: 781-647-7222 E-mail: info@spri.org Internet: http://www.spri.org SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE) 400 Commonwealth Drive Warrendale, PA 15096-0001 Ph: 724-776-4841 Fax: 724-776-0790 E-mail: customerservice@sae.org Internet: http://www.sae.org SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM ALLIANCE (SPFA) 4400 Fair Lakes Court, Suite 105 Fairfax, VA 22033 Ph: 800-523-6154 Fax: 703-222-5816 Internet: http://www.sprayfoam.org SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD) 21865 Copley Drive Diamond Bar, CA 91765-4182 Ph: 909-396-2000 E-mail: webinquiry@aqmd.gov Internet: http://www.aqmd.gov SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB) 4709 Scenic Highway Pensacola, FL 32504-9094 Ph: 850-434-2611 Fax: 850-433-5594 E-mail: spib@spib.org Internet: http://www.spib.org STEEL DECK INSTITUTE (SDI) P.O. Box 25 Fox River Grove, IL 60021 Ph: 847-458-4647 Fax: 847-458-4648 E-mail: Steve@sdi.org Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 17 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Internet:
http://www.sdi.org
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR) c/o Wherry Associates 30200 Detroit Road Cleveland, OH 44145-1967 Ph: 440-899-0010 Fax: 440-892-1404 E-mail: leh@wherryassoc.com Internet: http://www.steeldoor.org THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC) 40 24th Street, 6th Floor Pittsburgh, PA 15222-4656 Ph: 412-281-2331 Fax: 412-281-9992 E-mail: info@sspc.org Internet: http://www.sspc.org TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA) 2500 Wilson Blvd,. Suite 300 Arlington, VA 22201 Ph: 703-907-7700 Fax: 703-907-7727 Internet: http://www.tiaonline.org TILE COUNCIL OF AMERICA (TCA) 100 Clemson Research Boulevard Anderson, SC 29625 Ph: 864-646-8453 Fax: 864-646-2821 E-mail: literature@tileusa.com Internet: http://www.tileusa.com TURFGRASS PRODUCERS INTERNATIONAL (TPI) 2 East Main Street East Dundee, IL 60118 Ph: 847-649-5555 or 800-405-8873 Fax: 847-649-5678 E-mail: info@turfgrasssod.org Internet: http://www.turfgrasssod.org UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook, IL 60062-2096 Ph: 847-272-8800 Fax: 847-272-8129 E-mail: customerexperiencecenter@us.ul.com Internet: http://www.ul.com/ UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA) 2655 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 155 Dallas, TX 75234 Ph: 972-243-3902 Fax: 972-243-3907 E-mail: info@uni-bell.org Internet: http://www.uni-bell.org
Ft. Detrick, MD
U.S. AIR FORCE (USAF) Air Force Publishing Distribution Center Ph: 410-687-3330 Fax: 410-436-4629 E-mail: afpdc-service@pentagon.af.mil Internet: http://www.e-publishing.af.mil/ U.S. ARMY (DA) U.S. Army Publishing Directorate Internet: http://www.apd.army.mil U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE) Order CRD-C DOCUMENTS from: U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station ATTN: Technical Report Distribution Section, Services Branch, TIC 3909 Halls Ferry Road Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199 Ph: 601-634-2664 Fax: 601-634-2388 E-mail: mtc-info@erdc.usace.army.mil Internet: http://www.wes.army.mil/SL/MTC/handbook.htm Order Other Documents from: USACE Publications Depot Attn: CEHEC-IM-PD 2803 52nd Avenue Hyattsville, MD 20781-1102 Ph: 301-394-0081 Fax: 301-394-0084 E-mail: pubs-army@usace.army.mil Internet: http://www.usace.army.mil/publications or http://www.hnd.usace.army.mil/techinfo/engpubs.htm U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA) Order AMS Publications from: AGRICULTURAL MARKETING SERVICE (AMS) Seed Regulatory and Testing Branch 801 Summit Crossing Place, Suite C Gastonia, NC 28054-2193 Ph: 704-810-8870 Fax: 704-852-4189 Internet: http://www.ams.usda.gov/lsg/seed.htm E-mail: seed.ams@usda.gov Order Other Publications from: U.S. Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Service 14th and Independence Avenue, SW, Room 4028-S Washington, DC 20250 Ph: 202-720-2791 Fax: 202-720-2166 Internet: http://www.usda.gov/rus U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE (DOC) 1401 Constitution Avenue, NW Washington, DC 20230 Ph: 202-482-2000 Internet: http://www.commerce.gov/
Ft. Detrick, MD
Order Publications From: National Technical Information Service (NTIS) 5285 Port Royal Road Springfield, VA 22161 Ph: 703-605-6585 Fax: 703-605-6900 E-mail: info@ntis.gov Internet: http://www.ntis.gov U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD) Directorate for Public Inquiry and Analysis Office of the Secretary of Defense (Public Affairs) Room 3A750 -- The Pentagon 1400 Defense Pentagon Washington, DC 20301-1400 Ph: 703-428-0711 E-mail: pia@hq.afis.asd.mil Internet: http://www.dod.gov Order DOD Documents from: National Technical Information Service (NTIS) 5285 Port Royal Road Springfield, VA 22161 Ph: 703-605-6585 FAX: 703-605-6900 E-mail: info@ntis.gov Internet: http://www.ntis.gov Order Military Specifications, Standards and Related Publications from: Department of Defense Single Stock Point for (DODSSP) Defense Automation and Production Service (DAPS) Building 4D 700 Robbins Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098 Ph: 215-697-2179 Fax: 215-697-1462 Internet: http://www.dodssp.daps.mil www.daps.dla.mil - - - - - Detail Series Documents - - - - U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA) Ariel Rios Building 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20460 Ph: 202-272-0167 Internet: http://www.epa.gov --- Some EPA documents are available only from: National Technical Information Service (NTIS) 5285 Port Royal Road Springfield, VA 22161 Ph: 703-605-6585 Fax: 703-605-6900 E-mail: info@ntis.gov Internet: http://www.ntis.gov
Ft. Detrick, MD
U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) 445 12th Street SW Washington, DC 20554 Phone: 888-CALL-FCC Fax: 866-418-0232 Internet: http://www.fcc.gov E-mail: fccinfo@fcc.gov Order Publications From: Superintendent of Documents U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO) 732 North Capitol Street, NW Washington, DC 20401 Ph: 202-512-1800 Fax: 202-512-2104 E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov U. S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) 1015 18th Street, NW, Suite 508 Washington, D.C. 20036 Ph: 202-828-7422 Fax: 202-828-5110 E-mail: info@usbc.org Internet: http://www.usgbc.org AOK: 2/04 LOK: 2/04 U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA) General Services Administration 1800 F Street, NW Washington, DC 20405 Ph: 202-501-1021 Internet: www.GSA.gov Order from: General Services Administration Federal Supply Service Bureau 1941 Jefferson Davis Highway Arlington, VA 22202 Ph: 703-605-5400 Internet: http://apps.fss.gsa.gov/pub/fedspecs/index.cfm - - - - - Commercial Item Description Documents - - - - U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 8601 Adelphi Road College Park, MD 20740-6001 Ph: 866-272-6272 Fax: 301-837-0483 Internet: http://www.archives.gov Order documents from: Superintendent of Documents U.S.Government Printing Office (GPO) 732 North Capitol Street, NW Washington, DC 20401 Ph: 202-512-1800 Fax: 202-512-2104 E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 42 00 - Page 21 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Internet:
http://www.gpoaccess.gov
WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU (WCLIB) P.O. Box 23145 Tigard, OR 97281 Ph: 503-639-0651 Fax: 503-684-8928 E-mail: info@wclib.org Internet: http://www.wclib.org WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA) Yeon Building 522 SW 5th Avenue Suite 500 Portland, OR 97204-2122 Ph: 503-224-3930 Fax: 503-224-3934 E-mail: info@wwpa.org Internet: http://www.wwpa.org WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (WDMA) 1400 East Touhy Avenue, Suite 470 Des Plaines, IL 60018 Ph: 847-299-5200 or 800-223-2301 Fax: 847-299-1286 E-mail: admin@wdma.com Internet: http://www.wdma.com WOOD MOULDING AND MILLWORK PRODUCERS ASSOCIATION (WMMPA) 507 First Street Woodland, CA 95695 Ph: 530-661-9591 Fax: 530-661-9586 E-mail: info@wmmpa.com Internet: http://www.wmmpa.com -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 42 13 REFERENCE STANDARDS, ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE
Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents may be abbreviated, streamlined, and in the imperative mood. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate to the context of Contract Documents. Words that are implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural, and plural words interpreted as singular, where applicable as the context of Contract Documents indicates. At certain locations in the text, more specific language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities of various parties. 1.2 A. DEFINITIONS Contract Award: The date that the Contracting Officer (KO) signs the contract. Notice-to-Proceed (NTP): The contractual notification from the Contracting Officer (KO) giving the contractor the authority to proceed with contract execution, which occurs after contract award and after receipt and approval of contractors bonds and insurance by the Contraction Officer. This milestone begins the contractor's period of performance. Construction and includes complete, in deficiencies Performance Period: Begins upon Notice-to-Proceed (NTP) the contractor's period of performance until the work is full compliance with the contract, and where all have been corrected.
B.
C.
D.
Project Completion: When all work for the entire facility has been completed in full compliance with the contract and all deficiencies have been corrected, and accepted by the Government. Beneficial Occupancy: When a part or all of the facility has been completed to a point at which it can be used by the Government, and the Government takes possession. The Beneficial Occupancy Date (BOD) is the day the Government contractually takes possession and the milestone which warranties for those areas occupied begin. Functional Operational Systems Testing (FOST): The final commissioning activity for the full operation of a portion of or the entire facility, as defined in Section 01 91 04 for a duration of 30 days, where it's acceptance is a pre-requisite of Project Completion acceptance by the Government. Warranty of Construction Period: As governed by the FAR 52.246-21, the one year period as defined in Section 01 20 00, which begins upon either Project Completion or Beneficial Occupancy.
E.
F.
G.
Ft. Detrick, MD
H. "Containment Areas": Refers to biosafety levels 3 and 4 as shown on A0.2 series drawings indicating areas of high containment BSL-4, ABSL-4 and containment BSL-3E, ABSL-3E. 1.3 A. INDUSTRY STANDARDS For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, follow requirements of the specified standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by code. Date of standard is that in effect as of Bid date, or date of Construction Contract Agreement when there are no bids, except when a specific date is specified. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. Maintain copy at Project Site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. If specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Contracting Officer before proceeding. Contractual relationship of parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES General: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations as specified in Section 01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS and in the following lists. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (202) 272-5434 Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr Handbook for Concrete and Cement Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Station www.wes.army.mil Department of Defense Specifications and Standards Available from Defense Automated Printing Service www.astimage.daps.dla.mil/online Federal Standard (See FS) Federal Specification Section 01 42 13 - Page 2 For Official Use Only (215) 697-6257 (888) 293-6498 (202) 512-1530
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4 A.
B. ADAAG
CFR
CRD
(601) 634-2355
DOD
(215) 697-6257
FED-STD
FS
Ft. Detrick, MD
Available from Defense Automated Printing Service www.astimage.daps.dla.mil/online Available from General Services Administration www.fss.gsa.gov/pub/fed-specs.cfm Available from National Institute of Building Sciences www.nibs.org FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) Military Specification and Standards Available from Defense Automated Printing Service www.astimage.daps.dla.mil/online Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board Industry Organizations (215) 697-6257 (202) 619-8925
(202) 289-7800
MILSPEC
UFAS
(800) 872-2253 (202) 272-5434
C.
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction www.aitc-glulam.org Associated Landscape Contractors of America www.alca.org American Lumber Standard Committee Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. www.amca.org American Nursey and Landscape Association (Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurseymen) www.anla.org American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org Association of Official Seed Analysts www.aosaseed.com Architectural Precast Association www.archprecast.org American Petrolum Institute www.api.org Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute www.ari.org Architectural Spray Coaters Association www.ascassoc.com American Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org Section 01 42 13 - Page 3
(303) 792-9559
ALCA
(800) 395-2522 (703) 736-9666 (301) 972-1700 (847) 394-0150
ALSC AMCA
ANLA
(202) 789-2900
ANSI
(202) 293-8020
AOSA
(505) 522-1437
APA
(941) 454-6989
API
(202) 682-8000
ARI
(703) 524-8800
ASCA
(609) 848-6120
ASCE
(800) 548-2723 (703) 295-6300
Ft. Detrick, MD
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org American Society of Sanitary Engineering www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM International American Society for Testing and Materials International www.astm.org AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCMA) Architectural Woodwork Institute www.awinet.org American Wood-Preservers' Association www.awpa.com American Welding Society www.aws.org Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association www.buildershardware.com Brick Industry Association (The) www.bia.org BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com Carpet Cushion Council www.carpetcushion.org Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures www.umr.edu/~ccfss Copper Development Association Inc. www.copper.org Canadian Electricity Association www.canelect.ca Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. Section 01 42 13 - Page 4
(800) 527-4723
ASME
(800) 843-2763 (212) 591-7722
ASSE
(440) 835-3040
ASTM
(610) 832-9585
AWCI
(703) 534-8300
AWCMA
AWI
(800) 449-8811 (703) 733-0600 (817) 326-6300
AWPA
AWS
(800) 443-9353 (305) 443-9353 (212) 297-2122
BHMA
BIA
(703) 620-0010
BIFMA
(616) 285-3963
CCC
(203) 637-1312
CCFSS
(573) 341-4471
CDA
(800) 232-3282 (212) 251-7200 (613) 230-9263
CEA
CFFA
(216) 241-7333
Ft. Detrick, MD
www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association www.cganet.com Canadian General Standards Board www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association www.cellulose.org Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute www.cispi.org Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute www.chainlinkinfo.org Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association www.cppa-info.org Carpet & Rug Institute (The) www.carpet-rug.com Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute www.crsi.org CSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) www.csa-international.org Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau www.cedarbureau.org Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org Electronic Industries Alliance www.eia.org EIFS Industry Members Association www.eifsfacts.com Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.ejma.org Fluid Controls Institute www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org Flat Glass Marketing Association (See GANA) Factory Mutual System Section 01 42 13 - Page 5 For Official Use Only (703) 788-2700
CGSB
(819) 956-0425
CIMA
(888) 881-2462 (937) 222-2462 (630) 584-1919
CISCA
CISPI
(423) 892-0137
CLFMI
(301) 596-2583
CPPA
(800) 510-2772 (202) 462-9607 (800) 882-8846 (706) 278-3176 (847) 517-1200
CRI
CRSI
CSA
(800) 463-6727 (416) 747-4000
CSSB
(604) 820-7700
CTI
(281) 583-4087
DHI
(703) 222-2010
EIA
(703) 907-7500
EIMA
(800) 294-3462 (770) 968-7945 (914) 332-0040
EJMA
FCI
(216) 241-7333
FGMA
FM
Ft. Detrick, MD
(See FMG) FMG FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com Forest Stewardship Council www.fscoax.org Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org Glass Association of North America (Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association) www.glasswebsite.com/gana Geosynthetic Research Institute www.drexel.edu/gri Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North America (See GANA) Hydraulic Institute www.pumps.org Hydronics Institute www.gamanet.org Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association www.hpva.org H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. www.hpwhite.com International Approval Services (See CSA) Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. www.icea.net International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. www.icri.org International Electrotechnical Commission www.iec.ch Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) www.ieee.org Illuminating Engineering Society of North America www.iesna.org Insulating Glass Certification Council www.igcc.org Section 01 42 13 - Page 6 For Official Use Only (770) 830-0369 (703) 435-2900 (888) 786-7744 (973) 267-9700 (908) 464-8200 (401) 275-3000
FSC
52 951 5146905
GA
(202) 289-5440
GANA
(785) 271-0208
GRI
(215) 895-2343
GTA
HI
HI
HMMA
HPVA
HPW
(410) 838-6550
IAS
ICEA
ICRI
(847) 827-0830
IEC
41 22 919 02 11
IEEE
(212) 419-7900
IESNA
(212) 248-5000
IGCC
(315) 646-2234
Ft. Detrick, MD
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) www.igmaonline.org Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. www.iliai.com International Solid Surface Fabricators Association International Imaging Industry Association (Formerly: PIMA - Photographic & Imaging Manufacturers Association) www.pima.net Intertek Testing Services (Formerly Warnock Hersey) www.itsglobal.com Insect Screening Weavers Association (Now defunct) Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association www.kcma.org Laminating Materials Association (Formerly: ALA - American Laminators Association) www.lma.org Lightning Protection Institute www.lightning.org Laminated Safety Glass Association (See GANA) Metal Building Manufacturers Association www.mbma.com Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association www.maplefloor.org Metal Framing Manufacturers Association www.metalframingmfg.org Material Handling Industry of America www.mhia.org Marble Institute of America www.marble-institute.com Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (See SSMA) Master Painters Institute www.paintinfo.com Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com
(613) 233-1510
ILI
(812) 275-4426
ISSFA I3A
(702) 567-8150 (914) 698-7603
ITS
(800) 345-3851 (607) 753-6711
IWS
KCMA
(703) 264-1690
LMA
(201) 664-2700
LPI
(800) 488-6864 (847) 577-7200
LSGA
MBMA
(216) 241-7333
MFMA
(847) 480-9138
MFMA
(312) 644-6610
MHIA
(800) 345-1815 (704) 676-1190 (614) 228-6194
MIA
ML/SFA
MPI
(888) 674-8937
MSS
(703) 281-6613
Ft. Detrick, MD
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers (See GANA) NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) www.naima.org National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc. National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. www.nbgqa.com National Concrete Masonry Association www.ncma.org National Clay Pipe Institute www.ncpi.org National Cable & Telecommunications Association www.ncta.com National Environmental Balancing Bureau www.nebb.org National Electrical Contractors Association www.necanet.org Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association www.nelma.org National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org InterNational Electrical Testing Association www.netaworld.org National Fire Protection Association www.nfpa.org National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org National Glass Association www.glass.org National Hardwood Lumber Association www.natlhardwood.org National Lumber Grades Authority Section 01 42 13 - Page 8
(312) 332-0405
NAAMM
NACE
(281) 228-6200
NAIMA
(703) 684-0084
NAMI
(304) 258-5100
NBGQA
(800) 557-2848
NCMA
(703) 713-1900
NCPI
(414) 248-9094
NCTA
(202) 775-3550
NEBB
(301) 977-3698
NECA
(301) 657-3110
NeLMA
(207) 829-6901
NEMA
(703) 841-3200
NETA
(303) 697-8441
NFPA
(800) 344-3555 (617) 770-3000 (301) 589-6372
NFRC
NGA
(703) 442-4890
NHLA
(800) 933-0318 (901) 377-1818 (604) 524-2393
NLGA
Ft. Detrick, MD
www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association www.nofma.org National Roofing Contractors Association www.nrca.net National Ready Mixed Concrete Association www.nrmca.org National Stone Association (See NSSGA) NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) www.nsf.org National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (Formerly: NSA - National Stone Association) www.nssga.org National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. www.ntma.com National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA) Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute www.pci.org Painting and Decorating Contractors of America www.pdca.com Plumbing & Drainage Institute www.pdionline.org PVC Geomembrane Institute //pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com Contact by mail only Redwood Inspection Service www.calredwood.org SAE International www.sae.org Steel Deck Institute www.sdi.org Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org (888) 225-7339 (415) 382-0662 (724) 776-4841 (312) 786-0300 (800) 673-6275 (734) 769-8010 (901) 526-5016
NRCA
(800) 323-9545 (847) 299-9070 (888) 846-7622 (301) 587-1400
NRMCA
NSA
NSF
NSSGA
(800) 342-1415 (703) 525-8788
NTMA
(800) 323-9736 (703) 779-1022
NWWDA
PCI
PDCA
(800) 332-7322 (703) 359-0826 (800) 589-8956 (508) 230-3516 (217) 333-3929
PDI
PGI
RCSC
(800) 644-2400 (312) 670-2400
RFCI
RIS
SAE
SDI
(847) 462-1930
SDI
(440) 899-0010
Ft. Detrick, MD
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association www.sefalabfurn.com Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (See IGMA) Steel Joist Institute www.steeljoist.org Screen Manufacturers Association www.screenmfgassociation.org Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org
(516) 294-5424
SGCC
(315) 646-2234
SIGMA
SJI
(843) 626-1995
SMA
(561) 533-0991
SMACNA
(703) 803-2980
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) www.spib.org (850) 434-2611
SPIB
SPI/SPFD Society of the Plastics Industry (The) Spray Polyurethane Foam Division (See SPFA) SPRI SPRI (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org Specialty Steel Industry of North America www.ssina.com Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (Formerly: ML/SFA - Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association) www.ssma.com SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings www.sspc.org Steel Tank Institute www.steeltank.com Steel Window Institute www.steelwindows.com Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute www.swrionline.org Tile Council of North America, Inc. www.tileusa.com Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Section 01 42 13 - Page 10 For Official Use Only (781) 444-0242
SSINA
(800) 982-0355 (202) 342-8630 (312) 456-5590
SSMA
SSPC
(877) 281-7772 (412) 281-2331 (847) 438-8265
STI
SWI
(216) 241-7333
SWRI
(816) 472-7974
TCA
(864) 646-8453
TIA/EIA
(703) 907-7700
Ft. Detrick, MD
Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TPI TPI Truss Plate Institute Turfgrass Producers International www.turfgrasssod.org Underwriters Laboratories Inc. www.ul.com Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association www.uni-bell.org U.S. Green Building Council www.usgbc.org United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. www.culturenet.ca/usitt Waste Equipment Technology Association www.wastec.org West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau www.wclib.org Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCSC) Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) www.wdma.com Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) www.wicnet.org Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association www.wmmpa.com Western Wood Products Association www.wwpa.org Code Agencies BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) Council of American Building Officials (See ICC) International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (The) Section 01 42 13 - Page 11 For Official Use Only (909) 595-8449 (800) 506-4636 (212) 661-4261 (608) 833-5900 (800) 405-8873 (847) 705-9898 (800) 704-4050 (847) 272-8800 (972) 243-3902
UL
UNI
USGBC
(202) 828-7422
USITT
(800) 938-7488 (315) 463-6463 (800) 424-2869 (202) 244-4700 (800) 283-1486 (503) 639-0651
WASTEC
WCLIB
WCMA
WCSC
WDMA
(800) 223-2301 (847) 299-5200
WI
(916) 372-9943
WMMPA
(800) 550-7889 (530) 661-9591 (503) 224-3930
WWPA
D. BOCA
CABO
IAPMO
Ft. Detrick, MD
www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) International Code Council BOCA, ICBO and SBCCI formally consolidated into a single, 50,000-member organization: the International Code Council (ICC) www.intlcode.org Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) Federal Government Agencies Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil Consumer Product Safety Commission www.cpsc.gov Department of Commerce www.doc.gov Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov Federal Aviation Administration www.faa.gov Federal Communications Commission www.fcc.gov Food and Drug Administration www.fda.gov General Services Administration www.gsa.gov Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory (See LBNL) Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory www.lbl.gov National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov Rural Utilities Service Section 01 42 13 - Page 12 For Official Use Only (301) 975-6478 (510) 486-5605 (800) 638-2772 (301) 504-0990 (202) 482-2000 (703) 931-4533 (866) 422-5646
ICC
SBCCI
E. CE
CPSC
DOC
EPA
(202) 260-2090
FAA
(202) 366-4000
FCC
(202) 418-0190
FDA
(888) 463-6332
GSA
(202) 708-5082
HUD
(202) 708-1112
LBL
LBNL
NCHRP
NIST
OSHA
(202) 693-1999
RUS
(202) 720-9540
Ft. Detrick, MD
(See USDA) TRB Transportation Research Board www.nas.edu/trb Department of Agriculture www.usda.gov Postal Service www.usps.com PRODUCTS (202) 334-2934
USDA
(202) 720-2791
USPS
(202) 268-2000
PART 2
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 45 02.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS)
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL Contract Administration
The Government will use the Resident Management System for Windows (RMS) to assist in its monitoring and administration of this contract. The Contractor shall use the Government-furnished Construction Contractor Module of RMS, referred to as QCS, to record, maintain, and submit various information throughout the contract period. The Contractor module, user manuals, updates, and training information can be downloaded from the RMS web site. This joint Government-Contractor use of RMS and QCS will facilitate electronic exchange of information and overall management of the contract. QCS provides the means for the Contractor to input, track, and electronically share information with the Government in the following areas: Administration Finances Quality Control Submittal Monitoring? Scheduling Import/Export of Data 1.1.1 Correspondence and Electronic Communications
For ease and speed of communications, both Government and Contractor will, to the maximum extent feasible, exchange correspondence and other documents in electronic format. Correspondence, pay requests and other documents comprising the official contract record shall also be provided in paper format, with signatures and dates where necessary. Paper documents will govern, in the event of discrepancy with the electronic version. 1.1.2 Other Factors
Particular attention is directed to Contract Clause, "Schedules for Construction Contracts", Contract Clause, "Payments", Section 01 32 01.00 10, PROJECT SCHEDULE, Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and Section 01 45 10, CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL, which have a direct relationship to the reporting to be accomplished through QCS. Also, there is no separate payment for establishing and maintaining the QCS database; all costs associated therewith shall be included in the contract pricing for the work. 1.2 QCS SOFTWARE
QCS is a Windows-based program that can be run on a stand-alone personal computer or on a network. The Government will make available the QCS software to the Contractor after award of the construction contract. Prior to the Pre-Construction Conference, the Contractor shall be responsible to download, install and use the latest version of the QCS software from the Government's RMS Internet Website. Upon specific justification and request by the Contractor, the Government can provide QCS on CD-ROM. Any program updates of QCS will be made available to the Contractor via the Government RMS Website as they become available. Issued for Construction Section 01 45 02.00 10 - Page 1 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.3
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The following is the minimum system configuration that the Contractor shall have to run QCS: QCS and QAS System Hardware IBM-compatible PC with 1000 MHz Pentium or higher processor 256+ MB RAM for workstation / 512+ MB RAM for server 1 GB hard drive disk space for sole use by the QCS system 3 1/2 inch high-density floppy drive Compact Disk (CD) Reader 8x speed or higher SVGA or higher resolution monitor (1024x768, 256 colors) Mouse or other pointing device Windows compatible printer. (Laser printer must have 4 MB+ of RAM) Connection to the Internet, minimum 56k BPS Software MS Windows 2000 or higher QAS-Word Processing software: MS Word 2000 or newer Latest version of: Netscape Navigator, Microsoft Internet Explorer, or other browser that supports HTML 4.0 or higher Electronic mail (E-mail) MAPI compatible Virus protection software that is regularly upgraded with all issued manufacturer's updates 1.4 1.4.1 RELATED INFORMATION QCS User Guide
After contract award, the Contractor shall download instructions for the installation and use of QCS from the Government RMS Internet Website. In case of justifiable difficulties, the Government will provide the Contractor with a CD-ROM containing these instructions. 1.4.2 Contractor Quality Control(CQC) Training
The use of QCS will be discussed with the Contractor's QC System Manager during the mandatory CQC Training class. 1.5 CONTRACT DATABASE
Prior to the pre-construction conference, the Government will provide the Issued for Construction Section 01 45 02.00 10 - Page 2 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
Contractor with basic contract award data to use for QCS. The Government will provide data updates to the Contractor as needed, generally by using the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS import/export function. These updates will generally consist of submittal reviews, correspondence status, QA comments, and other administrative and QA data. 1.6 DATABASE MAINTENANCE
The Contractor shall establish, maintain, and update data for the contract in the QCS database throughout the duration of the contract. The Contractor shall establish and maintain the QCS database at the Contractor's site office. Submit data updates to the Government (e.g., daily reports, submittals, RFI's, schedule updates, payment requests, etc.) using the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS export function. If permitted by the Contracting Officer, e-mail or CD-ROM may be used instead of E-mail (see Paragraph DATA SUBMISSION VIA CD-ROM). The QCS database typically shall include current data on the following items: 1.6.1 1.6.1.1 Administration Contractor Information
The database shall contain the Contractor's name, address, telephone numbers, management staff, and other required items. Within 14 calendar days of receipt of QCS software from the Government, deliver Contractor administrative data in electronic format. 1.6.1.2 Subcontractor Information
The database shall contain the name, trade, address, phone numbers, and other required information for all subcontractors. A subcontractor must be listed separately for each trade to be performed. Assign each subcontractor/trade a unique Responsibility Code, provided in QCS. Within 14 calendar days of receipt of QCS software from the Government, deliver subcontractor administrative data in electronic format. 1.6.1.3 Correspondence
Identify all Contractor correspondence to the Government with a serial number. Prefix correspondence initiated by the Contractor's site office with "S". Prefix letters initiated by the Contractor's home (main) office with "H". Letters shall be numbered starting from 0001. (e.g., H-0001 or S-0001). The Government's letters to the Contractor will be prefixed with "C". 1.6.1.4 Equipment
The Contractor's QCS database shall contain a current list of equipment planned for use or being used on the jobsite, including the most recent and planned equipment inspection dates. 1.6.1.5 Management Reporting
QCS includes a number of reports that Contractor management can use to track the status of the project. The value of these reports is reflective of the quality of the data input, and is maintained in the various sections of QCS. Among these reports are: Progress Payment Request worksheet, QA/QC comments, Submittal Register Status, Three-Phase Inspection checklists. Issued for Construction Section 01 45 02.00 10 - Page 3 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.6.1.6
Request For Information (RFI)
Exchange all Requests For Information (RFI) using the Built-in RFI generator and tracker in QCS. 1.6.2 1.6.2.1 Finances Pay Activity Data
The QCS database shall include a list of pay activities that the Contractor shall develop in conjunction with the construction schedule. The sum of all pay activities shall be equal to the total contract amount, including modifications. Group pay activities Contract Line Item Number (CLIN); the sum of the activities shall equal the amount of each CLIN. The total of all CLINs equals the Contract Amount. 1.6.2.2 Payment Requests
Prepare all progress payment requests using QCS. Complete the payment request worksheet, prompt payment certification, and payment invoice in QCS. Update the work completed under the contract, measured as percent or as specific quantities, at least monthly. After the update, generate a payment request report using QCS. Submit the payment request, prompt payment certification, and payment invoice with supporting data using the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS export function. If permitted by the Contracting Officer, e-mail or a CD-ROM may be used. A signed paper copy of the approved payment request is also required, which will govern in the event of discrepancy with the electronic version. 1.6.3 Quality Control (QC)
QCS provides a means to track implementation of the 3-phase QC Control System, prepare daily reports, identify and track deficiencies, document progress of work, and support other Contractor QC requirements. Maintain this data on a daily basis. Entered data will automatically output to the QCS generated daily report. Provide the Government a Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan within the time required in Section 01 45 10, CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. Within seven calendar days of Government acceptance, submit a QCS update reflecting the information contained in the accepted CQC Plan: schedule, pay activities, features of work, submittal register, QC requirements, and equipment list. 1.6.3.1 Daily Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Reports.
QCS includes the means to produce the Daily CQC Report. The Contractor may use other formats to record basic QC data. However, the Daily CQC Report generated by QCS shall be the Contractor's official report. Summarize data from any supplemental reports by the Contractor and consolidate onto the QCS-generated Daily CQC Report. Submit daily CQC Reports as required by Section 01 45 10, CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. Electronically submit reports to the Government within 24 hours after the date covered by the report. Also provide the Government a signed, printed copy of the daily CQC report. 1.6.3.2 Deficiency Tracking.
The Contractor shall use QCS to track deficiencies. Deficiencies identified by the Contractor will be numerically tracked using QC punch Issued for Construction Section 01 45 02.00 10 - Page 4 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
list items. The Contractor shall maintain a current log of its QC punch list items in the QCS database. The Government will log the deficiencies it has identified using its QA punch list items. The Government's QA punch list items will be included in its export file to the Contractor. The Contractor shall regularly update the correction status of both QC and QA punch list items. 1.6.3.3 QC Requirements
Develop and maintain a complete list of QC testing and required structural and life safety special inspections required by the International Code Council (ICC), transferred and installed property, and user training requirements in QCS. Update all data on these QC requirements as work progresses, and promptly provide this information to the Government via QCS. 1.6.3.4 Three-Phase Control Meetings
The Contractor shall maintain scheduled and actual dates and times of preparatory and initial control meetings in QCS. 1.6.3.5 Labor and Equipment Hours This data will be
Log labor and equipment exposure hours on a daily basis. rolled up into a monthly exposure report. 1.6.3.6 Accident/Safety Reporting
The Government will issue safety comments, directions, or guidance whenever safety deficiencies are observed. The Government's safety comments will be included in its export file to the Contractor. Regularly update the correction status of the safety comments. In addition, utilize QCS to advise the Government of any accidents occurring on the jobsite. This brief supplemental entry is not to be considered as a substitute for completion of mandatory reports, e.g., ENG Form 3394 and OSHA Form 300. 1.6.3.7 Features of Work
The Contractor shall include a complete list of the features of work in the QCS database. A feature of work may be associated with multiple pay activities. However, each pay activity (see subparagraph "Pay Activity Data" of paragraph "Finances") will only be linked to a single feature of work. 1.6.3.8 Hazard Analysis
Use QCS to develop a hazard analysis for each feature of work included in the CQC Plan. The hazard analysis shall address any hazards, or potential hazards, that may be associated with the work 1.6.4 Submittal Management
The Government will provide the initial submittal register in electronic format. Thereafter, the Contractor shall maintain a complete list of all submittals, including completion of all data columns. Dates on which submittals are received and returned by the Government will be included in its export file to the Contractor. The Contractor shall use QCS to track and transmit all submittals. ENG Form 4025, submittal transmittal form, and the submittal register update shall be produced using QCS. QCS and RMS will be used to update, store and exchange submittal registers and Issued for Construction Section 01 45 02.00 10 - Page 5 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
transmittals, but will not be used for storage of actual submittals. 1.6.5 Schedule
Develop a construction schedule consisting of pay activities, in accordance with Section 01 32 01.00 10, PROJECT SCHEDULE. This schedule shall be input and maintained in the QCS database either manually or by using the Standard Data Exchange Format (SDEF) (see Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE). The updated schedule data shall be included with each pay request submitted by the Contractor. 1.6.6 Import/Export of Data
QCS includes the ability to export Contractor data to the Government and to import submittal register and other Government-provided data from RMS, and schedule data using SDEF. 1.7 IMPLEMENTATION
Contractor use of QCS as described in the preceding paragraphs is mandatory. Ensure that sufficient resources are available to maintain its QCS database, and to provide the Government with regular database updates. QCS shall be an integral part of the Contractor's management of quality control. 1.8 DATA SUBMISSION VIA CD-ROM
The Government-preferred method for Contractor's submission of QCS data is by using the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS export function. Other data should be submitted using the web based system. For locations where this is not feasible, the Contracting Officer may permit use of CD-ROM for data transfer. Export data onto CDs using the QCS built-in export function. If used, submit CD-ROMs in accordance with the following: 1.8.1 File Medium
Submit required data on CD-ROM. They shall conform to industry standards used in the United States. All data shall be provided in English. 1.8.2 CD-ROM Labels
Affix a permanent exterior label to each CD-ROM submitted. The label shall indicate in English, the QCS file name, full contract number, contract name, project location, data date, name and telephone number of person responsible for the data. 1.8.3 File Names
The files will be automatically named by the QCS software. The naming convention established by the QCS software shall not be altered in any way by the Contractor. 1.9 MONTHLY COORDINATION MEETING
Update the QCS database and generate an export each workday. As required in Contract Clause "Payments", at least one week prior to submittal, meet with the Government representative to review the planned progress payment data submission for errors and omissions.
Ft. Detrick, MD
Make all required corrections prior to Government acceptance of the export file and progress payment request. Payment requests accompanied by incomplete or incorrect data submittals will be returned. The Government will not process progress payments until an acceptable QCS export file is received. 1.10 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected noncompliance with the requirements of this specification. Take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, will be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM D 3740 (2004) Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction (2007a) Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction
ASTM E 329
1.2
MOCK-UPS a. Schedule mock-up of items for review and comment by Contracting Officer sufficiently in advance of scheduled fabrication and /or installation to allow for corrections and/or modifications with no effect on construction schedule. Tests, if specified, will be performed under provisions of the respective Product Specification Sections. Except where approved mock-ups are permitted to remain as part of the work (in place), erect mock-ups in a remote area that will not interfere with construction until start of site work. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. Fabricated items which include the work of other sections, such as, but not limited to, mechanical plumbing and electrical fixtures, fittings and accessories shall have those items properly placed without service connections. Approved mock-ups shall represent quality level required for remaining work. Protect approved mock-ups from damage. Remove mock-ups not specified to remain part of the work. remove mock-ups until directed to do so. Do not
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Submit each request for Mock-Up Observation on the "Request for Mock-Up Observation" Form. See sample copy at end of this Section. After mock-up observation, record observations on the "Mock-Up Observation" form. See sample at end of this Section. Section 01 45 10 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
h.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.3
CQC - COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES a. Provide qualified labor, consultants, equipment and materials necessary to perform and support the specified Commissioning requirements. Develop and integrate Contractor and Sub-Contractor work relating to Commissioning activities into the schedule. Coordinate schedule with the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Provide services of equipment manufacturers' representatives to participate in processes specified in the applicable equipment specification sections. Complete basic pre-commissioning construction punch-list items prior to start of Component Verification phase of commissioning. Review the commissioning test requirements as specified, and provide any additional test ports or gauges required but not shown on drawings, to accomplish performance tests. Provide to the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC), documentation of field calibration of all controls in accordance with the Government's calibration policies. Documentation shall include dates, set points, calibration coefficients, control loop verification and any other data required to verify system checkout. Documentation shall be dated and initialed by the field engineer or technician performing the work. In conjunction with the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC), the Contractor Quality Control (CQC)is to complete, witness and sign-off on all Component Verification Forms (CVF), System Test Forms (ST), Integrated System Test Forms (IST), and Functional Operational System Test Forms (FOST) as successfully being completed. Ensure that the Contractor and Sub-Contractors have made all necessary changes, corrections and/or adjustments as required to complete each commissioning phase, inclusive of non-conforming items noted on the Cx check list Forms. Review the final Commissioning test protocols and procedures established by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection, and prior to their execution.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
1.4
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS a. When field services are specified, have material or product suppliers, or manufacturers, provide technically competent staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment and supervise installation where specified, as applicable and to initiate instructions when necessary. Report observations, and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers which are supplemental or contrary to Section 01 45 10 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor is responsible for quality control and shall establish and maintain an effective quality control system in compliance with the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of Construction." The quality control system shall consist of plans, procedures, and organization necessary to produce an end product which complies with the contract requirements. The system shall cover all construction and construction operations, both onsite and offsite, and shall be keyed to the proposed construction and construction sequence. The site project superintendent will be held responsible for the quality of work on the job and is subject to removal by the Contracting Officer for non-compliance with the quality requirements specified in the contract. The site project superintendent in this context shall be the highest level manager responsible for the overall construction activities at the site, including quality and production. The site project superintendent shall maintain a physical presence at the site at all times, except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer, and shall be responsible for all construction and construction related activities at the site. 3.2 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall furnish for review by the Government, not later than 30 days after receipt of notice to proceed, the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan proposed to implement the requirements of the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of Construction." The plan shall identify personnel, procedures, control, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used. The Government will consider an interim plan for the first 60 days of operation. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature of work to be started. Work outside of the features of work included in an accepted interim plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of a CQC Plan or another interim plan containing the additional features of work to be started. 3.2.1 Content of the CQC Plan
The CQC Plan shall include, as a minimum, the following to cover construction operations, both onsite and offsite, including work by subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers, and purchasing agents: a. A description of the quality control organization, including a chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC staff shall implement the three phase control system for all aspects of the work specified. The staff shall include a CQC System Manager. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a CQC function.
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
c.
A copy of the letter to the CQC System Manager signed by an authorized official of the firm which describes the responsibilities and delegates sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions of the CQC System Manager, including authority to stop work which is not in compliance with the contract. The CQC System Manager shall issue letters of direction to all other various quality control representatives outlining duties, authorities, and responsibilities. Copies of these letters shall also be furnished to the Government. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite fabricators, suppliers, and purchasing agents. These procedures shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test to include the test name, specification paragraph requiring test, feature of work to be tested, test frequency, and person responsible for each test. (Laboratory facilities approved by the Contracting Officer shall be used.) Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up control phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests including documentation. Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective action. These procedures shall establish verification that identified deficiencies have been corrected. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats. A list of the definable features of work. A definable feature of work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, and may be identified by different trades or disciplines, or it may be work by the same trade in a different environment. Although each section of the specifications may generally be considered as a definable feature of work, there are frequently more than one definable features under a particular section. This list will be agreed upon during the coordination meeting.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h. i.
3.2.2
Acceptance of Plan
Acceptance of the Contractor's plan is required prior to the start of construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during the construction. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to make changes in his CQC Plan and operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the quality specified. 3.2.3 Notification of Changes
After acceptance of the CQC Plan, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer in writing of any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.3
COORDINATION MEETING
After the Preconstruction Conference, before start of construction, and prior to acceptance by the Government of the CQC Plan, the Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer or Authorized Representative and discuss the Contractor's quality control system. The CQC Plan shall be submitted 15 calendar days prior to the Coordination Meeting. During the meeting, a mutual understanding of the system details shall be developed, including the forms for recording the CQC operations, design activities, control activities, testing, administration of the system for both onsite and offsite work, and the interrelationship of Contractor's Management and control with the Government's Quality Assurance. Minutes of the meeting shall be prepared by the Government and signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer. The minutes shall become a part of the contract file. There may be occasions when subsequent conferences will be called by either party to reconfirm mutual understandings and/or address deficiencies in the CQC system or procedures which may require corrective action by the Contractor. 3.4 3.4.1 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION Personnel Requirements
The requirements for the CQC organization are a CQC System Manager and sufficient number of additional qualified personnel to ensure safety and contract compliance. The Safety and Health Manager shall receive direction and authority from the CQC System Manager and shall serve as a member of the CQC staff. Personnel identified in the technical provisions as requiring specialized skills to assure the required work is being performed properly will also be included as part of the CQC organization. The Contractor's CQC staff shall maintain a presence at the site at all times during progress of the work and have complete authority and responsibility to take any action necessary to ensure contract compliance. The CQC staff shall be subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall provide adequate office space, filing systems and other resources as necessary to maintain an effective and fully functional CQC organization. Complete records of all letters, material submittals, shop drawing submittals, schedules and all other project documentation shall be promptly furnished to the CQC organization by the Contractor. The CQC organization shall be responsible to maintain these documents and records at the site at all times, except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer. 3.4.2 CQC System Manager
The Contractor shall identify as CQC System Manager an individual within the onsite work organization who shall be responsible for overall management of CQC and have the authority to act in all CQC matters for the Contractor. The CQC System Manager shall be a graduate engineer, graduate architect, or a graduate of construction management, with a minimum of 5 years construction experience on construction similar to this contract. This CQC System Manager shall be on the site at all times during construction and shall be employed by the prime Contractor. The CQC System Manager shall be assigned no other duties. An alternate for the CQC System Manager shall be identified in the plan to serve in the event of the System Manager's absence. The requirements for the alternate shall be the same as for the designated CQC System Manager.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.4.3
CQC Personnel
In addition to CQC personnel specified elsewhere in the contract, the Contractor shall provide as part of the CQC organization specialized personnel to assist the CQC System Manager for the following areas: electrical, mechanical, civil, structural, environmental, blast technician, architectural, materials technician, LEED implementation, containment coordinator, Geotechnical Engineer and submittals clerk. These individuals shall be directly employed by the prime Contractor and may not be employed by a supplier or sub-Contractor on this project; be responsible to the CQC System Manager; be physically present at the construction site during work on their areas of responsibility; have the necessary education and/or experience in accordance with the experience matrix listed herein. These individuals shall have no other duties other than quality control. A single person may cover more than one area provided that they are qualified to perform QC activities in each designated and that workload allows. Experience Matrix Area Minimum Qualifications
a.
Civil
Graduate Civil Engineer or Construction Manager with 5 years experience in the type of work being performed on this project Person with 5 years experience and holding a current explosive blasting license issued by the State of Maryland Graduate Mechanical Engineer or Construction Manager with 5 yrs experience, including prior operating and/or design of BSL-3E and BSL-4 facilities experience. Graduate Electrical Engineer or Construction Manager with 5 yrs related experience including prior operating and/or design of BSL-3E and BSL-4 facilities experience. Graduate Structural Engineer or Construction Manager with 5 yrs experience Registered Architect with 5 yrs experience, including prior operating and/or design of BSL-3E and BSL-4 facilities experience Graduate Environmental Engineer with 5 yrs experience Section 01 45 10 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
b.
Blasting Technician
c.
Mechanical
d.
Electrical
e.
Structural
f.
Architectural
g.
Environmental
Ft. Detrick, MD
Experience Matrix Area Minimum Qualifications
h.
Submittals
Submittal Clerk with 5 yr experience Materials Technician with 5 yrs experience for the appropriate area Specialist must be a member of AABC or an experienced technician of the firm certified by the NEBB. LEED Accredited Professional with 2 yrs related experience Containment Coordinator as specified in Section 01 31 15 CONTAINMENT CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION. Professional Engineer with 5 yrs related experience including Osterberg Cell Load Test Experience per Section 31 63 26 DRILLED PIERS (CAISSONS) CQC Manager shall coordinate and include representatives from the following groups in the CQC Process.
i.
Concrete, Pavements and Soils
j.
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) Personnel
k.
LEED
l.
Containment
m.
Geotechnical Engineer
n.
Representative Members:
1.
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) Personnel. Refer to Section 23 05 93.00 10 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS for personnel qualifications and requirements. Commissioning Coordinator(CxC) Personnel. Refer to Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING for personnel qualifications and requirements. Trade sub-contractors (person of responsibility) as needed.
2.
3. 3.4.4
Additional Requirement
In addition to the above experience and/or education requirements the CQC System Manager and staff shall have successfully completed the course entitled "Construction Quality Management For Contractors". Course will be offered by the Government over a 1 day period at a cost of $195 per person. Course is currently held 15 times per year, alternating between locations at Towson University and Dulles Airport.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.4.5
Organizational Changes
The Contractor shall maintain the CQC staff at full strength at all times. When it is necessary to make changes to the CQC staff, the Contractor shall revise the CQC Plan to reflect the changes and submit the changes to the Contracting Officer for acceptance. 3.5 SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES
Submittals, if needed, shall be made as specified in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. The CQC organization shall be responsible for certifying that all submittals and deliverables are in compliance with the contract requirements. 3.5.1 Separate Mock-ups
Separate mock-ups, mock-ups that will be removed as specified, are not limited to the following: High Containment as shown on drawings A5.993 and specified in related specifications; Exterior assembly as shown on drawing A3.31 and specified in related specifications; Dunk Tank; and CMU panels as specified in Section 04 20 00. 3.5.2 In-place Mock-ups
In-place quality control mock-ups specified below, to remain part of the work if approved, shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before continuing with the work in other areas. Architectural KEY PLANS drawing A0.21 and A0.21-X indicate locations and room numbers for room mock-ups noted below. Final room locations for in-place mock-ups will be as selected and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to starting in-place work. 3.5.2.1 a. In-place Gypsum Board/Ceiling Finishes
At Curved cove in Knowledge Green coffer, ceiling area between Column center lines E5, E6, ED.6 and EV. Include supporting frame work, ceiling systems, diffusers, sprinklers, lights, gypsum board and finishes. Refer to Reflected ceiling drawings A8.26, A8.27, A8.86 and corresponding finish drawings for ceiling finishes. At curved fascia in BSL-2 office area, ceiling area between column center lines EE to EG, exterior wall to interior laboratory wall. Include support framing, gypsum board and finish. In-place Stainless Steel Casework
b.
3.5.2.2
As specified in Section 12 35 53.26 CUSTOM STAINLESS STEEL LABORATORY CASEWORK. 3.5.2.3 In-place A/BSL-4 Fluid Applied Flooring
As specified in Section 09 67 00 FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING. 3.5.2.4 In-place A/BSL-4 Special Coatings
As specified in Section 09 97 00 SPECIAL COATINGS. 3.5.2.5 In-place APR Door
As specified in Section 08 39 15 PNEUMATIC AIR PRESSURE RESISTANT DOORS Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 45 10 - Page 8 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.5.2.6
In-place BSL-2 Laboratory
Provide complete installation of materials for selected room including: a. b. c. d. e. f. Architectural finishes shall include floor, wall and ceiling components. Casework and fume hood. Door and hardware. Plumbing and Fire Protection services. HVAC temperature and humidity control for finishes. Electrical, Lighting, Communication and Security. In-place ABSL-2 NHP Holding Room and Ante Room
3.5.2.7
Provide complete installation of materials for selected rooms including: a. b. c. d. e. f. Architectural finishes shall include floor, wall and ceiling components. Casework and Specialties. Door and hardware. Plumbing and Fire Protection services. HVAC temperature and humidity control for finishes. Electrical, Lighting, Communication and Security. In-place BSL-3E Laboratory
3.5.2.8
Provide complete installation of materials for selected room including: a. b. c. d. e. f. Architectural finishes shall include floor, wall and ceiling components. Casework and Specialties. Door and hardware. Plumbing and Fire Protection services. HVAC temperature and humidity control for finishes. Electrical, Lighting, Communication and Security. In-place ABSL-3E NHP Holding, Ante and Procedure Room Suite
3.5.2.9
Provide complete installation of materials for selected rooms including: a. b. c. d. e. f. Architectural finishes shall include floor, wall and ceiling components. Casework and Specialties. Door and hardware. Plumbing and Fire Protection services. HVAC temperature and humidity control for finishes. Electrical, Lighting, Communication and Security. In-place BSL-3E transition zone decon zone
3.5.2.10
Provide complete installation of materials for selected area including: a. b. c. d. e. f. Architectural finishes shall include floor, wall and ceiling components. Ladder access. Door and hardware. Plumbing and Fire Protection services. HVAC temperature and humidity control for finishes. Electrical, Lighting, Communication and Security. In-place BSL-3E Change Room
3.5.2.11
Provide complete installation of materials for selected room including: Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 45 10 - Page 9 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
a. b. c. d. e. f.
Architectural finishes shall include floor, wall and ceiling components. Specialties. Door and hardware. Plumbing and Fire Protection services. HVAC temperature and humidity control for finishes. Electrical, Lighting, Communication and Security. In-place Aluminum composite panel mock-up in atrium
3.5.2.12
Provide complete installation of materials for selected area as specified in Section 07 42 50. 3.5.2.13 In-place Intumescent Fireproofing
Provide complete installation of materials for selected area of 10 to 25 square feet. 3.6 CONTROL
Contractor Quality Control is the means by which the Contractor ensures that the construction, to include that of subcontractors and suppliers, complies with the requirements of the contract. At least three phases of control shall be conducted by the CQC System Manager for each definable feature of the construction work as follows: 3.6.1 Preparatory Phase
This phase shall be performed prior to beginning work on each definable feature of work, after all required plans/documents/materials are approved/accepted, and after copies are at the work site. This phase shall include: a. A review of each paragraph of applicable specifications, reference codes, and standards. A copy of those sections of referenced codes and standards applicable to that portion of the work to be accomplished in the field shall be made available by the Contractor at the preparatory inspection. These copies shall be maintained in the field and available for use by Government personnel until final acceptance of the work. A review of the contract drawings. A check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. Review of provisions that have been made to provide required control inspection and testing. Examination of the work area to assure that all required preliminary work has been completed and is in compliance with the contract. A physical examination of required materials, equipment, and sample work to assure that they are on hand, conform to approved shop drawings or submitted data, and are properly stored. A review of the appropriate activity hazard analysis to assure safety requirements are met. Section 01 45 10 - Page 10 For Official Use Only
b. c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Ft. Detrick, MD
h.
Discussion of procedures for controlling quality of the work including repetitive deficiencies. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for that feature of work. A check to ensure that the portion of the plan for the work to be performed has been accepted by the Contracting Officer. Discussion of the initial control phase. The Government shall be notified at least 72 hours in advance of beginning the preparatory control phase. This phase shall include a meeting conducted by the CQC System Manager and attended by the superintendent, other CQC personnel (as applicable), and the foreman responsible for the definable feature. The results of the preparatory phase actions shall be documented by separate minutes prepared by the CQC System Manager and attached to the daily CQC report. The Contractor shall instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet contract specifications.
i.
j. k.
3.6.2
Initial Phase
This phase shall be accomplished at the beginning of a definable feature of work. The following shall be accomplished: a. A check of work to ensure that it is in full compliance with contract requirements. Review minutes of the preparatory meeting. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full contract compliance. Verify required control inspection and testing. Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets minimum acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required sample panels as appropriate. Resolve all differences. Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading of the safety plan and activity hazard analysis. Review the activity analysis with each worker. The Government shall be notified at least 72 hours in advance of beginning the initial phase. Separate minutes of this phase shall be prepared by the CQC System Manager and attached to the daily CQC report. Exact location of initial phase shall be indicated for future reference and comparison with follow-up phases. The initial phase should be repeated for each new crew to work onsite, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met.
b.
c.
d. e.
f.
g.
3.6.3
Follow-up Phase
Daily checks shall be performed to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements, until completion of the particular feature of work. The checks shall be made a matter of record in the CQC documentation. Final follow-up checks shall be conducted and all deficiencies corrected prior to Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 45 10 - Page 11 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
the start of additional features of work which may be affected by the deficient work. The Contractor shall not build upon nor conceal non-conforming work. 3.6.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases
Additional preparatory and initial phases shall be conducted on the same definable features of work if: the quality of on-going work is unacceptable; if there are changes in the applicable CQC staff, onsite production supervision or work crew; if work on a definable feature is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or if other problems develop. 3.7 3.7.1 TESTS Testing Procedure
The Contractor shall perform specified or required tests to verify that control measures are adequate to provide a product which conforms to contract requirements. Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish to the Government duplicate samples of test specimens for possible testing by the Government. Testing includes operation and/or acceptance tests when specified. The Contractor shall procure the services of a Corps of Engineers approved testing laboratory or establish an approved testing laboratory at the project site. The Contractor shall perform the following activities and record and provide the following data: a. b. Verify that testing procedures comply with contract requirements. Verify that facilities and testing equipment are available and comply with testing standards. Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards. Verify that recording forms and test identification control number system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have been prepared. Results of all tests taken, both passing and failing tests, shall be recorded on the CQC report for the date taken. Specification paragraph reference, location where tests were taken, and the sequential control number identifying the test shall be given. If approved by the Contracting Officer, actual test reports may be submitted later with a reference to the test number and date taken. An information copy of tests performed by an offsite or commercial test facility shall be provided directly to the Contracting Officer. Failure to submit timely test reports as stated may result in nonpayment for related work performed and disapproval of the test facility for this contract.
c. d.
e.
3.7.2 3.7.2.1
Testing Laboratories Capability Check
The Government reserves the right to check laboratory equipment in the proposed laboratory for compliance with the standards set forth in the contract specifications and to check the laboratory technician's testing procedures and techniques. Government check does not relieve the contractor of liability and responsibility for full compliance with Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 45 10 - Page 12 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
contract documents. Laboratories utilized for testing soils, concrete, asphalt, and steel shall meet criteria detailed in ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 329. 3.7.2.2 Capability Recheck
If the selected laboratory fails the capability check, the Contractor will be assessed a charge to reimburse the Government for each succeeding recheck of the laboratory or the checking of a subsequently selected laboratory. Such costs will be deducted from the contract amount due the Contractor. 3.7.3 Onsite Laboratory
The Government reserves the right to utilize the Contractor's control testing laboratory and equipment to make assurance tests, and to check the Contractor's testing procedures, techniques, and test results at no additional cost to the Government. 3.7.4 a. Furnishing or Transportation of Samples for Testing Costs incidental to the transportation of samples or materials shall be borne by the Contractor. Samples of materials for test verification and acceptance testing by the Government shall be delivered to the Corps of Engineers Division Laboratory, f.o.b., at the following address: Field Engineering Unit or Soils Laboratory Unit. Fort McHenry Yard, Baltimore, Maryland 21230. b. Coordination for each specific test, exact delivery location, and dates will be made through the Area Office. COMPLETION INSPECTION Punch-Out Inspection
3.8 3.8.1
Near the end of the work, or any increment of the work established by a time stated in the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Clause, "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work", or by the specifications, the CQC Manager shall conduct an inspection of the work. A punch list of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications shall be prepared and included in the CQC documentation, as required by paragraph DOCUMENTATION. The list of deficiencies shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. The CQC System Manager or staff shall make a second inspection to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished, the Contractor shall notify the Government that the facility is ready for the Government Pre-Final inspection. 3.8.2 Pre-Final Inspection
The Government will perform the pre-final inspection to verify that the facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government Pre-Final Punch List may be developed as a result of this inspection. The Contractor's CQC System Manager shall ensure that all items on this list have been corrected before notifying the Government, so that a Final inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Any items noted on the Pre-Final inspection shall be corrected in a timely manner. These Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 45 10 - Page 13 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
inspections and any deficiency corrections required by this paragraph shall be accomplished within the time slated for completion of the entire work or any particular increment of the work if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates. 3.8.3 Final Acceptance Inspection
The Contractor's Quality Control Inspection personnel, plus the superintendent or other primary management person, and the Contracting Officer's Representative shall be in attendance at the final acceptance inspection. Additional Government personnel including, but not limited to, those from Base/Post Civil Facility Engineer user groups, and major commands may also be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will be formally scheduled by the Contracting Officer based upon results of the Pre-Final inspection. Notice shall be given to the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to the final acceptance inspection and shall include the Contractor's assurance that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor as being unacceptable, along with all remaining work performed under the contract, will be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for the final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably complete for this inspection will be cause for the Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Government's additional inspection cost in accordance with the contract clause titled "Inspection of Construction". 3.9 a. DOCUMENTATION The Contractor shall maintain current records providing factual evidence that required quality control activities and/or tests have been performed. These records shall include the work of subcontractors and suppliers and shall be completed in QCS on an acceptable form that includes, as a minimum, the following information: 1. 2. Contractor/subcontractor and their area of responsibility. Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for repair. Work performed each day, giving location, description, and by whom. When Network Analysis (NAS) is used, identify each phase of work performed each day by NAS activity number. Test and/or control activities performed with results and references to specifications/drawings requirements. The control phase shall be identified (Preparatory, Initial, and Follow-up). List of deficiencies noted, along with corrective action. Quantity of materials received at the site with statement as to acceptability, storage, and reference to specifications/drawings requirements. Submittals and deliverables reviewed, with contract reference, by whom, and action taken. Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken. Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and instructions or corrective actions.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. 8.
Ft. Detrick, MD
9.
Instructions given/received and conflicts in plans and/or specifications.
10. Contractor's verification statement. b. These records shall indicate a description of trades working on the project; the number of personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any delays encountered. These records shall cover both conforming and deficient features and shall include a statement that equipment and materials incorporated in the work and workmanship comply with the contract. The original and one copy of these records in report form shall be furnished to the Government daily within 24 hours after the date covered by the report, except that reports need not be submitted for days on which no work is performed. As a minimum, one report shall be prepared and submitted for every 7 days of no work and on the last day of a no work period. All calendar days shall be accounted for throughout the life of the contract. The first report following a day of no work shall be for that day only. Reports shall be signed and dated by the CQC System Manager. The report from the CQC System Manager shall include copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by all subordinate quality control personnel. SAMPLE FORMS
3.10
Sample forms "Request for Mock-Up Observation" and "Mock-Up Observation" are attached at the end of this section. 3.11 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected noncompliance with the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to such stop orders shall be made the subject of claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor. -- End of Section --
10/2006 ________________________________________________ | | | Contractor's Name: _______________________ | | Address: _______________________ | | _______________________ | | Phone Number: _______________________ | | | |______________________________________________| CONSTRUCTION QUALITY CONTROL REPORT PROJECT NAME: _________________________________________ LOCATION:__________________________ DATE: _____________ CONTRACT NUMBER:___________________ REPORT NO.:________ ________________________________________________________________________ | | | SUPERINTENDENT:_____________________________________________________ | | | | TYPE OF WORKERS NUMBER TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION NUMBER | | EQUIPMENT ON SITE | |______________________________________________________________________| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |___________________|__________|_________________________|_____________| | SUBCONTRACTORS | | COMPANY RESPONSIBILITY FOREMAN NO. OF WORKERS | |______________________________________________________________________| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |____________|____________________|______________|_____________________| | TOTALS | |______________________________________________________________________| | NO. OF WORKERS TODAY | MANHOURS TODAY | MANHOURS FOR THIS PERIOD | | | | | |______________________|__________________|____________________________| | CONTRACT MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT DELIVERED TO SITE: | | | | | |______________________________________________________________________| | | | WEATHER:__________________ SITE CONDITIONS:_______________________ | |______________________________________________________________________| | | | DID A DELAY OR WORK STOPPAGE OCCUR TODAY? _______ | | IF YES, EXPLAIN. | | | | | | HAS ANYTHING DEVELOPED IN THE WORK WHICH MAY LEAD TO A CHANGE | | OR FINDING OF FACT? _____ IF YES, EXPLAIN. | | | | | |______________________________________________________________________| SECTION 01 45 04.00 10 PAGE 1 OF 3 PAGES
________________________________________________________________________ | | | DESCRIPTION OF ALL WORK PERFORMED TODAY | | (LIST BY DEFINABLE FEATURES OF WORK) | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |______________________________________________________________________| | | | PREPARATORY INSPECTION: | | | | LIST ALL INSPECTIONS BY SUBJECT AND SPECIFICATION LOCATION. | | ATTACH MINUTES OF MEETING AND LIST OF ALL ATTENDEES. | | | | | | | | | | | | | |______________________________________________________________________| | HAVE ALL REQUIRED SUBMITTALS AND SAMPLES OF CONSTRUCTION BEEN | | APPROVED. | | | | | |______________________________________________________________________| | DO THE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT TO BE USED CONFORM TO THE SUBMITTALS? | | | | | |______________________________________________________________________| | HAS ALL PRELIMINARY WORK BEEN INSPECTED, TESTED, AND COMPLETED? | | | | | |______________________________________________________________________| | TEST REQUIRED AND INSPECTION TECHNIQUES TO BE EXECUTED TO PROVE | | CONTRACT COMPLIANCE (INCLUDE BOTH EXPECTED AND ACTUAL RESULTS) | | | | | | | | | | | |______________________________________________________________________| | | | HAS A PHASE HAZARD ANALYSIS BEEN PERFORMED? | |______________________________________________________________________| | | | COMMENTS AND DEFICIENCIES NOTED AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TAKEN: | | | | | | | | | | | | | |______________________________________________________________________| SECTION 01 45 04.00 10 PAGE 2 OF 3 PAGES
________________________________________________________________________ | ALL INSTRUCTIONS RECEIVED FROM QA PERSONNEL AND ACTIONS TAKEN: | | | | | | | | | | | |_______________________________________________________________________| | JOB SAFETY (INCLUDE MEETINGS HELD AND DEFICIENCIES NOTED WITH | | CORRECTIVE ACTIONS): | | | | | | | | | | | |_______________________________________________________________________| | | | INITIAL INSPECTION: | | | | LIST ALL INSPECTIONS BY SUBJECT AND SPECIFICATION LOCATION. | | COMMENTS AND/OR DEFICIENCIES NOTED AND CORRECTIVE ACTION TAKEN: | | | | | | | | | | | | | |_______________________________________________________________________| | | | FOLLOW-UP INSPECTION: | | | | LIST ALL INSPECTIONS BY SUBJECT AND SPECIFICATION LOCATION. | | COMMENTS AND/OR DEFICIENCIES NOTED AND CORRECTIVE ACTION TAKEN. | | | | | | | | | | | | | |_______________________________________________________________________| | | | SIGNATURE:____________________________ | | QUALITY CONTROL REPRESENTATIVE/MANAGER | |_______________________________________________________________________| | | | THE ABOVE REPORT IS COMPLETE AND CORRECT. ALL MATERIALS AND | | EQUIPMENT USED AND ALL WORK PERFORMED DURING THIS REPORTING PERIOD | | ARE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS, AND SUBMITTALS, | | EXCEPT AS NOTED ABOVE. | | | | | | SIGNATURE:_____________________________________ | | CONTRACTOR'S APPROVED AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE | | | | | |_______________________________________________________________________| SECTION 01 45 04.00 10 PAGE 3 OF 3 PAGES
MOCK-UP OBSERVATION REQUEST

Request No. Date: Project: A/E Project Number: Client Project Number: Specification Title: Section: Date For Mock-Up Observation: Mock-Up Description: Page/Article Describing Mock-Up: Contract For:
Location: (If other than Project Site, give full name and address): Project Site: Off Site (State Location):
(State Location):
MOCK-UP OBSERVATION REPORT

Report No. Date: Project: A/E Project Number: Client Project Number: Specification Title: Section: Date For Mock-Up Observation: Mock-Up Description: Page/Article Describing Mock-Up: ____________________ Contract For:
______________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Location: (If other than Project Site, give full name and address): Project Site: Off Site (State Location): ________________________________________________________
(State Location): ___________________________________________________________
Attendee for Client: __________________________ Attendee for A/E: __________________________ Attendee for [Contractor] [CM]: __________________________________________________________ Attendee for Manufacturer: _____________________________________________________________ Additional Attendees: (Name, Title, Affiliation): ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Person Writing This Report: ____________________________________________________________ Representing: _______________________________________________________________________ Comments: _________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ No Explain: _______________________________________________ Mock Up Accepted: Yes ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Action to Be Taken: ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Additional comments: [Contractor] [CM] Subcontractor Supplier Manufacturer A/E Other ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 45 35 SPECIAL INSPECTION
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI) ACI 318 (2005) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary (2002) Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures and Specifications for Masonry Structures and Commentaries
ACI 530/530.1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC) AISC 341 (2005) Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings (1999) Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)Specification for Structural Steel Buildings ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 435/A 435M (1990; R 2001) Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates (2005a) Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement (1991; R 2001) Straight Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Structural Shapes
AISC 350
ASTM A 615/A 615M
ASTM A 898/A 898M
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-07 Certificates Special Inspector Certification attesting that the Special Inspector is qualified by knowledge and experience to perform the specified Special Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 45 35 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Inspections. Information, which provides evidence of the knowledge and experience necessary to qualify a person as a Special Inspector for the category of work being certified, will accompany the qualification. Quality Requirements Plan A copy of the Quality Requirements Plan covered by a certificate indicating that the plan meets the content specified in this section. 1.3 SPECIAL INSPECTOR
A Special Inspector shall be used to perform Special Inspections required by this section. The Special Inspector is a person employed by the Contractor and approved by the Government as being qualified by knowledge and experience to perform the Special Inspection for the category of work being constructed. Special Inspectors shall perform their duties independent from the construction quality control staff employed by the Contractor. More than one Special Inspector may be required to provide the varied knowledge and experience necessary to adequately inspect all of the categories of work requiring Special Inspection. 1.4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PLAN
A quality plan shall be developed containing the following: A. A list of all items that require Special Inspection and testing, including the type, frequency, extent, and duration of the special inspection for each item on this list. A list of all items that require testing, including the type and frequency of testing for each item on this list. The content, distribution, and frequency of special inspection reports. The content, distribution, and frequency of testing reports. The procedures, controls, and people used within the Contractor's organization to develop, sign, and distribute Special Inspection and Testing reports along with the position title and pertinent qualifications of all Contractor personnel involved. SPECIAL INSPECTION
B.
C. D. E.
1.5
The Special Inspection for seismic-resisting system components shall be done as specified. Special Inspector personnel shall be in addition to the quality control inspections and inspectors required elsewhere in this section. 1.5.1 Continuous Special Inspection
Continuous special inspection is the full time observation of the work by the Special Inspector present in the work area whenever work is being performed. Continuous special inspection shall be performed where specified for items as shown on the drawings.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.5.2
Periodic Special Inspection
Periodic special inspection is the intermittent observation of the work by a Special Inspector present in the work area while work is being performed. The intermittent observation periods shall be at times of significant work, shall be recurrent over the complete work period, and shall total at least 25 percent of the total work time. Periodic special inspection shall be performed where specified for items as shown on the drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION PERFORMANCE OF INSPECTIONS
Special Inspections shall be performed for the following: 3.1.1 A. Drilled Piers Continuous special inspection during placement of concrete in drilled piers. Periodic special inspection during construction of drilled piers including the placement of reinforcing steel. Reinforcing Steel
B.
3.1.2
Periodic special inspection during and upon completion of the placement of reinforcing steel in shear walls. 3.1.3 Structural Concrete
Periodic special inspection during and on completion of the placement of concrete. 3.1.4 A. Structural Masonry Periodic special inspection during the preparation of mortar, the laying of masonry units, and placement of reinforcement and prior to placement of grout. Continuous special inspection during the welding of reinforcement, grouting, consolidation and reconsolidation and placement of bent-bar anchors. Structural Steel
B.
3.1.5
Continuous special inspection for all structural welding, except that periodic special inspection is permitted for single-pass or resistance welds provided the qualifications of the welder and the welding electrodes are inspected at the beginning of the work and all welds are inspected for compliance with the approved construction documents at the completion of welding. 3.1.6 Architectural Components
Special inspection of the architectural components shall assure that the Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 45 35 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
methods of anchoring and fastening indicated on the drawings are being complied with at the onset of construction of the components, and that the specified or shown number, spacing, and types of fasteners were actually installed. Special inspection for architectural components shall be as follows: A. Periodic special inspection during the erection and fastening of exterior cladding, interior loadbearing partition walls, exterior nonloadbearing walls, and interior high containment and containment components. Periodic special inspection during the anchorage of access floors, suspended ceilings, and wall and ceiling mounted specialties, equipment, and furnishings including laboratory casework.. Mechanical and Electrical Components
B.
3.1.7
Special inspection of the mechanical and electrical components shall assure that the methods of anchoring and fastening indicated on the drawings are being complied with at the onset of construction of the component, and that the specified or shown number, spacing, and types of fasteners were actually installed. Special inspection for mechanical and electrical components shall be as follows: A. Periodic special inspection during the anchorage of electrical equipment for emergency or standby power systems. Periodic special inspection during the installation of anchorage of all other electrical equipment. Periodic special inspection during installation for flammable, combustible, or highly toxic piping systems and their associated mechanical units. Periodic special inspection during the installation of HVAC ductwork that will contain hazardous materials. Fire Suppression
B.
C.
D.
3.1.8
Periodic inspection during installation of fire suppression system. 3.1.9 Fire Alarm
Periodic inspection during the installation of fire alarm system. 3.2 TESTING
The special inspector shall be responsible for verifying that the testing requirements are performed by an approved testing agency for compliance with the following, where shown on the drawings: A. Reinforcing: 1. Special testing of reinforcing steel shall be as follows:
2.
Examine certified mill test reports for each shipment of reinforcing steel used in reinforced concrete boundary members of reinforced concrete shear walls. The special inspector shall determine conformance with the construction documents. Examine the reports for chemical tests, done in accordance with Sec. 3.5.2 of ACI 318, which were performed to determine the Section 01 45 35 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
weldability of ASTM A 615/A 615M reinforcing steel. B. Structural Concrete: Verify that samples of structural concrete obtained at the project site, along with all material components obtained at the batch plant, have been tested in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 and comply with all acceptance provisions contained therein. Structural Masonry: Verify that all quality assurance testing of structural masonry along with all material components is in accordance with the requirements of ACI 530/530.1 and complies with all acceptance provisions contained therein. Structural Steel: 1. Verify that all quality assurance testing needed to confirm required material properties contained in Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL and given in the quality assurance plan has been done in accordance with applicable provisions in AISC 341 and AISC 350 and that the test results comply with all acceptance provisions contained therein. When a flange or a plate of steel member with a base metal thickness greater than 1.5 inches, is joined by welding so that the flange or plate is subjected to through-thickness weld shrinkage strains, verify that the required ultrasonic testing for discontinuities behind and adjacent to such welds has been done after joint completion. Further verify that any material discontinuities rejected on the basis of the requirements contained in Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL and ASTM A 435/A 435M or ASTM A 898/A 898M, (Level 1 Criteria) were repaired and were retested after the repairs and found acceptable.
C.
D.
2.
3.3 A.
REPORTING AND COMPLIANCE PROCEDURES On the first day of each month, the Contractor shall furnish to the Government five copies of the combined progress reports of the special inspector's observations. These progress reports shall list all special inspections of construction or reviews of testing performed during that month, note all uncorrected deficiencies, and describe the corrections made both to these deficiencies and to previously reported deficiencies. Each monthly report shall be signed by all special inspectors who performed special inspections of construction or reviewed testing during that month, regardless of whether they reported any deficiencies. Each monthly report shall be signed by the Contractor. At completion of construction, each special inspector shall prepare and sign a final report attesting that all work they inspected and all testing and test reports they reviewed were completed in accordance with the approved construction documents and that deficiencies identified were satisfactorily corrected. The Contractor shall submit a combined final report containing the signed final reports of all the special inspectors. The Contractor shall sign the combined final report attesting that all final reports of special inspectors that performed work to comply with these construction documents are contained therein, and that the Contractor has reviewed and approved all of the individual inspector's final reports. -- End of Section --
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 45 70 ROOM INTEGRITY TESTING PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SUMMARY
The purpose of testing the containment room(s) or envelope is to determine if the walls, floors, ceilings, penetrations, and other containment barrier features have adequate integrity to meet room integrity acceptance criteria. 1.1.1 A. B. C. 1.1.2 Section Includes Pressure decay testing. Directional airflow testing. Test reports. Responsibility
Work of this section shall be coordinated and performed by the CxC. 1.1.2.1 Compliance
Compliance with the acceptable leakage rates defined in the acceptance criteria is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. RELATED SECTIONS Section 05 50 10.00 Section 08 11 19.00 Section 08 39 15 SPECIAL METAL FABRICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.
PNEUMATIC AIR PRESSURE RESISTANT DOORS. AIR PRESSURE RESISTANT WINDOWS.
Section 08 55 00.00 Section 09 67 00 Section 09 97 00
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING. SPECIAL COATINGS. STERILIZERS.
Section 11 53 63.00 Section 11 53 69 Division 22 Division 23 Division 26
TISSUE DIGESTER.
Plumbing. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning. Electrical. COMMISSIONING.
Section 01 91 00
Division 25 - Integrated Automation.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. SD-06 Test Reports Reports SD-07 Certificates Certificate 1.4 SCHEDULING
Schedule tests and notify the Government two weeks prior to testing date. 1.5 1.5.1 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA Directional Air Flow Testing.
Observable directional airflow created by differential air pressure between tested area and adjacent area of 0.05-inch WG (plus or minus 0.025-inch). 1.5.2 Pressure Decay Testing
Two consecutive pressure decay tests demonstrating a minimum of 1-inch W.C. negative differential pressure remaining after 20 minutes, from an initial negative pressure differential of 2-inches W.C. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCT EQUIPMENT Manometer
Calibrated digital or inclined manometer, accuracy to 0.05-inch W.C., for pressures up to 3-inches W.C. Provide certificate of calibration prior to commencing test. 2.1.2 Fan/Blower
Fan/blower unit with capacity to create and maintain 2-inch W.C. differential pressure, complete with seal valve. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 A. EXECUTION GENERAL Initial Testing Contractor shall conduct initial testing of applicable rooms, and provide appropriate support from sub-contractors to assist and perform testing. Testing to be conducted by a qualified person.
Ft. Detrick, MD
B.
List deficiencies found during initial testing. Document resolution of discrepancies and variations on Deficiency Tracking List. Identify deficiencies to the Contract Officer Representative (COR) who will determine if initial testing will continue or will be on hold until corrections are made before continuing with testing activities on other rooms or areas. Include completed room integrity test reports in Cx final report. Final Testing Final testing to be witnessed by the Contractor Quality Control(CQC), and Contracting Officer Representative (COR). List deficiencies found during final testing. Document resolution of discrepancies and variations on Deficiency Tracking List. Identify deficiencies to Contracting Officer Representative (COR) who will determine if final testing will continue or will be on hold until corrections are made before continuing with testing activities on other rooms and areas. Include completed room integrity test reports in Cx final report. Before Commencing Pressure Decay Testing
3.1.2 A.
B.
3.1.3
Ensure successful completion of A/BSL-4 Containment Area seal prior to commencing pressure testing. 3.2 NOTIFICATION
Provide 10 business days notice to Contracting Officer Representative (COR) before start of Final testing. CxC shall select the rooms to be tested the day prior to testing to allow for time to prepare the rooms for testing. 3.3 3.3.1 EXAMINATION Joint Sealers
Verify that joint sealers at room penetrations have been installed and are sufficiently cured. 3.3.2 Door Seals
Verify that door seals have been installed and are in working order, and that doors close and latch in normal manner. 3.4 3.4.1 A. DIRECTIONAL AIRFLOW TESTING Preparation Conduct testing after HVAC balancing activities have been completed. Room shall be in normal operating condition with doors closed. Smoke Pencil Testing: 1. 2 Perform test within room. Review each window, mechanical/electrical penetration and piece of laboratory equipment integrated into containment barrier floor, walls and ceiling. Move smoke pencil along perimeter of work at a rate of 1 inch/second. Observe movement of air along test area. Section 01 45 70 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
Air leakage will be noted by disturbance in pattern of smoke created. 3. 4. C. Report points of air leakage to COR and CQC. Reseal points of air leakage and confirm with smoke pencil testing.
Differential Pressure: Using a handheld mini-manometer, confirm and record differential pressure within the room. Directional Air Flow: 1. 2. 3. Perform test outside room. Slowly open door 1/8 inch. Move smoke pencil along edge of door at a rate of 1 inch/second. Smoke shall be drawing into room confirming directional air flow.
D.
3.5 3.5.1
PRESSURE DECAY TESTING Preparation Isolate Area
3.5.1.1
Isolate area by closing and securing doors, valves and bubble tight dampers at containment barrier (temporary sealing measures in doors, windows and services that would cover permanent seals and not permit their testing for leakage are not permitted); plug all pressure sensor lines, e.g., magnehelic gauges. 3.5.1.2 Manometer
Install calibrated manometer across containment perimeter in manner to minimize interference with wind or ventilation turbulence and to accurately represent interior and exterior differential air pressure. 3.5.1.3 Negative Pressure
Operate fan/blower unit to slowly bring differential pressure to 2-inches W.C. negative pressure; allow room to stabilize and shut off vacuum. 3.5.1.4 Close Valve
Close valve between fan/blower and test zone to seal containment zone at 2-inches W.C. negative pressure with respect to adjacent areas. 3.5.1.5 Stable Conditions
Complete testing under generally stable conditions of outside wind, temperature, barometric pressure, and humidity. Testing shall be under negative differential pressure with respect to surrounding environment. Locate air pressure testing ports/openings for digital or inclined manometer instruments where readings will not be affected by wind, air disturbances, or traffic.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.5.2 3.5.2.1
Testing Pressure Loss
Dynamically trend pressure loss starting at 2-inches W.C.; record differential pressure each minute for 20 minutes. Slowly open seal valve to allow room/containment zone to return to normal pressure. 3.5.2.2 Temperature and Pressure
Record room temperature and exterior barometric pressure at beginning and end of each individual test, and at 30-minute intervals throughout day of test. 3.5.2.3 Changes
Change in temperature inside the room and change in barometric pressure outside the room being tested shall be accounted for in determining pressure differential and decay noted in the final report. 3.6 3.6.1 RETESTING Examination Locate faulty joint seals or improperly
Examine rooms having leakage. adjusted door seals. 3.6.2 Corrections
Have corrections made by responsible trade. 3.6.3 Retest
After corrections, retest rooms until allowable leakage rate is achieved. 3.7 3.7.1 TEST SCHEDULE Pressure Decay Testing
Individually test decontamination zones within A/BSL-4. 3.7.2 Directional Airflow Testing
Individually test rooms within A/BSL-3E, and individual rooms within A/BSL-4 decontamination zones that operate at a different air pressure from adjacent spaces. 3.8 3.8.1 REPORTS Directional Air Flow Test Report
Provide signed and dated written report including the following minimum information: A. Mini-manometer data (brand, model, serial number, date of last calibration, full scale reading, and smallest scale increment). Pressure differential of each room.
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
C.
Written description of smoke pencil test and visual result for each room. Pressure Decay Test Report
3.8.2
Provide signed and dated written report including the following minimum information: A. B. Description of fan/blower unit and control means. Manometer data (brand, model, serial number, date of last calibration, full scale reading, and smallest scale increment). Date. Start and end time. Start and end temperature within room. Start and end barometric pressure outside room. Calculations used to determine the room pressure differential and the decay including adjustment for room temperature and outside barometric pressure. Tabulation of pressure differential readings for each test minute. Graphical plot of test data (time on the horizontal scale and differential pressure on the vertical axis). Floor plan illustrating the containment zones within the building and location of the fan/blower unit. Description of the test, including seals and blockouts. -- End of Section --
C. D. E. F. G.
H. I.
J.
K.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ITEMS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE) EM 385-1-1 (2003) Safety -- Safety and Health Requirements Sign Standards Manual, VOL 1 CH 1 and VOL 2 CH 1
EP 310-1-6A and EP 310-1-6B
1.2
GENERAL
The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and services and performing all work required for or incidental to the items herein specified. No separate payment will be made for the construction and services required by this section, and all costs in connection therewith shall be included in the overall cost of the work unless specifically stated otherwise. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Site Plan; G, AR Site plan showing the Contractor's fenced areas as specified in this section. Office and Parking Layout Plan; G, AR Site plan showing the Government field office and parking area as specified in this section. Temporary Electrical Work; G, AR The Contractor shall submit a temporary power distribution sketch prior to the installation of any temporary power.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.4
PROJECT SIGN: (JUN 1994)
A project sign shall be provided and erected at a location designated by the Contracting Officer. The sign shall conform to the applicable requirements of EP 310-1-6A and EP 310-1-6B, or as directed by the Contracting Officer. The sign shall be erected as soon as possible and within 15 days after the date of receipt of notice to proceed. Upon completion of the project, the sign shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. (CENAB) 1.5 SAFETY SIGN (JUN 1994)
A safety sign shall be provided and erected at a location designated by the Contracting Officer. The sign shall conform to the applicable requirements of EP 310-1-6A and EP 310-1-6B, or as directed by the Contracting Officer. The sign shall be erected as soon as possible and within 15 days after the date of receipt of notice to proceed. (CENAB) 1.6 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL WORK: (APR 1962 REV JUL 2000)
Temporary electrical work shall be in accordance with Sections 7 and 11 of EM 385-1-1. The Contractor shall submit for approval a temporary power distribution sketch prior to the installation of any temporary power. The sketch shall include location, voltages, and means of protection for all temporary distribution system wiring and components to include lighting, receptacles, grounding, disconnecting means, and GFCIs. The Contractor shall test the temporary power system and devices for polarity, ground continuity, and ground resistance prior to the initial use and before use after any modification. The Contractor shall verify to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or his representative by a calibrated light meter that the minimum illumination required by Table 7-1 of the EM 385-1-1 is being provided.(CENAB-EN-DT) 1.7 1.7.1 A. GOVERNMENT FIELD OFFICES US Government Field Office The Contractor shall provide the US Government with a field office. The field office will either be located within the Construction Limits of Disturbance, or outside of the Construction Limits of Disturbance. In order to be located outside of the Construction Limits of Disturbance the site must be approved by the US Army Garrison Ft. Detrick. Also any restrictions provided by the US Army Garrison Ft. Detrick must be followed. If located outside of the Construction Limits of Disturbance the office must be located within 500 yards of a vehicle entrance to the construction site. The Contractor will submit a floor plan for the field office which will be reviewed and approved. The office shall be approximately 12,600 square feet in floor area. Trailers shall be equipped and provided with exterior lights above all entrances, boot scrapers securely mounted at all exterior doors, heat, central air conditioning (no window units), electric lights, power and IT connections (see below for IT requirements). Toilet facilities for men and women shall be provided. A minimum of 5 urinals, 5 toilets, and two sinks shall be provided in the men's room, and a minimum of 6 toilets and 2 sinks shall be provided in the Women's room. If toilet facilities are separated, or separate trailers are provided, this must be taken into consideration for the minimum numbers given. Restrooms shall have paper towel dispensers, toilet tissue dispensers, soap Section 01 51 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
dispensers, and a small storage unit for supplies. See below for cleaning/maintenance requirements. The office space and restrooms will be ADA compliant. C. The Contractor shall provide 6 individual offices approximately 90 square feet each. Office furniture for each office shall consist of a desk, two 3 drawer rollable, lockable filing cabinets, one 4 drawer filing cabinet, one desk chair, two visitor chairs, one book case, one data connection, one telephone connection, and a minimum of 3 duplex power receptacles. The Contractor shall provide office space for 50 personnel. Each office space will be a minimum of 36 square feet. This can be either shared offices or cubicles. Each office space will be provided with a desk, chair, visitor's chair, and lockable storage (under desk draws, overhead cubicle storage, etc.). If cubicles are used then desk lighting must be provided. Each workstation shall be equipped with one data connection, one telephone connection, and a minimum of 2 duplex power receptacles. There shall be space for 5 four drawer filing cabinets and network drops for 3 printers (in additional to the copier rooms) spread throughout the workstations. Provide an administrative reception area. An office space with a reception height counter will be provided that includes a desk, chair, and lockable storage (under desk draws, overhead cubicle storage, etc.). Each workstation shall be equipped with one data connection, one telephone connection, and a minimum of 2 duplex power receptacles. In front of the reception counter will be an open reception area approximately 100 square feet. Provide 8 chairs and a small table in this area. The Contractor will provide a trash can for each of the separate offices, office spaces, administrative reception area, and bathrooms. See below for trash removal requirements. Each of the exterior doors, as well as the doors to the 6 individual offices need to have spaces for locks to be installed. These locks will be provided and installed by the Government. The contractor shall provide a lockable 36 square foot computer room with two dedicated power outlets. One outlet must meet NEMA 5-20R requirements. Computer room will serve as the termination point for all inside structured data and telephone wiring. Computer room will have a dedicated freestanding room air conditioner with appropriate ductwork to vent exhaust through outside wall or a separate VAV to ensure independent thermostatic cooling of this room in comparison to the rest of the trailer (cooling required for 12 months/year). Data/Communication outlets shall be provided at locations indicated and shall consist of two CAT 5e cables to each outlet, 1 voice and 1 data, terminated on appropriate jacks with cover plate. Cables shall be home run back to computer room. One cable shall be terminated on CAT 5e patch panel, mounted on a 19 inch rack in the computer room. The other CAT 5e cable to be terminated on BIX blocks, mounted on a 3/4 inch plywood wall mounted telephone backboard, located in the computer room. All inside wire will be certified CAT 5e compliant and grounded appropriately to prevent damage from transient voltage surges. If cubicles are used provisions for Electrical and Data/Communication Section 01 51 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Ft. Detrick, MD
outlets in acoustical electrical terminated K.
modular office partitions shall be located above the ceiling as indicated on the drawings. 120 volt, 20 amp, circuits shall be taken from the nearest service panel and with insulators in each junction box.
Contractor will install the telephone trunk line cable from a location designated by the USAG Ft. Detrick Directorate of Information Management (DOIM) to the computer room. The cable must be sufficient for all of the telephone connections required. All wire will be grounded as appropriate to prevent damage from transient voltage surge. Contractor will run 6-strand fiber between the existing building 1557 and the trailer at in order to provide LAN data service between the two buildings. Fiber will be protected in PVC pipe or conduit as appropriate and terminate at computer room into a fiber optic patch panel - there is an existing fiber termination panel in BLDG 1557. The fiber should be single-mode, meeting 1000Base-LX standards for this application. Data communications and telecom work shall be performed by a communications contractor who is regularly engaged in, and has successfully performed similar work at Fort Detrick. Communication design and contractor must be accepted by the Government prior to performing work. The Contractor shall provide two small and one large, movable partitioned conference area, each enclosed by full height permanent walls. The two small conference rooms will each be approximately 300 square feet with conference table and a minimum of 20 chairs in each. Each small conference room shall include a large wall mounted white board, 4 duplex receptacle power connections, 1 phone and 3 data connections. The large conference room shall be approximately 2000 SF with two large conference tables, total capacity for 100 people, 60 armed chairs, 40 'guest' chairs, two phone connections, 6 data connections, and a minimum of 8 duplex receptacle power connections. The large conference room shall have an operable partition in middle of the room, one podium with microphone and sound speaker system. The Contractor shall supply one breakout room with rectangular table (approximately 60 inches by 30 inches), 4 chairs, and two 5 shelf book cases, two duplex receptacles, 1 telephone connection, and 1 data connection. Each conference and breakout area shall be separated from all adjacent areas by full height (above ceiling) wall partitions. There shall be two 2 shelf garment racks outside the large conference area and one 2 shelf garment rack outside of each remote conference area. There shall be a plan/file room in one trailer approximately 462 square feet, there shall be eight 5 drawer steel flat file stackable drawing cabinets (capable of storing full or half size drawings), approximately 36 inches tall with appropriate bases, arranged to double as a drawing table, 25 three drawer lateral files, and a drawing table with an appropriate height backed chair. Provide a copier room/area. The copier room/area will be provided with dedicated 120V NEMA 5-20R outlet. The room/area requires 1 telephone and 3 data connections. Set aside area for copier of 80 inch wide by 36 inch deep. Floor of copier room must be able to support copier weight of 950lbs. Also provide approximately 12 square feet of table or counter space. If separate buildings are utilized then a copier Section 01 51 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Ft. Detrick, MD
room/area will be provided in each. Q. The contractor shall provide a kitchen area. If separate buildings are utilized then a kitchen area will be provided in each. The kitchen area shall include double stainless steel sink, a refrigerator/freezer unit, microwave, twelve cup coffee maker, counter space, kitchen base cabinets & wall cabinets, and 4 GFI wall dual receptacles above the counter. One exterior lockable mailbox shall be provided at the main entrance of the Government Field Office. The mailbox shall be securely mounted. One interior mail station shall contain a minimum of 60 individual mail slots with counter space for mail distribution. The Contractor shall supply 1 motorized field transport vehicle cable of transporting 6 personnel. The field vehicle shall be maintained and provided with fuel/power throughout the project by the Contractor. A covered parking area will be provided for the field vehicle The Contractor shall provide parking at the US Government Field Office to accommodate 65 vehicles. The parking area will be a minimum of compacted stone with geotextile. Access between the entrance to the jobsite and the parking will be maintained and have a minimum surface of compacted stone with geotextile. The Contractor shall clean and maintain the US Government Field Office Trailer complex, including all contractor supplied equipment, for the life of the contract. The restroom and kitchen facilities will be cleaned daily. The contractor shall supply toilet paper, paper towels, and soap for the restrooms, and paper towels for the kitchen area. Twice a week the entire office will be vacuumed/mopped. Twice a month all surfaces will be dusted. Once a day the trash will be removed and disposed of. At the completion of the project, the office, parking area, and any Contractor supplied material shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site. All utility connections shall be connected and disconnected in accordance with local codes and to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. Quality Assurance Field Office The Contractor shall provide the US Government Quality Assurance (QA) Personnel with an office. If the US Government Field Office mentioned above is located on the construction site then this office will be included. If the US Government Field Office is not located on the construction site then this office will be located adjacent to the contractor's trailers. The QA office shall be a minimum of 2,400 square feet in floor area. The office shall be equipped with exterior lights above all entrances, heat, central air conditioning (no window units), electric lights and power, five phone connections, one at each desk, 5 data connections, one at each desk, two phone connections and two data connections in the conference area, and a minimum of 14 duplex receptacle power connections, two at each desk, two in kitchen area, two in the conference area, and boot scrapers securely mounted at all exterior doors. If this office is separate from the US Government Field Office then one restroom facility shall be provided. The restroom shall consist of one lavatory, one urinal and one water closet, water and sewer connections, toilet tissue dispenser, paper towel dispenser, Section 01 51 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
1.7.2 A.
Ft. Detrick, MD
soap dispenser, and small storage cabinet for supplies. The office shall consist of two rooms. One room shall have 5 workstations with drawers and rolling desk chairs and 5 four drawer filing cabinets. The other room shall have conference table, 10 chairs, drawing table and four 5 drawer steel flat file stackable drawing cabinets (capable of storing full or half size drawings), approximately 36 inches tall with appropriate bases, arranged to double as a drawing table. There shall be small kitchen area 15sq feet of counter space, 5 LF of kitchen base cabinets & wall cabinets, a small standard kitchen refrigerator, microwave, and 10 cup coffee maker, 2 GFI wall receptacles above the counter, a double stainless steel sink. B. Maintenance requirements given for the US Government Office apply to Quality Assurance Field Office space as well. Communication and Utility Services Structured data and telephone wire will be terminated in a star (home run) configuration located in a lockable wiring closet within the Office spaces. Data/Communication outlets shall be provided at locations indicated and shall consist of two CAT 5e cables to each outlet, 1 voice and 1 data, terminated on appropriate jacks with coverplate. Cables shall be home run back to wiring closet. One cable shall be terminated on CAT 5e patch panel, mounted on a 19 inch rack in the wiring closet. The other CAT 5e cable to be terminated on BIX blocks, mounted on a 3/4 inch plywood wall mounted telephone backboard, located in the wiring closet. All inside wire will be certified CAT 5e compliant and grounded appropriately to prevent damage from transient voltage surges. Coordinate with base DOIM to run 6-strand fiber between the existing building 1557 and the proposed QA trailer at X (a distance of approximately XXX feet) in order to provide LAN data service between the two buildings. Fiber will be protected in PVC pipe or conduit as appropriate and terminate at wiring closet into a fiber optic patch panel - there is an existing fiber termination panel in BLDG 1557. The fiber should be single-mode, meeting 1000Base-LX standards for this application. Coordinate with base DOIM to run telephone lines from existing manhole to wiring closet and terminate throughout trailer as specified above. All wire will be grounded as appropriate to prevent damage from transient voltage surge. Utility connections shall be connected and disconnected in accordance with local codes and to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall provide and maintain Government field office facilities at a location designated by the Contracting Officer. Government or private office and warehouse facilities will not be available to the Contractor's personnel. Trailer-Type Mobile Office (Contractor's Option)
1.7.3 A.
B.
C.
D.
1.7.4
In lieu of constructing, maintaining and, at end of construction period, removing a temporary type field office, the Contractor may, at his option, furnish and maintain a trailer-type mobile office acceptable to the Contracting Officer and providing as a minimum the facilities specified above. The trailer shall be securely anchored to the ground at all four corners to guard against movement during high winds. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 51 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.8
SITE PLAN
Contractor staging areas shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall prepare a site plan showing fencing, the number of and location of trailers to be used, avenues of ingress/egress to the fenced area and details of the fence installation. Any areas which may have to be graveled to prevent the tracking of mud shall also be identified. 1.9 EMPLOYEE PARKING
Contractor employees shall park privately owned vehicles in the designated area and other areas designated by the Contracting Officer. Areas will be within reasonable walking distance of the construction site. Contractor employee parking shall not interfere with functions of the military facility, local residences, or businesses. 1.10 1.10.1 CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY FACILITIES Administrative Field Offices
The Contractor shall provide and maintain administrative field office facilities at a location designated by the Contracting Officer. Government or private office and warehouse facilities will not be available to the Contractor's personnel. 1.10.2 A. Storage and Staging Areas Proposed Project Boundary is indicated on drawing C1.100. Follow fencing requirements indicated on civil drawings, in addition to chain link fencing and striping noted below. A combination of permanent and temporary fencing may be used to secure project site. Storage and staging areas shall be limited to areas inside project boundary lines identified. Additional storage and staging areas shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall construct a temporary high chain link fence around trailers and materials. The fence shall include plastic strip inserts, colored green, so that visibility through the fence is obstructed. Fence posts may be driven, in lieu of concrete bases, where soil conditions permit. Trailers, materials, or equipment shall not be placed or stored outside the fenced area unless such trailers, materials, or equipment are assigned a separate and distinct storage area by the Contracting Officer away from the vicinity of the construction site but within the military boundaries. Trailers, equipment, or materials shall not be open to public view with the exception of those items which are in support of ongoing work on any given day. Materials shall not be stockpiled outside the fence in preparation for the next day's work. Unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer, mobile equipment, such as tractors, wheeled lifting equipment, cranes, trucks, and like equipment, shall be parked within the fenced area at the end of each work day. Appearance of Trailers
B.
1.10.3
Trailers utilized by the Contractor for administrative or material storage purposes shall present a clean and neat exterior appearance and shall be in a state of good repair. Trailers which, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, require exterior painting or maintenance will not be allowed. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 51 00 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.10.4
Maintenance of Storage Area
Fencing shall be kept in a state of good repair and proper alignment. Should the Contractor elect to traverse, with construction equipment or other vehicles, grassed or unpaved areas which are not established roadways, such areas shall be covered with a layer of gravel as necessary to prevent rutting and the tracking of mud onto paved or established roadways; gravel gradation shall be at the Contractor's discretion. Mud tracked onto the depot road system shall be removed by the end of the each day's construction shift. Grass located within the boundaries of the construction site shall be mowed for the duration of the project. Grass and vegetation along fences, buildings, under trailers, and in areas not accessible to mowers shall be edged or trimmed neatly. 1.10.5 Security Provisions
Adequate approved outside security lighting shall be provided at the Contractor's temporary facilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of its own equipment; in addition, the Contractor shall notify the appropriate law enforcement agency requesting periodic security checks of the temporary project field office. 1.10.6 Restoration of Storage Areas
Upon completion of the project and after removal of trailers, materials, and equipment from within the fenced area, the fence shall be removed and will become the property of the Contractor. Areas used by the Contractor for the storage of equipment or material, or other use, shall be restored to the original or better condition. Gravel used to traverse grassed areas shall be removed and the area restored to its original condition, including top soil and seeding as necessary. 1.10.7 Dewatering Plan
Provide temporary protection plan as outlined in Section 01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION, Part 1 under "Protection Features" for the tunnel to the SSP, to the SSP adjoining the tunnel, and to the basement area to prevent water from draining into and accumulating in these areas. PART 2 PRODUCT
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. U.S. AIR FORCE (USAF) AFI 32-1053 U.S. ARMY (DA) DA AR 200-5 (1999) Pest Management (1999) Pest Management Program
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE) EM 385-1-1 (2003) Safety -- Safety and Health Requirements Corps of Engineers Wetlands Delineation Manual Technical Report Y-87-1
WETLAND MANUAL
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 33 CFR 328 40 CFR 152 - 186 40 CFR 260 40 CFR 261 Definitions of Waters of the United States Pesticide Programs Hazardous Waste Management System: General
Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste Standards for the Management of Used Oil Designation, Reportable Quantities, and Notification Emergency Planning and Notification Chemical Accident Prevention Provisions Hazardous Materials Regulations
40 CFR 262
40 CFR 279 40 CFR 302
40 CFR 355 40 CFR 68 49 CFR 171 - 178
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.2 1.2.1
DEFINITIONS Environmental Pollution and Damage
Environmental pollution and damage is the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life; affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade the environment aesthetically, culturally and/or historically. 1.2.2 Environmental Protection
Environmental protection is the prevention/control of pollution and habitat disruption that may occur to the environment during construction. The control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other pollutants. 1.2.3 Contractor Generated Hazardous Waste
Contractor generated hazardous waste means materials that, if abandoned or disposed of, may meet the definition of a hazardous waste. These waste streams would typically consist of material brought on site by the Contractor to execute work, but are not fully consumed during the course of construction. Examples include, but are not limited to, excess paint thinners (i.e. methyl ethyl ketone, toluene etc.), waste thinners,excess paints, excess solvents, waste solvents, and excess pesticides, and contaminated pesticide equipment rinse water. 1.2.4 Installation Pest Management Coordinator
Installation Pest Management Coordinator (IPMC) is the individual officially designated by the Installation Commander to oversee the Installation Pest Management Program and the Installation Pest Management Plan. 1.2.5 Project Pesticide Coordinator
The Project Pesticide Coordinator (PPC) is an individual that resides at a Civil Works Project office and that is responsible for oversight of pesticide application on Project grounds. 1.2.6 Land Application for Discharge Water
The term "Land Application" for discharge water implies that the Contractor must discharge water at a rate which allows the water to percolate into the soil. No sheeting action, soil erosion, discharge into storm sewers, discharge into defined drainage areas, or discharge into the "waters of the United States" must occur. Land Application must be in compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. 1.2.7 Pesticide
Pesticide is defined as any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating any pest, or intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant or desiccant.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.2.8
Pests
The term "pests" means arthropods, birds, rodents, nematodes, fungi, bacteria, viruses, algae, snails, marine borers, snakes, weeds and other organisms (except for human or animal disease-causing organisms) that adversely affect readiness, military operations, or the well-being of personnel and animals; attack or damage real property, supplies, equipment, or vegetation; or are otherwise undesirable. 1.2.9 Surface Discharge
The term "Surface Discharge" implies that the water is discharged with possible sheeting action and subsequent soil erosion may occur. Waters that are surface discharged may terminate in drainage ditches, storm sewers,creeks, and/or "waters of the United States" and would require a permit to discharge water from the governing agency. 1.2.10 Waters of the United States
All waters which are under the jurisdiction of the Clean Water Act, as defined in 33 CFR 328. 1.2.11 Wetlands
Those areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or ground water at a frequency and duration sufficient to support, and that under normal circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions. Wetlands generally include swamps, marshes, and bogs. Official determination of whether or not an area is classified as a wetland must be done in accordance with WETLAND MANUAL. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Minimize environmental pollution and damage that may occur as the result of construction operations. The environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of permanent work must be protected during the entire duration of this contract. Comply with all applicable environmental Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. Any delays resulting from failure to comply with environmental laws and regulations will be the Contractor's responsibility. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTORS
Ensure compliance with this section by subcontractors. 1.5 PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work covered under this section. Payment of fees associated with environmental permits, application, and/or notices obtained by the Contractor, and payment of all fines/fees for violation or non-compliance with Federal, State, Regional and local laws and regulations are the Contractor's responsibility. All costs associated with this section must be included in the contract price. 1.6 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office Issued for Construction Section 01 57 20.00 10 - Page 3 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Environmental Protection Plan; G, AR The environmental protection plan. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN
Prior to commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to the site, submit an Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval by the Contracting Officer. The purpose of the Environmental Protection Plan is to present a comprehensive overview of known or potential environmental issues which the Contractor must address during construction. Issues of concern must be defined within the Environmental Protection Plan as outlined in this section. Address each topic at a level of detail commensurate with the environmental issue and required construction task(s). Topics or issues which are not identified in this section, but are considered necessary, must be identified and discussed after those items formally identified in this section. Prior to submittal of the Environmental Protection Plan, meet with the Contracting Officer for the purpose of discussing the implementation of the initial Environmental Protection Plan; possible subsequent additions and revisions to the plan including any reporting requirements; and methods for administration of the Contractor's Environmental Plans. The Environmental Protection Plan must be current and maintained onsite by the Contractor. 1.7.1 Compliance
No requirement in this Section will relieve the Contractor of any applicable Federal, State, and local environmental protection laws and regulations. During Construction, the Contractor will be responsible for identifying, implementing, and submitting for approval any additional requirements to be included in the Environmental Protection Plan. 1.7.2 Contents
Include in the environmental protection plan, but not limit it to, the following: a. Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who is(are) responsible for ensuring adherence to the Environmental Protection Plan. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to be removed from the site, if applicable. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training the Contractor's environmental protection personnel. Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel training program. An erosion and sediment control plan which identifies the type and location of the erosion and sediment controls to be provided. The plan must include monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that the control measures are in compliance with the erosion and sediment control plan, Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. A Storm
b.
c.
d.
e.
Ft. Detrick, MD
Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) may be substituted for this plan. f. Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials on the site. Traffic control plans including measures to reduce erosion of temporary roadbeds by construction traffic, especially during wet weather. Plan shall include measures to minimize the amount of mud transported onto paved public roads by vehicles or runoff. Work area plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the area and identifying the areas of limited use or nonuse. Plan should include measures for marking the limits of use areas including methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas. Drawing showing the location of borrow areas. Include in the Spill Control plan the procedures, instructions, and reports to be used in the event of an unforeseen spill of a substance regulated by 40 CFR 68, 40 CFR 302, 40 CFR 355, and/or regulated under State or Local laws and regulations. The Spill Control Plan supplements the requirements of EM 385-1-1. Include in this plan, as a minimum: (1) The name of the individual who will report any spills or hazardous substance releases and who will follow up with complete documentation. This individual will immediately notify the Contracting Officer and Facility Response Personnel in addition to the legally required Federal, State, and local reporting channels (including the National Response Center 1-800-424-8802) if a reportable quantity is released to the environment. Include in the plan a list of the required reporting channels and telephone numbers. (2) The name and qualifications of the individual who will be responsible for implementing and supervising the containment and cleanup. (3) Training requirements for Contractor's personnel and methods of accomplishing the training. (4) A list of materials and equipment to be immediately available at the job site, tailored to cleanup work of the potential hazard(s) identified. (5) The names and locations of suppliers of containment materials and locations of additional fuel oil recovery, cleanup, restoration, and material-placement equipment available in case of an unforeseen spill emergency. (6) The methods and procedures to be used for expeditious contaminant cleanup. k. A non-hazardous solid waste disposal plan identifying methods and locations for solid waste disposal including clearing debris and
g.
h.
i. j.
Ft. Detrick, MD
schedules for disposal. (1) Identify any subcontractors responsible for the transportation and disposal of solid waste. Submit licenses or permits for solid waste disposal sites that are not a commercial operating facility. (2) Evidence of the disposal facility's acceptance of the solid waste must be attached to this plan during the construction. Attach a copy of each of the Non-hazardous Solid Waste Diversion Reports to the disposal plan. Submit the report for the previous quarter on the first working day after the first quarter that non-hazardous solid waste has been disposed and/or diverted (e.g., the first working day of January, April, July, and October). (3) Indicate in the report the total amount of waste generated and total amount of waste diverted in cubic yards or tons along with the percent that was diverted. (4) A recycling and solid waste minimization plan with a list of measures to reduce consumption of energy and natural resources. Detail in the plan the Contractor's actions to comply with and to participate in Federal, State, Regional, and local government sponsored recycling programs to reduce the volume of solid waste at the source. m. An air pollution control plan detailing provisions to assure that dust, debris, materials, trash, etc., do not become air borne and travel off the project site. A contaminant prevention plan that: identifies potentially hazardous substances to be used on the job site; identifies the intended actions to prevent introduction of such materials into the air, water, or ground; and details provisions for compliance with Federal, State, and local laws and regulations for storage and handling of these materials. In accordance with EM 385-1-1, a copy of the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and the maximum quantity of each hazardous material to be onsite at any given time must be included in the contaminant prevention plan. Update the plan as new hazardous materials are brought onsite or removed from the site. A waste water management plan that identifies the methods and procedures for management and/or discharge of waste waters which are directly derived from construction activities, such as concrete curing water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water, hydrostatic test water, and water used in flushing of lines. If a settling/retention pond is required, the plan must include the design of the pond including drawings, removal plan, and testing requirements for possible pollutants. If land application will be the method of disposal for the waste water, the plan must include a sketch showing the location for land application along with a description of the pretreatment methods to be implemented. If surface discharge will be the method of disposal, include a copy of the permit and associated documents as an attachment prior to discharging the waste water. If disposal is to a sanitary sewer, the plan must include documentation that the Waste Water Treatment Plant Operator has approved the flow rate, volume, and type of discharge. A historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological resources and wetlands plan that defines procedures for identifying and
n.
o.
p.
Ft. Detrick, MD
protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands known to be on the project site: and/or identifies procedures to be followed if historical archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands not previously known to be onsite or in the area are discovered during construction. Include in the plan methods to assure the protection of known or discovered resources, identifying lines of communication between Contractor personnel and the Contracting Officer. q. Include and update a pesticide treatment plan, as information becomes available. Include in the plan: sequence of treatment, dates, times, locations, pesticide trade name, EPA registration numbers, authorized uses, chemical composition, formulation, original and applied concentration, application rates of active ingredient (i.e. pounds of active ingredient applied), equipment used for application and calibration of equipment. Federal, State, Regional and Local pest management record keeping and reporting requirements as well as any additional Installation Project Office specific requirements are the Contractor's responsibility in conformance with DA AR 200-5 Pest Management, Chapter 2, Section III "Pest Management Records and Reports" and AFI 32-1053 Sections 3.4.13 and 3.4.14 for data required to be reported to the Installation. Appendix
1.7.3
Attach to the Environmental Protection Plan, as an appendix, copies of all environmental permits, permit application packages, approvals to construct, notifications, certifications, reports, and termination documents. 1.8 PROTECTION FEATURES
This paragraph supplements the Contract Clause PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS. Prior to start of any onsite construction activities, the Contractor and the Contracting Officer will make a joint condition survey. Immediately following the survey, the Contractor will prepare a brief report including a plan describing the features requiring protection under the provisions of the Contract Clauses, which are not specifically identified on the drawings as environmental features requiring protection along with the condition of trees, shrubs and grassed areas immediately adjacent to the site of work and adjacent to the Contractor's assigned storage area and access route(s), as applicable. This survey report will be signed by both the the Contractor and the Contracting Officer upon mutual agreement as to its accuracy and completeness. The Contractor must protect those environmental features included in the survey report and any indicated on the drawings, regardless of interference which their preservation may cause to the work under the contract. 1.9 SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Comply with the requirements specified in this Section under ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS AND COMMITMENTS. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT OF CONTRACT DEVIATIONS
Any deviations from the drawings,plans and specifications, requested by the Contractor and which may have an environmental impact, will be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer and may require an extended review, processing, and approval time. The Contracting Officer reserves the right Issued for Construction Section 01 57 20.00 10 - Page 7 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
to disapprove alternate methods, even if they are more cost effective, if the Contracting Officer determines that the proposed alternate method will have an adverse environmental impact. 1.11 NOTIFICATION
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any observed noncompliance with Federal, State or local environmental laws or regulations, permits, and other elements of the Contractor's Environmental Protection plan. After receipt of such notice, the Contractor will inform the Contracting Officer of the proposed corrective action and take such action when approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No time extensions will be granted or equitable adjustments allowed for any such suspensions. This is in addition to any other actions the Contracting Officer may take under the contract, or in accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulation or Federal Law. PART 2 PART 3 3.1 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) EXECUTION ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS AND COMMITMENTS
This paragraph supplements the Contractor's responsibility under the contract clause "PERMITS AND RESPONSIBILITIES" to the extent that the Government has obtained the MDE. Comply with the terms and conditions of the MDE. 3.2 LAND RESOURCES
Confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings and specifications. Identify any land resources to be preserved within the work area prior to the beginning of any construction. Do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, topsoil, and land forms without approval, except in areas indicated on the drawings or specified to be cleared. Ropes, cables, or guys will not be fastened to or attached to any trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized. Provide effective protection for land and vegetation resources at all times, as defined in the following subparagraphs. Remove stone, soil, or other materials displaced into uncleared areas. 3.2.1 Work Area Limits
Mark the areas that need not be disturbed under this contract prior to commencing construction activities. Mark or fence isolated areas within the general work area which are not to be disturbed. Protect monuments and markers before construction operations commence. Where construction operations are to be conducted during darkness, any markers must be visible in the dark. The Contractor's personnel must be knowledgeable of the purpose for marking and/or protecting particular objects. 3.2.2 Landscape
Trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms and other landscape features indicated and defined on the drawings to be preserved must be clearly identified by marking, fencing, or wrapping with boards, or any other approved techniques. Restore landscape features damaged or destroyed Issued for Construction Section 01 57 20.00 10 - Page 8 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
during construction operations outside the limits of the approved work area. 3.2.3 Erosion and Sediment Controls
Providing erosion and sediment control measures in accordance with Federal, State, and local laws and regulations is the Contractor's responsibility. The erosion and sediment controls selected and maintained by the Contractor shall be such that water quality standards are not violated as a result of construction activities. The area of bare soil exposed at any one time by construction operations should be kept to a minimum. Construct or install temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control best management practices (BMPs) as indicated on the drawings and as specified in Section 01 57 23.00 10 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION MEASURES. BMPs may include, but not be limited to, vegetation cover, stream bank stabilization, slope stabilization, silt fences, construction of terraces, interceptor channels, sediment traps, inlet and outfall protection, diversion channels, and sedimentation basins. The Contractor's best management practices must also be in accordance with the Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE), the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), and the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) which may be reviewed at the MDE. Remove any temporary measures after the area has been stabilized. 3.2.4 Contractor Facilities and Work Areas
Place field offices, staging areas, stockpile storage, and temporary buildings in areas designated on the drawings or as directed by the Contracting Officer. Temporary movement or relocation of Contractor facilities will be made only when approved. Erosion and sediment controls must be provided for onsite borrow and spoil areas to prevent sediment from entering nearby waters. Temporary excavation and embankments for plant and/or work areas must be controlled to protect adjacent areas. 3.3 WATER RESOURCES
Monitor all water areas affected by construction activities to prevent pollution of surface and ground waters. Do not apply toxic or hazardous chemicals to soil or vegetation unless otherwise indicated. For construction activities immediately adjacent to impaired surface waters, the Contractor must be capable of quantifying sediment or pollutant loading to that surface water when required by State or Federally issued Clean Water Act permits. 3.3.1 Diversions, and Dewatering Operations
Construction operations for dewatering, tailrace excavation, and tunnel closure will be controlled at all times to maintain compliance with existing State water quality standards and designated uses of the surface water body. Comply with the State of Maryland water quality standards and anti-degradation provisions and the Clean Water Act Section 404, Nation Wide Permit. 3.4 AIR RESOURCES
Equipment operation, activities, or processes will be in accordance with all Federal and State air emission and performance laws and standards.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.4.1
Particulates
Dust particles; aerosols and gaseous by-products from construction activities; and processing and preparation of materials, such as from asphaltic batch plants; must be controlled at all times, including weekends, holidays and hours when work is not in progress. Maintain excavations, stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and temporary access roads, plant sites, spoil areas, borrow areas, and other work areas within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates which would cause the Federal, State, and local air pollution standards to be exceeded or which would cause a hazard or a nuisance. Sprinkling, chemical treatment of an approved type, baghouse, scrubbers, electrostatic precipitators or other methods will be permitted to control particulates in the work area. Sprinkling, to be efficient, must be repeated to keep the disturbed area damp at all times. Provide sufficient, competent equipment available to accomplish these tasks. Perform particulate control as the work proceeds and whenever a particulate nuisance or hazard occurs. Comply with all State and local visibility regulations. 3.4.2 Odors
Odors from construction activities must be controlled at all times. The odors must be in compliance with State regulations and/or local ordinances and may not constitute a health hazard. 3.4.3 Sound Intrusions
Keep construction activities under surveillance and control to minimize environment damage by noise. Comply with the provisions of the Fort Detrick requirements and rules. 3.4.4 Burning
Burning is prohibited on the Government premises. 3.5 CHEMICAL MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND WASTE DISPOSAL
Disposal of wastes will be as directed below, unless otherwise specified in other sections and/or shown on the drawings. 3.5.1 Solid Wastes
Place solid wastes (excluding clearing debris) in containers which are emptied on a regular schedule. Handling, storage, and disposal must be conducted to prevent contamination. Employ segregation measures so that no hazardous or toxic waste will become co-mingled with solid waste. Transport solid waste off Government property and dispose of it in compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements for solid waste disposal. A Subtitle D RCRA permitted landfill will be the minimum acceptable offsite solid waste disposal option. Verify that the selected transporters and disposal facilities have the necessary permits and licenses to operate. Comply with site procedures, Federal, State, and local laws and regulations pertaining to the use of landfill areas. 3.5.2 Chemicals and Chemical Wastes
Dispense chemicals ensuring no spillage to the ground or water. Perform and document periodic inspections of dispensing areas to identify leakage and initiate corrective action. This documentation will be periodically Issued for ConstructionSection 01 57 20.00 10 - Page 10 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
reviewed by the Government. Collect chemical waste in corrosion resistant, compatible containers. Collection drums must be monitored and removed to a staging or storage area when contents are within 6 inches of the top. Wastes will be classified, managed, stored, and disposed of in accordance with Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. 3.5.3 Contractor Generated Hazardous Wastes/Excess Hazardous Materials
Hazardous wastes are defined in 40 CFR 261, or are as defined by applicable State and local regulations. Hazardous materials are defined in 49 CFR 171 - 178. At a minimum, manage and store hazardous waste in compliance with 40 CFR 262. Take sufficient measures to prevent spillage of hazardous and toxic materials during dispensing. Segregate hazardous waste from other materials and wastes, protect it from the weather by placing it in a safe covered location, and take precautionary measures such as berming or other appropriate measures against accidental spillage. Storage, describing, packaging, labeling, marking, and placarding of hazardous waste and hazardous material in accordance with 49 CFR 171 - 178, State, and local laws and regulations is the Contractor's responsibility. Transport Contractor generated hazardous waste off Government property within 60 days in accordance with the Environmental Protection Agency and the Department of Transportation laws and regulations. Dispose of hazardous waste in compliance with Federal, State and local laws and regulations. Spills of hazardous or toxic materials must be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer. Cleanup and cleanup costs due to spills are the Contractor's responsibility. The disposition of Contractor generated hazardous waste and excess hazardous materials are the Contractor's responsibility. 3.5.4 Fuel and Lubricants
Storage, fueling and lubrication of equipment and motor vehicles must be conducted in a manner that affords the maximum protection against spill and evaporation. Manage and store fuel, lubricants and oil in accordance with all Federal, State, Regional, and local laws and regulations. Used lubricants and used oil to be discarded must be stored in marked corrosion-resistant containers and recycled or disposed in accordance with 40 CFR 279, State, and local laws and regulations. Storage of fuel on the project site will be in accordance with all Federal, State, Garrison, and local laws and regulations. 3.5.5 Waste Water
Disposal of waste water will be as specified below. a. Waste water from construction activities, such as onsite material processing, concrete curing, foundation and concrete clean-up, water used in concrete trucks, forms, etc. will not be allowed to enter water ways or to be discharged prior to being treated to remove pollutants. Dispose of the construction related waste water off-Government property in accordance with all Federal, State, Regional and Local laws and regulations. For discharge of ground water, the Contractor will obtain a State or Federal permit specific for pumping and discharging ground water prior to surface discharging. Surface discharge in accordance with all Federal, State, Garrison and local laws and regulations. Water generated from the flushing of lines after disinfection or
b.
c.
Ft. Detrick, MD
disinfection in conjunction with hydrostatic testing will be land applied in accordance with all Federal, State, and local laws and regulations for land application or discharged into the sanitary sewer with prior approval and notification to the Waste Water Treatment Plant's Operator. 3.6 RECYCLING AND WASTE MINIMIZATION
Participate in State and local government sponsored recycling programs. 3.7 NON-HAZARDOUS SOLID WASTE DIVERSION REPORT
Maintain an inventory of non-hazardous solid waste diversion and disposal of construction and demolition debris. Submit a report to the Contracting Officer on the first working day after each fiscal year quarter, starting the first quarter that non-hazardous solid waste has been generated. Include the following in the report: a. Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Disposed = (_____) in cubic yards or tons, as appropriate. Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Recycled = (_____) in cubic yards or tons, as appropriate. Total C&D Debris Generated = (_____) in cubic yards or tons, as appropriate. Waste Sent to Waste-To-Energy Incineration Plant (This amount should not be included in the recycled amount) = (_____) in cubic yards or tons, as appropriate. HISTORICAL, ARCHAEOLOGICAL, AND CULTURAL RESOURCES
b.
c.
d.
3.8
If during excavation or other construction activities any previously unidentified or unanticipated historical, archaeological, and cultural resources are discovered or found, all activities that may damage or alter such resources will be temporarily suspended. Resources covered by this paragraph include but are not limited to: any human skeletal remains or burials; artifacts; shell, midden, bone, charcoal, or other deposits; rock or coral alignments, pavings, wall, or other constructed features; and any indication of agricultural or other human activities. Upon such discovery or find, immediately notify the Contracting Officer so that the appropriate authorities may be notified and a determination made as to their significance and what, if any, special disposition of the finds should be made. Cease all activities that may result in impact to or the destruction of these resources. Secure the area and prevent employees or other persons from trespassing on, removing, or otherwise disturbing such resources. 3.9 BIOLOGICAL RESOURCES
Minimize interference with, disturbance to, and damage to fish, wildlife, and plants including their habitat. The protection of threatened and endangered animal and plant species, including their habitat, is the Contractor's responsibility in accordance with Federal, State, Regional, and local laws and regulations. 3.10 INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT
In order to minimize impacts to existing fauna and flora, the Contractor Issued for ConstructionSection 01 57 20.00 10 - Page 12 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
through the Contracting Officer, must coordinate with the Installation Pest Management Coordinator (IPMC) at the earliest possible time prior to pesticide application. Discuss integrated pest management strategies with the IPMC and receive concurrence from the IPMC through the COR prior to the application of any pesticide associated with these specifications. Installation Project Office Pest Management personnel will be given the opportunity to be present at all meetings concerning treatment measures for pest or disease control and during application of the pesticide. The use and management of pesticides are regulated under 40 CFR 152 - 186. 3.10.1 Pesticide Delivery and Storage
Deliver pesticides to the site in the original, unopened containers bearing legible labels indicating the EPA registration number and the manufacturer's registered uses. Store pesticides according to manufacturer's instructions and under lock and key when unattended. 3.10.2 Qualifications
For the application of pesticides, use the services of a subcontractor whose principal business is pest control. The subcontractor must be licensed and certified in the state where the work is to be performed. 3.10.3 Pesticide Handling Requirements
Formulate, treat with, and dispose of pesticides and associated containers in accordance with label directions and use the clothing and personal protective equipment specified on the labeling for use during all phases of the application. Furnish Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all pesticide products. 3.10.4 Application
Apply pesticides using a State Certified Pesticide Applicator in accordance with EPA label restrictions and recommendation. The Certified Applicator must wear clothing and personal protective equipment as specified on the pesticide label. The Contracting Officer will designate locations for water used in formulating. Do not allow the equipment to overflow. All equipment must be inspected for leaks, clogging, wear, or damage and repaired prior to application of pesticide. 3.11 PREVIOUSLY USED EQUIPMENT
Clean all previously used construction equipment prior to bringing it onto the project site. Ensure that the equipment is free from soil residuals, egg deposits from plant pests, noxious weeds, and plant seeds. Consult with the USDA jurisdictional office for additional cleaning requirements. 3.12 MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION FACILITIES
Maintain permanent and temporary pollution control facilities and devices for the duration of the contract or for that length of time construction activities create the particular pollutant. 3.13 MILITARY MUNITIONS
In the event military munitions, as defined in 40 CFR 260, are discovered or uncovered, the Contractor will immediately stop work in that area and immediately inform the Contracting Officer. Issued for ConstructionSection 01 57 20.00 10 - Page 13 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.14
TRAINING OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL
The Contractor's personnel must be trained in all phases of environmental protection and pollution control. Conduct environmental protection/pollution control meetings for all personnel prior to commencing construction activities. Additional meetings must be conducted for new personnel and when site conditions change. Include in the training and meeting agenda: methods of detecting and avoiding pollution; familiarization with statutory and contractual pollution standards; installation and care of devices, vegetative covers, and instruments required for monitoring purposes to ensure adequate and continuous environmental protection/pollution control; anticipated hazardous or toxic chemicals or wastes, and other regulated contaminants; recognition and protection of archaeological sites, artifacts, wetlands, and endangered species and their habitat that are known to be in the area. 3.15 POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP
The Contractor will clean up all areas used for construction in accordance with Contract Clause: "Cleaning Up". Unless otherwise instructed in writing by the Contracting Officer, obliterate all signs of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work area, structures, foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess or waste materials, and other vestiges of construction prior to final acceptance of the work. The disturbed area must be graded, filled and the entire area seeded unless otherwise indicated. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 57 23.00 10 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION MEASURES
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM D 4439 ASTM D 4491 (2004) Geosynthetics (1999; R 2004) Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity (2004) Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles (1991; R 2003) Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles (2004) Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile (2002) Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples
ASTM D 4533
ASTM D 4632
ASTM D 4751
ASTM D 4873
1.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Contractor shall implement the storm water pollution prevention measures to prevent sediment from entering streams or water bodies as specified in this Section in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION, and the requirements of the National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit attached to that Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-07 Certificates Mill Certificate or Affidavit Certificate attesting that the Contractor has met all specified requirements.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.4
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
The controls and measures required by the Contractor are described below. 1.4.1 Stabilization Practices
The stabilization practices to be implemented shall include temporary seeding, mulching, geotextiles, sod stabilization, vegetative buffer strips, erosion control mats, protection of trees, preservation of mature vegetation, etc. On his daily CQC Report, the Contractor shall record the dates when the major grading activities occur, (e.g., clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading); when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site; and when stabilization practices are initiated. Except as provided in paragraphs UNSUITABLE CONDITIONS and NO ACTIVITY FOR LESS THAN 21 DAYS, stabilization practices shall be initiated as soon as practicable, but no more than 14 days, in any portion of the site where construction activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. 1.4.1.1 Unsuitable Conditions
Where the initiation of stabilization measures by the fourteenth day after construction activity temporarily or permanently ceases is precluded by unsuitable conditions caused by the weather, stabilization practices shall be initiated as soon as practicable after conditions become suitable. 1.4.1.2 No Activity for Less Than 21 Days
When the total time period in which construction activity is temporarily ceased on a portion of the site is 21 days minimum, stabilization practices do not have to be initiated on that portion of the site until 14 days have elapsed after construction activity temporarily ceased. 1.4.2 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. Structural Practices Silt fences. Straw bales. Diversion dikes. Drainage swales. Check dams. Subsurface drains. Pipe Slope drains. Level spreaders. Storm drain inlet protection. Rock outlet protection. Sediment traps. Reinforced soil retaining systems. Gabions. Sediment basins. from exposed and the discharge practices shall process to
Structural practices shall be implemented to divert flows soils, temporarily store flows, or otherwise limit runoff of pollutants from exposed areas of the site. Structural be implemented in a timely manner during the construction minimize erosion and sediment runoff. 1.4.2.1 Silt Fences
The Contractor shall provide silt fences as a temporary structural practice Issued for Construction Section 01 57 23.00 10 - Page 2 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
to minimize erosion and sediment runoff. Silt fences shall be properly installed to effectively retain sediment immediately after completing each phase of work where erosion would occur in the form of sheet and rill erosion (e.g., clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading). Silt fences shall be installed in the locations indicated on the drawings. Final removal of silt fence barriers shall be upon approval by the Contracting Officer. 1.4.2.2 Straw Bales
The Contractor shall provide bales of straw as a temporary structural practice to minimize erosion and sediment runoff. If bales are used, the bales shall be properly placed to effectively retain sediment immediately after completing each phase of work (e.g., clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading) in each independent runoff area (e.g., after clearing and grubbing in a area between a ridge and drain, bales shall be placed as work progresses, bales shall be removed/replaced/ relocated as needed for work to progress in the drainage area). Areas where straw bales are to be used are shown on the drawings. Final removal of straw bale barriers shall be upon approval by the Contracting Officer. Rows of bales of straw shall be provided as follows: a. b. Along the downhill perimeter edge of all areas disturbed. Along the top of the slope or top bank of drainage ditches, channels, swales, etc. that traverse disturbed areas. Along the toe of all cut slopes and fill slopes of the construction areas. Perpendicular to the flow in the bottom of existing drainage ditches, channels, swales, etc. that traverse disturbed areas or carry runoff from disturbed areas. Rows shall be spaced as shown on the drawings. Perpendicular to the flow in the bottom of new drainage ditches, channels, and swales. Rows shall be spaced as shown on the drawings. At the entrance to culverts that receive runoff from disturbed areas. Diversion Dikes
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.4.2.3
Diversion dikes shall have a maximum channel slope of 2 percent and shall be adequately compacted to prevent failure. The minimum height measured from the top of the dike to the bottom of the channel shall be 18 inches. The minimum base width shall be 6 feet and the minimum top width shall be 2 feet. The Contractor shall ensure that the diversion dikes are not damaged by construction operations or traffic. Diversion dikes shall be located as shown on the drawings. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS COMPONENTS FOR SILT FENCES Filter Fabric ASTM D 4439, and into a stable network The filament shall at least 85 percent
The geotextile shall comply with the requirements of shall consist of polymeric filaments which are formed such that filaments retain their relative positions. consist of a long-chain synthetic polymer composed of Issued for Construction Section 01 57 23.00 10 - Page 3 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
by weight of ester, propylene, or amide, and shall contain stabilizers and/or inhibitors added to the base plastic to make the filaments resistance to deterioration due to ultraviolet and heat exposure. Synthetic filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of six months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 to 120 degrees F. The filter fabric shall meet the following requirements: FILTER FABRIC FOR SILT SCREEN FENCE PHYSICAL PROPERTY Grab Tensile Elongation (percent) Trapezoid Tear Permittivity AOS (U.S. Std Sieve) 2.1.2 TEST PROCEDURE ASTM D 4632 STRENGTH REQUIREMENT 100 lbs. min. 30 percent max. 55 lbs. min. 0.2 sec-1 20-100
ASTM D 4533 ASTM D 4491 ASTM D 4751
Silt Fence Stakes and Posts
The Contractor may use either wooden stakes or steel posts for fence construction. Wooden stakes utilized for silt fence construction, shall have a minimum cross section of 2 by 2 inches when oak is used and 4 by 4 inches when pine is used, and shall have a minimum length of 5 feet. Steel posts (standard "U" or "T" section) utilized for silt fence construction, shall have a minimum weight of 1.33 pounds/linear foot and a minimum length of 5 feet. 2.1.3 Mill Certificate or Affidavit
A mill certificate or affidavit shall be provided attesting that the fabric and factory seams meet chemical, physical, and manufacturing requirements specified above. The mill certificate or affidavit shall specify the actual Minimum Average Roll Values and shall identify the fabric supplied by roll identification numbers. The Contractor shall submit a mill certificate or affidavit signed by a legally authorized official from the company manufacturing the filter fabric. 2.1.4 Identification Storage and Handling
Filter fabric shall be identified, stored and handled in accordance with ASTM D 4873. 2.2 COMPONENTS FOR STRAW BALES
The straw in the bales shall be stalks from oats, wheat, rye, barley, rice, or from grasses such as byhalia, bermuda, etc., furnished in air dry condition. The bales shall have a standard cross section of 14 by 18 inches. All bales shall be either wire-bound or string-tied. The Contractor may use either wooden stakes or steel posts to secure the straw bales to the ground. Wooden stakes utilized for this purpose, shall have a minimum dimensions of 2 by 2 inches in cross section and shall have a minimum length of 3 feet. Steel posts (standard "U" or "T" section) utilized for securing straw bales, shall have a minimum weight of 1.33 pounds/linear foot and a minimum length of 3 feet.
Ft. Detrick, MD
PART 3 3.1
EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF SILT FENCES
Silt fences shall extend a minimum of 16 inches above the ground surface and shall not exceed 34 inches above the ground surface. Filter fabric shall be from a continuous roll cut to the length of the barrier to avoid the use of joints. When joints are unavoidable, filter fabric shall be spliced together at a support post, with a minimum 6 inch overlap, and securely sealed. A trench shall be excavated approximately 4 inches wide and 4 inches deep on the upslope side of the location of the silt fence. The 4 by 4 inch trench shall be backfilled and the soil compacted over the filter fabric. Silt fences shall be removed upon approval by the Contracting Officer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF STRAW BALES
Straw bales shall be placed in a single row, lengthwise on the contour, with ends of adjacent bales tightly abutting one another. Straw bales shall be installed so that bindings are oriented around the sides rather than along the tops and bottoms of the bales in order to prevent deterioration of the bindings. The barrier shall be entrenched and backfilled. A trench shall be excavated the width of a bale and the length of the proposed barrier to a minimum depth of 4 inches. After the bales are staked and chinked (gaps filled by wedging with straw), the excavated soil shall be backfilled against the barrier. Backfill soil shall conform to the ground level on the downhill side and shall be built up to 4 inches against the uphill side of the barrier. Loose straw shall be scattered over the area immediately uphill from a straw bale barrier to increase barrier efficiency. Each bale shall be securely anchored by at least two stakes driven through the bale. The first stake or steel post in each bale shall be driven toward the previously laid bale to force the bales together. Stakes or steel pickets shall be driven a minimum 18 inches deep into the ground to securely anchor the bales. 3.3 MAINTENANCE
The Contractor shall maintain the temporary and permanent vegetation, erosion and sediment control measures, and other protective measures in good and effective operating condition by performing routine inspections to determine condition and effectiveness, by restoration of destroyed vegetative cover, and by repair of erosion and sediment control measures and other protective measures. The following procedures shall be followed to maintain the protective measures. 3.3.1 Silt Fence Maintenance
Silt fences shall be inspected in accordance with paragraph INSPECTIONS. Any required repairs shall be made promptly. Close attention shall be paid to the repair of damaged silt fence resulting from end runs and undercutting. Should the fabric on a silt fence decompose or become ineffective, and the barrier is still necessary, the fabric shall be replaced promptly. Sediment deposits shall be removed when deposits reach one-third of the height of the barrier. When a silt fence is no longer required, it shall be removed. The immediate area occupied by the fence and any sediment deposits shall be shaped to an acceptable grade. The areas disturbed by this shaping shall receive erosion control.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.3.2
Straw Bale Maintenance
Straw bale barriers shall be inspected in accordance with paragraph INSPECTIONS. Close attention shall be paid to the repair of damaged bales, end runs and undercutting beneath bales. Necessary repairs to barriers or replacement of bales shall be accomplished promptly. Sediment deposits shall be removed when deposits reach one-half of the height of the barrier. Bale rows used to retain sediment shall be turned uphill at each end of each row. When a straw bale barrier is no longer required, it shall be removed. The immediate area occupied by the bales and any sediment deposits shall be shaped to an acceptable grade. The areas disturbed by this shaping shall be seeded in accordance with Section 32 92 19 SEEDING. 3.3.3 Diversion Dike Maintenance
Diversion dikes shall be inspected in accordance with paragraph INSPECTIONS. Close attention shall be paid to the repair of damaged diversion dikes and necessary repairs shall be accomplished promptly. When diversion dikes are no longer required, they shall be shaped to an acceptable grade. The areas disturbed by this shaping shall be seeded in accordance with Section 32 92 19 SEEDING. 3.4 3.4.1 INSPECTIONS General
The Contractor shall inspect disturbed areas of the construction site, areas that have not been finally stabilized used for storage of materials exposed to precipitation, stabilization practices, structural practices, other controls, and area where vehicles exit the site at least once every seven (7) calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or more rainfall at the site. Where sites have been finally stabilized, such inspection shall be conducted at least once every month. 3.4.2 Inspections Details
Disturbed areas and areas used for material storage that are exposed to precipitation shall be inspected for evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants entering the drainage system. Erosion and sediment control measures identified in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan shall be observed to ensure that they are operating correctly. Discharge locations or points shall be inspected to ascertain whether erosion control measures are effective in preventing significant impacts to receiving waters. Locations where vehicles exit the site shall be inspected for evidence of offsite sediment tracking. 3.4.3 Inspection Reports
For each inspection conducted, the Contractor shall prepare a report summarizing the scope of the inspection, name(s) and qualifications of personnel making the inspection, the date(s) of the inspection, major observations relating to the implementation of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, maintenance performed, and actions taken. The report shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of the inspection as a part of the Contractor's daily CQC REPORT. A copy of the inspection report shall be maintained on the job site.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.4.4 Monthly Inspection Report and Certification Form for Erosion and Sediment Controls a. On the first working day of each month the Contractor shall complete, sign, and submit the original form to the State of Maryland, Department of the Environment. On the first working day of each month the Contractor shall also furnish one copy of the form submitted to the Contracting Officer as part of the Contractor's daily CQC Report and attach a copy of the completed form to the Plan. Unless otherwise notified by the OPC, the Contractor shall submit the Monthly Inspection Report and Certification Forms for an additional two months after the final completion of all storm water pollution prevention measures required in this contract have been implemented. -- End of Section --
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 1.1 A. B. C. D. 1.2 A.
GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES
Basic product requirements. Product identification. Transportation and handling. Storage and protection. BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS The term "products" means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures and systems forming the work. The term does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. Products Containing Asbestos: No product containing asbestos in any form may be used on this Project. Asbestos products are prohibited. 1. Showing or specifying of any product does not constitute a warranty that such product is deemed not to contain asbestos. So that alternative asbestos-free products may be submitted, Contracting Officer and AE shall be notified if any new material or product shown or specified contains asbestos. Government reserves right to conduct laboratory tests on any product at any time to determine its content. Such tests will be at Government's expense. If a new product which has been installed is found to have asbestos content and such product has been installed without specific written consent of Contracting Officer, provide for complete removal of such product and its replacement with an alternative asbestos free product. In event Contracting Officer requires removal and replacement of new products containing asbestos, refund all costs, including cost of testing to Government. No costs for delay and no extension in contract time will be allowed.
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION Packaging
1.3 1.3.1
Deliver products to site in undamaged condition in manufacturer's original Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 60 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
sealed container or other packaging system. A. Label products with name of material, manufacturer, stock number, and other applicable identifying information such as ASTM designation, size, quantity, color, and shelf life. Attach or enclose instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, installing, testing, and adjusting (as applicable). Nameplates:
B.
1.3.2
Except for required permanent labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplate or trademark on surfaces that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or building exterior. A. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or, where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. In occupied spaces, locate on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous. Nameplate shall contain name of product and manufacturer, model and serial number, capacity, speed, ratings, and other essential operating data. Follow Sections 22 05 53 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION, 23 03 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS and 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage. STORAGE AND PROTECTION Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing among materials and with foreign matter.
B.
1.4 A.
B.
C.
1.5 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Ft. Detrick, MD
G.
Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. PRODUCTS
H.
PART 2
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 61 23 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED (CFCI) EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED AND CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
Contractor Furnished and Contractor Installed (CFCI) equipment listed in the attached schedule shall be provided (furnished and installed) by the Contractor. Technical specifications and drawings for this project will provide the scope of work. 1.2 BID OPTIONS
Follow Section 00100 Bid Schedule for Options that effect equipment listed in attached schedule. Bid Options #20 and #22 are equipment options for BioSafety Cabinets and Sterilizers respectively as indicated on, but not limited to, A6 series drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Z - 01 61 23 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED (CFCI) EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

Tag
Z1116 Z1125 Z1133 Z1134 Z1150 Z1151 Z1368 Z1369 Z1905 Z1906 Z1907 Z2101 Z2103 Z2201 Z2205 Z2207 Z2208 Z2210 Z2223 Z2230 Z2235 Z2303 Z2305 Z2306 Z2307 Z2309 Z2321 Z2322 Z2324 Z2325 Z2326 Z2327 Z2328 Z2329 Z2330
Description
Cage, Security, Heavy Duty Curtain, Air Decontamination Misting Tunnel With Pass-Through Frame and Door and Gravity Conveyor Leveler, Dock, Hydraulic, 6' x 8' Hoist, Motorized Trolley Mounted, Chain, Electrical, 1-ton Capacity Lift, Scissor, Pit Mounted, Hydraulic Hoist, Chain, 1/2 Ton Capacity, 7 Foot Lift Dust Collection System Weapons Cabinet, Class 5 Weapons Clearing Device Lift, Vertical, Barrier-Free Air Hose, Recoil, 25 Foot, Quick Disconnect HVAC Light, Exam, Ceiling Mounted Light, Surg, Ceiling Mtd, Dual, Equal Dia Heads Safelight, Darkroom, Wall or Bench Mounted Marquee, With Blue Strobe Germicidal Lights Uninterruptible Power Supply, Three Phase Intercom - Room To Room O2 Monitor Lavatory, Vitreous China, Wall Hung, P-3C Lavatory, Vitreous China, Undercounter, w/Metering Faucet, P-3 Lavatory, SS, Drop-In, P-21 Lavatory, Wall Hung (High Containment), P-3B Sink, Breakroom, ADA, P-8 Sink, Scullery, One Compartment, 24x24, w/Drain Board, P-12 Sink, Scullery, Three Compartment, Drain Board, P-11 Sink, Scullery, One Compartment w/ 24" Drainboard, Wall Hung, P-16 Sink, Scullery, One Compartment w/ 2 Drainboards, P-15 Sink, Scullery, Single Bowl, One Drain Boards, Foot Pedals & Eyewash, P-18 Sink, Scullery, One Compartment, One Drainboard (ABSL-3E Necropsy), P-13 Sink, Scullery, Three Compartment, Two Drainboards (Glass Wash Area), P-17 Sink, Scullery, One Compartment, One Drainboard, Foot Pedals, P-18A Sink, Scrub, Double, Automatic
CUH2A Smith Carter Hemisphere (JV) S7 - 30 September, 2008

Page 1 of 6

Tag
Description
Sink, Wall Mtd., SS Handwash, Wrist Blades and Gooseneck, P-19 Sink, Chase Mtd., SS, Handwash, Custom, High Containment, P-20 Sink, Chase Mtd., SS, Handwash, Custom, High Containment, Procedure Rooms, P-22 Sink, Chase Mtd., SS, Handwash, Custom, High Containment, Necropsy, P-23 Sink, SS, Handwash, ABSL3 Ante Rooms, P-24 Sink, Wall Mtd., SS, Handwash, w/ SS Piping Enclosure, P-10 Sink, Wall Mtd., SS, Handwash, Hands Free, P-9 Sink, Ultrasonic Cleaner, 2 Bowl Sink, Mop, Molded Stone, 10x36x24, P-4 Sink Service, P-14 Faucet, Service-Sink, P4A Water Closet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet, P-1 Water Closet, Wall hung, Containment, Blow-out, P-1B Urinal, ADA compliant, P-2 Shower, ADA, Clinical Patient Room, P-6C Fountain, Water Cooler, Electric, Dual Height, ADA, P-5 Fountain, Water, ADA, Logistics, P-5A Shower, P-6 Shower, ADA, P-6A Shower, Safety, Recessed, SS (BSL 2), P-7A Eyewash, Counter Top, P-7F Eyewash, Eye/Face, Wall Mounted w/Squeeze Handle, P-7D Shower, Safety, SS, Horizontal Mounting (High Containment), P-7 Shower, High Containment, P-6B Shower, Safety, SS, Chemical Shower, P-7E Shower, Safety, Freestanding, with Eyewash, P-7B Shower, Safety, Recessed, SS, with Eyewash, P-7C Hose Station, w/Hose and Sprayer, Recessed, HS-2 Hose Station, Recessed Wall Mounted, SS, HS-1 Hose Station, Exposed Wall Mounted, SS, HS-4 Hose Station, Steam & Cold Water Mixing Unit, Surface Mounted SS, w/ Retractable Hose Reel, HS-3 Hose Station, Recessed Wall Mounted, SS, 30' Hose, HS-5 Hose Flush Station, Recoil Hose Flush Station, Chlorine Injection Cable Tray

Page 2 of 6

Tag
Description
Refrigerator/Freezer, Pass Thru Ice Maker, Flaked, With Dispenser, 71x19x24 Ice Maker, Compact, 34.25Hx18Wx20.5D Sterilizer, Ethylene Oxide, Benchtop unit Sterilizer, Stm, VAC, 1DO, CAB 21x21x38 Chamber Sterilizer, Stm, Vac, 2 DO, RCSD, 2WLL, 26x26x39 Chamber w/Loading Cart Sterilizer, Stm, Vac, 2 Dr, Cab Mtd, 26x26x26, (Aerobiology Cabinets) Sterilizer, Stm, GV, 1DO, CAB, 26x36x60 Chamber Sterilizer, Stm, VAC, 2DO, RCSD, 2WLL, 26x36x53 Chamber Sterilizer, Stm, GV, VAC, 2DO, RCSD, 2WLL, 49x86x86 Cleaner, Ultrasonic, SNGL Chamber, CAB, F/S Gun, Steam Cabinet, Biosafety, Class II/A2, F/S, 4 ft, UV Cabinet, Biosafety, Class II/A2, F/S, 6 ft, UV Cabinet, Biosafety, Class II/B2, F/S, 6 ft, UV Cabinet, Class III, 10', 2 sided, w/ Rapid Transfer Ports and Dunk Tank Animal Transfer Cart for Class III Cabinet, Docking Cabinet, Class III, Transfer, Stand-alone, with 2 Glove Ports Hood, Distillation, Floor Mounted Hood, Fume, Assembly, 4 ft, w/ Flammable, Vented Base Cabinet Hood, Fume, Assembly, 6 ft, w/ Flammable, Vented Base Cabinet Hood, Fume, Assembly, 8 ft, w/ Flammable, Vented Base Cabinet Hood, Fume, Assembly, 12 ft, w/ Flammable, Vented Base Cabinet Illuminator, Film, 4 Panels, Wall Mounted Illuminator, Film, Double, Wall Mounted Silver Recovery System, 2 Gallon Washer, Laboratory Glassware, Includes Dryers Oven, Depyrogenation Cabinet, Storage, Safety, Built-In, Vented, Flammable,3 Cabinet, Gas Safety Cabinet, Storage, Acid, Undercounter Manifold, Gas Cylinder Cold Room, Walk-in, 11' x 22' Walk-in Chamber, Entomological, 10' X 10' Environmental Room, Freezer, Prefabricated, -20C

Page 3 of 6

Tag
Description
Environmental Room, Cold, Prefabricated, +4C Environmental Room, Warm, Prefabricated, +37C Environmental Room, Freezer, Prefabricated, -40C Tissue Digestor Unit, Alkaline Hydrolosis Pass Box, Stainless Steel Tunnel Washer, 36" wide Double Length Rack Washer Automated Watering, Hose With Quick Disconnect Dispenser, Bedding, With Conveyor Bedding Loading / Dispensing System Bedding Disposal System Isolation Cubicle Table, Procedure, With Hot and Cold Water Hookup Table, Necropsy, 96" x 36" Table, Necropsy, 96" x 36", BSL4 Station, Pathology, Grossing Workstation Dunk Tank In Line Pass Thru Chamber, 1-2 Glove Ports per side Vented Balance Safety Enclosure Water Polisher, Large Volume Track, IV, Ceiling Mounted, 4 Foot Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Cabinet, Narcotics, with Pushbutton Keyless Lock, 16"W x 5"D x 10"H Headwall, Prefabricated, General, 1-2 bed Electric Projection Screen, PS01 Electric Projection Screen, PS02 Projector Lift, PL01 Projector Lift, Large, PL02 Key Box, Electronic Shelving, Storage, Movable Aisle, Manual Shelving, Storage, Movable Aisle, Powered Shelving, 12" x 12" x 12", PAPR Storage Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted, Custom Millwork Rack, Magazine, Wall Mounted Clock, Elapsed Time, Electric

Page 4 of 6

Tag
Description
Millwork, Toilet, Counter, Corian Millwork, Counter Top, Plastic Lam., VIO Offices, 9'x5' Millwork, Pantries, Plastic Lam., Wall Cabinet Millwork, Pantries, Plastic Lam. Doors, Corian Tops, no Uppers Millwork, Display Case, Glass, 3' High, Integral Lighting Millwork, Display Case, Glass, 6' High, Integral Lighting Millwork, Conference Rooms, Credenza, Plastic Lam. Doors, Glass Top Millwork, Main Lobby, Reception Desk Millwork, South Entry, Reception Desk Millwork, Clinic, Reception Desk, Plastic Lam., Glass Millwork, Clinic, Nurses Station, Plastic Lam., Glass Millwork, Break Area, Knowledge Green Millwork, Bench, Stationary, Upholstered Millwork, Work Counter Millwork, Copy Counter, Closed Storage Below Millwork, Whiteboard w/ Integral Fabric Wrapped Tackable Surface Millwork, Tech Touchdown Millwork, Bulletin Board, Pantry Area Millwork, Work Counter, Wall Cabinet, Open Shelving Millwork, Work Counter, Wall Cabinet, Closed Board, Bulletin, 48 x 48 Board, Bulletin, Glass Doors, Lockable, 36" high Board, Bulletin, Glass Doors, Lockable, 48" high Whiteboard, Dry Erase Whiteboard, Dry Erase, Small, 11x17 Whiteboard, With Sliding Panels. Locker, Single Tier, 72x12x18 Locker, 2 Person, Over/Under, 72x12x18 Bench, Locker Room, Floor Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Disposal, Sanitary Napkin, SS, Surface Mounted Hamper, Clothes, Wall Mounted, Custom Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame, 36 x Required Mirror, SS, With SS Frame, 36x18

Page 5 of 6

Tag
Z9933 Z9940 Z9943 Z9945 Z9947 Z9948 Z9950 Z9951 Z9952 Z9953 Z9954 Z9958 Z9960 Z9961 Z9965 Z9990 Z9994 Z9995 Z9996 Z9997 Z9998
Description
Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted with 3/4" Stainless Steel Frame Bench, Stall, Shower, Built In Shelf, Utility, 30" W/ Mop/Broom Holders, SS, Surf Mntd Shelf, 5" D x 24"L, SS, Surface Mounted Shelf, Utility W/ Mop/Broom Holders, SS, Surf Mntd Holder, Mop & Broom, SS, 36" Rod, Shower Curtain, 1"Diameter, W/Curtain & Hooks Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Hook, PAPR Hook, Garment, 6-Hook Strip Bar, Towel, 1" Diameter, SS, Surface Mntd, Psych Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 2 Wall, Shower Use Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Rod, Coat, 6' Suit Hanging System, Stainless Steel Casework System - Type 1, Metal, Fixed Base, Epoxy Tops with or without integral sinks Casework System - Type 2, Stainless Steel, Fixed Base with Stainless Steel Tops with or without Integral Sinks Casework System - Type 3, Metal, Suspended Base Cabinets, Mobile Base Cabinets and Epoxy Tops, with or without integral sinks Casework System - Type 4, Stainless Steel, Custom, with Stainless Steel tops, with or without Integral Sinks Table, Laboratory, Mobile, Metal with Epoxy Top

Page 6 of 6
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 40 CFR 247 Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for Products Containing Recovered Materials
1.2
OBJECTIVES
Government procurement policy is to acquire, in a cost effective manner, items containing the highest percentage of recycled and recovered materials practicable consistent with maintaining a satisfactory level of competition without adversely affecting performance requirements or exposing suppliers' employees to undue hazards from the recovered materials. The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has designated certain items which must contain a specified percent range of recovered or recycled materials. EPA designated products specified in this contract comply with the stated policy and with the EPA guidelines. The Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to use recycled and recovered materials in providing the EPA designated products and in otherwise utilizing recycled and recovered materials in the execution of the work. 1.3 EPA DESIGNATED ITEMS INCORPORATED IN THE WORK
Various sections of the specifications contain requirements for materials that have been designated by EPA as being products which are or can be made with recovered or recycled materials. These items, when incorporated into the work under this contract, shall contain at least the specified percentage of recycled or recovered materials unless adequate justification (non-availability) for non-use is provided. When a designated item is specified as an option to a non-designated item, the designated item requirements apply only if the designated item is used in the work. 1.4 EPA PROPOSED ITEMS INCORPORATED IN THE WORK
Products other than those designated by EPA are still being researched and are being considered for future Comprehensive Procurement Guideline (CPG) designation. It is recommended that these items, when incorporated in the work under this contract, contain the highest practicable percentage of recycled or recovered materials, provided specified requirements are also met.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.5 EPA LISTED ITEMS USED IN CONDUCT OF THE WORK BUT NOT INCORPORATED IN THE WORK There are many products listed in 40 CFR 247 which have been designated or proposed by EPA to include recycled or recovered materials that may be used by the Contractor in performing the work but will not be incorporated into the work. These products include office products, temporary traffic control products, and pallets. It is recommended that these non-construction products, when used in the conduct of the work, contain the highest practicable percentage of recycled or recovered materials and that these products be recycled when no longer needed. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 64 02 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED GOVERNMENT INSTALLED (GFGI) EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
PART 1 1.1 1.1.1
GENERAL WORK BY GOVERNMENT OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Government to Perform Work
Government reserves the right to perform construction or operations relating to the Project with the Government's own forces. Government will provide for coordination of the activities of the Government's own forces with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with each other. 1.1.2 Government Right to Award Separate Contracts
Government will award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the project or other construction or operations on the site. Government will provide for coordination of each separate Contractor with the work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. 1.1.3 Coordination of Activities
The Contractor shall provide for the coordination of the activities of the Government's own forces and of each separate Contractor with the work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. 1.2 Mutual Responsibility
The Contractor shall afford the Government and separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials, equipment and for performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 1.3 Government Provided Equipment
Government Provided (GFGI) equipment listed in the attached schedule will be provided by the Government or under separate contracts. PART 2 PRODUCTS
I / N - 01 64 02 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED GOVERNMENT INSTALLED (GFGI) EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

Tag
I3560 I3580 I3581 I3582 I3584 I3587 I3598 N1104 N1105 N1106 N1108 N1109 N1110 N1111 N1112 N1114 N1117 N1120 N1121 N1122 N1124 N1132 N1145 N1146 N1155 N1156 N1157 N1201 N1202 N1205 N1206 N1207 N1208 N1209 N1210
Description
X-Ray Crystallography Line System MRI Super conductor, BSL3 Animal Research System Positron Emission Tomography (PET) Scan Imaging Scanning System, Containment Prototype (SPECT) NMR, 800 mHz, Including NMR Cyroprobe & Microimaging Accessories Anesthesia Machine, MRI Compatible Camera, MRI Compatible Scale, Roll On, Freestanding, 2000 Pound Capacity Pallet Jack, Electric Pallet Lift, Hydraulic, Manual, 48" Pallet Truck, Hand, 2 Wheel Truck, Hydraulic Lift, Electric Truck, Platform, 4 Wheel Generator, Function Generator, Pulse Trash Compactor, Fixed, Dock Cabinet, Distribution, Mail, 27x40 Shrink Wrap Spinner Storage Bins, Eggcrate, 18" x 20", 16 Compartments Tip Carts Bug Zapper Electric Fork Truck Reader, Bar Code, Hand Held, With Interface Geiger Counters, P32, I125, S35, C14/H3 Jib Crane, Portable, 4000 pound capacity Jib Crane, Portable, 2000 pound capacity Lift, Cherry Picker Scrubber, Floor, Automatic, Rechargeable Shop Vacuum Squeegee Broom Bucket, Mop, With Wringer, 26 Quart Bucket, Small Mop Bucket Dust Pan

Page 1 of 18

Tag
N1211 N1212 N1302 N1303 N1304 N1306 N1307 N1312 N1314 N1321 N1323 N1324 N1326 N1328 N1331 N1335 N1336 N1337 N1338 N1342 N1343 N1344 N1345 N1346 N1347 N1348 N1349 N1353 N1355 N1356 N1357 N1358 N1359 N1360 N1361
Description
Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Cabinet, Storage, Electric Parts Cabinet, Tool, Mobile, With Mechanics Tool Chest Drill Press, Floor Mounted, Tilt Table Punch Press - 24 Inches 3/32 to 2 Inch Capacity Grinder, Pedestal/Mounted, Combination Belt/Disc Saw Saw, Band, Metal Lathe, Toolmakers Meter, Sound Level Milling Machine Milling Machine, Vertical Oscilloscope, With Accessories Sander, Vibrating, Heavy Duty Shears, Sheetmetal, Ring and Circle Vise, Machinists', Swivel Base Wattmeter, Ultrasonic Welder Grinder, Floor Mounted, Pedestal Sandblaster Brake Saw, Cutoff Table Saw Material Rack, Pipes, 3' x 14' Material Rack, Sheetmetal, 5' x 9' Ladder, Step, Small 3 Step Tools, Chest, Mobile Radio, Two-Way Ladder, Step Flash Light, Built-in Charger Block Trimmer Engraver Workbench, 2 Drawer Workbench, Electric, Locker Base

Page 2 of 18

Tag
Description
Weld Table Workbench, 5' x 16' Saw Table, 5' x 8' Table, 5' x 5' Ladder, Aluminum, 5 step, for use with NMR Flags, Command & Staff Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand UPS, Tele/Data Rack Mounted Extinguisher, Fire Manifold, Compressed Gas Switching Module, SM, Gigabit Ethernet Server Switching Module, MM Fiber,Gigabit Ethernet Server Switching Module, Desktop, Fast Ethernet Switch, Local Area Network (LAN) Management Processor Module for LAN Switch Power Supply, 725 W, for LAN Switch Relay Rack, Aluminum Power Supply, Uninterruptable, Rack Mounted Battery Pack, Extended for use with UPS (A0911) Telephone, STU Telephone, Wall Mounted 1 Line, w/ Speaker Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line Telephone Switching System Batteries Rectifiers Equipment Racks Refrigerator, 14 Cubic Feet Refrigerator, 25 Cubic Feet Refrigerator, Lab, SS, 2 Door, 6 Shelves Refrigerator/Freezer, Biological, 1 Door Refrigerator/Freezer, Biological, SS, 2 Door Refrigerator/Freezer, Biological,Upright, 18 Cu Ft Refrigerator, U/C or F/S, 5 Cu Ft Refrigerator, Blood Bank, Glass Do, Dr, 25 Cu Ft Freezer, -20 Deg C, air cooled, 25 Cubic Feet

Page 3 of 18

Tag
Description
Freezer, -20 Deg C, Undercounter Freezer, 2 Section, CRS Freezer, -80C, water cooled Freezer, Biological, -85, 19-25 Cubic Feet, Upright Dewar, LN2 Freezer, LN2 Dewar, 5 L Incubator, Refrigerator Shaker, High Capacity Incubator, Environmental Shaker, Large, Upright Incubator, Shaking, Chest Incubator, Bacteriological, Single Incubator, Bacteriological, 34x37x25 Incubator, Co2, 2 Chamber Incubator, Roller Incubator, Biological, Germinator Incubator Boxes, Constant Temperature Oven, Hybridization Roller Bottle Apparatus, 90 Bottle Stacked Tube Rotator, QL 0590 Microfuge, Refrigerated Centrifuge, High Speed, Refrigerated, w/ Rotors, HEPA Filtration Centrifuge, Heavy Duty, Floor Model, Batch Processing Ultracentrifuge, w/ Rotors, HEPA Filtration Ultracentrifuge, Analytical, Flow Through Microfuge, Non-Refrigerated Microcentrifuge, Refrigerated Centrifuge, Cytology Mass Spectrometer, Quattro Micr Sterilizer, SURG INSTRU & Dressing, 10" DIA CHMBR Cart, Loading, Sterilizable Hood, Laminar Flow, Horizontal, Free Standing, 6ft Photo Enlarger Gel Imager with Computer Gel Spot Cutter Light Box

Page 4 of 18

Tag
Description
UV Light Box/Gel Document System/Thermal Printer Imaging System, BioRad, VersaDoc Washer, Print, Automatic, Drum or Tilt/Rock Processor, Color Film, High Capacity Microscope, Nikon TE2000-E2 Microscope, Confocal, Tabletop Microscope, Binocular Microscope, Binocular, Phase Contrast Microscope, Dark Field Microscope, Fluorescence with Camera Microscope, Inverted, Tissue Culture with Camera Microscope, Light Microscope, Stereo, Photographic, Desk Top Microscope, Compound, Photographic Microscope, Teaching, Multiple Head Microscope, Olympus DSU, with Camera and Monitor Microscope, Inverted, Photographic Microscope System, Confocal, Laser, BioRad, w/Vibration Table, Computer and Monitors Table, Vibration Isolation (Pathology), 48" Microscope, Image Xpress Ultra Microscope, Digital, Keyence VHX-600 Electron Microscope-Scanning Electron Microscope-Transmission Tissue Processor, Electron Microscopy Apron, Lead Lined Screen, X-Ray, Protective, Mobile, Adjustable Fluoroscopic, Digital, Mobile, C-Arm Screener, X-Ray, Package Processor, Film, 150 Seconds Rack, Apron/Gloves, Mobile Injector, CT Camera Camera, Fundus, Digital Camera, Identification, Film Camera Arm

Page 5 of 18

Tag
Description
Camera, Digital, High Resolution Bottle Washer, Electronic Cabinet, Storage, Flammable, Freestanding Cabinet, Storage, Acid, Floor Standing, Shelves Cabinet, Storage, Flammable, Benchtop, with Wheeled Trolley Cabinet, Storage, Acid, Benchtop, with Wheeled Trolley Rack, Storage, Cylinder, Gas Restraint, Cylinder, Wall Mounted Irradiator, Cobalt 60 Nitrogen Generator Bioreactor, 30L Liquid Handler, Robotic PAPR with Battery Charger Suit, Containment, with Filters Dry Ice Transporter/Storage Chest VHP Generator, Mobile, 1,000 Cubic Foot Capacity Scrubber, Storage Tank, RailCar Vent Emmissions Aerosolizer System Flow Control Gillibrator Detector, Ferrous, MRI Cabinet, Lead Shielded Shield, Radiation, Mobile, 48" wide Screen, Xray, Protective, Mobile Rodent Rack & Cages, Ventilated Rack/Shelving, Mouse, 5 Tier, 25 Cages Rack/Shelving, Mouse, 5 Tier, Double Sided Rack/Shelving, Mouse, 5 Tier , Single Sided Rack, 4 Each, Single Cage, Primate Rack, Primate, One over One Cage, Transport, Aluminum, Large Kennel, Large Animal, Intensive Care, Mobile Cart, Animal Transfer, Containment Cart, Animal Transfer, Containment, non-ferrous Animal Transfer Station (Change Station) 5'

Page 6 of 18

Tag
Description
Animal Transfer Station (Change Station) 6' Bulk Cart Scale, Weighing, Animal, Large Balance, Small Automatic Coverslipper Regulator, Vacuum Chill Table Table, Operating, Pedestal, 5 Section Table, Examination/Treatment, Animal, CRS Table, Tick with Stick Moat Anesthesia Apparatus, 3 Gas Anesthesia/Ventilator System, Veterinary Flowmeter, Air, Connect w/50 PSI Supply Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Monitor, Pulse, Temperature Needle Puller, (Kopf) Resuscitator, Bag-Mask, Hand Operated Stethoscope, Infared Electrocautery Blanket, Heating Air (Bair Hugger) Vacuum, HEPA, Portable Scale, Autopsy Cutting Board Bone Saw Rack Lock Down Fiberglass Pallets Feed Bin Clipper, Hair, Animal Bin, Toy Filler, Bottle, For Lab Animals Coagulation Instrument Telemetry System, Integrated (ITS) Telemetry System (DSI), Small Animal Holding Room Telemetry System (DSI), Large Animal Holding Room Veterinary Dental Machine

Page 7 of 18

Tag
Description
Wet Tissue Storage Cabinet, Ventilated, Mopec Netting, Insect Incubator, Compact, Tabletop Environmental Shaker, Tabletop Centrifuge, Refrigerated, Benchtop Centrifuge, Benchtop Centrifuge, ABI, Benchtop Centrifuge, Continuous Flow, Benchtop Centrifuge, Lightcycler Carousel, Benchtop Bath, Water, Tissue Processing Bath, Water, Serology, General Purpose Stainer, Slide, Automatic, Hematology Sonicator Sonifier System, Vacuum Forming Media Dispenser, Automated Cryostat Microtome, Rotary, Tilt, Bench Mounted Microtome, Ultra Filler, Vial Kettle, 40 L, Dispensing Valve, Agitator Stirrer, Hot Plate, Magnetic Heating Block Oven, Drying, Forced Air Stirrer, Magnetic Microarray Spotter Analyzer, Blood Gas Analyzer, Vitros ECi Immunodiagnostic System Analyzer, DNA, Applied Biosystems Analyzer, pH/Blood Gas Analyzer, Vitros 350 Chemistry System with UPS Bioreactor, 1 L Bioreactor, 10 L Pilot Vitek 2 Compact Coulter Act 5 Diffractor

Page 8 of 18

Tag
Description
Coulter Counter Counter, Bacteria Counter, Gamma, RIA, Manual Bioanalyzer, 2100 Cytometer, Flow, Advanced Laboratory Cytometer, Flow, Clinical Laboratory Cytometer, Flow, LSRII 15 color/3 lasers FACSorter, with Computer and Monitor, Model FACS Calibur Clinitek 500 Scintillation, Liquid Detection, MicroBeta, TriLux HPLC Scintillation Counter Analyzer, Cytokine, MSD Analyzer, Cytokine, BioRad Mass Spectrometer, FTMS Mass Spectrometer, LC/MS/MS Trap Mass Spectrometer, LTQ Orbitrap Robotic Station, Liquid Handling System Robotic Device, Crystallization Cell-Dyn 3700 Calorimeter, Differential Scanning Thermal Mixer UV Stratalinker Vibration Densimeter PCR Hood, Non Ventilated, Purifier (Dead Air) PCR Workstation, Clean Hood, 4' PCR, Realtime, ABI PCR, Realtime, Lightcycler PCR, Realtime, JBAIDS Thermal Cycler, R.A.P.I.D Thermal Cycler, Standard PCR Workstation, Clean Hood, Misonix, 6ft Spectrophotometer, UV/Vis, Basic Spectropolarimeter, CD Waterbath, Small, Recirculating

Page 9 of 18

Tag
Description
Homogenizer, CEPA Apparatus, Culture, Anaerobic Bulk Media Filteration Homogenizer, Tissue Hematocrit Accessory, Automatic Chemistry Analyzer, I-STAT Osmometer LC (2D HPLC), Fraction Collector, DAD Microarray, Molecular Device Gene Pix Scanner Flowmetric Plate Reader Microchip Array Surface Plasmon Resonance, BIACOR Model T100 Spectrometer, FT-IR Fluorimeter Field Flow Fraction and Light Scattering Analysis DNA Gel Separation Equipment Analyzer, DNA, Agilent Tech E.I.A. Analysis System, Advanced Plate Washer System, E.I.A. Plate Reader, ELISA Cell Sorter, Canto II, with Computer and Monitor Amnis, with Computer and Monitor Sequencer, ABI Solid Table, Balance, Marble Meter, pH Metal Detector, Hand Held Wand Balance, Analytical, Laboratory/Pharmacy Balance, Electronic, Laboratory/Pharmacy PCR Station, UV, CBS Scientific Pipetter, Multichannel Pipetter, Single Channel Mixer, Vortex, Test Tube Rotator, Mixer Western Blot Tissue Cassette Labeler Tissue Cassette Storage Cabinet

Page 10 of 18

Tag
Description
Tissue Embed Center Tissue Slide Labeler Slide Dryers Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Water Polisher, Small Volume Calorimeter, Isothermal Titration Critical Point Dryer Disc Array, 4 Terrabyte for MS Data Analysis Dynamic Light Scattering DNA Synthesizer, ABI Imager, Gel Blot, Typhoon Heat Sealer, Impulse Impulse Sealer Biocore Reader Microfluid Station, Biomech 2000 Bioflo 310 BioFlex 2000 Gel Doc, BioRad XR Quigen Biorobot Rotovap Paraffin Warming Tank Vibratome Vacuum Evaporator Trans Illuminator Speed Vac, Savent Microbial Indentification System, The Sherlock Microbial Characterization System, RiboPrinter Electrophoresis, Mini, Vertical Biorad, Model 165-8000 Electrophoresis Power Supply Electrophoresis, 2D Gel Detector, UV UV Lightbox Dessicator, Portable, Static Dissipative PVC Skid, Ultrafiltration Affymetrix Station, with UPS

Page 11 of 18

Tag
Description
Microfluidizer Processor, Benchtop Omnilog Smart Cycler Scale, Weighing, 300 Pound Capacity Distribution System, Medication, Automatic Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Monitor, Vital Signs Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Stand, IV, Adjustable Pump, Volumetric, Infusion, Single Line Defibrillator Analyzer, Automatic, Portable Electrocardiograph, 12 Lead, Portable Vacuum Pump Stand, Mayo Electrical Safety Analyzer Cabinet, Narcotic, U/C or Ctr, With Safe, 24x24x12 Cabinet, Narcotics, Safe, 48x24x24 Rail, Accessory Mounting, Length As Required Slit Lamp Chair, Blood Donor, Recliner, w/Motor, Armrest Patient Chair, Mobile Bed, Patient, Electric Table, Overbed Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Table, Instrument/Dressing, Mobile Wheelchair, Patient Transport, Folding Screen, Tripod Assistive Listening System, AL01 Audio Amplifier, AMP01 Audio Amplifier, AMP02 Media Recorder, SR01 Universal Transmitter, TX01 Recorder / Player, Cassette, Video, VHS Tripod, Camera Mixer, Audio Matrix, MX01

Page 12 of 18

Tag
Description
Mixer, Telephone Hyrid, MX02 Audioconference System, Table-Top, AS01 Videoconference System Portable, AS02 Camera, CCD, Pan/Tilt, CM01 Rack, Equipment, RX01 Speakers, Ceiling, SP01 Video, CODEC, VC01 Audiovisual Control System, CS01 Audiovisual Control System with AV Switcher/Amp, CS02 Digital Signage Media Player, DS01 Digital Signage Software and Server, DS02 Equipment Rack, RK01 Interface, Display, PC RGBS, IFC01 Interface, Ethernet Control, IFC02 LCD Display, 65",w/Speakers, includes wall bracket, LD01 Lectern, Column Lectern, Presenter, High Tech, Multipurpose Room Microphone, MIC01 Microphone, Wireless, MIC02 Speakers, Amplified with Tripod Stand Power Conditioner, PC01 Projector, Video / Data, VP01 Projector, Video / Data, VP02 Projector, Video, Portable, VP03 Table AV Box, TB01 TV/VCR Combination Television, Color, Flat Panel, includes wall bracket Recorder, DVD/DV, DVR01 DVD Player, DVD01 Switcher, Video Matrix, SW01 Switcher, Matrix, RGB, SW02 Tuner, CATV, TU01 Video Scaler, Multi-Image Processor, VS01 Display, LCD Room Scheduler, SD1 Camera, Document, DC01

Page 13 of 18

Tag
Description
Microphones, Wireless, Roll-in Rack of 50 Microphones Mixer, Audio Matrix, MX04 LCD Display, 46" w/Speakers, includes wall bracket, LD02 Speaker, Ceiling, Multipurpose Room, SP02 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Computer, Microprocessing, w/CRT Monitor Computer, Linux Computer, Laptop Monitor, CCTV, Small, 9" (Color) Computer, Controller Printer, Color, Large, Laser Photographic Optical Printer System Printer, Sublimation, Color Dye Printer, Poster, Wide Format, with Scanning Module Printer, Color, Small, Laser Printer, Photo Printer, Computer Printer/Copier/Fax Combination Printer, Label, Pharmacy Printer, Poster, Wide Format Plotter, Color Copier, Floor Standing, Digital, Black and White Copier, Color, Digital, Laser, High Volume, Floor Standing Copier, Desk Top Scanner, Document Fax, Secured Shredder, Paper, Security Laminator, Poster, 96" x 48" Laminator, Wide Roll, 36" Trimmer, Poster Board and Paper, Floor Mounted Trimmer, Cutter, 4'x4', Floor Mounted Safe, F/S , Class 5 Flash Unit Refrigerator, Household Brewer, Coffee, Auto, Elect, 3 Burner, Front/Back

Page 14 of 18

Tag
N7510 N7515 N7520 N7901 N7903 N7904 N8101 N8102 N8105a N8105b N8110 N8115 N8120 N8126 N8130 N8137 N8155 N8156 N8160 N8167 N8170 N8201 N8202 N8203 N8204 N8205 N8206 N8207 N8208 N8209 N8210 N8215 N8220 N8221 N8230
Description
Oven, Microwave, Consumer Toaster, Pop-Up, 4 Slice, Electric Machine, Vending Lektriever File Retrieval System Rack, Plan Charging Station, Radio Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms, Type 1 Chair, Task, Swivel, Armless, Clinic Chair, Swivel, Classrooms, Atrium, Chair, Swivel, Conference Chair, Swivel, High Back, Type 3 Chair, Task, Executive, Swivel, Type 2 Chair, Side With Arms, Type 2 Chair, Dining, Type 1 Chair, Executive, Side, Type 6 Chair, Side, Stacking, with Arms, Type 5 Chair, Arm, Lounge, Type 2 Chair, Lounge, Executive, Type 3 Chair, Easy, Type 1 Chair, Recliner, Upholstered Dolly, Chair Table, Dining/Huddle, Round, 40"D, Knowledge Green/Idea Exchange Table, Dining/Huddle, Round, 40"D Table, Conference, Commander Office, 42x96 Table, Conference, Stacking Training, Type 6 Table, Conference, Executive, Wood, 36x96,Type 3 Table, Conference, 30x60 Table, Conference, 30x72, Type 2 Table, Conference, Executive, Custom, Type 4 Table, Conference, Round, Office, Type 5 Table, Occasional, Executive, Wood, Type 3 Table, Occasional, Lamp, Type 1 Table, Office, (size as required), Type 4 Table, Rectangular, 36x60, Type 3 Table, Work, 2 Drawer, 72x30

Page 15 of 18

Tag
Description
Table, Work/Utility, 48x30 Table, Work, 60W x 48D Table, Inspection, Linen Table, Round, Wood, 36" Diameter Credenza, Executive, Wood Footstool, Straight Stool, Bar, Staff Lounge, Type 1 Stool, Lab, Non Containment Stool, Lab, Containment Stool, Self Adjusting Stool, Physicians, Clinic Stool, Step, Retractable Caster Cabinet, Filing, Lateral, 2 Drawer, 36" W Cabinet, Filing, Lateral, Half Height, 2 or 3 Drawer, 42" W Cabinet, Filing, Lateral, 3 Drawer, 36" W Cabinet, Filing, Lateral, 4 Drawer, 36" W Cabinet, Filing, Lateral, Full Height, 5 Drawer, 42" W Cabinet, Filing, Vertical, Full Height, 4-5 Drawer, 15" W Cabinet, Filing, Security, Full Height Cabinet, File, Flat, Stackable, 5 Drawers high Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Cabinet, Storage, Data Processing Bookcase, 2H, Steel Bookcase, 3 Shelf Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Shelving, Storage, 75"H X 36"W X 14"D Shelving, Storage, 77hx36wx18d Shelving, Storage, Enclosed Shelving, Storage, Wire, CRS, w/Adjustable Shelves Shelving, Storage, Wire, Enclosed, Lockable Security Unit, 48" wide Shelving, Storage, Wire, Enclosed, Lockable Security Unit, 72" wide Shelving, File, Open, Patient Records Rack, Hat / Coat, Floor Standing Rack, Storage, Mobile, Wire, CRS Shelving, Wire, 18" Deep, 48"Long, 4Shelves w/Ledge

Page 16 of 18

Tag
Description
Workstation, L-Transaction, Free Stand, Type 1 Workstation, System Furniture, Wall Unit Workstation, Type 2, 30 sq. ft. Workstation, Hospitality Supplies Workstation, Work Room Workstation, Executive, Systems Furniture, Wall Unit; Commanders Office Only Workstation, Executive, Systems Furniture, Wall Unit; For 180 SF Offices Workstation, Executive, L-Transaction, Freestanding; 96x120 Commanders Secretary Workstation, Executive, L-Transaction, Freestanding; 84x96 HQ Admin Workstations Reception, Workstation with Transaction Top Cart, 22" x 34" x 30" Cart, Emergency, Mobile, 66Hx52Wx22D Cart, General Storage, Mobile Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42Hx32Wx22D Cart, Janitor's Cart, Linen, Soiled Cart, Medication, Unit Dose Cart, Shelving, Storage, Mobile, SS Cart, Supply, Linen Cart, Trash Cart, Wire, Mobile Cart, Wire, Mobile, 72Hx61Wx24D Endoscopy Cart, Video (CCD) Scope Cart, Wire, Mobile, Shoe & Linen Storage Cart, Utility Cart, Candy Cart, Presentation, Custom Cart, Presentation, Custom Gooseneck Lamp Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Artwork Display System Artwork Display System, Freestanding Screen, Privacy, Freestanding Riser, Choral, Multipurpose Room Locker, Supply, w/Shelves, Wall Mtd, 23W x 20D

Page 17 of 18

Tag
N9811 N9812 N9813 N9816 N9820 N9905 N9907 N9911 N9912 N9913 N9920 N9921 N9922 N9923 N9924 N9925 N9927 N9929a N9929b N9934
Description
Locker, Supply, General, Wall Mtd, 23W x 20D Locker, Supply, Med Surg, Wall Mtd Locker, Supply, Medication, Wall Mtd, 23W x 20D Bench, Locker Room, Portable Transporter, Locker, Supply, 27W x 25D Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Paper Towel, Freestanding Dispenser, Liquid Soap, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Soap/Shampoo, Wall Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Basket, Wastepaper, Plastic, Gray Basket, Wastepaper, Step-On Can, Trash, 44 Gallon Trash Bin, 20 Gallon, Gray Recycle Bin Recycle Bin, Large Capacity Recycle Center Can, Biohazard, Large Waste, with Lid

Page 18 of 18
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 67 00 MATERIAL/PRODUCT RESISTANCE PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM D 1308 (2002; R 2007) Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes
1.2 A.
SUMMARY A/BSL-3E, and A/BSL-4 Containment rooms and other scheduled areas will be cleaned and disinfected with disinfectants listed in this section. Exposed surfaces in containment rooms and other scheduled areas may be exposed to chemicals listed in this section. A/BSL-3E, and A/BSL-4 Containment Rooms: 1. Refer to Key Plan drawings for layout of Biosafety Containment areas.
B.
C.
1.3 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Finishing materials used for floors, walls and ceilings in containment rooms and other scheduled areas shall be resistant to the disinfectants and laboratory chemicals listed in this section. 1. Acceptable resistance is defined as minimal discoloration or change in gloss, no blistering, no softening, no swelling, no loss of adhesion and no delamination.
B.
Interior and exterior surfaces of casework located in containment rooms and other scheduled areas shall be resistant to the disinfectants and laboratory chemicals listed in this section. 1. Acceptable resistance is defined as minimal discoloration or change in gloss, no blistering, no softening, no swelling, no loss of adhesion and no delamination.
C.
Other materials and equipment may be listed in individual specification sections to meet the resistance to the disinfectants and laboratory chemicals listed in this section. 1. Acceptable resistance is defined as minimal discoloration or change in gloss, no blistering, no softening, no swelling, no loss of adhesion and no delamination.
D.
Acceptable resistance shall be demonstrated by test procedures listed Section 01 67 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
in Part 3 of this specification section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. Refer to the individual specifications for requirements of submittals to confirm materials resistance. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS DISINFECTANTS
To be confirmed with Contracting Officer the liquids and gaseous to be used in the building. 2.1.1 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Liquids Ethanol, maximum concentration - 100 percent. Glutaraldehyde, maximum concentration - 50 percent. A-33 (quaternary ammonium compound), maximum concentration - 3 percent. Iodophores, maximum concentration - 2,000 ppm of iodine. Lysol (phenolic), maximum concentration - 5 percent. Peracetic acid, maximum concentration - 5 percent. "One Stroke Environ" - Active ingredients by weight are 11.3 percent sodium o-phenylphenate, 9.4 percent sodium o-benzyl-p-chlorophenate and 2.3 percent sodium p-tertiary amylphenate. A pH 12.6 concentrate is used in a 1:256. "Wescodyne Plus" - 150 ppm. "Cavacide": - a quaternary ammonium compound. "Virkon S" - A balanced, stabilized blend of peroxygen compounds, surfactant, organic acids, and an inorganic buffer system. Diluted to a ratio of 1:100. Clidox -S: 1:5:1. A chlorine dioxide based high leve l disinfectant mixed at
H. I. J.
K.
L.
Vesphene II is a one-step, alkaline phenolic c leaner/disinfectant. Dilution rate 1:128. MicroChem: Gaseous Formaldehyde gas, maximum concentration - 0.3 percent/cubic foot at 70 percent relative humidity. Section 01 67 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only A quaternary ammonia at maximum concentration of 5 percent.
M. 2.1.2 A.
Ft. Detrick, MD
B. C. 2.2
Vaporized hydrogen peroxide. Ammonia gas - 3 percent concentration. LABORATORY CHEMICALS
To be confirmed with Contracting Officer the list of chemicals to be used in the building. Acetone Benzene Carbon Tetrachloride Detergent Solution, .025 percent Distilled Water Ethyl Ether Heptane Hydrogen Peroxide, 28 percent Kerosene Methyl Ethyl Ketone Mineral Oil Perchloric Acid, 70 percent Soap Solution, 1 percent Sodium Hydroxide, 50 percent Toluene Turpentine PART 3 3.1 A. EXECUTION GENERAL Testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency previously approved by Contracting Officer. Perform the test on a sample of the finish material on substrate representative to construction of this project or as noted otherwise. Also refer to Specification Section 01 33 10 SPECIAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. TEST PROCEDURES Liquid Disinfectants and Chemicals Ammonium Hydroxide, 28 percent Beta-propiolactone Citric Acid, 1 percent Dichloromethane Ethyl Acetate Formaldehyde, 37 percent Hydrochloric Acid, 37 percent Isooctane Methanol Methyl mercury hydroxide Oleic Acid Phenol, 5 percent Sodium Carbonate, 20 percent Sodium Hypochlorite, 5.25 percent Trizol Xylene
B.
C.
3.2 3.2.1
All tests should be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1308, and as follows. 3.2.1.1 Spot Test - Covered
For each material system provided under Section 01 33 10 SPECIAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. A. Fluid-Applied Flooring (RES): Test sample with each disinfectant and chemical listed for 60 minutes duration. Special Coatings (SPC): Test sample with each disinfectant for 60 minute duration, and each chemical listed for 5 minute duration.
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.2.1.2
Spot Test - Open
For each material system provided under Section 01 33 10 SPECIAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. A. Fluid-Applied Flooring (RES): Test sample with each disinfectant and chemical listed for 60 minute duration. Special Coatings (SPC): Test sample with each disinfectant for 60 minute duration, and each chemical listed for 5 minute duration. Immersion Test
B.
3.2.1.3 A. B.
For SPC-Dunk specified in Section 09 97 00 SPECIAL COATINGS. Test sample of coating on stainless steel using Virkon S at 73.5 plus/minus 3.5 degrees F, for 7 day period. Gaseous Formaldehyde Gas
3.2.2 3.2.2.1
Expose each material system provided under Section 01 33 10 SPECIAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES to paraformaldehyde flakes heated in 70 percent relative humidity to produce formaldehyde gas. Expose for 12 hours, neutralize with ammonium carbonate and wash with water at 140 to 176 degrees F. 3.2.3.2 Vaporized Hydrogen Peroxide
Concentration 1200 ppm, humidity 50 - 70 percent, exposure time 12 hours. 3.2.3 Test Reports
Provide two copies of test reports.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 72 00 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS - CADD
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL Preparation
This section covers the preparation of as-built drawings complete, as a requirement of this contract. The terms "drawings," "contract drawings," "drawing files," and "final as-built drawings" refer to a set of computer-aided design and drafting (CADD) contract drawings in electronic file format which are to be used for as-built drawings. 1.2 PROGRESS MARKED UP AS-BUILT PRINTS
The Contractor shall revise two sets of paper prints to show the as-built conditions during the prosecution of the project. These as-built marked prints shall be kept current and available on the jobsite at all times. All changes from the contract plans which are made in the work or additional information which might be uncovered in the course of construction shall be accurately and neatly recorded as they occur by means of details and notes. The as-built marked prints will be jointly reviewed for accuracy and completeness by the Contracting Officer and a responsible representative of the construction Contractor prior to submission of each monthly pay estimate. If the Contractor fails to maintain the as-built drawings as specified herein, the Contracting Officer will deduct from the monthly progress payment an amount representing the estimated cost of maintaining the as-built drawings and will continue the monthly deduction of the 10 percent retainage even after 50 percent completion of the contract. This monthly deduction will continue until an agreement can be reached between the Contracting Officer and a representative of the Contractor regarding the accuracy and completeness of updated drawings. The prints shall show the following information, but not be limited thereto: 1.2.1 Location and Description
The location and description of any utility lines or other installations of any kind or description known to exist within the construction area. The location includes dimensions to permanent features. 1.2.2 Location and Dimensions
The location and dimensions of any changes within the building or structure. 1.2.3 a. Corrections Correct grade, cross section, or alignment of roads, earthwork, structures or utilities if any changes were made from contract plans. Correct elevations if changes were made in site grading. Changes Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from Section 01 72 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
b. 1.2.4 a.
Ft. Detrick, MD
working drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the Contractor; including but not limited to fabrication, erection, installation plans and placing details, pipe sizes, insulation material, dimensions of equipment foundations, etc. b. The topography, invert elevations and grades of all drainage installed or affected as a part of the project construction. All changes or modifications which result from the final inspection. Options
c. 1.2.5
Where contract drawings or specifications present options, only the option selected for construction shall be shown on the as-built prints. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-11 Closeout Submittals Progress Prints; G, AR. Preparation of two copies of as-builts from the Contractor to the Contracting Officer for review and approval. Final Requirements; G, AR. CADD Files. Shall consist of two sets of completed as-built contract drawings on separate media consisting of both CADD files (compatible with the Using Agency/Sponsor's system on electronic storage media identical to that supplied by the Government) and a CALS Type 1, Group 4, Raster Image File of each contract drawing. Receipt by the Contractor of the approved marked as-built prints. 1.4 PRELIMINARY SUBMITTAL
At the time of final inspection, the Contractor shall prepare two copies of the progress as-built prints and these shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and approval. These as-built marked prints shall be neat, legible and accurate. The review by Government personnel will be expedited to the maximum extent possible. Upon approval, one copy of the as-built marked prints will be returned to the Contractor for use in preparation of final as-built drawings. If upon review, the as-built marked prints are found to contain errors and/or omissions, they shall be returned to the Contractor for corrections. The Contractor shall complete the corrections and return the as-built marked prints to the Contracting Officer within ten (10) calendar days.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.5 1.5.1
DRAWING PREPARATION As-Built Drawings Approval
Upon approval of the as-built prints submitted, the Contractor will be furnished by the Government one set of contract drawings, with all amendments incorporated, to be used for as-built drawings. These contract drawings will be furnished on CD-ROM. These drawings shall be modified as may be necessary to correctly show all the features of the project as it has been constructed by bringing the contract set into agreement with the approved as-built prints, adding such additional drawings as may be necessary. These drawings are part of the permanent records of this project and the Contractor shall be responsible for the protection and safety thereof until returned to the Contracting Officer. Any drawings damaged or lost by the Contractor shall be satisfactorily replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Government. 1.5.2 Proficient Personnel
Only personnel proficient in the preparation of engineering CADD drawings to standards satisfactory and acceptable to the Government shall be employed to modify the contract drawings or prepare additional new drawings. All additions and corrections to the contract drawings shall be equal in quality to that of the originals. Line work, line weights, lettering, layering conventions, and symbols shall be the same as the original line work, line weights, lettering, layering conventions, and symbols. If additional drawings are required, they shall be prepared using the specified electronic file format applying the same guidance specified for original drawings. The title block and drawing border to be used for any new as-built drawings shall be identical to that used on the contract drawings. All additions and corrections to the contract drawings shall be accomplished using CADD media files supplied by the Government. These contract drawings will already be compatible with the Using Agency/Sponsor's system when received by the Contractor. The Using Agency/Sponsor uses AutoCAD Release 2007 CADD software system. The media files will be supplied on ISO 9660 Format CD-ROM. The Contractor is responsible for providing all program files and hardware necessary to prepare as-built drawings. The Contracting Officer will review all as-built drawings for accuracy and the Contractor shall make all required corrections, changes, additions, and deletions. 1.5.3 Final Revisions
When final revisions have been completed, the cover sheet drawing shall show the wording "RECORD DRAWING AS-BUILT" followed by the name of the General Contractor in letters at least 3/16 inch high. All other contract drawings shall be marked either "As-Built" drawing denoting no revisions on the sheet or "Revised As-Built" denoting one or more revisions. All original contract drawings shall be dated in the revision block (SEE ATTACHMENT 1 at the end of this section - while the title block sample attachments do not depict the contract drawings' title blocks, the sample revision blocks above these attachments are to be used as guidance in completing the actual contract drawings' revision blocks.) 1.6 a. FINAL REQUIREMENTS After receipt by the Contractor of the approved marked as-built prints and the original contract drawing files the Contractor will, within 60 days, make the final as-built submittal. The submittal shall consist Section 01 72 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
of the following: (1) Two sets of the as-built contract drawings on separate CD's (ISO 9660 Format CD-ROM) consisting of the updated CADD files and a CALS Type 1 Group 4 Raster Image File of each contract drawing plate. The CALS files shall be exact duplicates of the full sized plots of the completed as-built contract drawings at a resolution of 400 dpi and may be either plotted to CALS files directly from the CADD files, or scanned to file from the prints. (2) Two sets of full size paper prints (plots) of the completed as-built contract drawings. (3) The return of the approved marked as-built prints. b. They shall be complete in all details and identical in form and function to the contract drawing files supplied by the Government. Any translations or adjustments necessary to accomplish this is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Government reserves the right to reject any drawing files it deems incompatible with its CADD system. All paper prints, drawing files and storage media submitted will become the property of the Government upon final approval. Failure to submit as-built drawing files and marked prints as required herein shall be cause for withholding any payment due the Contractor under this contract. Approval and acceptance of final as-built drawings shall be accomplished before final payment is made to the Contractor. PRODUCTS
PART 2
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM E 1609 (1994; R 2001) Development and Implementation of a Pollution Prevention Program
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC) GOVERNMENT POLICY
1.2
Government policy is to apply sound environmental principles in the design, construction and use of facilities. As part of the implementation of that policy the Contractor shall: (1) practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting, and installing products and materials and (2) use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators and to facilitate their recycling or reuse. A minimum of 75 percent by weight of total project solid waste shall be diverted from the landfill. 95 to 100 percent diverted shall obtain Innovation in Design credit. 1.3 MANAGEMENT
Develop and implement a waste management program in accordance with ASTM E 1609 and as specified. Take a pro-active, responsible role in the management of construction and demolition waste and require all subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to participate in the effort. Construction and demolition waste includes products of demolition or removal, excess or unusable construction materials, packaging materials for construction products, and other materials generated during the construction process but not incorporated into the work. In the management of waste consideration shall be given to the availability of viable markets, the condition of the material, the ability to provide the material in suitable condition and in a quantity acceptable to available markets, and time constraints imposed by internal project completion mandates. The Contractor is responsible for implementation of any special programs involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling of waste. Revenues or other savings obtained for salvage, or recycling accrue to the Contractor. Appropriately permit firms and facilities used for recycling, reuse, and disposal for the intended use to the extent required by federal, Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 74 19 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
state, and local regulations. Also, provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Waste Management Plan; G, AR; (LEED) SD-11 Closeout Submittals Records; (LEED) 1.5 MEETINGS
Conduct Construction Waste Management meetings. After award of the Contract and prior to commencement of work, schedule and conduct a meeting with the Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan and to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of waste management. The requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the coordination and mutual understanding meeting outlined in Section 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. At a minimum, environmental and waste management goals and issues shall be discussed at the following additional meetings: a. b. c. d. 1.6 a. Pre-bid meeting. Preconstruction meeting. Regular site meetings. Work safety meetings. WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A waste management plan shall be submitted within 60 days after notice to proceed and not less than 10 days before the preconstruction meeting. The plan shall demonstrate how the project waste diversion goal shall be met and shall include the following: (1) Name of individuals on the Contractor's staff responsible for waste prevention and management. (2) Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation, including coordination with subcontractors to ensure awareness and participation. (3) Description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste management. (4) Description of the specific approaches to be used in recycling/reuse of the various materials generated, including the Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 74 19 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
areas on site and equipment to be used for processing, sorting, and temporary storage of wastes. (5) Characterization, including estimated types and quantities, of the waste to be generated. (6) Name of landfill and/or incinerator to be used and the estimated costs for use, assuming that there would be no salvage or recycling on the project. (7) Identification of local and regional reuse programs, including non-profit organizations such as schools, local housing agencies, and organizations that accept used materials such as materials exchange networks and Habitat for Humanity. Include the name, location, and phone number for each reuse facility to be used, and provide a copy of the permit or license for each facility. (8) List of specific waste materials that will be salvaged for resale, salvaged and reused on the current project, salvaged and stored for reuse on a future project, or recycled. Recycling facilities that will be used shall be identified by name, location, and phone number, including a copy of the permit or license for each facility. (9) Identification of materials that cannot be recycled/reused with an explanation or justification, to be approved by the Contracting Officer. (10)Description of the means by which any waste materials identified in item (h) above will be protected from contamination. (11)Description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site). (12)Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting Contractor program management costs and the cost of disposal from the revenue generated by sale of the materials and the incineration and/or landfill cost avoidance. b. Revise and resubmit Plan as required by the Contracting Officer. Approval of Contractor's Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with applicable environmental regulations or meeting project cumulative waste diversion requirement. Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to each subcontractor, the Quality Control Manager, and the Contracting Officer. RECORDS Records shall be maintained to document the quantity of waste generated; the quantity of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incineration. Records shall be kept in accordance with the LEED Reference Guide and using the LEED Letter Template. The records shall be made available to the Contracting Officer during construction, and a copy of the records shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer upon completion of the construction and included in the LEED Documentation Notebook. Section 01 74 19 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
1.7 a.
Ft. Detrick, MD
b.
Demolition accomplished by other parties on this project site count toward the project's total waste diversion cumulative score for LEED. Information on the quantity and disposition of these materials will be provided by the Contracting Officer. Include this data in records, annotated to indicate that it was accomplished by another party. REPORTS
1.8
Provide quarterly reports and a final report to SWARS Coordinator, at Baltimore District Office. Quarterly and final reports shall include project name, information for waste generated this quarter, and cumulative totals for the project. Each report shall include supporting documentation to include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices specifically identifying the project and waste material. Include timber harvest and demolition information, if any. 1.9 COLLECTION
Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable and salvageable waste products in a manner that maximizes recyclability and salvagability of identified materials. Provide the necessary containers, bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management and clearly and appropriately identify them. Provide materials for barriers and enclosures around recyclable material storage areas which are nonhazardous and recyclable or reusable. Locate out of the way of construction traffic. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean, and recyclable materials shall be handled to prevent contamination of materials from incompatible products and materials. Clean contaminated materials prior to placing in collection containers. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous and biodegradable. Handle hazardous waste and hazardous materials in accordance with applicable regulations and coordinate with Section 01 56 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION. Separate materials by one of the following methods: 1.9.1 Source Separated Method
Waste products and materials that are recyclable shall be separated from trash and sorted as described below into appropriately marked separate containers and then transported to the respective recycling facility for further processing. Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or reuse facility requirements (e.g., free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process). Separate materials into the following category types as appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse programs in the project area: a. b. c. d. Land clearing debris. Asphalt. Concrete and masonry. Metal (e.g., banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other trim, steel, iron, galvanized, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead brass, bronze). (1) Ferrous. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 74 19 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
(2) Non-ferrous. e. f. g. h. Wood (nails and staples allowed). Debris. Glass (colored glass allowed). Paper. (1) Bond. (2) Newsprint. (3) Cardboard and paper packaging materials. i. Plastic. (1) Type 1: (2) Type 2: (3) Type 3: (4) Type 4: (5) Type 5: (6) Type 6: Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE). High Density Polyethylene (HDPE). Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC). Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE). Polypropylene (PP). Polystyrene (PS).
(7) Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of more than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination. j. k. l. m. n. o. 1.9.2 Gypsum. Non-hazardous paint and paint cans. Carpet. Ceiling tiles. Insulation. Beverage containers. Co-Mingled Method.
Waste products and recyclable materials shall be placed into a single container and then transported to a recycling facility where the recyclable materials are sorted and processed. 1.9.3 Other Methods.
Other methods proposed by the Contractor may be used when approved by the Contracting Officer.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.10
DISPOSAL
Control accumulation of waste materials and trash. Recycle or dispose of collected materials off-site at intervals approved by the Contracting Officer and in compliance with waste management procedures. Except as otherwise specified in other sections of the specifications, disposal shall be in accordance with the following: 1.10.1 Reuse
First consideration shall be given to salvage for reuse since little or no re-processing is necessary for this method, and less pollution is created when items are reused in their original form. Coordinate reuse with the Contracting Officer. Reuse materials as indicated on the drawings. Sale or donation of waste suitable for reuse shall be considered. 1.10.2 Recycle
Waste materials not suitable for reuse, but having value as being recyclable, shall be made available for recycling. All fluorescent lamps, HID lamps, and mercury-containing thermostats removed from the site shall be recycled. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facilities in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. 1.10.3 Waste
Materials with no practical use or economic benefit shall be disposed at a landfill or incinerator. 1.10.4 Return
Set aside and protect misdelivered and substandard products and materials and return to supplier for credit. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 75 00 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL SUMMARY
Requirements of this Section apply to, and are a component part of, each section of the specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Verification of Prior Experience Submit Verification of Prior Experience and expertise with similar project scope. Documentation of Manufacturer's Prior Experience Submit Documentation of Manufacturer's Prior Experience and expertise with similar project materials and systems. Quality Control Plan; G, AR Submit Quality Control Plan including testing and start-up schedule. Manufacturer's Sample Warranty Operation and Maintenance Data; G, AR. Provide Evidence Provide evidence that products used within this specification are manufactured in the United States or within countries with trade policies. SD-02 Shop Drawings Drawings, Diagrams and Schedules; G, AR Drawings, Diagrams and Schedules specifically prepared to Drawings prepared by or for the Contractor to show how multiple illustrate some portion of the work. systems and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated. Diagrams and Instructions; G, AR Diagrams and Instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 75 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
integrating the product or system into the project. SD-03 Product Data Catalog cuts Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment for some portion of the work. Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended and/or no dollar limit product warranties. SD-05 Design Data Design Calculations Design Calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to a part of work. SD-06 Test Reports Factory Tests Field Tests Start-up Test Acceptance Submit test reports in accordance with the paragraphs entitled, "Factory Tests", "Field Test" and "Final Acceptance Test," of this section. Test Procedures Submit test procedures and the recording forms according to paragraph entitled, "Test Procedures." SD-07 Certificates Qualification of Manufacturer. Qualification of Installer. Certify that the installer meets requirements specified under paragraph entitled "Qualification of Installer." SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Submit Manufacturer's Administrative Requirements. Demonstration and Training Information. Manufacturer's Procedural Requirements Submit for initial checkout, startup, and adjusting to ensure safe operation during acceptance testing and commissioning. SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports Documentation of the Testing and Verification Actions Documentation of the Testing and Verification Actions taken by Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 75 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
manufacturer's representative at the job site, in the vicinity of the job site, or on a sample taken from the job site, on a portion of the work, during or after installation, to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Refer to Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA for detailed requirements and procedures. Operation and Maintenance Data; G AR provided by the manufacturer to ensure the safe and efficient operation, maintenance and repair of the system or equipment provided. Safety and Security Data or Posters Provided by the manufacturer. 1.2.1 a. Preconstruction and Pre-Testing Requirements The Contractor is responsible to deliver equipment and services to meet the requirements and specifications of their respective contract. All equipment must be free of latent manufacturing and installation defects. Acceptance criteria must be clearly defined to establish required baselines for future maintenance and life-cycle evaluations. The Government reserves the option to elect performance of acceptance testing by internal personnel, or a designated third party. Regardless of who performs the acceptance testing, the requirements of acceptance must be met by the Contractor. Submit the following for review and approval prior to the commencement of work and any testing, whether such testing is on site or elsewhere: 1. Verification of prior experience and expertise with similar project scope. Documentation of manufacturer's prior experience and expertise with similar project materials and systems. Quality control plan. CONTROL requirements. Follow Section 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY
b.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturer's Sample Warranty and Operation and Maintenance Data, with details regarding start-up procedures. Manufacturer's administrative requirements. Manufacturer's procedural requirements. Demonstration and Training Information.
5. 6. 7. c.
Contractor must submit the following certifications: 1. Provide evidence that products used within this specification are manufactured in the United States. Qualification of Manufacturer, including current licenses and Section 01 75 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
2.
Ft. Detrick, MD
insurance. 3. 1.2.2 Qualification of Installer, including licenses and insurance.
Shop Drawings and Diagrams
Submit the following shop drawings, record drawings, and diagrams as required to correctly execute the installation of the work: a. Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of the work. Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for integrating the product or system into the project. Drawings prepared by or for the Contractor to show how multiple systems and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.
b.
c.
1.2.3
Product and Design Data
Contractor must submit all product data and any design calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to a part of work to ensure a complete functional installation; including, but not limited to: a. Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment for some portion of the work Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended and/or no dollar limit product warranties Operation and Maintenance Data provided by the manufacturer to ensure the safe and efficient operation, maintenance and repair of the system or equipment provided. Safety and Security Data or posters provided by the manufacturer to be posted in a conspicuous visible location for operational and maintenance personnel.
b.
c.
d.
1.2.4
Tests Required
Perform tests to verify proper functioning of fire protection, fire suppression, HVAC, compressed air, electrical switchgear, protective relaying, fluid and gas systems, pump/motor combinations, boiler systems, hydraulic and pneumatic control, condition/performance monitoring systems, energy control and monitoring systems, and other assemblies and components that need to be tested as an interrelated whole. 1.2.4.1 Factory Tests
Submit certified copies of required tests performed at the factory to verify proper build. These test results will be used to verify no shipping damage and proper installation. 1.2.4.2 Field Tests
Contractor must perform field tests to verify that the system and Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 75 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
components have been properly installed and are functioning properly. Perform test(s) in the presence of the Contract Quality Control (CQC) and the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Acceptance will be issued when system has performed per other sections and referenced industry standards. Coordinate and submit documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's representative at the job site, in the vicinity of the job site, or on a sample taken from the job site, on a portion of the work, after installation, to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions. Coordinate work with Commissioning Coordinator CxC per Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements. 1.2.4.3 Start-up Test Acceptance
Perform start-up test with full documentation using the approved recording form. Commissioning Coordinator (CxC), Contract Quality Control (CQC), and the Contracting Officer Representative (COR) will witness this test. Submit final test data to the Contracting Officer for their approval. Submittal to include a cover letter clearly marked with the system name, date, and the words "Start-up Test Data - Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database." 1.2.4.4 Test Procedures
Submit field test procedure and recording forms that document the test steps for approval to the Contracting Officer 21 calendar days prior to the proposed test date. Procedure must clearly state step by step instruction to verify system parameters, components, and functions. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. SD-03 Product Data Warranty Management Plan Warranty management plan containing information relevant to the warranty of materials and equipment incorporated into the construction project, including the starting date of warranty of construction. The Contractor shall furnish with each warranty the name, address, and telephone number of each of the guarantor's representatives nearest to the project location. Follow Warranty Service priority list as specified in Section 01 20 00 WARRANTY REQUIREMENT, Paragraph "Contractor's Response to Warranty Service Requirements." Warranty Tags Two record copies of the warranty tags showing the layout and design. Final Cleaning Two copies of the listing of completed final clean-up items. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Equipment/Product Warranty List Submit Data Package 1 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. SD-11 Closeout Submittals As-Built Drawings; G Record Of Materials; G Utility As-Built Drawings; G Equipment/Product Warranty Tag; G Monthly Project Waste Summary Report; G Hazardous Material Reporting; G Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 77 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Certification of EPA Designated Items; G 1.2 CERTIFICATION OF EPA DESIGNATED ITEMS
Submit the Certification of EPA Designated Items as required by FAR 52.223-9, "Certification and Estimate of Percentage of Recovered Material Content for EPA Designated Items". The certification form shall include the following information: project name, project number, Contractor name, license number, Contractor address, and certification. The certification shall read as follows and shall be signed and dated by the Contractor. "I hereby certify the information provided herein is accurate and that the requisition/procurement of all materials listed on this form comply with current EPA standards for recycled/recovered materials content. The following exemptions may apply to the non-procurement of recycled/recovered content materials: 1) The product does not meet appropriate performance standards; 2) The product is not available within a reasonable time frame; 3) The product is not available competitively (from two or more sources); 4) The product is only available at an unreasonable price (compared with a comparable non-recycled content product)." Each product used in the project that has a requirement or option of containing recycled or biobased content in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED/RECOVERED MATERIALS shall be recorded, noting total price, total value of post-industrial recycled content, total value of post-consumer recycled content, total value of biobased content, exemptions (1, 2, 3, or 4, as indicated), and comments. Recycled and biobased content values may be determined by weight or volume percent, but must be consistent throughout. 1.3 A. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Maintain on site, the following record documents; record actual revisions to the work: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. C. D. Contract Drawings. Specifications. Addenda and Bulletins. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. Reviewed shop drawings, product data and samples.
Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. Record information concurrent with construction progress. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product Section description of actual products installed, including: 1. 2. 3. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. Product substitutions or alternates used. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.
E.
Contract Drawings, Coordination Drawings required by Section 01 31 15 CONTAINMENT CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: Section 01 77 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.
Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work. Field changes of dimension and detail. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
2.
3.
4. 5. F. G. H.
Delete AE title block and seal from all documents. Submit documents to Contracting Officer. Should the Architect submit these documents to the Government, or should the Architect be required to create a compiled set of "RECORD DOCUMENTS" and submit them to the Government, the Contractor will remain the responsible entity liable for future claims regarding these documents. This "RECORD DOCUMENT" contains "AS-BUILT INFORMATION" that was provided to CUH2A Smith Carter Hemisphere (JV) by the project contractor(s) and/or others. CUH2A Smith Carter Hemisphere (JV) has no first hand knowledge of, responsibility or liability for, and DOES NOT warrant the accuracy or completeness of any of the AS-BUILT INFORMATION that was provided to it for incorporation into this RECORD DOCUMENT by others. In addition, except to the extent that the project was constructed in accordance with the general intent of the construction documents prepared by CUH2A Smith Carter Hemisphere (JV), CUH2A Smith Carter Hemisphere (JV) DOES NOT warrant that the project was constructed in accordance with the detailed designs and/or specifications shown on this RECORD DOCUMENT, the responsibility and liability for which are/were solely that of the project's Construction Manager and/or contractor(s). Reliance on and/or use of any information contained on this document, to the extent such information is based on data that was prepared and/or provided to CUH2A Smith Carter Hemisphere (JV) by the project's contractor(s) and/or others, or on the assumption that the project was constructed in strict accordance with the detailed designs and/or specifications shown hereon, shall be at the users sole risk. As-Built Drawings This paragraph covers as-built drawings complete, as a requirement of the contract. The terms "drawings," "contract drawings," "drawing files," "working as-built drawings" and "final as-built drawings" refer to contract drawings which are revised to be used for final as-built drawings. Record Drawings: the Contractor shall survey the horizontal and vertical location of all newly provided underground utilities to within 0.1 feet relative to the station datum. All pipe utilities shall be surveyed at each fitting and every 100 LF of run length. Electrical and communication ductbank, direct buried conduit, and direct buried conductor shall be surveyed every 100 LF and at each change of Section 01 77 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
1.3.1 A.
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
direction. Locations and elevations shall be recorded on the Record Drawings. Submit drawings with QC certification. Submit drawings in CAD format. 1.3.2 Utility As-Built Drawings
In addition to record drawings provide for each exterior utility system a set of reproducible utility drawings, stamped and signed by a registered professional civil engineer or professional land surveyor, and two copies. Submit within ten working days after each system is in place, but no later than five working days before final inspection. Indicate exterior utilities from a point five feet from a building to the termination point or point of connection to existing system. Include the following: A. Horizontal and vertical controls for new utilities and existing utilities exposed during construction. Reference to station's horizontal and vertical control system. Sufficient dimensional control for all important features such as beginning and termination points, points of connection, inverts for sewer lines and drainage collection systems, top of pipe or conduit runs, manholes, cathodic protection appurtenances, valves, valve stem tops, backflow preventers, and other significant features. Indicate type and size of all materials used in the construction of the system. Indicate bearing and distance on tangent lines. On curves, indicate delta and radius of the curve, also provide X, Y, and Z coordinates at all BC and EC angle points. Indicate horizontal and vertical control for all intersecting and tangent points where utility alignment changes. Indicate X, Y, and Z coordinates at building line and point of connection for straight building laterals or services under 40 feet. Tolerances: Horizontal and vertical control dimensions, plus or minus 0.10 foot. Angular control, plus or minus 0 degrees 01 minute. As-Built Record of Materials
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3.3
Furnish a record of materials. 1.4 EQUIPMENT/PRODUCT WARRANTIES
As specified in Section 01 20 00 WARRANTY REQUIREMENT. 1.5 MECHANICAL TESTING AND BALANCING
Contract requirements of Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING shall be fully completed, including all testing and reviews, prior to contract completion date. The time required to complete Testing and Balancingas prescribed by Division 23 Mechanical Systems and commissioning covered under SECTION 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING at its related commissioning Sections shall be included in the allotted calendar days for completion. 1.6 CLEANUP
Leave premises "broom clean." Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 77 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. Replace filters of operating equipment. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts and drainage systems. Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site. 1.6.1 Extraordinary Cleanup Requirements As specified for A/BSL-3E and
The following cleanup requirements apply: A/BSL-4 Areas herein. 1.7 A.
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING ENDURANCE PERIOD (FOST) Completion of Contract requirements includes the completion and acceptance of the Endurance Period BSL-3E, ABSL-3E, BSL-4 and ABSL-4 for areas of the building, and for the entire facility as a whole. 1. BSL-3E, ABSL-3E, BSL-4 and ABSL-4 area FOST - Start of Endurance Period: After BSL-3E, ABSL-3E, BSL-4 and ABSL-4 areas and the systems serving these areas are complete, related punch list and deficiency list items corrected and verified, and CVF, ST and IST Commissioning have been successfully completed and signed-off. Refer to Section 01 91 04 COMMISSIONING FUNCTIONAL OPERATIONAL SYSTEM TEST for additional requirements. Entire Facility FOST - Start of Endurance Period: After all areas and the systems serving the entire facility are complete, related punch list and deficiency list items corrected and verified, and CVF, ST and IST Commissioning have been successfully completed and signed-off. Refer to Section 01 91 04 COMMISSIONING FUNCTIONAL OPERATIONAL SYSTEM TEST for additional requirements. Endurance Period: 30-day period for the facility to settle into a normal operational pattern. Monitoring the facility and lab functions, the Life Safety elements related to system operations, specifically as they relate to the interlocks of various systems, fire alarms, security, air systems, etc.
2.
3.
B.
Project Beneficial Occupancy Date will not be established until building areas and systems have successfully completed requirements of commissioning, including the successful completion of FOSTs. PRODUCTS
PART 2
Not Applicable
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data specifically applicable to this contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment, product, or system, stressing and enhancing the importance of system interactions, troubleshooting, and long-term preventative maintenance and operation. The subcontractors shall compile and prepare data and deliver to the Contractor prior to the training of Government personnel. The Contractor shall compile and prepare aggregate O&M data including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions. Organize and present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain O&M requirements at the system, equipment, component, and subassembly level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in accordance with this section and Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. 1.1.1 Package Quality
Documents must be fully legible. Poor quality copies and material with hole punches obliterating the text or drawings will not be accepted. 1.1.2 Package Content
Data package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled "Schedule of Operation and Maintenance Data Packages." Comply with the data package requirements specified in the individual technical sections, including the content of the packages and addressing each product, component, and system designated for data package submission, except as follows. Commissioned items without a specified data package requirement in the individual technical sections shall use Data Package 4. Commissioned items with a Data Package 1 or 2 requirement shall use instead Data Package 5. 1.1.3 Changes to Submittals
Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data shall be furnished by the Contractor if a component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the O&M Data. Changes, additions, or revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of submitted data, shall be submitted by the Contractor within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change requirement. 1.1.4 Review and Approval
The Contractor Quality Control (CQC) and the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall review the system and equipment submittals for completeness and applicability and verify that the systems and equipment provided meet the requirements of the Contract documents and design intent, particularly as they relate to functionality, energy performance, water performance, maintainability, sustainability, system cost, indoor environmental quality, and local environmental impacts. The CxC and the CQC shall communicate deficiencies to the Contracting Officer Representative (COR). Upon a successful review of the corrections, the CxC shall recommend Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 78 23 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
approval and acceptance of these O&M manuals to the Contracting Officer Representative (COR). This work shall be in addition to the normal review procedures for O&M data. 1.1.5 O&M Database
Develop a database from the O&M manuals that contains the information required to start a preventative maintenance program. Database format and data fields to be compatible with the Government's forms Defense Medical Logistic Standard Support (DMLSS) automatic information system. 1.2 1.2.1 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES Operating Instructions
Include specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each system: 1.2.1.1 Safety Precautions
List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all operating conditions. 1.2.1.2 Operator Prestart
Include procedures required to install, set up, and prepare each system for use. 1.2.1.3 Startup, Shutdown, and Post-Shutdown Procedures
Provide narrative description for Startup, Shutdown and Post-shutdown operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure. 1.2.1.4 Normal Operations
Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures. Include Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and specific equipment. 1.2.1.5 Emergency Operations
Include Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent further damage to systems and equipment. Include Emergency Shutdown Instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable contingencies. Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of all utility systems including required valve positions, valve locations and zones or portions of systems controlled. 1.2.1.6 Operator Service Requirements
Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as lubrication, adjustment, inspection, and recording gage readings. 1.2.1.7 Environmental Conditions
Include a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature, humidity, and other relevant data) that are best suited for the operation of each Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 78 23 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
product, component or system. Describe conditions under which the item equipment should not be allowed to run. 1.2.2 Preventive Maintenance
Include the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance to minimize corrective maintenance and repair for the installed model and features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials. 1.2.2.1 Lubrication Data
Include preventative maintenance lubrication data, in addition to instructions for lubrication provided under paragraph titled "Operator Service Requirements": a. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges and applications. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities. A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency. Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule
b.
c. 1.2.2.2
Include manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance, inspections, tests and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance. Provide manufacturer's projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily, weekly, monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft. For periodic calibrations, provide manufacturer's specified frequency and procedures for each separate operation. 1.2.3 Corrective Maintenance (Repair)
Include manufacturer's recommended procedures and instructions for correcting problems and making repairs. 1.2.3.1 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques
Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused or require replacement. 1.2.3.2 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type, identically to actual installation configuration and numbering.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.2.3.3
Maintenance and Repair Procedures
Include instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards. 1.2.3.4 Removal and Replacement Instructions
Include step-by-step procedures and a list required tools and supplies for removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies, subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances, dimensions, settings and adjustments required. Instructions shall include a combination of text and illustrations. 1.2.3.5 Spare Parts and Supply Lists spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and continued service or operation without unreasonable consideration is required for facilities at remote spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to
Include lists of repair to ensure delays. Special locations. List obtain. 1.2.4
Corrective Maintenance Work-Hours
Include manufacturer's projection of corrective maintenance work-hours including requirements by type of craft. Corrective maintenance that requires completion or participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be identified and tabulated separately. 1.2.5 Appendices
Provide information required below and information not specified in the preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment. Include the following: 1.2.5.1 Product Submittal Data
Provide a copy of all SD-03 Product Data submittals required in the applicable technical sections. 1.2.5.2 Manufacturer's Instructions
Provide a copy of all SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions submittals required in the applicable technical sections. 1.2.5.3 O&M Submittal Data
Provide a copy of all SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals required in the applicable technical sections. 1.2.5.4 Parts Identification
Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component, assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 78 23 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
and separate listing shall show the index, reference, or key number that will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown in the listings shall be grouped by components, assemblies, and subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment, components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, or accessories, such as typically shown in a master parts catalog 1.2.5.5 Warranty Information
List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract documents in order to keep warranties in force. Include warranty information for primary components such as the compressor of air conditioning system. 1.2.5.6 Personnel Training Requirements
Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the equipment and systems. Follow requirements specified in Section 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING. 1.2.5.7 Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information
Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of components. 1.2.5.8 Testing and Performance Data
Include completed prefunctional checklists, functional performance test forms, and monitoring reports. Include recommended schedule for retesting and blank test forms. 1.2.5.9 Contractor Information
Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of the General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or equipment, or system. For each item, also provide the name address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project site. Provide the name, address, and telephone number of the product, equipment, and system manufacturers. 1.3 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN CONTROLS O&M DATA PACKAGES
Include Data Package 5 and the following for control systems: a. Narrative description on how to perform and apply all functions, features, modes, and other operations, including unoccupied operation, seasonal changeover, manual operation, and alarms. Include detailed technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorithms. Full as-built sequence of operations. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not Cx tests). Section 01 78 23 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
b. c.
Ft. Detrick, MD
d.
Full points list. A listing of rooms shall be provided with the following information for each room: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Floor Room number Room name Air handler unit ID Reference drawing number Air terminal unit tag ID Heating and/or cooling valve tag ID Minimum cfm Maximum cfm
e.
Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the system. Full as-built print out of software program. Electronic copy on disk or CD of the entire program for this facility. Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and mechanical drawings with their control system designations.
f. g.
h.
1.4
SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES
Furnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections. The required information for each O&M data package is as follows: 1.4.1 a. b. c. d. e. f. 1.4.2 a. b. Data Package 1 Safety precautions Cleaning recommendations Maintenance and repair procedures Warranty information Contractor information Spare parts and supply list Data Package 2 Safety precautions Normal operations
Ft. Detrick, MD
c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. 1.4.3 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s.
Environmental conditions Lubrication data Preventive maintenance plan and schedule Cleaning recommendations Maintenance and repair procedures Removal and replacement instructions Spare parts and supply list Parts identification Warranty information Contractor information Data Package 3 Safety precautions Operator prestart Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures Normal operations Emergency operations Environmental conditions Lubrication data Preventive maintenance plan and schedule Cleaning recommendations Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques Wiring diagrams and control diagrams Maintenance and repair procedures Removal and replacement instructions Spare parts and supply list Product submittal data O&M submittal data Parts identification Warranty information Testing equipment and special tool information Section 01 78 23 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
t. u. 1.4.4 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. 1.4.5 a.
Testing and performance data Contractor information Data Package 4 Safety precautions Operator prestart Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures Normal operations Emergency operations Operator service requirements Environmental conditions Lubrication data Preventive maintenance plan and schedule Cleaning recommendations Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques Wiring diagrams and control diagrams Maintenance and repair procedures Removal and replacement instructions Spare parts and supply list Corrective maintenance man-hours Product submittal data O&M submittal data Parts identification Warranty information Personnel training requirements Testing equipment and special tool information Testing and performance data Contractor information Data Package 5 Safety precautions
Ft. Detrick, MD
b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. PART 2
Operator prestart Start-up, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures Normal operations Environmental conditions Preventive maintenance plan and schedule Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques Wiring and control diagrams Maintenance and repair procedures Removal and replacement instructions Spare parts and supply list Product submittal data Manufacturer's instructions O&M submittal data Parts identification Testing equipment and special tool information Warranty information Testing and performance data Contractor information PRODUCTS
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 1.1 1.1.1
GENERAL SUMMARY Section Includes
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Government's operation and maintenance personnel, including the following: A. B. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. Section Related
1.1.2
This specification section is related to any and all specification sections with explicit or implicit reference to demonstration and training. 1.2 1.2.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING OVERVIEW General
Adequate and thorough training of the Operators and the facilities staff is vital to effective transition and early occupancy of the building. A key goal of this project is to ensure that this is accomplished. Contractor, Subcontractors, and Manufacturers/Vendors as specified shall prepare and conduct training sessions on the installed systems and equipment for which they are responsible. The Contractor shall be responsible for insuring all other training is performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2.2 Training Events Overview
Training Events include all classroom and field-based training sessions that result in the training or transference of knowledge to the Government. The following Training Events shall be executed as part of the Training Program: 1.2.2.1 Equipment and Systems Training
The Contractor (or Manufacturer's Representative) shall provide training to the Government Operators and Facility Users (as applicable) on individual systems and equipment only after successful Start-Up. These training events cover proper operation, maintenance, repair, and diagnosis of the systems, equipment, and components installed by the Contractor. Details are provided elsewhere in this Section. 1.2.2.2 Final Systems Operation Training
The Contractor shall provide training to the Government Operators on whole-building operation. This training shall focus primarily on BAS control of building systems and operation and its impact on building Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 79 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
performance, and shall be conducted after FPTs have been substantially completed. 1.2.3 Training Means and Methods
Details on the means and methods for conducting training, including location requirements, preparation, methods for presentation, scheduling, instructor qualifications, and other details are provided in this section. Training sessions should typically start and end in a classroom setting. Field demonstrations will also typically be conducted to demonstrate the hands-on aspects of the required tasks. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
SD-07 Certificates Facilitator Qualifications; G Instructor Qualifications; G Qualification Data: For facilitator and instructors, to demonstrate their capabilities and experience, include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Training Plan, G Training Plan Submittal: The Training Plan shall outline the Equipment and Systems Training and Final Systems Operation Training Events as proposed by the Contractor, and shall be approved by the Contracting Officer. Contractor will compile the individual training agendas and Training Modules of the subcontractors and vendors and submit a comprehensive Training Plan to the Contracting Officer no less than two months prior to any scheduled training. Training Plan Format: Submit 3 hard copies and one electronic copy of training plan. Hard Copies: Provide 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches three "D" ring binders in volumes as required to be manageable. Provide a separate binder for at least each Division. Organize all manuals in a comprehensive and coordinated format. Provide major tabs for each training module. 11 inch by 17 inch pages may be used for drawings and shall be folded down to 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch size. Electronic Copy: Provide a summary document in .pdf or .html format that effectively provides hyperlinks to the subject documents which are all in .pdf format.
Ft. Detrick, MD
Training Plan Content: Training Plan shall detail all equipment and systems-related training events with topics to be covered and approximate training duration as indicated below: Training Schedule: The training schedule shall outline in calendar format, proposed dates for training sessions. Training Agendas: Provide an outline agenda for each training session including at a minimum: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. Topic and applicable specification section; Scheduled date(s) for the Events(s); Location and setting (classroom or field); Facilitator and instructors qualifications; Co-instructors and their qualifications; Training objective; Event outline/agenda; Detailed breakout of content to be presented; Anticipated duration; Required attendees for each session.
Training Modules: Include the detailed handouts and presentation material for the session. Where O and M documentation is to be used, provide applicable excerpts targeted at the subject.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals Training Documentation, G Record Training Documentation: The Contractor shall document all training sessions. No training session will be approved as final or complete until the record training documentation has been submitted. Provide recorded training sessions, for each training session, in DVD medium. Submit 6 copies of DVD. The documentation shall consist mainly of the Training Plan with the final schedules, agendas, and modules, and it shall be supplemented with: A. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. B. Attendee Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test. C. Program Evaluations: out by the Attendees. 1.4 1.4.1 QUALIFICATIONS Facilitator Qualifications Include all Program Evaluations filled
A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that required for this project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.4.2
Instructor Qualifications
A factory-authorized service representative, experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. 1.4.2.1 Specific Qualifications
Instructor shall meet or exceed any specific qualifications or experience requirements indicated in the technical specification sections for the specific system, subsystem, or equipment that is the subject of the training or demonstration. 1.5 PREINSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
The Contractor, facilitator, and instructors shall conduct a conference at the project site to review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: A. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and other facilities. Review required content of instruction. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. COORDINATION Planning and Execution
B.
C. D.
1.6 1.6.1
Coordinate with Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING for planning and execution of demonstration and training. 1.6.2 Instruction Schedule
Coordinate instruction schedule with the Contracting Officer, USAMRIID, and USACE. Be prepared to adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Government's installation operations. 1.6.3 Instructors
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. 1.6.4 Content of Training Modules
Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program module until operation and maintenance data or manual(s) as required for the equipment in the module have been reviewed and approved by the Contracting Officer.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.6.5
Digitally Recorded
The Contractor shall have the training sessions digitally recorded. Contractor shall coordinate with the AV consultant to facilitate effective recordings. Any objections to digitally recording the audio and video of the session must be stated with the bid. The Government reserves the right to digitally record any training not explicitly taken exception to. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS INSTRUCTION PROGRAM Program Structure
Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Division 02-49 technical specification sections and as follows: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. 2.1.2 Motorized doors Fire-protection Systems Intrusion Detection Systems Conveying systems Laboratory equipment HVAC Equipment and controls Lighting systems HEPA filters and housings Sterilizers Fume Hoods Laboratory Washers and Dryers Plumbing Equipment and controls Training Handouts
Attendees shall receive a hard copy print out of the training module content to facilitate future reference and note taking. 2.1.2 Equipment and Systems Training Module Content
Develop and submit written learning objective and teaching outlines for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: A. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria
Include the following: A. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Section 01 79 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
B. C. D. E. F. G. H.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. Operating standards. Regulatory requirements. Equipment function. Operating characteristics. Limiting conditions. Performance curves. Documentation
2.1.2.1
Review the following items in detail: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Emergency manuals. Operations manuals. Maintenance manuals. Project Record Documents. Identification systems. Warranties and bonds. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. Emergencies
2.1.2.2
Include the following, as applicable: A. B. C. D. E. F. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. Instructions on stopping. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures. Operations
2.1.2.3
Include the following, as applicable: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. Startup procedures. Equipment or system break-in procedures. Routine and normal operating instructions. Regulation and control procedures. Control sequences. Safety procedures. Instructions on stopping. Normal shutdown instructions. Operating procedures for emergencies. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures. Adjustments
2.1.2.4
Include the following: A. B. C. Alignments. Checking adjustments. Noise and vibration adjustments. Section 01 79 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
D.
Economy and efficiency adjustments. Troubleshooting
2.1.2.5
Include the following: A. B. Diagnostic instructions. Test and inspection procedures. Maintenance
2.1.2.6
Include the following: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Inspection procedures. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. Procedures for routine cleaning. Procedures for preventive maintenance. Procedures for routine maintenance. Instruction on use of special tools. Repairs
2.1.2.7
Include the following: A. B. C. D. E. Diagnosis instructions. Repair instructions. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. Instructions for identifying parts and components. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. Contact Information
2.1.2.8
Provide names, addresses, phone numbers, email addresses, etc. for suppliers of all parts and service related to the subject systems. 2.1.3 Final Systems Operation Training
Final Systems Operation Training provides the Government and Operators a training session on whole-building operation. It shall focus primarily on BMS control of building systems and operation and its impact on building performance. System interactions shall be presented and discussed (such as a combined air handler, chiller, boiler, and terminal unit system), along with a detailed presentation of the sequences of operation and their relationship to the BMS. This training shall be conducted by the ATC with assistance from the CxC, and shall be attended by the Government, Operators, Contractor, Design Team, and by any other Commissioning Team members deemed necessary by the CxC or the Government 2.1.3.1 Coordination with BMS Training
Detailed BMS component training for the facility Operators shall be considered as part of Equipment and Systems Training. This training shall have been completed prior to Final Systems Operation Training. 2.1.3.2 Scheduling
Final Systems Operation Training shall be conducted after all FPTs have Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 79 00 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
been successfully executed. 2.1.3.3 Attendees
Any Cx Team member is eligible to attend. Required attendees include the Building Management Contractor (lead), CA (assist), Contractor, MC, MDE, and Government/Operators. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 EXECUTION PREPARATION Educational Materials
Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual. 3.1.2 Instructional Equipment
Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 3.2.1 INSTRUCTION Qualified Facilitator
Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Government for number of participants, instruction times, and location. 3.2.2 Contractor Provided Instruction
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Government's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 3.2.3 3.2.3.1 Government-Provided Instruction: System Design
Government will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. 3.2.3.2 Operational Philosophy
Government will furnish an instructor to describe operational philosophy. 3.2.4 Participants
The Contracting Officer will furnish the Contractor with the names and positions of Government's participants. 3.2.5 Scheduling
Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.2.5.1
Schedule Training
Schedule training with the Contracting Officer at least 14 days' in advance. 3.2.6 Evaluation Of Attendees
At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of the module by use of a demonstration performance-based test. 3.2.7 Program Evaluation
At the conclusion of each training module, distribute a Program Evaluation to be completed by the attendees to assess their perception of the quality of the session. Evaluation form will be provided to the Contractor by the Commissioning Authority. 3.2.8 Cleanup
Collect and remove used and leftover educational materials. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. 3.2.9 A. Demonstration and Training Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Government personnel. Demonstration and instructions shall take place after operation and maintenance data is submitted and approved. Equipment demonstrations shall be conducted by qualified installer personnel and manufacturer's representative. Equipment and systems requiring seasonal operation: Perform demonstration and training session within 6 months. Basis of instruction: Use approved Operation and Maintenance manuals. Review manuals with Government personnel in detail to explain aspects of operation and maintenance. Manufacturer's advertising literature is not acceptable for demonstration. At equipment location demonstrate start-up, operation, controls, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment scheduled. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. Provide professional video taping of each instructional session. Provide Government minimum of 2 copies of videotape. Obtain and submit statement from Government indicating the demonstration and instruction was completed and satisfactory.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 81 19 INDOOR AIR QUALITY
PART 1 1.1 1.1.1
GENERAL DEFINITIONS A Construction IAQ Management Plan
A document specific to a building project that outlines measures to minimize contamination in the building during construction and to flush the building of contaminants prior to occupancy. 1.1.2 HVAC Systems
Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems used to provide thermal comfort and ventilation for building interiors. 1.2 LEED REQUIREMENTS
LEED NC version 2.2, Indoor Environmental Quality A. B. 1.2.1 EQ Credit 3.1 Construction IAQ Management Plan during construction. EQ Credit 3.2 Construction IAQ Management Plan before occupancy. Develop and Implement
Develop and Implement of an Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) management plan to reduce indoor air quality problems resulting from the construction process in order to help sustain the comfort and well-being of construction workers and building occupants. 1.2.2 During Construction
During construction meet or exceed the recommended Control measures of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3. 1.2.3 Protect
Protect stored on-site and installed absorptive materials from moisture damage. 1.2.4 Permanently Installed Air Handlers
Contractor is to provide necessary equipment, fuel and power required for temporary heating, cooling and ventilation of the building during construction. Use of the permanently installed HVAC equipment and components is not allowed without express written authorization from the Contracting Officer Representative (COR). 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 81 19 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Construction IAQ Management Plan during construction; G AR (LEED) Construction IAQ Management Plan before occupancy; G AR (LEED) Provide project's Indoor Air Quality Management Plans. SD-07 Certificates Certify Narrative Certify if the permanently installed air handling equipment was used during construction. List List filtration media, manufacturer, model number, MERV rating, and location of installed filter, installed during construction and confirm each was replaced prior to final occupancy. Narrative Provide narrative if special circumstances or non-standard approaches are undertaken by the project. 1.4 IAQ MANAGEMENT
General Intent: The Contractor shall use all means available to reduce to the greatest extent practical and economically feasible, contaminates into the building. 1.4.1 IAQ Measures
Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Control measures as recommended by SMACNA standard: Take a pro-active, responsible role in management of IAQ control and require all subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to participate in the effort. Establish a construction IAQ management program that includes the following control measures: 1.4.1.1 A. HVAC Protection:
Protect the HVAC systems during construction from dust and odors. Follow Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS requirements. Use of the permanent systems during construction needs Contracting Officer Representative (COR) approval. Air filters during Construction to follow Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS requirements.
B.
C.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.4.1.2
Source Control
Control pollutant sources. 1.4.1.3 A. Pathway Interruption
Isolate areas of work to prevent contamination of clean or occupied spaces. Provide 100 percent ventilation to exhaust from building contaminated air during installation of VOC-emitting materials. Recover, isolate and ventilate containers housing toxic materials. Avoid exhaust fumes from idling vehicles and gasoline fueled tools. Housekeeping
B.
C. D.
1.4.1.4
Provide cleaning activities designed to control contaminates in building during construction and prior to occupancy. 1.4.1.5 Scheduling
Sequence construction activities over the duration of the project to minimize the impact on the indoor air quality. Schedule flush-out and IAQ test procedures to be completed prior to occupancy. Coordinate activities with the requirements of LEED EQ credits 3.2 and 5. 1.5 1.5.1 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT PLANS IAQ Manager
Identify the member of the contractor's team who shall serve as the IAQ Manager. IAQ Manager shall be responsible to identify IAQ problems and their mitigation 1.5.2 Submit IAQ
Within 30 days after contract award and prior to performing any work, submit IAQ Management Plans (during construction plan and before occupancy plan) for review and approval. The IAQ Management Plans shall include the following: 1.5.2.1 A. EQ Credit 3.1:
Review the applicability of each control measure for the project and include those that apply. Specify the control measures for materials containing VOCs. Specify the control measures for each activity generating dust and odors. Specify the control measures for porous material protection from exposure to moisture including protection of stored materials on-site prior to, during, and after installation. Description of the method to be employed in materials and description of the method that will be used to protect from contamination, Section 01 81 19 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
B. C.
D.
E.
Ft. Detrick, MD
including temporary ventilation, heating, air conditioning, and barriers. 1.5.2.2 EQ Credit 3.2
List the option or options intended to be implemented. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 EXECUTION PROGRAM IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING Implement And Maintain
Implement and maintain the construction IAQ management plan for the duration of the project. Establish a method of monitoring and documenting the program. Submit a periodic report with each application for payment that includes the strategies used during the construction period to meet the IAQ plan. 3.1.2 Preoccupancy phase
Preoccupany Phase (Option 1 - Flush-out): After construction ends, prior to occupancy and with interior finishes installed, perform a building flush-out by supplying a total air volume of 14,000 cu.ft. of outdoor air per sq.ft. of floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60 degrees F and relative humidity no higher than 60 percent. Follow option 2 if plan indicates this option for Air Quality Testing in accordance with protocols consistent with the United States Environmental Protection Agency Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air and as detailed in the LEED NC 2.2 Reference Guide under EQ credit 3.2. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE) ASHRAE Guideline 1-1-2007 (2007) HVAC & Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process (2005) The Commissioning Process
ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005
ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC) AABC MN-1 (2002) National Standards for Total System Balance (2005) Commissioning Guideline
ACG Commissioning Guideline
NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB) NEBB Commissioning Standard (1999) Procedural Standards for Building Systems Commissioning (2005) Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems
NEBB TABES
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2007) National Electrical Code - 2008 Edition
1.2
INTRODUCTION
Commissioning is to demonstrate that each system has been provided in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and that building systems perform interactively and reliably according to the design intent and the Government's operational needs, in a systematic process. This Section includes Definitions, Submittal Requirements, Commissioning Standards, General Commissioning Process, and general responsibilities. Systems to be Commissioned (not validated) are listed under each applicable Division. 1.3 A. B. RELATED SECTIONS Section 01 33 00 Section 01 45 10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
Ft. Detrick, MD
C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K.
Section 01 45 70 Section 01 75 00 Section 01 77 00 Section 01 79 00 Section 01 81 19 Section 01 91 01 Section 01 91 02 Section 01 91 03 Section 01 91 04 (FOST) Section 03 08 00 Section 05 08 00 Section 07 08 00 Section 08 08 00 Section 09 08 00 Section 11 08 00 Section 12 08 00 Section 13 08 00 Section 21 08 00 Section 22 08 00
ROOM INTEGRITY TEST STARTING AND ADJUSTING CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING COMMISSIONING - INDOOR AIR QUALITY COMMISSIONING - COMPONENT VERIFICATION COMMISSIONING - SYSTEM TESTS COMMISSIONING - INTEGRATED SYSTEM TESTS COMMISSIONING-FUNCTIONAL OPERATIONAL SYSTEM TEST
L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. S. T. U. V.
COMMISSIONING OF CONCRETE COMMISSIONING OF METALS COMMISSIONING OF THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION COMMISSIONING OF OPENINGS COMMISSIONING OF FINISHES COMMISSIONING OF EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING OF FURNISHINGS COMMISSIONING OF SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
Section 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS Section 23 05 93.00 10 SYSTEMS Section 25 08 00 Section 26 08 00 Section 28 08 00 SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC
W.
X. V. Z.
COMMISSIONING OF INTEGRATED AUTOMATION SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING OF FIRE ALARM AND MASS COMMUNICATION
AA. Section 33 08 00 1.4 APPENDICES
COMMISSIONING OF UTILITIES
Refer to the following Commissioning Appendices for sample Commissioning Forms. The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) to modify sample forms for quantity of equipment and/or systems specific to this project, and then Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 91 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
complete for individual equipment and/or system. Final checklists per system are to be developed and provided by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Section Numbering in each Appendix correlates to each applicable Division Section number in the specification. A letter suffix (A, B or C) is added to indicate respective Appendix. Appendix-A: Appendix-B: Appendix-C: 1.5 ABBREVIATIONS Component Verification Forms (CVF). System Test (ST) Forms. Integrated System Test (IST) Forms.
The following are common abbreviations used in Commissioning Documents. AE BMS CC COR CQC CVF Cx CxA CxC CxD CxS CxU EC FAC FOST FM IST MC O&M PM QA QC Architect and Design Engineers Building Management System Controls Contractor Contracting Officer's Representative Contractor Quality Control Component Verification Form Commissioning Commissioning Authority (COR) Commissioning Coordinator Commissioning Design (A/E) Commissioning Specialist (COR) Commissioning User Electrical Contractor Fire Alarm Contractor Functional Operating System Test Facility Management Integrated System Test Mechanical Contractor Operations and Maintenance Project Manager Quality Assurance Quality Control Section 01 91 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
SC ST Subs TA TAB USACE 1.6
Security Contractor System Test Subcontractors to General Testing Agency Test and Balance Contractor United States Army Corps of Engineers
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Commissioning Execution Plan; G, AR AE Design documents commission-ability review report. Commissioning Execution Plan prepared in accordance with this and related Sections, no later than 28 days after the Contracting Officer's Representative (COR) approval of the Commissioning Firm and Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) Prepare work schedules, startup procedures and work plans. minimum of Six (6) copies plus electronic copy of each for approval. Submit
Work Schedules: Detailed work schedules at least thirty (30) days before beginning work of this Section. Startup Procedures: Detailed startup procedures based on manufacturer's recommendations for each system component at least thirty (30) days before startup work. Work Plans: Detailed plans showing each step of the work of this Section at least thirty (30) days before beginning this work. Submit names of individuals, company affiliation, and who will be performing the work, and who are managing the work. Show locations in the system that will be manned for observing results. SD-02 Shop Drawings Component Verification Forms (CVF); G, AE Component Verification Forms per System, to be submitted at least 28 days prior to the start of Component Verification. The schedule for these checks shall be submitted at least 14 days prior to the start of Component Verification. System Tests (ST); G, AE Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 91 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
System Test procedures are to be submitted at least 28 days prior to the start of these tests. The schedule for these tests is to be submitted at least 14 days prior to the start this testing. Integrated System Tests (IST); G, AE Integrated System Test procedures are to be submitted at least 28 days prior to the start of these tests. The schedule for these tests is to be submitted at least 14 days prior to the start this testing. Functional Operating System Tests (FOST); G, AE Functional Operating System Test procedures are to be submitted at least 28 days prior to the start of these tests. The schedule for these tests is to be submitted at least 14 days prior to the start of testing. SD-06 Test Reports Final Cx Report; G, AR AE Submit minimum of Six (6) hard copies and one electronic copy of the final Commissioning Report no later than 60 days after completion of Tests. Includes: Component Verification Forms (CVF) System Test Forms (ST) Document Number established, System identified, Support Documents on File including completed associated CVFs with sign-offs, System Test Check List items completed with sign-offs, non-complying items corrected and verified completed. Integrated System Test Forms (IST) Document Number established, System identified, Support Documents on File including completed associated ST forms (with sign-offs), Integrated System Test Check List items completed (with sign-offs), non-complying items corrected and verified completed. Functional Operating System Tests (FOST); G, AR AE Submit minimum of Six (6) hard copies and one electronic copy of the final Commissioning Report no later than 60 days after completion of Tests. Duration and Trending Tests successfully completed, non-conforming items corrected and retested as required, with sign-off completed. SD-07 Certificates System and Design Document Identification Sheets Certification of Work Conditions Certification that conditions required to start each item of work is completed. Submit certification at least five (5) days prior to beginning work on each system.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.7 A.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Commissioning shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the standard under which the Commissioning Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e., ACG Commissioning Guideline or NEBB Commissioning Standard, unless otherwise stated herein. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the Commissioning Standard shall be considered mandatory. The Commissioning Standard shall be used for all aspects of Commissioning, including qualifications for the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and associated Firm and calibration of Commissioning instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the Commissioning Standard, the manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to. Quality requirements provisions of the Commissioning Standard such as performance guarantees shall be part of this contract. For systems or system components not covered in the Commissioning Standard, Commissioning procedures shall be developed by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Where new procedures, requirements, etc., applicable to the Contract requirements have been published or adopted by the body responsible for the Commissioning Standard used (PECI, ACG, NEBB, or TABB), the requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements shall be considered mandatory. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). for Total System Balance. AABC MN-1, National Standards
B.
C.
National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). NEBB TABES, Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standards. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 Standards for commissioning and ASHRAE Guideline 1-1-2007. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Standards. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) - Calibration of Instruments used for measurement. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards including, but not limited to, NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC). Portland Energy Conservation Inc. (PECI) - Commissioning Guide Specification for Large Buildings. U.S. Pharmacopoeia Requirements. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Provide a qualified Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and Commissioning Firm supporting staff to commission the project. Representatives as designated by the COR for: the COR, Users, QA, USACE Commissioning personnel and AE may witness any or all testing or commissioning activities during the different phases of the project. The COR is to be notified of scheduled activities so that appropriate persons may attend. The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall provide a Section 01 91 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
D. E.
F. G.
H.
I.
J. 1.8 A.
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
copy of the approved Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP) and Commission schedule, and notify the COR a minimum of two week prior to performing the commissioning activity. C. The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall ensure that all responsible persons attending, conducting or witnessing commissioning activities, including representatives of the Contractor, Sub-Contractor, Vendor or Manufacturer sign-off on each applicable item done in their presence for the record. Blank spaces on forms to be used as needed. Indicate appropriate abbreviation designation for company or group that the person represents. The main responsibility for confirmation of item completion and sign-off shall reside with the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and the Contractor Quality Control (CQC). Commissioning includes: 1. Development and preparation of the Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP). Coordination commissioning activities and responsibilities with Contractor Quality Control process under Section 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL, and as related to scope covered under related Division Commissioning Sections and Commissioning Appendices. Component Verification (CVF) of all major critical equipment, and items listed on Component Verification Forms. Refer to Section 01 91 01 COMMISSIONING COMPONENT VERIFICATION for additional requirements. Verification that Equipment and System Start-ups have been scheduled and completed per Section 01 75 00 STARTING AND ADJUSTING requirements before proceeding to System Testing. Commissioning effort interface with Start-up activities are as defined in this Section. System Tests (ST) to demonstrate equipment, subsystem and system operation and performance. System Test to include capacity testing. Refer to Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST for additional requirements. Integrated System Tests (IST) to demonstrate system operation and performance in conjunction with other Systems. Refer to Section 01 91 03 COMMISSIONING INTEGRATED SYSTEM TEST for additional requirements. Integrated System Testing for systems serving BSL-3E, BSL-4, ABSL-3E and ABSL-4 Areas are to be run concurrently. Integrated System Testing to also demonstrate that BSL-3E, BSL-4, ABSL-3E and ABSL-4 rooms do not go "positive", and that directional airflow is maintained from lower containment levels into the higher containment levels during normal operation, and during simulated component/equipment failures, utility failures, switchovers to back-up equipment and services, and equipment safety trips. Functional Operating System Tests (FOST) to demonstrate system operation as the facility over a period of time. Refer to Section 01 91 04 COMMISSIONING FUNCTIONAL OPERATIONAL SYSTEM TEST for additional requirements. FOST testing to be conducted in two portions: Section 01 91 00 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
D.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Ft. Detrick, MD
a. Functional Operational System Testing of BSL-3E, BSL-4, ABSL-3E and ABSL-4 Areas and supporting systems are to be conducted together. b. Entire facility and all systems, inclusive of BSL-3E, BSL-4, ABSL-3E and ABSL-4 area systems on-line. c. Operational Staff Training. Responsibilities as defined in this Section. 8. Web-enabled Cx usable and searchable database to document the Cx process including but not limited to, Cx schedule, Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP), Non-Conforming Item List, all Commissioning Supporting Documents and Forms, final reports, and BMS Trend Logs during ST, IST and FOSTs. Cx Database documentation to occur through out the project. Submit database to COR as a part of final Cx documentation. Database to be secure with general access password protection, read/write assigned protection.
E.
Commissioning to include 100 percent of all components and systems except as otherwise specified in the Division specific commissioning sections (## 08 00). Verification and Testing to progress from components to subsystems to systems to integrated systems. Non-Conforming Items: 1. All non-conforming items found during each Commissioning stage (CVF, ST, IST and FOST) are to be corrected, adjusted, and re-tested to demonstrate compliance prior to advancing to the next level of commissioning. The CxC is to be notified as soon as outstanding items have been corrected. Non-conforming items are to be corrected and re-verified or retested in a timely manner. Non-conforming items which have not been completed and witnessed, and later cause problems or delays during Commissioning may result in back charges to the responsible party. The CxC will identify any non-conforming item on the appropriate Commissioning Form, and the Contractor Quality Control will direct the responsible party to correct the item.
F.
G.
2.
3.
4.
H.
Project Beneficial Occupancy Date will not be established until all building systems have successfully completed all requirements of commissioning. The Contracting Officer Representative (COR) is the ultimate authority for final determination that the building is accepted for Beneficial Occupancy. Coordinating and providing necessary responsible person from the Contractor, Sub Contractor(s), Equipment Manufacturers and Vendors to support the commissioning activities and requirements. Operational Staff Training on the operational and maintenance requirements for this facility.
I.
J.
Ft. Detrick, MD
K.
All confirmation and verification required by Cx testing and check lists shall be through "visual observation" of the actual equipment being tested in the facility. Also confirm that proper displays and accuracy of values at the BMS front-end station. BMS displays alone are not an acceptable confirmation of correct system operation. Confirmation and verification of component or system operation is to be through actual simulated conditions at the sensors. Over-writing values through the BMS is not acceptable, unless approved by the COR. Proposed exceptions need to be identified and protocol submitted to the COR for approval. (Example of an exception: When "various" actual static pressures inside ductwork can not be simulated within the duct, and where a sensor signals the BMS to initiate sequences at various duct statics, it is acceptable to simulate the various pressures via Pneumatic Squeeze-Bulb Type Signaling Device with gauge temporarily attached to the sensing tube leading to the transmitter. It would not be acceptable to reset the various set-points, nor to simulate an electric analog signal.) QUALIFICATIONS Commissioning services are to assist the Contractor in performing the quality oversight for which it is responsible. The Commissioning Firm shall be a subcontractor of the prime Contractor and shall be financially and corporately independent of all other Subcontractors. The Commissioning Firm shall report to and be paid by the prime Contractor. ACG Certified Commissioning Agent, a NEBB Qualified Commissioning Administrator, or a TABB Certified Commissioning Supervisor and shall be an employee of the approved Commissioning Firm. Commissioning Firm is also to be either a member of ACG or certified by the NEBB or the TABB and certified in all categories and functions where measurements or performance are specified on the plans and specifications. CxC firm shall be a nationally recognized firm with prior documented experience for commissioning laboratory and vivarium buildings, and (A)BSL-3 & 4 facilities in the USA. Experience shall include commissioning of: HVAC Systems, Plumbing Systems, Fire Protection Systems, Building Management Systems (BMS), Electrical Systems, Fire Alarm Systems and other scope described in related commissioning sections. Personnel for the CxC firm performing Commissioning work in the field for the (A)BSL-3E and (A)BSL-4 areas and systems, must each have documented prior experience in the Commissioning (A)BSL-3 & 4 facilities. Provide list of past laboratory and vivarium project commissioning experience of the CxC firm and personnel to be assigned to this project. List of project experience to include a minimum of three facilities where the CxC has been responsible for commissioning (A)BSL-3 and 4 areas and systems. List to be submitted at time of Bid, and shall indicate size of project, size of (A)BSL-3 & 4 areas, contact name and telephone number for references. The CxC firm shall have sufficient number of additional qualified personnel for commissioning work.
L.
1.9 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Ft. Detrick, MD
G.
The CxC shall maintain a presence at the site at all times during progress of commissioning work. The CxC staff shall be subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer. The CxC shall provide adequate office space, filing systems and other resources as necessary to maintain an effective and fully functional CxC firm. The CxC shall maintain the required staff. When it is necessary to make changes to the CxC staff assigned to this project, the CxC shall submit the names, credentials and three references, to the Contracting Officer for acceptance. Certification above shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) or firm loses subject certification during this period, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer Representative (COR), and submit another Commissioning Coordinator or Commissioning Firm, for approval. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by the ACG, the NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding Contract Award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the Chemical Shower systems, including Commissioning. Commissioning work performed by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall be considered invalid if person loses their certification prior to Contract completion, and the work shall be performed by the approved successor. COMMISSIONING COORDINATOR (CXC) - GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES Perform a commission-ability review of the design documents within 90 days of the NTP, and submit a report of findings and list of recommended changes where applicable, for COR review and approval. Commissioning procedures, testing and activities shall be developed and conducted so as not to cause personal injury, damage components, damage systems, or damage the building or other property. The CxC is to have the Contractor review the final Test protocols and procedures for safety concerns, equipment and warranty protection, and general comments, prior to their execution. Develop and maintain the Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP). CEP to be submitted to COR for approval prior to execution. After approval, the Contractor shall revise the Contract NAS schedule to reflect the schedule requirements in the CEP. The CEP shall include: 1. Verification and Testing procedures based on the construction documents, and detailed performance attributes of each system. Comprehensive Commissioning Work Schedule. Schedule to include all submittal requirements for procedures, notifications, and reports. Commissioning Work Plans. Compile and maintain the list of responsible person's name, Section 01 91 00 - Page 10 For Official Use Only
H. I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
1.10 A.
B.
C.
2.
3. 4.
Ft. Detrick, MD
address, telephone number, fax number and email address from each of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. D. Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Contracting Officer's Representative (COR) Commissioning User (CxU) Project Managers (PM) Army Surgeon General's Representative(HFPO/HFPA) Biological safety officer Fire Marshal. Security/Public safety. O&M: Operations and Maintenance Commissioning Designer (CxD): CUH2A and Smith Carter. Contractor and Sub-Contractors. TAB Contractor (TAB) Control Contractor (CC) Mechanical Contractor (MC) Electrical Contractor (EC) Fire Alarm Contractor (FAC) Security Contractor (SC) Site Foremen. Principal Superintendent Other applicable persons as needed.
Provide direct guidance, supervision, and authorization for all Commissioning work and activities. Review, coordinate and finalize each Contractor and Sub-Contractors schedule of work associated with all commissioning activities. Organize and maintain commissioning report which shall consist of all documentation described herein, and organized as follows: 1. 2. Section 1 - Commissioning Specifications Section 2 - Component Verification Forms (CVF), System Test forms (ST), Integrated System Test Forms (IST), and Functional Operating System Test forms (FOST). Section 3 - Completed Test Reports Section 4 - Additional Support Documentation as required, including certification of work conditions. Section 5 - Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP).
E.
3. 4.
5. F.
Organize and Manage the work so that Component Verification, System Testing, Integrated System Testing and Functional Operation System Testing are performed and can be witnessed by the COR during normal working hours. Meetings: Commissioning meetings will be required throughout construction, scheduled by the CxC with necessary parties attending, to plan, scope, coordinate, schedule future activities and resolve non-conforming items. These meetings will be scheduled as necessary, with their frequency increasing as the Cx process becomes more involved. The meetings will generally occur before and after the execution of major Cx phases and tasks.
G.
Ft. Detrick, MD
H.
Equipment Documentation: The CxC will request additional information from the contractors and equipment suppliers as needed for each Commissioning activity. The information will generally include; approved submittals, O&M manuals, and manufacturer's start-up procedures. Develop final version of System Test (ST), Integrated System Test (IST) and Functional Operational System Test (FOST) procedures and forms based on sample Forms in the Commissioning Appendices - A, B & C, and submit for COR approval, prior to commissioning activities. Coordinate commissioning activities with the CQC. Witness, complete and sign-off on all Component Verification Forms (CVF), System Test Forms (ST), Integrated System Test Forms (IST), and Functional Operational System Test Forms (FOST). Start-up responsibilities as indicated under Start-up article in this Section. Operational Staff Training responsibilities are as indicated under Operational Staff Training article within this Section and Section 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING. Review O&M manuals for operational completeness and ensure changes made during the course of the project, as a result of Cx, are incorporated into the manual. Perform periodic system-walk-through along with the Contractor Quality Controller (CQC) during construction prior to commissioning. Any non-conforming items found are to be included on the Non-Conforming Item List. Verify non-conforming items are corrected in a timely manner. Compile and organize completed Component Verification Forms (CVF) and assemble them into a final Commissioning Report. Compile and organize completed System Test (ST) Forms and assemble them into a final Commissioning Report. Compile and organize completed Integrated System Test (IST) Forms and assemble them into a final Commissioning Report. Compile and organize completed Functional Operational System Test (FOST) Forms and assemble them into a final Commissioning Report. Provide, organize and maintain the Web-enabled Cx database for all documents, forms and reports. Provide data logging equipment and software required to test equipment. Data logging equipment used on site shall be identified by manufacturer, model, and source(s) for procurement, but shall not become the property of the Government. Confirm that Room Integrity Testing has been successfully completed per Section 01 45 70 ROOM INTEGRITY TESTING requirements and that the final testing report have been submitted, accepted and included in the Cx Files.
I.
J. K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.11
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL (CQC) - GENERAL CX RESPONSIBILITIES
As specified under Section 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. 1.12 TESTING AND BALANCER (TAB) - GENERAL CX RESPONSIBILITIES
A. As specified under Section 23 05 93.00 10 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. 1.13 A. GOVERNMENT - GENERAL CX RESPONSIBILITIES Discretionary participation as the COR or designate parties they deem necessary appropriate. Gives final decision if the Project is accepted for Beneficial Occupancy after all building systems have successfully completed all requirements of commissioning. Provide positive pressure suits per Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST requirements. CONTRACTOR - GENERAL CX RESPONSIBILITIES As specified within this Section, and in all Related Sections. Review the final Commissioning test protocols and procedures established by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) for safety concerns, equipment and warranty protection, and general comments, prior to their execution. Submit review comments and concerns to Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Provide access means (lifts, ladders, etc.) to support commissioning activities. Provide utilities, water (raw water only), fuel or other testing materials required for commissioning work. STARTUP System startup shall commence after associated Component Verification Forms are completed prior to initiating System Testing (ST), Integrated System Testing (IST), and Functional Operational System Testing (FOST). The objective is to assure that all components and equipment are prepared and started up safely, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Commissioning Coordinator CxC Responsibilities 1. Review, coordinate and finalize schedule of Contractor and Sub-Contractor work associated with system startup activities. The Contractor, working with the subcontractors, will provide a start-up schedule of all mechanical equipment. The start-up schedule will take into account construction activities and will be developed to protect the mechanical systems during normal construction activities. The Contractor, Contractor Quality Control (CQC) and Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) will review the schedule to ensure it satisfies the project requirements. If the use of a permanent building system for temporary conditioning is approved in writing by the COR, then their use shall be identified Section 01 91 00 - Page 13 For Official Use Only
B.
C.
1.14 A. B.
C.
D.
1.15 A.
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
in the start-up schedule. 2. Obtain a copy of all warranties on equipment and systems as applicable. This includes any extended warranties specified, and as deemed necessary by the COR for use of permanent equipment due to special operating procedures or temporary usage. Notify COR of start-up activities 14 days prior to their occurrence. Ensure that there is written documentation that each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have been completed. Review startup procedures. Verify System Start-up of Equipment and Systems have been successfully completed. List deficiencies found during system startup. Document the resolution of all discrepancies and variations on the Deficiency Tracking List. Include completed forms in final Commissioning Report. Deficiencies are to be identified to the Contracting Officer Representative (COR) for determination if commissioning activities will continue or will be on hold until corrections are made to continue with commissioning activities. Compile startup information and assemble Start-Up Reports for inclusion in Final Commissioning Report. Provide Web-enabled Cx database to document the Cx process. Start-up reports to be documented on the Web-enabled Cx database through out the project. Database to be submitted to the COR as a part of final Cx documentation.
3.
4.
5. 6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Contractor and Sub-Contractor's Responsibilities 1. Develop a startup plan and schedule for each system to be commissioned. Coordinate schedule development relating to system startup activities with Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Perform equipment and system startup following the guidelines established, and approved by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Coordinate with other Sub-Contractors as required. Fill out manufacturers' start up and initial checkout forms submit to the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC), as part of the Supporting Documents required for Commissioning. Clearly list outstanding items during the initial start up procedures, which were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies shall be provided to the CxC within two days of test completion, and items added to the Deficiency Tracking List. Rectify any system or equipment deficiencies found during system startup. Section 01 91 00 - Page 14 For Official Use Only
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Ft. Detrick, MD
7.
The Contractor and vendors shall execute start up and provide the CxC with a signed and dated copy of the completed start up reports. The Contractor shall provide the use of two-way radios where required for commissioning activities. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout shall be provided by the Division contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 23 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the BMS in Division 25, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB and controls contractor in their commissioning responsibilities.
8.
9.
10. Contractor shall remain responsible for executing Start-up in a safe manner, that would not cause personal injury, or damage the components, systems, building or its' contents. 1.16 A. OPERATIONAL STAFF TRAINING Operational staff training shall be conducted after Component Verification work is completed. The objective is to provide facilities operation personnel with the necessary information and instruction to assure that they can efficiently and safely operate and maintain the facility systems at their peak performance levels. Follow Section 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING requirements. Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) Responsibilities 1. 2. Observe and participate in training sessions. Review format and content of sessions, and verify required scope is being covered.
B. C.
D.
Contractor and Sub-Contractor Responsibilities 1. 2. 3. Develop schedules of training sessions. Provide O&M manuals and spare parts lists as specified. Notify Contracting Officer Representative (COR) and provide workspace and/or conference rooms as required. Conduct training sessions. Digital Recording: Follow Section 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING requirements. PRODUCTS
4. 5.
PART 2
Not Used. PART 3 3.1 A. EXECUTION WORK REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL Commissioning Coordinator (CxC), Contractors and Sub-Contractors shall Section 01 91 00 - Page 15 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
perform Commissioning work specified. B. If satisfactory results are not achieved, corrective measures shall be identified and corrective action taken before retesting. Document discrepancies and variations on Non-Conforming Item List on each CVF, ST and IST forms. Retest systems until results are approved. Use final Component Verification Forms (CVF), System Test (ST) forms, Integrated System Test (IST) forms, and Functional Operational System Test (FOST) forms developed by the CxC to document results of the various commissioning activities and tests. The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) shall complete, initial and date each work item in the appropriate column on each form after the work item has been performed, and shall note results of each work item in the appropriate column on each form. The CxC and/or CQC shall have persons who are present during each commissioning test / item, initial and date items of which they were present, in the blank sign off columns provided on each form for record purposes. At the completion of all required commissioning verification and test work, adjust all components, both singularly and as a whole, and leave in an approved operating condition. Contractor and Sub-Contractors shall follow Contract Modification Control Procedures and provide documented evidence. These procedures address changing any protocol, system component, performance attribute, software or hardware (once tested and accepted). These procedures apply to both pre-shipment qualifications and for final acceptance. Work shall be performed as defined in Related Sections, and per the approved protocols in the Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP). COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE AND SEQUENCING The following sequential priorities shall be included in the Commissioning schedule. 1. Component Verification Form (CVF) Check Lists are not to be started until Shop Drawings and Submittals have been Approved, Equipment and/or Item have been installed in its final location per specification requirements, and required contractor field piping and ductwork pressure tests completed. Moisture, dust and other environmental and building integrity issues have been addressed. Permanent HVAC Equipment and Systems are not to be used for temporary heating or cooling or ventilation, without express prior written consent of the COR, per Section 01 81 19 INDOOR AIR QUALITY and Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS requirements. Equipment and System Start-ups are not to commence until all applicable Component Verification has been completed, deviation log items to-date addressed, piping and ductwork systems pressure tested, inspections by Authority-Having-Jurisdiction (AHJ) have been completed, manufacturer's pre-start checklist items and all Section 01 91 00 - Page 16 For Official Use Only
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.2 A.
2.
3.
4.
Ft. Detrick, MD
manufacturer's pre-start procedures are completed, moisture / dust and other environmental and building integrity issues have been addressed, and approval by CxC has been given. 5. Permanent Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing Equipment shall not be used for temporary construction needs (e.g., electric power, HVAC systems, equipment skids, etc.) unless approved in writing by the Contracting Officer Representative (COR). System and Integrated System testing is not begun until the controls system and equipment it controls have had all control points (I/O Point List)confirmed, control loops tuned, devices and sensors calibrated and Performance Verification Test (PVT) completed under Section 25 10 00 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) requirements. Copies of documentation and reports of I/O Check list, and PVTs are to be turned over to the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) for inclusion as Cx Supporting Documentation. System Tests (ST) are not begun until Component Verification's, and start-up and TAB are completed, for a given system (this does not preclude a phased approach). See Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST requirements. Integrated System Tests (IST) are not to begin until Component Verification's, start-up, TAB and System Tests are completed for a given system (this does not preclude a phased approach). Functional Operational System Testing (FOST): Refer to Section 01 91 04 COMMISSIONING FUNCTIONAL OPERATIONAL SYSTEM TEST for list of work that must be completed prior to beginning FOST.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.3
COMPONENT VERIFICATION FORMS (CVF)
As specified in Section 01 91 01 COMMISSIONING COMPONENT VERIFICATION. 3.4 A. SYSTEM START-UP The startup plan to be reviewed and a pre-startup inspection performed by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and the Contractor Quality Control (CQC). Contractor and Sub-Contractors shall commence with system startup after approval has been given to the startup plan and associated Component Verification Forms have been completed and signed-off. The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) shall witness system startups. System and equipment non-conforming items found during Start-Up, shall be added to the Non-Conforming Item List for corrective action. The Contractor, Sub-Contractor shall take corrective action on deficiencies, and demonstrate to the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) suitable system operation. Balancing and System Tests (ST) work shall commence after system has successfully completed startup.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.5
SYSTEM TESTING (ST)
As specified under Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST. 3.6 INTEGRATED SYSTEM TESTING (IST)
As specified under Section 01 91 03 COMMISSIONING INTEGRATED SYSTEM TEST. 3.7 FUNCTIONAL OPERATIONAL SYSTEM TESTING (FOST)
As specified under Section 01 91 04 COMMISSIONING FUNCTIONAL OPERATIONAL SYSTEM TEST. 3.8 OPERATIONAL STAFF TRAINING
As specified within this Section, and in Section 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING. 3.9 A. INSTRUMENTATION Instrumentation shall be provided by Contractor or Sub-Contractor initiating the tests. Instruments used for measurements shall be accurate, and calibrated and certified to be National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable. Calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments and accuracy of measurements shall be in accordance with the requirements of AABC or NEBB Standards. Test Instruments and Calibrations: Provide a list of the standard instruments required to conduct the testing. Verify that the reference standard is NIST-traceable or equivalent and that the instruments are within their recalibration interval. A copy of the most recent calibration of these instruments shall be included in the Commissioning Project File. The Contractor (controls contractor) to provide the use of a portable computer with all software loaded and operational to access the BMS at the application specific BMS panels shall be provided. The computer shall be returned to the Contractor after acceptance of the FOST. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: as a minimum, test equipment and meters will have accuracy three times better then the process being measured. All equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates readily available. ORGANIZATION OF DOCUMENTATION Contractor and Sub-Contractors shall collect and document data, and submit to the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC), supporting documentation of all data and tests performed prior to and after system startup. Documentation shall also include startup approved procedures. Documentation of procedures, design data and test result data shall be typewritten on 8-1/2 by 11 inch paper suitable for insertion into a three-ring binder. Indicate the project name, number, volume number Section 01 91 00 - Page 18 For Official Use Only
B.
C.
D.
3.10 A.
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
and volume title, and organize the documented information in a format acceptable to Contracting Officer Representative (COR). Pages shall be numbered and centered on the bottom in sequential numerical order. Provide tabs for multiple submittals. Checklists can be reproduced from the master sheets provided. Checklist approvals shall be made in a legible manner and handwritten in ink. C. 3.11 A. Provide a table of contents for multiple submittals. REPORTS General 1. Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall submit at least six (6) hardbound copies and one (1) loose completed copy of the following reports (organized by system subsections, to the Contracting Officer Representative (COR) for review and approval. The CxC shall compile all Component Verification (CVF) Forms, System Test (ST) Forms, Integrated System Test (IST) Forms, and Functional Operational System Test (FOST) Forms as they are completed for inclusion in the Final Cx Report. The compiled completed forms shall be accessible to the COR at the site at any time during construction. CxC shall provide copies of any forms in progress or completed that are requested by the COR during the Cx process for their reference. Checklist forms shall be satisfactorily completed with all non-conforming items addressed and retested, initialed and dated, as specified. System and Design Document Identification Sheets: Contractor shall complete the identifying system component tables for each system or as instructed by the COR. The attached tables are as follows: a. b. c. d. e. B. System Related Drawing/Specification Section. System Related Equipment Identification. Instrument Identification. Document Manuals. Utility Information.
2.
3.
4.
Final Cx Report: Organize per Integrated System Test (IST). Each IST shall have all associated System Tests (ST) as sub-tabs to it, and each associated System Test shall have all its associated Component Verification Forms (CVF), Start-up Reports and PVT Reports as a sub-section under the System Test (ST). Assign Document Numbers to each form, and identify by System. Include Section containing System and Design Documentation Identification Sheets. Functional Operational System Test (FOST) Final Report. Duration and Trending Tests successfully completed, non-conforming items corrected and retested as required, with sign-off completed. Web-Enabled Cx Database: All documents, forms and reports to be
C.
D.
Ft. Detrick, MD
included on the Web-Enabled Cx Database.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 91 01 COMMISSIONING COMPONENT VERIFICATION
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
Component Verification commissioning activities are to assure that all components, materials and equipment are purchased, installed and tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and Contract Documents. Component Verification is ongoing throughout the submittal, purchasing and installation phases. 1.2 A. RELATED SECTIONS Sections listed under RELATED SECTIONS article specified in Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING APPENDICES
B. 1.3
Refer to Commissioning Appendix - A for sample Component Verification Forms (CVF) Commissioning Forms for each Division. The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall modify sample forms for quantity of equipment and/or systems specific to this project, and then complete for individual equipment and/or system. Final checklists per system are to be developed and provided by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Section Numbering in each Appendix correlates to each applicable Division Section number in the specification except for the 'A' letter suffix. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Requirements as specified in Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. 1.5 A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Component Verification shall be completed by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and Contractor Quality Control (CQC) per the Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP). The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall provide a copy of the approved Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP) and Commissioning schedule to the COR, and notify the COR, a minimum of two weeks prior to performing the commissioning activities. See commissioning sections under each related specification Division for lists of systems to be commissioned. Refer to Commissioning Appendix-A for related sample CVFs. Component Verification to include 100 percent of components and equipment except as otherwise specified in the Division specific commissioning sections (## 08 00). Verify factory and field testing have been completed, outstanding Section 01 91 01 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
B.
C.
D.
E.
Ft. Detrick, MD
deficiencies have been properly addressed and their associated reports submitted, approved and in the Cx File and Database. F. Verify that Supporting Documentation as required have been completed, approved and are in the Cx File and Database. Verification that Equipment and System Start-ups have been scheduled and completed per Section 01 75 00 STARTING AND ADJUSTING requirements before proceeding to System Testing. Commissioning effort interface with Start-up activities are as defined in this Section. Non-conforming items found during Component Verification are to be corrected, adjusted, and re-verified to demonstrate compliance prior to advancing to the System Testing level of commissioning. Coordinating and providing necessary responsible person from the Contractor, Sub Contractor(s), Equipment Manufacturers and Vendors to support the commissioning activities and requirements. GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) Responsibilities: 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Responsibilities: 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. Refer to Section
G.
H.
I.
1.6 A.
B.
Refer to Section
C.
Testing and Balancing (TAB) Agency's Responsibilities: As specified in Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING, and Section 23 05 93.00 10 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. Government Responsibilities: COMMISSIONING. PRODUCTS As specified in Section 01 91 00
E.
PART 2
Not Used. PART 3 3.1 A. EXECUTION COMPONENT VERIFICATION Component Verification Form (CVF) are located in Commissioning Appendix-A. Based on contract documents, additional requested documentation, and changes affecting equipment, the CxC shall update the CVF's accordingly, modify forms to be specific to this project, submit for approval, then provide the final CVF's to the Contractor. The Contractor will distribute the CVF's to the subcontractors. The subcontractors shall use individuals with direct knowledge of the installation to execute the component verification. The CxC and CQC will field verify the installation and fill out the CVF's as verification that installation check sheets are valid and that the equipment is ready for start-up. Commissioning Coordinator (CxC shall ensure that responsible persons attending, conducting or witnessing commissioning activities, including representatives of the Contractor, Sub-Contractor, Vendor or Manufacturer sign-off on each applicable item done in their presence for the record. The main responsibility for confirmation of item Section 01 91 01 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
completion and sign-off shall reside with the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and the Contractor Quality Control (CQC). C. Non-Conforming Items shall be identified, corrected and re-verified or retested per Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements. Sensor and Actuator Calibration: Field-installed end devices including but not limited to temperature, relative humidity, CO, CO2 and pressure sensors and gages, and actuators (dampers and valves) on equipment shall be calibrated by responsible associated Subs using industry standard methods or by the methods described below. End devices including but limited to temperature, relative humidity, CO, CO2 and pressure sensors and gages, and actuators (dampers and valves) required for Cx shall be field calibrated. Test instruments shall have had a certified calibration within the last 12 months. Sensors, with calibration certification, installed in the unit at the factory shall be field calibrated. Procedures used shall be fully documented on suitable forms, and attached to the Component Verification Form (CVF). The attachment shall clearly indicate the procedures followed and written documentation of initial, intermediate and final results. Sensor calibration checklist shall compare values with calibrated instrument readings, noting percent deviation for each. All confirmation and verification required by Cx testing and check lists shall be through "visual observation" of the actual equipment being commissioned. GENERAL ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS Equipment and system properly labeled and / or tagged. Component or Equipment location and service have been clearly identified on the Component Verification Form (CVF). Supporting Documentation required has been submitted. Equipment or systems installed per the contract drawings, contract specifications, submittals and shop drawings, manufacturer and vendor requirements, in a good workmanship manner. Appropriate industry standards shall be met. Equipment, systems, and ancillary equipment installed with proper support, vibration isolation, and seismic constraints. Equipment, systems, and ancillaries, flushed, cleaned, and inspected. Support services and utilities installed and verified. Controls, instrumentation and monitoring installed, calibrated, and verified. Leak and pressure testing completed and documented as required. Verify that a copy of final approved Performance Verification Test Reports for work covered prior to Commissioning, has been received and copy is in the Cx file.
D.
E.
3.2 A.
B. C.
D.
E. F. G.
H. I.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST
PART 1 1.1
System Tests (ST) commissioning activities are to demonstrate and document that each system is operating according to the Contract Documents, that equipment and systems are hooked up and operational, and that each piece of equipment receives full system checkout. System Testing (ST) can start after associated Component Verification Forms (CVF), Equipment and System Start-ups, and Testing & Balancing (TAB) requirements have been completed. 1.2 A. B. RELATED SECTIONS Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. Sections listed under RELATED SECTIONS article specified in Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. APPENDICES
1.3
Refer to Commissioning Appendix - B for sample System Test (ST) Commissioning Forms for each Division. The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall modify sample forms for quantity of equipment and/or systems specific to this project, and then complete for individual equipment and/or system. Final checklists per system are to be developed and provided by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Section Numbering in each Appendix correlates to each applicable Division Section number in the specification except for the 'B' letter suffix. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
As specified in Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. 1.5 A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS System Testing (ST) shall be completed per the Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP) by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) in conjunction with the Contractor Quality Control (CQC). The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall provide a copy of the approved Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP) and Commissioning schedule, and notify the COR a minimum of two week prior to performing the commissioning activity. Systems and equipment to be operated over a range of load and functional levels. System Test Commissioning to include 100 percent of equipment and systems except as otherwise specified in the Division specific commissioning sections (## 08 00). System Testing (ST) shall not start until the following items have been completed: Section 01 91 02 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
B.
C.
D.
E.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.
Verification that the final System Tests procedures and forms have been developed and included in the Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP). Verification that all Contractor, Sub-Contractor, Vendor or Manufacturer field testing specified for equipment under each Division, have been completed, related outstanding CVF non-conforming items properly addressed, and associated reports submitted, approved and in the File. Associated punch list items have been corrected. Verification that all Component Verification Forms (CVF) related directly to the System to be tested (including BMS items), have been completed. Verification that Equipment and System Start-ups have been completed per Section 01 75 00 STARTING AND ADJUSTING requirements before proceeding to System Testing check lists and forms. Verification that the Performance Verification Testing (PVT) specified under Division 25 has been completed by the BMS Contractor. Verification that Testing and Balancing of major air related and water related equipment and distribution systems, has been completed and debugged, and preliminary TAB Report has been accepted and is on file. Verification that control points and control loops associate with the System to be Tested have been completed, checked-out via the Performance Verification Test (PVT) specified under Division 25, controls adjusted, and that the controls required for the System Test are ready for the System Test. Systems that are integral to the control systems deemed necessary to be completed by the CxC shall be completed. Including, but not limited to, Freezer alarm systems, lab equipment alarms, fume hoods and Bio-Safety Cabinets.
2.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Verification that supporting documentation has been completed, approved and is on File. F. Non-conforming items found during System Testing (ST) are to be corrected, adjusted, and re-tested to demonstrate compliance prior to advancing to the Integrated System Testing (IST) or Functional Operational System Testing (FOST) level of commissioning. Coordinating and providing necessary responsible person from the Contractor, Sub Contractor(s), Equipment Manufacturers and Vendors to support the commissioning activities and requirements. System Tests are functional demonstrations of the approved sequence of operation for each system. Each system to be operated through all modes of operation. System Test includes, but not limited to, the following: 1. Capacity testing of major mechanical and electrical equipment, to Section 01 91 02 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
G.
H.
Ft. Detrick, MD
5 percent scheduled capacity. Capacity testing shall be performed when outside air conditions exist that are appropriate for simulation of full load conditions. Seasonal Testing may be required, and testing should be scheduled accordingly. Capacity testing can be completed during IST commissioning period if weather conditions do not facilitate timely testing during ST activities. 2. Efficiency testing of major mechanical and electrical equipment, to 5 percent efficiency specified and as submitted. Seasonal testing may be required if simulated loading of equipment can not be obtained. Occupied / unoccupied mode. Capacity test during simulated part and full-load conditions. Equipment and system safeties. Equipment and System failure modes. Fire alarm conditions. Startup and shut down sequence.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Equipment and system interlocks. 11. Failure of equipment and systems demonstrating the any required alarming and reporting functions occur. Note: failures are restricted to those which would be considered likely to happen during the normal course of operation, i.e.: power failures, equipment failures, fire alarm conditions. 12. All associated controls and alarms. HVAC sequence-related criteria will be specified. Code required sequencing shall be per the applicable code. 13. Verifying the accuracy/repeatability on sensing devices. 14. Verifying loop response and set-point deviation criteria. 15. Motor Phase Imbalance: Volts). 1.6 A. RESPONSIBILITIES Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) Responsibilities: Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Responsibilities: Section 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. As specified in Shall be no more than 2 percent (Amps and
B.
As specified in
C.
Testing and Balancing (TAB) Agency's Responsibilities: As specified in Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING, and Section 23 05 93.00 10 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. Government Responsibilities as specified in Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. Section 01 91 02 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
D.
Ft. Detrick, MD
E.
Contractor and Sub-Contractor Responsibilities 1. Assist Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) in the development of schedules relating to System Testing (ST) activities. Provide a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems, including an updated points list, program code, control sequences and parameters to the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Provide assistance to the CxC in developing the System Test procedures (e.g.,: answering questions about equipment, operation, sequences, etc.). Review the System Tests protocols and procedures established by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection, and prior to System Test execution. Execute System Testing (ST) activities specified. Sign-off on check list items where directed by the Contractor Quality Control (CQC), or Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Supply data and test results as needed to document operation of systems to be commissioned. Starting of equipment to be tested, if that equipment has not been in continuous operation since start-up. Coordinating testing with other construction activities to ensure the test can be performed, and that the testing does not adversely affect the other construction activities.
2.
3.
4.
5. 6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Provide adequate time for the system testing in the construction schedule. 11. Scheduling and providing applicable Contractor and equipment suppliers, participate in the testing per the specifications. 12. Correct system and/or equipment non-conforming items as directed by Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and the Contractor Quality Control (CQC), within time frame to maintain schedule, and schedule System Re-Testing with the CxC. 1.7 A. RETESTING Non-conforming items identified during System Testing, are to be corrected before Re-testing the System. Components Verification for components which need to be corrected shall follow the Component Verification process and (CVF) forms per Section 01 91 01 COMMISSIONING COMPONENT VERIFICATION requirements. Deficiency item found outside the Cx check list, but of which are required by the design, shall be added to the Deficiency Tracking List for resolution. Items that affect System Testing are to be corrected prior to re-testing of the system. Corrective action due to Manufacturer Defects is to follow the Section 01 91 02 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
B.
C.
Ft. Detrick, MD
procedure specified in this section. D. Systems that require re-start-up of the system due to corrective work shall follow the original Start-Up procedures specified. The CxC retains the original ST Forms which indicate non-conformance items until the end of the project. MANUFACTURER DEFECTS If two units of the same manufacturer and model fail to perform to the Contract Documents (mechanically or substantively as deemed by the COR) due to a manufacturing defect, then identical units may be considered unacceptable by the Government. In such case, the Contractor shall provide the Government with the following: 1. Within one week of notification from the COR, the Contractor or manufacturer's representative shall examine other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings shall be provided to the COR within two weeks of the original notice. Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or manufacturer shall provide a signed and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc. and proposed solutions which shall include full equipment submittals. The proposed solutions shall not significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original installation. The Government will determine whether a replacement of identical units or a repair is acceptable. Two examples of the proposed solution will be installed by the Contractor will be allowed to test the installations for up to one week, upon which the COR will decide whether to accept the solution. Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair identical items, at their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun. The replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from when parts can be obtained.
E.
1.8 A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.9 A.
TRENDING System test to include BMS trending of all associated points. Trend log to indicate set-points and actual conditions, valve and damper positions, equipment status and alarm. Trending Log to have date and time indicated. Attach hardcopy of Trend Log to the associate ST Form for record, and software copy of trend data for the web data-base. PRODUCTS CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED PRODUCTS 15 breathing air test regulators will be provided by the Contractor and left with the Government at job completion. Each test regulator will Section 01 91 02 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
B. C.
PART 2 2.1 A.
Ft. Detrick, MD
consist of a manifold with 3 breathing air Qwik-connectors to allow connection to 3 breathing air outlets, with a regulator and flow indicator that allows for flow rate adjustments from 0 - 30 l/sec at 5 bars. Discharge of the test regulators will be in to the space. B. Spore samples and testing services will be provided to validate the liquid decontamination system. Coordinate spore types to be used, and criteria for testing with the COR. Carcass material (initially 200 lbs total weight) to conduct four full load tests of the tissue digester. Spore samples will also be required for this testing. Coordinate carcass make-up (individual sizes for test) with the COR. Microchem (minimum of 2 barrels)to be used as needed during STs, ISTs, and FOST commissioning work. Temporary security cards and enrollment on the security system for biometrics devices, for access and to facilitate ST, IST and FOST commissioning work. Contractor is to manage assignment of temporary cards and keep track of their usage, and promptly report lost or stolen cards. Contractor to also provide a list of the temporary security cards and biometric enrollments issued, name of individual assigned to that access device, date issued, and person issuing the access card / biometrics, for authorization by the COR for their usage, and for record. After work is completed all temporary cards / biometrics shall be accounted, and turned over to the COR. Contractor to provide: 1. Minimum 20 temporary security badges, enough to provide 5 for BSL-4 access, 5 for common or general access, 2 for cleaning services / janitorial, and the remained to cover other standard levels of security access. Temporary enrollment for biometrics access control devices for 20 people for facilitating commissioning work.
C.
D.
E.
2.
2.2
GOVERNMENT SUPPLIED PRODUCTS
Positive pressure suits (minimum of 4) and related training in their use, storage and care. Contractor shall give 30 day notice to USAMRIID POC Safety - Catherine Welhem (telephone number 301-619-2934) prior to their need in the field, and to schedule time for training. Suits are to remain available for STs, ISTs and FOST portions of commissioning. Suits are to be stored and maintained by the Contractor, and turned back over to the Government after all commissioning work has been completed. PART 3 3.1 A. EXECUTION GENERAL System Test (ST) forms are located in Commissioning Appendix-B. Based on contract documents, additional requested documentation, and changes affecting equipment or systems, the CxC shall update the System Test procedures accordingly, modify forms to be specific to this project, submit for approval, then provide the final STs to the Contractor. The Contractor and vendor responsible for the equipment being tested, shall provide assistance to the CxC in updating the procedures. The revised test procedures will be approved by the Contracting Officer Representative (COR). Section 01 91 02 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
B.
The subcontractors are to use individuals with direct knowledge of the installation to execute system testing under direction of the CxC. The CxC and CQC confirm system operation check list items and complete the ST forms as verification that the equipment and systems are operating as required, and are ready for further Integrated System Testing and FOST as applicable. The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall ensure that all responsible persons attending, conducting or witnessing commissioning activities, including representatives of the Contractor, Sub-Contractor, Vendor or Manufacturer sign-off on each applicable item done in their presence for the record. The main responsibility for confirmation of item completion and sign-off shall reside with the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and the Contractor Quality Control (CQC). The Contractor shall execute ST's under the direction of the CxC. Provide signed and dated copy of the completed checklists. Clearly list items that were not successfully completed on the form. The installing Contractor or vendors shall correct these items. Solutions to problems found maybe recommended, however the burden of responsibility to solve, correct and retest problems is with the Contractor. Four weeks prior to a System Test, the Contractor and vendors shall finalize scheduled date with the CQC and CxC. The performance of the ST are directed by the CxC and executed by the Contractor, Sub or vendor. When checking off ST, signatures may be required of other Contractor for verification of completion of their work as directed by the CQC. The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall ensure that all responsible persons attending, conducting or witnessing commissioning activities, including representatives of the Contractor, Sub-Contractor, Vendor or Manufacturer sign-off on each applicable item done in their presence for the record. The main responsibility for confirmation of item completion and sign-off shall reside with the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and the Contractor Quality Control (CQC). See related Division Commissioning Sections (xx 08 00) for list of equipment and systems to be commissioned. Sample System Test (ST) Forms are found in the Commissioning Appendix-B. The final version of the System Test Form is to be developed by the CxC and approved by the COR, prior to execution. The final form to indicate acceptance criteria per test check list item. The CxC is to provide the following additional information for the final ST being executed: 1. Required pre-test field measurements, and document to record the data. Field test instruments: manufacturer, model, calibration (NIST traceable) data and dates. Performance Verification Test (PVT) forms from the BMS contractor. Section 01 91 02 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
C.
D.
E. F. G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
2.
3.
Ft. Detrick, MD
4.
Pretest and Test measurements are to be recorded. These include, but not limited to the following information as applicable to the system type being tested: a. b. Air flow (CFM) Air Velocity (FPM)
c. Air side static pressure readings (Upstream and Downstream of components. d. Air Temperature / Humidity (Entering and Leaving side of components in system.) e. f. Particle Count. (PPM - Entering and leaving filters) Water (and Glycol solution) flow (GPM)
g. Water (and Glycol solution) pressure readings (Upstream and Downstream of components.) h. Water (and Glycol solution) temperatures (Entering and Leaving side of components in system.) i. j. k. l. m. n. 5. 6. L. Motor: Speed (RPM), Voltage, amps. Fan: Speed (RPM), sheave and belt sizes. Variable Frequency Drives (input signal and output hertz) Related Control set-points. Room pressure differential to adjacent space as applicable. Steam pressure (psig) and Temperature (degrees F).
Special instructions and cautions for setting up the test. Procedure for executing specific System Test.
All confirmation and verification shall be through "visual observation" of the item being tested. BMS displays alone are not an acceptable confirmation of correct system operation. Confirmation and verification of component or system operation is to be through simulated conditions at the sensors. TEST EQUIPMENT
M.
3.2
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements. 3.3 A. SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION Field-installed temperature, relative humidity, CO, CO2 and pressure sensors and gages, and all actuators (dampers and valves) on equipment shall be calibrated using the methods described below. Alternate methods may be used, if approved by the Government beforehand. Test instruments shall have had a certified calibration within the last 12 Section 01 91 02 - Page 8 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
months. CxC may waive field calibration for equipment which includes pre-installed sensors with documentation, calibration certification. Documentation must clearly reference the procedures followed and initial, intermediate and final results of calibration. B. Verify that sensor locations are appropriate and away from causes of erratic operation. Verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at one end. For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, make sure they are reading within 1 degree F of each other for temperature and within a tolerance equal to 2 percent of the reading, of each other, for pressure. Sensors Without Transmitters: Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat, gage or Building Management System (BMS)) is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value. If not, install offset in BMS, calibrate or replace sensor. Sensors: Disconnect sensor. Connect a signal generator in place of sensor. Connect ammeter in series between transmitter and BAS control panel. Using manufacturer's resistance-temperature data simulate minimum desired temperature. Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until 4 mA is read by the ammeter. Repeat for the maximum temperature matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span or maximum and verify at the BMS. Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessary to conform with specified control ramps, reset schedules, proportional relationship, reset relationship and P/I reaction. Reconnect sensor. Take readings with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat, gage or Building Management System (BMS)) is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value. If not, recalibrate sensor and repeat procedure. If sensor continues to be out-of-tolerance, then the Contractor shall replace the sensor, and repeat the procedure. For pressure sensors, perform a similar process with a suitable signal generator. Critical Applications. For critical applications (process, containment, etc.) more rigorous calibration techniques may be required for selected sensors based on manufacturer's recommendations or practices. Describe any such methods used on an attached sheet. Tolerances: Refer to Tolerances specified under Section 25 30 00 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) FIELD EQUIPMENT. VALVE AND DAMPER STROKE SETUP AND CHECK CxC shall remain responsible for all final System Test Procedures to be developed and executed. The following are examples of some System Test check List item procedures. 1. BMS Readout. For valve and damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the BMS readout. Set pumps or fans to normal operating mode. Command valve or damper closed, visually verify that valve or damper is closed and adjust output zero signal. Command valve or damper open, verify position is full open and adjust output signal. Command valve or damper to 3 intermediate positions (0 percent, 50 percent, and 100 Section 01 91 02 - Page 9 For Official Use Only
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.4 A.
2.
Ft. Detrick, MD
percent). If actual valve or damper position doesn't reasonably correspond, recalibrate pilot positioner (where applicable on pneumatic type applications) and repeat procedure. If this does not correct the problem then the Contractor shall replace actuator and/or pilot positioner, and repeat the procedure. 3.5 A. TEST METHODS Simulating Conditions: 1. Over-writing values through the BMS is not acceptable, unless approved by the COR. Proposed exceptions need to be identified and protocol submitted to the COR for approval. Below are several examples of exceptions that would be considered acceptable: a. When "various" actual static pressures inside ductwork can not be simulated within the duct, and where a sensor signals the BMS to initiate sequences at various duct statics, it would be considered acceptable to simulate the various pressures via Pneumatic Squeeze-Bulb Type Signaling Device with gauge temporarily attached to the sensing tube leading to the transmitter. It would not be acceptable to reset the various set-points, nor to simulate an electric analog signal. b. Dirty filter pressure drops can be simulated using sheets of cardboard at filter face. c. Freeze-stat safeties can be simulated via packing portion of sensor with ice. d. Heating the outside air sensor with a hair blower.
e. Using preheat coil to simulate entering cooling coil conditions. f. Using a signal generator to simulate a sensor signal is generally not recommended for commissioning, but may be proposed for special conditions.. g. Altering set points. For example, to see the AC compressor lockout work at an outside air temperature below 55 degrees F, when the outside air temperature is above 55 degrees F, temporarily change the lockout set point to be 0 degrees F above the current outside air temperature. Caution: Set points are not to be raised or lowered to a point that would damage the components, systems, or the building structure and/or contents. h. Duct Mounted smoke detectors to be tested per the detector manufacturer's recommendation using aerosolized smoke, and gauges on sampling tubes. Test to be done with air system at minimum airflow condition in ductwork. i. Current sensing relays used for fan and pump status signals to BMS to indicate unit failure and run status are to be tested by resetting the trip point on the relay to a point simulating lost belt or unit failure, while the unit is running and confirming that the failure alarm was generated and received at the BMS. After test is conducted the set point is to be returned to its original set-point or set-point as indicated by the COR. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 01 91 02 - Page 10 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.
Before simulating conditions, overwriting values (if approved), or changing set-points, sensors, transducers and devices shall have been calibrated.
B.
Setup. Each System Test checklist item shall be performed under conditions that simulate actual conditions as close as is practically possible. The Contractor or Sub executing the test shall provide all necessary materials, system modifications, etc. to produce the necessary flows, pressures, temperatures, etc. necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test, the Sub shall return affected building equipment and systems, due to these temporary modifications, to their pre-test condition. NON-CONFORMING ITEMS
3.6
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING Requirements. 3.7 DOCUMENTS AND REPORTS
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING Requirements. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 91 03 COMMISSIONING INTEGRATED SYSTEM TEST
PART 1 1.1
Integrated System Tests (IST) commissioning activities are to demonstrate and document integrated systems serving the facility and lab functions, life safety, which interface with various systems, including fire alarms, security, other air systems, controls, emergency or standby power, etc., are properly functioning together as specified and intended. Integrated System Test (IST) can start after associated Component Verification Forms (CVF), Equipment and System Start-ups, Testing & Balancing (TAB) requirements, and System Testing (ST) have been completed. 1.2 A. B. RELATED SECTIONS Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING
Sections listed under RELATED SECTIONS article specified in Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. APPENDICES
1.3
Refer to the Commissioning Appendix - C for sample Integrated System Test (IST) Commissioning Forms for each Division. The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall modify sample forms for quantity of equipment and/or systems specific to this project , and then complete for each integrated system. Final checklists per system are to be developed and provided by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Section Numbering in each Appendix correlates to each applicable Division Section number in the specification except for the 'C' letter suffix. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements. 1.5 A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Integrated System Testing (IST) shall be completed per the Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP) by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) in conjunction with the Contractor Quality Control (CQC). The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall provide a copy of the approved Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP) and Commission schedule, and notify the COR a minimum of two week prior to performing the commissioning activity. Integrated System Test Commissioning to include all directly inter-related Systems required per for proper sequence of operation specified. Integrated System Testing (IST) shall not start until the following items have been completed:
B.
C.
D.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.
Verification that the final Integrated System Tests procedures and forms have been developed and included in the Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP). Verification that all related System Testing (ST) have been successfully completed, including correction of non-conforming items and retesting, signed-off, submitted, approved and in the file. Verification that the Performance Verification Testing (PVT) specified under Division 25 has been completed by the BMS Contractor. Verification that Testing and Balancing of major air related and water related equipment and distribution systems, has been completed and debugged, and final TAB Report has been accepted and is on file. Systems that are integral to the control systems deemed necessary to be completed by the CxC shall be completed. Including, but not limited to, Freezer alarm systems, lab equipment alarms, fume hoods and Bio-Safety Cabinets. Verification that all Supporting Documentation as required have been completed, approved and are in the File.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
All non-conforming items found during Integrated System Testing (IST) are to be corrected, adjusted, and re-tested to demonstrate compliance prior to advancing to the Functional Operational System Testing (FOST) level of commissioning. Coordinating and providing necessary responsible person from the Contractor, Sub Contractor(s), Equipment Manufacturers and Vendors to support the commissioning activities and requirements. Integrated System Tests are functional demonstrations of the approved sequence of operation. Integrated Systems to be operated through all modes of operation. IST shall include work as identified on the IST forms in Appendix-C, and but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Redundant unit /system mode. Equipment and System failure modes. Power failure. Fire alarm conditions. Containment. Startup and shut down sequence. Equipment and system interlocks. Failure of systems demonstrating the any required alarming and reporting functions occur. Note: failures are restricted to those which would be considered likely to happen during the normal course of operation, i.e.: power failures, equipment failures, fire alarm conditions. Section 01 91 03 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
F.
G.
Ft. Detrick, MD
9.
All associated controls and alarms. HVAC sequence-related criteria will be as specified. Code required sequencing shall be per the applicable code.
10. Verifying loop response and set-point deviation criteria. 11. IST to include testing of interlocks and safeties that could initiate a failure mode, and verification that directional airflow from lower into higher containment areas is maintained during all conditions. Verify none of the Containment rooms and areas pressure controls go into "alarm" during ISTs. H. Each system should be operated through modes of operation identified in the IST and demonstrate that each system is operating in concert with the other systems according to the design intent and the contract documents. Proper responses to modes and conditions such as power failure, fire alarm conditions, biohazard, specific system failures, etc. shall also be tested. Specific modes required in this project are given in the IST. Development of Test Procedures: Before the CxC writes the final test procedures, the CxC shall obtain requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems, including an updated points list, control sequences and parameters. The CxC shall develop specific test procedures and forms to verify and document proper operation of integrated systems. The test shall include a list of points requiring monitoring and trending. Sample IST's are included in Commissioning Appendix-C. The CxC is to develop final detailed IST's during construction, based on the contract documentation and the approved shop drawing information. RESPONSIBILITIES Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) Responsibilities: Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Responsibilities: 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. As specified in
I.
1.6 A.
B.
Refer to Section
C.
Testing and Balancing (TAB) Agency's Responsibilities: As specified in Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING, and Section 23 05 93.00 10 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. Contracting Officer Representative (COR) Responsibilities: specified in Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. Contractor and Sub-Contractor Responsibilities 1. Assist Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) in the development of schedules relating to Integrated System Testing (IST) activities. Provide a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems, including an updated points list, program code, control sequences and parameters to the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Provide assistance to the CxC in developing the Integrated System Test procedures (e.g.: answering questions about equipment, operation, sequences, etc.). Section 01 91 03 - Page 3 For Official Use Only As
D.
E.
2.
3.
Ft. Detrick, MD
4.
Review the final Integrated System Tests protocols and procedures established by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection, and prior to their execution. Execute Integrated System Test (IST) activities specified. Sign-off on check list items where directed by the Contractor Quality Control (CQC), or Commissioning Coordinator (CxC). Supply data and test results as needed to document operation of systems to be commissioned. Starting of equipment to be tested, if that equipment has not been in continuous operation since start-up. Coordinating testing with other construction activities to ensure the testing can be performed as required, and that the testing does not adversely affect the other construction activities.
5. 6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Provide adequate time for the Integrated System Testing in the construction schedule. 11. Scheduling and providing all applicable Contractor and equipment suppliers, participate in the testing per the specifications. 12. Correct system and/or equipment non-conforming items as directed by Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and the Contractor Quality Control (CQC), within time frame to maintain schedule, and schedule Integrated System Re-Testing with the CxC. 13. Provide training to the CxC and CQC to access, understand and temporarily change values at the application specific DDC panels. Contractor to be informed of any changes prior to completion and turn-over of the project. 14. Temporary security access: SYSTEM TEST requirements. Follow Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING
15. Microchem: Follow Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST requirements. 1.7 A. RETESTING Non-conforming items identified during Integrated System Testing, are to be corrected before Re-testing. Deficiency item found outside the Cx check list, but of which are required by the design, shall be added to the Deficiency Tracking List for resolution. Items that affect the Integrated System Testing are to be corrected prior to re-testing of the system. Corrective action due to Manufacturer Defects is to follow the procedure specified under Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST. Systems that require re-start-up of the system due to corrective work shall follow the original Start-Up procedures specified.
B.
C.
D.
Ft. Detrick, MD
E.
The CxC retains the original IST Forms which indicate non-conformance items until the end of the project. TRENDING Integrated System Test to include BMS trending of all associated points. Trend log to indicate set-points and actual conditions, valve and damper positions, equipment status and alarm. Trending Log to have date and time indicated. Attach hardcopy of Trend Log to the associate ST Form for record, and software copy of trend data for the web data-base. PRODUCTS GOVERNMENT SUPPLIED PRODUCTS
1.8 A.
B. C.
PART 2 2.1
Positive pressure suits: Follow Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST requirements. PART 3 3.1 A. EXECUTION GENERAL Integrated System Test Forms (IST) are located in Commissioning Appendix C. Based on contract documents, additional requested documentation, and changes affecting equipment or systems, the CxC shall update the ISTs procedures accordingly, modify forms to be specific to this project, submit for approval, then provide the final ISTs forms to the Contractor. The Contractor shall execute IST's under the direction of the CxC. The Contractor and vendor responsible to execute a test, shall provide assistance to the CxC in updating the procedures. The revised test procedures will be approved by the Contracting Officer Representative (COR). The CxC and CQC shall field verify the operation of the integrated systems and fill out the ISTs as that they are operating as required, and that the systems are ready for FOST. The subcontractors are to use individuals with direct knowledge of the installation to execute system testing under direction of the CxC. The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall ensure that all responsible persons attending, conducting or witnessing commissioning activities, including representatives of the Contractor, Sub-Contractor, Vendor or Manufacturer sign-off on each applicable item done in their presence for the record. The main responsibility for confirmation of item completion and sign-off shall reside with the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and the Contractor Quality Control (CQC). Provide signed and dated copy of the completed checklists. Clearly list items that were not successfully completed on the form. The installing Contractor or vendors shall correct these items. Solutions to problems found maybe recommended, however the burden of Section 01 91 03 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
B. C.
D.
E.
F.
G. H.
Ft. Detrick, MD
responsibility to solve, correct and retest problems is with the Contractor. I. Four weeks prior to an Integrated System Test, the Contractor and vendors shall finalize scheduled date with the CQC and CxC. The performance of the IST are directed by the CxC and executed by the Contractor, Sub or vendor. When checking off IST, signatures may be required of other Contractor for verification of completion of their work as directed by the CQC. The Contractor, Sub-Contractor, and/or vendors shall execute IST checklist and provide the CxC with a signed and dated copy of the completed checklists. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task on the Integrated System Test Checklists was actually performed shall initial or check that item off. It is not acceptable for witnessing supervisors to fill out these forms. See related Division Commissioning Sections (xx 08 00) for list of Systems to be commissioned. Sample Integrated System Test (IST) Forms are found in the Commissioning Appendix-C. The final version of the IST Form is to be developed by the CxC and approved by the COR, prior to execution. The final form to indicate acceptance criteria per test check list item. The CxC is to provide the following additional information to that already indicated on the IST sample forms, for the final IST being executed: 1. Required pre-test field measurements, and document to record the data. Field test instruments: manufacturer, model, calibration (NIST traceable) data and dates. Special instructions and cautions for setting up the test. Procedure for executing specific System Test. Final Integrated System Test check list items. List of individual systems and equipment included in the IST. A copy of the specific sequence of operations or other specified parameters being verified. Formulas used in any calculations.
J.
K.
L.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8. M.
Integrated System Testing shall demonstrate that (A)BSL-3E and (A)BSL-4 rooms do not go "positive", and that directional airflow is maintained from lower containment levels into the higher containment levels during normal operation, and during component / equipment failures, utility failures, switchovers to back-up equipment and services, and equipment safety trips. SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING
3.2
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING Requirements.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.3
TEST EQUIPMENT
Follow Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST Requirements. 3.4 SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION
Follow Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST Requirements. 3.5 TEST METHODS
Follow Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST Requirements. 3.6 NON-CONFORMING ITEMS
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING Requirements. 3.7 DOCUMENTS AND REPORTS
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING Requirements.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 01 91 04 COMMISSIONING FUNCTIONAL OPERATIONAL SYSTEM TEST
PART 1 1.1
Functional Operation System Tests (FOST) provides a 30 day period for the facility to settle into a normal operational pattern and serves as the final acceptance for the facility. The focus will be on monitoring the facility and lab functions, the life safety elements related to system operations, specifically as they relate to the interlocks of the various systems, fire alarms, security, air systems, etc., and demonstrate a full dynamic operating facility, which is acceptable to the COR for Beneficial Occupancy. 1.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. RELATED SECTIONS Section 01 91 00 Section 01 91 01 Section 01 91 02 Section 01 91 03 Section 05 08 00 Section 08 08 00 Section 11 08 00 Section 13 08 00 Section 21 08 00 Section 22 08 00 COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING - COMPONENT VERIFICATION COMMISSIONING - SYSTEM TESTS COMMISSIONING - INTEGRATED SYSTEM TESTS COMMISSIONING OF METALS COMMISSIONING OF OPENINGS COMMISSIONING OF EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING OF SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
Section 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS Section 23 05 93.00 10 SYSTEMS Section 25 08 00 Section 26 08 00 Section 28 08 00 SYSTEMS SUBMITTALS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC
L.
M. N. O.
COMMISSIONING OF INTEGRATED AUTOMATION SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING OF FIRE ALARM AND MASS COMMUNICATION
1.3
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.4 A.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Perform the following FOSTs: 1. Containment area Functional Operational Testing (FOST) for the (A)BSL-3E and (A)BSL-4 suites. Facility Functional Operational Testing (FOST) for the entire facility as a whole.
2.
B.
Functional Operational System Testing (FOST) shall be completed per the approved Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP), by the Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) in conjunction with the Contractor Quality Control (CQC). The Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) shall provide a copy of the approved FOST protocol and schedule to the COR, and notify the COR a minimum of four weeks prior to starting FOST activity. Representatives as designated by the COR for: the COR, Users, QA, USACE Commissioning personnel and AE may observe, evaluate, identify deficiencies, and recommend modifications, tuning and adjustments. The CxC shall document the facilities performance. Tests are intended to be conclusive but may require minor modifications by the Contractor as system operation dictates. Security Systems portions of FOST to utilize confidential protocols. Functional Operational System Testing (FOST) shall not start until the following items have been completed: 1. Verification that FOST procedures have been developed and included in the Commissioning Execution Plan (CEP). Verification that all Component Verification Forms (CVF), System Testing (ST) and Integrated System Testing (IST) have been successfully completed, including correction of non-conforming items and retesting, signed-off, submitted, approved and in the File. Verification that Testing and Balancing, has been completed and final TAB Report has been accepted and in the File. Verification that all Supporting Documentation as required have been completed, approved and are in the File. Verify with the COR that the Pre-FOST Government Provided Equipment (GFGI) has been installed as indicated in Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE. BSL-3E, BSL-4, ABSL-3E and ABSL-4 areas and related systems serving these areas have been completed and successfully met all CVF, ST and IST levels of Commissioning. Applicable discipline work associated for Systems Furniture which has power and/or data connections has been completed.
C.
D.
E. F.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Contractor is to make minor adjustments which may be requested by the Government to optimize system operation during FOST phase. Section 01 91 04 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
G.
The Contractor is to identify minor punch list items in the remainder of the building that need to be done during this FOST period, and obtain approval from the COR to perform work. This work shall not interfere with FOST activities. Limited testing during the FOST to be performed to demonstrate fail-safe operation of the facility, and the building, the occupants, and the general public remain safe, and the biological hazards remain contained. Additional testing will be to verify or recommission any area of specific concern or areas of limited failure during this test. The Contractor will conduct this test under the direction of the CxC. The Government will provide representation for this test. The CxC will provide final approval of the test results, and will provide recommendation to the COR acceptance of the FOST results. The goals of the FOST, after the Construction Phase of the project, include the following: 1. Demonstrate that each system is operating in concert with every other system. Hands-on training of the Government's personnel for the high containment systems. Verifying that the facility has met the design intent of the construction specifications and drawings. Providing the O&M staff with more in-depth training on the various systems, with the opportunity for hands-on demonstration of the facilities in operation. Facilitate bringing the entire facility from a state of substantial completion to full dynamic operation. Documenting the specific failure conditions and response of the facility as identified in the test documentation. Adjusting systems for optimal performance as the building settles into a routine operating pattern. Trend variables to obtain facility operational and utility baseline data. Document data of specific failure modes and equipment responses to assist with information for facility protocols.
H.
I.
J.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Gain community response and provide community responders with training to abnormal conditions in the facility that may require their attention. 1.5 A. RESPONSIBILITIES Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) Responsibilities: 1. Develop a schedule for Functional Operational System Testing (FOST) activities, and submit to the COR for approval.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.
Coordinate the schedule with the CQC, CxD, CxU and COR members to allow for participation as necessary. Based on contract documents, additional requested documentation, and a current list of changes affecting equipment or systems updates will develop the FOST procedures, and submit to the COR for approval, prior to execution. Arrange and oversee Control Trending activities. The COR reserves the right to require additional BMS points be trended before or during the FOST, without added delay or costs. Verify that deficiencies are corrected in a timely manner. Document the resolution of all discrepancies and variations on a Corrective Action Report form. Include completed forms in final report. Trending Reports and assemble them into a final report for the COR. Submit the final report to the COR and include completed final Cx Report. Provide Web-enabled Cx database to document the Cx process. System Test reports to be documented on the Web-enabled Cx database through out the project. Database to be submitted to Government as a part of final Cx documentation. Refer to Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING for requirements in addition to those indicated in this Section. Refer to Section
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Contract Quality Control (CQC) Responsibilities: 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL.
C.
Testing and Balancing (TAB) Agency's Responsibilities: Refer to Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING, and Section 23 05 93.00 10 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. Design Architect and Engineers (AE) Responsibilities: 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. Refer to Section
D.
E.
Contracting Officer Representative (COR) Responsibilities: Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. Contractor Responsibilities 1.
Refer to
F.
Assist Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) in the development of schedules relating to Functional Operational System Testing (FOST) activities. Provide adequate time for the FOST in the overall construction schedule. Assist Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) in the development of Functional Operational System Testing (FOST) protocols. Scheduling and providing all applicable Contractors, Sub-Contractors and equipment suppliers, if required during the FOST. The Contractor and/or vendors under the direction of the CxC shall Section 01 91 04 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ft. Detrick, MD
execute the FOST and provide the CxC with a signed and dated copy of the completed report. 6. Supply trending data as needed to document operation of systems to be commissioned. Assist in trouble shooting problems which may arise during FOST activities, and starting of equipment, if required. Coordinating remaining minor punch and deficiency list items or other work, to ensure the FOST can be performed as required without interruption of the contiguous 30 day duration period. Correct items as directed by Commissioning Coordinator (CxC) and the Contract Quality Control (CQC), within time frame to maintain schedule.
7.
8.
9.
10. Provide necessary staff (contractor, subcontractor, TAB, vendor or manufacturers field representative)and tools, required to support the FOST activities and correct problems as they arise. 1.6 A. RETESTING The intent is to have a continuous 30 day Functional Operational Test (FOST). Deficiency and Non-conforming items identified during FOST which are deemed by the COR as significant and unacceptable to the safe and proper operation of the facility, shall require the Contractor to correct the problems and restart the 30 day test from Day-1. Retest until a full continuous 30 day test has been demonstrated may be required. The COR shall retain final authority on whether the item is of enough concern to require a total restart of the 30 day period, or if the test can be temporarily stopped and restarted where left off. Systems that require re-start-up of the system due to corrective work shall follow the original Start-Up procedures specified. TRENDING Functional Operational System Tests (FOSTs) to include BMS trending of all associated points. Trend log to indicate set-points and actual conditions, valve and damper positions, equipment status and alarm, and other points as directed by the COR. Trending Log to have dates and times indicated. Include hardcopy of Trend Log with the FOST Report, and provide a software copy for the web data-base. PRODUCTS CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED PRODUCTS
B.
1.7 A.
B. C.
PART 2 2.1
Products include but not limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. Use of Controls PC O&M documentation Training documentation, material, and schedule Section 01 91 04 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
4.
Temporary security access: SYSTEM TEST requirements.
Follow Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING
5.
Microchem: Follow Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST requirements.
2.2
GOVERNMENT SUPPLIED PRODUCTS Follow 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST
Positive pressure suits: requirements. PART 3 3.1 A. EXECUTION GENERAL
The FOST procedure form is to be developed by the CxC and shall include (but not be limited to) the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. List of all systems and equipment included in the FOST. Date. Project name. Participating parties. A copy of the specific sequence of operations or other specified parameters being verified. Required pre-test field measurements. Instructions for setting up the test. Special cautions, alarm limits, etc. Specific step-by-step procedures to execute the test, in a clear, sequential and repeatable format.
6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Signatures and date block for the sign-off B. Sample items that may be tested and trended during the FOST include, but not limited to: 1. Monitoring and trending ambient pressures, critical pressures and pressure differentials: a. b. 2. 3. Leave door open too long. Opening equipment penetrating walls.
Monitor and trend temperatures, interior and exterior. Security. (Shall utilize Confidential Protocol)
a. Minimum 20 security badges of various levels to challenge the security system. b. Temporary biometrics of 20 persons with various security levels to challenge the system. 4. Test Fire Alarm Section 01 91 04 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
a. Use smoke sticks or smoke cans to test smoke alarms in labs, closets, AHU's, etc. 5. 6. Test Atrium Smoke Control System Entry and Exit procedures for the laboratories: a. b. c. d. 7. Shower Suits Breathing air Emergency breathing air
Simulate 'beginning-of-the-day' entry by several people into containment areas. Testing Containment Specialties a. Lab fume hoods, monitor interior pressure compared to room pressure. b. Biological Safety Cabinets c. Autoclave d. Tissue Digester e. Cook tanks f. Blending tanks
8.
9.
Trending of the utilities via the BMS during entire FOSTs. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. Power monitoring Test Emergency Generator Operation UPS test Steam pressures (where applicable) Chilled Water System loop temperatures. Preheat System loop temperatures. Reheat hot water loop temperatures. Supply Air Temperature and Relative Humidity per system. Room Temperatures. Room Relative Humidity. Room air pressures A/BSL-3E and A/BSL-4 areas Supply and Exhaust Airflows (AHUs and EFs) Fan status and speeds. Pump status and speeds. All System alarms. Division 11 monitoring points. Breathing air system status and alarms.
10. Specialty Gas Systems. 11. Training. 12. Confirm directional air flow under normal conditions for the facility with smoke pencil. 3.2 A. B. SCHEDULING & SEQUENCING Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING Requirements. The Functional Operation System Test is conducted after the BSL 3 and BSL 4 areas have been completed fully with NO punch list items Section 01 91 04 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
remaining. Component Verification Forms are to be completed, System tests have been satisfactorily completed and the integrated system tests are approved. The building systems shall be operational and substantially complete. The control system shall be sufficiently tested and approved by the CxC. The functional testing of air-water related or water related equipment or systems shall be complete. The building systems shall be operational and complete. C. Punch list items outside of the BSL3 and BSL4 areas may continue as long as there is no impact on the overall integrity of the Steady State test. The Contractor is required to include this activity into the construction schedule. The COR and the Contractor will finalize the scheduling of the 30 day final acceptance testing of the building. The Contractor shall provide sufficient notice to the COR and CxC regarding their completion schedule for all equipment and systems testing. The CxC will schedule Functional Operation System Test through the COR and the Contractor. The CxC shall direct, witness and document the FOST. TEST EQUIPMENT
D.
3.3
Follow Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST Requirements. 3.4 SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION
Follow Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING SYSTEM TEST Requirements. 3.5 A. B. NON-CONFORMING AND DEFICIENCY ITEMS Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING Requirements. The CxC will identify any deficiencies with a Corrective Action Report. The Corrective Action Report (CAR) will be submitted to the Contractor. The Contractor will direct the responsible party to correct the deficiency. Upon correction of the deficiency, the responsible party will complete the CAR; the Contractor will review and submit it to the CxC for retesting. It is expected that there may be isolated infancy failures, however if there are repeated failures of similar devices, the COR, CxC and CQC will be assembled to evaluate the issue and recommend corrective actions. Failure of the facility to perform as designed in the drawings and specifications shall be a cause of corrective actions and the FOST to be restarted. The COR has the sole authority to approve resuming the 30 day final acceptance test from the day the event was identified following the repair or replacement and component or system testing of components found faulty. DOCUMENTS AND REPORTS Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements. FOST Reports, test documents, and Trending data. The functional operation system test report is the results of the FOST and shall include procedures, list of trend point, date and times, trend data information, problems identified, and resolution confirmation. Section 01 91 04 - Page 8 For Official Use Only
C.
D.
3.6 A. B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.7 A.
GENERAL ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS For the FOST to be accepted the following must be concluded: 1. 2. 3. 4. CVF, STs, ISTs are complete, documented and approved. Training specified has been completed. FOST, the 30 day cycle proceeds as deemed acceptable by the COR. Final FOST Report has been submitted.
B.
Project Beneficial Occupancy Date will not be established until building systems have successfully completed requirements of commissioning. The Contracting Officer is the ultimate authority for final determination that the building is accepted for Beneficial Occupancy.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) AASHTO M 145 (1991; R 2004) Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes (2001; R 2004) Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and an 457-mm (18-in) Drop
AASHTO T 180
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE) ASSE/SAFE A10.6 (2006) Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE) EM 385-1-1 (2003) Safety -- Safety and Health Requirements
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 40 CFR 61 National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants
1.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not begin demolition or deconstruction until authorization is received from the Contracting Officer. Remove rubbish and debris from the station daily; do not allow accumulations inside or outside the building. The work includes demolition and deconstruction, salvage of identified items and materials, and removal of resulting rubbish and debris. Remove rubbish and debris from Government property daily, unless otherwise directed. Store materials that cannot be removed daily in areas specified by the Contracting Officer. In the interest of occupational safety and health, perform the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 23, Demolition, and other applicable Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 02 41 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Existing Conditions; G AR SD-07 Certificates Demolition and Deconstruction Plan; G Notifications; G
Proposed salvage, demolition, deconstruction, and removal procedures for approval before work is started. SD-11 Closeout Submittals Receipts Receipts or bills of laden, as specified. 1.4 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS In
Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. addition to the requirements of the "Contract Clauses," conform to the safety requirements contained in ASSE/SAFE A10.6. 1.4.1 1.4.1.1 Notifications General Requirements
Furnish timely notification of demolition deconstruction and renovation projects to Federal, State, regional, and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing 10 working days prior to the commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. 1.4.2 Receipts
Submit a shipping receipt or bill of lading for all containers of ozone depleting substance (ODS) shipped to the Defense Depot, Richmond, Virginia. 1.5 DUST AND DEBRIS CONTROL
Prevent the spread of dust and debris to occupied portions of the building to existing egress paths, to exterior pedestrian and vehicular traffic, to surrounding buildings and to parking lots.Avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution. Vacuum and dust the work area daily. 1.6 1.6.1 PROTECTION Traffic Control Signs
Where pedestrian and drivervehicular traffic safety is endangered in the area of removal work, use traffic barricades with flashing lights. Anchor Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 02 41 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
barricades in a manner to prevent displacement by wind. Notify the Contracting Officer prior to beginning such work. 1.6.2 Existing Conditions Documentation
Before beginning any demolition or deconstruction work, survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. Record existing conditions in the presence of the Contracting Officer showing the condition of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas of alteration or removal. Photographs sized 4 inch will be acceptable as a record of existing conditions. Include in the record the elevation of the top of foundation walls, finish floor elevations, possible conflicting electricla conduits, plumbing lines, alarms systems, the location and extent of existing cracks and other damage and description of surface conditions that exist prior to before starting work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify and document all required outages which will be required during the course of work, and to note these outages on the record document. Notify Contracting Officer immediately with discrepancies. 1.6.3 Items to Remain in Place
Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Government. Repair or replace damaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer. Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated. Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements and pavements to remain. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition, deconstruction, or removal work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement require approval by the Contracting Officer prior to performing such work. 1.6.4 Existing Construction Limits and Protection
Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or necessary for installation of new construction. Provide temporary shoring and bracing for support of building components to prevent settlement or other movement. Provide protective measures to control accumulation and migration of dust and dirt in work areas and to other surrounding areas. Remove snow, dust, dirt, and debris from areas daily. Notify Contracting Officer for approval to proceed with removal of snow, dust, dirt and debris from areas outside the designated work area. 1.6.5 Trees
Protect trees within the project site which might be damaged during demolition or deconstruction, and which are indicated to be left in place, by a 6 foot high fence. Erect and secure fence a minimum of 5 feet from the trunk of individual trees or follow the outer perimeter of branches or clumps of trees. Replace any tree designated to remain that is damaged during the work under this contract with like-kind or as approved by the Contracting Officer.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.6.6
Utility Service
Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect against damage during demolition and deconstruction operations. Prior to start of work, utilities serving each area of alteration or removal will be shut off by the Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor. 1.6.7 Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. Floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, and other structural components that are designed and constructed to stand without lateral support or shoring, and are determined to be in stable condition, must remain standing without additional bracing, shoring, or lateral support until demolished or deconstructed, unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left unsupported and place and secure bracing, shoring, or lateral supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract. 1.6.8 Protection of Personnel
Before, during and after the demolition and deconstruction work the Contractor shall continuously evaluate the condition of the structure being demolished and deconstructed and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the project site. No area, section, or component of floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, or other structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient bracing, shoring, or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area. 1.7 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted. 1.8 RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled in the trades involved. Items to be relocated which are damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired or replaced with new undamaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer. 1.9 REQUIRED DATA
Prepare a Demolition and Deconstruction Plan. Include in the plan procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection schedule of utility services, a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of operations. Coordinate with Waste Management Plan. Include statements affirming Contractor inspection of the existing roof deck and its suitability to perform as a safe working platform or if inspection reveals a safety hazard to workers, state provisions for securing the safety of the workers throughout the performance of the work. Provide procedures for safe conduct of the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1. Plan shall be approved Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 02 41 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
by Contracting Officer prior to work beginning. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
Comply with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified. 1.11 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
Use of explosives will be permitted. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS FILL MATERIAL
Comply with excavating, backfilling, and compacting procedures for soils used as backfill material, as specified in Section 31 00 00, to fill voids, depressions or excavations resulting from demolition or deconstruction of structures.
Proposed fill material must be sampled and tested by an approved soil testing laboratory, as specified in Section 31 00 00. Soil classification Moisture-density relations PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED AASHTO M 145 AASHTO T 180, Method B or D
Inspect and evaluate existing structures on site for reuse. Existing construction scheduled to be removed for reuse shall be disassembled. Dismantled and removed materials are to be separated, set aside, and prepared as specified, and stored or delivered to a collection point for reuse, remanufacture, recycling, or other disposal, as specified. Materials shall be designated for reuse on site whenever possible. 3.1.1 a. Structures Remove existing structures indicated to be removed. Remove sidewalks, curbs, concrete pads, fencing, gutters and street light bases as indicated. Deconstruct structures in a systematic manner from the top of the structure to the ground. Remove concrete and masonry walls in small sections. Locate demolition and deconstruction equipment throughout so as to not impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors, or framing of adjacent structures. Utilities and Related Equipment General Requirements
b.
c.
3.1.2 3.1.2.1
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 02 41 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Government except when approved in writing and then only after temporary utility services have been approved and provided. Do not begin demolition or deconstruction work until all utility disconnections have been made. Shut off and cap utilities for future use, as indicated. 3.1.2.2 Disconnecting Existing Utilities
Remove existing utilities , as indicated and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by the Contracting Officer. When utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, the Contracting Officer shall be notified prior to further work in that area. Remove meters and related equipment and deliver to a location in accordance with instructions of the Contracting Officer. 3.1.3 Chain Link Fencing
Remove chain link fencing, gates and other related salvaged items scheduled for removal and transport to designated areas. Remove gates as whole units. Cut chain link fabric to 40 foot lengths and store in rolls off the ground. 3.1.4 Paving and Slabs
Remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs including aggregate base as indicated. Provide neat sawcuts at limits of pavement removal as indicated. Pavement and slabs designated to be recycled and utilized in this project shall be moved, ground and stored as directed by the Contracting Officer. Pavement and slabs not to be used in this project shall be removed from the Installation at Contractor's expense. 3.1.5 Concrete
Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of a minimum 2 inch. Make each cut in walls perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face. Break out the remainder of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete. Salvage removed concrete. 3.1.6 Patching
Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished work, patch and repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces, using on-site materials when available. Where new work is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform removals and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new work. Finished surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface and shall match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to texture and finish. Patching shall be as specified and indicated. 3.2 CONCURRENT EARTH-MOVING OPERATIONS
Do not begin excavation, filling, and other earth-moving operations that are sequential to demolition or deconstruction work in areas occupied by structures to be demolished or deconstructed until all demolition and deconstruction in the area has been completed and debris removed. Fill holes, and other hazardous openings. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 02 41 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.3 3.3.1
DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL Title to Materials
Except for salvaged items specified in related Sections, and for materials or equipment scheduled for salvage, all materials and equipment removed and not reused or salvaged, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Government property. Title to materials resulting from demolition and deconstruction, and materials and equipment to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Contracting Officer of the Contractor's deconstruction, and removal procedures, and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin demolition and deconstruction. The Government will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract award. Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is prohibited. 3.3.2 Reuse of Materials and Equipment
Remove and store materials and equipment listed in the Demolition and Deconstruction Plans indicated to be reused or relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the work progresses. 3.4 CLEANUP
Remove debris and rubbish from excavations. Remove and transport the in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal. 3.5 3.5.1 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS Regulation of Removed Materials
Dispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other nonsalvageable materials resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal, state and local regulations as contractually specified, off the site. In the Waste Management Plan. site is prohibited. 3.5.2 Storage of removed materials on the project
Burning on Government Property
Burning of materials removed from demolished and deconstructed structures will not be permitted on Government property. 3.5.3 Removal from Government Property
Transport waste materials removed from deconstructed structures, except waste soil, from Government property for legal disposal. Dispose of waste soil as directed. 3.6 REUSE OF SALVAGED ITEMS
Recondition salvaged materials and equipment designated for reuse before installation. Replace items damaged during removal and salvage operations or restore them as necessary to usable condition. Salvage copper and telecommunication manholes. -- End of Section -Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 02 41 00 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 03 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF CONCRETE
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL APPLICATION OF THIS SECTION
This Section applies to all other Sections in Division 03, as the work is applicable. 1.2 WORK TO BE COMMISSIONED
Cast-in-place concrete, formwork and reinforcement used in BSL-4 and ABSL-4 areas to demonstrate conformance with the Contract Documents. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
The following sections apply to this section. A. B. C. D. E. 1.4 Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING Section 01 91 01 COMMISSIONING - COMPONENT VERIFICATION Section 03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK Section 03 20 01.00 10 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Section 03 31 05 HIGH CONTAINMENT CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SUBMITTALS
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements. 1.5 COMMISSIONING STANDARDS
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements. 1.6 A. SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING The work described in this Section shall begin only after related work has been successfully completed and inspection reports have been submitted and approved. Component Verification Forms (CVF) shall be completed at appropriate times during the construction phase of the Contract. These forms are to be signed off and non-conforming items addressed. PRODUCTS
B.
PART 2
Not Used
Ft. Detrick, MD
PART 3 3.1 A.
EXECUTION GENERAL Refer to Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING for general responsibilities. Sign-off of items on the commissioning form(s) are to indicate organization / company, person's initials and date. Sign-off indicates the person's acceptance that the item or Test has been successfully completed and is full compliance with the contract documents. Completion of the Component Verification Forms shall be performed in a manner that essentially duplicates the checking, testing, and inspection methods established in the related Sections in Division 03. Where checking, testing, and inspection methods are not specified in other Sections, methods shall be established which will provide the information required. Testing and verification required by this section shall be performed during the Commissioning phase. Requirements in related Sections are independent from the requirements of this Section and shall not be used to satisfy any of the requirements specified in this Section. The Contractor shall provide materials, services, and labor required to perform the Component Verification Form checks. Commission 100 percent of the work under this Section 03 08 00. COMPONENT VERIFICATION FORMS (CVF)
B.
C. 3.2
Component Verification Forms shall be completed for the items indicated in Section 03 08 00A of Commissioning Appendix A. Non-conforming items discovered during Component Verification are to be corrected. 3.3 SYSTEM TESTS (ST)
Not Used. 3.4 INTEGRATED SYSTEM TESTS (IST)
Not Used. 3.5 COMMISSIONING REPORT
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI) ACI 347 (2004) Guide to Formwork for Concrete AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA) AHA A135.4 (2004) Basic Hardboard
APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA) APA PS1 (1995) Construction and Industrial Plywood (APA V995)
1.2
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
Install the Stainless Steel Wall Panels, as indicated in the high containment areas, as furnished and specified under Section 05 50 10.00. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Removable Tie Rod Details; G, AE Formwork joint arrangement and details for Class A and Class B finishes. Layout Drawings; G, AE Plan drawings indicating size and location of all formed concrete elements (slabs, beams, columns, and walls) required by Specification 03 31 05 HIGH CONTAINMENT CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. For slabs and beams, submittal shall include the size and location, with respect to column lines, of all openings, recesses, and sleeves required by all disciplines. Elevation drawings of all formed concrete wall elements required by Specification 03 31 05 HIGH CONTAINMENT CAST-IN-PLACE Issued for Construction Section 03 11 13.00 10 - Page 1 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. Wall elevations shall include size and location with respect to column lines, of all wall openings, sleeves, and recesses required by all disciplines. Show dimensions, materials, and arrangements of joints and ties prepared under seal of Professional Structural Engineer registered in the United States of America. SD-03 Product Data Form Materials; G, AR Manufacturer's data including literature describing form materials, accessories, and form releasing agents. Form Releasing Agents; G, AR Manufacturer's recommendation on method and rate of application of form releasing agents. Form Ties Manufacturer's data including literature describing materials and load rating. SD-05 Design Data Formwork Calculations; G, AE Design analysis and calculations for form design and methodology used in the design. Letter of Certification; G, AR Submit letter of Certification, signed and sealed by Structural engineer stating formwork is in compliance with design documents and has been prepared as specified. 1.4 DESIGN
Formwork shall be designed in accordance with methodology of ACI 347 for anticipated loads, lateral pressures, and stresses. Forms shall be capable of producing a surface which meets the requirements of the class of finish specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE and 03 31 05 HIGH CONTAINMENT CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. Forms shall be capable of withstanding the pressures resulting from placement and vibration of concrete. 1.5 MOCK-UP
Provide products and installation for portion of work specified in this Section 03 11 13.00 10 and indicated for exterior on-site mock-up on Drawing A3.31, and for containment mock-up specified in Division 3 and indicated on A5 series drawing.
Ft. Detrick, MD
PART 2 2.1 2.1.1
PRODUCTS FORM MATERIALS Forms For Class A and Class B Finish
Forms for Class A and Class B finished surfaces shall be plywood panels conforming to APA PS1, Grade B-B concrete form panels, Class I or II. Other form materials or liners may be used provided the smoothness and appearance of concrete produced will be equivalent to that produced by the plywood concrete form panels. 2.1.2 Forms For Class C Finish
Forms for Class C finished surfaces shall be shiplap lumber; plywood conforming to APA PS1, Grade B-B concrete form panels, Class I or II; tempered concrete form hardboard conforming to AHA A135.4; other approved concrete form material; or steel, except that steel lining on wood sheathing shall not be used. 2.1.3 Forms For Class D Finish
Forms for Class D finished surfaces shall be wood or steel or other approved concrete form material. 2.1.4 Retain-In-Place Metal Forms
Retain-in-place metal forms for concrete slabs and roofs shall be as specified in Section 05 30 00 STEEL DECKS. 2.1.5 A. Form Ties Form ties utilized in concrete covered by Specification 03 31 05 HIGH CONTAINMENT CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE shall not leave holes that extend through the concrete elements or impair the application of the specified coating, if left in place. Form ties shall be factory-fabricated metal ties, shall be of the removable or internal disconnecting or snap-off type, and shall be of a design that will not permit form deflection and will not spall concrete upon removal. Solid backing shall be provided for each tie. Except where removable tie rods are used, ties shall not leave holes in the concrete surface less than 1/4 inch nor more than 1 inch deep and not more than 1 inch in diameter. Removable tie rods shall be not more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Removable tie rod details for below grade elements shall be provided so that a watertight condition is created during the tie rod hole filling and patching. Form Releasing Agents
B.
2.1.6
Form releasing agents shall be commercial formulations that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces. Agents shall not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces depending upon bond or adhesion nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds.
Ft. Detrick, MD
PART 3 3.1 3.1.1
EXECUTION INSTALLATION Formwork
Forms shall be mortar tight, properly aligned and adequately supported to produce concrete surfaces meeting the surface requirements specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE and 03 31 05 HIGH CONTAINMENT CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE and conforming to construction tolerance given in TABLE 1. Where concrete surfaces are to have a Class A or Class B finish, joints in form panels shall be arranged as approved. Where forms for continuous surfaces are placed in successive units, the forms shall fit over the completed surface to obtain accurate alignment of the surface and to prevent leakage of mortar. Forms shall not be reused if there is any evidence of surface wear and tear or defects which would impair the quality of the surface. Surfaces of forms to be reused shall be cleaned of mortar from previous concreting and of all other foreign material before reuse. Form ties that are to be completely withdrawn shall be coated with a nonstaining bond breaker. A. The use of earth cuts as forms is not permitted, except for the placement of controlled low strength material (flowable fill). B. 3.2 A. Have forms inspected prior to and after placement of reinforcement. CHAMFERING External corners that will be exposed shall not be chamfered, beveled, or rounded by moldings placed in the forms, unless shown. External corners for concrete elements covered by Specification 03 31 05 HIGH CONTAINMENT CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE shall have a 3/4 inch chamfer, unless noted otherwise. COATING
B.
3.3
Forms for Class A and Class B finished surfaces shall be coated with a form releasing agent before the form or reinforcement is placed in final position. The coating shall be used as recommended in the manufacturer's printed or written instructions. Forms for Class C and D finished surfaces may be wet with water in lieu of coating immediately before placing concrete, except that in cold weather with probable freezing temperatures, coating shall be mandatory. Surplus coating on form surfaces and coating on reinforcing steel and construction joints shall be removed before placing concrete. 3.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS
Forms shall be removed preventing injury to the concrete and ensuring the complete safety of the structure. Formwork for columns, walls, side of beams and other parts not supporting the weight of concrete may be removed when the concrete has attained sufficient strength to resist damage from the removal operation but not before at least 24 hours has elapsed since concrete placement completion. Supporting forms and shores shall not be removed from beams, floors and walls until the structural units are strong enough to carry their own weight and any other construction or natural loads. Supporting forms or shores shall not be removed before the concrete strength has reached 70 percent of design strength, as determined by field Issued for Construction Section 03 11 13.00 10 - Page 4 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
cured cylinders or other approved methods. This strength shall be demonstrated by job-cured test specimens, and by a structural analysis considering the proposed loads in relation to these test strengths and the strength of forming and shoring system. The job-cured test specimens for form removal purposes shall be provided in numbers as directed and shall be in addition to those required for concrete quality control. The specimens shall be removed from molds at the age of 24 hours and shall receive, insofar as possible, the same curing and protection as the structures they represent. 3.5 A. INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS Provide formed openings where required for work embedded in or passing through concrete. Coordinate with other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts. Install accessories plumb, level and true. Install work furnished under other Sections in accordance with template, drawing and other instructions from trades involved. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. Maintain a minimum clearance of 4 inches between sleeves. TABLE 1 TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES
B.
C.
D.
1.
Variations from plumb: a. In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and in arrises For exposed corner columns,control-joint grooves, and other conspicuous lines In any 10 feet of length ----------------- 1/4 inch Maximum for entire length ------------------- 1 inch In any 20 feet of length ----------- ---- 1/4 inch Maximum for entire length------------------ 1/2 inch
b.
2.
Variation from the level or grades indicated on the drawings: a. Top Elevation of slab-on-grade. Elevation top surfaces of formed slabs before removal of supporting shores In any 10 feet of length ------------------1/4 inch In any bay or in any 20 feet of length---------- 3/8 inch Maximum for entire length ----------------- 3/4 inch In any bay or in any 20 feet of length ----------- ----- 1/4 inch Maximum for entire length------------------ 1/2 inch In any 20 feet --------- 1/2 inch
b.
In exposed lintels, sills, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines
3.
Variation of the linear
Ft. Detrick, MD
TABLE 1 TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES building lines and members from established position in plan 4. Variation of distance between walls, and columns. Maximum -----------------1 inch
1/4 inch per 10 feet of distance, but not more than 1/2 inch in any one bay,and not more than 1 inch total variation Minus ---------------- 1/4 inch Plus ----------------- 1/2 inch
5.
Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves, floor openings and wall openings Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns, piers, and beams and in the thickness of slabs and walls Footings: a. Variation of dimensions in plan Misplacement of eccentricity
6.
Minus ----------------- 1/4 inch Plus ------------------ 1/2 inch
7.
Minus ------------------ 1/2 inch Plus ------------------- 2 inches 2 percent of the footing width in the direction of misplacement but not more than 2 inches Minus ------------------ 5 percent
b.
c.
Reduction in thickness of specified thickness
8.
Variation in steps: a. In a flight of stairs Riser ------------------ 1/8 inch Tread ------------------ 1/4 inch Riser ------------------ 1/16 inch Tread ------------------ 1/8 inch
b.
In consecutive steps
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 03 15 13.00 10 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONTRACTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM D 1751 (2004) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) (2004a) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion (2006a) Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension
ASTM D 1752
ASTM D 412
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Waterstops; G, AE Joints; G, AE Shop drawings and fabrication drawings provided by the Contractor showing expansion joint, waterstop, and contraction joint locations. SD-03 Product Data Preformed Expansion Joint Filler; G, AR Waterstops; G, AR Manufacturer's literature, including safety data sheets, for preformed fillers and waterstops. Manufacturer's recommended instructions for installing preformed fillers; and waterstops; and for splicing waterstops. SD-04 Samples Issued for Construction Section 03 15 13.00 10 - Page 1 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
Materials Specimens identified to indicate manufacturer, type of material, size, quantity of material, and shipment or lot represented. Each sample shall be a piece not less than 12 inch long cut from each 200 ft of finished waterstop furnished, but not less than a total of 4 ft of each type, size, and lot furnished. One splice sample of each size and type. The splice samples shall be made using straight run pieces with the splice located at the mid-length of the sample and finished as required for the installed waterstop. The total length of each splice shall be not less than 12 inches long. SD-07 Certificates Preformed Expansion Joint Filler Waterstops Certificates of compliance stating that the joint filler and waterstops conform to the requirements specified. 1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Material delivered and placed in storage shall be stored off the ground and protected from moisture, dirt, and other contaminants. Sealants shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unopened containers. Sealants whose shelf life has expired shall be removed from the site. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS PREFORMED EXPANSION JOINT FILLER
Expansion joint filler shall be preformed material conforming to ASTM D 1751 or ASTM D 1752. Unless otherwise indicated, filler material shall be 1/2 inch thick as indicated and of a width applicable for the joint formed. 2.2 SEALANT As specified in Section
Joint sealant shall conform to the following: 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. 2.3 2.3.1 WATERSTOPS Materials`
Waterstops shall be manufactured from a prime virgin resin; reclaimed material is not acceptable. The compound shall contain plasticizers, stabilizers, and other additives to meet specified requirements. Waterstops shall be products of, or approved by, the membrane waterproof manufacturer so as to be included in the waterproofing warranty. 2.3.2 Hydrophilic
Swellable strip type compound of polymer modified chloroprene rubber that swells upon contact with water shall conform to ASTM D 412 as follows: Tensile strength 420 psi minimum; ultimate elongation 600 percent minimum. Hardness shall be 50 minimum on the type A durometer and the volumetric expansion ratio in distilled water at 70 degrees F shall be 3 to 1 minimum. Issued for Construction Section 03 15 13.00 10 - Page 2 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.3.3
Expanding Bentonite-Based Waterstop
Swellable strip type compound of sodium bentonite and butyl rubber that swells upon contact with water. Compound shall be a minimum of 75 percent bentonite. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION JOINTS
Joints shall be installed at locations indicated. Where joints are not shown, Contractor shall install joints in accordance with details on drawings and approved shop drawings. 3.1.1 Contraction Joints
Contraction joints shall be provided by cutting the concrete with a saw after concrete has set. Joints shall be as indicated on the drawings. 3.1.1.1 Sawed Joints
Joint sawing shall be early enough to prevent uncontrolled cracking in the slab (maximum of 12 hours after slab has finished). Concrete sawing machines shall be adequate in number and power, and with sufficient replacement blades to complete the sawing at the required rate. Joints shall be cut to true alignment and shall be cut in sequence of concrete placement. Sludge and cutting debris shall be removed. 3.1.2 Expansion Joints
Preformed expansion joint filler shall be used in expansion and isolation joints in slabs around columns and between slabs on grade and vertical surfaces where indicated. The filler shall extend the full slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. The edges of the joint shall be neatly finished with an edging tool of 1/8 inch radius, except where a resilient floor surface will be applied. Where the joint is to receive a sealant, the filler strips shall be installed at the proper level below the finished floor with a slightly tapered, dressed and oiled wood strip temporarily secured to the top to form a recess to the size shown on the drawings. The wood strip shall be removed after the concrete has set. Contractor may opt to use a removable expansion filler cap designed and fabricated for this purpose in lieu of the wood strip. The groove shall be thoroughly cleaned of laitance, curing compound, foreign materials, protrusions of hardened concrete, and any dust which shall be blown out of the groove with oil-free compressed air. 3.2 WATERSTOPS, INSTALLATION AND SPLICES
Waterstops shall be installed at the locations shown to form a continuous water-tight diaphragm. Adequate provision shall be made to fully adhere the waterstop to the concrete and completely protect the waterstops during the progress of the work. Any waterstop punctured or damaged shall be repaired or replaced. Exposed waterstops shall be protected during application of form release agents to avoid being coated. Suitable guards shall be provided to protect exposed projecting edges and ends of partially embedded waterstops from damage when concrete placement has been discontinued.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.2.1
Non-Metallic
The splicing of straight lengths shall be done by squaring the ends to be joined. Continuity of the characteristic features of the cross section of the waterstop shall be maintained across the splice. 3.2.1.1 Quality Assurance
Waterstop splicing defects which are unacceptable include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Tensile strength less than 80 percent of parent section. 2) Free lap joints. 3) Misalignment which reduces waterstop cross section more than 15 percent. 4) Bond failure at joint deeper than 1/16 inch or 15 percent of material thickness. 5) Misalignment of waterstop splice resulting in misalignment of waterstop in excess of 1/2 inch in 10 feet. 3.2.2 Hydrophilic Waterstop Installation
Ends to be joined shall be miter cut with sharp knife or shears. The ends shall be adhered with cyanacryiate (super glue) adhesive. A liberal amount of a single component hydrophilic sealant shall be applied to the junction to complete the transition. 3.2.3 Expanding Bentonite Based Waterstop Installation Tightly butt
Ends to be joined shall be cut with sharp knife or shears. coil ends together. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints are specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE except that construction joints coinciding with contraction joints shall be treated as contraction joints as applicable. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 03 20 01.00 10 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI) ACI 318/318R (2005; Errata 2005) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) AWS D1.4/D1.4M (2005; E 2005) Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 185/A 185M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete (2005a) Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement (2006a) Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 615/A 615M
ASTM A 706/A 706M
CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI) CRSI 1MSP 1.2 SUBMITTALS (2001) Manual of Standard Practice
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Reinforcement; G, AE Detail drawings showing reinforcing steel placement, schedules, sizes, grades, and splicing and bending details. Drawings shall show support details including types, sizes and spacing. Drawings shall show joint locations that affect placement.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SD-03 Product Data Welding A list of qualified welders names. SD-07 Certificates Reinforcing Steel Certified copies of mill test reports attesting that the reinforcing steel furnished contains no less than 95 percent recycled scrap steel and meets the requirements specified herein, prior to the installation of reinforcing steel. Mill test reports shall indicate physical and chemical analysis. Mechanical Couplers; G, AR Manufacturer's technical literature certifying that the product meets the minimum requirements of this specification. SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Manufacturer's instructions indicating proper installation procedures. 1.3 WELDING
Welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M. Qualification test shall be performed at the worksite and the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer 24 hours prior to conducting tests. Special welding procedures and welders qualified by others may be accepted as permitted by AWS D1.4/D1.4M. 1.4 MOCK-UP
Provide products and installation for portion of work specified in this Section 03 20 01.00 10 and indicated for exterior on-site mock-up on Drawing A3.31, and for containment mock-up specified in Division 3 and indicated on drawing A5.993. 1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Reinforcement and accessories shall be stored off the ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. PART 2 2.1 A. PRODUCTS REINFORCING STEEL Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars conforming to either ASTM A706 or to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, except (1) the maximum yield strength shall be 78,000 psi, and (2) the tensile strength shall not be less than 1.25 times the actual yield strength. For details requiring welding of reinforcing steel, deformed bars shall conform to ASTM A 706/A 706M. Reinforcing steel shall contain a minimum of 95 percent recycled steel.
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.2 A.
WELDED WIRE FABRIC Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A 185/A 185M, in flat sheets, uncoated finish. Welded wire fabric shall contain a minimum of 90 percent recycled steel. WIRE TIES
B. 2.3
Wire ties shall be 16 gauge or heavier black annealed steel wire. 2.4 SUPPORTS
Bar supports for formed surfaces shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with CRSI 1MSP and shall be steel or precast concrete blocks. Precast concrete blocks shall have wire ties and shall be not less than 4 inches square when supporting reinforcement on ground. Precast concrete block shall have compressive strength equal to that of the surrounding concrete. Where concrete formed surfaces will be exposed to weather or where surfaces are to be painted, steel supports within 1/2 inch of concrete surface shall be galvanized, plastic protected or of stainless steel. Concrete supports used in concrete exposed to view shall have the same color and texture as the finish surface. Bar supports in contact with formed surface for concrete exposed to view in the tunnel, basement and loading dock areas shall be stainless steel. For slabs on grade, supports shall be precast concrete blocks, plastic coated steel fabricated with bearing plates, or specifically designed wire-fabric supports fabricated of plastic. 2.5 MECHANICAL COUPLERS
Mechanical couplers used to splice reinforcing steel shall be classified as Type 1 or Type 2 mechanical couplers. Type 1 mechanical couplers shall develop at least 125 percent of the ASTM specified yield strength. Type 2 mechanical couplers shall meet the requirements for Type 1 and develop the full tensile strength of the spliced bar. Provide Type 1 mechanical couplers, unless indicated otherwise. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcement shall be fabricated to shapes and dimensions shown and shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318/318R. Reinforcement shall be cold bent unless otherwise authorized. Bending may be accomplished in the field or at the mill. Bars shall not be bent after embedment in concrete. Welding of reinforcement is permitted only as indicated in the contract drawings and shall conform to AWS D1.4/D1.4M. Safety caps shall be placed on all exposed ends of vertical concrete reinforcement bars that pose a danger to life safety. Wire tie ends shall face away from the forms. 3.1.1 Placement
Reinforcement shall be free from loose rust and scale, dirt, oil, or other deleterious coating that could reduce bond with the concrete. Reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with ACI 318/318R at locations shown plus or minus one bar diameter. Reinforcement shall not be continuous through expansion joints and shall be as indicated through construction or contraction joints. Concrete coverage shall be as Issued for Construction Section 03 20 01.00 10 - Page 3 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
indicated or as required by ACI 318/318R. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter to avoid interference with other reinforcement, conduits or embedded items, the resulting arrangement of bars, including additional bars required to meet structural requirements, shall be approved before concrete is placed. 3.1.2 A. Splicing Splices of reinforcement shall conform to ACI 318/318R and shall be made only as required or indicated. Splicing shall be by lapping or by mechanical coupler; except that lap splices shall not be used for bars larger than No. 11. Lapped bars shall be placed in contact and securely tied or spaced transversely apart to permit the embedment of the entire surface of each bar in concrete. Lapped bars shall not be spaced farther apart than one-fifth the required length of lap or 6 inches. Mechanical couplers shall be installed in accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer of the mechanical splicing device. Locate reinforce splices not shown, at points of minimum stress. Indicate location of splices on shop drawings. WELDED-WIRE FABRIC PLACEMENT
B.
3.2
Welded-wire fabric shall be placed in slabs as indicated. Fabric placed in slabs on grade shall be continuous between expansion, construction, and contraction joints. Fabric placement at joints shall be as indicated. Lap splices shall be made in such a way that the overlapped area equals the distance between the outermost crosswires plus 2 inches. Laps shall be staggered to avoid continuous laps in either direction. Fabric shall be wired or clipped together at laps at intervals not to exceed 4 feet. Fabric shall be positioned by the use of supports. 3.3 SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS
Special inspections and testing for seismic-resisting systems and components shall be done in accordance with Section 01 45 35 SPECIAL INSPECTION. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI) ACI 117/117R (1990; R 2002) Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials (1991; R 2002) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete (1988; R 1997) Simplified Version of the Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete (1999) Controlled Low Strength Material (2005) Specifications for Structural Concrete (1999; Errata 2006) Hot Weather Concreting (1988; R 2002) Cold Weather Concreting (2005; Errata 2005) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary
ACI 211.1
ACI 214.3R
ACI 229R ACI 301
ACI 305R ACI 306R ACI 318/318R
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) AASHTO M 182 (2005) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 109/C 109M (2007) Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens) (2005) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
ASTM A 153/A 153M
Ft. Detrick, MD
ASTM A 563
(2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (2003) Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete (1999) Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete (2005) Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete (2007) Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation (2005) Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink) (2007) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method) (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates (2005a) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete (2007) Standard Specification for Portland Cement (2004) Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method) (2003) Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete (2004) Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete (2007) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory (2004) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method (2006) Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete (2007) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
ASTM C 1017/C 1017M
ASTM C 1059
ASTM C 1064/C 1064M
ASTM C 1077
ASTM C 1107
ASTM C 1260
ASTM C 136
ASTM C 143/C 143M
ASTM C 150
ASTM C 1567
ASTM C 171 ASTM C 172 ASTM C 192/C 192M
ASTM C 231
ASTM C 260
ASTM C 309
Ft. Detrick, MD
ASTM C 31/C 31M
(2006) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field (2003) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates (2005e1) Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens (2004) Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete (2005a) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete (2005) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete (2002) Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete (2007) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete (1998a; R 2003) Expansion and Bleeding of Freshly Mixed Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory (2006) Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars (2004) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) (2004a) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion (2003) Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates (1996; R 2001) Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness Numbers (1997; R 2004) Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs (1996; R 2003) Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements
ASTM C 33
ASTM C 39/C 39M
ASTM C 42/C 42M
ASTM C 494/C 494M
ASTM C 618
ASTM C 881/C 881M
ASTM C 94/C 94M
ASTM C 940
ASTM C 989
ASTM D 1751
ASTM D 1752
ASTM D 75
ASTM E 1155
ASTM E 1745
ASTM E 488
Ft. Detrick, MD
ASTM F 844
(2007a) Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use
NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST) NIST HB 44 (2007) NIST Handbook 44: Specifications, Tolerances, and other Technical Requirements for Weighing and Measuring Devices
NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA) NRMCA CPMB 100 NRMCA QC 3 (2000) Concrete Plant Standards (2002) Quality Control Manual: Section 3, Plant Certifications Checklist: Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities (2001) Truck Mixer, Agitator and Front Discharge Concrete Carrier Standards
NRMCA TMMB 100
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE) COE CRD-C 104 (1980) Method of Calculation of the Fineness Modulus of Aggregate (1981) Standard Test Method for Frequency and Amplitude of Vibrators for Concrete
COE CRD-C 521
1.2
UNIT PRICE CONTRACT
Unit price contract work includes items specified in Sections 31 00 00 EARTHWORK and 31 63 26 DRILLED PIERS (CAISSONS). 1.2.1 Measurement
Measurement of concrete for payment will be made on the basis of the actual volume. 1.2.2 Payment
Unless otherwise specified, payment for concrete will be made at the respective unit prices per cubic yard for the various items of the schedule, measured as specified above, which price shall include the cost of all labor, materials, and the use of equipment and tools required to complete the concrete work, except for any reinforcement and embedded parts specified to be paid separately. Unit price payment will not be made for concrete placed in structures for which payment is made as a lump sum. 1.3 A. LUMP SUM CONTRACT Lump Sum Contract work includes work that is not specified as Unit Price Contract Work. Under this type of contract concrete items will be paid for by lump sum and will not be measured. The work covered by these items consists of furnishing all concrete materials, reinforcement, miscellaneous
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
embedded materials, and equipment, and performing all labor for the forming, manufacture, transporting, placing, finishing, curing, and protection of concrete in these structures. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Hot Weather Requirements; G, AR Cold Weather Requirements; G, AR Submit procedures to be used in accordance with ACI, when placing, finishing and curing concrete during both hot weather concreting and cold weather concreting. SD-02 Shop Drawings Construction Joint Locations; G, AE Shop drawings prepared by the Contractor showing construction joint locations. SD-03 Product Data Mixture Proportions; G, AR (LEED) The results of trial mixture design studies or field experience (test records less than 1 year old)) along with a statement giving the maximum nominal coarse aggregate size and the proportions of ingredients that will be used in the manufacture of each strength or class of concrete, at least 14 days prior to commencing concrete placing operations. Aggregate weights shall be based on the saturated surface dry condition. The statement shall be accompanied by test results from an approved independent commercial testing laboratory, showing that mixture design studies have been made with materials proposed for the project and that the proportions selected will produce concrete of the qualities indicated. No substitutions shall be made in the materials used in the mixture design studies without additional tests to show that the quality of the concrete is satisfactory. Curing Compounds; G, AR Admixtures; G, AR Vapor Retarder; G, AR Grout; G, AR Manufacturer's literature, instructions, brochures describing product performance and installation requirements. Expansion Anchors; G, AR Manufacturer's literature, including load/capacity tables. Issued for Construction Section 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 5 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
Chemical/Epoxy Adhesives; G, AR Manufacturer's literature, including load/capacity tables. SD-04 Samples Vapor Retarder; G, AR Sample of vapor retarder. SD-06 Test Reports Testing and Inspection for Contractor Quality Control Certified copies of laboratory test reports, including mill tests and all other test data, for portland cement, pozzolan, slag cement, aggregate, admixtures, non-shrink grout and curing compound proposed for use on this project. Moving Average Compressive Strength; G, AR SD-07 Certificates Qualifications Written documentation for Contractor Quality Control personnel. Admixture Manufacturer Letter of Certification Submit letter of Certification; from admixture manufacturer certifying compatibility of admixtures when used in combination and that admixtures do not contain more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. Expansion Anchors Chemical/Epoxy Adhesives Certify expansion anchors and chemical/epoxy adhesive meet the minimum requirements of this specification Section 03 31 00.00 10. SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Provide instructions indicating proper installation procedures for Expansion Anchors and Chemical/Epoxy Adhesives. 1.5 a. QUALIFICATIONS Contractor Quality Control personnel assigned to concrete construction shall be American Concrete Institute (ACI) Certified Workmen in one of the following grades, appropriate for the task performed, or shall have written evidence of having completed similar qualification programs: Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade I Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I or II Concrete Construction Special Inspector Concrete Transportation Construction Inspector or Reinforced Concrete Special Inspector, Jointly certified by American Issued for Construction Section 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 6 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
Concrete Institute (ACI), and International Code Council (ICC). b. The foreman or lead journeyman of the flatwork finishing crew shall have similar qualification for ACI Concrete Flatwork Technician/Finisher or equal, with written documentation. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
1.6
A pre-installation meeting with the Contracting Officer will be required at least 10 days prior to start of construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for calling the meeting. 1.6.1 Attendance
Require attendance of parties directly related with concrete work, including but not limited to: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 1.6.2 a. Concrete trade superintendent. Laboratory responsible for design mix. Laboratory responsible for field quality control. Ready-Mix concrete producer. Admixture manufacturers. Concrete pumping equipment supplier. AE. Government Representative (COR). Meeting Minutes Record minutes of meeting. Type, print and distribute copy to each attendee within 5 days of meeting. Minutes shall include statement from admixture manufacturer that proposed mix design and placing will produce concrete required. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Tolerances
b.
1.7 1.7.1
Except as otherwise specified herein, tolerances for concrete batching, mixture properties, and construction as well as definition of terms and application practices shall be in accordance with ACI 117/117R. Level and grade tolerance measurements of slabs shall be made as soon as possible after finishing; when forms or shoring are used, the measurements shall be made prior to removal. 1.7.1.1 Floors by the F-Number System
The flatness and levelness of floors shall be carefully controlled and the tolerances shall be measured by the F-Number system of Paragraph 4.5.6 and 4.5.6.1 of ACI 117/117R. The Contractor shall furnish an approved floor profilograph or other equipment capable of measuring the floor flatness (FF) number and the floor levelness (FL) number in accordance with ASTM E 1155. The Contractor shall perform the tolerance measurements within 72 hours after floor slab construction while being observed by the Contracting Officer. The tolerances of surfaces beyond the limits of ASTM E 1155 (the areas within 24 inches of embedments and construction joints) shall be acceptable to the Contracting Officer. Tolerances of the following areas shall meet the requirements listed below:
Ft. Detrick, MD
a.
Slab Surfaces: Finish slab surfaces following ACI 301. Finishing tolerances shall be classified by F numbers as measured in accordance with ASTM E 1155. Polished Concrete Finish: FF 40 FL 30. Architectural Finish Plans. Where indicated on the
b.
c.
Scratched Finish: Conventional bullfloated tolerance. FF 15, FL 13. Minimum FF 13, minimum FF 10. For surfaces to receive thick mortar or grout setting beds, concrete toppings, or concrete pads. Floated Surface: Conventional straightedge tolerance. FF 20, FL 15. Minimum FF 15, minimum FL 10. For surfaces to receive roofing, insulation, waterproofing, thin setting beds or ceramic tile. Wood Trowel or Light Broom: FF 20, FL 15. Minimum FF 15, minimum FL 10. For surfaces to receive hot fluid-applied waterproofing. Troweled Finish: Conventional straightedge tolerance. FF 20, FL 15. Minimum FF 15, minimum FL 10. For surfaces to remain exposed or to receive resinous flooring, carpet, resilient flooring, or other floor covering, including concrete floors under access flooring. Omit hand troweling on surfaces scheduled to receive resinous flooring.
d.
e.
f.
1.7.2 1.7.2.1
Strength Requirements and w/c Ratio Strength Requirements
Specified compressive strength (f'c) shall be as indicated: Concrete made with high-early strength cement shall have a 7-day strength equal to the specified 28-day strength for concrete made with Type I or II portland cement. Compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M. a. Evaluation of Concrete Compressive Strength. Compressive strength specimens (6 by 12 inch cylinders) shall be fabricated by the Contractor and laboratory cured in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M. The strength of the concrete will be considered satisfactory so long as the average of all sets of three consecutive test results equals or exceeds the specified compressive strength f'c and no individual test result falls below the specified strength f'c by more than 500 psi. A "test" is defined as the average of two companion cylinders, or if only one cylinder is tested, the results of the single cylinder test. Additional analysis or testing, including taking cores and/or load tests may be required at the Contractor's expense when the strength of the concrete in the structure is considered potentially deficient. Investigation of Low-Strength Compressive Test Results. When any strength test of standard-cured test cylinders falls below the specified strength requirement by more than 500 psi or if tests of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and curing, steps shall be taken to assure that the load-carrying capacity of the structure is not jeopardized. When the strength of concrete in place is considered potentially deficient, cores
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
shall be obtained and tested in accordance with ASTM C 42/C 42M. At least three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. The location of cores will be determined by the Engineer of Record to least impair the strength of the structure. Concrete in the area represented by the core testing will be considered adequate if the average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85 percent of the specified strength requirement and if no single core is less than 75 percent of the specified strength requirement. Non-destructive tests (tests other than test cylinders or cores) shall not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection. The Contractor shall perform the coring and repair the holes. Cores will be tested by the Government. c. Load Tests. If the core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain or if structural analysis does not confirm the safety of the structure, load tests may be directed by the Engineer of Record, and approved by the Contracting Officer in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318/318R. Concrete work evaluated by structural analysis or by results of a load test as being understrength shall be corrected in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer of Record, and approved by the Contracting Officer. All investigations, testing, load tests, and correction of deficiencies shall be performed by and at the expense of the Contractor and must be approved by the Engineer of Record, and approved by the Contracting Officer, except that if all concrete is found to be in compliance with the drawings and specifications, the cost of investigations, testing, and load tests will be at the expense of the Government. Water-Cement Ratio
1.7.2.2 a.
Maximum water-cement ratio (w/c) for normal weight concrete shall be as follows: WATER-CEMENT RATIO, BY WEIGHT 0.45 0.50 0.55 As approved STRUCTURE OR PORTION OF STRUCTURE Design Design Design Design Mix Mix Mix Mix 4.0, 4.0A and 4.0PG 3.0 2.5 CLSM
b.
These w/c's may cause higher strengths than that required above for compressive. The maximum w/c required will be the equivalent w/c as determined by conversion from the weight ratio of water to cement plus pozzolan and slag cement by the weight equivalency method as described in ACI 211.1. In the case where slag cement is used, the weight of slag cement shall be included in the equations of ACI 211.1 for the term P which is used to denote the weight of pozzolan. Air Entrainment
1.7.3
Concrete shall be air entrained where indicated. Specified air content shall be attained at point of placement into the forms. Air content for normal weight concrete shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 231.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.7.4 a.
Slump Slump of the concrete, as delivered to the point of placement into the forms, shall be within the following limits. Slump shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M.
Structural Element _________________________ Walls, columns and beams Foundation walls, substructure walls, footings, slabs Any structural concrete approved for placement by pumping: At pump At discharge of line Fill (flowable fill) b.
Minimum _______ 2 in.
Slump _______ 4 in.
Maximum _______ 8 inch
1 in.
3 in.
8 inch
2 in. 1 in. 4 in.
6 in. 4 in. 6 in.
8 inch 8 inch 6 inch
A plasticizing admixture conforming to ASTM C 1017/C 1017M or when a Type F or G high range water reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C 494/C 494M shall be used to increase the slump of concrete as specified. Concrete Temperature
1.7.5
The temperature of the concrete as delivered shall not exceed 90 degrees F. When the ambient temperature during placing is 40 degrees F or less, or is expected to be at any time within 6 hours after placing, the temperature of the concrete as delivered shall be between 55 and 75 degrees F. 1.7.6 Size of Coarse Aggregate
The largest feasible nominal maximum size aggregate (NMSA) specified in paragraph AGGREGATES shall be used in each placement. However, nominal maximum size of aggregate shall not exceed any of the following: three-fourths of the minimum cover for reinforcing bars, three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars, one-fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, or one-third of the thickness of slabs or toppings. 1.7.7 Special Properties and Products
Concrete may contain admixtures other than air entraining agents, such as water reducers, superplasticizers, or set retarding agents to provide special properties to the concrete, if specified or approved. Any of these materials to be used on the project shall be used in the mix design studies. 1.7.8 Technical Service for Specialized Concrete
The services of a factory trained technical representative shall be obtained to oversee proportioning, batching, mixing, placing, consolidating, and finishing of specialized structural concrete, such as high containment concrete and concrete placed under water, if required. The technical representative shall be on the job full time until the Contracting Officer is satisfied that field controls indicate concrete of specified quality is furnished and that the Contractor's crews are capable Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 10 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
of continued satisfactory work. The technical representative shall be available for consultation with, and advice to, Government forces. 1.8 a. MIXTURE PROPORTIONS Concrete shall be composed of portland cement, other cementitious and pozzolanic materials as specified, aggregates, water and admixtures as specified. Design Mixes: Use high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) for all pumped concrete. 1. Mix CLSM - Flowable Fill: Strength: 50 to 100 psi at 28 days. Air Content: 4 percent maximum. Slump: 6 inches maximum. Admixture: Air entrainment optional. Aggregate: Fine aggregate only. ACI 229R 2. Mix 2.5 - Normal Weight Concrete: Strength: 2500 psi at 28 days. Air Content: 4 percent maximum. Slump: 4 inches maximum. Admixture: Air entrainment optional. 3. Mix 3.0 - Normal Weight Concrete: Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. Air Content: 4 percent maximum. Slump: 8 inches maximum for concrete containing high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer), 4 inches maximum for other concrete. Admixtures: Water reducing admixture or high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) required. Air entrainment optional. 4. Mix 4.0 - Normal Weight Concrete: Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. Air Content: 3 percent maximum. Slump: 8 inches maximum for concrete containing high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer), 4 inches maximum for other concrete. Admixtures: Water reducing admixture or high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) required. Air entrainment optional. 5. Mix 4.0A - Normal Weight Concrete: Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. Air Content: 4.5 percent minimum, 7.5 percent maximum. Slump: 8 inches maximum for concrete containing high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer), 4 inches maximum for other concrete. Admixtures: Water reducing admixture or high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) required. Air entrainment required. 5. Mix 4.0PG - Normal Weight Concrete:
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. Air Content: 3 percent maximum. Slump: 8 inches maximum for concrete containing high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer), 4 inches maximum for other concrete. Admixtures: Water reducing admixture or high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) optional. Air entrainment optional. Use: Topping slabs and curbs less than 4 inches wide. 1.8.1 Proportioning of Normal Weight Concrete
Mixture proportioning requirements for various classes and types of concrete specified shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Mixture proportions shall be based on compressive strength as determined by test specimens fabricated in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M. Samples of all materials used in mixture proportioning studies shall be representative of those proposed for use in the project and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's or producer's test reports indicating compliance with these specifications. Trial mixtures having proportions, consistencies, and air content suitable for the work shall be made based on methodology described in ACI 211.1, using at least three different water-cement ratios for each type of mixture, which will produce a range of strength encompassing those required for each class and type of concrete required on the project. The maximum water-cement ratios required in subparagraph Water-Cement Ratio will be the equivalent water-cement ratio as determined by conversion from the weight ratio of water to cement plus pozzolan and slag cement by the weight equivalency method as described in ACI 211.1. In the case where slag cement is used, the weight of the slag cement shall be included in the equations in ACI 211.1 for the term P, which is used to denote the weight of pozzolan. The minimum cumulative pozzolan and slag cement content shall be 15 percent by weight of the total cementitious material, and the maximum shall be 35 percent. Pozzolan and slag cement shall not be used in concrete to receive a polished concrete finish as specified in Section 03 35 13 HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING. Laboratory trial mixtures shall be designed for maximum permitted slump and air content. Separate sets of trial mixture studies shall be made for each combination of cementitious materials and each combination of admixtures proposed for use. No combination of either shall be used until proven by such studies, except that, if approved in writing and otherwise permitted by these specifications, an accelerator or a retarder may be used without separate trial mixture study. Separate trial mixture studies shall also be made for concrete for any conveying or placing method proposed which requires special properties and for concrete to be placed in unusually difficult placing locations. The temperature of concrete in each trial batch shall be reported. For each water-cement ratio, at least three test cylinders for each test age shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M. They shall be tested at 7 and 28 days in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M. From these test results, a curve shall be plotted showing the relationship between water-cement ratio and strength for each set of trial mix studies. In addition, a curve shall be plotted showing the relationship between 7 day and 28 day strengths. Each mixture shall be designed to promote easy and suitable concrete placement, consolidation and finishing, and to prevent segregation and excessive bleeding. 1.8.2 Average Compressive Strength Required for Mixtures
The mixture proportions selected during mixture design studies shall Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 12 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
produce a required average compressive strength (f'cr) exceeding the specified compressive strength (f'c) by the amount indicated below. This required average compressive strength, f'cr, will not be a required acceptance criteria during concrete production. The Contractor shall maintain a moving average for compressive strength based on three latest 28-day test results to verify compliance with f'cr. The standard deviation and moving average shall be submitted to the AE weekly. When the moving average for strength at 28 days drops below f'cr, or the 7-day strength drops below a strength correlated with the 28-day f'cr, the mixture shall be adjusted, as approved, to bring the moving average back up to f'cr. During production, the required f'cr shall be adjusted, as appropriate, based on the standard deviation being attained on the job. 1.8.2.1 a. Computations from Test Records
Where a concrete production facility has test records, a standard deviation shall be established in accordance with the applicable provisions of ACI 214.3R. Test records from which a standard deviation is calculated shall represent materials, quality control procedures, and conditions similar to those expected; shall represent concrete produced to meet a specified strength or strengths (f'c) within 1,000 psi of that specified for proposed work; and shall consist of at least 30 consecutive tests. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of two cylinders made from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days. Required average compressive strength f'cr used as the basis for selection of concrete proportions shall be the larger of the equations that follow using the standard deviation as determined above:
f'cr = f'c + 1.34S where units are in psi f'cr = f'c + 2.33S - 500 where units are in psi Where S = standard deviation b. Where a concrete production facility does not have test records meeting the requirements above but does have a record based on 15 to 29 consecutive tests, a standard deviation shall be established as the product of the calculated standard deviation and a modification factor from the following table: MODIFICATION FACTOR FOR STANDARD DEVIATION 1.16 1.08 1.03 1.00
NUMBER OF TESTS 15 20 25 30 or more 1.8.2.2 c.
Computations without Previous Test Records
When a concrete production facility does not have sufficient field strength test records for calculation of the standard deviation, the required average strength f'cr shall be determined as follows: 1. If the specified compressive strength f'c is less than 3,000 psi,
f'cr = f'c + 1000 psi
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.
If the specified compressive strength f'c is 3,000 to 5,000 psi,
f'cr = f'c + 1,200 psi 1.9 MOCK-UP
Provide products and installation for portion of work specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 and indicated for exterior on-site mock-up on Drawing A3.31, and for containment mock-up specified in Section 03 31 05 and indicated on A5.993 drawing. 1.10 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Cement and other cementitious materials shall be stored in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos which will exclude moisture and contaminants and keep each material completely separated. Aggregate stockpiles shall be arranged and used in a manner to avoid excessive segregation and to prevent contamination with other materials or with other sizes of aggregates. Aggregate shall not be stored directly on ground unless a sacrificial layer is left undisturbed. Reinforcing bars and accessories shall be stored above the ground on platforms, skids or other supports. Other materials shall be stored in such a manner as to avoid contamination and deterioration. Admixtures which have been in storage at the project site for longer than 6 months or which have been subjected to freezing shall not be used unless retested and proven to meet the specified requirements. Materials shall be capable of being accurately identified after bundles or containers are opened. Store and protect non-shrink grout from moisture and contamination. 1.11 GOVERNMENT ASSURANCE INSPECTION AND TESTING
Day-to day inspection and testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) staff. However, representatives of the Contracting Officer can and will inspect construction as considered appropriate and will monitor operations of the Contractor's CQC staff. Government inspection or testing will not relieve the Contractor of any of his CQC responsibilities. 1.11.1 Materials
The Government will sample and test aggregates, cementitious materials, other materials, and concrete to determine compliance with the specifications as considered appropriate. The Contractor shall provide facilities and labor as may be necessary for procurement of representative test samples. Samples of aggregates will be obtained at the point of batching in accordance with ASTM D 75. Other materials will be sampled from storage at the jobsite or from other locations as considered appropriate. Samples may be placed in storage for later testing when appropriate. 1.11.2 Fresh Concrete
Fresh concrete will be sampled as delivered in accordance with ASTM C 172 and tested in accordance with these specifications, as considered necessary. 1.11.3 Hardened Concrete
Tests on hardened concrete will be performed by the Government when such tests are considered necessary. Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 14 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.11.4
Inspection
Concrete operations may be tested and inspected by the Government as the project progresses. Failure to detect defective work or material will not prevent rejection later when a defect is discovered nor will it obligate the Government for final acceptance. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
Cementitious Materials shall be portland cement, or portland cement in combination with pozzolan or slag cement and shall conform to appropriate specifications listed below. Use of cementitious materials in concrete which will have surfaces exposed in non-mechanical spaces shall be restricted so there is no change in color, source, or type of cementitious material. 2.1.1 Portland Cement
ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. 2.1.2 High-Early-Strength Portland Cement
ASTM C 150, Type III. Type III cement shall be used only in isolated instances and only when approved in writing. 2.1.3 Blended Cements
Shall not be used. 2.1.4 Pozzolan (Fly Ash)
Pozzolan shall conform to ASTM C 618, Class F. The Contractor shall comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS. 2.1.5 Slag Cement
ASTM C 989, Grade 100. 2.2 AGGREGATES
Fine and coarse aggregates shall be tested and evaluated for alkali-aggregate reactivity in accordance with ASTM C 1260. The fine and coarse aggregates shall be evaluated separately and in combination, which matches the Contractor's proposed mix design proportioning. All results of the separate and combination testing shall have a measured expansion less than 0.10 percent at 16 days after casting. Should the test data indicate an expansion of 0.10 percent or greater, the aggregate(s) shall be rejected or additional testing using ASTM C 1260 and ASTM C 1567 shall be performed. The additional testing using ASTM C 1260 and ASTM C 1567 shall be performed using the low alkali portland cement in combination with slag cement, or Class F fly ash. Slag cement shall be used in the range of 15 to 35 percent of the total cementitious material by weight. Class F fly ash shall be used in the range of 15 to 35 percent of the total cementitious material by weight. The cumulative amount of slag cement and fly ash shall not be less than 15 percent and shall not exceed 35 percent Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 15 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
of the total cementitious material by weight. 2.2.1 Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall conform to the quality and gradation requirements of ASTM C 33. 2.2.2 Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33, and Class as listed below. a. b. c. d. e. 2.3 At Stair Pan Fill, Topping slabs, and Curbs less than 4 inches wide: Class 3S Size Designation 8. At Foundations: Class 3S Size Designation 67. At Drilled Piers: Class 1S Size Designation 67. At Slabs, Beams and Walls: 3S Size Designation 67. At Exterior Slabs and Pavements: 4S Size Designation 67. CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
Chemical admixtures, when required or permitted, shall conform to the appropriate specification listed. Admixtures shall be furnished in liquid form and of suitable concentration for easy, accurate control of dispensing. 2.3.1 Air-Entraining Admixture
ASTM C 260 and shall consistently entrain the air content in the specified ranges under field conditions. 2.3.2 Accelerating Admixture
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C or E, except that calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used. 2.3.3 Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixture
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A, except that the 6-month and 1-year compressive and flexural strength tests are waived. 2.3.4 High-Range Water Reducer
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F or G, except that the 6-month and 1-year strength requirements are waived. The admixture shall be used only when approved in writing, such approval being contingent upon particular mixture control as described in the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and upon performance of separate mixture design studies. 2.3.5 Other Chemical Admixtures
Chemical admixtures for use in producing flowing concrete shall comply with ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type I or II. These admixtures shall be used only when approved in writing, such approval being contingent upon particular mixture control as described in the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and upon performance of separate mixture design studies.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.4 2.4.1
CURING MATERIALS Impervious-Sheet
Impervious-sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C 171, type optional, except, that polyethylene sheet shall not be used. 2.4.2 Membrane-Forming Compound
Membrane-Forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C 309, Type 1 Class A, except that only a styrene acrylate or chlorinated rubber compound meeting Class B requirements shall be used for surfaces that are to be painted or are to receive bituminous roofing, or waterproofing, or floors that are to receive adhesive applications of resilient flooring. The curing compound selected shall be compatible with any subsequent paint, roofing, waterproofing, or flooring specified. 2.4.3 Burlap and Cotton Mat
Burlap and cotton mat used for curing shall conform to AASHTO M 182. 2.5 WATER
Water for mixing and curing shall be fresh, clean, potable, and free of injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, or alkali. 2.6 NONSHRINK GROUT
Nonshrink grout shall conform to ASTM C 1107, and shall be a commercial formulation suitable for the proposed application, minimum compressive strength: 7,500 psi at 28 days. 2.7 LATEX BONDING AGENT
Latex agents for bonding fresh to hardened concrete shall conform to ASTM C 1059. 2.8 EPOXY RESIN
Epoxy resins for use in repairs shall conform to ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type V, Grade 2. Class as appropriate to the existing ambient and surface temperatures. 2.9 EMBEDDED ITEMS
Embedded items shall be of the size and type indicated or as needed for the application. Dovetail slots shall be galvanized steel. Hangers for suspended ceilings shall be as specified in Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS. Inserts for shelf angles and bolt hangers shall be of malleable iron or cast or wrought steel. 2.10 VAPOR RETARDER
Vapor retarder shall be reinforced polyethylene sheeting that meets ASTM E 1745 Class A requirements with a minimum thickness of 15 mils and vapor permeance rating not exceeding 0.03 perms.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.11 2.11.1
JOINT MATERIALS Joint Fillers, Sealers, and Waterstops
Expansion joint fillers shall be preformed materials conforming to ASTM D 1751 ASTM D 1752. Materials for waterstops shall be in accordance with Section 03 15 13.00 10 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONTRACTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS. Materials for and sealing of joints shall conform to the requirements of Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. 2.12 SYNTHETIC FIBERS FOR REINFORCING
Shall not be used. 2.13 2.13.1 a. CONCRETE ACCESSORIES Expansion Anchors Expansion anchors shall be 3/4 inch diameter heavy duty anchors constructed from carbon steel, unless otherwise noted. Where indicated, expansion anchors shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M Class C. Nuts used in expansion anchor assemblies shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 563, Grade A, Hex. Washers used in expansion anchor assemblies shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 844. Chemical/Epoxy Adhesives for Post-Installed Reinforcement and Anchors Chemical/Epoxy Adhesives for Post-Installed Reinforcement and Anchors Chemical/Epoxy adhesive shall be used where indicated and approved to post-install reinforcement and anchors into previously cast concrete. Grout or mortar shall not be used. EXECUTION PREPARATION FOR PLACING
b.
c.
d.
2.12.2 a.
b. PART 3 3.1
Before commencing concrete placement, the following shall be performed. Surfaces to receive concrete shall be clean and free from frost, ice, mud, and water. Forms shall be in place, cleaned, coated, and adequately supported, in accordance with Section 03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK. Reinforcing steel shall be in place, cleaned, tied, and adequately supported, in accordance with Section 03 20 01.00 10 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT. Transporting and conveying equipment shall be in-place, ready for use, clean, and free of hardened concrete and foreign material. Equipment for consolidating concrete shall be at the placing site and in proper working order. Equipment and material for curing and for protecting concrete from weather or mechanical damage shall be at the placing site, in proper working condition and in sufficient amount for the entire placement. When hot, windy conditions during concreting appear probable, equipment and material shall be at the placing site to provide windbreaks, shading, fogging, or other action to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking or other damaging drying of the concrete. When cold conditions during concreting appear probable, equipment and material shall be at the placing site to Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 18 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
provide temporary heating and insulation. 3.1.1 3.1.1.1 Foundations Concrete on Earth Foundations
Earth (subgrade, base, or subbase courses) surfaces upon which concrete is to be placed shall be clean, damp, and free from debris, frost, ice, and standing or running water. Prior to placement of concrete, the foundation shall be well drained and shall be satisfactorily graded and uniformly compacted. 3.1.1.2 Preparation of Rock
Rock surfaces upon which concrete is to be placed shall be free from oil, standing or running water, ice, mud, drummy rock, coating, debris, and loose, semidetached or unsound fragments. Joints in rock shall be cleaned to a satisfactory depth, as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer and treated in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. 3.1.2 3.1.2.1 Previously Placed Concrete Preparation of Previously Placed Concrete
Concrete surfaces to which other concrete is to be bonded shall be abraded in an approved manner that will expose sound aggregate uniformly without damaging the concrete. Laitance and loose particles shall be removed. Surfaces shall be thoroughly washed and shall be moist but without free water when concrete is placed. 3.1.3 Vapor Retarder
Vapor retarder shall be provided beneath the interior on-grade concrete floor slabs. The greatest widths and lengths practicable shall be used to eliminate joints wherever possible. Joints shall be lapped a minimum of 12 inches. Torn, punctured, or damaged vapor retarder material shall be removed and new vapor retarder shall be provided prior to placing concrete. For minor repairs, patches may be made using laps of at least 12 inches. Lapped joints shall be sealed and edges patched with pressure-sensitive adhesive or tape not less than 2 inches wide and compatible with the membrane. Vapor retarder shall be placed directly on porous fill. 3.1.4 Embedded Items
Before placement of concrete, care shall be taken to determine that all embedded items are firmly and securely fastened in place as indicated on the drawings, or required. Conduit and other embedded items shall be clean and free of oil and other foreign matter such as loose coatings or rust, paint, and scale. The embedding of wood in concrete will be permitted only when specifically authorized or directed. Voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor slots shall be filled temporarily with readily removable materials to prevent the entry of concrete into voids. Welding shall not be performed on embedded metals within 12 inches of the surface of the concrete. Tack welding shall not be performed on or to embedded items.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.2 3.2.1
CONCRETE PRODUCTION General Requirements
Concrete shall be batched from a ready-mixed concrete plant. Ready-mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M, except as otherwise specified. Truck mixers and agitators, shall comply with NRMCA TMMB 100. Ready-mix plant equipment and facilities shall be certified in accordance with NRMCA QC 3. Approved batch tickets shall be furnished for each load of ready-mixed concrete. 3.2.2 Batching Plant
The batching plant shall be located off site close to the project. The batching plant shall conform to the requirements of NRMCA CPMB 100 and as specified. 3.2.3 Batching Equipment
The batching controls shall be semiautomatic or automatic, as defined in NRMCA CPMB 100. A semiautomatic batching system shall be provided with interlocks such that the discharge device cannot be actuated until the indicated material is within the applicable tolerance. The batching system shall be equipped with accurate recorder or recorders that meet the requirements of NRMCA CPMB 100. The weight of water and admixtures shall be recorded if batched by weight. Separate bins or compartments shall be provided for each size group of aggregate and type of cementitious material, to prevent intermingling at any time. Aggregates shall be weighed either in separate weigh batchers with individual scales or, provided the smallest size is batched first, cumulatively in one weigh batcher on one scale. Aggregate shall not be weighed in the same batcher with cementitious material. If both portland cement and other cementitious material are used, they may be batched cumulatively, provided that the portland cement is batched first. Water may be measured by weight or volume. Water shall not be weighed or measured cumulatively with another ingredient. Filling and discharging valves for the water metering or batching system shall be so interlocked that the discharge valve cannot be opened before the filling valve is fully closed. Piping for water and for admixtures shall be free from leaks and shall be properly valved to prevent backflow or siphoning. Admixtures shall be furnished as a liquid of suitable concentration for easy control of dispensing. An adjustable, accurate, mechanical device for measuring and dispensing each admixture shall be provided. Each admixture dispenser shall be interlocked with the batching and discharging operation of the water so that each admixture is separately batched and individually discharged automatically in a manner to obtain uniform distribution throughout the water as it is added to the batch in the specified mixing period. When use of truck mixers makes this requirement impractical, the admixture dispensers shall be interlocked with the sand batchers. Different admixtures shall not be combined prior to introduction in water and shall not be allowed to intermingle until in contact with the cement. Admixture dispensers shall have suitable devices to detect and indicate flow during dispensing or have a means for visual observation. The plant shall be arranged so as to facilitate the inspection of all operations at all times. Suitable facilities shall be provided for obtaining representative samples of aggregates from each bin or compartment, and for sampling and calibrating the dispensing of cementitious material, water, and admixtures. Filling ports for cementitious materials bins or silos shall be clearly marked with a permanent sign stating the contents. Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 20 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.2.4
Scales
The weighing equipment shall conform to the applicable requirements of CPMB Concrete Plant Standard, and of NIST HB 44, except that the accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.2 percent of scale capacity. The Contractor shall provide standard test weights and any other auxiliary equipment required for checking the operating performance of each scale or other measuring devices. The tests shall be made at the specified frequency in the presence of a Government inspector. The weighing equipment shall be arranged so that the plant operator can conveniently observe all dials or indicators. 3.2.5 Batching Tolerances (A) Tolerances with Weighing Equipment PERCENT OF REQUIRED WEIGHT 0 to plus plus 0 to plus 2 or minus 2 or minus 1 plus 6
MATERIAL Cementitious materials Aggregate Water Chemical admixture (B)
Tolerances with Volumetric Equipment
For volumetric batching equipment used for water and admixtures, the following tolerances shall apply to the required volume of material being batched: PERCENT OF REQUIRED MATERIAL plus or minus 1 percent 0 to plus 6 percent
MATERIAL
Water: Chemical admixtures:
3.2.6
Moisture Control
The plant shall be capable of ready adjustment to compensate for the varying moisture content of the aggregates and to change the weights of the materials being batched. 3.2.7 Concrete Mixers
Mixers shall be stationary mixers or truck mixers. Mixers shall be capable of combining the materials into a uniform mixture and of discharging this mixture without segregation. The mixers shall not be charged in excess of the capacity recommended by the manufacturer. The mixers shall be operated at the drum or mixing blade speed designated by the manufacturer. The mixers shall be maintained in satisfactory operating condition, and the mixer drums shall be kept free of hardened concrete. Should any mixer at any time produce unsatisfactory results, its use shall be promptly discontinued until it is repaired. 3.2.8 Stationary Mixers
Concrete plant mixers shall be drum-type mixers of tilting, nontilting, Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 21 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
horizontal-shaft, or vertical-shaft type, or shall be pug mill type and shall be provided with an acceptable device to lock the discharge mechanism until the required mixing time has elapsed. The mixing time and uniformity shall conform to all the requirements in ASTM C 94/C 94M applicable to central-mixed concrete. 3.2.9 Truck Mixers
Truck mixers, the mixing of concrete therein, and concrete uniformity shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94/C 94M. A truck mixer may be used either for complete mixing (transit-mixed) or to finish the partial mixing done in a stationary mixer (shrink-mixed). Each truck shall be equipped with two counters from which it is possible to determine the number of revolutions at mixing speed and the number of revolutions at agitating speed. Water shall not be added at the placing site unless specifically approved; and in no case shall it exceed the specified w/c. Any such water shall be injected at the base of the mixer, not at the discharge end. 3.3 TRANSPORTING CONCRETE TO PROJECT SITE or
Concrete shall be transported to the placing site in truck mixers, agitators. 3.4 CONVEYING CONCRETE ON SITE
Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer or transporting unit to forms as rapidly as possible and within the time interval specified by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients using following equipment. Conveying equipment shall be cleaned before each placement. 3.4.1 Buckets
The interior hopper slope shall be not less than 58 degrees from the horizontal, the minimum dimension of the clear gate opening shall be at least 5 times the nominal maximum-size aggregate, and the area of the gate opening shall not be less than 2 square feet. The maximum dimension of the gate opening shall not be greater than twice the minimum dimension. The bucket gates shall be essentially grout tight when closed and may be manually, pneumatically, or hydraulically operated except that buckets larger than 2 cubic yards shall not be manually operated. The design of the bucket shall provide means for positive regulation of the amount and rate of deposit of concrete in each dumping position. 3.4.2 Trucks
Truck mixers operating at agitating speed or truck agitators used for transporting plant-mixed concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94/C 94M. 3.4.3 Chutes
When concrete can be placed directly from a truck mixer or agitator, the chutes normally attached to this equipment by the manufacturer may be used. A discharge deflector shall be used when required by the Contracting Officer. Separate chutes and other similar equipment will not be permitted for conveying concrete.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.4.4
Concrete Pumps
Concrete may be conveyed by positive displacement pump when approved. The pumping equipment shall be piston or squeeze pressure type; pneumatic placing equipment shall not be used. The pipeline shall be rigid steel pipe or heavy-duty flexible hose. The inside diameter of the pipe shall be at least 3 times the nominal maximum-size coarse aggregate in the concrete mixture to be pumped but not less than 4 inches. Aluminum pipe shall not be used. 3.5 PLACING CONCRETE
Mixed concrete shall be discharged within 1-1/2 hours or before the mixer drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates. When the concrete temperature exceeds 85 degrees F, the time shall be reduced to 45 minutes. Concrete shall be placed within 15 minutes after it has been discharged from the transporting unit. Concrete shall be handled from mixer or transporting unit to forms in a continuous manner until the approved unit of operation is completed. Adequate scaffolding, ramps and walkways shall be provided so that personnel and equipment are not supported by in-place reinforcement. Placing will not be permitted when the sun, heat, wind, or limitations of facilities furnished by the Contractor prevent proper consolidation, finishing and curing. Sufficient placing capacity shall be provided so that concrete can be kept free of cold joints. Do not place slurry used to prime concrete within structural placement. 3.5.1 Depositing Concrete
Concrete shall be deposited as close as possible to its final position in the forms, and there shall be no vertical drop greater than 5 feet except where suitable equipment is provided to prevent segregation and where specifically authorized. Depositing of the concrete shall be so regulated that it will be effectively consolidated in horizontal layers not more than 12 inches thick, except that all slabs shall be placed in a single lift. Concrete to receive other construction shall be screeded to the proper level. Concrete shall be deposited continuously in one layer or in layers so that fresh concrete is deposited on in-place concrete that is still plastic. Fresh concrete shall not be deposited on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. Concrete that has surface dried, partially hardened, or contains foreign material shall not be used. When temporary spreaders are used in the forms, the spreaders shall be removed as their service becomes unnecessary. Concrete shall not be placed in slabs over columns and walls until concrete in columns and walls has been in-place at least two hours or until the concrete begins to lose its plasticity. Concrete for beams and girders shall be placed at the same time as concrete for adjoining slabs. Concrete for Drilled Piers shall be deposited in accordance with the requirements in Section 31 63 26 DRILLED PIERS (CAISSONS). 3.5.2 Consolidation
Immediately after placing, each layer of concrete shall be consolidated by internal vibrators, except for slabs 4 inches thick or less. The vibrators shall at all times be adequate in effectiveness and number to properly Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 23 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
consolidate the concrete; a spare vibrator shall be kept at the jobsite during all concrete placing operations. The vibrators shall have a frequency of not less than 10,000 vibrations per minute, an amplitude of at least 0.025 inch, and the head diameter shall be appropriate for the structural member and the concrete mixture being placed. Vibrators shall be inserted vertically at uniform spacing over the area of placement. The distance between insertions shall be approximately 1.5 times the radius of action of the vibrator so that the area being vibrated will overlap the adjacent just-vibrated area by a reasonable amount. The vibrator shall penetrate rapidly to the bottom of the layer and at least 6 inches into the preceding layer if there is such. Vibrator shall be held stationary until the concrete is consolidated and then vertically withdrawn slowly while operating. Form vibrators shall not be used unless specifically approved and unless forms are constructed to withstand their use. Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete within the forms. Slabs 4 inches and less in thickness shall be consolidated by properly designed vibrating screeds or other approved technique. Frequency and amplitude of vibrators shall be determined in accordance with COE CRD-C 521. Grate tampers ("jitterbugs") shall not be used. Concrete for Drilled Piers shall be consolidated in accordance with the requirements in Section 31 63 26 DRILLED PIERS (CAISSONS). 3.5.3 Cold Weather Requirements
Special protection measures in accordance with ACI 306R, shall be used if freezing temperatures are anticipated before the expiration of the specified curing period. The concrete shall be placed and finished with approved procedures previously submitted and as specified herein. The ambient temperature of the air where concrete is to be placed and the temperature of surfaces to receive concrete shall be not less than 40 degrees F. The temperature of the concrete when placed shall be not less than 50 degrees F nor more than 75 degrees F. Heating of the mixing water or aggregates will be required to regulate the concrete placing temperature. Materials entering the mixer shall be free from ice, snow, or frozen lumps. Salt, chemicals or other materials shall not be incorporated in the concrete to prevent freezing. Upon written approval, an accelerating admixture conforming to ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C or E may be used, provided it contains no calcium chloride. Calcium chloride shall not be used. 3.5.4 Hot Weather Requirements
Special protection measures in accordance with ACI 305R shall be used when the ambient temperature during concrete placing is expected to exceed 85 degrees F. The concrete shall be placed and finished with approved procedures previously submitted and as specified herein. The concrete temperature at time of delivery to the forms shall not exceed the temperature shown in the table below when measured in accordance with ASTM C 1064/C 1064M. Cooling of the mixing water or aggregates or placing concrete in the cooler part of the day may be required to obtain an adequate placing temperature. A retarder may be used, as approved, to facilitate placing and finishing. Steel forms and reinforcements shall be cooled as approved prior to concrete placement when steel temperatures are greater than 120 degrees F. Conveying and placing equipment shall be cooled if necessary to maintain proper concrete-placing temperature.
Ft. Detrick, MD
Maximum Allowable Concrete Placing Temperature Relative Humidity, Percent, During Time of Concrete Placement Greater than 60 40-60 Less than 40 3.5.5 Maximum Allowable Concrete Temperature Degrees 90 F 85 F 80 F
Prevention of Plastic Shrinkage Cracking
During hot weather with low humidity, and particularly with appreciable wind, as well as interior placements when space heaters produce low humidity, the Contractor shall be alert to the tendency for plastic shrinkage cracks to develop and shall institute measures to prevent this. Particular care shall be taken if plastic shrinkage cracking is potentially imminent and especially if it has developed during a previous placement. Periods of high potential for plastic shrinkage cracking can be anticipated by use of Fig. 2.1.5 of ACI 305R. In addition the concrete placement shall be further protected by erecting shades and windbreaks and by applying fog sprays of water, sprinkling, ponding or wet covering. Plastic shrinkage cracks that occur shall be filled by injection of epoxy resin as directed, after the concrete hardens. Plastic shrinkage cracks shall never be troweled over or filled with slurry. 3.5.6 Placing Concrete Underwater
Concrete shall be deposited in water by a tremie or concrete pump. The methods and equipment used shall be subject to approval. Concrete buckets shall not be used for underwater placement of concrete except to deliver concrete to the tremie. The tremie shall be watertight and sufficiently large to permit a free flow of concrete. The concrete shall be deposited so that it enters the mass of the previously placed concrete from within, displacing water with a minimum disturbance to the surface of the concrete. The discharge end of the pump line or tremie shaft shall be kept continuously submerged in the concrete. The underwater seal at start of placing shall not produce undue turbulence in the water. The tremie shaft shall be kept full of concrete to a point well above the water surface. Placement shall proceed without interruption until the concrete has been brought to the required height. The tremie shall not be moved horizontally during a placing operation, and a sufficient number of tremies shall be provided so that the maximum horizontal flow of concrete will be limited to 15 feet. Concrete shall not be deposited in running water or in water with a temperature below 35 degrees F. 3.5.7 Placing Concrete in Congested Areas
Special care shall be used to ensure complete filling of the forms, elimination of all voids, and complete consolidation of the concrete when placing concrete in areas congested with reinforcing bars, embedded items, waterstops and other tight spacing. An appropriate concrete mixture shall be used, and the nominal maximum size of aggregate (NMSA) shall meet the specified criteria when evaluated for the congested area. Vibrators with heads of a size appropriate for the clearances available shall be used, and the consolidation operation shall be closely supervised to ensure complete and thorough consolidation at all points. Where necessary, splices of reinforcing bars shall be alternated to reduce congestion. Where two mats Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 25 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
of closely spaced reinforcing are required, the bars in each mat shall be placed in matching alignment to reduce congestion. Reinforcing bars may be temporarily crowded to one side during concrete placement provided they are returned to exact required location before concrete placement and consolidation are completed. 3.5.8 Placing Flowable Concrete
If a plasticizing admixture conforming to ASTM C 1017/C 1017M is used or if a Type F or G high range water reducing admixture is permitted to increase the slump, the concrete shall meet all requirements of paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS in PART 1. Extreme care shall be used in conveying and placing the concrete to avoid segregation. Consolidation and finishing shall meet all requirements of paragraphs Placing Concrete, Finishing Formed Surfaces, and Finishing Unformed Surfaces. No relaxation of requirements to accommodate flowable concrete will be permitted. 3.6 JOINTS
Joints shall be located and constructed as indicated or approved. Joints not indicated on the drawings shall be located and constructed to minimize the impact on the strength of the structure. In general, such joints shall be located near the middle of the spans of supported slabs, beams, and girders unless a beam intersects a girder at this point, in which case the joint in the girder shall be offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam. Joints in walls and columns shall be at the underside of floors, slabs, beams, or girders and at the tops of footings or floor slabs, unless otherwise approved. Joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement. All reinforcement shall be continued across joints; except that reinforcement or other fixed metal items shall not be continuous through expansion joints, or isolation joints in slabs on grade. The perimeters of the slabs shall be free of fins, rough edges, spalling, or other unsightly appearance. Reservoir for sealant for construction and contraction joints in slabs shall be formed to the dimensions shown on the drawings by removing snap-out joint-forming inserts, or by sawing to widen the top portion of sawed joints. Joints to be sealed shall be cleaned and sealed as indicated and in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. 3.6.1 Construction Joints
For concrete other than slabs on grade, construction joints shall be located so that the unit of operation does not exceed 60 feet. Concrete shall be placed continuously so that each unit is monolithic in construction. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against adjacent hardened concrete until it is at least 24 hours old. Construction joints shall be located as indicated or approved. Where concrete work is interrupted by weather, end of work shift or other similar type of delay, location and type of construction joint shall be subject to approval of the Engineer of Record and Contracting Officer. Unless otherwise indicated reinforcing steel shall extend through construction joints. Construction joints in slabs on grade shall be keyed or doweled as shown. Concrete columns, walls, or piers shall be in place at least 2 hours, or until the concrete begins to lose its plasticity, before placing concrete for beams, girders, or slabs thereon. In walls having door or window openings, lifts shall terminate at the top and bottom of the opening. Other lifts shall terminate at such levels as to conform to structural requirements or architectural details.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.6.2
Contraction Joints in Slabs on Grade
Contraction joints shall be located as indicated or approved, and detailed as shown on the drawings. Contraction Joints shall be produced by forming a weakened plane in the concrete slab by use of rigid inserts impressed in the concrete during placing operations, use of snap-out plastic joint forming inserts, or sawing a continuous slot with a concrete saw. Regardless of method used to produce the weakened plane, it shall be 1/4 the depth of the slab with thickness indicated. For saw-cut joints, cutting shall be timed properly with the set of the concrete. Cutting shall be started as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent ravelling of the edges of the saw cut. Cutting shall be completed before shrinkage stresses become sufficient to produce cracking. Reservoir for joint sealant shall be formed as previously specified. 3.6.3 Expansion Joints
Installation of expansion joints and sealing of these joints shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 15 13.00 10 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONTRACTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS and Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. 3.6.4 Waterstops
Waterstops shall be installed in conformance with the locations and details shown on the drawings using materials and procedures specified in Section 03 15 13.00 10 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONTRACTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS. 3.6.5 Tie Bars
Tie bars shall be installed at the locations shown on the drawings and to the details shown, using materials and procedures specified in Section 03 20 01.00 10 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT and herein. "Structural" type deformed bar dowels, or tie bars, shall be installed to meet the specified tolerances. Care shall be taken during placing adjacent to and around tie bars to ensure there is no displacement of the tie bar and that the concrete completely embeds the tie bar and is thoroughly consolidated. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
Forms, form materials, and form construction are specified in Section 03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK. Finishing of formed surfaces shall be as specified herein. Surfaces shall be left with the texture imparted by the forms except that defective surfaces shall be repaired. Unless painting of surfaces is required, uniform color of the concrete shall be maintained by use of only one mixture without changes in materials or proportions for any structure or portion of structure that requires a Class A or B finish. Except for major defects, as defined hereinafter, surface defects shall be repaired as specified herein within 24 hours after forms are removed. Repairs of the so-called "plaster-type" will not be permitted in any location. Tolerances of formed surfaces shall conform to the requirements of ACI 117/117R. These tolerances apply to the finished concrete surface, not to the forms themselves; forms shall be set true to line and grade. Form tie holes requiring repair and other defects whose depth is at least as great as their surface diameter shall be repaired as specified in paragraph Damp-Pack Mortar Repair. Defects whose surface diameter is greater than their depth shall be repaired as specified in paragraph Repair of Major Defects. Repairs shall be finished flush with adjacent surfaces and with the same surface texture. The cement used for all repairs shall be a blend of job cement with white cement proportioned Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 27 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
so that the final color after curing and aging will be the same as the adjacent concrete. Concrete with excessive honeycomb, or other defects which affect the strength of the member, will be rejected. Repairs shall be demonstrated to be acceptable and free from cracks or loose or drummy areas at the completion of the contract and, for Class A and B Finishes, shall be inconspicuous. Repairs not meeting these requirements will be rejected and shall be replaced. 3.7.1 Class A Finish and Class B Finish
Class A finish is required at concrete surfaces exposed to view in the finish work, including surfaces that are painted. Class B finish is required where indicated on the drawings and for depressions and pits not exposed in the finish work. Fins, ravelings, and loose material shall be removed, all surface defects over 1/2 inch in diameter or more than 1/2 inch deep, shall be repaired and, except as otherwise indicated or as specified in Section 03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK, holes left by removal of form ties shall be reamed and filled. Defects more than 1/2 inch in diameter shall be cut back to sound concrete, but in all cases at least 1 inch deep. 3.7.2 Class C and Class D Finish
Class C finish is required for foundation elements where the element surface is adjacent to the exterior wall system. Class D finish is required for the balance of foundation elements. Fins, ravelings, and loose material shall be removed, and, except as otherwise indicated or as specified in Section 03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK, holes left by removal of form ties shall be reamed and filled. Honeycomb and other defects more than 1/2 inch deep or more than 2 inches in diameter shall be repaired. Defects more than 2 inches in diameter shall be cut back to sound concrete, but in all cases at least 1 inch deep. 3.8 3.8.1 REPAIRS Watertight Form Tie Holes
Repairs to holes passing entirely through the basement and tunnel walls and roof slab shall form a watertight seal. The details for achieving the watertight seal shall be provided by the Contractor. 3.8.2 Damp-Pack Mortar Repair
Form tie holes requiring repair and other defects whose depth is at least as great as their surface diameter but not over 4 inches shall be repaired by the damp-pack mortar method. Form tie holes shall be reamed and other similar defects shall be cut out to sound concrete. The void shall then be thoroughly cleaned, thoroughly wetted, brush-coated with a thin coat of neat cement grout and filled with mortar. Mortar shall be a stiff mix of 1 part portland cement to 2 parts fine aggregate passing the No. 16 mesh sieve, and minimum amount of water. Only sufficient water shall be used to produce a mortar which, when used, will stick together on being molded into a ball by a slight pressure of the hands and will not exude water but will leave the hands damp. Mortar shall be mixed and allowed to stand for 30 to 45 minutes before use with remixing performed immediately prior to use. Mortar shall be thoroughly tamped in place in thin layers using a hammer and hardwood block. Holes passing entirely through walls shall be completely filled from the inside face by forcing mortar through to the outside face. All holes shall be packed full. Damp-pack repairs shall be Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 28 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
moist cured for at least 48 hours. 3.8.3 Repair of Major Defects
Major defects will be considered to be those more than 1/2 inch deep or, for Class A and B finishes, more than 1/2 inch in diameter and, for Class C and D finishes, more than 2 inches in diameter. Also included are any defects of any kind whose depth is over 4 inches or whose surface diameter is greater than their depth. Major defects shall be repaired as specified below. 3.8.3.1 Surface Application of Mortar Repair
Defective concrete shall be removed, and removal shall extend into completely sound concrete. Approved equipment and procedures which will not cause cracking or microcracking of the sound concrete shall be used. If reinforcement is encountered, concrete shall be removed so as to expose the reinforcement for at least 2 inches on all sides. All such defective areas greater than 12 square inches shall be outlined by saw cuts at least 1 inch deep. Defective areas less than 12 square inches shall be outlined by a 1 inch deep cut with a core drill in lieu of sawing. All saw cuts shall be straight lines in a rectangular pattern in line with the formwork panels. After concrete removal, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by high pressure washing to remove all loose material. Surfaces shall be kept continually saturated for the first 12 of the 24 hours immediately before placing mortar and shall be damp but not wet at the time of commencing mortar placement. The Contractor, at his option, may use either hand-placed mortar or mortar placed with a mortar gun. If hand-placed mortar is used, the edges of the cut shall be perpendicular to the surface of the concrete. The prepared area shall be brush-coated with a thin coat of neat cement grout. The repair shall then be made using a stiff mortar, preshrunk by allowing the mixed mortar to stand for 30 to 45 minutes and then remixed, thoroughly tamped into place in thin layers. If hand-placed mortar is used, the Contractor shall test each repair area for drumminess by firm tapping with a hammer and shall inspect for cracks, both in the presence of the Contracting Officer's representative, immediately before completion of the contract, and shall replace any showing drumminess or cracking. If mortar placed with a mortar gun is used, the gun shall be a small compressed air-operated gun to which the mortar is slowly hand fed and which applies the mortar to the surface as a high-pressure stream, as approved. Repairs made using shotcrete equipment will not be accepted. The mortar used shall be the same mortar as specified for damp-pack mortar repair. If gun-placed mortar is used, the edges of the cut shall be beveled toward the center at a slope of 1:1. All surface applied mortar repairs shall be continuously moist cured for at least 7 days. Moist curing shall consist of several layers of saturated burlap applied to the surface immediately after placement is complete and covered with polyethylene sheeting, all held closely in place by a sheet of plywood or similar material rigidly braced against it. Burlap shall be kept continually wet. 3.8.3.2 Repair of Deep and Large Defects
Deep and large defects will be those that are more than 6 inches deep and also have an average diameter at the surface more than 18 inches or that are otherwise so identified by the Project Office. Such defects shall be repaired as specified herein or directed, except that defects which affect the strength of the structure shall not be repaired and that portion of the structure shall be completely removed and replaced. Deep and large defects Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 29 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
shall be repaired by procedures approved in advance including forming and placing special concrete using applied pressure during hardening. Preparation of the repair area shall be as specified for surface application of mortar. In addition, the top edge (surface) of the repair area shall be sloped at approximately 20 degrees from the horizontal, upward toward the side from which concrete will be placed. The special concrete shall be a concrete mixture with low water content and low slump, and shall be allowed to age 30 to 60 minutes before use. Concrete containing a specified expanding admixture may be used in lieu of the above mixture; the paste portion of such concrete mixture shall be designed to have an expansion between 2.0 and 4.0 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 940. A full width "chimney" shall be provided at the top of the form on the placing side to ensure filling to the top of the opening. A pressure cap shall be used on the concrete in the chimney with simultaneous tightening and revibrating the form during hardening to ensure a tight fit for the repair. The form shall be removed after 24 hours and immediately the chimney shall be carefully chipped away to avoid breaking concrete out of the repair; the surface of the repair concrete shall be dressed as required. 3.8.4 Resinous and Latex Material Repair
In lieu of the portland cement based mortars specified above, an epoxy resin mortar based on epoxy resin or a mortar based on latex bonding agent may be used where approved by the Contracting Officer. 3.9 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES
The finish of all unformed surfaces shall meet the requirements of paragraph Tolerances in PART 1, when tested as specified herein. 3.9.1 General
The ambient temperature of spaces adjacent to unformed surfaces being finished and of the base on which concrete will be placed shall be not less than 50 degrees F. In hot weather all requirements of paragraphs Hot Weather Requirements and Prevention of Plastic Shrinkage Cracking shall be met. Unformed surfaces that are not to be covered by additional concrete or backfill shall have a float finish, with additional finishing as specified below, and shall be true to the elevation shown on the drawings. Surfaces to receive additional concrete or backfill shall be brought to the elevation shown on the drawings, properly consolidated, and left true and regular. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, exterior surfaces shall be sloped for drainage, as directed. Joints shall be carefully made with a jointing or edging tool. The finished surfaces shall be protected from stains or abrasions. Grate tampers or "jitterbugs" shall not be used for any surfaces. The dusting of surfaces with dry cement or other materials or the addition of any water during finishing shall not be permitted. If bleedwater is present prior to finishing, the excess water shall be carefully dragged off or removed by absorption with porous materials such as burlap. During finishing operations, extreme care shall be taken to prevent over finishing or working water into the surface; this can cause "crazing" (surface shrinkage cracks which appear after hardening) of the surface. Any slabs with surfaces which exhibit significant crazing shall be removed and replaced. During finishing operations, surfaces shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge, applied in both directions at regular intervals while the concrete is still plastic, to detect high or low areas.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.9.2
Rough Slab Finish
As a first finishing operation for unformed surfaces and as final finish for slabs to receive thick mortar or grout setting beds, concrete toppings, or concrete pads. The surface shall receive a rough slab finish prepared as follows. The concrete shall be uniformly placed across the slab area, consolidated as previously specified, and then screeded with straightedge strikeoffs immediately after consolidation to bring the surface to the required finish level with no coarse aggregate visible. Side forms and screed rails shall be provided, rigidly supported, and set to exact line and grade. Allowable tolerances for finished surfaces apply only to the hardened concrete, not to forms or screed rails. Forms and screed rails shall be set true to line and grade. "Wet screeds" shall not be used. 3.9.3 Floated Finish
Slabs to receive more than a rough slab finish shall next be given a wood float finish, including surfaces to receive roofing, insulation, waterproofing, thin setting beds or ceramic tile. The screeding shall be followed immediately by darbying or bull floating before bleeding water is present, to bring the surface to a true, even plane. Then, after the concrete has stiffened so that it will withstand a man's weight without imprint of more than 1/4 inch and the water sheen has disappeared, it shall be floated to a true and even plane free of ridges. Floating shall be performed by use of suitable hand floats or power driven equipment. Sufficient pressure shall be used on the floats to bring a film of moisture to the surface. Hand floats shall be made of wood, magnesium, or aluminum. Care shall be taken to prevent over-finishing or incorporating water into the surface. 3.9.4 Troweled Finish
Surfaces to remain exposed or to receive resinous flooring, carpet, resilient flooring, or other floor covering including surface under access flooring shall be given a trowel finish. After floating is complete and after the surface moisture has disappeared, unformed surfaces shall be steel-troweled to a smooth, even, dense finish, free from blemishes including trowel marks. In lieu of hand finishing, an approved power finishing machine may be used in accordance with the directions of the machine manufacturer. Additional trowelings shall be performed, either by hand or machine until the surface has been troweled 2 times, with waiting period between each. Care shall be taken to prevent blistering and if such occurs, troweling shall immediately be stopped and operations and surfaces corrected. A final hard steel troweling shall be done by hand, with the trowel tipped, and using hard pressure, when the surface is at a point that the trowel will produce a ringing sound. The finished surface shall be thoroughly consolidated and shall be essentially free of trowel marks and be uniform in texture and appearance. The concrete mixture used for troweled finished areas shall be adjusted, if necessary, in order to provide sufficient fines (cementitious material and fine sand) to finish properly. 3.9.5 Wood Trowel or Light Broom Finish
Surfaces to receive Fluid Applied Waterproofing shall meet manufacture's requirements for Wood Trowel or Light Broom Finish.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.9.6
Non-Slip Finish
Non-slip floors shall be constructed in accordance with the following subparagraphs. 3.9.6.1 Broomed
Areas as indicated on the drawings shall be given a broomed finish. After floating, the surface shall be lightly steel troweled, and then carefully scored by pulling a coarse fiber push-type broom across the surface. Brooming shall be transverse to traffic or at right angles to the slope of the slab. After the end of the curing period, the surface shall be vigorously broomed with a coarse fiber broom to remove all loose or semi-detached particles. 3.9.7 Polish Concrete Finish
Refer to Specification Section 03 35 13 HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING. 3.10 3.10.1 a. CURING AND PROTECTION General Concrete shall be cured by an approved method for the period of time given below: All concrete b. 7 days
Immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from premature drying, extremes in temperatures, rapid temperature change, mechanical injury and damage from rain and flowing water for the duration of the curing period. Air and forms in contact with concrete shall be maintained at a temperature above 50 degrees F for the first 3 days and at a temperature above 32 degrees F for the remainder of the specified curing period. Exhaust fumes from combustion heating units shall be vented to the outside of the enclosure, and heaters and ducts shall be placed and directed so as not to cause areas of overheating and drying of concrete surfaces or to create fire hazards. Materials and equipment needed for adequate curing and protection shall be available and at the site prior to placing concrete. No fire or excessive heat, including welding, shall be permitted near or in direct contact with the concrete at any time. Except as otherwise permitted by paragraph Membrane Forming Curing Compounds, moist curing shall be provided for any areas to receive any paint or other applied coating, or to which other concrete is to be bonded. Moist Curing Concrete to be moist-cured shall be maintained continuously wet for the entire curing period, commencing immediately after finishing. If water or curing materials used stain or discolor concrete surfaces which are to be permanently exposed, the concrete surfaces shall be cleaned as approved. When wooden forms are left in place during curing, they shall be kept wet at all times. If steel forms are used in hot weather, nonsupporting vertical forms shall be broken loose from the concrete soon after the concrete hardens and curing water continually applied in this void. If the forms are removed before the end of the curing period, curing shall be carried out as on unformed surfaces,
3.10.2 a.
Ft. Detrick, MD
using suitable materials. Surfaces shall be cured by ponding, by continuous sprinkling, by continuously saturated burlap or cotton mats, or by continuously saturated plastic coated burlap. Burlap and mats shall be clean and free from any contamination and shall be completely saturated before being placed on the concrete. The Contractor shall have an approved work system to ensure that moist curing is continuous 24 hours per day. b. The basement mat foundation and walls shall be moist cured. The tunnel mat foundation, walls and cast-in place concrete roof shall be moist cured. Membrane Forming Curing Compounds
3.10.3
Membrane forming curing compounds shall be used only on surfaces where approved by the Contracting Officer. Membrane curing shall not be used on surfaces that are to receive any subsequent treatment depending on adhesion or bonding to the concrete, including surfaces to which other concrete to be bonded. However, a styrene acrylate or chlorinated rubber compound meeting ASTM C 309, Class B requirements, may be used for surfaces which are to be painted or are to receive bituminous roofing or waterproofing, or floors that are to receive adhesive applications of resilient flooring. The curing compound selected shall be compatible with any subsequent paint, roofing, waterproofing or flooring specified. Membrane curing compound shall not be used on surfaces that are maintained at curing temperatures with free steam. Curing compound shall be applied to formed surfaces immediately after the forms are removed and prior to any patching or other surface treatment except the cleaning of loose sand, mortar, and debris from the surface. All surfaces shall be thoroughly moistened with water. Curing compound shall be applied to slab surfaces as soon as the bleeding water has disappeared, with the tops of joints being temporarily sealed to prevent entry of the compound and to prevent moisture loss during the curing period. The curing compound shall be applied in a two-coat continuous operation by approved motorized power-spraying equipment operating at a minimum pressure of 75 psi, at a uniform coverage of not more than 400 square feet/gallon for each coat, and the second coat shall be applied perpendicular to the first coat. Concrete surfaces which have been subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified. Surfaces on which clear compound is used shall be shaded from direct rays of the sun for the first 3 days. Surfaces coated with curing compound shall be kept free of foot and vehicular traffic, and from other sources of abrasion and contamination during the curing period. 3.10.4 Impervious Sheeting
Concrete surfaces may be cured using impervious sheets where approved by the Contracting Officer. However, except for plastic coated burlap, impervious sheeting alone shall not be used for curing. Impervious-sheet curing shall only be used on horizontal or nearly horizontal surfaces. Surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted and be completely covered with the sheeting. Sheeting shall be at least 18 inches wider than the concrete surface to be covered. Covering shall be laid with light-colored side up. Covering shall be lapped not less than 12 inches and securely weighted down or shall be lapped not less than 4 inches and taped to form a continuous cover with completely closed joints. The sheet shall be weighted to prevent displacement so that it remains in contact with the concrete during the specified length of curing. Coverings shall be folded down over exposed edges of slabs and secured by approved means. Sheets shall be Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 33 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
immediately repaired or replaced if tears or holes appear during the curing period. 3.10.5 Ponding or Immersion Water
Concrete shall be continually immersed throughout the curing period. shall not be more than 20 degrees F less than the temperature of the concrete. 3.10.6 Cold Weather Curing and Protection
When the daily ambient low temperature is less than 32 degrees F the temperature of the concrete shall be maintained above 40 degrees F for the first seven days after placing. During the period of protection removal, the air temperature adjacent to the concrete surfaces shall be controlled so that concrete near the surface will not be subjected to a temperature differential of more than 25 degrees F as determined by suitable temperature measuring devices furnished by the Contractor, as required, and installed adjacent to the concrete surface and 2 inches inside the surface of the concrete. The installation of the thermometers shall be made by the Contractor as directed. 3.11 SETTING BASE PLATES AND BEARING PLATES
After being properly positioned, column base plates, bearing plates for beams and similar structural members, and machinery and equipment base plates shall be set to the proper line and elevation with damp-pack bedding mortar, except where nonshrink grout is indicated. The thickness of the mortar or grout shall be as indicated or required. Concrete and metal surfaces in contact with grout shall be clean and free of oil and grease, and concrete surfaces in contact with grout shall be damp and free of laitance when grout is placed. 3.11.1 Damp-Pack Bedding Mortar
Damp-pack bedding mortar shall consist of 1 part cement and 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate having water content such that a mass of mortar tightly squeezed in the hand will retain its shape but will crumble when disturbed. The space between the top of the concrete and bottom of the bearing plate or base shall be packed with the bedding mortar by tamping or ramming with a bar or rod until it is completely filled. 3.11.2 Nonshrink Grout
Nonshrink grout shall be a ready-mixed material requiring only the addition of water. Water content shall be the minimum that will provide a flowable mixture and completely fill the space to be grouted without segregation, bleeding, or reduction of strength. 3.11.2.1 Mixing and Placing of Nonshrink Grout
Mixing and placing shall be in conformance with the material manufacturer's instructions and as specified therein. Ingredients shall be thoroughly dry-mixed before adding water. After adding water, the batch shall be mixed for 3 minutes. Batches shall be of size to allow continuous placement of freshly mixed grout. Grout not used within 30 minutes after mixing shall be discarded. The space between the top of the concrete or machinery-bearing surface and the plate shall be filled solid with the grout. Forms shall be of wood or other equally suitable material for Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 34 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
completely retaining the grout on all sides and on top and shall be removed after the grout has set. The placed grout shall be carefully worked by rodding or other means to eliminate voids; however, overworking and breakdown of the initial set shall be avoided. Grout shall not be retempered or subjected to vibration from any source. Where clearances are unusually small, placement shall be under pressure with a grout pump. Temperature of the grout, and of surfaces receiving the grout, shall be maintained at 65 to 85 degrees F until after setting. 3.12 a. EXPANSION ANCHOR INSTALLATION Expansion anchors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Concrete into which expansion anchors are installed shall have achieved the 28-day design strength. The services of a factory trained technical representative shall be obtained to oversee the initial installation of expansion anchors, and shall certify that the installers are meeting the manufacture's requirements. POST-INSTALLED REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORS USING CHEMICAL/EPOXY ADHESIVE Chemical/Epoxy adhesive shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Reinforcing and anchors indicated on the drawings to be post-installed with chemical/epoxy adhesive shall have the embedment and spacing indicated. Holes shall be hammer drilled into the existing concrete. After drilling is complete, clean hole, install adhesive, and place reinforcing dowel in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not place adhesive if air temperature is outside the allowable range for the adhesive product. Post-installed reinforcement and anchors shall not be substituted for cast-in reinforcement and anchors without prior approval by the AE. Concrete into which reinforcement or anchors are post-installed using chemical/epoxy shall have achieved the 28-day design strength. The services of a factory trained technical representative shall be obtained to oversee the initial installation of post-installed reinforcement and anchors, and shall certify that the installers are meeting the manufacture's requirements. TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
b.
c.
3.13 a.
b.
c.
3.14
The Contractor shall perform the inspection and tests described below and, based upon the results of these inspections and tests, shall take the action required and shall submit specified reports. When, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, the concreting operation is out of control, concrete placement shall cease and the operation shall be corrected. The laboratory performing the tests shall be onsite and shall conform with ASTM C 1077. Materials may be subjected to check testing by the Government from samples obtained at the manufacturer, at transfer points, or at the project site. The Government will inspect the laboratory, equipment, and test procedures prior to start of concreting operations and at least once per month thereafter for conformance with ASTM C 1077.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.14.1 3.14.1.1
Grading and Corrective Action Fine Aggregate
At least once during each shift when the concrete plant is operating, there shall be one sieve analysis and fineness modulus determination in accordance with ASTM C 136 and COE CRD-C 104 for the fine aggregate or for each fine aggregate if it is batched in more than one size or classification. The location at which samples are taken may be selected by the Contractor as the most advantageous for control. However, the Contractor is responsible for delivering fine aggregate to the mixer within specification limits. When the amount passing on any sieve is outside the specification limits, the fine aggregate shall be immediately resampled and retested. If there is another failure on any sieve, the fact shall immediately reported to the Contracting Officer, concreting shall be stopped, and immediate steps taken to correct the grading. 3.14.1.2 Coarse Aggregate
At least once during each shift in which the concrete plant is operating, there shall be a sieve analysis in accordance with ASTM C 136 for each size of coarse aggregate. The location at which samples are taken may be selected by the Contractor as the most advantageous for production control. However, the Contractor shall be responsible for delivering the aggregate to the mixer within specification limits. A test record of samples of aggregate taken at the same locations shall show the results of the current test as well as the average results of the five most recent tests including the current test. The Contractor may adopt limits for control coarser than the specification limits for samples taken other than as delivered to the mixer to allow for degradation during handling. When the amount passing any sieve is outside the specification limits, the coarse aggregate shall be immediately resampled and retested. If the second sample fails on any sieve, that fact shall be reported to the Contracting Officer. Where two consecutive averages of 5 tests are outside specification limits, the operation shall be considered out of control and shall be reported to the Contracting Officer. Concreting shall be stopped and immediate steps shall be taken to correct the grading. 3.14.2 Quality of Aggregates
Thirty days prior to the start of concrete placement, the Contractor shall perform all tests for aggregate quality required by ASTM C 33. In addition, after the start of concrete placement, the Contractor shall perform tests for aggregate quality at least every three months, and when the source of aggregate or aggregate quality changes. Samples tested after the start of concrete placement shall be taken immediately prior to entering the concrete mixer. 3.14.3 Scales, Batching and Recording
The accuracy of the scales shall be checked by test weights prior to start of concrete operations and at least once every three months. Such tests shall also be made as directed whenever there are variations in properties of the fresh concrete that could result from batching errors. Once a week the accuracy of each batching and recording device shall be checked during a weighing operation by noting and recording the required weight, recorded weight, and the actual weight batched. At the same time, the Contractor shall test and ensure that the devices for dispensing admixtures are operating properly and accurately. When either the weighing accuracy or Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 36 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
batching accuracy does not comply with specification requirements, the plant shall not be operated until necessary adjustments or repairs have been made. Discrepancies in recording accuracies shall be corrected immediately. 3.14.4 Batch-Plant Control
The measurement of concrete materials including cementitious materials, each size of aggregate, water, and admixtures shall be continuously controlled. The aggregate weights and amount of added water shall be adjusted as necessary to compensate for free moisture in the aggregates. The amount of air-entraining agent shall be adjusted to control air content within specified limits. A report shall be prepared indicating type and source of cement used, type and source of pozzolan or slag cement used, amount and source of admixtures used, aggregate source, the required aggregate and water weights per cubic yard amount of water as free moisture in each size of aggregate, and the batch aggregate and water weights per cubic yard for each class of concrete batched during each day's plant operation. 3.14.5 a. Concrete Mixture (Except Design Mix CLSM) Air Content Testing. Air content tests shall be made from each truckload of concrete or portion thereof in accordance with ASTM C 231 for normal weight concrete. Test results shall be plotted on control charts which shall at all times be readily available to the Government and shall be submitted weekly. Copies of the current control charts shall be kept in the field by testing crews and results plotted as tests are made. When a single test result reaches either the upper or lower action limit, a second test shall immediately be made. The results of the two tests shall be averaged and this average used as the air content of the batch to plot on both the air content and the control chart for range, and for determining need for any remedial action. The result of each test, or average as noted in the previous sentence, shall be plotted on a separate control chart for each mixture on which an "average line" is set at the midpoint of the specified air content range from paragraph Air Entrainment. An upper warning limit and a lower warning limit line shall be set 1.0 percentage point above and below the average line, respectively. An upper action limit and a lower action limit line shall be set 1.5 percentage points above and below the average line, respectively. The range between each two consecutive tests shall be plotted on a secondary control chart for range where an upper warning limit is set at 2.0 percentage points and an upper action limit is set at 3.0 percentage points. Samples for air content may be taken at the mixer, however, the Contractor is responsible for delivering the concrete to the placement site at the stipulated air content. If the Contractor's materials or transportation methods cause air content loss between the mixer and the placement, correlation samples shall be taken at the placement site as required by the Contracting Officer, and the air content at the mixer controlled as directed. Air Content Corrective Action. Whenever points on the control chart for percent air reach either warning limit, an adjustment shall immediately be made in the amount of air-entraining admixture batched. As soon as practical after each adjustment, another test shall be made to verify the result of the adjustment.
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
Whenever a point on the secondary control chart for range reaches the warning limit, the admixture dispenser shall be recalibrated to ensure that it is operating accurately and with good reproducibility. Whenever a point on either control chart reaches an action limit line, the air content shall be considered out of control and the concreting operation shall immediately be halted until the air content is under control. Additional air content tests shall be made when concreting is restarted. c. Slump Testing. Slump tests shall be made from each truckload of concrete or portion thereof in accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M Test results shall be plotted on control charts which shall at all times be readily available to the Government and shall be submitted weekly. Copies of the current control charts shall be kept in the field by testing crews and results plotted as tests are made. When a single slump test reaches or goes beyond either the upper or lower action limit, a second test shall immediately be made. The results of the two tests shall be averaged and this average used as the slump of the batch to plot on both the control charts for slump and the chart for range, and for determining need for any remedial action. Limits shall be set on separate control charts for slump for each type of mixture. The upper warning limit shall be set at 1/2 inch below the maximum allowable slump specified in paragraph Slump in PART 1 for each type of concrete and an upper action limit line and lower action limit line shall be set at the maximum and minimum allowable slumps, respectively, as specified in the same paragraph. The range between each consecutive slump test for each type of mixture shall be plotted on a single control chart for range on which an upper action limit is set at 2 inches. Samples for slump shall be taken at the mixer. However, the Contractor is responsible for delivering the concrete to the placement site at the stipulated slump. If the Contractor's materials or transportation methods cause slump loss between the mixer and the placement, correlation samples shall be taken at the placement site as required by the Contracting Officer, and the slump at the mixer controlled as directed. Slump Corrective Action. Whenever points on the control charts for slump reach the upper warning limit, an adjustment shall immediately be made in the batch weights of water and fine aggregate. The adjustments are to be made so that the total water content does not exceed that amount allowed by the maximum w/c ratio specified, based on aggregates which are in a saturated surface dry condition. When a single slump reaches the upper or lower action limit, no further concrete shall be delivered to the placing site until proper adjustments have been made. Immediately after each adjustment, another test shall be made to verify the correctness of the adjustment. Whenever two consecutive individual slump tests, made during a period when there was no adjustment of batch weights, produce a point on the control chart for range at or above the upper action limit, the concreting operation shall immediately be halted, and the Contractor shall take appropriate steps to bring the slump under control. Additional slump tests shall be made as directed. Temperature. The temperature of the concrete shall be measured from each truckload of concrete or portion thereof in accordance with ASTM C 1064/C 1064M. Test results shall be plotted on control charts which shall at all times be readily available to
d.
e.
Ft. Detrick, MD
the Government and shall be submitted weekly. Copies of the current control charts shall be kept in the field by testing crews and results plotted as tests are made. The temperature shall also be reported along with the compressive strength data. f. Strength Specimens. At least one set of test specimens shall be made, for compressive strength, on each different concrete mixture placed during the day for each 100 cubic yards or portion thereof of that concrete mixture placed each day. Additional sets of test specimens shall be made, as directed by the Contracting Officer, when the mixture proportions are changed or when low strengths have been detected. A truly random (not haphazard) sampling plan shall be developed by the Contractor and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to the start of construction. The plan shall assure that sampling is done in a completely random and unbiased manner. A set of test specimens for concrete with a 28-day specified strength per paragraph Strength Requirements in PART 1 shall consist of four specimens, two to be tested at 7 days and two at 28 days. Test specimens shall be molded and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M for test cylinders. Results of all strength tests shall be reported immediately to the Contracting Officer. Quality control charts shall be kept for individual strength "tests", ("test" as defined in paragraph Strength Requirements in PART 1) moving average of last 3 "tests" for strength, and moving average for range for the last 3 "tests" for each mixture. The charts shall be similar to those found in ACI 214.3R. Concrete Mixture (Design Mix CLSM only)
3.14.6
Strength Specimen. At least one set of test specimens shall be made for each 50 cubic yards of concrete or portion thereof each day. A set of test specimens for concrete with a 28-day specified compressive strength per paragraph Strength requirements in Part 1 shall consist of four specimens, two to be tested at 7 days and two at 28 days. Test specimens shall be molded and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M for test cylinders or tested in accordance with ASTM C 109/C 109M. Results of all strength tests shall be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer. Quality control charts shall be kept for individual strength "tests". 3.14.7 Inspection Before Placing
Foundations, construction joints, forms, and embedded items shall be inspected by the Contractor in sufficient time prior to each concrete placement in order to certify to the Contracting Officer that they are ready to receive concrete. The results of each inspection shall be reported in writing. 3.14.8 Placing
The placing foreman shall supervise placing operations, shall determine that the correct quality of concrete or grout is placed in each location as specified and as directed by the Contracting Officer, and shall be responsible for measuring and recording concrete temperatures and ambient temperature hourly during placing operations, weather conditions, time of placement, volume placed, and method of placement. The placing foreman shall not permit batching and placing to begin until it has been verified that an adequate number of vibrators in working order and with competent Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 39 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
operators are available. Placing shall not be continued if any pile of concrete is inadequately consolidated. If any batch of concrete fails to meet the temperature requirements, immediate steps shall be taken to improve temperature controls. 3.14.9 Vibrators
The frequency and amplitude of each vibrator shall be determined in accordance with COE CRD-C 521 prior to initial use and at least once a month when concrete is being placed. Additional tests shall be made as directed when a vibrator does not appear to be adequately consolidating the concrete. The frequency shall be determined while the vibrator is operating in concrete with the tachometer being held against the upper end of the vibrator head while almost submerged and just before the vibrator is withdrawn from the concrete. The amplitude shall be determined with the head vibrating in air. Two measurements shall be taken, one near the tip and another near the upper end of the vibrator head, and these results averaged. The make, model, type, and size of the vibrator and frequency and amplitude results shall be reported in writing. Any vibrator not meeting the requirements of paragraph Consolidation, shall be immediately removed from service and repaired or replaced. 3.14.10 a. Curing Inspection Moist Curing Inspections. At least once each shift, and not less than twice per day on both work and non-work days, an inspection shall be made of all areas subject to moist curing. The surface moisture condition shall be noted and recorded. Moist lists shall shall Curing Corrective Action. When a daily inspection report an area of inadequate curing, immediate corrective action be taken, and the required curing period for those areas be extended by 1 day.
b.
c.
Membrane Curing Inspection. No curing compound shall be applied until the Contractor has verified that the compound is properly mixed and ready for spraying. At the end of each operation, the Contractor shall estimate the quantity of compound used by measurement of the container and the area of concrete surface covered, shall compute the rate of coverage in square feet/gallon, and shall note whether or not coverage is uniform. Membrane Curing Corrective Action. When the coverage rate of the curing compound is less than that specified or when the coverage is not uniform, the entire surface shall be sprayed again. Sheet Curing Inspection. At least once each shift and once per day on non-work days, an inspection shall be made of all areas being cured using impervious sheets. The condition of the covering and the tightness of the laps and tapes shall be noted and recorded. Sheet Curing Corrective Action. When a daily inspection report lists any tears, holes, or laps or joints that are not completely closed, the tears and holes shall promptly be repaired or the sheets replaced, the joints closed, and the required curing period for those areas shall be extended by 1 day.
d.
e.
f.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.14.11
Cold-Weather Protection
At least once each shift and once per day on non-work days, an inspection shall be made of all areas subject to cold-weather protection. Any deficiencies shall be noted, corrected, and reported. 3.14.12 a. Mixer Uniformity Stationary Mixers. Prior to the start of concrete placing and once every 6 months when concrete is being placed, or once for every 10,000 cubic yards of concrete placed, whichever results in the shortest time interval, uniformity of concrete mixing shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M. Truck Mixers. Prior to the start of concrete placing and at least once every 6 months when concrete is being placed, uniformity of concrete mixing shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M. The truck mixers shall be selected randomly for testing. When satisfactory performance is found in one truck mixer, the performance of mixers of substantially the same design and condition of the blades may be regarded as satisfactory. Mixer Uniformity Corrective Action. When a mixer fails to meet mixer uniformity requirements, either the mixing time shall be increased, batching sequence changed, batch size reduced, or adjustments shall be made to the mixer until compliance is achieved. Expansion Anchor Testing
b.
c.
3.14.13
Test in accordance with ASTM E 488, a minimum of 5 percent of expansion anchors. Expansion anchors shall be tested to 125 percent of the manufacturer's allowable capacity, but not less than 125 percent of the required capacity where indicated. 3.14.14 Testing of Post-installed Reinforcement and Anchors
Testing of Post-installed Reinforcement and Anchors Using Chemical/Epoxy Adhesive: Test in accordance with ASTM E 488, a minimum of 5 percent of post-installed reinforcement and anchors. Post-installed reinforcement and anchors shall be tested to 125 percent of the manufacturer's allowable capacity, but not less than 125 percent of the required capacity where indicated. 3.14.15 3.14.15.1 Grout Testing Grout Batched Off-Site and Delivered by Truck
Testing/Inspection Agency shall perform compressive strength tests in accordance with ASTM C109/C 109M with 2-inch by 2-inch cubes. Test two cubes at 7 days and two at 28 days. Perform one test for each 10 cubic yards of grout or portion thereof each day. Results of all strength tests shall be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer. Quality control charts shall be kept for individual strength "tests". 3.14.15.2 Grout Batched On-Site and Pre-mixed Grout
Testing/Inspection Agency shall perform compressive strength tests in accordance with ASTM C109/C 109M with 2-inch by 2-inch cubes. Test one Issued for ConstructionSection 03 31 00.00 10 - Page 41 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
cube at three days, two cubes at seven days and three cubes at 28 days. Perform one test for each ten bags of grout used or portion thereof each day. Results of all strength tests shall be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer. Quality control charts shall be kept for individual strength "tests". 3.14.16 Reports
All results of tests or inspections conducted shall be reported informally as they are completed and in writing daily. A weekly report shall be prepared for the updating of control charts covering the entire period from the start of the construction season through the current week. During periods of cold-weather protection, reports of pertinent temperatures shall be made daily. These requirements do not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to report certain failures immediately as required in preceding paragraphs. Such reports of failures and the action taken shall be confirmed in writing in the routine reports. The Engineer of Record and Contracting Officer has the right to examine all contractor quality control records. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 03 31 05 HIGH CONTAINMENT CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCE SPECIFICATION
Concrete shown on and described on drawings S1.22H, S1.23 H, S1.32H, and S1.33H are in the high containment environment and shall conform to the requirements of Specification Section 03 31 00.00.10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE except as modified in this Section 03 31 05. 1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI) ACI 117 (2006) Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials (1991; R 2002) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete (12007) Causes, Evaluation, and Repair of Cracks in Concrete Structures (2005) Specifications for Structural Concrete (1990; R 2002) Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting (1988; R 2002) Cold Weather Concreting (1993; R 1998) Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) AASHTO M 182 (2005) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats
ACI 211.1
ACI 224.1R
ACI 301
ACI 306.1
ACI 306R ACI 503R
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 143/C 143M (2005a) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete (2007) Standard Specification for Portland Section 03 31 05 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
ASTM C 150 Issued for Construction 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
Cement ASTM C 157/C 157M (2006) Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete (2007) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory (2004) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method (2003) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates (2005e1) Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens (2005a) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete (2005) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete (2006) Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars
ASTM C 192/C 192M
ASTM C 231
ASTM C 33
ASTM C 39/C 39M
ASTM C 494/C 494M
ASTM C 618
ASTM C 989
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Mixture Proportions; G, AE The results of trial mixture design studies for each class of concrete at least 28 days prior to commencing concrete placement for the containment environment mock-up. Concrete mixture design submittal shall include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Type and quantities for each mix constituent Water-cement ratio Design compressive strength Slump Air Content Fresh Unit Weight Aggregate type Aggregate sieve analysis Method of placement in structure Location of placement in structure (i.e. columns, slabs, and/or Section 03 31 05 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
k. l. m.
walls) Compressive strength results indicating compliance with specified f'cr Length of change results indicating compliance with specified limit Graph of percent length of change readings (ASTM C157) versus time with readings taken at 1 day, 7 days, 14 days, and 28 days during the curing period and 4 day, 7 days, and every 7 days thereafter until the age of the specimen is 90 days after removal from the water bath. Burlap and Cotton Mat; G, AE Moist Curing Plan and Procedures; G, AE Submit procedures and quality assurance plan to be used for moist curing concrete. Procedure shall include considerations for hot and cold weather concreting.
SD-04 Samples Field Test Mock-ups 1.4 FIELD TEST MOCK-UPS
Field test panels for demonstrating finish and workmanship of concrete with the containment environment shall be constructed prior to beginning of work using the materials and procedures proposed for use on the job, to demonstrate the results to be attained. The quality and appearance of each panel shall be subject to the approval of the AE and Contracting Officer, and, if not judged satisfactory, additional panels shall be constructed until approval is attained. Formed or finished surfaces in the completed structure shall match the quality and appearance of the approved field example. 1.4.1 a. Mock-Up Description Construct concrete walls that includes the floor and roof slab substantiating each selected concrete mix design and method of placement while demonstrating a Class A formed and finish. See drawing A5.993 for layout and additional requirements. Mock-up shall be constructed on an engineered foundation. Concrete mix design successfully utilized in the mock-up shall become the approved mix for use in the Containment Environment. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Tolerances
b.
1.5 1.5.1
Except as otherwise specified herein, tolerances for concrete batching, mixture properties, and construction as well as definition of terms and application practices shall be in accordance with ACI 117. Level and grade tolerance measurements of slabs shall be made as soon as possible after finishing; when forms or shoring are used, the measurements shall be made prior to removal.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.5.1.1
Floors
For the purpose of this Section levelness tolerances shall not apply to areas where design requires floors to be sloped to drains or sloped for other reasons. 1.5.1.2 Floors By The F-number System
Floors part of the containment environment shall meet the tolerances that correspond to F numbers FF25/FL20 (overall). All local F numbers must meet the overall requirements. Floors not meeting this requirement shall be repaired by a method approved by the Contracting Officer. 1.5.2 1.5.2.1 Strength Requirements and w/c Ratio Strength Requirements
Specified compressive strength (f'c) for the high containment environment shall be 5,000 psi. 1.5.2.2 Water-Cement Ratio
Maximum water-cement ratio (w/c) for normal weight concrete shall be 0.40 (by weight). 1.5.3 Air Entrainment
All normal weight concrete shall be air entrained to contain between 2.5 and 5.5 percent total air. Specified air content shall be attained at point of placement into the forms. Air content for normal weight concrete shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 231. 1.5.4 a. Slump Slump of the concrete, as delivered to the point of placement into the forms, shall be within the following limits. Slump shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M. Slump Structural Element _________________________ Minimum _______ Maximum _______ 4 in.
Walls, columns and beams 2 in. Prior to addition of water reducing admixture b.
A high range water reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C 494/C 494M shall be used to increase the slump of concrete, concrete shall have a slump of 2 to 4 inches before the admixture is added and a maximum slump of 8 inches at the point of delivery after the admixture is added. Fresh unit weight of concrete
1.5.5
Normal weight concrete shall have a fresh unit weight of 143 to 152 pounds per cubic foot. 1.6 MIXTURE PROPORTIONS
Concrete shall be composed of portland cement, other cementitious and pozzolanic materials as specified, aggregates, water and admixtures as Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 03 31 05 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
specified. 1.6.1 Proportioning Studies for Containment Environment Concrete
Trial design batches and mixture proportioning studies used as a basis for developing the concrete mix designs for the containment environment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Establish mixture proportions in accordance with ACI 211.1, the recommendations of ACI 224.1R for selecting mixture proportions to minimize the shrinkage behavior of concrete, and the requirements of this specification. Test specimens of the selected mixture proportions shall be fabricated and tested for compressive strength and shrinkage behavior to demonstrate the proposed mixture complies with this specification. Compressive strength specimens shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M. Test specimens for concrete shrinkage behavior fabricated and tested in accordance with ASTM C 157/C 157M. Samples of all materials used in the proposed mix designs shall be representative of those proposed for use in the project and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's or producer's test reports indicating compliance with these specifications. If either pozzolan or slag cement is used in the concrete mixture, the maximum pozzolan content shall not exceed 20 percent or the maximum slag cement content shall not exceed 25 percent. If pozzolans and slag cement are both used, the total percent cement replacement shall not exceed 35 percent. The maximum water-cement ratios required in subparagraph Water-Cement Ratio will be the equivalent water-cement ratio as determined by conversion from the weight ratio of water to cement plus pozzolan and slag cement by the weight equivalency method as described in ACI 211.1. Laboratory trial mixtures shall be designed for maximum permitted slump and air content. Separate trial mixture studies shall also be made for concrete for any conveying or placing method proposed which requires special properties and for concrete to be placed in unusually difficult placing locations. The temperature of concrete in each trial batch shall be reported. Each mixture shall be designed to promote easy and suitable concrete placement, consolidation and finishing, and to prevent segregation and excessive bleeding. 1.6.2 Average Compressive Strength Required for Mixtures
The mixture proportions selected during mixture design studies shall produce a required average compressive strength (f'cr) exceeding the specified compressive strength (f'c) by the amount indicated below. This required average compressive strength (f'cr) will not be a required acceptance criterion during concrete production. f'cr = f'c + 1,200 psi. 1.6.3 Length of Change (Shrinkage) Limit Required for Mixtures
The mixture proportions selected during the mix designs studies shall have a length of change (shrinkage) limit of 0.035 percent at 90 days once test specimens are removed from the water bath. Shrinkage limit shall be used as basis for concrete mix proportions but will not be a required acceptance during concrete production. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
Cementitious Materials shall be portland cement, and may include slag Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 03 31 05 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
cement or fly ash and shall conform to appropriate specifications listed below. Use of cementitious materials in concrete which will have surfaces exposed in the completed structure shall be restricted so there is no change in color, source, or type of cementitious material. 2.1.1 Portland Cement
ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. 2.1.2 High-Early Strength Portland Cement
ASTM C 150, Type III shall not be used. 2.1.3 Pozzolan (Fly Ash)
Pozzolan shall conform to ASTM C 618, Class F, including drying shrinkage requirements in Table 3 of ASTM C 618. The Contractor shall comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS. 2.1.4 Slag Cement
ASTM C 989, Grade 120. 2.2 AGGREGATES
Fine and coarse aggregates shall conform to the following. 2.2.1 Fine Aggregate Manufactured
Fine aggregate shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 33. sands shall not be used. 2.2.2 Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 33 and shall consist of hard, rigid aggregate, such as dolomite, granite, or quartz, that can be classified as low shrinkage producing aggregates.. 2.2.3 Combined Aggregate Grading
Combined gradation for the percent retained on each sieve shall comply with the following: a. Percent retained on the top sized sieve shall be between 0 and 4 percent. Percent retained on the No. 100 sieve shall be between 1.5 and 5 percent. Percent retained for each sieve between the top size sieve and above the No. 100 sieve shall be between 8 and 18 percent. CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
b.
c.
2.3
Chemical admixtures, when required or permitted, shall conform to the appropriate specification listed. Admixtures shall be furnished in liquid form and of suitable concentration for easy, accurate control of dispensing.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.3.1
Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixture
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A, B, or D. 2.3.2 High-Range Water Reducer
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F or G. The admixture shall be used only when approved in writing, such approval being contingent upon particular mixture control as described in the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and upon performance of separate mixture design studies. 2.3.3 Shrinkage Reducing Admixture
Chemical admixtures for use in reducing drying shrinkage of concrete shall be used in all High Containment concrete mix designs. Dosage shall be 2 percent by weight of the total cementitious material content. This admixture volume shall be considered to replace an equal volume of water. 2.4 2.4.1 CURING MATERIALS Membrane-Forming Compound
Membrane-Forming curing compound shall not be used. 2.4.2 Burlap and Cotton Mat
Burlap and cotton mat used for curing shall conform to AASHTO M 182. 2.5 WATER
Water for mixing and curing shall be fresh, clean, potable, and free of injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, or alkali. Concrete mix designs shall have maximum water content of 275 pound per cubic foot. Water content shall be defined as the mixing water for the mix plus the amount of absorbed water by the coarse and fine aggregate. 2.6 NONSHRINK GROUT
Grout shall be prepackaged, non-metallic, and non-gaseous. It shall be non-shrink when tested in accordance with ASTM-C1107 Grade B or C at a fluid consistency (flow cone) of 20 to 30 seconds. Thirty-minute-old grout shall flow through the flow cone after slight agitation, in temperatures of 40 degrees F to 90 degrees F. Grout shall be bleed free and attain 5,000 psi compressive strength in 28 days at fluid consistency. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION TRANSPORTING CONCRETE TO PROJECT SITE
Concrete shall be transported to the placing site in truck mixers. Agitators shall not be used. 3.2 PLACING CONCRETE
Mixed concrete shall be discharged within 1-1/2 hours or before the mixer drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates. When the concrete temperature exceeds 85 degrees F, the time shall be reduced to 45 minutes. Concrete shall be placed within 15 minutes after it has been Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 03 31 05 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
discharged from the transporting unit. Concrete shall be handled from mixer or transporting unit to forms in a continuous manner until the approved unit of operation is completed. Adequate scaffolding, ramps and walkways shall be provided so that personnel and equipment are not supported by in-place reinforcement. Placing will not be permitted when the sun, heat, wind, or limitations of facilities furnished by the Contractor prevent proper consolidation, finishing and curing. Sufficient placing capacity shall be provided so that concrete can be kept free of cold joints. 3.2.1 Cold Weather Requirements
Special protection measures, in accordance with ACI 306R and ACI 306.1, shall be used if freezing temperatures are anticipated before the expiration of the specified curing period. The ambient temperature of the air where concrete is to be placed and the temperature of surfaces to receive concrete shall be not less than 40 degrees F. The temperature of the concrete when placed shall be not less than 50 degrees F nor more than 75 degrees F. Heating of the mixing water or aggregates will be required to regulate the concrete placing temperature. Materials entering the mixer shall be free from ice, snow, or frozen lumps. Salt, chemicals or other materials shall not be incorporated in the concrete to prevent freezing. Calcium chloride shall not be used. Accelerating admixtures shall not be used. 3.3 JOINTS
Joints shall be located and constructed as indicated or approved. Joints not indicated on the drawings shall be located and constructed to minimize the impact on the strength of the structure. In general, such joints shall be located near the middle of the spans of supported slabs, beams, and girders unless a beam intersects a girder at this point, in which case the joint in the girder shall be offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam. Joints in walls and columns shall be at the underside of floors, slabs, beams, or girders and at the tops of footings or floor slabs, unless otherwise approved. Joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement. All reinforcement shall be continued across joints; except that reinforcement or other fixed metal items shall not be continuous through expansion joints, or through construction or contraction. Reinforcement shall be 1 inch clear from each joint. 3.3.1 Construction Joints
Concrete shall be placed continuously so that each unit is monolithic in construction. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against adjacent hardened concrete until it is at least 24 hours old. Construction joints shall be located as indicated or approved. Where concrete work is interrupted by weather, end of work shift or other similar type of delay, location and type of construction joint shall be subject to approval of the Contracting Officer. Unless otherwise indicated, reinforcing steel shall extend through construction joints. Concrete columns, walls, or piers shall be in place at least 2 hours, or until the concrete begins to lose its plasticity, before placing concrete for beams, girders, or slabs thereon. Lifts shall terminate at such levels as to conform to structural requirements or architectural details. Prior to placing additional concrete, horizontal construction joints shall be prepared as specified in paragraph Previously Placed Concrete.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.3.2
Dowels and Tie Bars
Dowels and tie bars shall be installed at the locations shown on the drawings and to the details shown, using materials and procedures specified in Section 03 20 01.00 10 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT and herein. "Structural" type deformed bar dowels, or tie bars, shall be installed to meet the specified tolerances. Care shall be taken during placing adjacent to and around dowels and tie bars to ensure there is no displacement of the dowel or tie bar and that the concrete completely embeds the dowel or tie bar and is thoroughly consolidated. 3.4 3.4.1 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES Class A Finish and Class B Finish
Class A finish is required for all concrete wall surfaces and the underside of formed concrete slab defined as part of the containment environment. Class B finish is required for all other concrete surfaces in the containment environment. All exposed concrete elements within the containment environment shall have a smooth-form finish as defined by ACI 301. Surface defects not meeting the approved mock-up finish shall be repaired. 3.5 3.5.1 a. REPAIRS Repair to Defective Concrete Substrates Perform remedial work on defective concrete substrates prior to preparations for installation coatings described in Section 09 67 00 FLUID APPLIED FLOORING and Section 09 97 00 SPECIAL COATINGS. Perform remedial work on one mock-up area each for floors and walls and gain acceptance of materials and installation methods prior to proceeding with full scope of remedial work. Mechanically remove delaminated or deteriorated concrete by scabbing or chipping hammers. Saw cut areas to be patched to minimum 1/2 inch deep at perimeters and key to existing concrete, unless otherwise specified by fluid-applied flooring and special coating manufacturers' written recommendations. Use cementitious non-shrink grout for repairs to concrete resulting in patch over 3/8 inch thick. For patches less than 3/8 inch thick use manufacturer-approved bonding agent and crack filler. Do not use a latex style bonding agent. Patched concrete shall have tensile strength characteristics same as adjacent acceptable concrete. Perform test as described in ACI 503R Appendix A.1 to demonstrate tensile strength characteristics. Acceptable result shall be failure in the concrete substrate (cohesive concrete failure) or minimum of 300 psi. After acceptance has been given, proceed with remedial work. Repairs shall be tested by sounding method performed by installer in the presence of AE and Contractor. Unsatisfactory results shall require further testing with methods used during mock-up approval. Testing and further repair required shall be at no additional cost to the Contract.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.6 3.6.1
CURING AND PROTECTION General
Concrete shall be moist cured by an approved method for a period of 7 days. 3.6.2 Moist Curing
High Containment Concrete shall be moist-cured and shall be maintained continuously wet for the entire curing period, commencing immediately after finishing. If water or curing materials used stain or discolor concrete surfaces which are to be permanently exposed, the concrete surfaces shall be cleaned as approved. When wooden forms are left in place during curing, they shall be kept wet at all times. If steel forms are used in hot weather, nonsupporting vertical forms shall be broken loose from the concrete soon after the concrete hardens and curing water continually applied in this void. If the forms are removed before the end of the curing period, curing shall be carried out as on unformed surfaces, using suitable materials. Surfaces shall be cured by ponding, by continuous sprinkling, by continuously saturated burlap or cotton mats, or by continuously saturated plastic coated burlap. Burlap and mats shall be clean and free from any contamination and shall be completely saturated before being placed on the concrete. Overlap adjacent burlap and mats 12 inches minimum. The Contractor shall have an approved work system to ensure that moist curing is continuous 24 hours per day. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 03 35 13 HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 1050 (1991) Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene-Cellulosic Fiber Composite Roof Insulation (1996; R 2001) Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness Numbers
ASTM E 1155
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Polishing Materials and Equipment; G, AE Product data for each grinding machine, including all types of grinding heads, dust extraction system, joint filler, concrete densifying impregnator, penetrating sealer, and any other chemicals used in the process. SD-04 Samples Polished concrete; G, AE Size: 12 by 12 inches, for each polished concrete finish required Mock-ups SD-07 Certificates Certified Applicators Applicators qualification data. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Polished concrete Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 03 35 13 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Maintenance procedures 1.3 SECTION INCLUDES
Polished concrete finish for interior concrete flatwork. 1.4 1.4.1 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Certified Applicators Installer/applicator shall be certified by concrete finish equipment and chemical manufacturer and shall provide adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary craft. Manufacturers Certification: Provide a letter of certification from both the equipment and chemical manufacturer stating that the installer is a certified applicator and is familiar with proper procedures and installation requirements recommended by the manufacturer. Pre Installation Conference
B.
1.4.2
Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 01. 1.4.3 A. Mock-ups General Contractor to notify applicator 7 days prior to pour to schedule finish of mockup. Reserve 100 square feet for each color and finish at location adjacent to floor that will receive polish, but will be covered with another flooring material. Mock-up floor shall be placed on the same day, preferably the same pour as the floors to receive polish. Install mock-ups to verify selections made under sample submittal and to demonstrate methods and workmanship proposed for the project. If mock-up not possible, submitted samples will be accepted as demonstrated methods & workmanship. Aggregate selected must be tested to ensure it will accept polish. If stand alone mockup required, form should be clean and free from extraneous substance and be at least a 12 feet by 12 feet with a level plywood bottom on level ground with unobstructed access around all four sides. Control joints should be included in mock-up. Sawing performed by General Contractor can begin as soon as the surface is firm enough not to displace any of the aggregate. Edges should be included in mock-up. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of substantial completion.
B.
C.
D. E.
F.
G. H.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.4.4
Protection
General Contractor shall protect areas to receive polished concrete finish at all times during construction to prevent oils, dirt, metal, excessive water and other potentially damaging materials from affecting the finished concrete surface. Protection measures listed below shall begin immediately after the concrete slab is poured: A. Hydraulic powered equipment shall be diapered to avoid staining of the concrete. No pipe cutting machine shall be used on the finish floor slab. Steel shall not be placed on the finish slab to avoid rusting. Acids and acidic detergents will not come in contact with slab. Painters will use drop cloths on the concrete. concrete, it must be immediately removed. If paint gets on the
B. C. D. E.
F. 1.4.5 A.
Trades will be informed that the slab must be protected at all times. Environmental Limitations Comply with manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation and other conditions affecting chemical performance. Flatness and levelness 1. Finish Concrete shall have a minimum Floor Flatness rating of at least 40. Finish Concrete shall have a minimum Floor Levelness rating of at least 30. Finish Concrete shall be cured a minimum of 28 days or at which point equipment can be put on the slab and does not displace aggregate.
B.
2.
3.
C.
Finish Concrete area shall be closed to traffic during finish floor application and after application, for the time as recommended by manufacturer. Concrete Mix Design Concrete
1.4.6
Follow Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. Mixture shall be 3500 PSI or higher, non air entrained. A.
Any admixtures, plasticizers, slag, fly ash or anything taking the place of Portland-based cement shall be kept to a minimum. The cement shall be Portland Cement Type I, conforming to ASTM C 1050. Wet cures are most suitable, but if this cannot be achieved, use a penetrating, dissipating or wax based cure and seal. Do not use a denisifier/hardener material due to the grinding of the floor after 6 days.
B. C.
Ft. Detrick, MD
D.
Mix designs must be approved by Architect. Send all approved mix designs to Applicator. The Engineer/Architect shall determine the saw cut patterns, color and layout. Color loads for integral color should never be smaller than 3 cubic yards. Use on source for cement, aggregates and pozzolans throughout the job. Monitor and control incoming material consistency. Do not use calcium chloride-based admixtures. Non-chloride admixtures may be used. Wash out all drums before loading. Keep slumps consistent with a maximum of 4. Minimize driver added water maintaining a .45 water content ratio. Place concrete to achieve as true and smooth a top surface as possible. Mounds, or dips are not acceptable. GC shall control overall flatness and levelness, including on sloping areas to within tolerances permitted by specification ASTM E 1155. Slab shall be protected from indention and footprints during pour and curing. PRODUCTS DESIGN STANDARD
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
PART 2 2.1
HTC LLC; Super floor. 2.2 A. B. POLISHING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Three-phase 480 Volt generator and step down transformer. 3 head or 4 head counter rotating variable speed HTC Superfloor Approved Floor Grinder with at least 600 pounds down pressure. For example: HTC 2500IX, HTC 950RX or HTC 800 HD. HTC Superfloor Dust extraction system, pre-sep arator, and squeegee attachments with minimum flow rating of 322 cubic feet per minute such as the HTC 75D or HTC 86D. Grinding Heads: 1. 2. HTC Superfloor Metal bonded 16, 25, 40, 80, 15 0 and/or 300 grits. HTC Superfloor Resin bonded, phenolic diamonds, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1500 and 3000 grits.
C.
D.
E.
Grinding Pads for Edges 1. 2. 40, 60, and 120 grits. 100, 200,400, 800, 1500 and 3000 grits.
F. G.
Hand Grinder with dust extraction attachment and pads. Euco-sil: Penetrating Liquid Sealer Hardener Densifying Impregnator or Section 03 35 13 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
as specified by construction manager with the following performance criteria: chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless which hardens and densifies concrete surfaces to protect against abrasion, dusting, and absorption of liquids. H. Control Joint and Saw Cut Filler, two part filler or polyurea as specified by construction manager. A ready to use, penetrating, dye or reactive stain that chemically combines with cured concrete to produce permanent, variegated or translucent color effects or a hydrolyzed, lithium quartz or silicate compound, that works by penetrating and reacting with mineral compounds and/or siliceous materials to create a translucent or marbled color effects. EXECUTION PREPARATION Installer shall examine and approve concrete substrate for conditions affecting performance of finish. General Contractor shall correct conditions that are found to be out of compliance with the requirements of this section. Repairs are not acceptable unless specifically approved on a case-by-case basis by the Architect. Verify that base slab meet finish and surface profile requirements listed in Division 3, Section Cast in Place Concrete. Provide floor clean of materials and debris. Protect adjacent surfaces as required to prevent damage by the concrete polishing procedure. Setup grinding machine, dust extraction system, tooling, and generator. Ensure floor cured to accept polishing application. POLISHED CONCRETE APPLICATION Applicator shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be provided and the General Contractor shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work and the Applicator shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Grind the concrete floor to within 2 -3 inches of walls with 16, 25, 40 and 80 grit removing construction debris, floor slab imperfections and until there is a uniform scratch pattern and desired concrete aggregate exposure is achieved. Vacuum the floor thoroughly using a squeegee vacuum attachment. Apply material approved by architect for color effects in accordance with the architectural drawings and the manufacturers recommended guidelines. Fill construction joints and cracks with filler products as specified in accordance with manufacturers instructions colored to match (or contrast) with concrete color as specified by architect. Section 03 35 13 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
I.
PART 3 3.1 A.
B.
C. D.
E. F. 3.2 A.
B.
C.
D.
Ft. Detrick, MD
E.
Apply densifying impregnator undiluted at approximately 200 square feet per gallon using a stiff, long bristled broom. Cover the entire work area liberally and allow to sit for 10 minutes. Apply again to areas where the densifying impregnator has soaked in and allow to sit for an additional 30 minutes. Squeegee excess material off the floor. Allow 12 to 24 hours for full cure. Grind the floor to within 2 - 3 inches of walls with metal bonded diamond grits of 150 and/or 300, grinding 90 degrees from each previous grind and removing all the scratches from the previous grit. Vacuum the floor thoroughly after each grind, using a squeegee vacuum attachment. Grind the edges with 40, 60 and 120 grit grinding pads, removing all of the scratches from the previous grit. Vacuum the floor thoroughly after each grind, using a squeegee vacuum attachment. Polish the floor, to desired sheen level, with phenolic resin bonded diamond grits of 100, 200, 400, 800, 1500 and 3000, first polishing the edges with pads of the same grit and then the field of the floor, removing all scratches from the previous grit. After each polish, clean the floor thoroughly using clean water and an autoscrubber or a mop and a wet vacuum. Upon completion, the work shall be ready for final inspection and acceptance by the Government. PROTECTION
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.3
Protect the floors from damage until beneficial occupancy. 3.4 3.4.1 SCHEDULES SHEEN
Polished Concrete Level 2: At a distance of 30 to 50 feet, the floor will clearly reflect from side and overhead lighting. 3.4.2 EDGES
Polished 3.4.3 A. B. TRANSITIONS Refer to Section 04 43 30 - Cut Stone for specified transition devices. Refer to Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring for specified transition devices. Refer to Section 09 67 00 - Fluid-applied Flooring for specified transition devices. Refer to Section 09 68 00 - Carpet for specified transition devices. -- End of Section --
C.
D.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 03 41 33.00 10 PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE FLOOR AND ROOF UNITS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI) ACI 211.1 (1991; R 2002) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete (2005; Errata 2005) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary
ACI 318/318R
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2006; Errata 2006) Structural Welding Code - Steel
PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE (PCI) PCI MNL-116 (1999) manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products (2004) Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete
PCI MNL-120
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Precast/Prestressed Units; G, AE Detail drawings shall consist of erection instructions and the following as applicable: a. b. design. Anchorage for work of other trades. Anchorage to supporting construction, if required by the
Ft. Detrick, MD
c. Headers for openings where additional structural work is required. d. Joints between units and between units and other construction. e. f. Reinforcing including prestressing steel details. Pick-up points for handling units.
g. Minimum concrete compressive strengths at initial prestress and 28 days, initial prestress to be applied, and minimum release strength. h. Shoring, unless structural computations are submitted showing that allowable concrete stresses during the work will not be exceeded when shoring is not used. i. Layout plan and member identification marks.
SD-03 Product Data Precast/Prestressed Units Complete design analysis and load charts signed by a professional engineer and in booklet form for the units to be furnished. Analysis shall include mixture proportion; concrete strength; stress calculations; complete camber calculation showing initial camber, estimated long term camber, and anticipated long term camber and deflection. Design analysis shall indicate which code the design was based on. SD-05 Design Data Calculations; G, AE Mix Design; G, AR SD-06 Test Reports Tests Laboratory test reports Mill tests Test data Certified copies of test reports including all data and results of tests performed as required by PCI MNL-116. Fire Resistance Rating Provide UL assembly number and data for each fire resistance rating. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Precast/prestressed units shall be produced under plant-controlled conditions conforming to PCI MNL-116 by a firm certified under the PCI Plant Certification Program and specializing in providing precast/prestressed concrete floor and roof units and related services.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.4 1.4.1
DESIGN Standards and Loads
Design of units shall be performed by structural analysis in accordance with ACI 318/318R or PCI MNL-120 whichever is customary with the fabricator. Structural analysis shall include evaluations of the effects of connections, holes, discontinuities, concentrated loads, and joints. Units shall be designed to support a 20 psf live load, a 15 psf collateral load and the unit self weight, for fire rating, and spans indicated and any additional loads imposed by openings; work of other trades; and all loading and restraining conditions from fabrication, handling, and erection. The sum of the immediate deflection due to live load and additional long-term deflection shall not exceed the span/240. Live load deflection shall not exceed the span/360. 1.4.2 Fire Resistance Rating
1-hour when supported by 1-hour rated partition. 2-hour when supported by 2-hour rated partition. 1.4.3 Grout Keys
Grout keys shall be capable of transmitting horizontal shear of 2000 pounds per foot. 1.4.4 Concrete Strength
Precast concrete units shall have a 28-day compressive strength of 5000 psi. 1.4.5 Concrete Proportion
Selection of proportions for concrete shall be based on the methodology presented in ACI 211.1 for normal weight concrete. The concrete proportion shall be developed using the same type and brand of cement, the same type and gradation of aggregates, and the same type and brand of admixture that will be used in the manufacture of precast concrete units for the project. Calcium chloride shall not be used in precast concrete and admixtures containing chloride ions, nitrates, or other substances that are corrosive shall not be used in prestressed concrete. 1.4.6 Calculations
Calculations for design of members and connections not shown shall be made by a professional engineer experienced in the design of precast architectural concrete. Calculation shall include the analysis of member for lifting stresses and the sizing of the lifting inserts. 1.4.7 Mix Design
The Contractor shall submit the mix design formula giving the maximum nominal coarse aggregate size, the proportions of all ingredients and the type and amount of any admixtures that will be used in the manufacture of each strength and type of concrete, prior to commencing operations. Submit certified copies of laboratory test reports, including mill tests and all other test data, for portland cement, pozzolan, slag cement, aggregates and alkali-aggregate reactivity. The statement shall be accompanied by test results from an approved testing laboratory, certifying that the proportions selected will produce concrete of the properties required. No Issued for Construction Section 03 41 33.00 10 - Page 3 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
substitutions shall be made without additional tests to verify that the concrete properties are satisfactory. 1.5 HANDLING AND STORAGE
Units shall be cured prior to delivery to the jobsite. Units shall be stored off the ground and protected from soilage, marring, damage, or overload. Stacked members shall be separated by battens across the full width at bearing points. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS FABRICATION
Fabrication of the units shall be in accordance with the requirements of PCI MNL-116. Units shall be made available for inspection by the Contracting Officer at the manufacturer's plant. Shape of units shall be hollow-core slabs as indicated. Unit spans shall be as shown. Units shall be fabricated within the dimensional tolerances given in PCI MNL-116. Inserts, anchor bolts, bearing plates, and other embedded items shall be located as required or indicated. Where required, units shall be marked to facilitate sequential erection. Openings for mechanical and utility systems and for architectural purpose shall be as shown. Prestressing eccentricity and force applied shall be adjusted to the extent possible so that the camber provided is the minimum amount needed to produce an approximate level slab after dead loads are applied. Surfaces that will be concealed from view shall be free of surface holes over 1/2 inch in diameter. Surfaces to receive subsequent applications other than painting shall be suitable for the purpose intended and free of any coatings that would interfere with adhesion or bond. Surfaces that will be painted or exposed to view shall be smooth, free of form marks, and shall have surface blemishes filled and finished to match adjoining concrete in color and texture. 2.2 TESTS
Tests, as required by PCI MNL-116, shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory or in the manufacturer's approved laboratory if the manufacturer has a PCI certified plant with proof of current certification. 2.3 Grout
Grout requirements as specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. 2.4 Aggregates
Fine and course aggregates shall be tested for alkali-aggregate reactivity as specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION ERECTION
Erection shall be in accordance with the approved detail drawings. Field welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Installation of equipment required by other trades shall be accomplished as the work progresses if required by design. Field-cut openings for utilities penetrations will not be permitted unless recommended by the manufacturer Issued for Construction Section 03 41 33.00 10 - Page 4 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
and approved by the Engineer of Record (AE) and Contracting Officer. Bearing surfaces shall be level and free from irregularities. Units shall be installed at right angles to bearings, drawn up tight without forcing or distortion, and with sides plumb. Slab ends shall be aligned. Underside of slabs shall present true ceiling surface when the ceiling is exposed to view. Keyways between units and other spaces shall be cleaned and filled solid with grout. Grout that may have seeped through to surfaces in spaces below shall be removed before hardening. 3.2 a. b. c. Tolerances Maximum Variation from Plane or Location: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. Maximum Out-of-square: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Two Adjacent Members: 1/4 inch. Maximum Variation From Dimensions Indicated on Shop Drawings: minus 1/8 inch. Maximum Misalignment of Anchors, Inserts, Openings: 1/8 inch. plus or
d.
e. 3.3
SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS
Special inspections for components shall be done in accordance with Section 01 45 35 SPECIAL INSPECTION. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 03 45 01.00 10 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI) ACI 211.1 (1991; R 2002) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete (2005) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary (2004) ACI Detailing Manual
ACI 318
ACI SP-66
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 1017/C 1017M (2003) Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete (2007) Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation (2007) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method) (2004) Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method) (2005a) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete (2007a) Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction
ASTM C 1077
ASTM C 1260
ASTM C 1567
ASTM C 494/C 494M
ASTM E 329
Ft. Detrick, MD
PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE (PCI) PCI MNL-117 (1996) Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products (2004) Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete (1989) Architectural Precast Concrete
PCI MNL-120
PCI MNL-122 1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Erection; G, AE Detail drawings showing details in accordance with ACI SP-66 and ACI 318, including installation details. Detail drawings shall indicate separate identification marks for each different precast unit, location of units in the work, elevations, fabrication details, welding details, reinforcement, connections, dimensions, interface with adjacent members, blocking points for units stored at the precast concrete plant or at the jobsite, lifting points and special handling instructions in sufficient detail to cover manufacture, handling, and erection. SD-04 Samples Precast Concrete Units; G, AE Three 12 by 12 by 2 inch samples of each type of precast unit finish required for the project. Submitted samples shall show matrix color, surface color, surface texture, color range and panel back finish. Following approval of the above samples the full size mockups shall be manufactured. Mock-up; G, AE Full-size mock-ups (minimum 4'-0" by 8'-0"), maintained at the precast concrete manufacturer's plant until approval by the Contracting Officer. Upon Contracting Officer approval one set of mock-up units shall be moved to the project site and another set shall remain at plant for quality control purposes. The mock-ups shall be used to establish quality, acceptable color range and acceptance of precast units to be used on the project, and shall consist of three or more units of each exposed surface finish specified in Part 2 of this Section, showing the exterior finish (matrix color, surface color, surface texture), panel back finish, edge treatment, joint treatment, reinforcement, anchorage insert, lifting inserts, and other accessories. Mockups shall also include typical joints, including exterior corner joints and joints between units. Include patching installation for each Issued for Construction Section 03 45 01.00 10 - Page 2 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
color, texture and pattern of precast. Provide mock-ups required to be included in the exterior wall mock-ups detailed. SD-05 Design Data Calculations; G, AE Design calculations, prior to the manufacture of any precast architectural concrete units for the project. Mix Design; G, AE A statement on the mix design formulas, as specified. Manufacturer's Qualifications A statement giving the qualifications of the precast concrete manufacturer and of the installers, prior to commencing operations. SD-06 Test Reports Materials Certified copies of test reports including test data and test results. Tests for compressive strength of concrete shall be performed by an approved independent commercial testing laboratory, except that compressive strength tests for initial prestress may be performed in the manufacturer's plant laboratory. SD-07 Certificates Installer Qualifications; G, AR Field Auditor Qualifications; G, AR Fabricator Qualifications; G, AR 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
Precast concrete units shall be designed and fabricated by an experienced and acceptable precast concrete manufacturer certified under the PCI Plant Certification Program. The manufacturer shall have been regularly and continuously engaged in the manufacture of precast concrete work similar to that indicated on the drawings for at least 3 years. The Contractor shall submit a statement detailing the Manufacturer's Qualifications as specified in the Submittals paragraph. Precast work shall be coordinated with the work of other trades. 1.3.1 Installer Qualifications
A precast concrete erector qualified and designated by PCI's Certificate of Compliance to erect Category A (Architectural Systems) for non-load-bearing members. 1.3.2 Field Auditor Qualifications
A precast concrete erector who has retained a "PCI-Certified Field Auditor" to conduct a field audit of a project in same category as this Project before erection of precast concrete and who can produce an Erectors' Issued for Construction Section 03 45 01.00 10 - Page 3 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
Post-Audit Declaration. 1.3.3 Fabricator Qualifications
A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified Professional Engineer registered in the United States of America. 1.3.3.1 PCI Plant Certification Program
Participates in PCI's plant certification program at time of bidding and is designated a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units. 1.3.4 Testing Agency Qualifications
An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1.3.5 Design Standards
Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations of PCI MNL-120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated. 1.3.6 Quality-Control Standard
For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL-117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products." 1.4 1.4.1 DESIGN Standards and Loads
Precast unit design shall conform to ACI 318 and PCI MNL-120. Design loads for precast concrete shall be as specified. Design loads shall include loads from other assemblies as required. Building structure has been designed to accept gravity loads from precast panels at building columns or precast support posts shown on the structural drawings. Miscellaneous steel supports, anchors and attachments are required to resist lateral loads. A differential temperature of 160 degrees F, between interior and exterior faces of the units, shall be considered in the design. Stresses due to restrained volume change caused by shrinkage and temperature differential, handling, transportation and erection shall be accounted for in the design. 1.4.2 a. Connections Connection of units to building structure shall be of the general type and configuration indicated. Connection to other units shall be by Contractor, subject to review by AE. Connections shall be detailed to avoid interference with partitions and column enclosures. The design and sizing of connections for all design loads shall be by the Contractor.
Ft. Detrick, MD
b.
The following information is provided for bidding purposes only. The final design of the panel connections to the specified blast loads will remain the responsibility of the bidder. The contractor may use the information shown in the table below to estimate inbound blast loads on the connections. Rebound loads may be estimated at 50 percent of the inbound loads. These loads should only need to be combined with the actual dead loads on the panel for sizing the connections for bidding.
Equivalent static load (psf) Table Panel Type (psf) 1A 1A 1A 1B 1B 1B 2 2 3 3 3 Length (ft) 18 24 32 18 24 32 20 37 18 24 32 Height (ft) 65.33 65.33 65.33 10.67 10.67 10.67 11 11 Spans 1-Way Spans 1-Way Spans 1-Way Equivalent Static Load 789 737 712 310 248 212 560 860 171 96 54
1.4.3
Concrete Strength
Precast concrete units shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5000 psi. 1.4.4 Concrete Proportion
Selection of proportions for concrete shall be based on the methodology presented in ACI 211.1 for normal weight concrete. The concrete proportion shall be developed using the same type and brand of cement, the same type and gradation of aggregates, and the same type and brand of admixture that will be used in the manufacture of precast concrete units for the project. Calcium chloride shall not be used in precast concrete and admixtures containing chloride ions, nitrates, or other substances that are corrosive shall not be used in prestressed concrete. 1.4.5 Calculations
Calculations for design of members and connections shall be made by a professional engineer experienced in the design of precast architectural concrete and licensed in the United States of America. Calculation shall include the analysis of member for lifting stresses and the sizing of the lifting inserts. 1.4.6 Mix Design
The Contractor shall submit the mix design formula giving the maximum nominal coarse aggregate size, the proportions of all ingredients and the type and amount of any admixtures that will be used in the manufacture of each strength and type of concrete, prior to commencing operations. Submit certified copies of laboratory test reports, including mill tests and all other test data, for portland cement, pozzolan, slag cement, aggregates, Issued for Construction Section 03 45 01.00 10 - Page 5 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
and alkali aggregate reactivity. The statement shall be accompanied by test results from an approved testing laboratory, certifying that the proportions selected will produce concrete of the properties required. No substitutions shall be made without additional tests to verify that the concrete properties are satisfactory. 1.4.7 A. Mock-up After samples are approved for color, finish and texture, fabricate and erect at production plant, full size precast wall units, illustrating size, shape, lifting, anchor and attachment points, and finish range in accordance with approved sample. Provide products and installation for portion of work specified in this Section 03 45 01.00 10 and indicated for exterior on-site mock-up on Drawing A3.31. STORAGE AND INSPECTION AT MANUFACTURER'S PLANT
B.
1.5
Precast units temporarily stored at the manufacturer's plant shall be protected from damage in accordance with PCI MNL-117 . Immediately prior to shipment to the jobsite, all precast concrete units shall be inspected for quality to insure all precast units conform to the requirements specified. Inspection for quality shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the following elements: color, texture, dimensional tolerances, chipping, cracking, staining, warping and honeycombing. All defective precast concrete units shall be replaced or repaired as approved. 1.6 HANDLING AND STORAGE
Precast units shall be delivered to the site in accordance with delivery schedule to avoid excessive build-up of units in storage at the site. Upon delivery to the jobsite all precast units shall be inspected for quality as specified above. If the precast units cannot be unloaded and placed directly into the work, they shall be stored onsite, off the ground and protected from weather, marring, or overload. Precast units shall be handled in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS
Except as otherwise specified, material shall conform to Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE and Section 03 20 01.00 10 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT. 2.1.1 Aggregates
Fine and coarse aggregates proposed for use in concrete shall be tested and evaluated for alkali-aggregate reactivity in accordance with ASTM C 1260. The fine and coarse aggregates shall be evaluated separately and in combination, which matches the Contractor's proposed mix design proportioning. All results of the separate and combination testing shall have a measured expansion less than 0.10 percent at 16 days after casting. Should the test data indicate an expansion of 0.10 percent or greater, the aggregate(s) shall be rejected or additional testing using ASTM C 1260 and ASTM C 1567 shall be performed.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.1.2
Portland Cement, Slag Cement and Fly Ash
The additional testing using ASTM C 1260 and ASTM C 1567 shall be performed using the low alkali portland cement in combination with slag cement, or fly ash. Slag cement shall be used in the range of 15 to 35 percent of the total cementitious material by weight. Fly ash shall be used in the range of 15 to 35 percent of the total cementitious material by weight. Slag cement and fly ash may be combined to contain 15 to 35 percent of the total cementitious material by weight. 2.1.3 Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing steel shall be galvanized if clearance to an exterior face is 1 inch or less. 2.1.4 Tie Wire
Tie wire shall be soft monel or 18-8 stainless steel. 2.1.5 Inserts
Inserts shall be manufacturer's, suited for the application. 2.1.6 Plates, Angles, Anchors and Embedments
Material shall be as specified in PCI MNL-117. Steel items, other than stainless, shall be coated with a rust-inhibiting paint or shall be hot-dip galvanized. Steel items, including items embedded in concrete, shall be either stainless steel or hot dip galvanized steel. Below grade items shall be stainless steel. Provide stainless steel where indicated. 2.1.7 Form Release Agent
Release agent shall be manufacturer's standard nonstaining type. 2.1.8 Admixtures Plasticizing admixture, if
Admixtures shall conform to ASTM C 494/C 494M. used, shall conform to ASTM C 1017/C 1017M. 2.2 PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS
Precast concrete units shall be manufactured and cured in accordance with the applicable provisions of PCI MNL-117. Units shall be manufactured within the allowable tolerances given in PCI MNL-117 and PCI MNL-120. 2.2.1 Formwork
Forms shall be steel of adequate thickness, braced, stiffened, anchored and aligned to produce precast architectural concrete units within required dimensional tolerances. Forms shall be sufficiently rigid to provide dimensional stability during handling and concrete placement and consolidation. Fiberglass-reinforced plastic, plastic coated wood, elastomeric or other nonabsorptive material shall be used for making tight joints and rustication pieces. 2.2.2 Reinforcement
Fabrication and placement of reinforcement shall conform to the details Issued for Construction Section 03 45 01.00 10 - Page 7 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
shown on the approved detail drawings and PCI MNL-117. 2.2.3 Embedded Accessories
Anchors, inserts, lifting devices, and other accessories which are to be embedded in the precast units shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the approved detail drawings. Embedded items shall be accurately positioned in their designed location, and shall have sufficient anchorage and embedment to satisfy design requirements. 2.2.4 Stripping
Precast concrete units shall not be removed from forms until units develop sufficient strength to safely strip the formwork and to remove the precast concrete units from the forms to prevent damage to the units from overstress or chipping. 2.2.5 Identification
Each precast concrete unit shall be marked to correspond to the identification marks for each different precast unit shown on the detail drawings. 2.2.6 2.2.6.1 Finishes Exposed Surfaces
Surfaces of precast units exposed to view or surfaces indicated to be finished shall be finished as follows: Match AE samples provided by Gate Precast Company, Gate Stone Series Lite Rustification Variegate Honed Unfilled Samples. Type 1: Type 2: Type 3: 2.2.6.2 Light Gray, Baking soda finish. Dark Gray, Ribbed Light Gray, Light sand blasted finish
Other Surfaces
Surfaces of precast units not exposed to view or not otherwise indicated to be finished shall be finished in accordance with Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION ERECTION
Precast units shall be erected in accordance with the detail drawings and without damage to other units or to adjacent members. Units shall be set true to alignment and level, with joints properly spaced and aligned both vertically and horizontally. Erection tolerances shall be in accordance with the requirements of PCI MNL-117 and PCI MNL-122. As units are being erected, shims and wedges shall be placed as required to maintain correct alignment. After final attachment, precast units shall be grouted as shown. After erection, welds and abraded surfaces of steel shall be cleaned and touched-up with a zinc-rich paint. Welds shall be made by a certified welder in accordance with the manufacturer's erection drawings. Pickup points, boxouts, inserts, and similar items shall be finished to Issued for Construction Section 03 45 01.00 10 - Page 8 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
match adjacent areas after erection. Erection of precast units shall be supervised and performed by workmen skilled in this type of work. Welding and the qualifications of welders shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.2 JOINT SEALING
Joint sealing shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. 3.3 CLEANING
Not sooner than 72 hours after joints are sealed, faces and other exposed surfaces of precast concrete discolored during erection shall be cleaned to remove dirt and stains by dry scrubbing with a stiff fiber brush, wetting the surface and vigorous scrubbing of the finish with a stiff fiber brush followed by additional washing, or by chemical cleaning compounds such as detergents or other commercial cleaners. Commercial cleaners shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Cleaning procedure shall be performed on a designated test area and shall be approved prior to proceeding with cleaning work. Discolorations which cannot be removed by these procedures, will be considered defective work. Cleaning work shall be done when temperature and humidity permit surfaces to dry rapidly. Adjacent surfaces shall not be damaged during cleaning operations. 3.4 PROTECTION OF WORK
Precast units shall be protected against damage from subsequent operations. 3.5 DEFECTIVE WORK
Precast concrete units damaged during erection shall be repaired as soon after occurrence as possible or replaced, as directed, using approved procedures. All repairs to precast concrete units shall match the adjacent surfaces in color and texture and shall be as approved. Unless otherwise approved, repair procedures shall conform to PCI MNL-117. 3.5.1 Rejection
Panels in place may be rejected for any one of the following product defects or installation deficiencies remaining after repairs and cleaning have been accomplished. "Visible" means visible to a person with normal eyesight when viewed from a distance of 20 feet in broad daylight. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Nonconformance to specified tolerances. Air voids (bugholes or blowholes) larger than3/8 inch diameter. Visible casting lines. Visible form joints. Visible irregularities. Visible stains on panel surfaces. Visible differences between panel and approved sample. Visible nonuniformity of textures or color. Visible areas of backup concrete bleeding through the facing
Ft. Detrick, MD
concrete. j. k. l. m. 3.6 3.6.1 Visible foreign material embedded in the face. Visible repairs. Visible reinforcement shadow lines. Visible cracks.
INSPECTION Field Quality Control
Perform field inspection of connections. The Contracting Officer shall be notified in writing of defective welds, bolts, nuts and washers within 7 working days of the date of inspection. All defective connections or welds shall be removed and re-welded or repaired as required by the Contracting Officer. 3.6.2 Welded Connection Visual Inspection
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, furnish the services of AWS-certified welding inspector for erection inspections. Welding inspector shall visually inspect all welds and identify all defective welds. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 04 20 00 MASONRY
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI) ACI 318 (2005) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary (2002) Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures and Specifications for Masonry Structures and Commentaries (2004) ACI Detailing Manual
ACI 530/530.1
ACI SP-66
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 153/A 153M (2005) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware (1999; R 2004) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip (2005a) Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement (2003) Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire (2005) Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement (2005) Sampling and Testing Grout (1995; R 2001) Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry (2003) Hydraulic Cement (2003) Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units (2007a) Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units Section 04 20 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
ASTM A 167
ASTM A 615/A 615M
ASTM A 641/A 641M
ASTM A 82
ASTM C 1019 ASTM C 1142
ASTM C 140
Ft. Detrick, MD
ASTM C 144
(2004) Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar (2007) Standard Specification for Portland Cement (2006) Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes (2007a) Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry (2003) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates (2007) Standard Test Method for Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units (2007) Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry (2005a) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete (2005) Blended Hydraulic Cements (2005) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete (1998e1) Staining Materials in Lightweight Concrete Aggregates (2005) Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry (2005a) Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units (2007) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete (2006) Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars (2006ae1) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications (2005) Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness (1996; R 2001) Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds (2007a) Standard Test Methods for Fire Section 04 20 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
ASTM C 150
ASTM C 207
ASTM C 270
ASTM C 33
ASTM C 426
ASTM C 476
ASTM C 494/C 494M
ASTM C 641
ASTM C 780
ASTM C 90 ASTM C 94/C 94M
ASTM C 989
ASTM D 2000
ASTM D 2240
ASTM D 2287
ASTM E 119 Issued for Construction 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
Tests of Building Construction and Materials INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC) ICC IBC (2006; Errata 2006; Errata 2007; Supplement 2007; Errata 2007) International Building Code NATIONAL CONCRETE MASONRY ASSOCIATION (NCMA) NCMA TEK 7-1A (2006) Fire Resistance Rating of Concrete Masonry Assemblies
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC) UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 618 (1995, R 2007) Standard for Concrete Masonry Units
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Vertically Reinforced Masonry; G, AE Drawings including plans, elevations, and details of wall reinforcement; details of reinforcing bars at corners and wall intersections; offsets; tops, bottoms, and ends of walls; control and expansion joints; lintels; and wall openings. Bar splice locations shall be shown. Bent bars shall be identified on a bending diagram and shall be referenced and located on the drawings. Wall dimensions, bar clearances, and wall openings greater than one masonry unit in area shall be shown. No approval will be given to the shop drawings until the Contractor certifies that all openings, including those for mechanical and electrical service, are shown. If, during construction, additional masonry openings are required, the approved shop drawings shall be resubmitted with the additional openings shown along with the proposed changes. Location of these additional openings shall be clearly highlighted. The minimum scale for wall elevations shall be 1/4 inch per foot. Reinforcement bending details shall conform to the requirements of ACI SP-66. SD-03 Product Data Local/Regional Materials; (LEED) Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU); G, AR/AE; (LEED) Cement; G, AR/AE; (LEED) Flashing; G, AR/AE Manufacturer's descriptive data. Documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar value of products included in project. Cold Weather Installation Cold weather construction procedures. SD-04 Samples Concrete Masonry Units (CMU); G, AR/AE Color samples of three stretcher units and one unit for each type of special shape. Units shall show the full range of color and texture. Submit sample of colored mortar with applicable masonry unit. Anchors, Ties, and Bar Positioners; G, AR/AE Two of each type used. Expansion-Joint Materials; G, AR/AE One piece of each type used. Joint Reinforcement; G, AR/AE One piece of each type used, including corner and wall intersection pieces, showing at least two cross wires. Sample Masonry Panels; G, AR SD-05 Design Data Pre-mixed Mortar Unit Strength Method Pre-mixed mortar composition. Calculations and certifications of masonry unit and mortar strength. SD-06 Test Reports Field Testing of Mortar Field Testing of Grout Prism tests Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Fire-rated CMU Test reports from an approved independent laboratory. Test reports on a previously tested material shall be certified as the same as that proposed for use in this project. Special Inspection Copies of masonry inspector reports. SD-07 Certificates Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) Control Joint Keys Anchors, Ties, and Bar Positioners Expansion-Joint Materials Joint Reinforcement Reinforcing Steel Bars and Rods Mortar Coloring Precast Concrete Items Admixtures for Masonry Mortar Admixtures for Grout Certificates of compliance stating that the materials meet the specified requirements. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Take-Back Program Documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse. 1.3 SAMPLE MASONRY PANELS
After material samples are approved and prior to starting masonry work, sample masonry panels shall be constructed for each type and color of masonry required. At least 48 hours prior to constructing the sample panel or panels, the Contractor shall submit written notification to the Contracting Officer's Representative. Sample panels shall not be built in, or as part of the structure, but shall be located where directed. 1.3.1 Configuration
Panels shall be L-shaped, and configured to represent all of the wall elements including U-shaped lintel blocks, bullcose corners, horizontal reinforcement, vertical reinforcement, precast lintels, precast sills, precast copings, normal weight units, custom units, 4 inch CMU and 6 inch CMU panels with special CMU corner shapes. Panels shall be of the size necessary to demonstrate the acceptable level of workmanship for each type of masonry represented on the project. The minimum size of a straight panel or a leg of an L-shaped panel shall be 8 feet long by 4 feet high.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.3.2
Composition
Panels shall show full color range, texture, and bond pattern of the masonry work. The Contractor's method for mortar joint tooling; grouting of reinforced vertical cores, collar joints, bond beams, and lintels; positioning, securing, and lapping of reinforcing steel; positioning and lapping of joint reinforcement (including prefabricated corners); and cleaning of masonry work shall be demonstrated during the construction of the panels. Installation or application procedures for anchors, wall ties, CMU control joints, brick expansion joints, insulation, flashing, brick soldier, row lock courses and weep holes shall be shown in the sample panels. The panels shall contain a masonry bonded corner that includes a bond beam corner. Panels shall show installation of electrical boxes and conduit. Panels that represent reinforced masonry shall contain a 2 by 2 foot opening placed at least 2 feet above the panel base and 2 feet away from all free edges, corners, and control joints. Required reinforcing shall be provided around this opening as well as at wall corners and control joints. 1.3.3 Construction Method
Where anchored veneer walls are required, the Contractor shall demonstrate and receive approval for the method of construction; i.e., either bring up the two wythes together or separately, with the insulation and appropriate ties placed within the specified tolerances across the cavity. Temporary provisions shall be demonstrated to preclude mortar or grout droppings in the cavity and to provide a clear open air space of the dimensions shown on the drawings. Where masonry is to be grouted, the Contractor shall demonstrate and receive approval on the method that will be used to bring up the masonry wythes; support the reinforcing bars; and grout cells, bond beams, lintels, and collar joints using the requirements specified herein. If sealer is specified to be applied to the masonry units, sealer shall be applied to the sample panels. Panels shall be built on a properly designed concrete foundation. 1.3.4 Usage
The completed panels shall be used as the standard of workmanship for the type of masonry represented. Masonry work shall not commence until the sample panel for that type of masonry construction has been completed and approved. Panels shall be protected from the weather and construction operations until the masonry work has been completed and approved. After completion of the work, the sample panels, including all foundation concrete, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the construction site. 1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
Materials shall be delivered, handled, stored, and protected to avoid chipping, breakage, and contact with soil or contaminating material. Store and prepare materials in already disturbed areas to minimize project site disturbance and size of project site. 1.4.1 Masonry Units
Cover and protect moisture-controlled concrete masonry units and cementitious materials from precipitation. Conform to all handling and storage requirements of ASTM C 90. Prefabricated lintels shall be marked on top sides to show either the lintel schedule number or the number and Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
size of top and bottom bars. 1.4.2 Reinforcement, Anchors, and Ties
Steel reinforcing bars, coated anchors, ties, and joint reinforcement shall be stored above the ground. Steel reinforcing bars and uncoated ties shall be free of loose mill scale and rust. 1.4.3 Cementitious Materials, Sand and Aggregates
Cementitious and other packaged materials shall be delivered in unopened containers, plainly marked and labeled with manufacturers' names and brands. Cementitious material shall be stored in dry, weathertight enclosures or be completely covered. Cement shall be handled in a manner that will prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and damage by water or dampness. Sand and aggregates shall be stored in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation. 1.5 1.5.1 VERTICALLY REINFORCED MASONRY Special Inspection
A qualified masonry inspector approved by the Contracting Officer shall perform inspection of the masonry work. Minimum qualifications for the masonry inspector shall be 5 years of reinforced masonry inspection experience or acceptance by a State, municipality, or other governmental body having a program of examining and certifying inspectors for reinforced masonry construction. The masonry inspector shall be present during preparation of masonry prisms, sampling and placing of masonry units, placement of reinforcement (including placement of dowels in footings and foundation walls), inspection of grout space, immediately prior to closing of cleanouts, and during grouting operations. The masonry inspector shall assure Contractor compliance with the drawings and specifications. The masonry inspector shall keep a complete record of all inspections and shall submit daily written reports to the Quality Control Supervisory Representative reporting the quality of masonry construction. 1.5.2 Unit Strength Method
Compute compressive strength of masonry system "Unit Strength Method," ACI 530/530.1. Submit calculations and certifications of unit and mortar strength. 1.5.3 Seismic Requirement
In addition to design requirements of ICC IBC, the Contractor shall provide additional seismic reinforcement as detailed on the drawings. 1.6 1.6.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing
Masonry strength shall be determined in accordance with ACI 530/530.1; submit test reports on three prisms as specified in ACI 530/530.1. The cost of testing shall be paid by the Contractor. 1.6.2 Spare Vibrator
Maintain at least one spare vibrator on site at all times. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.6.3
Bracing and Scaffolding Design bracing
Provide bracing and scaffolding necessary for masonry work. to resist wind pressure as required by local code. 1.7 1.7.1 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Local/Regional Materials
See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Masonry materials may be locally available. 1.8 MOCK-UP
Provide products and installation for portion of work specified in this Section 04 20 00 and indicated for exterior on-site mock-up on Drawing A3.31. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The source of materials which will affect the appearance of the finished work shall not be changed after the work has started except with Contracting Officer's approval. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)
Cement shall have a low alkali content and be of one brand. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Units may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content. Units shall be of modular dimensions and air, water, or steam cured. exposed surfaces of units shall be smooth and of uniform texture. Exterior concrete masonry units shall have water-repellant admixture added during manufacture. a. Hollow Load-Bearing Units: aggregate. ASTM C 90, made with normal weight
b.
Hollow Non-Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 129, made with lightweight or medium weight or normal weight aggregate. Load-bearing units may be provided in lieu of non-load-bearing units. CMU in high containment areas shall be normal weight aggregate only.
2.2.1
Aggregates
Lightweight aggregates and blends of lightweight and heavier aggregates in proportions used in producing the units, shall comply with the following requirements when tested for stain-producing iron compounds in accordance with ASTM C 641: by visual classification method, the iron stain deposited on the filter paper shall not exceed the "light stain" classification. Use industrial waste by-products (air-cooled slag, cinders, or bottom ash), ground waste glass and concrete, granulated slag, and expanded slag in aggregates. Slag cement shall comply with ASTM C 989; Grade 100. 2.2.2 Kinds and Shapes
Units shall be modular in size and shall include closer, jamb, header, Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 8 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
lintel, sash blocks, bond beam units and special shapes and sizes to complete the work as indicated. In exposed interior masonry surfaces, units having a bullnose shall be used for vertical external corners. Double bullnose units at wing walls. Radius of the bullnose shall be 1 inch. Units used in exposed masonry surfaces in any one building shall have a uniform fine to medium texture and a uniform color. 2.2.2.1 Custom CMU
For containment areas except partition type 8G, and as noted on drawing A5.01, provide CMU meeting the following requirements: ASTM C90, fine textured, sand finished surface, normal weight CMU. Nominal Size: 8 inches high by 16 inches long by thickness shown. Units shall match samples on file in AE's office. a. Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. b. Fizzano Brothers (610-833-1100). EMCO, Bladensburg, MD (310-927-8300, Ken Wilson). Superock Block Company.
Unit Compressive Strength: Net-area compressive strength of CMU combined with the appropriate mortar types shall provide the specified f'm. Aggregates: 50 percent sand and 50 percent #10 screening of stone dust. Normal weight aggregates: ASTM C 33. Blending of substances which impair fire rating or insulation values is prohibited. No pumice, scoria or tuff. Special Shapes: All exposed outside corners shall be bullnose.
c.
d. e.
Fire Rated Units: Producer shall furnish certification from an independent testing laboratory confirming that all 8 inch (200 mm) or larger units meet all of the UL 618 requirements for two hours or better (as required), referencing full scale fire test reports, ASTM E 119. All 4 inch and 6 inch units shall conform to NCMA TEK 7-1A full scale fire test reports. The shrinkage of CMU's shall not exceed 35 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 426. L-Corner Shapes
f.
2.2.2.2
Provide 7-5/8 inch corner return leg for 4 and 6 inch CMU to maintain horizontal coursing at corners. 2.2.3 Fire-Rated CMU
Concrete masonry units used in fire-rated construction shown on the drawings shall be of minimum equivalent thickness for the fire rating indicated and the corresponding type of aggregates indicated in TABLE I. Units containing more than one of the aggregates listed in TABLE I will be rated on the aggregate requiring the greater minimum equivalent thickness to produce the required fire rating. Construction shall conform to ASTM E 119.
Ft. Detrick, MD
TABLE I FIRE-RATED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS See note (a) below Minimum equivalent thickness inches for fire rating of: Aggregate Type ______________ Expanded slag Expanded clay, shale, or slate Limestone, cinders or unexpanded slag Calcareous gravel Siliceous gravel 4 hours _______ 5.0 5.7 3 hours _______ 4.2 4.8 2 hours _______ 3.3 3.7
5.9
5.0
4.0
6.2 6.7
5.3 5.7
4.2 4.5
Minimum equivalent thickness shall equal net volume as determined in conformance with ASTM C 140 divided by the product of the actual length and height of the face shell of the unit in inches. Where walls are to form an assembly; the thickness of material in the assembly will be included in determining the equivalent thickness. 2.3 PRECAST CONCRETE ITEMS
Trim, lintels, copings, splashblocks and door sills shall be factory-made units from a plant regularly engaged in producing precast concrete units. Unless otherwise indicated, concrete shall be 3000 psi minimum conforming to Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE using 1/2 inch to No. 4 nominal-size coarse aggregate, and minimum reinforcement shall be the reinforcement required for handling of the units. Clearance of 3/4 inch shall be maintained between reinforcement and faces of units. Unless precast-concrete items have been subjected during manufacture to saturated-steam pressure of at least 120 psi for at least 5 hours, the items, after casting, shall be either damp-cured for 24 hours or steam-cured and shall then be aged under cover for 28 days or longer. Cast-concrete members weighing over 80 pounds shall have built-in loops of galvanized wire or other approved provisions for lifting and anchoring. Units shall have beds and joints at right angles to the face, with sharp true arises and shall be cast with drip grooves on the underside where units overhang walls. Exposed-to-view surfaces shall be free of surface voids, spalls, cracks, and chipped or broken edges. Precast units exposed-to-view shall be of uniform appearance and color. Unless otherwise specified, units shall have a smooth dense finish. Prior to use, each item shall be wetted and inspected for crazing. Items showing evidence of dusting, spalling, crazing, or having surfaces treated with a protective coating will be rejected. 2.3.1 Lintels
Precast lintels, unless otherwise shown, shall be of a thickness equal to Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 10 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
the wall and reinforced with two No. 4 bars for the full length. Top of lintels shall be labeled "TOP" or otherwise identified and each lintel shall be clearly marked to show location in the structure. In reinforced masonry, lintels shall conform to ACI 318 for flexural and shear strength and shall have at least 8 inches bearing at each end. Concrete shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi minimum using 1/2 inch to No. 4 nominal-size coarse aggregate. Reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60. Limit lintel deflection due to dead plus live load to L/600 or 0.3 inches. Provide top and bottom bars for lintels over 36 inches in length. 2.3.2 Sills and Copings
Sills and copings shall be cast with washes. Sills for windows having mullions shall be cast in sections with head joints at mullions and a 1/4 inch allowance for mortar joints. The ends of sills, except a 3/4 inch wide margin at exposed surfaces, shall be roughened for bond. Treads of door sills shall have rounded nosings. Reinforce sills with not less than two No. 4 bars. 2.3.3 Splash Blocks Reinforcement shall be the
Splash blocks shall be as detailed. manufacturer's standard. 2.4
MORTAR FOR VERTICALLY REINFORCED MASONRY
ASTM C 270, Type S. Test in accordance with ASTM C 780. Use Type I portland cement with blended hydraulic cement. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides. When structural reinforcement is incorporated, maximum air-content shall be 12 percent in cement-lime mortar. Use up to 40 percent Class F fly ash with type IP cement in cement-lime mortar. Fly ash shall comply with ASTM C 618. 2.5 MASONRY MORTAR
Mortar Type S shall conform to the proportion specification of ASTM C 270 except Type S cement-lime mortar proportions shall be 1 part cement, 1/2 part lime and 4-1/2 parts aggregate; Type N cement-lime mortar proportions shall be 1 part cement, 1 part lime and 6 parts aggregate. Type S mortar shall be used for interior masonry; except where higher compressive strength is indicated on structural drawings. Cement shall have a low alkali content and be of one brand. Aggregates shall be from one source. 2.5.1 Admixtures for Masonry Mortar
In cold weather, a non-chloride based accelerating admixture may be used subject to approval. Accelerating admixture shall be non-corrosive, shall contain less than 0.2 percent chlorides, and shall conform to ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. 2.5.2 Colored Mortar
Mortar coloring shall be added to the mortar used for exposed masonry (brick) surfaces to produce a uniform color matching A/E selected sample. Quantity of pigment to cementitious content of the masonry cement shall not exceed 5 by weight; carbon black shall not exceed 1 percent by weight. Quantity of pigment to cementitious content of cement-lime mix shall not exceed 10 percent by weight, carbon black no more than 2 percent by weight. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 11 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Mortar coloring shall be chemically inert, of finely ground limeproof pigment, and furnished in accurately pre-measured and packaged units that can be added to a measured amount of cement. Compressive strength of colored mortar shall equal non-colored mortar strength. 2.5.3 Hydrated Lime and Alternates
Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C 207, Type S. Lime alternates which have a current ICBO, ICBO UBC, Evaluation Report number whose findings state it may be used as an alternate to lime for Type S mortars will be deemed acceptable provided the user follows the manufacturer's proportions and mixing instructions as set forth in ICBO report. 2.5.4 Cement
Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type I. Containers shall bear complete instructions for proportioning and mixing to obtain the required types of mortar. Incorporate to the maximum extent, without conflicting with other requirements of this section, fly ash, and/or slag cement. Additives shall conform to requirements in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE; ASTM C 595 and ASTM C 1157. 2.5.5 Pre-Mixed Mortar
Pre-mixed mortar shall conform to ASTM C 1142, Type RS. 2.5.6 Sand and Water
Sand shall conform to ASTM C 144. Water shall be clean, potable, and free from substances which could adversely affect the mortar. 2.6 GROUT AND READY-MIXED GROUT
Grout shall conform to ASTM C 476, coarse. Cement used in grout shall have a low alkali content. Grout slump shall be between 8 and 11 inches. Minimum grout strength shall be 2000 psi in 28 days, as tested by ASTM C 1019. Grout shall be used subject to the limitations of Table III. Proportions shall not be changed and materials with different physical or chemical characteristics shall not be used in grout for the work unless additional evidence is furnished that the grout meets the specified requirements. Ready-Mixed grout shall conform to ASTM C 94/C 94M. 2.6.1 Admixtures for Grout
In cold weather, a non-chloride based accelerating admixture may be used subject to approval; accelerating admixture shall be non-corrosive, shall contain less than 0.2 percent chlorides, and shall conform to ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. In general, air-entrainment, anti-freeze or chloride admixtures shall not be used except as approved by the Contracting Officer. 2.6.2 Grout Barriers
Grout barriers for vertical cores shall consist of fine mesh wire, fiberglass, or expanded metal. 2.7 ANCHORS, TIES, AND BAR POSITIONERS
Anchors and ties shall be fabricated without drips or crimps and shall be Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 12 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
zinc-coated in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. Steel wire used for anchors and ties shall be fabricated from steel wire conforming to ASTM A 82. Wire ties or anchors in exterior walls shall conform to ASTM A 641/A 641M. Joint reinforcement in interior walls, and in exterior or interior walls exposed to moist environment shall conform to ASTM A 641/A 641M; coordinate with paragraph JOINT REINFORCEMENT below. Anchors and ties shall be sized to provide a minimum of 5/8 inch mortar cover from either face. 2.7.1 Wire Mesh Ties
Wire mesh for tying 4 inch thick concrete masonry unit partitions to other intersecting masonry partitions shall be 1/2 inch mesh of minimum 16 gauge steel wire. Minimum lengths shall be not less than 12 inches. 2.7.2 Wall Ties
Wall ties shall be rectangular-shaped or Z-shaped fabricated of 3/16 inch diameter zinc-coated steel wire. Rectangular wall ties shall be no less than 4 inches wide. Wall ties may also be of a continuous type conforming to paragraph JOINT REINFORCEMENT. Adjustable type wall ties, if approved for use, shall consist of two essentially U-shaped elements fabricated of 3/16 inch diameter zinc-coated steel wire. Adjustable ties shall be of the double pintle to eye type and shall allow a maximum of 1/2 inch eccentricity between each element of the tie. Play between pintle and eye opening shall be not more than 1/16 inch. The pintle and eye elements shall be formed so that both can be in the same plane. 2.7.3 Dovetail Anchors
Dovetail anchors shall be of the flexible wire type, 3/16 inch diameter zinc-coated steel wire, triangular shaped, and attached to a 12 gauge or heavier steel dovetail section. These anchors shall be used for anchorage of veneer wythes or composite-wall facings extending over the face of concrete columns, beams, or walls. Cells within vertical planes of these anchors shall be filled solid with grout for full height of walls or partitions, or solid units may be used. Dovetail slots are specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. 2.7.4 Adjustable Anchors
Adjustable anchors shall be 3/16 inch diameter steel wire, triangular-shaped. Anchors attached to steel shall be 5/16 inch diameter steel bars placed to provide 1/16 inch play between flexible anchors and structural steel members. Spacers shall be welded to rods and columns. Equivalent welded-on steel anchor rods or shapes standard with the flexible-anchor manufacturer may be furnished when approved. Welds shall be cleaned and given one coat of zinc-rich touch up paint. 2.7.4.1 Anchors at Gyp. Bd. Partition/Masonry Veneer
Veneer Anchors at Interior Masonry Veneer to Gypsum Board Partition shall be Hohmann & Barnard Type DW-10 Anchor system or approved equal, steel 3/16 inch diameter wire conforming to ASTM A 82, sheet metal steel conforming to ASTM A366, 14 gage. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized. 2.7.5 Bar Positioners
Bar positioners, used to prevent displacement of reinforcing bars during Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 13 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
the course of construction, shall be factory fabricated from 9 gauge steel wire or equivalent, and coated with a hot-dip galvanized finish. Not more than one wire shall cross the cell. 2.7.6 Partition Top Anchors
Anchors designed to resist lateral loads at the top of masonry walls and allow for live load vertical deflection. Finish: Hot dip galvanized. Dimensions: 3/8 inch by 6 inch minimum steel dowel vertically welded to 12 gage steel plate. Includes tube with expansion filler placed over rod anchor, with plate (strap) attached to concrete or steel 2.8 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
Joint reinforcement shall be factory fabricated from steel wire conforming to ASTM A 82, welded construction. Tack welding will not be acceptable in reinforcement used for wall ties. Wire shall have zinc coating conforming to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. All wires shall be a minimum of 9 gauge. Reinforcement shall be ladder type design, having one longitudinal wire in the mortar bed of each face shell for hollow units and one wire for solid units. Joint reinforcement shall be placed a minimum of 5/8 inch cover from either face. The distance between crosswires shall not exceed 16 inches. Joint reinforcement for straight runs shall be furnished in flat sections not less than 10 feet long. Joint reinforcement shall be provided with factory formed corners and intersections. If approved for use, joint reinforcement may be furnished with adjustable wall tie features. 2.9 REINFORCING STEEL BARS AND RODS
Reinforcing steel bars and rods shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. 2.10 CONTROL JOINT KEYS
Control joint keys shall be a factory fabricated solid section of natural or synthetic rubber (or combination thereof) conforming to ASTM D 2000or polyvinyl chloride conforming to ASTM D 2287. The material shall be resistant to oils and solvents. The control joint key shall be provided with a solid shear section not less than 5/8 inch thick and 3/8 inch thick flanges, with a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch. The control joint key shall fit neatly, but without forcing, in masonry unit jamb sash grooves. The control joint key shall be flexible at a temperature of minus 30 degrees F after five hours exposure, and shall have a durometer hardness of not less than 70 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240. 2.11 EXPANSION-JOINT MATERIALS
Backer rod and sealant shall be adequate to accommodate joint compression equal to 50 percent of the width of the joint. The backer rod shall be compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, or other flexible, nonabsorptive material as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Sealant shall conform to Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS, and shall be penetrating with a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) content of 250 grams/liter. 2.12 FLASHING
Flashing shall be as specified in Section 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. Provide one of the following types except that flashing indicated Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 14 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
to terminate in reglets shall be metal or coated-metal flashing and except that the material shall be one which is not adversely affected by waterproofing material. a. Stainless Steel Flashing: Stainless steel, ASTM A 167, Type 301, 302, 304, or 316, 0.015 inch thick, No. 2D finish. Provide with factory-fabricated deformations that mechanically bond flashing against horizontal movement in all directions. Deformations shall consist of dimples, diagonal corrugations, or a combination of dimples and transverse corrugations. Reinforced Membrane Flashing: Polyester film core with a reinforcing fiberglass scrim bonded to one side. The membrane shall be impervious to moisture, flexible, and not affected by caustic alkalis. The material, after being exposed for not less than 1/2 hour to a temperature of 32 degrees F, shall show no cracking when, at that temperature, it is bent 180 degrees over a 1/16 inch diameter mandrel and then bent at the same point over the same size mandrel in the opposite direction 360 degrees. ACCESSORIES Control Joints: For use at non-fire rated construction only, pre-formed rubber material; Dur-O-Wal D/A series 2001/3/5 or Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. RS series. Compressible Pre-molded Filler: For use at non-fire rated construction only, closed cell neoprene in widths to permit joint sealing between masonry and building structure. Dur-O-Wal D/A 2010 or D/A 2015; or Hohmann and Barnard No. NS Closed Cell Neoprene Sponge, as applicable. Weep Holes (Drainage Material): Dur-O-Wal or Heckmann Building Products, Cell Vent; Mortar Net USA LTD, Mortar net weep vents, Advanced Building Systems, Mortar Maze weep vents; or Hohmann & Barnard, Quadro Vent. Color to be selected. Core Closures: 16 gauge 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) mesh galvanized steel.
b.
2.13 a.
b.
c.
d. e.
Termination Bar: Stainless Steel or Aluminum, 1/8 inch by 1-1/2 inch by length of wall. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Hilti, Inc.; DX Fasteners. One of the following:
f. g.
Cavity Wall Mortar Trap (Drainage Material): 1.
Polyethylene mesh in trapezoidal configuration. thickness required to fill depth of cavity thick by 10 inches (250 mm) high; MortarNet USA, Ltd. or Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Polyethylene mesh strips. thickness required to fill depth of cavity thick by 10 inches (250 mm) wide, with dimpled surface; Advanced Building Products, Mortar Break or Mortar Break II. EXECUTION
2.
PART 3 3.1
PREPARATION
Prior to start of work, masonry inspector shall verify the applicable conditions as set forth in ACI 530/530.1, inspection. The Contracting Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 15 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Officer will serve as inspector or will select a masonry inspector. 3.1.1 Hot Weather Installation
The following precautions shall be taken if masonry is erected when the ambient air temperature is more than 99 degrees F in the shade and the relative humidity is less than 50 percent or the ambient air temperature exceeds 90 degrees F and the wind velocity is more than 8 mph. All masonry materials shall be shaded from direct sunlight; mortar beds shall be spread no more than 4 feet ahead of masonry; masonry units shall be set within one minute of spreading mortar; and after erection, masonry shall be protected from direct exposure to wind and sun for 48 hours. 3.1.2 Cold Weather Installation
Before erecting masonry when ambient temperature or mean daily air temperature falls below 40 degrees F or temperature of masonry units is below 40 degrees F, a written statement of proposed cold weather construction procedures shall be submitted for approval. The following precautions shall be taken during all cold weather erection. Conform to ACI 530/530.1 for hot and cold weather masonry erection. 3.1.2.1 Protection
Ice or snow formed on the masonry bed shall be thawed by the application of heat. Heat shall be applied carefully until the top surface of the masonry is dry to the touch. Sections of masonry deemed frozen and damaged shall be removed before continuing construction of those sections. a. Air Temperature 40 to 32 Degrees F. Sand or mixing water shall be heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F. Air Temperature 32 to 25 Degrees F. Sand and mixing water shall be heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F. Temperature of mortar on boards shall be maintained above freezing. Air Temperature 25 to 20 Degrees F. Sand and mixing water shall be heated to provide mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F. Temperature of mortar on boards shall be maintained above freezing. Sources of heat shall be used on both sides of walls under construction. Windbreaks shall be employed when wind is in excess of 15 mph. Air Temperature 20 Degrees F and below. Sand and mixing water shall be heated to provide mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F. Enclosure and auxiliary heat shall be provided to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F. Temperature of units when laid shall not be less than 20 degrees F. Completed Masonry and Masonry Not Being Worked On Mean daily air temperature 40 to 32 degrees F. Masonry shall be protected from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane. Mean daily air temperature 32 to 25 degrees F. Masonry shall be completely covered with weather-resistant membrane for 24 hours.
b.
c.
d.
3.1.2.2 a.
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
c.
Mean Daily Air Temperature 25 to 20 degrees F. Masonry shall be completely covered with insulating blankets or equally protected for 24 hours. Mean Daily Temperature 20 degrees F and Below. Masonry temperature shall be maintained above 32 degrees F for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary heat, by electric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps, or other approved methods.
d.
3.1.3
Stains
Protect exposed surfaces from mortar and other stains. When mortar joints are tooled, remove mortar from exposed surfaces with fiber brushes and wooden paddles. Protect base of walls from splash stains by covering adjacent ground with sand, sawdust, or polyethylene. 3.1.4 Loads
Do not apply uniform loads for at least 12 hours or concentrated loads for at least 72 hours after masonry is constructed. Provide temporary bracing as required. 3.1.5 Surfaces
Surfaces on which masonry is to be placed shall be cleaned of laitance, dust, dirt, oil, organic matter, or other foreign materials and shall be slightly roughened to provide a surface texture with a depth of at least 1/8 inch. Sandblasting shall be used, if necessary, to remove laitance from pores and to expose the aggregate. 3.2 LAYING MASONRY UNITS
Coordinate masonry work with the work of other trades to accommodate built-in items and to avoid cutting and patching. Masonry units shall be laid in running bond pattern. Facing courses shall be level with back-up courses, unless the use of adjustable ties has been approved in which case the tolerances shall be plus or minus 1/2 inch. Each unit shall be adjusted to its final position while mortar is still soft and plastic. Units that have been disturbed after the mortar has stiffened shall be removed, cleaned, and relaid with fresh mortar. Air spaces, cavities, chases, expansion joints, and spaces to be grouted shall be kept free from mortar and other debris. Units used in exposed masonry surfaces shall be selected from those having the least amount of chipped edges or other imperfections detracting from the appearance of the finished work. Vertical joints shall be kept plumb. Units being laid and surfaces to receive units shall be free of water film and frost. Solid units shall be laid in a nonfurrowed full bed of mortar. Mortar for veneer wythes shall be beveled and sloped toward the center of the wythe from the cavity side. Units shall be shoved into place so that the vertical joints are tight. Vertical face shells of concrete masonry units, except where indicated at control, expansion, and isolation joints, shall be completely filled with mortar. Mortar will be permitted to protrude up to 1/2 inch into the space or cells to be grouted. Means shall be provided to prevent mortar from dropping into the space below. In double wythe construction, the inner wythe may be brought up not more than 16 inches ahead of the outer wythe. Collar joints shall be filled with mortar or grout during the laying of the facing wythe, and filling shall not lag the laying of the facing wythe by more than 8 inches. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 17 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.2.1
Forms and Shores
Provide bracing and scaffolding as required. Design bracing to resist wind pressure as required by local codes. Forms and shores shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent deflections which may result in cracking or other damage to supported masonry and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Supporting forms and shores shall not be removed in less than 10 days. 3.2.2 Reinforced Concrete Masonry Units Walls
Where vertical reinforcement occurs, fill cores solid with grout. Lay units in such a manner as to preserve the unobstructed vertical continuity of cores to be filled. Embed the adjacent webs in mortar to prevent leakage of grout. Remove mortar fins protruding from joints before placing grout. Minimum clear dimensions of vertical cores shall be 2 by 3 inches. Position reinforcing accurately as indicated before placing grout. As masonry work progresses, secure vertical reinforcing in place at vertical intervals not to exceed 160 bar diameters. Use puddling rod or vibrator to consolidate the grout. Minimum clear distance between masonry and vertical reinforcement shall be not less than 1/2 inch. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, form splices by lapping bars not less than 40 bar diameters and wire tying them together. 3.2.3 Tolerances
Masonry shall be laid plumb, true to line, with courses level. Bond pattern shall be kept plumb throughout. Corners shall be square unless noted otherwise. Except for walls constructed of prefaced concrete masonry units, masonry shall be laid within the following tolerances (plus or minus unless otherwise noted): TABLE II TOLERANCES Variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises _______________________________________________________________ In In In In adjacent masonry units 10 feet 20 feet 40 feet or more 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 inch inch inch inch
Variations from the plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines _______________________________________________________________ In 20 feet In 40 feet or more 1/4 inch 1/2 inch
Variations from the level for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines _______________________________________________________________ In 20 feet Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 18 For Official Use Only 1/4 inch
Ft. Detrick, MD
TOLERANCES In 40 feet or more 1/2 inch
Variation from level for bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls _______________________________________________________________ In 10 feet In 40 feet or more 1/4 inch 1/2 inch
Variations from horizontal lines _______________________________________________________________ In 10 feet In 20 feet In 40 feet or more 1/4 inch 3/8 inch 1/2 inch
Variations in cross sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls _______________________________________________________________ Minus Plus 3.2.4 Cutting and Fitting 1/4 inch 1/2 inch
Full units of the proper size shall be used wherever possible, in lieu of cut units. Cutting and fitting, including that required to accommodate the work of others, shall be done by masonry mechanics using power masonry saws. Concrete masonry units may be wet or dry cut. Wet cut units, before being placed in the work, shall be dried to the same surface-dry appearance as uncut units being laid in the wall. Cut edges shall be clean, true and sharp. Openings in the masonry shall be made carefully so that wall plates, cover plates or escutcheons required by the installation will completely conceal the openings and will have bottoms parallel with the masonry bed joints. Reinforced masonry lintels shall be provided above openings over 12 inches wide for pipes, ducts, cable trays, and other wall penetrations, unless steel sleeves are used. 3.2.5 Jointing
Joints shall be tooled when the mortar is thumbprint hard. Horizontal joints shall be tooled last. Joints shall be brushed to remove all loose and excess mortar. Mortar joints shall be finished as follows: 3.2.5.1 Flush Joints
Joints in concealed masonry surfaces and joints at electrical outlet boxes in wet areas shall be flush cut. Flush cut joints shall be made by cutting off the mortar flush with the face of the wall. Joints in unparged masonry walls below grade shall be pointed tight. Flush joints for architectural units, such as fluted units, shall completely fill both the head and bed joints. 3.2.5.2 Tooled Joints
Joints in exposed exterior and interior masonry surfaces shall be tooled slightly concave. Joints shall be tooled with a jointer slightly larger Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 19 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
than the joint width so that complete contact is made along the edges of the unit. Tooling shall be performed so that the mortar is compressed and the joint surface is sealed. Jointer of sufficient length shall be used to obtain a straight and true mortar joint. 3.2.5.3 Door and Window Frame Joints
On the exposed interior side of exterior frames, joints between frames and abutting masonry walls shall be raked to a depth of 3/8 inch. On the exterior side of exterior frames, joints between frames and abutting masonry walls shall be raked to a depth of 3/8 inch. 3.2.6 Joint Widths
Joint widths shall be as follows: 3.2.6.1 Concrete Masonry Units
Concrete masonry units shall have 3/8 inch joints. 3.2.7 Embedded Items
Spaces around built-in items shall be filled with mortar. Openings around flush-mount electrical outlet boxes in wet locations shall be pointed with mortar. Anchors, ties, wall plugs, accessories, flashing, pipe sleeves and other items required to be built-in shall be embedded as the masonry work progresses. Anchors, ties and joint reinforcement shall be fully embedded in the mortar. Cells receiving anchor bolts and cells of the first course below bearing plates shall be filled with grout. 3.2.8 Unfinished Work
Unfinished work shall be stepped back for joining with new work. Toothing may be resorted to only when specifically approved. Loose mortar shall be removed and the exposed joints shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying new work. 3.2.9 Masonry Wall Intersections
Each course shall be masonry bonded at corners and elsewhere as shown. Masonry walls shall be anchored or tied together at corners and intersections with bond beam reinforcement and prefabricated corner or tee pieces of joint reinforcement as shown. 3.2.10 Partitions
Partitions shall be continuous from floor to underside of floor or roof deck where shown. Openings in firewalls around joists or other structural members shall be filled as indicated or approved. Where suspended ceilings on both sides of partitions are indicated, the partitions other than those shown to be continuous may be stopped approximately 4 inches above the ceiling level. An isolation joint shall be placed in the intersection between partitions and structural or exterior walls as shown. Interior partitions having 4 inch nominal thick units shall be tied to intersecting partitions of 4 inch units, 5 inches into partitions of 6 inch units, and 7 inches into partitions of 8 inch or thicker units. Cells within vertical plane of ties shall be filled solid with grout for full height of partition or solid masonry units may be used. Interior partitions having masonry walls over 4 inches thick shall be tied together with joint reinforcement. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 20 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Partitions containing joint reinforcement shall be provided with prefabricated pieces at corners and intersections or partitions. 3.3 MORTAR
Mortar shall be mixed in a mechanically operated mortar mixer for at least 3 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes. Measurement of ingredients for mortar shall be by volume. Ingredients not in containers, such as sand, shall be accurately measured by the use of measuring boxes. Water shall be mixed with the dry ingredients in sufficient amount to provide a workable mixture which will adhere to the vertical surfaces of masonry units. Mortar that has stiffened because of loss of water through evaporation shall be retempered by adding water to restore the proper consistency and workability. Mortar that has reached its initial set or that has not been used within 2-1/2 hours after mixing shall be discarded. 3.4 REINFORCING STEEL
Reinforcement shall be cleaned of loose, flaky rust, scale, grease, mortar, grout, or other coating which might destroy or reduce its bond prior to placing grout. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the drawings shall not be used. Reinforcement shall be placed prior to grouting. Unless otherwise indicated, vertical wall reinforcement shall extend to within 2 inches of tops of walls. 3.4.1 Positioning Bars
Vertical bars shall be accurately placed within the cells at the positions indicated on the drawings. A minimum clearance of 1/2 inch shall be maintained between the bars and masonry units. Minimum clearance between parallel bars shall be one diameter of the reinforcement. Vertical reinforcing may be held in place using bar positioners located near the ends of each bar and at intermediate intervals of not more than 192 diameters of the reinforcement. Column and pilaster ties shall be wired in position around the vertical steel. Ties shall be in contact with the vertical reinforcement and shall not be placed in horizontal bed joints. 3.4.2 Splices
Bars shall be lapped a minimum of 48 diameters of the reinforcement. Welded or mechanical connections shall develop at least 125 percent of the specified yield strength of the reinforcement. 3.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
Joint reinforcement shall be installed at 16 inches on center or as indicated. Reinforcement shall be lapped not less than 6 inches. Prefabricated sections shall be installed at corners and wall intersections. The longitudinal wires of joint reinforcement shall be placed to provide not less than 5/8 inch cover to either face of the unit. 3.6 PLACING GROUT
Cells containing reinforcing bars shall be filled with grout. Hollow masonry units in walls or partitions supporting plumbing, heating, or other mechanical fixtures, voids at door and window jambs, and other indicated spaces shall be filled solid with grout. Cells under lintel bearings on each side of openings shall be filled solid with grout for full height of openings. Walls below grade, lintels, and bond beams shall be filled solid Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 21 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
with grout. Units other than open end units may require grouting each course to preclude voids in the units. Grout not in place within 1-1/2 hours after water is first added to the batch shall be discarded. Sufficient time shall be allowed between grout lifts to preclude displacement or cracking of face shells of masonry units. If blowouts, flowouts, misalignment, or cracking of face shells should occur during construction, the wall shall be torn down and rebuilt. 3.6.1 Vertical Grout Barriers for Fully Grouted Walls
Grout barriers shall be provided not more than 30 feet apart, or as required, to limit the horizontal flow of grout for each pour. 3.6.2 Horizontal Grout Barriers
Grout barriers shall be embedded in mortar below cells of hollow units receiving grout. 3.6.3 3.6.3.1 Grout Holes and Cleanouts Grout Holes
Grouting holes shall be provided in slabs, spandrel beams, and other in-place overhead construction. Holes shall be located over vertical reinforcing bars or as required to facilitate grout fill in bond beams. Additional openings spaced not more than 16 inches on centers shall be provided where grouting of all hollow unit masonry is indicated. Openings shall not be less than 4 inches in diameter or 3 by 4 inches in horizontal dimensions. Upon completion of grouting operations, grouting holes shall be plugged and finished to match surrounding surfaces. 3.6.3.2 Cleanouts for Hollow Unit Masonry Construction
Cleanout holes shall be provided at the bottom of every pour in cores containing vertical reinforcement when the height of the grout pour exceeds 5 feet. Where all cells are to be grouted, cleanout courses shall be constructed using bond beam units in an inverted position to permit cleaning of all cells. Cleanout holes shall be provided at a maximum spacing of 32 inches where all cells are to be filled with grout. A new series of cleanouts shall be established if grouting operations are stopped for more than 4 hours. Cleanouts shall not be less than 3 by 4 inch openings cut from one face shell. Manufacturer's standard cutout units may be used at the Contractor's option. Cleanout holes shall not be closed until masonry work, reinforcement, and final cleaning of the grout spaces have been completed and inspected. For walls which will be exposed to view, cleanout holes shall be closed in an approved manner to match surrounding masonry. 3.6.3.3 Cleanouts for Solid Unit Masonry Construction
Cleanouts for construction of walls consisting of a grout filled cavity between solid masonry wythes shall be provided at the bottom of every pour by omitting every other masonry unit from one wythe. A new series of cleanouts shall be established if grouting operations are stopped for more than 4 hours. Cleanout holes shall not be plugged until masonry work, reinforcement, and final cleaning of the grout spaces have been completed and inspected. For walls which will be exposed to view, cleanout holes shall be closed in an approved manner to match surrounding masonry.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.6.4 3.6.4.1
Grouting Equipment Grout Pumps
Pumping through aluminum tubes will not be permitted. Pumps shall be operated to produce a continuous stream of grout without air pockets, segregation, or contamination. Upon completion of each day's pumping, waste materials and debris shall be removed from the equipment, and disposed of outside the masonry. 3.6.4.2 Vibrators
Internal vibrators shall maintain a speed of not less than 5,000 impulses per minute when submerged in the grout. At least one spare vibrator shall be maintained at the site at all times. Vibrators shall be applied at uniformly spaced points not further apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Duration of vibration shall be limited to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation. 3.6.5 Grout Placement
Masonry shall be laid to the top of a pour before placing grout. Grout shall not be placed in two-wythe solid unit masonry cavity until mortar joints have set for at least 3 days during hot weather and 5 days during cold damp weather. Grout shall not be placed in hollow unit masonry until mortar joints have set for at least 24 hours. Grout shall be placed using a hand bucket, concrete hopper, or grout pump to completely fill the grout spaces without segregation of the aggregates. Vibrators shall not be inserted into lower pours that are in a semi-solidified state. The height of grout pours and type of grout used shall be limited by the dimensions of grout spaces as indicated in Table III. Low-lift grout methods may be used on pours up to and including 5 feet in height. High-lift grout methods shall be used on pours exceeding 5 feet in height. 3.6.5.1 Low-Lift Method
Grout shall be placed at a rate that will not cause displacement of the masonry due to hydrostatic pressure of the grout. Mortar protruding more than 1/2 inch into the grout space shall be removed before beginning the grouting operation. Grout pours 12 inches or less in height shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration or by puddling. Grout pours over 12 inches in height shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration and reconsolidated by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement has occurred. Vibrators shall not be inserted into lower pours that are in a semi-solidified state. Low-lift grout shall be used subject to the limitations of Table III. 3.6.5.2 High-Lift Method
Mortar droppings shall be cleaned from the bottom of the grout space and from reinforcing steel. Mortar protruding more than 1/4 inch into the grout space shall be removed by dislodging the projections with a rod or stick as the work progresses. Reinforcing, bolts, and embedded connections shall be rigidly held in position before grouting is started. CMU units shall not be pre-wetted. Grout, from the mixer to the point of deposit in the grout space shall be placed as rapidly as practical by pumping and placing methods which will prevent segregation of the mix and cause a minimum of grout splatter on reinforcing and masonry surfaces not being immediately encased in the grout lift. The individual lifts of grout shall Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 23 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
be limited to 4 feet in height. The first lift of grout shall be placed to a uniform height within the pour section and vibrated thoroughly to fill all voids. This first vibration shall follow immediately behind the pouring of the grout using an approved mechanical vibrator. After a waiting period sufficient to permit the grout to become plastic, but before it has taken any set, the succeeding lift shall be poured and vibrated 12 to 18 inches into the preceding lift. If the placing of the succeeding lift is going to be delayed beyond the period of workability of the preceding, each lift shall be reconsolidated by reworking with a second vibrator as soon as the grout has taken its settlement shrinkage. The waiting, pouring, and reconsolidation steps shall be repeated until the top of the pour is reached. The top lift shall be reconsolidated after the required waiting period. The high-lift grouting of any section of wall between vertical grout barriers shall be completed to the top of a pour in one working day unless a new series of cleanout holes is established and the resulting horizontal construction joint cleaned. High-lift grout shall be used subject to the limitations in Table III. TABLE III POUR HEIGHT AND TYPE OF GROUT FOR VARIOUS GROUT SPACE DIMENSIONS Minimum Dimensions of the Total Clear Areas Within Grout Spaces and Cells (in.) (1,2) Grout Type _______ Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Coarse Coarse Coarse Coarse Coarse Grouting Procedure ____________ Low Lift Low Lift High Lift High Lift High Lift Low Lift Low Lift High Lift High Lift High Lift Multiwythe Masonry (3) ___________ 3/4 2 2 2-1/2 3 1-1/2 2 2 2-1/2 3 Hollow-unit Masonry ______________ 1-1/2 x 2 2 x 3 2 x 3 2-1/2 x 3 3 x 3 1-1/2 x 3 2-1/2 x 3 3 x 3 3 x 3 3 x 4
Maximum Grout Pour Height (feet) (4) ____________ 1 5 8 12 24 1 5 8 12 24
Notes: (1) The actual grout space or cell dimension must be larger than the sum of the following items: a) The required minimum dimensions of total clear areas given in the table above; b) The width of any mortar projections within the space; c) The horizontal projections of the diameters of the horizontal reinforcing bars within a cross section of the grout space or cell. (2) The minimum dimensions of the total clear areas shall be made up of one or more open areas, with at least one area being 3/4 inch or greater in width. (3) For grouting spaces between masonry wythes. (4) Where only cells of hollow masonry units containing reinforcement are grouted, the maximum height of the pour shall not exceed the distance between horizontal bond beams. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 24 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.7
BOND BEAMS
Bond beams shall be filled with grout and reinforced as indicated on the drawings. Grout barriers shall be installed under bond beam units to retain the grout as required. Reinforcement shall be continuous, including around corners, except through control joints or expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Where splices are required for continuity, reinforcement shall be lapped 48 bar diameters. A minimum clearance of 1/2 inch shall be maintained between reinforcement and interior faces of units. 3.8 A. CONTROL JOINTS Control joints shall be provided where specifically indicated in details. Unless otherwise indicated control joints shall be provided at the following locations: 1. At spacing not to exceed 25 feet on center unless exception is clearly noted on drawings. 2. Control joint placement shall be in accordance with NCMA TEK 10-2B Movement Control (2001) except as follows: a. joints are allowed, but not required unless required to comply with 25 feet maximum requirement, adjacent to door frames; b. joints are preferred at center line of perpendicular walls; c. in transition zone areas, control joints shall be located at mid spacing between joists and at a minimum of 4 feet from a transition zone support girder. Control joints shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the drawings. Sash jamb units shall have a 3/4 by 3/4 inch groove near the center at end of each unit. The vertical mortar joint at control joint locations shall be continuous, including through all bond beams. This shall be accomplished by utilizing half blocks in alternating courses on each side of the joint. The control joint key shall be interrupted in courses containing continuous bond beam steel. Exposed interior control joints shall be raked to a depth of 1/4 inch. Concealed control joints shall be flush cut. LINTELS Masonry Lintels
B.
3.9 3.9.1
Masonry lintels shall be constructed with lintel units filled solid with grout in all courses and reinforced with a minimum of two No. 4 bars in the bottom course unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Lintel reinforcement shall be as shown on drawing A5.01. Reinforcing bars shall be supported in place prior to grouting and horizontal length shall be located 1/2 inch above the bottom inside surface of the lintel unit. 3.9.2 Precast Concrete and Steel Lintels
Precast concrete and steel lintels shall be as shown on the drawings. Lintels shall be set in a full bed of mortar with faces plumb and true. Steel and precast lintels shall have a minimum bearing length of 8 inches unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 3.10 SILLS AND COPINGS
Sills and copings shall be set in a full bed of mortar with faces plumb and true. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 25 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.11 3.11.1
ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE AND STRUCTURAL STEEL Anchorage to Concrete
Anchorage of masonry to the face of concrete columns, beams, or walls shall be with dovetail anchors spaced not over 16 inches on centers vertically and 24 inches on center horizontally. 3.11.2 Anchorage to Structural Steel
Masonry shall be anchored to vertical structural steel framing with adjustable steel wire anchors spaced not over 16 inches on centers vertically, and if applicable, not over 24 inches on centers horizontally. 3.12 POINTING AND CLEANING
After mortar joints have attained their initial set, but prior to hardening, mortar and grout daubs or splashings shall be completely removed from masonry-unit surfaces that will be exposed or painted. Before completion of the work, defects in joints of masonry to be exposed or painted shall be raked out as necessary, filled with mortar, and tooled to match existing joints. Immediately after grout work is completed, scum and stains which have percolated through the masonry work shall be removed using a high pressure stream of water and a stiff bristled brush. Masonry surfaces shall not be cleaned, other than removing excess surface mortar, until mortar in joints has hardened. Masonry surfaces shall be left clean, free of mortar daubs, dirt, stain, and discoloration, including scum from cleaning operations, and with tight mortar joints throughout. Metal tools and metal brushes shall not be used for cleaning. 3.12.1 Concrete Masonry Unit
Exposed concrete masonry unit shall be dry-brushed at the end of each day's work and after any required pointing, using stiff-fiber bristled brushes. 3.13 PROTECTION
Facing materials shall be protected against staining. Top of walls shall be covered with nonstaining waterproof covering or membrane when work is not in progress. Covering of the top of the unfinished walls shall continue until the wall is waterproofed with a complete roof or parapet system. Covering shall extend a minimum of 2 feet down on each side of the wall and shall be held securely in place. Before starting or resuming, top surface of masonry in place shall be cleaned of loose mortar and foreign material. 3.14 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Manage waste according to the Waste Management Plan and as follows. Minimize water used to wash mixing equipment. Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses. 3.14.1 Separate and Recycle Waste
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Fold up metal banding, flatten, and place in designated area for recycling. Collect wood packing shims and pallets and place in designated area. Use leftover mixed mortar as cavity fill at grade where Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 26 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
lower strength mortar meets the requirements for bulk fill. Separate masonry waste and place in designated area for use as structural fill. Separate selected masonry waste and excess for landscape uses, either whole or crushed as ground cover. 3.14.2 Take-Back Program
Collect information from manufacturer for take-back program options. Set aside masonry units, full and partial, scrap, packaging to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials. 3.15 3.15.1 TEST REPORTS Field Testing of Mortar
At least three specimens of mortar shall be taken each day. A layer of mortar 1/2 to 5/8 inch thick shall be spread on the masonry units and allowed to stand for one minute. The specimens shall then be prepared and tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 780. 3.15.2 Field Testing of Grout
Field sampling and testing of grout shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM C 1019. A minimum of three specimens of grout per day shall be sampled and tested. Each specimen shall have a minimum ultimate compressive strength of 2000 psi at 28 days. 3.15.3 Prism Tests
At least one prism test sample shall be made for each 5,000 square feet of wall but not less than three such samples shall be made for any building. Three prisms shall be used in each sample. Prisms shall be tested in accordance with ACI 530/530.1. Seven-day tests may be used provided the relationship between the 7- and 28-day strengths of the masonry is established by the tests of the materials used. Compressive strength shall not be less than value indicated on Drawing S.011 at 28 days. If the compressive strength of any prism falls below the specified value by more than 500 psi, steps shall be taken to assure that the load-carrying capacity of the structure is not jeopardized. If the likelihood of low-strength masonry is confirmed and computations indicate that the load-carrying capacity may have been significantly reduced, tests of cores drilled, or prisms sawed, from the area in question may be required. In such case, three specimens shall be taken for each prism test more than 500 psi below the specified value. Masonry in the area in question shall be considered structurally adequate if the average compressive strength of three specimens is equal to at least 85 percent of the specified value, and if the compressive strength of no single specimen is less than 75 percent of the specified value. Additional testing of specimens extracted from locations represented by erratic core or prism strength test results shall be permitted. 3.16 SPECIAL INSPECTION
Special inspections and testing for seismic-resisting systems and components shall be done in accordance with Section 01 45 35 SPECIAL INSPECTION. -- End of Section -Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 20 00 - Page 27 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 04 43 30 CUT STONE
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI A118.3 (1999; R 2005) Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive (1999; R 2005) Specifications for Latex Portland Cement Mortar
ANSI A118.4
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 1028 (2007) Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method (2003) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates (2005) Quality Based Dimension Stone (2003) Specification for Slate Dimension Stone
ASTM C 33
TILE COUNCIL OF AMERICA (TCA) TCA Hdbk (2007) Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 40 CFR 59 National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.2 1.2.1
SECTION INCLUDES Interior building stonework.
Flooring, full mortar bed installation. 1.2.2 Accessories
Metal anchors and other accessories. 1.2.3 Joints
Control joints. 1.2.4 Sealer
Sealer on interior flooring. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. SD-02 Shop Drawings Stone; G, AR Show layout, pertinent dimensions, anchorages, joints, patterns, color arrangements, grout and sealant locations, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, setting details, and control jointing methods. Locate built-in items, electrical and mechanical devices which occur in stonework. SD-03 Product Data Stone; G, AR Submit data verifying that stone meets specified requirements and can be fabricated to dimensions shown. Manufactured products: Anchoring Devices Mortar Adhesive Grout Submit data on anchoring devices, mortar, adhesives, grouts, and other manufactured products. LEED Submittals SD-04 Samples Stone; G, AE
Ft. Detrick, MD
12 inch square samples of each stone type, illustrating color range and texture, markings and surface finish. Anchoring Devices; G, AR Samples of each type of dowel. Transition Strips; G, AR Samples of each type of transition device. SD-06 Test Reports Stone Anchoring devices SD-07 Certificates Qualifications Statement of qualifications for supplier, fabricator and installer.
1.4
LEED REQUIREMENTS
Follow Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION. 1.4.1 A. B. Credit MR 4.1 and 4.2 List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate cost, post-consumer recycled content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2 Product Data indicating location of regional material for regionally extracted, harvested, or recovered materials. Include statement indicating cost and distance from manufacturer to Project for each regionally manufactured material. Include statement indicating cost and distance from point of extraction, harvest, or recovery to Project for each raw material used in regionally manufactured materials. Credit EQ 4.1
1.4.2 A.
B.
C.
1.4.3
Product Data for adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building indicating VOC content of each product used. List each product including the manufacturer's name, product name, specific VOC data and the corresponding allowable VOC. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.5 1.5.1
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Quarry
All stone of a single color shall come from same quarry. 1.5.2 Reserve Stone
Supplier shall show evidence that there is sufficient reserve stone available to produce quantity required for this project and an equal amount for future expansion. 1.5.3 Fabrication
All stone shall be fabricated by, or under supervision of, a single fabricator. 1.5.4 Mechanically anchored interior stonework
Installation methods for mechanically anchored interior stonework shall meet applicable requirements of the Marble Institute of America. 1.5.5 Design
Design anchors and supports under direct supervision of Professional Engineer, registered in State of the project. 1.5.6 Interior stonework
For interior stonework, meet applicable requirements of TCA Hdbk. 1.6 1.6.1 QUALIFICATIONS Stone Supplier
Company specializing in quarrying cut stone, with five years experience. 1.6.2 Fabricator
Company specializing in fabricating cut stone, with five years experience. 1.6.3 Installer
Company specializing in installing cut stone, with five years experience. 1.6.4 Welders
Welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS Building Code ( AWS D1.1/D1.1M). 1.7 1.7.1 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING Coordinate and Interface
Convene a meeting prior to commencing interior work of this Section. Coordinate waterproofing requirements and interface with other Sections.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Follow Section 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS. 1.8.1 Store and Handle
Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breakage, chipping, or other causes. 1.8.1.1 1.8.1.2 Do not use pinch or wrecking bars. Slings
Lift with wide-belt-type slings; do not use wire rope. If required to move stone, use wood rollers with cushions at end of wood slides. 1.8.2 Prohibited
Patching and repairing of stone is prohibited. 1.8.3 Cementitious Materials
Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location. 1.9 1.9.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Interior Work
For interior work, maintain temperature at not less than 55 degrees F during installation, and at not less than 50 degrees F for 7 days after completion. 1.9.2 Temporary Storage
During temporary storage on site, at end of day, or during rainy weather, cover stone exposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored. PART 2 2.1 2.2 PRODUCTS SUPPLIERS SLATE
ASTM C 629, Classification III, Quartzite, ASTM C 616 with 95 percent silica - Interior; sawed cut to dimensions indicated. Free of defects. Color: Refer to Finish Legend. Surface Finish: Sills shall be honed finished as selected. Minimum thickness: 3/4 inch thick. 2.3 2.3.1 A. B. SETTING MATERIALS Manufacturers Bostik Hydroment. Laticrete International, Inc.
Ft. Detrick, MD
C. 2.3.2
Mapei, Inc. Interior Thick Bed Slurry Bond Coat
2.3.2.1
Latex modified Portland cement, ANSI A118.4. 2.3.2.2 Setting Bed
3 parts sand to one part Portland cement, with liquid latex additive. 2.3.2.3 Fast-Setting Leveling Bed
Mapei; Mapecem, resin based hydraulic binder or equal, mixed with water and ASTM C 33 fine aggregate. 2.3.2.4 Thinset Mortar
Latex modified Portland cement, ANSI A118.4. 2.3.2.5 Grout
Factory blended powder with liquid latex admixture; Color(s) as selected from manufacturer's standards. 2.4 2.4.1 ACCESSORIES Anchoring Devices
Dowels: Stainless steel, Type 304; of size and configuration required for support of stone and applicable superimposed loads. 2.4.2 Epoxy Adhesive
ANSI A118.3. 2.4.3 Slip-Resistant Floor Treatment
Solution capable of microscopically etching treated surface to provide a wet or dry static coefficient of friction of 0.6 minimum for level surfaces and 0.8 for sloped surfaces when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1028. 2.4.4 Sealer
Breathable, water and oil resistant; type which will not change color of stone. 2.4.5 Cleaning Solution No
Type which will not harm stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces. muriatic acid. Consult stone supplier for recommended type. 2.4.6 Grout Release
Designed to prevent staining of stone by grout; not detrimental to stone.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.4.7
Control Joints
Control joints for Facings and Copings: Pre-formed rubber material; Dur-O-Wal D/A 2001 or D/A 2025 as applicable. 2.4.8 Transition Strips
Divider strip selections for flooring applications as detailed on Drawings, in longest lengths available. 2.5 2.5.1 STONE FABRICATION Special shapes
Where shown, form stone to radius and other special shapes. 2.5.2 Finish
Finish exposed surfaces to match finish shown for primary surface. 2.5.3 Grain or Pattern
If grain or pattern is apparent in stone, ensure grain or pattern is in one direction throughout. 2.5.4 2.5.4.1 Fabrication Tolerances Overall Dimensions
Plus '0' inches minus 1/8 inch. 2.5.4.2 Bowing or Warpage
Not to exceed 1/4 inch in any direction. 2.5.4.3 Thickness
Plus or minus 1/8 inch. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 EXECUTION PREPARATION Establish Protect from disturbance.
Establish lines, levels and coursing. 3.1.2 Before Installation
Clean stone and substrate before installation. 3.2 3.2.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Interruptions Place minimum half units at
Do not interrupt patterns through openings. edges and interruptions.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.2.2
Cut and Fit Cut and fit stone tight to
Form corners, bases and other features neatly. penetrations. 3.2.3 Setting Bed
Shore up units until setting bed will maintain stone in position without movement. 3.2.4 Mortar
Fill dowel with mortar. 3.2.5 Grout Joints
Grout joints, except where sealant joints are shown or specified. Allow installation to set for 48 hours before grouting joints in walls and facings. 3.2.6 Cutting or Fitting
Notify Contracting Offer prior to cutting or fitting any item not shown. 3.2.7 Cutting
Do not impair appearance or strength of stonework by cutting. 3.2.8 Edges
Where cutting is approved, use power saw to produce clean, sharp edges. 3.2.9 Transition Strips
At locations where dissimilar flooring materials are adjacent to stonework, install divider devices appropriate for the application and in accordance with device manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 3.3.1 PATCHING AND REPAIR, REPLACEMENTS Cracked or Broken
Replace cracked or broken stone. Repair or replace stone which is visibly spalled, chipped, or otherwise defective. Do not attempt to repair polished stone; replace defective pieces. 3.3.2 Patching and Repair
Patching and repair shall be performed only by stone fabricator. Permission granted to patch and repair will not imply that patched work will be approved. 3.3.3 Conditions
Patching and repair will not be considered a remedy for work which is structurally compromised, formed to improper dimensions, warped, or broken. Approval of a patch and repair shall not set a precedent for such approval of similar conditions.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.3.4
Replace Rejected Items
Patching and repair may be attempted for very minor areas of defective stone where fabricator deems it practicable. Replace rejected items with new and approved stone. 3.4 A. B. C. 3.5 3.5.1 SPECIAL CLEANING Clean exposed stone, to remove dirt and stains after installation. Remove excess mortar, grout, and sealant. Remove grout release.
Protect other surfaces from damage due to cleaning operations. SPECIAL PROTECTION Exposed External Corners
Provide temporary protection at exposed external corners subject to damage by construction activities.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 04 72 00 CAST STONE
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 123/A 123M (2002) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products (2007) Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone (2004) Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar (2007) Standard Specification for Portland Cement (2006) Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes (2007a) Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry (2003) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates (2005) Masonry Cement (2005) Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete
ASTM C 1364
ASTM C 144
ASTM C 150
ASTM C 207
ASTM C 270
ASTM C 33
CAST STONE INSTITUTE 04-72-00-04 (2004) Standard Specifications for Architectural Cast Stone
1.2 A.
SECTION INCLUDES Cast stone at exterior walls.
Metal anchors and accessories. B. C. 1.3 A. Mortar. REFERENCE SPECIFICATION Unless specified otherwise, follow ASTM C 1364 - Standard Specification Section 04 72 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
for Architectural Cast Stone. B. Unless specified otherwise, follow Section 04 20 00 MASONRY for mortar, flashing, control joints and weep holes. DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1.4
Anchoring Systems: A. Make metal to metal connections by bolting or welding. Bolted connections shall include lock washers, lock nut or other locking device. Do not use anchors which rely solely on adhesive bond. Provide current test reports by an independent testing laboratory for each type of proposed anchor. Record ultimate strengths of each type, loaded to simulate maximum in-service loading. Continuous kerf type anchors longer than 12 inches (300 mm) may be tested as 12-inch long samples, and results interpreted as strength per foot of length. SUBMITTALS
B. C.
1.5
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Show layout, dimensions, length of units and arrangement of joints. Indicate reinforcing and anchorage devices. Show relationship to adjacent material. Show control and expansion jointing methods. Locate built-in items, electrical and mechanical devices which occur in cast stone. SD-03 Product Data Materials; G, AR Data on all products specified. Written description of types and proportions of ingredients in mortars. List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate cost, post-consumer recycled content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content. Product Data indicating location of regional material for regionally extracted, harvested, or recovered materials. Include statement indicating cost and distance from manufacturer to Project for each regionally manufactured material. Include statement indicating cost and distance from point of extraction, harvest, or recovery to Project for each raw material Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 04 72 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
used in regionally manufactured materials. SD-04 Samples Materials; G, AR 12-inch square samples as required for selection and approval of color and texture. Mortar; G, AR Colored Mortar: Cured physical samples showing full range of colors available. Reinforcing, Anchors and Accessories; G, AR Samples of each type of anchor, dowel, tie and support. SD-06 Test Reports Laboratory Test Reports Laboratory Test Reports: and anchor test reports. SD-07 Certificates Statement of Qualifications Statement of Qualifications for supplier and installer. SD-11 Closeout Submittals LEED Submittals: 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Follow Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION. Compressive strength, water absorption
Unless specified otherwise, follow the Standard Specification of the Cast Stone Institute Document 04-72-00-04. 1.7 1.7.1 A. QUALIFICATIONS Manufacturer Member of the Cast Stone Institute. single manufacturer. All cast stone shall be by a
B. 1.7.2
Have current Cast Stone Institute plant certification. Installer
Company specializing in installing cast stone with five years' experience. 1.7.3 Welders
AWS Certified for the type of welding performed.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.8
MOCK-UP
Follow Section 01 45 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. A. B. 1.9 A. 1.10 A. Provide a mock-up of each type of configuration of cast stone. Approved mock-ups may remain part of the work. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Store cast stone off ground. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Do not lay units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) and falling. At end of working day and during inclement weather, cover stone exposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored. PRODUCTS MATERIALS Portland Cement: Water: ASTM C 150, Type 1, white or gray.
B.
PART 2 2.1 A. B. C. D. E.
Clean and free from elements harmful to cast stone. Crushed natural stone, graded and washed, ASTM C 33. Natural sand, graded and washed, ASTM C 33. Durable, non fading, lime proof mineral
Coarse Aggregate: Fine Aggregate:
Color Additives (If Required): oxide pigments, ASTM C 979.
2.2 A.
REINFORCING, ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES Reinforcing: Grade 65. Steel wire and bar, galvanized to ASTM A 123/A 123M,
B.
Anchors, Dowels, Ties, Cramps and Supports: Stainless steel, Type 304, of size, number and configuration required for support of stone and superimposed loads. Bolts, Washers and Nuts: Lifting Hooks: Setting Buttons: Stainless steel, Type 304.
C. D. E. F.
Removable type. Lead or plastic.
Cleaning Solution: Type which will not etch or discolor stone, joint materials or adjacent surfaces. FORMWORK Construct forms using materials that will produce sharp arises, dimensional accuracy and uniformity of shape and texture. Coat or line forms (if constructed of absorptive materials) to produce Section 04 72 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
2.3 A.
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
a non-absorptive surface. C. Provide bracing and reinforcing sufficient to withstand stresses caused by casting, without distortion. Thoroughly clean forms after each casting operation, and make minor repairs as required. Form release agents, if used, shall be non-staining. FABRICATION Fabricate units to sizes and shapes shown. Make finished units straight, true to size and shape. Make exposed edges sharp, straight and square and flat surfaces in a true plane. Form drip slot in members projecting more than one inch. less than 3/8 inch wide and 1/4 inch deep. Size slot not
D.
E. 2.4 A.
B.
C.
As a minimum, reinforce units with one layer 6 by 6 by 10/10 or 2 No. 3 bars unless shown otherwise. Provide additional reinforcing if required for shipping and handling stresses. Prefabricate and weld reinforcing assemblies into single complete units. Keep reinforcement at least 3/4 inch back from edges and surfaces. Cure units by one of the following methods: 1. Cure units with steam in enclosed curing room at a minimum temperature of 105 degrees F (41 degrees C) or above and 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for a minimum of 6 hours, within 12 hours of fabrication. Cure units with dense fog and water spray in enclosed warm curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 24 hours. Yard cure, prior to shipment, for not less than: a. 7 days at mean daily temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or above; or b. 5 days at mean daily temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) or above.
D.
2.
3.
E.
Acid-etch exposed surfaces to remove cement film prior to packaging for shipment. Warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained or otherwise defective units will not be approved. FABRICATION TOLERANCES Overall Dimensions: Bowing or Warpage: Minimum Thickness: Plus/minus 1/8 inch. Not to exceed 1/8 inch in any direction. 4 inches unless otherwise shown.
F.
2.5 A. B. C.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.6 2.6.1
MORTAR Mortar
Factory mixed Portland cement and lime mixture. Masonry cement (ASTM C 91) is not permitted. Limit ingredients to only the following. Fillers or additives are not permitted: A. B. C. 2.6.2 A. B. C. D. 2.6.3 Portland Cement: Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 150, Type 1. ASTM C 207, Type S. Sun-fast and limeproof, ASTM C 979.
Metal Oxide Pigments (if required): Mortar Manufacturers Centurion; Colorbond-PL. Glen-Gery; Color Mortar Blend.
Whitehall; Satin Portland/Lime Mortar Blend. Workrite. Mortar Aggregate Color subject to approval.
ASTM C 144, clean and washed. 2.6.4 Water
Clean and potable. 2.7 MORTAR MIXES
Follow ASTM C 270 for Mortar by proportion specification. A. For setting mortar and for pointing mortar use Type N. EXECUTION PREPARATION
PART 3 3.1
Connect anchorages to supporting masonry and other backup materials. 3.2 A. B. INSTALLATION Drench cast stone units with clear, running water just prior to setting. Anchor cast stone units as shown. Set on sufficient mortar bed to fill out to edges when stone is bedded. Set units plumb, level and true, with joints of uniform width. Rake out mortar joints 3/4 inch. Brush joints clean. Wet joints and then pack solid with pointing mortar. Tool concave. Avoid staining exposed faces with mortar. spatter with sponge and clean water. Remove excess mortar upon completion. Section 04 72 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only Immediately remove mortar
C.
D.
E.
Ft. Detrick, MD
F. G.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. Notify Contracting Officer prior to cutting or fitting around any item not indicated on Drawings. Do not impair appearance or strength of stone by cutting. FIELD INSTALLATION TOLERANCES Positioning of Units: Maximum 1/4 inch from true position. 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch in
H. 3.3 A. B.
Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 50 feet.
C. D.
Maximum Variation Between Face Plane of Adjacent Panels: Maximum Variation from Plumb: inch in any two stories.
1/16 inch.
1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2
E.
Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 10 feet; 1/2 inch maximum. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: PATCHING AND REPAIR, REPLACEMENTS
1/8 inch in 3 feet; 1/4 inch in
F. 3.4 A.
1/8 inch in 3 feet.
Replace cracked or broken cast stone. Repair or replace cast stone which is chipped, spalled, or otherwise defective. Patching and repair shall be performed only by cast stone supplier. Permission granted to patch and repair will not imply that patched work will be approved. Patching and repair will not be considered a remedy for Work which is structurally compromised, formed to improper dimensions, warped or broken. Approval of a patch and repair shall not set a precedent for such approval of similar conditions. Patching and repair may be attempted for very minor areas of defective casting where supplier deems it practicable. Replace rejected items.
B.
C.
D.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 05 05 13 FACTORY-APPLIED METAL COATINGS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA) AAMA 2605 (2005) Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM D 2244 (2007) Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates (1989; R 1999) Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss
ASTM D 523
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 40 CFR 59 National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
High performance fluoropolymer color coating finishes applied to steel or aluminum surfaces specified in other Specification Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. SD-03 Product Data Special Warranty SD-11 Closeout Submittals LEED Submittals
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.4
SPECIAL WARRANTY
Warrant that fluoropolymer coatings will meet specified requirements for color retention, gloss retention, and film adhesion for the stated periods from date of Substantial Completion. 1.4.1 Extrusions
5 years, except, 10 years using standard 3 coat system. 1.4.2 Coil Stock
20 years. 1.5 LEED SUBMITTALS
Follow Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION. 1.5.1 Credit EQ 4.2
Product Data for paints and coatings used on the interior of the building indicating chemical composition and VOC content of each product used. List each product including the manufacturer's name, product name, specific VOC data and the corresponding allowable VOC from the list in part 2 of Section 01 33 29 LEED DOCUMENTATION. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24). 1.6 1.6.1 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Color Retention
Maximum of 5 delta E units (Hunter) of color change as calculated in accordance with ASTM D 2244. 1.6.2 Specular Gloss
Gloss values shall be within plus or minus 5 units of manufacturer's specification, when measured in accordance with ASTM D 523 using a 60 degree gloss meter. 1.6.3 Film Adhesion
No removal of film under tape within or outside test specimen, when tested in accordance with AAMA 2605. 1.7 MOCK-UP
Provide finish for portion of work specified in this Section 05 05 13 and indicated for exterior on-site mock-up on Drawing A3.31. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS
Design Standard Manufacturer: PPG Industries, Inc. Other manufactures that may be acceptable include, but are not limited to: Akzo, BASF, Valspar.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.2 2.2.1
DESCRIPTION High Performance Fluoropolymer Color Coating
High performance fluoropolymer color coating, containing at least 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight. AUTOFINA Chemicals Inc. Kynar 500 or Ausimont Hylar 5000. 2.2.2 Substrata Coating
Coating shall be factory applied and oven baked on pre-treated and primed substrates. 2.2.3 Color and Gloss
Match color and gloss selected by AE. 2.2.4 Field Applied Touch-up Material
100 percent fluorocarbon Duranar ADS Series air-dry system (ADS) of same color. 2.3 STANDARD 2 COAT SYSTEM PPG; Duranar.
Corrosion inhibitive primer and color coat. 2.3.1 Aluminum Extrusion
0.2 to 0.3 mil primer, 1.0 mil minimum color coat. 2.3.2 Aluminum or Steel; Coil
0.2 mil primer, 0.8 mil color coat. 2.4 STANDARD 3 COAT SYSTEM PPG; Duranar XL.
Corrosion inhibitive primer, color coat and clear topcoat. 2.4.1 Aluminum Extrusion
0.2 to 0.3 mil primer, 1.0 mil minimum color coat, 0.4 to 0.8 mil clear. 2.4.2 Aluminum or Steel; Coil
0.2 mil primer, 0.75 mil color coat, 0.50 mil clear. 2.5 HEAVY 2 COAT SYSTEM 0.80
Corrosion inhibitive primer and color coat. Aluminum or Steel; Coil: mil primer, 0.80 mil color coat. PPG; Duranar Plus. 2.6 HEAVY 3 COAT SYSTEM
Corrosion inhibitive primer, color coat and clear topcoat. Aluminum or Steel; Coil: 0.80 mil primer, 0.80 mil color coat, 0.80 mil clear. PPG; Duranar XL Plus.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.7
4 COAT SYSTEM
Corrosion inhibitive primer, barrier coat, color coat and clear topcoat. 2.7.1 Aluminum Extrusion
0.2 to 0.3 mil primer, 1.0 to 1.2 mil barrier, 1.0 mil color, 0.4 to 0.8 mil clear. PPG; Duranar XL/BC. 2.7.1.2 Aluminum or Steel; Coil PPG;
0.20 mil primer, 0.80 mil barrier, 0.75 mil color, 0.50 mil clear. Duranar XLE. 2.8 2.8.1 APPLICATION Prepare Surfaces
Clean, pre-treat and otherwise prepare surfaces to receive coating. 2.8.2 Manufacturer's Recommendations
Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 05 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF METALS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL APPLICATION OF THIS SECTION
This Section applies to Section 05 50 10.00 SPECIAL METAL FABRICATIONS, as the work is applicable. 1.2 ITEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED
Dunk Tanks - special metal fabrications for use in BSL-3E/ABSL-3E, BSL-4/ABSL-4 containment areas to demonstrate that they have been provided in strict conformation with the Contract Documents. 1.3 A. B. C. D. E. 1.4 RELATED SECTIONS Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING Section 01 91 01 COMMISSIONING - COMPONENT VERIFICATION Section 01 91 02 COMMISSIONING - SYSTEM TESTS Section 01 91 03 COMMISSIONING - INTEGRATED SYSTEM TESTS Section 25 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF INTEGRATED AUTOMATION SYSTEM SUBMITTALS
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements. 1.5 COMMISSIONING STANDARDS
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements. 1.6 A. SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING The work described in this Section shall begin only after related work has been successfully completed, and all test and inspection reports and operation and maintenance manuals required in these Sections have been submitted and approved. Component Verification Forms (CVF) shall be completed at appropriate times during the construction phase of the Contract. These forms are to be signed off and non-conforming items addressed prior to proceeding to the Integrated System Test (IST) portion of the commissioning which is covered under other Sections. PRODUCTS
B.
PART 2
Not Used
Ft. Detrick, MD
PART 3 3.1 A.
EXECUTION GENERAL Refer to Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING for general responsibilities. Sign-off of items on the commissioning form(s) are to indicate organization / company, person's initials and date. Sign-off indicates the person's acceptance that the item or Test has been successfully completed and is full compliance with the contract documents. Completion of the Component Verification Forms and related Integrated System Tests, as applicable shall be performed in a manner that essentially duplicates the checking, testing, and inspection methods established in the related Sections in Division 05. Where checking, testing, and inspection methods are not specified in other Sections, methods shall be established which will provide the information required. Testing and verification required by this section shall be performed during the Commissioning phase. Requirements in related Sections are independent from the requirements of this Section and shall not be used to satisfy any of the requirements specified in this Section. The Contractor shall provide all materials, services, and labor required to perform the Component Verification Form checks and related Integrated System Tests. Note that the related Integrated System Test shall be aborted if any system non-conforming item prevents the successful completion of the test, and subsequent retesting shall follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements. Commission 100 percent of the work under this Section 05 08 00. COMPONENT VERIFICATION FORMS (CVF)
B.
C. 3.2
Component Verification Forms shall be completed for the items indicated in Section 05 08 00A of Commissioning Appendix A. Non-conforming items discovered during Component Verification are to be corrected. 3.3 SYSTEM TESTS (ST)
Not Used. 3.4 INTEGRATED SYSTEM TESTS (IST)
See related items in IST in Section 25 08 00C. 3.5 COMMISSIONING REPORT
Follow Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING requirements. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC) AISC 303 (2005) Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (2005) Manual of Steel Construction (2002) Detailing for Steel Construction (2000) Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts (1999) Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)Specification for Structural Steel Buildings AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) AWS A2.4 (2007) Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination (2006; Errata 2006) Structural Welding Code - Steel
AISC 325 AISC 326 AISC 348
AISC 350
AWS D1.1/D1.1M
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME B46.1 (2002) Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness and Lay)
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 123/A 123M (2002) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products (2005) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware (2007a) Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (2005) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel Section 05 12 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
ASTM A 153/A 153M
ASTM A 325
ASTM A 36/A 36M
Ft. Detrick, MD
ASTM A 490
(2006) Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (2003a) Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (2007) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling (2001; R 2006) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings (2006a) Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes (2007; Rev A)Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength (2004) Hardened Steel Washers (2007a) Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use (2007) Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners
ASTM A 500
ASTM A 53/A 53M
ASTM A 563
ASTM A 6/A 6M
ASTM A 780
ASTM A 992/A 992M
ASTM F 1554
ASTM F 436 ASTM F 844
ASTM F 959
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC) ICC IBC (2006; Errata 2006; Errata 2007; Supplement 2007; Errata 2007) International Building Code THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC) SSPC PA 1 (2000; E 2004) Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting (1997; E 2004) Paint Specification No. 25Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel Type I and Type II (2004; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC Paint 25
SSPC SP 3
Ft. Detrick, MD
SSPC SP 6 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(2000; E 2004) Commercial Blast Cleaning
Provide the structural steel system, including shop primer and galvanizing, complete and ready for use. Structural steel systems including design, materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, inspection, quality control, and testing shall be provided in accordance with AISC 325 except as modified in this contract. 1.3 MODIFICATIONS TO REFERENCES
Conform to AISC 325, AISC 350, AISC 303 and AISC 348, except as modified in this section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Fabrication drawings including description of connections; SD-03 Product Data Material; (LEED) Shop primer Welding electrodes and rods Load indicator washers Non-Shrink Grout Include test report for Class B primer. SD-05 Design Data Calculations; G, AE Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer. SD-06 Test Reports Class B coating Bolts, nuts, and washers Supply the certified manufacturer's mill reports which clearly show the applicable ASTM mechanical and chemical requirements together with the actual test results for the supplied fasteners. Field Quality Control G, AE
Ft. Detrick, MD
Field and Laboratory Testing and Inspection Reports Structural Steel Survey. SD-07 Certificates Steel Bolts, nuts, and washers Galvanizing AISC Quality Certification Welding procedures and qualifications Inspector Qualifications 1.5 a. AISC QUALITY CERTIFICATION Work shall be fabricated in an AISC certified Category STD fabrication plant. Work shall be erected by an installer that is designated as an AISC Certified Erector Category ASCE. QUALITY ASSURANCE Drawing Requirements
b.
1.6 1.6.1
Submit fabrication drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Prepare in accordance with AISC 326 and AISC 325. Fabrication drawings shall not be reproductions of contract drawings. Sign and seal fabrication drawings by a professional engineer registered in the United States of America. Include complete information for the fabrication and erection of the structure's components, including the location, type, and size of bolts, welds, member sizes and lengths, connection details, blocks, copes, and cuts. Use AWS A2.4 standard welding symbols. Member substitutions of details shown on the contract drawings shall be clearly highlighted on the fabrication drawings. Explain the reasons for any deviations from the contract drawings. 1.6.2 1.6.2.1 a. Certifications Welding Procedures and Qualifications
Prior to welding, submit certification for each welder stating the type of welding and positions qualified for, the code and procedure qualified under, date qualified, and the firm and individual certifying the qualification tests. If the qualification date of the welding operator is more than one-year old, the welding operator's qualification certificate shall be accompanied by a current certificate by the welder attesting to the fact that he has been engaged in welding since the date of certification, with no break in welding service greater than 6 months. Conform to all requirements specified in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.7
MOCK-UP
Provide products and installation for portion of work specified in Section 05 12 00 and indicated for exterior on-site mock-up on Drawing A3.31. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS STEEL Structural Steel
ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.1.2 Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing
Wide flange shapes, ASTM A 992/A 992M. 2.1.3 Structural Steel Tubing
ASTM A 500, Grade B. 2.1.4 Steel Pipe
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B, weight class STD (Standard), unless indicated otherwise. 2.2 BOLTS, NUTS, AND WASHERS
Provide the following unless indicated otherwise. 2.2.1 2.2.1.1 Structural Steel, Steel Pipe Bolts
ASTM A 325, Type 1, ASTM A 490, Type 1. The bolt heads and the nuts of the supplied fasteners must be marked with the manufacturer's identification mark, the strength grade and type specified by ASTM specifications. 2.2.1.2 Nuts
ASTM A 563, Grade and Style for applicable ASTM bolt standard recommended. 2.2.1.3 Washers
ASTM F 436 washers for ASTM A 325 and ASTM A 490 bolts. 2.2.2 2.2.2.1 Structural Steel Tubing Bolts ASTM A 490, Type 1.
ASTM A 325, Type 1 2.2.2.2 Nuts
ASTM A 563, Grade and Style as specified in the applicable ASTM bolt standard.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.2.2.3
Washers
ASTM F 436, plain carbon steel. 2.2.3 2.2.3.1 Foundation Anchorage Anchor Bolts
ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 2.2.3.2 Anchor Nuts
ASTM A 563, Grade A, hex style. 2.2.3.3 Anchor Washers
ASTM F 844. 2.2.4 Load Indicator Washers
ASTM F 959. 2.2.5 Load Indicator Bolts
ASTM A 325, Type 1; ASTM A 490, Type 1, with a manufactured notch between the bolt tip and threads. The bolt shall be designed to react to the opposing rotational torques applied by the installation wrench, with the bolt tip automatically shearing off when the proper tension is obtained. 2.3 2.3.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL ACCESSORIES Welding Electrodes and Rods
AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 2.3.2 Non-Shrink Grout
Refer to specification Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. Grout shall be nonmetallic. 2.3.3 Welded Shear Stud Connectors
Refer to specification Section 05 30 00 STEEL DECKS. 2.4 SHOP PRIMER
SSPC Paint 25, (alkyd primer), except provide a Class B coating in accordance with AISC 325 for slip critical joints. Primer shall conform to Federal, State, and local VOC regulations. If flash rusting occurs, re-clean the surface prior to application of primer. Shop primer for steel that receives intumescent fireproofing shall be compatible with the final intumescent fireproofing selection. Refer to specification 07 81 23 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING. 2.5 GALVANIZING
ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable, unless specified otherwise galvanize after fabrication where practicable.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.6 2.6.1
FABRICATION Markings
Prior to erection, members shall be identified by a painted erection mark. Connecting parts assembled in the shop for reaming holes in field connections shall be match marked with scratch and notch marks. Do not locate erection markings on areas to be welded. Do not locate match markings in areas that will decrease member strength or cause stress concentrations. Affix embossed tags to hot-dipped galvanized members. 2.6.2 Shop Primer
Shop prime structural steel, except as modified herein, in accordance with SSPC PA 1. Do not prime steel surfaces embedded in concrete, galvanized surfaces, surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing, surfaces designed as part of a composite steel concrete section, or surfaces within 0.5 inch of the toe of the welds prior to welding (except surfaces on which metal decking is to be welded). Slip critical surfaces shall be primed with a Class B coating. Prior to assembly, prime surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible after assembly. Do not apply primer in foggy or rainy weather; when the ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F; or when the primer may be exposed to temperatures below 40 degrees F within 48 hours after application, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer of Record. 2.6.2.1 Cleaning
SSPC SP 6, except steel exposed in spaces above ceilings, attic spaces, furred spaces, and chases that will be hidden to view in finished construction may be cleaned to SSPC SP 3 when recommended by the shop primer manufacturer. Maintain steel surfaces free from rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants through final assembly. Clean steel that receives intumescent paint fireproofing in accordance with the manufacture's requirements. 2.6.2.2 Primer
Apply primer to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mil except provide the Class B coating for slip critical joints in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Repair damaged primed surfaces with an additional coat of primer. 2.6.3 Fireproofing Coated Surfaces
Surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing coatings shall be cleaned and prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as specified in Section 07 81 00 SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING. 2.7 DRAINAGE HOLES
Adequate drainage holes shall be drilled to eliminate water traps. Hole diameter shall be 1/2 inch and location shall be indicated on the detail drawings. Hole size and location shall not affect the structural integrity.
Ft. Detrick, MD
PART 3 3.1 a.
EXECUTION FABRICATION Fabrication shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AISC 325. Fabrication and assembly shall be done in the shop to the greatest extent possible. The fabricating plant shall be certified under the AISC Quality Certification Program for Structural Steel Fabrications for Category STD. Compression joints depending on contact bearing shall have a surface roughness not in excess of 500 micro inch as determined by ASME B46.1, and ends shall be square within the tolerances for milled ends specified in ASTM A 6/A 6M. Structural steelwork, except surfaces of steel to be encased in concrete, surfaces to be field welded, surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing coatings, and contact surfaces of friction-type high-strength bolted connections shall be prepared for painting and primed with the specified paint. Shop splices of members between field splices will be permitted only where indicated on the Contract Drawings. Splices not indicated require the approval of the Engineer of Record. ERECTION Erection of structural steel shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AISC 325. Erection plan shall be reviewed, stamped and sealed by a licensed structural engineer. Provide for drainage in structural steel. After final positioning of steel members, provide full bearing under base plates and bearing plates using nonshrink grout. Place nonshrink grout in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. STORAGE
b.
c.
d.
3.2 a.
b.
3.2.1
Material shall be stored out of contact with the ground in such manner and location as will minimize deterioration. 3.3 CONNECTIONS
Except as modified in this section, connections not detailed shall be designed in accordance with AISC 350. Build connections into existing work. Do not tighten anchor bolts set in concrete with impact torque wrenches. Punch, subpunch and ream, or drill bolt and pin holes perpendicular to the surface of the member. Holes shall not be cut or enlarged by burning. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be clean of dirt and rust, and lubricated immediately prior to installation. 3.3.1 High-Strength Bolts
Provide load indicator bolts or washers in all ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 bolted connections, except provide only load indicator washers for slip critical connections. Bolts shall be installed in connection holes and initially brought to a snug tight fit. After the initial tightening procedure, bolts shall then be fully tensioned, progressing from the most rigid part of a connection to the free edges. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 12 00 - Page 8 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.3.1.1
Installation of Load Indicator Washers (LIW)
ASTM F 959. Where possible, the LIW shall be installed under the bolt head and the nut shall be tightened. If the LIW is installed adjacent to the turned element, provide a flat ASTM F 436 washer between the LIW and nut when the nut is turned for tightening, and between the LIW and bolt head when the bolt head is turned for tightening. In addition to the LIW, provide flat ASTM F 436 washers under both the bolt head and nut when ASTM A 490 bolts are used. 3.4 GAS CUTTING
Use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted on any major member in the structural framing. Use of a gas cutting torch will be permitted on minor members not under stress only after approval has been obtained from the Engineer of Record. 3.5 a. WELDING AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Provide AWS D1.1/D1.1M qualified welders, welding operators, and tackers. The Contractor shall develop and submit the Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) for all welding, including welding done using prequalified procedures. Prequalified procedures may be submitted for information only; however, procedures that are not prequalified shall be submitted for approval. Removal of Temporary Welds, Run-Off Plates, and Backing Strips
b.
3.5.1
Removal is not required. 3.6 SHOP PRIMER REPAIR
Repair shop primer in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendation for surfaces damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, or bolting. 3.6.1 Field Priming
Field priming of steel exposed to the weather, or located in building areas without HVAC for control of relative humidity. After erection, the field bolt heads and nuts, field welds, and any abrasions in the shop coat shall be cleaned and primed with paint of the same quality as that used for the shop coat. 3.7 GALVANIZING REPAIR
Provide as indicated or specified. Galvanize after fabrication where practicable. Repair damage to galvanized coatings using ASTM A 780 zinc rich paint for galvanizing damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, or bolting. Do not heat surfaces to which repair paint has been applied. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. The Contracting Officer and Engineer of Record shall be Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 12 00 - Page 9 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
notified in writing of defective welds, bolts, nuts, and washers within 7 working days of the date of weld inspection. 3.8.1 a. Structural Steel Inspection Visually inspect size and placement of anchor bolts in concrete and masonry. Visual material verification as per ICC IBC, Table 1704.3. Fabricator inspection as per ICC IBC, Section 1704.2. Inspection of steel frame joint details for compliance with approved construction documents in accordance with ICC IBC Table 1704.3. Details such as bracing and stiffening. Member locations. Application of joint details at each connection. Welds Visual Inspection
b. c. d.
e. f. g. 3.8.2
3.8.2.1
AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Furnish the services of AWS-certified welding inspectors for fabrication and erection inspection and testing and verification inspections. Welding inspectors shall visually inspect and mark welds, including fillet weld end returns. 3.8.2.2 a. Nondestructive Testing
Personnel performing weld tests shall be qualified in accordance with the American Society for Non-Destructive Testing Recommended Practices. Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. Personnel performing welding inspection shall be certified in accordance with AWS D-1-1, 6.0 Part A and ICC IBC Table 1704.3. Perform non-destructive weld tests on 100 percent of full penetration fields welds and 10 percent of partial penetration field welds. Use radiographic or ultrasonic method. AE may reduce percentage of testing for individual welders who demonstrate on-site low failure rate. AWS D1.1/D1.1M. If more than 20 percent of welds made by a welder contain defects identified by testing, then all welds made by that welder shall be tested by radiographic or ultrasonic testing, as approved by the Contracting Officer. When all welds made by an individual welder are required to be tested, magnetic particle testing shall be used only in areas inaccessible to either radiographic or ultrasonic testing. Retest defective areas after repair. Load Indicator Washers Load Indicator Washer Compression
b.
c.
d.
3.8.3 3.8.3.1 a.
Visually inspect load indicator washers as per ICC IBC, Section 1704.3.3 and Table 1704.3.
Ft. Detrick, MD
b.
Load indicator washers shall be tested in place to verify that they have been compressed sufficiently to provide the 0.015 inch gap when the load indicator washer is placed under the bolt head and the nut is tightened, and to provide the 0.005 inch gap when the load indicator washer is placed under the turned element, as required by ASTM F 959. Load Indicator Gaps
3.8.3.2
Test in place the load indicator gaps on the installed load indicator washers to verify that the ASTM F 959 load indicator gaps have been achieved. If more than 10 percent of the load indicators tested have not been compressed sufficiently to provide the average gaps required by ASTM F 959, then all in place load indicator washers shall be tested to verify that the ASTM F 959 load indicator gaps have been achieved. Test locations shall be selected by the Contracting Officer. 3.8.4 3.8.4.1 High-Strength Bolts Testing Bolt, Nut, and Washer Assemblies
Test a minimum of 3 bolt, nut, and washer assemblies from each mill certificate batch in a tension measuring device at the job site prior to the beginning of bolting start-up. Demonstrate that the bolts and nuts, when used together, can develop tension not less than the provisions specified in AISC 348, Table 4, depending on bolt size and grade. The bolt tension shall be developed by tightening the nut. A representative of the manufacturer or supplier shall be present to ensure that the fasteners are properly used, and to demonstrate that the fastener assemblies supplied satisfy the specified requirements. 3.8.4.2 a. Inspection
Visually inspect high strength bolts as per ICC IBC, Section 1704.3.3 and Table 1704.3. Inspection procedures shall be in accordance with AISC 348, Section 9. Confirm and report to the Contracting Officer that the materials meet the project specification and that they are properly stored. Confirm that the faying surfaces have been properly prepared before the connections are assembled. Observe the specified job site testing and calibration, and confirm that the procedure to be used provides the required tension. Monitor the work to ensure the testing procedures are routinely followed on joints that are specified to be fully tensioned. Testing
b.
3.8.4.3
The Government has the option to perform nondestructive tests on 5 percent of the installed bolts to verify compliance with pre-load bolt tension requirements. The nondestructive testing will be done in-place using an ultrasonic measuring device or any other device capable of determining in-place pre-load bolt tension. The test locations shall be selected by the Contracting Officer. If more than 10 percent of the bolts tested contain defects identified by testing, then all bolts used from the batch from which the tested bolts were taken, shall be tested. Retest new bolts after installation.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.9
STRUCTURAL STEEL SURVEY
Verify top of floor steel elevations, location and plumbness of columns, alignment of beams, shelf angles, lintels and other similar supporting members. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 05 30 00 STEEL DECKS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI) AISI SG-913 AISI SG03-3 (1991) LRFD Cold-formed Steel Design Manual (2002) Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual Set
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2006; Errata 2006) Structural Welding Code - Steel (1998) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 108 (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished (2002) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products (2005) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process (2001; R 2006) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings (2007) Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber (2007) Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber (2007) Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Section 05 30 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
AWS D1.3
ASTM A 123/A 123M
ASTM A 36/A 36M
ASTM A 653/A 653M
ASTM A 780
ASTM D 1056
ASTM D 1149
ASTM D 746
Ft. Detrick, MD
Elastomers by Impact ASTM E 84 (2007b) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
STEEL DECK INSTITUTE (SDI) SDI 31 (2007) Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks (3rd Edition) Diaphragm Design Manual (1987; R 2000) Deck Damage and Penetrations (2006) Manual of Construction with Steel Deck THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC) SSPC Paint 20 (2002; E 2004) Paint Specification No. 20 Zinc-Rich Coating Type I Inorganic and Type II Organic
SDI DDMO3 SDI DDP SDI MOC2
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD) UFC 3-310-01 Load Assumptions for Buildings
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC) UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 580 (2006) Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies (2007) Building Materials Directory
UL Bld Mat Dir 1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Fabrication Drawings; G, AE Metal Floor Deck Units; G, AE Cant Strips; G, AE Ridge and Valley Plates; G, AE Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 30 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Metal Closure Strips; G, AE SD-03 Product Data Materials (LEED) Accessories Deck Units Galvanizing Repair Paint Mechanical Fasteners Metal Floor Deck Units Welder Qualifications Welding Equipment Welding Rods and Accessories SD-04 Samples Metal Roof Deck Units Flexible Closure Strips SD-05 Design Data Deck Units; G, AE Submit manufacturer's design calculations, or applicable published literature for the structural properties of the proposed deck units. SD-07 Certificates Welding Procedures 1.3 1.3.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Deck Units
Furnish deck units and accessory products from a manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacture of steel decking. Provide a 2 sq ft. sample of decking material and each accessory to be used. Provide manufacturer's certificates attesting that the decking material meets the specified requirements. 1.3.2 a. Qualifications for Welding Work Follows Welding Procedures in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Test specimens shall be made in the presence of Contracting Officer and shall be tested by an approved testing laboratory at the Contractor's expense. Submit qualified Welder Qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 05 30 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
or under an equivalent approved qualification test. Perform tests on test pieces in positions and with clearances equivalent to those actually encountered. If a test weld fails to meet requirements, perform an immediate retest of two test welds until each test weld passes. Failure in the immediate retest will require the welder be retested after further practice or training, performing a complete set of test welds. c. Submit manufacturer's catalog data for Welding Equipment and Welding Rods and Accessories. Regulatory Requirements Fire Safety
1.3.3 1.3.3.1
Test roof deck as a part of a roof deck construction assembly of the type used for this project, listing as fire classified in the UL Bld Mat Dir. 1.3.3.2 Wind Storm Resistance
Provide roof construction assembly capable of withstanding the following uplift pressures90 when tested in accordance with the uplift pressure test described in UL 580 and in general compliance with UFC 3-310-01. Definition of zones are in accordance with ASCE 7-05, and as indicated on drawing A0.27 ROOF KEY PLAN. A. b. C. 1.3.4 42 pounds per square foot - Zone 1. 66 pounds per square foot - Zone 2. 90 pounds per square foot - Zone 3. Fabrication Drawings
Show type and location of units, location and sequence of connections, bearing on supports, methods of anchoring, attachment of accessories, adjusting plate details, size and location of holes to be cut and reinforcement to be provided, the manufacturer's erection instructions and other pertinent details. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver deck units to the site in a dry and undamaged condition. Store and handle steel deck in a manner to protect it from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Do not use decking for storage or as working platform until units have been fastened into position. Exercise care not to damage material or overload decking during construction. Must not exceed the design live load. The maximum uniform distributed storage load. Stack decking on platforms or pallets and cover with weathertight ventilated covering. Elevate one end during storage to provide drainage. Maintain deck finish at all times to prevent formation of rust. Repair deck finish using touch-up paint. Replace damaged material. 1.5 1.5.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR ROOF DECKS Properties of Sections
Properties of metal roof deck sections must comply with engineering design width as limited by the provisions of AISI SG-913. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 30 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.5.2
Allowable Loads
Indicate total uniform dead and live load for detailing purposes. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.1.1 a. b. c. PRODUCTS DESIGN STANDARDS Deck Properties Roof Deck 1-1/2 Inch Deep, Wide Rib
Minimum gage and yield strength as indicated on the drawings. Minimum Moment of Inertia: Minimum Section Modulus: 0.29 inches4 per foot. 0.30 inches3 per foot.
2.1.1.2 a. b. c.
Floor Deck 3 Inch Deep Composite Design
18 gage and yield strength as indicated on the drawings. Minimum Moment of Inertia: Minimum Section Modulus: 1.25 inches4 per foot. 0.79 inches3 per foot.
2.1.1.3 a. b. c.
Floor Deck 3 Inch Deep Composite Design
16 gage and yield strength as indicated on the drawings. Minimum Moment of Inertia: Minimum Section Modulus: Roof Deck 3 Inch Deep 1.58 inches4 per foot. 1.01 inches3 per foot.
2.1.1.4 a. b. c.
20 gage and Fy = 33 ksi yield strength. Minimum Moment of Inertia: Minimum Section Modulus: 0.96 inches4 per foot. 0.50 inches3 per foot.
2.1.1.5 a. b. c. 2.1.2
Transition Zone Deck 9/16 Inch Deep and Fy = 80 ksi yield strength.
22 gage, Pitch = 2-1/2 inches, Minimum Moment of Inertia: Minimum Section Modulus:
0.024 inches4 per foot. 0.07 inches3 per foot.
Structural steel for floor framing
Structural steel for floor framing has been designed assuming composite Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 30 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
action with concrete floor. Number of shear studs indicated is based on an AISC stud coefficient equal to 1.0 AISC LRFD equations 13-1 and 13-2. If deck profile yields a coefficient of less than 1.0, provide additional shear studs to attain an equal shear capacity. 2.1.3 Metal Deck Gages
Metal deck gages and properties specified and indicated are based on unshored construction. 2.2 2.2.1 MATERIALS Steel Sheet
Flat rolled carbon steel sheets of structural quality, thickness not less than 0.034 inch before coating, meeting the requirements of AISI SG03-3, except as modified herein. Sheet minimum thicknesses specified are before galvanizing. 2.2.2 Steel Coating Apply coating to both sides
ASTM A 653/A 653M designation G60 galvanized. of sheet. 2.2.3 2.2.3.1 Mixes
Galvanizing Repair Paint for Floor Decks
Provide a high-zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 780. 2.2.4 Galvanized Steel Angles for Roof Decks
Provide hot-rolled carbon steel angles conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, merchant quality, Grade Designation SAE/AISI 1023 or SAE/AISI 1025, and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M. 2.2.5 Galvanizing Repair Paint for Roof Decks
Provide a high zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel and shall conform to ASTM A 780. 2.2.6 a. Flexible Closure Strips for Roof Decks Provide strips made of elastomeric material specified and premolded to the configuration required to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends and sides of steel roof decking. Provide a vulcanized, closed-cell, expanded chloroprene elastomer having approximately 3.5 psi compressive-deflection at 25 percent deflection (limits), conforming to ASTM D 1056, Grade No. SCE 41, with the following additional properties: 1. Brittleness temperature of minus 40 degrees F when tested in accordance with ASTM D 746. Flammability resistance with a flame spread rating of less than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Section 05 30 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
b.
2.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.
Resistance to ozone must be "no cracks" after exposure of a sample kept under a surface tensile strain of 25 percent to an ozone concentration of 100 parts per million of air by volume in air for 100 hours at 104 degrees F and tested in accordance with ASTM D 1149. Provide a elastomeric type adhesive with a chloroprene base as recommended by the manufacturer of the flexible closure strips.
4.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
Provide accessories of same material as deck, unless specified otherwise. Provide manufacturer's standard type accessories, as specified. 2.3.1 Adjusting Plates
Provide adjusting plates, or segments of deck units, of same thickness and configuration as deck units in locations too narrow to accommodate full size units. Provide factory cut plates of predetermined size where possible. 2.3.2 End Closures
Fabricated of sheet metal by the deck manufacturer. Provide end closures minimum 0.034 inch thick to close open ends at exposed edges of floors, parapets, end walls, eaves, and openings through deck. 2.3.3 Partition Closures
Provide closures for closing voids above interior walls and partitions as indicated. Provide sheet steel closures above typical partitions as indicated. Provide sheet steel closures above fire-resistant interior walls and partitions located on both sides of wall or partition as indicated. Provide glass fiber blanket insulation in the space between pairs of closures at acoustical partitions as indicated. 2.3.4 Closure Plates for Composite Deck
Support and retain concrete at each floor level. Provide edge closures (pour stop) at all edges of the slab of sufficient strength and stiffness to support the wet concrete, and as indicated on drawings. Provide metal closures for all openings in composite steel deck 1/4 inch and over. 2.3.5 Sheet Metal Collar
Where deck is cut for passage of pipes, ducts, columns, etc., and deck is to remain exposed, provide a neatly cut sheet metal collar to cover edges of deck. Do not cut deck until after installation of supplemental supports. 2.3.6 a. Cover Plates Sheet metal to close panel edge and end conditions, and where panels change direction or butt. Fabricate cover plates for abutting floor deck units from sheets not less than 0.045 inch thick. Provide 6 inch wide cover plates and form to match the contour of the floor deck units.
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.3.7
Column Closures
Sheet metal, minimum 0.034 inch thick. 2.3.8 Access Hole Covers
Sheet metal, minimum 0.045 inch thick. 2.3.9 Hanger
Do not use floor or roof decks with integral hangers. Do not provide clips or other devices for hanging directly from metal decks. 2.3.10 Shear Connectors
Provide shear connectors as headed stud type, ASTM A 108. 2.3.11 Mechanical Fasteners
Provide mechanical fasteners, for anchoring the deck to structural supports and adjoining units that are designed to meet the loads indicated. 2.3.12 Miscellaneous Accessories
Furnish the manufacturer's standard accessories to complete the deck installation. Furnish metal accessories of the same material as the deck and with the minimum design thickness as follows: saddles, 0.045 inch; 0.057 inch cant strip, 0.034 inch other metal accessories, 0.034 inch unless otherwise indicated. Accessories must include but not be limited to saddles, fasteners, cant strips, butt cover plates, underlapping sleeves, and ridge and valley plates. 2.4 a. FABRICATION Furnish one sample of each type of Metal Floor Deck Units used to illustrate the actual cross section dimensions and configuration. Furnish one sample of each type Flexible Closure Strips, 12 inch long. Length of Floor Deck Units
b. 2.4.1
Provide floor deck units of sufficient length to span three or more spacings where possible. 2.4.2 Roof Deck
Conform to ASTM A 653/A 653M for deck used in conjunction with insulation and built-up roofing. Fabricate roof deck units of the steel design thickness required by the design drawings and zinc-coated in conformance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating class. 2.4.2.1 Cant Strips for Roof Decks
Fabricate cant strips from sheets not less than 0.034 inch thick. Bend strips to form a 45-degree cant not less than 5 inch wide, with top and bottom flanges a minimum 3 inch wide. Length of strips 10 feet.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.4.2.2
Ridge and Valley Plates for Roof Decks
Fabricate plates from sheets, not less than 0.034 inch thick. Provide plates of minimum 4-1/2 inch wide and bent to provide tight fitting closures at ridges and valleys. Provide a minimum length of ridge and valley plates of 10 feet. 2.4.2.3 Metal Closure Strips for Roof Decks
Fabricate strips from sheets not less than 0.034 inch thick. Provide strips from the configuration required to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends and sides of steel roof decking. 2.4.3 Form Deck
Conform to ASTM A 653/A 653M for deck used as formwork for concrete. Fabricate form deck of the steel design thickness required by the design drawings. Zinc-coat in conformance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating class. 2.4.4 Transition Zone Deck
Conform to ASTM A 653/A 653M for deck used as walking surface. Fabricate form deck of the steel design thickness required by the design drawings. Zinc-coat in conformance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating class. 2.4.5 a. Composite Deck Conform to ASTM A 653/A 653M for composite deck assembly. Fabricate deck used as the tension reinforcing in composite deck if the steel design thickness required by the design drawings. Zinc-coat in conformance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating class. In addition to resisting shear, provide devices to resist vertical separation between the steel deck and the concrete. Provide one of the following types of shear devices: 1. Mechanically fixed shear devices such as embossments, holes, or welded buttons. Mechanically fixed shear devices such as inverted, triangular-shaped ribs.
b.
2.
2.4.6 a.
Touch-Up Paint Provide touch-up paint for zinc-coated units of an approved galvanizing repair paint with a high-zinc dust content. Paint shall contain at least 94 percent zinc dust by weight in the dry film. Touch-up welds with paint conforming to SSPC Paint 20 in accordance with ASTM A 780. Maintain finish of deck units and accessories by using touch-up paint whenever necessary to prevent the formation of rust. For floor decking installation, wire brush, clean, and touchup paint the scarred areas on the top and bottom surfaces of the metal floor decking and on the surface of supporting steel members. Include welds, weld scars, bruises, and rust spots for scarred areas. Touched up the galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint. After roof decking installation, wire brush, clean, and touchup paint Section 05 30 00 - Page 9 For Official Use Only
b.
c.
Ft. Detrick, MD
the scarred areas on top and bottom surfaces of metal roof decking. The scarred areas include welds, weld scars, bruises, and rust spots. Touchup galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXAMINATION
Prior to installation of decking units and accessories, examine worksite to verify that as-built structure will permit installation of decking system without modification. 3.2 a. INSTALLATION Install steel deck units in accordance with SDI 31 and approved shop drawings. Place units on structural supports, properly adjusted, leveled, and aligned at right angles to supports before permanently securing in place. Damaged deck and accessories including material which is permanently stained or contaminated, deformed, or with burned holes shall not be installed. Extend deck units over three or more supports unless absolutely impractical. Report inaccuracies in alignment or leveling to the Contracting Officer and make necessary corrections before permanently anchoring deck units. Locate deck ends over supports only. Do not use unanchored deck units as a work or storage platform. Do not fill unanchored deck with concrete. Permanently anchor units placed by the end of each working day. Do not support suspended ceilings, light fixtures, ducts, utilities, or other loads by steel deck. Distribute loads by appropriate means to prevent damage. On steel support members provide 2 inch minimum bearing. At masonry support, provide 6 inch minimum level bearing. Make field cuts with carborundum blade. Attachment
b. c. d. 3.2.1
Immediately after placement and alignment, and after correcting inaccuracies, permanently fasten steel deck units to structural supports and to adjacent deck units as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure and SDI 31. Clamp or weight deck units to provide firm contact between deck units and structural supports while performing welding or fastening. Anchoring the deck to structural supports with powder-actuated fasteners or pneumatically driven fasteners is prohibited. Attachment of adjacent deck units by button-punching is prohibited. 3.2.1.1 a. Headed Shear Studs Space headed shear
Weld headed shear studs following AWS D1.1/D1.1M. studs evenly unless shown otherwise.
b.
Install headed shear studs in the presence of welding inspector. installed without welding inspector present will be rejected.
Studs
c.
Install production studs only after welding inspector has accepted test studs.
Ft. Detrick, MD
d.
Remove ferrules to allow visual inspection. prior to concrete placement.
Remove ferrules from deck
e.
Any production stud that does not exhibit full 360 degree flash may be repaired by adding a 5/16 inch fillet weld in place of missing flash. Extend fillet weld at least 3/8 inch beyond each end of discontinuity being repaired. Approved test studs may count as production studs. Welding
f.
3.2.1.2 a. b.
Weld with 5/8 inch diameter weldments at 12 inches OC. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.3 using methods and electrodes recommended by the manufacturers of the base metal alloys being used. Ensure only operators previously qualified by tests prescribed in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3 make welds. Immediately recertify, or replace qualified welders, that are producing unsatisfactory welding. Holes and similar defects will not be acceptable. Lap 2 inch roof deck ends. Attach all partial or segments of deck units to structural supports in accordance with Section 2.5 of SDI DDMO3. Attach shear connectors as shown and welded as per AWS D1.1/D1.1M through the steel deck to the steel member. Immediately clean welds by chipping and wire brushing. Heavily coat welds, cut edges and damaged portions of coated finish with zinc-dust paint conforming to ASTM A 780. Fastening
3.2.1.3
Lock sidelaps between adjacent floor deck units together at intervals not exceeding 36 inch on center by fastening with No. 10 self drilling screws. 3.2.2 a. Openings Unless otherwise shown, install closure plates at framed openings in concrete slabs, and end closures at framed openings through metal roof deck. Cut or drill all holes and openings required and be coordinated with the drawings, specifications, and other trades. Frame and reinforce openings through the deck in conformance with SDI DDP. Reinforce holes and openings 6 to 12 inch across by 0.045 inch thick steel sheet at least 12 inch wider and longer than the opening and be fastened to the steel deck at each corner of the sheet and at a maximum of 6 inch on center. Install steel channel frames at openings as indicated. Deck Damage
b.
3.2.3
SDI MOC2, for repair of deck damage. 3.2.4 3.2.4.1 Accessory Installation Adjusting Plates
Install as shown on shop drawings.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.2.4.2
End Closures
Provide end closure to close open ends of cells at columns, walls, and openings in deck. 3.2.4.3 Closures Above Partitions
Install closures above partitions as indicated on the Architectural drawings. 3.2.4.4 Cover Plates
Where concrete leakage would be a problem, provide metal cover plates, at joints between decking sheets, to be covered with concrete fill. 3.2.4.5 Column Closures
Provide for spaces between floor decking and columns which penetrate the deck. Field cut closure plate to fit column in the field and tack weld to decking and columns. 3.2.4.6 Access Hole Covers
Provide to seal holes cut in decking to facilitate welding of decking to structural supports. 3.2.4.7 Hangers
Do not hang loads from metal roof or floor deck. 3.2.5 Concrete Work
Prior to placement of concrete, inspect installed decking to ensure that there has been no permanent deflection or other damage to decking. Replace decking which has been damaged or permanently deflected as approved by the Contracting Officer. Place concrete on metal deck in accordance with Construction Practice of SDI 31. 3.2.6 Preparation of Fire-Proofed Surfaces which are to all grease, mill impair adhesion of to steel deck with the sprayed-on
Provide deck surfaces, both composite and noncomposite, receive sprayed-on fireproofing, galvanized and free of oil, paraffin, dirt, salt, and other contaminants which the fireproofing. Complete any required cleaning prior installation using a cleaning method that is compatible fireproofing. 3.3 ROOF SUMP PANS
Place sump pans over openings in roof decking and welded to top surface of roof decking. Do not exceed spacing of welds of 12 inch with not less than one weld at each corner. Field cut opening in the bottom of each roof sump pan to receive the roof drain as part of the work of this section. 3.4 CANT STRIPS FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide strips to be welded to surface of roof decking, secured to wood nailers by galvanized screws or to steel framing by galvanized self-tapping screws or welds. Do not exceed spacing of welds and fasteners of 12 inch. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 30 00 - Page 12 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Lap end joints a minimum 3 inch and secure with galvanized sheet metal screws spaced a maximum 4 inch on center. 3.5 RIDGE AND VALLEY PLATES FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide plates to be welded to top surface of roof decking. Lap end joints a minimum 3 inch. For valley plates, provide endlaps to be in the direction of water flow. 3.6 CLOSURE STRIPS FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide closure strips at open, uncovered ends and edges of the roof decking and in voids between roof decking and top of walls and partitions where indicated. Install closure strips in position in a manner to provide a weathertight installation. 3.7 ROOF INSULATION SUPPORT FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide metal closure strips for support of roof insulation where rib openings in top surface of metal roof decking occur adjacent to edges and openings. Weld or screw metal closure strips in position. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION FOR ROOF DECKS
Upon completion of the deck, sweep surfaces clean and prepare for installation of the roofing. 3.9 3.9.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Decks Not Receiving Concrete
Inspect the decking top surface for distortion after installation. For roof decks not receiving concrete, verify distortion by placing a straight edge across three adjacent top flanges. The maximum allowable gap between the straight edge and the top flanges is 1/16 inch; when gap is more than 1/16 inch, provide corrective measures or replacement. Reinspect decking after performing corrective measures or replacement. 3.9.2 a. b. Headed Shear Stud Test headed shear studs in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Test the first two studs at start of each day's or shift's production. If there is a change in weld set up, test the next two studs. A change in weld set up is defined as a change of any of the following; stud gun, power source, stud diameter, gun lift and plunge, total welding lead length, or changes greater than plus or minus 5 percent in current (amperage) and time. Visually examine test studs. They shall exhibit full 360 degree flash.
c. d. e.
Bend test studs to approximately 30 degrees from their original axis. If studs do not exhibit 360 degree flash or if they fail during bending, modify welding procedure. Test two additional studs as specified above. If either of the second set of studs fail, modify welding set up, and weld new test studs to separate plates. Continue this procedure until welding set up yields two successful test studs.
Ft. Detrick, MD
f.
Visually examine all production studs for full 360 degree flash. Production studs without full flash may be repaired as specified. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI) AISI SG02-1 (2001) North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members (2002) Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual
AISI SG-973
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) AWS D1.3 (1998) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 123/A 123M (2002) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products (2005) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware (2005) Mechanical Testing of Steel Products (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process (1998e1) Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel (2003) Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases (2007a) Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction
ASTM A 153/A 153M
ASTM A 370 ASTM A 653/A 653M
ASTM B 633
ASTM C 955
ASTM E 329
Ft. Detrick, MD
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE) SAE J78 1.2 SUBMITTALS (1998) Steel Self Drilling Tapping Screws
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Framing Components a. Cross sections, plans, and/or elevations showing component types and locations for each framing application; including shop coatings and material thicknesses for each framing component. Provide plans for each floor. Do not use combined plans showing more than one floor. Do not use typical plans unless pertinent plan conditions are identical. b. Connection details showing fastener type, quantity, location, and other information to assure proper installation. c. Drawings depicting panel configuration, dimensions, components, locations, and construction sequence if the Contractor elects to install prefabricated/prefinished frames. SD-03 Product Data Steel studs, tracks, bracing, bridging and accessories SD-05 Design Data Structural Calculations; G, AE Signed and sealed by the designing Professional Engineer. Metal framing calculations; G, AE SD-07 Certificates Mill Certification Signed by sheet steel producer indicating material complies with specified requirements. Load-bearing cold-formed metal framing Mill certificates or test reports from independent testing agency, qualified in accordance with ASTM E 329, showing that the steel sheet used in the manufacture of each cold-formed component complies with the minimum yield strengths and uncoated steel thickness specified. Test reports shall be based on the results of three coupon tests in accordance with ASTM A 370. Welds Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 40 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Certified copies of welder qualifications test records showing qualification in accordance with AWS D1.3. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to job site and store in adequately ventilated, dry locations. Storage area shall permit easy access for inspection and handling. If necessary to store materials outside, stack off the ground, support on a level platform, and protect from the weather as approved. Handle materials to prevent damage. Finish of the framing members shall be maintained at all times, using an approved high zinc dust content, galvanizing repair paint whenever necessary to prevent the formation of rust. Replace damaged items with new, as directed by the Contracting Officer. 1.4 a. LOAD-BEARING COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Include top and bottom tracks, bracing, fastenings, and other accessories necessary for complete installation. Framing members shall have the structural properties indicated. Where physical structural properties are not indicated, they shall be as necessary to withstand all imposed loads. Design framing in accordance with AISI SG-973. Section Includes: 1. 2. Exterior enclosure framing. Transition zone walkable ceiling framing (coordinate with miscellaneous metal design for tube girders, refer to Section 05 50 00 METAL: MISCELLANEOUS AND FABRICATIONS) in ABSL-3E and BSL-3E areas. Base bid gypsum board partitions supporting transition zone walkable ceiling framing in BSL-3E laboratories. Boxed stud and double stud posts to support headers over ribbon windows and soffit conditions. Boxed and double stud headers over ribbon windows and soffit conditions. ABSL-2 ceiling framing and partition bracing. Fire rated gypsum board partitions supporting precast concrete planks, coordinate with Section 03 41 33.00 10. Fire rated suspended horizontal shaft wall assemblies. Fire Rated Gypsum Board Partitions at Masonry Veneer.
b.
3.
4.
5.
6. 7.
8. 9. c.
Non-load-bearing metal framing, furring, and ceiling suspension systems are specified in Section 09 22 00 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES. Metal suspension systems for acoustical ceilings are specified in Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS. MAXIMUM DEFLECTION Exterior and Interior Studs: L/360, unless otherwise noted (at masonry
1.5 a.
Ft. Detrick, MD
veneer). b. Wall deflections shall be computed on the basis that studs withstand all lateral forces independent of any composite action from sheathing materials. Studs abutting windows or louvers shall also be designed not to exceed 1/4 inch maximum deflection. Exterior Studs for Mechanical Penthouse: The following information is provided for bidding purposes only. The final design of the cold-formed metal framing to the specified blast loads will remain the responsibility of the bidder. Steel Stud walls are used for the mechanical penthouse. Two studs will be doubled (placed back to back) at 44 inches on center and will span the approximate 31.5-foot height with a structural steel horizontal support at mid height. The studs were modeled as having fixed simple supports, with the fixed support representing the conditions provided by the continuous span over the center support. The studs will be covered by a double skin insulated steel panel. Studs having the following properties will be adequate (Depth = 12 inches, Ixx = 42.45 in4, t = 0.096 in, ry = 1.38 in). The top and bottom of these studs should be secured in tracks with TEK Screws. QUALITY ASSURANCE Drawing Requirements
c.
1.6 1.6.1
Submit framing components to show sizes, thicknesses, layout, material designations, methods of installation, connections, and accessories. Show attachment of adjacent assemblies relying on cold-formed metal framing for support. 1.6.2 Design Data Required
Submit metal framing calculations to verify sizes, gages, and spacing of members and connections. Show methods and practices used in installation. 1.7 MOCK-UP
Provide products and installation for portion of exterior on-site mock-up indicated on Drawing A3.31. Provide products and installation as specified in this Section 05 40 00 for in-place mock-ups specified in Section 01 45 10. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS STEEL STUDS, TRACKS, BRACING, BRIDGING AND ACCESSORIES
Framing components shall comply with ASTM C 955 and the following. 2.1.1 Studs, of 16 Gage (0.0598 Inch) and Heavier U.O.N.
Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, SS Grade 50, G90. 2.1.2 2.1.2.1 Load Design Criteria Walls
Steel stud walls at BSL-2 mechanical penthouse to be covered by a double skin insulated steel panel shall be minimum 12 gage, 12 inches depth with the following minimum properties: Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 40 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Ixx = 42.45 in4, t=0.096 in, vy=1.38 in. Space 16 inches on center except where loads require closer spacing. Follow wind load requirements specified in Section 01 41 60 WIND LOAD DESIGN CRITERIA. 2.1.2.2 a. b. Transition Zone Walkable Ceiling Framing Dead Load: Actual dead loading, but not less than 10 psf.
Live Load: Uniform, live load of 35 psf; and non-concurrent point load of 300 pounds at mid span of any member. Vertical load (pressure): 10 psf. Utilize 6 inch studs for uniform depth of framing, 20 gauge minimum for attachment of fiber reinforced gypsum board.
c. d.
2.1.2.3 Base Bid Gypsum Board Partitions Supporting Transition Zone Walkable Ceiling Framing a. Dead Load: Self weight (including gypsum board) + Dead Load reaction from ceiling framing. Live Load: Live Load reaction from ceiling framing.
b. c. d.
Lateral load (pressure): 10 psf. Utilize 3-5/8 inch studs for uniform depth, 20 gauge minimum for attachment of fiber reinforced gypsum board.
2.1.2.4 Boxed Stud and Double Stud Posts to Support Headers Over Ribbon Windows and Soffit Conditions a. Dead Load: Self weight (including gypsum board) + Dead Load reaction from ceiling framing. Live Load: Live Load reaction from ceiling framing.
b. c. d.
Lateral load (pressure): 10 psf. Utilize 3-5/8 inch or 6 inch studs to coordinate with partition depth. Boxed studs parallel to partition run utilize 4 inch maximum studs to coordinate with electrical panel opening. Size gauge per calculations.
2.1.2.5 Boxed and Double Stud Headers Over Ribbon Windows and Soffit Conditions a. Dead Load: Self weight (including gypsum board) + Dead Load reaction from ceiling framing. Live Load: Live Load reaction from ceiling framing.
b. c. d.
Lateral Load (pressure): 10 psf. Utilize 3-5/8 inch studs for uniform depth, 20 gauge minimum for attachment of fiber reinforced gypsum board.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.1.2.6 a.
ABSL-2 Ceiling Framing and Partition Bracing Dead Load: Self weight (including gypsum board) + Dead Load reaction from ceiling framing. Live Load: Live Load reaction from ceiling framing.
b. c. d.
Lateral Load (pressure): 10 psf. Utilize 4 inch studs to coordinate with attachment of diffusers, 20 gauge minimum for fastening of fiber reinforced gypsum board. Fire Rated Gypsum Board Partitions Supporting Precast Concrete
2.1.2.7 Planks
Coordinate with Section 03 41 33.00 10 a. Dead Load: Self weight (including gypsum board) + Dead Load reaction from Precast Concrete Plank framing. Live Load: Live Load reaction from ceiling framing.
b.
Lateral Load (pressure): 10 psf. c. 2.1.2.8 a. b. Fire Rated Suspended Horizontal Shaft Wall Assemblies Dead Load: Self weight (including gypsum board).
Live Load: Uniform, live load of 30 psf; and non-concurrent point load of 300 pounds at mid span of any member. Vertical Pressure: 10 psf. Kickers or framing outside of fire rated shaft wall prohibited. Coordinate openings required with MEP trades. Fire Rated Gypsum Board Partitions at Masonry Veneer Dead Load: Self weight (including gypsum board) + Dead Load reaction from masonry veneer. Live Load: Live Load reaction from masonry veneer. L/720.
c. d.
2.1.2.9 a.
b. c. c. d.
Lateral load Deflection:
Lateral Load (pressure): 10 psf. Utilize 3-5/8 inch studs for uniform depth, 20 gauge minimum for attachment of gypsum board and masonry veneer anchors. Seismic Control
2.1.2.10
Follow Section 01 41 50 SEISMIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS. 2.2 MARKINGS
Studs and track shall have product markings stamped on the web of the section. The markings shall be repeated throughout the length of the member at a maximum spacing of 4 feet on center and shall be legible and Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 40 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
easily read. a. b. c. d. e. 2.3
The product marking shall include the following:
An ICBO number. Manufacturer's identification. Minimum delivered uncoated steel thickness. Protective coating designator. Minimum yield strength.
CONNECTIONS
Screws for steel-to-steel connections shall be self-drilling tapping in compliance with SAE J78 of the type, size, and location as shown on the shop drawings. Electroplated screws shall have a Type II coating in accordance with ASTM B 633. Screws, bolts, and anchors shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as appropriate. 2.4 PLASTIC GROMMETS
Supply plastic grommets, recommended by stud manufacturer, to protect electrical wires. Prevent metal to metal contact for plumbing pipes. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION FASTENING
Fasten framing members together by welding or by using self-drilling or self-tapping screws. Electrodes and screw connections shall be as required and indicated in the design calculations. 3.1.1 Welds
All welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.3, as modified by AISI SG02-1. All welders, welding operations, and welding procedures shall be qualified according to AWS D1.3. All welds shall be cleaned and coated with rust inhibitive galvanizing paint. Do not field weld materials lighter than 18 gage. 3.1.2 Screws
Screws shall be of the type, size, and location shown on the shop drawings. Screw penetration through joined materials shall not be less than three exposed threads. Minimum spacings and edge distances for screws shall be as specified in AISI SG02-1. Screws covered by sheathing materials shall have low profile heads. 3.1.3 Anchors
Anchors shall be of the type, size, and location shown on the shop drawings. 3.2 3.2.1 INSTALLATION Tracks Anchor
Provide accurately aligned runners at top and bottom of partitions. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 40 00 - Page 7
Ft. Detrick, MD
tracks as indicated in design calculations and on shop drawings. Butt weld joints in tracks or splice with stud inserts. Fasteners shall be at least 3 inches from the edge of concrete slabs. 3.2.2 Studs
Cut studs square and set with firm bearing against webs of top and bottom tracks. Position studs vertically in tracks and space as indicated in design. Do not splice studs. Provide at least two studs at jambs of doors and other openings 2 feet wide or larger. Provide jack studs over openings, as necessary, to maintain indicated stud spacing. Provide tripled studs at corners, positioned to receive interior and exterior finishes. Fasten studs to top and bottom tracks by welding or screwing both flanges to the tracks. Framed wall openings shall include headers and supporting components as shown on the drawings. Headers shall be installed in all openings that are larger than the stud spacing in a wall. In curtain wall construction, provide for vertical movement where studs connect to the structural frame. Provide horizontal bracing in accordance with the design calculations and AISI SG-973, consisting of, as a minimum, runner channel cut to fit between and welded to the studs or hot- or cold-rolled steel channels inserted through cutouts in web of each stud and secured to studs with welded clip angles. Bracing shall be not less than the following: LOAD Wind load only HEIGHT Up to 10 feet Over 10 feet Up to 10 feet Over 10 feet BRACING One row at mid-height Rows 5'-0" o.c. maximum Two rows at 1/3 points Rows 3'-4" o.c. maximum
Axial load
3.2.3 a.
Erection Tolerances Framing members which will be covered by finishes such as wallboard, plaster, or ceramic tile set in a mortar setting bed, shall be within the following limits: (1) Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position; (2) Plates and runners: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a straight line; (3) Studs: 1/4 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and (4) Face of framing members: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a true plane. Framing members which will be covered by ceramic tile set in dry-set mortar, latex-portland cement mortar, or organic adhesive shall be within the following limits: (1) Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position; (2) Plates and runners: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a straight line; (3) Studs: 1/8 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and (4) Face of framing members: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a true plane. Special Inspection
b.
3.2.4
Special inspections shall be done in accordance with Section 01 45 35 SPECIAL INSPECTION. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 05 50 00 METAL: MISCELLANEOUS AND FABRICATIONS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA) AA 46 (1978) Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum (2003) Designation System for Aluminum Finishes
AA DAF-45
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) AASHTO M 314 (1990; R 2004) Standard Specification for Steel Anchor Bolts
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC) AISC 303 (2005) Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (1999) Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)Specification for Structural Steel Buildings AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI A10.3 (1995) Operations -- Safety Requirements for Powder Actuated Fastening Systems (1996; Errata 2003) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series (1972; R 1993) Slotted Head Cap Screws, Square Head Set Screws, and Slotted Headless Set Screws (1998) Machine Screws and Machine Screw Nuts
AISC 350
ANSI B18.2.1
ANSI B18.6.2
ANSI B18.6.3
Ft. Detrick, MD
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME B18.2.2 (1987; R 2005) Standard for Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series) (1999; R 2005) Lock Washers (Inch Series) (1965; R 2003) Plain Washers
ASME B18.21.1 ASME B18.22.1
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 123/A 123M (2002) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products (2005) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware (2007e1) Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications (2005) Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application (2006) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes (2003; R 2007) Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates (2005) Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought General Requirements for (2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength (2005) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel (2001) Machine and Coil Chain (1999; R 2004) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip Process (2003) Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand (2007) Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes (2004) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Section 05 50 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
ASTM A 153/A 153M
ASTM A 240/A 240M
ASTM A 27/A 27M
ASTM A 276
ASTM A 283/A 283M
ASTM A 29/A 29M
ASTM A 307
ASTM A 36/A 36M
ASTM A 467/A 467M ASTM A 47/A 47M
ASTM A 475 ASTM A 500/A 500M
ASTM A 53 Issued for Construction 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A 570/A 570M (1998) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled (1996; R 2002) Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades (1990b; R 2006) Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality (2007) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling (2007) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process (1993) High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and Studs (2001; R 2006) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings (2000b) Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates (2007) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process (2003a) Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (2006) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (2005) Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings (2004) Standard Specification for Materials for Ferrous Powder Metallurgy (P/M) Structural Parts
ASTM A 575
ASTM A 576
ASTM A 6/A 6M
ASTM A 635/A 635M
ASTM A 653/A 653M
ASTM A 687
ASTM A 780
ASTM A 786/A 786M
ASTM A 924/A 924M
ASTM B 108
ASTM B 209
ASTM B 221
ASTM B 26/B 26M ASTM B 783
Ft. Detrick, MD
ASTM C 514
(2004) Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board (1997; R 2002e1) Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal (1996; R 2003) Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements (2004e1) Standard Test Method for Using a Variable Incidence Tribometer
ASTM D 1187
ASTM E 488
ASTM F 1679
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA) BHMA A156.21 (2006) Thresholds
MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI) MPI 79 (Jan 2004) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM) NAAMM MBG 531 NAAMM PR (2000) Metal Bar Grating Manual (2001) Pipe Railing Manual NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF CHAIN MANUFACTURERS (NACM) NACM (2005) Welded Steel Chain Specifications SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE) SAE J429 (1999) Mechanical and Material Requirements for Externally Threaded Fasteners THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC) SSPC SP 3 SSPC SP 6 (2004; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning (2000; E 2004) Commercial Blast Cleaning
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 29 CFR 1910.27 1.2 SUBMITTALS Fixed Ladders
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Transition Zones: Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Fabrication drawings of structural steel
Ft. Detrick, MD
framing in transition zones; G, AE Structural Steel Door Frames: steel door frames; G, AE Fabrication drawings of structural
Cover plates and frames, installation drawings; G, AE Platform, ramps, and landing gratings, and their supporting structures, fabrication and installation drawings; G, AE Fixed Ornamental Bollards; G, AR Removable Ornamental Bollards; G, AR Steel Bollards; G, AR Guardrails and Handrails, installation drawings; G, AE Ladders, installation drawings; G, AE Embedded Angles and Plates, installation drawings; G, AR Elevator Guide Rails; G, AR Elevator Counterweight Supports; G, AR For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, submit with shop drawings all calculations in reference to structural properties of all members, assemblies and connections prior to fabrication of any parts of the work and provide all additional structural members or increase gauge and weight of finished metals required for the proper erection and structural stability of the work. Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s), connections to structural system, and anchoring details as specified in AISC 303. Submit templates, erection and installation drawings indicating thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions. Show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction. SD-03 Product Data Manufacturer's catalog data shall include manufacturers specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, and anchor details for the following items: Cover plates and frames; G, AR Platform, ramps, and landing gratings; G, AR Guardrails and Handrails; G, AR Ladders; G, AR Structural steel door frames; G, AE Fixed Ornamental Bollards; G, AR
Ft. Detrick, MD
Removable Ornamental Bollards; G, AR Steel Bollards; G, AR Malleable Iron Castings; G, AR Concrete Inserts; G, AE Masonry Anchorage Devices; G, AE Protective Coatings; G, AE SD-05 Design Data Structural Calculations; G, AE For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer maintaining current registration in the United States of America and who is responsible for their preparation. Include: a. b. 1.3 Structural calculations. Seismic control calculations.
QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use procedures, materials, and equipment of the type required for the work. 1.4 1.4.1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Professional Engineer Qualifications
A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of floor grating ramps and platforms, and guardrail and handrail systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 1.4.2 Reference Specifications
Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified herein and to all applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 1.4.3 Design Data Required
Submit structural calculations for installed products indicated to comply with design loads, including structural analysis data and seismic control calculations 1.4.4 Mock-ups
Provide products and installation as specified in this Section 05 50 00 for in-place mock-ups specified in Section 01 45 10. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 50 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.5 1.5.1
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Live Load
Live loads shall be per prevailing State of Maryland Code, or as indicated, whichever is greater. 1.5.2 a. b. Transition Zone Walkable Surfaces: Dead Load: Actual dead loading, but not less than 10 psf.
Live Load: Uniform, live load of 35 psf; or point load of 300 psf at mid span of any member. Deflection: Maximum L/360.
c. 1.5.3
Steel Grating Platforms, Ramps and Stair Landings
Uniform, live load of 100 psf; or concentrated, live load of 300 pounds applied to an area of 4 square inches at midpoint of any span. Deflection shall not exceed L/240. 1.5.4 1.5.4.1 Guardrail and Handrail Assemblies Concentrated Load
250 pounds applied in any direction at any point along top of rail, and have attachment devices and supporting structure to transfer this loading to appropriate structural elements of the building. 1.5.4.2 Uniform Load
50 pounds per linear foot applied in any direction at the top rail and be transferred through the supports to the structure. 1.5.4.3 Loading
Concentrated and uniform loads are not required to be applied concurrently. 1.5.4.4 Intermediate Rails, Balusters and Panel Fillers
50 pounds applied horizontally to an area not to exceed one square foot including openings and space between rails. This load is not required to be applied simultaneously with concentrated or uniform loads on top rail. 1.5.5 Components
Design components to allow for expansion and contraction without buckling, excessive opening of joints, or overstressing of welds and fasteners. 1.5.6 Seismic Control
Follow Section 01 41 50 SEISMIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store items in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 50 00 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
and replace damaged items with new items. 1.7 MOCK-UP
Provide products and installation for portion of work specified in this Section 05 50 00 and indicated for exterior on-site mock-up on Drawing A3.31. PART 2 2.1 a. PRODUCTS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Items shall be preassembled in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Units shall be disassembled only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling. Units shall be clearly marked for reassembly and coordinated installation. For the fabrication of work exposed to view, only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness, shall be used. Blemishes shall be removed by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and application of surface finishes, including zinc coatings. MATERIALS Structural Carbon Steel
b.
2.2 2.2.1
ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.2.2 Structural Tubing
ASTM A 500/A 500M. 2.2.3 Steel Pipe
ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. 2.2.4 Fittings for Steel Pipe
Standard malleable iron fittings ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.2.5 Gratings
Metal bar type grating NAAMM MBG 531, ASTM A 6/A 6M, and ASTM A 29/A 29M. 2.2.6 Floor Plates, Patterned Steel plate thickness shall be as indicated
Floor plate ASTM A 786/A 786M. but not less than 14 gage. 2.2.7 Anchor Bolts
ASTM A 307. Where exposed, shall be of the same material, color, and finish as the metal to which applied. 2.2.7.1 Adhesive Anchors Design values
Provide adhesive anchors as required by structural design. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 50 00 - Page 8
Ft. Detrick, MD
listed shall be as tested according to ASTM E 488. 2.2.8 a. Concrete Inserts Threaded-type concrete inserts shall consist of galvanized castings, internally threaded to receive 3/4-inch diameter bolts; either malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M steel conforming to ASTM A 27/A 27M, hot-dip galvanized in with ASTM A 153/A 153M. ferrous machine or cast accordance
b.
Wedge-type concrete inserts shall consist of galvanized box-type ferrous castings designed to accept 3/4-inch diameter bolts having special wedge-shaped heads; they shall be either malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M or cast steel conforming to ASTM A 27/A 27M and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Carbon steel bolts having special wedge-shaped heads, nuts, washers, and shims shall be provided and galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Slotted-type concrete inserts shall consist of galvanized 1/8-inch thick pressed steel plate conforming to ASTM A 283/A 283M; they shall be of box-type welded construction with slot designed to receive 3/4-inch diameter square-head bolt with knockout cover; and shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Masonry Anchorage Devices
c.
2.2.9
Masonry anchorage devices shall consist of expansion shields complying with AASHTO M 314, ASTM E 488 and ASTM C 514 as follows: a. Lead expansion shields shall be provided for machine screws and bolts 1/4 inch and smaller; head-out embedded nut type, single unit class, Group I, Type 1, Class 1. Lead expansion shields shall be provided for machine screws and bolts larger than 1/4 inch in size; head-out embedded nut type, multiple unit class, Group I, Type 1, Class 2. Bolt anchor expansion shields shall be provided for lag bolts; zinc-alloy, long shield anchors class, Group II, Type 1, Class 1. Bolt anchor expansion shields shall be provided for bolts; closed-end bottom bearing class, Group II, Type 2, Class 1. Fasteners Lag Screws and Bolts
b.
c.
d.
2.2.10 2.2.10.1
ANSI B18.2.1, type and grade best suited for the purpose. 2.2.10.2 Toggle Bolts
ANSI B18.2.1. 2.2.10.3 Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets
ASME B18.2.2 and ASTM A 687 or ASTM A 307.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.2.10.4
Powder Driven Fasteners
Follow safety provisions of ANSI A10.3. 2.2.10.5 Screws
ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.6.2, and ANSI B18.6.3. 2.2.10.6 Washers
Provide plain washers to conform to ASME B18.22.1. Provide beveled washers for American Standard beams and channels, square or rectangular, tapered in thickness, and smooth. Provide lock washers to conform to ASME B18.21.1. 2.2.11 Aluminum Alloy Products
Conform to ASTM B 209 for sheet plate, ASTM B 221 for extrusions and ASTM B 26/B 26M or ASTM B 108 for castings, as applicable. Provide aluminum extrusions at least 1/8 inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at least 0.050 inch thick. 2.3 2.3.1 FABRICATION FINISHES Galvanizing
Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication where practicable. Galvanizing: ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 924/A 924M, G90, as applicable. 2.3.2 Galvanize
Anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and parts or devices necessary for proper installation, unless indicated otherwise. 2.3.3 Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces
Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming to ASTM A 780 or by application of stick or thick paste material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved by Contracting Officer. Clean areas to be repaired and remove slag from welds. Heat surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied, with a torch to a temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste; spread molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe off excess material. 2.3.4 2.3.4.1 Shop Cleaning and Painting Surface Preparation
Blast clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6. Surfaces that will be exposed in spaces above ceiling or in attic spaces, crawl spaces, furred spaces, and chases may be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 3 in lieu of being blast cleaned. Wash cleaned surfaces which become contaminated with rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants with solvents until thoroughly clean. Steel to be embedded in concrete shall be free of dirt and grease. Do not paint or galvanize bearing surfaces, including contact surfaces within slip critical joints, but coat with rust preventative applied in the shop.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.3.4.2
Pretreatment, Priming and Painting
Apply pretreatment, primer, and paint in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2.3.5 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces
Protect by plating, anodic, or organic coatings. 2.3.6 2.3.6.1 Aluminum Surfaces Surface Condition
Before finishes are applied, remove roll marks, scratches, rolled-in scratches, kinks, stains, pits, orange peel, die marks, structural streaks, and other defects which will affect uniform appearance of finished surfaces. 2.3.6.2 Aluminum Finishes
Unexposed sheet, plate and extrusions may have mill finish as fabricated. Sandblast castings' finish, medium, AA DAF-45, or AA 46. Unless otherwise specified, all other aluminum items shall have anodized finish. The thickness of the coating shall be not less than that specified for protective and decorative type finishes for items used in interior locations or architectural Class I type finish for items used in exterior locations in AA DAF-45. Items to be anodized shall receive a polished satin finish. 2.4 CORNER GUARDS AND SHIELDS
Follow Section 10 26 13 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS. 2.5 COVER PLATES AND FRAMES
Unless indicated otherwise fabricate cover plates of 1/4 inch thick rolled steel weighing not more than 100 pounds per plate with a selected raised pattern nonslip top surface. Plate shall be galvanized. Reinforce to sustain a live load of 100 pounds per square foot. Frames shall be structural steel shapes and plates, with bent steel bars or headed anchors welded to frame for anchoring to concrete or securely fastened to the structure as indicated. Miter and weld all corners. Butt joint straight runs. Allow for expansion on straight runs over 15 feet. Provide holes for lifting tools. Provide holes and openings with 1/2 inch clearance for pipes and equipment. Remove sharp edges and burrs from cover plates and exposed edges of frames. Weld all connections and grind top surface smooth. Weld bar stops every six inches. Provide 1/8 inch clearance at edges and between cover plates. 2.6 PLATFORM, RAMPS AND LANDING GRATINGS
Design steel grating in accordance with NAAMM MBG 531 for bar type grating. Galvanize steel floor gratings. a. Design gratings to support a live load as indicated in article "Regulatory Requirements" for the spans indicated, with maximum deflection of L/240. NAAMM MBG 531, band ends of gratings with bars of the same or greater thickness than the metal used for grating. Weld banding bars to the Section 05 50 00 - Page 11 For Official Use Only
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
bearing bars or channels at least every fourth bar or channel and in every corner. Tack weld intervening bars or channels. Band diagonal or round cuts by welding bars of the same or greater thickness metal used for grating in accordance with the manufacturer's standard for trim unless otherwise indicated. Design tops of bearing bars, cross or intermediate bars to be in the same plane and match grating finish. c. Anchor gratings to structural members with bolts, toggle bolts, or expansion shields and bolts. Slip resistance requirements must exceed both wet and dry a static coefficient of friction of 0.5 as tested in accordance with ASTM F 1679. Galvanized finish shall conform to ASTM A 123/A 123M. Grating platforms at stair landings shall be fabricated with nosing matching that on grating treads specified in 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS. Toe-plates shall be provided at open-sided edges of floor grating to ramp and platform framing members. GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS) Fixed Bollards
d.
e. f.
2.7 2.7.1
Provide 8 inch galvanized weight steel pipe, wall thickness of 0.875 inches as specified in ASTM A 53. Anchor posts in concrete as indicated and fill solidly with concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi. Provide electrostatically applied powder coat, yellow color as approved by AE. 2.7.2 a. Fixed Ornamental Bollards Bollard Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M Grade B structural steel tube, 6 inch diameter nominal pipe size. Bollard Top: Aluminum, type 5052-H32, 10.78 inch outside diameter.
b. c.
Fasteners: Top retaining screw shall be 5/16-18 x 1 inch hex socket button head cap screw, stainless steel; mates with 5/16-18 stainless steel threaded insert. Cover Ring: Spun aluminum, .160 inch thick type 5052-H32. 10.78 inches outside diameter for 6 inch embedded bollard, 10.91 inches outside diameter for 6 inch surface mounted bollard. Finish: Rust inhibitor and topcoat finish of thermosetting polyester powdercoat that is U.V., chip and flake resistant. Removable Ornamental Bollards Description
d.
e.
2.7.3 2.7.3.1 a.
Bollard Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M Grade B structural steel tube, 6 inch diameter nominal pipe size. Bollard Top: Aluminum, type 5052-H32, 10.78 inch outside diameter.
b. c.
Bollard Socket: ASTM A 500/A 500M Grade B structural 8 inch nominal pipe size. Provide 2-piece cover plate 1/4 inch carbon steel plate Section 05 50 00 - Page 12 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
that stores in socket, with cover plate security chain of NACM 3/16 grade 30 steel chain, cold galvanized. d. Removable Bollard Latching Mechanism: ASTM A 276 Type 304 stainless steel components and National Cabinet Lock #C8054-C390A-14A keyed alike, supplied with four brass keys. Fasteners: Top retaining screw shall be 5/16-18 x 1 inch hex socket button head cap screw, stainless steel; mates with 5/16-18 stainless steel threaded insert. Removable bollard adjusting screws shall be 3/8-16 x 1 inch hex head cap screw, thin nut, and round base weld nut, all stainless steel. Cover Ring: Spun aluminum, .160 inch thick type 5052-H32. 10.78 inches outside diameter for 6 inch embedded bollard, 10.91 inches outside diameter for 6 inch surface mounted bollard. Finish: Rust inhibitor and topcoat finish of thermosetting polyester powdercoat that is U.V., chip and flake resistant. GUARDRAILS AND HANDRAILS
e.
f.
g.
2.8
Design guardrails handrails to resist specified live loads, and in accordance with NAAMM PR, provide the same size rail and post. Provide pipe collars of the same material and finish as the handrail and posts. 2.8.1 Steel Guardrails and Handrails, Including Carbon Steel Inserts
Provide steel handrails, including inserts in concrete, steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53 or structural tubing conforming to ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade A or B of equivalent strength. Provide steel railings of1 1/2 inches nominal size. Exterior railings shall be hot-dip galvanized. a. Fabrication: methods: Joint posts, rail, and corners by one of the following
(1) Flush-type rail fittings of commercial standard, welded and ground smooth with railing splice locks secured with 3/8 inch hexagonal-recessed-head setscrews. (2) Mitered and welded joints made by fitting post to top rail and intermediate rail to post, mitering corners, groove welding joints, and grinding smooth. Butt railing splices and reinforce them by a tight fitting interior sleeve not less than 6 inches long. (3) Railings may be bent at corners in lieu of jointing, provided bends are made in suitable jigs and the pipe is not crushed. b. c. Provide removable sections as indicated. Where railings are to be galvanized, vent holes provided in railings and posts for galvanizing shall be located at underside of rails and at lowest elevations of horizontal or sloped rails and at bottom of posts such that all railings are drainable. LADDERS Use
2.9
Fabricate vertical ladders conforming to Section 7 of 29 CFR 1910.27. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 50 00 - Page 13
Ft. Detrick, MD
2 1/2 by 3/8 inch steel flats for stringers and 3/4 inch diameter steel rods for rungs. Rungs to be not less than 16 inches wide, spaced one foot apart, plug welded or shouldered and headed into stringers. Install ladders so that the distance from the rungs to the finished wall surface will not be less than 7 inches. Provide heavy clip angles riveted or bolted to the stringer and drilled for not less than two 1/2 inch diameter expansion bolts as indicated. Provide intermediate clip angles not over 48 inches on centers. 2.9.1 Ladder Cages
Conform to 29 CFR 1910.27. Fabricate 2 by 1/4 inch horizontal bands and 1-1/2 by 3/16 inch vertical bars. Provide attachments for fastening bands to the side rails of ladders or directly to the structure. Provide and fasten vertical bars on the inside of the horizontal bands. Extend cages not less than 27 inches or more than 28 inches from the centerline of the rungs, excluding the flare at the bottom of the cage, and not less than 27 inches in width. Clear the inside of the cage of projections. 2.10 a. MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES Provide for items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework, such as lintels, sill angles, tube steel girders for transition zone framing, support framing for ceiling-mounted toilet partitions, elevator guide rails, elevator counterweight supports, miscellaneous mountings and frames. Provide lintels fabricated from structural steel shapes over openings in masonry walls and partitions as indicated and as required to support wall loads over openings. Provide with connections as indicated. Construct to have at least 8 inches bearing on masonry at each end unless indicated otherwise. Provide angles and plates, ASTM A 36/A 36M, for embedment as indicated. Galvanize embedded items exposed to the elements according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. SAFETY CHAINS
b.
2.11
Construct safety chains of galvanized steel, straight link type, 3/16 inch diameter, with at least twelve links per foot, and with snap hooks on each end. Safety chain shall be tested in accordance with ASTM A 467/A 467M, Class CS. Provide snap hooks of boat type. Provide galvanized 3/8 inch bolt with 3/4 inch eye diameter for attachment of chain, anchored as indicated. Supply two chains, 4 inches longer than the anchorage spacing, for each guarded area. Locate safety chain where indicated. Mount the top chain 3 feet 6 inches above the floor and mount the lower chain 2 feet above the floor. 2.12 SAFETY NOSINGS FOR CONCRETE TREADS
Provide safety nosings of cast iron with cross-hatched abrasive-surfaces. Nosing to be at least 4 inches wide and 1/4 inch thick and terminating at not more than 6 inches from the ends of treads for stairs and for platforms and landings. Provide safety nosings with anchors embedded a minimum of 3/4 inch in the concrete and with tops flush with the top of the traffic surface. 2.13 a. ALUMINUM INTERLOCKING RAMP TRANSITIONS 1-1/2 inches high, ADA compliant interlocking ramp, mill finished Section 05 50 00 - Page 14 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
aluminum with slip resistant finish, and meeting the requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.21. Provide return closed ends for ramps where ends of ramps are exposed. b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following manufacturers and products named are acceptable. 1. 2. 2.14 National Guard Products, ADA Compliant Interlocking Ramp R150. Pemko Manufacturing Company, Inc.
SECURITY GRILLES
Fabricate of channel frames with not less than two masonry anchors at each jamb and 1/2 inch hardened steel bars spaced not over 4 inches both ways and welded to frame. Provide 18 by 16 mesh screen and two layers of 1/4 inch hardware cloth clamped to frame. 2.15 STRUCTURAL STEEL DOOR FRAMES
Provide frames of structural shapes and plate as indicated. Miter and weld heads to jambs, or have riveted clip angle connections concealed in the finished work. Stiffen head openings greater than 3 feet sufficient to limit deflection to not more than 1/16 inch. Secure frames to masonry with zinc-coated metal anchors spaced not more than 30 inches on centers. Where track, guides, hoods, hangers, operators, and other such accessories are required, provide support as indicated; tap frames and reinforcing plates as necessary for the installation of hardware and other work. Countersink rivets and screw heads where exposed in the finished work. Grind welds smooth. 2.16 GUY CABLES
Guy cables shall be prestretched, galvanized wire rope of the sizes indicated. Wire rope shall conform to ASTM A 475, high strength grade with Class A coating. Guys shall have a factory attached clevis top-end fitting; guys shall have a factory attached open-bridge strand socket bottom-end fitting; guys shall be complete with oval eye, threaded anchor rods. Fittings and accessories shall be hot-dip galvanized. 2.17 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
Follow Section 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS. 2.18 a. SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following manufacturers and products named are acceptable. 1. 2. Unistrut, 35660 Clinton Street, Wayne, MI 48184 Tel: 800 521-7730. Power Engineering Co. (Powerstrut), 420 Boston Turnpike, Shrewsbury, MA Tel: 800 274-1303. Kumar Industries, 4881 Chino Ave., Chino, CA 91710 Tel: (909) 591-0722. Cooper B-Line Inc. (B-Line), 509 West Monroe St., Highland, IL 62249 Tel: (618) 654-2184. Section 05 50 00 - Page 15 For Official Use Only
3.
4.
Ft. Detrick, MD
b.
Materials: Channel and framing members shall be fabricated from steel conforming to the following requirements: 1. Framing Members: (a) Concealed Framing Members and Fittings: GR 33. ASTM A 570/A 570M
(b) Exposed Framing Members and Fittings: ASTM A 653/A 653M GR A with zinc coating conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M. (c) Stainless Steel Framing Members and Fittings: ASTM A 240/A 240M (Type 304), where indicated. 2. Fittings: (a) Concealed Fittings: Fabricate from steel satisfying the requirements of ASTM A 570/A 570M GR 33, and conform to the following ASTM specifications: ASTM A 575, ASTM A 576, ASTM A 36/A 36M, or ASTM A 635/A 635M. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A 576 GR 1015 and screws shall conform to SAE J429 GR 2 and ASTM A 307. (b) Exposed Fittings: Fabricate from steel satisfying the requirements of ASTM A 570/A 570M GR 33, and conform to the following ASTM specifications: ASTM A 575, ASTM A 576, ASTM A 36/A 36M, or ASTM A 635/A 635M. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A 576 GR 1015 and screws shall conform to SAE J429 GR 2 and ASTM A 307. Exposed fittings shall receive zinc coating conforming to ASTM A 635/A 635M. (c) Stainless Steel Fittings and Hardware: Sintered Nuts shall be of ASTM B 783 (Type 316N2-33) stainless steel and fittings shall be of ASTM A 240/A 240M (Type 304) stainless steel. Stainless steel fittings and hardware shall be used with stainless steel framing members, or where indicated. 2.19 Column Covers
Stainless steel column covers, 1/8 inch thick, 30 to 40 percent perforated matching perforations in sunscreen specified in Section 08 44 00. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall take all field measurements necessary before fabrication. Exposed fastenings shall be compatible materials, shall generally match in color and finish, and shall harmonize with the material to which fastenings are applied. Materials and parts necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely shown or specified, shall be included. Poor matching of holes for fasteners shall be cause for rejection. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports shall provide strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water.Items listed below require additional procedures. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 50 00 - Page 16 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.2
WORKMANSHIP
Miscellaneous metalwork shall be well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines and angles and true curves. Drilling and punching shall produce clean true lines and surfaces. Welding shall be continuous along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted. Exposed connections of work in place shall not be tack welded. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth. Exposed surfaces of work in place shall have a smooth finish, and unless otherwise approved, exposed riveting shall be flush. Where tight fits are required, joints shall be milled. Corner joints shall be coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Work shall be accurately set to established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved drawings, cuts, and details. 3.3 CONNECTIONS FOR STEEL FRAMING
Except as modified in this section, connections not detailed shall be designed in accordance with AISC 350. Build connections into existing work. Do not tighten anchor bolts set in concrete with impact torque wrenches. Punch, subpunch and ream, or drill bolt holes perpendicular to the surface of the member. Holes shall not be cut or enlarged by burning. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be clean of dirt and rust, and lubricated immediately prior to installation. 3.4 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners, when approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine and carriage bolts for steel; through bolts, lag bolts, and screws for wood. Do not use wood plugs in any material. Provide non-ferrous attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make exposed fastenings of compatible materials, generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable. 3.5 BUILT-IN WORK
Form for anchorage metal work built-in with concrete or masonry, or provide with suitable anchoring devices as indicated or as required. Furnish metal work in ample time for securing in place as the work progresses. 3.6 WELDING
Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use continuous welds on all exposed connections. Grind visible welds smooth in the finished installation. 3.7 3.7.1 FINISHES Dissimilar Materials
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coat conforming to MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete, plaster, mortar, masonry, wood, or absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect with ASTM D 1187, asphalt-base emulsion. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 50 00 - Page 17 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.7.2
Field Preparation
Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a remover approved by the rust preventive manufacturer. Surfaces, when assembled, shall be free of rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter. 3.7.3 Environmental Conditions
Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy weather, when metallic surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface temperature is below 45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless approved by the Contracting Officer. 3.8 COVER PLATES AND FRAMES
Install the tops of cover plates and frames flush with floor. 3.9 HANDRAILS
Toeboards and brackets shall be installed where indicated. Splices, where required, shall be made at expansion joints. Removable sections shall be installed as indicated. 3.9.1 Steel Handrail
Railings shall be adjusted prior to securing in place to ensure proper matching at butting joints and correct alignment throughout their length. Posts shall be spaced as indicated but not more than 8 feet on center. Posts shall be plumbed in each direction. Posts and rail ends shall be secured to building construction as follows: a. Posts shall be anchored in concrete by means of pipe sleeves set and anchored into concrete. Sleeves of galvanized, standard weight, steel pipe, not less than 6 inches long, and having an inside diameter not less than 1/2-inch greater than the outside diameter of the inserted pipe post shall be provided. Steel plate closure secured to the bottom of the sleeve shall be provided; closure shall be of width and length not less than 1-inch greater than the outside diameter of the sleeve. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, the annular space between post and sleeve shall be filled with molten lead, sulfur, or a quick-setting hydraulic cement. Anchorage joint shall be covered with a round steel flange welded to the post. Posts shall be anchored to interior concrete floor slabs with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and and anchored into the floor slab with expansion anchors and bolts. Posts shall be anchored to steel with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to the steel supporting members, unless indicated otherwise. Rail ends shall be anchored into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into the wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts, unless indicated otherwise. Rail ends shall be anchored to steel with steel oval or round flanges Section 05 50 00 - Page 18 For Official Use Only
b.
c.
d.
e.
Ft. Detrick, MD
welded to tail ends and bolted to the structural steel members, unless indicated otherwise. f. Rail ends shall be anchored to steel-framed gypsum board assemblies with steel oval or round flanges fastened directly to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads, unless indicated otherwise. LADDERS
3.10
Secure to the adjacent construction with the clip angles attached to the stringer. Install intermediate clip angles not over 48 inches on center. Install brackets as required for securing of ladders welded or bolted to structural steel or built into the masonry or concrete. In no case shall ends of ladders rest upon finished roof or floor. Install ladders 2 inches clear of flooring. Install ladders 4 inches clear of finished roofing. 3.11 INSTALLATION OF GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS)
Pipe guards shall be set vertically in concrete piers. Piers shall be constructed of, and the hollow cores of the pipe filled with, concrete specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. 3.12 MOUNTING OF SAFETY CHAINS
Safety chains shall be mounted 3 feet 6 inches and 2 feet above the floor. 3.13 INSTALLATION OF SAFETY NOSINGS
Nosing shall be completely embedded in concrete before the initial set of the concrete occurs and shall finish flush with the top of the concrete surface. 3.14 STRUCTURAL STEEL DOOR FRAMES
Door frames shall be secured to the floor slab by means of angle clips and expansion bolts. Any necessary reinforcements shall be made and the frames shall be drilled and tapped as required for hardware.
3.15
Column Covers
Inspect covers to be free from dents, scratches, and other defects prior to installation. Install column covers in accordance with installation instructions and shop drawings. Erect plumb, level, true to line, securely anchored, and in proper alignment and relationship to work of other trades. Protect covers from damage after installation. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 05 50 10.00 SPECIAL METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2006; Errata 2006) Structural Welding Code - Steel (1998) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel (1999) Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 240/A 240M (2007e1) Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications (2006) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes (2005) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel (2007) Standard Specifications for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for (2002e2) Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs (2002) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts
AWS D1.3
AWS D1.6
ASTM A 276
ASTM A 36/A 36M
ASTM A 568/A 568M
ASTM F 593
ASTM F 594
1.2 1.2.1
SUMMARY Section Includes
Fabricated metal items intended for installation in A/BSL3E, and A/BSL4 containment laboratories, specifically designated rooms and other specified fabricated items requiring a high level quality control including, but not necessarily limited to the following:
Section 05 50 10.00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. 1.2.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. G.
Dunk tanks. Breathing air hose racks. Service chases. Penetrations. Support for free standing (floor mounted) wall guards. Boot shelves and utility shelves. Metal barrier walls. Panel-mounted custom stainless steel sinks. Stainless steel chemical shower and airlock panels. VHP decontamination ports. Pressurezed suit hanging racks. Telemetry support racks. Liguid nitrogen ports. Wall guards at biometric devices. Other custom fabrications. Related Sections Section 01 45 70 ROOM INTEGRITY TESTING. Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING. Section 05 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF METALS. Section 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS, for mild steel sub-frames. Section 09 97 00 SPECIAL COATINGS. Division 22 - Plumbing, for mechanical service and connection. Division 26 - Electrical, for electrical services and systems including BMS. Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security, for door access control systems. Section 12 25 53.26 - CUSTOM STAINLESS STEEL LABORATORY CASEWORK. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section
H.
I. 1.2.3
Furnish service fittings and fixtures to Section 22 10 05 BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS for installation.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.3 1.3.1
DEFINITIONS High Containment Laboratory
Room requiring chemically resistant, easily cleanable, air tight barrier systems including all walls, floors, ceilings, penetrations and closures. 1.4 1.4.1 A. B. 1.4.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General Joints: fully welded and ground smooth. Surfaces: smooth, free sharp edges and easily cleanable. Air Infiltration
Fabricated metal dunk tank and containment barrier wall panels shall be capable of becoming integrated into a room that shall be tested for air tightness as described in Section 01 45 70 ROOM INTEGRITY TESTING. 1.5 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Metal fabrication; G, AE and installationG, AE details a. Include location of each item, dimensioned plans, elevations, sections and details of each fabricated unit, large-scale details, attachment and anchorage devices, and other components. b. Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details, accessories, fastener and hardware details, continuous vertical support locations, and elevations of wall mounted items. c. Indicate welds by welding symbols.
d. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. e. Indicate proposed or anticipated locations of stainless steel repair compound. SD-03 Product Data Special Metal Fabrications; G, AE For manufactured catalog items SD-04 Samples Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 50 10.00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Hardware; G, AE Hardware items, washers, drop-in anchors: duplicate samples showing welds, cropped and mitered joints, and finishes. Approved samples will become basis for standard of acceptance of materials and workmanship. SD-07 Certificates Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. Welding certificates. Special Coatings; G, AE Compatibility between primers and special coating is essential. Provide written declaration to AE stating that materials meet this requirement. 1.6 1.6.1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Shop
Fabrication of stainless steel items to take place in a shop exclusively used for stainless steel fabrication. 1.6.2 Welding
Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: AWS D1.6, Structural Welding Code -Stainless Steel. 1.7.3 Mock-Up
Refer to Section 01 45 02.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS). A. Fabricate one complete dunk tank including bioseal barrier panel, angle frame around wall opening, glazed window, hardware, and accessories. Allow 30 Working days for review of mock-up before proceeding with work. When accepted, mock up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for fabrication of this work. Approved mock up may be installed in finished work. Do not begin fabrication of remaining dunk tanks until mock-up has been approved. PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements
B. C.
D.
1.7 1.7.1
Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.8 1.8.1
COORDINATION Coordinate Installation
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.8.2 Deliver
Coordinate installation of steel weld plates, angles, pipe sleeves, etc. for casting into concrete. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.9 1.9.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Identification
Stamp each component or group of identical components with identification corresponding to shop drawings for assembly. 1.9.2 General
Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS. 1.9.3 Protection
Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with pressure sensitive heavy protection paper or apply strippable plastic coating, before shipping to job site. 1.9.4 Removal of Protective Covering
Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building. Provide instructions for removal of protective covering. 1.10 COMMISSIONING
Refer to Section 05 08 00 for commissioning requirements related to this Section. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Metal Surfaces, General
Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.1.2 Stainless Steel Sheet
Stainless steel sheet to ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 except as specifically noted otherwise, #4 finish, thickness indicated, and perforated where Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 50 10.00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
inicated. 2.1.3 Stainless Steel Plates, Angles and Bars
Stainless steel plates, angles and bars to ASTM A 276, Type 304 except as specifically noted otherwise, #4 finish. 2.1.4 Brackets, Flanges and Anchors
Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported item, unless otherwise indicated. 2.1.5 Welding Rods and Electrodes
Comply with AWS Code for type of fabricated metal. 2.1.6 Sealant
Refer to Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS for sealant for use in A/BSL-3E, and A/BSL-4 containment areas. 2.1.7 Gaskets
Solid silicone, closed cell, minimum thickness 1/8 inch, to meet room integrity air tightness requirements. 2.1.8 2.1.8.1 Hardware Hinge for Dunk Tank Lid
Stainless steel, surface mounted strap hinge. 2.1.8.2 Hinge Pins
Stainless steel, length to suit roll formed hinges. 2.1.8.3 Bar Latch
4-inch long by 2-3/4-inch high, Type 304 stainless steel, polished finish. 2.1.8.4 A. Electromagnetic Lock for Dunk Tank
Complete with magnetic bond sensor, designed with conduit hub for surface mounted conduit/wiring; sealed and weather-resistant; minimum 1200 lbs holding force. Acceptable Products: Locknetics Model 390G, Securitron Model 62G, Security Door Controls Model EMLock 1570 series, or approved equivalent. Dunk Tank Hatch Cover Molding
B.
2.1.9
Rubber bulb gasket. 2.1.10 Construction Adhesive
High strength, non-shrinking, high solids polyurethane, approved by AE.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.1.11
Connectors
Threaded studs, rods, bolts, nuts, acorn nuts, coupler nuts, washers and screws: Type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 finish unless noted otherwise, to ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594. Diameters as indicated and required. 2.1.12 Drop-In Anchors in CMU and Concrete
Stainless steel, predrilled, self-tapping or expansion type, internally threaded anchors of length and diameter capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry, and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488. Testing shall be conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.1.13 Glazing Tape
Preformed butyl compound, 15-18 Shore A durometer hardness, coiled on release paper, size as required, black color. 2.1.14 Washers
Washers: Silicone-backed when securing to epoxy coated material, nylon where indicated. 2.1.15 Silicone Spacers
1-1/2-inch diameter by length indicated or to suit application. 2.1.16 Window Opening
Glazed window opening in dunk tank stainless steel plate containment barrier where indicated: 2.1.16.1 Glazing
1/4-inch thick laminated tempered glass, made up of two layers of 1/8-inch tempered glass and 0.030-inch thick PVB interlayer. 2.1.16.2 Structural Glazing Tape
High-density polyurethane foam tape, thickness to be determined. 2.1.17 Stainless Steel Repair Compound
Machineable repair compound with stainless steel filler to seal pin holes, voids and cracks in stainless steel fabrications. 2.1.17.1 Acceptable Products
Aremco Pyro-Putty, Devcon Stainless Steel Putty, Loctite Fixmaster Stainless Steel Putty, or approved equivalent. 2.1.18 Mild Steel Plate, Angle and Bar
To ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.1.19
Mild Steel Sheet
To ASTM A 568/A 568M 2.1.20 Non-shrink Grout
As specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. 2.2 2.2.1 FABRICATION - GENERAL Dimensions
Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 2.2.2 A. Shop Assembly Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted, air tight, and properly secured. Fit and shop assemble for delivery to site in largest practical sections. Fabricate assemblies to eliminate field welding except where permitted. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Welding Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Use electrodes or wire strength recommended for materials being joined. Thoroughly penetrate both materials being joined. Weld full depth or to depth indicated on Drawings. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. Grind smooth stainless steel welds and finish exposed surfaces to match No. 4 finish. Remove welding flux immediately. Make exposed welds smooth, flush with adjacent finished surfaces. Exposed Surfaces
B. C.
2.2.3 A.
B. C. D.
E.
F. G. 2.2.4
For fabrication of Work, which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes. 2.2.5 Crevices and Imperfections
Fill crevices and imperfections with stainless steel repair compound. Minimize use of repair compound. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 50 10.00 - Page 8 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.2.6
Cut Edges Remove burrs from exposed
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. cut edges. 2.2.7 Bent-Metal Corners
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing surfaces. 2.2.8 Hardware Preparation
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 2.2.9 Grinding
Grind smooth all stainless steel welds and finish exposed surfaces to match adjacent finish. 2.2.10 Voids
Fabricate assemblies to protect against trapping and holding dirt and moisture. 2.2.11 Anchorage
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. 2.3 2.3.1 FABRICATION - DUNK TANK Bioseal Barrier Panel
Fabricate from stainless steel sheet, selected for smoothness and flatness. Welds continuous and ground smooth. Drill holes in perimeter of panel to match threaded studs of perimeter angle frame. 2.3.2 Tank Panels and Lid
Fabricate from minimum 14 gage stainless steel sheet stock, selected for smoothness and flatness. Welds continuous and ground smooth. Radius front edge of lid with edge ground smooth. Provide rubber bulb gasket to tank body top edge allowing continuous seal of tank body to lid. Fabricate clamping mechanism of 3/16-inch stainless steel as detailed. Provide electromagnetic lock to secure lid to body. 2.3.3 Tank Drain Valve
Three piece, stainless steel body locking handle, 3/4-inch ball valve with threaded connection. 2.3.4 Plunger
Fabricate from minimum 22 gage stainless steel sheet. Fabricate plunger panel handle from 1/4-inch stainless steel rod. Roll end of support to receive plunger handle.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.3.5
Rake
Fabricate from 1/4-inch thick stainless steel rod as detailed. 2.3.6 Stainless Steel Storage Hook And Drip Pan Location to be determined.
Fabricate as detailed. 2.3.7 Depth Gauge
Weld 1/8 by 1/8-inch stainless steel bar stock 6-inches long on corridor side of the wall panel within dunk tank indicating depth of decontamination solution in tank is 6-inches. 2.3.8 Angle Frame Around Wall Opening
Provide stainless steel bent plate frame around wall opening with welded 1/4-inch diameter threaded studs at 8-inches o.c. 2.3.9 Continuous Gasket
Provide continuous gasket to run between angle frame and wall panel providing air-resistant seal. 2.3.10 Glass Installation
Site install glass with structural silicone sealant, and structural glazing tape to details shown. 2.4 2.4.1 FABRICATION - BREATHING AIR HOSE RACK Anchor Plate and Flanges
Fabricate air hose rack anchor plate from 1/4-inch thick stainless steel plate. Provide holes for anchor bolts. Weld stainless steel coupler nut to flanges. Size of coupler nut to accommodate 3/8-inch diameter threaded rod. 2.4.2 Drop Bracket
Fabricate drop bracket from 3/8-inch stainless steel rod threaded at both ends. Length to suit dimensions indicated on drawing. 2.4.2 Bent Cross Arm
Fabricate bent cross arm to profile indicated from 3/8-inch diameter stainless steel rod with ends ground smooth. Weld stainless steel coupler nut at mid point sized to accommodate the threaded rod. 2.5 2.5.1 FABRICATION - SERVICE CHASES Steel Plate
Fabricate service chase insert from minimum 1/4-inch thick mild steel plate, to size and shape indicated. 2.5.2 Cover
Fabricate removable cover from stainless steel sheet, brake-formed to shape Issued for Construction Section 05 50 10.00 - Page 10 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
indicated. 2.5.3 Fasteners
Provide stainless steel acorn nuts and gaskets at spacing indicated. 2.6 FREE-STANDING (FLOOR MOUNTED) WALL PROTECTION SUPPORTS
Fabricate bent plate vertical support and Z-shape mounting brackets from 1/4-inch thick stainless steel. Provide supports at termination of wall protection as indicated, and at maximum 3-feet on center. 2.7 A. FABRICATION - BOOT SHELVES AND UTILITY SHELVES Fabricate shelves from minimum 18 gage stainless steel sheet. Form 1-1/2-inch flanges all four edges, with 3/8-inch return under. Provide 3/8-inch radius corners at back of shelf and 2-inch radius corners at front of shelf. Grind edges and corners smooth. Provide upturn on back and sides of utility shelves as indicated. Reinforce shelves with minimum 16 gage stainless steel Z-bar welded to underside full length of shelf. Weld 3/16-inch stainless steel threaded studs to bent plate wall frame cast in concrete wall for shelf attachment through shelf flange. FABRICATION - METAL BARRIER WALLS Barrier wall: stainless steel plate, 1/4-inch thick, fully welded seams. Supporting frame: stainless steel HSS, 4 x 4-inch x 1/4-inch thick.
B.
C.
2.8 A. B. 2.9 A.
FABRICATION - WALL MOUNTED STAINLESS STEEL SINK AND MOUNTING PLATE Sink materials: Minimum 16-gauge thick, stainless steel, type 304, welded construction. Sink: 1. Radius inside bottom corners to 3/16-inch cove and pitch bottoms to drain inlet. Sound-deadening material on underside of sink not permitted. Roll form top edges at sides and front of sinks to radius indicated. Equip sinks with tailpieces complete with tri-clamp connections, cross strainers, plug and overflow. Provide standing overflow, when in position, 1-inch below flood level of sink. Include perforated over-flow guard with top 3/8-inch below flood level. Locate waste outlets centered in sink bottom. Outlets: 1-1/2-inch diameter, 3/16-inch minimum length, fabricated of same material as sink. Provide strainers at outlets. Sink Size: a. P-22: 18 by 18 by 14-inches deep. b. P-23: 24 by 24 by 14-inches deep. c. P-20: 16 by 11 by 5-inches deep.
B.
2.
3. 4.
C.
Mounting Plate 1. 1/4-inch thick stainless steel plate, radius corners as
Issued for Construction Section 05 50 10.00 - Page 11 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.
indicated. Prepare cutouts for mounting faucet. Provide stainless steel acorn nuts, threaded inserts and silicone spacers.
2.10 A.
FABRICATION - STAINLESS STEEL CHEMICAL SHOWER AND AIRBLOCK PANELS Wall and ceiling panels: beveled edges. Stainless steel plate, 1/4-inch thick,
B. C.
Floor panels: Stainless steel plate, 1/4-inch thick. Framing: Mild steel C shape bent plate, 1/4-inch thick by size indicated spaced at maximum 1-foot 8-inches o.c. Where stainless steel wall and ceiling panels are cast into CIP concrete, secure panels inside face of formwork. Provide headed concrete studs at spacing indicated. Continuously weld joints between panels. Minimize number of joints. Support edges of wall panels on bent C-plate framing. Continuously weld top and bottom of panels to floor and ceiling embeds. Fabricate floor curbs for grating from stainless steel shapes as indicated. Place non-shrink grout after installation of floor panels. FABRICATION VHP DECONTAMINATION PORTS
D.
E. F. G. H.
2.11
A. Threaded pipe: 1-1/2 inch stainless steel pipe, threaded each end with stainless steel pipe caps. B. Base plate: 1/4-inch plate steel. C. Anchor base plate to substrate at four corners. Fully weld threaded pipe to base plate. Grind weld smooth. 2.12 2.12.1 FABRICATION PRESSURIZED SUIT HANGING SYSTEM Support Channel
Type 304 stainless steel, minimum 12 gage thickness, 3/4-inch by 1 1/2-inch U-shape channel with return flanges each side, designed to receive mounting accessories. 2.12.2 Channel Nut
Complete with spring for insertion into support channel, Type 304 stainless steel. 2.12.3 Fabrication
Fabricate from stainless steel bar, rod, and tube as detailed. Weld reinforcing bar to bent plate. Attach tube to plate with stainless steel screws at each bracket. 2.13 FABRICATION LIQUID NITROGEN PORTS
Fabricate from Schedule 40 pipe to ASTM A53 and plate to ASTM A36. Weld Issued for Construction Section 05 50 10.00 - Page 12 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
components required to achieve configuration indicated. Fill and grind smooth welds and edges. Countersink holes for anchors to wall. 2.14 FABRICATION WALL GUARDS AT BIOMETRIC DEVICES
Fabricate from 1/2-inch diameter bent stainless steel rod, welded to stainless steel wall plate. 2.15 A. FABRICATION - MISCELLANEOUS BRACKETS, SUPPORT CLIPS AND FASTENINGS Provide stainless steel brackets, supports, angles, seats, clips, and other fastenings indicated, or as required for installation in other Sections for their work. Pre-drill for countersunk screw, bolts, and other fasteners. Form to profiles indicated, or as required. FABRICATION - LOW AIR CHASE General
B. C. 2.16 2.16.1
Fabricate from stainless steel sheet and plate of thickness indicated, complete with stainless steel acorn nuts and bolts, and silicone gaskets. Use Type 304 stainless steel, except where Type 430 is indicated.
2.16.2
Anchors
Provide type and number of anchors indicated for casting into concrete or CMU partitions as indicated. 2.16.3 Hinged Door
Fabricate louvered door from stainless steel sheet, with 50 percent free area. Provide stainless steel hinges, full length integral pull, and magnet. Fasten mechanical pre-filter to back of louvered door. Adhere magnet to back of pre-filter with epoxy adhesive. Tack weld type 430 stainless steel tab, same size as magnet, to mountiing panel at magnet location on back of pre-filter. 2.17 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. 2.17.1 Grind and Polish
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 A. EXECUTION INSTALLATION General Verify dimensions before field assembly and installation.
Ft. Detrick, MD
B.
Set units plumb, square, and true to line in locations shown on drawings. Protect finishes. Square and Level
C. 3.1.2
Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion and defects. 3.1.3 Temporary Bracing
Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing to keep Work in alignment. 3.1.4 Items Damaged
Replace items damaged in course of installation. 3.1.5 Field Welding
Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, or AWS D1.3 as applicable. 3.1.6 Touch Up
After installation, touch up field welds and damaged surfaces with same materials. 3.1.7 Setting Templates
Provide items requiring casting or building into building complete with necessary setting templates; coordinate installation. 3.1.8 A. Standoffs Anchor internally threaded drop-in anchors in concrete. Insert threaded stainless steel rod. Stainless steel rod to be threaded at each end with exposed portion of rod smooth. Seal around rod with bead of structural silicone sealant. Secure with stainless steel nut and silicone backed washer. Design rod and anchor capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry, and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488. Testing shall be conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Attachment
B. C. D.
3.1.9
Provide bolts, studs, inserts, nuts, acorn nuts, washers, and silicone spacers as noted for attachment of special metal fabrications. Provide silicone backed washers when securing to epoxy coated materials.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.1.10 A.
Dunk Tank Secure dunk tank wall panel to angle frame using threaded studs stainless steel washers, nuts, acorn nuts and continuous gasket. Torque nuts to provide air seal defined in Performance Requirements. When building air handling systems have become operational and pressures on opposing sides of dunk tank viewport can be determined, perform soap bubble test on each viewport. Adjust frame and glazing until no soap bubbles are produced. Breathing Air Hose Rack
B.
3.1.11
Provide threaded anchor bolts and washers in concrete ceiling. Secure anchor plate to bolts with stainless steel acorn nuts. Provide continuous silicone heel bead around junction of anchor plate to concrete ceiling. 3.1.12 Boot Shelves and Utility Shelves
Anchor boot shelves and utility shelves with stainless steel washers and acorn nuts over the stainless steel threaded studs welded to bent plate wall frames. 3.1.13 Wall Mounted Stainless Steel Sink
Weld sink to 1/4-inch thick mounting plate. 3.1.14 Pressurized Suite Hanging System
Mount system to concrete partitions with drop-in anchors and silicone spacers. 3.2 3.2.1 ADJUSTING, CLEANING Lubricate
Lubricate moving parts for smooth operation in place. 3.2.2 Adjust
Adjust hinges, latches, and attachments for smooth operation and neat appearance. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) AASHTO M 314 (1990; R 2004) Standard Specification for Steel Anchor Bolts
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI B18.22.1 (1975; R 2003) Plain Washers
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME B18.2.1 (1996; Addenda A 1999; Errata 2003; R 2005) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series) (1981; R 1997) Wood Screws (Inch Series) (2003) Machine Screws and Machine Screw Nuts
ASME B18.6.1 ASME B18.6.3
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 1008/A 1008M (2005a) Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability (2005) Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished (2002) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M
ASTM A 108
ASTM A 123/A 123M
Ft. Detrick, MD
ASTM A 153/A 153M
(2005) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware (2005) Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application (2003; R 2007) Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates (2005) Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought General Requirements for (2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength (2007a) Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (2005) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel (2004b) Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs (1999; R 2004) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip Process (2003) Gray Iron Castings (2003a) Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes (1996; R 2001) Standard Specification for Cold-Drawn Buttweld Carbon Steel Mechanical Tubing (1990) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless (2007) Standard Specifications for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for (1996; R 2002) Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, Section 05 51 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
ASTM A 27/A 27M
ASTM A 283/A 283M
ASTM A 29/A 29M
ASTM A 307
ASTM A 325
ASTM A 36/A 36M
ASTM A 449
ASTM A 47/A 47M
ASTM A 48/A 48M ASTM A 500
ASTM A 512
ASTM A 526/A 526M
ASTM A 53/A 53M
ASTM A 568/A 568M
ASTM A 575
Ft. Detrick, MD
M-Grades ASTM A 6/A 6M (2007) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process (2001; R 2006) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings (2007) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process (2004) Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board (2006) Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels (1996; R 2003) Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements (1988; R 2004) Standard Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings (2000; R 2006) Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings (2000; R 2006) Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings
ASTM A 653/A 653M
ASTM A 780
ASTM A 924/A 924M
ASTM C 514
ASTM C 636/C 636M
ASTM E 488
ASTM E 894
ASTM E 935
ASTM E 985
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC) ICC A117.1 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM) NAAMM AMP 510 NAAMM MBG 531 (1992) Metal Stairs Manual (2000) Metal Bar Grating Manual
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC) SSPC PA 1 (2000; E 2004) Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting (2000; E 2004) Commercial Blast Cleaning Section 05 51 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
SSPC SP 6 Issued for Construction 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC) U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 29 CFR 1910 40 CFR 59 Occupational Safety and Health Standards National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products
1.2 1.2.1
DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Recommendations Limit
Unless otherwise specified, follow recommendations of NAAMM AMP 510. live load deflection to L/360 of span. 1.2.2 Components
Design components to allow for expansion and contraction without buckling, excessive opening of joints, or overstressing of welds and fasteners. 1.2.3 Performance
Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings complying with requirements in ASTM E 985 for structural performance, based on testing performed according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Fabrication drawings for the following items shall be in accordance with the paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of this section. Submit with shop drawings all calculations in reference to structural properties of all members, assemblies and connections prior to fabrication of any parts of the work and provide all additional structural members or increase gauge and weight of finished metals required for the proper erection and structural stability of the work. Iron and Steel Hardware; G, AE Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips; G, AE Metal Stairs; G, AE Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 51 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
SD-03 Product Data Manufacturer's catalog data shall include two copies of manufacturers specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, and anchor details for the following items: Structural Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars; G, AR Structural Steel Tubing; G, AR Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strips; G, AR Cold Finished Steel Bars; G, AR Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars; G, AR Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets; G, AR Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheets; G, AR Cold-Drawn Steel Tubing; G, AR Gray Iron Castings; G, AR Malleable Iron Castings; G, AR Concrete Inserts; G, AR Masonry Anchorage Devices; G, AR Protective Coating; G, AR Steel Stairs; G, AR SD-05 Design Data Metal Stairs Calculations; G, AE For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer maintaining current registration in the United States of America and who is responsible for their preparation. Include: A. B. Structural calculations. Seismic control calculations.
SD-07 Certificates Welding Procedures shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Certificates for Welder Qualification shall be in accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Qualifications for Welding Work," of this section. SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be submitted for the following products to be used in the fabrication of steel stair work. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars Structural Steel Tubing Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strips Cold Finished Steel Bars Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheets Cold-Drawn Steel Tubing Gray Iron Castings Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 51 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Malleable Iron Castings Protective Coating Masonry Anchorage Devices SD-11 Closeout Submittals Recycled Content (LEED) Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2: List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate cost, post-consumer recycled content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content. Credits MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product Data indicating location of regional material for regionally extracted, harvested, or recovered materials. A. Include statement indicating cost and distance from manufacturer to Project for each regionally manufactured material. B. Include statement indicating cost and distance from point of extraction, harvest, or recovery to Project for each raw material used in regionally manufactured materials. Credit EQ 4.2: Product Data for paints and coatings used on the interior of the building indicating chemical composition and VOC content of each product used. List each product including the manufacturer's name, product name, specific VOC data and the corresponding allowable VOC from the list attached to Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24). 1.4 A. QUALIFICATIONS FOR WELDING WORK Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL applies to work specified in this section. Welding Procedures shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Test specimens shall be made in the presence of the Contracting Officer and shall be tested by an approved testing laboratory at the Contractor's expense. Welder Qualification shall be certified by tests in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, or under an equivalent approved qualification test. In addition, tests shall be performed on test pieces in positions and with clearances equivalent to those actually encountered. If a test weld fails to meet requirements, an immediate retest of two test welds shall be made and each test weld shall pass. Failure in the immediate retest will require that the welder be retested after further practice or training and a complete set of test welds shall be made.
B.
C.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.5 1.5.1
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Professional Engineer Qualifications
A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of metal stairs (including handrails and railing systems) that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 1.5.2 Reference Specifications
Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified herein and to all applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 1.6 1.6.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Live Load
Live load per prevailing State of Maryland Code. 1.6.2 Stair Assembly
Uniform, live load of 100 psf; or concentrated, live load of 300 pounds applied to an area of 4 square inches at center of tread. 1.6.3 1.6.3.1 Guardrail Assembly: Concentrated Load
200 pounds applied in any direction at any point along top of rail, and have attachment devices and supporting structure to transfer this loading to appropriate structural elements of the building. 1.6.3.2 Uniform Load
50 pounds per linear foot applied in any direction at the top rail and be transferred through the supports to the structure. 1.6.3.3 Loading
Concentrated and uniform loads are not required to be applied concurrently. 1.6.4 Intermediate Rails, Balusters and Panel Fillers
50 pounds applied horizontally to an area not to exceed one square foot including openings and space between rails. This load is not required to be applied simultaneously with concentrated or uniform loads on top of rail. 1.6.5 Barrier Free Design
Conform to applicable barrier free design requirements of the State of Maryland, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and ICC A117.1.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.6.6
Seismic Control
Follow Section 01 41 50 SEISMIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS. 1.7 COORDINATION
The work under this Section shall be closely coordinated with the work of other Sections. Furnish all necessary templates and patterns required by other Sections. Furnish all items pertaining to work under this Section that are to be built into work under other Sections, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation Supervise and be responsible for the proper location and installation of such built-up items. PART 2 2.1 A. PRODUCTS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Complete and detailed fabrication drawings for all Iron and Steel Hardware, and for all Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips used shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the design specifications referenced in this section. Items shall be preassembled in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Units shall be disassembled only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling. Units shall be clearly marked for reassembly and coordinated installation. For the fabrication of work exposed to view, only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness, shall be used. Blemishes shall be removed by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and application of surface finishes, including zinc coatings. STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATES, SHAPES AND BARS Structural-size shapes and plates, except plates to be bent or cold-formed, shall conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M, unless otherwise noted. Steel plates to be bent or cold-formed shall conform to ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C. Steel bars and bar-size shapes shall conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M, unless otherwise noted. STRUCTURAL STEEL TUBING
B.
C.
2.2 A.
B.
C.
2.3
Structural steel tubing, hot-formed, welded or seamless, shall conform to ASTM A 500, Grade B, unless otherwise noted. 2.4 HOT-ROLLED CARBON STEEL BARS
Bars and bar-size shapes shall conform to ASTM A 575, grade as selected by the fabricator.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.5
COLD-FINISHED STEEL BARS
Bars shall conform to ASTM A 108, grade as selected by the fabricator. 2.6 HOT-ROLLED CARBON STEEL SHEETS AND STRIPS
Sheets and strips shall conform to ASTM A 568/A 568M and ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, pickled and oiled. 2.7 COLD-ROLLED CARBON STEEL SHEETS
Sheets shall conform to ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 2.8 GALVANIZED CARBON STEEL SHEETS
Sheets shall conform to ASTM A 526/A 526M, with galvanizing conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M. 2.9 COLD-DRAWN STEEL TUBING
Tubing shall conform to ASTM A 512, sunk drawn, butt-welded, cold-finished, and stress-relieved. 2.10 GRAY IRON CASTINGS
Castings shall conform to ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30. 2.11 MALLEABLE IRON CASTINGS
Castings shall conform to ASTM A 47/A 47M, grade as selected. 2.12 STEEL PIPE
Pipe shall conform to ASTM A 53/A 53M, type as selected, Grade B; primed finish, unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40). 2.13 A. CONCRETE INSERTS Threaded-type concrete inserts shall consist of galvanized castings, internally threaded to receive 3/4-inch diameter bolts; either malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M steel conforming to ASTM A 27/A 27M, hot-dip galvanized in with ASTM A 153/A 153M. ferrous machine or cast accordance
B.
Wedge-type concrete inserts shall consist of galvanized box-type ferrous castings designed to accept 3/4-inch diameter bolts having special wedge-shaped heads; they shall be either malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M or cast steel conforming to ASTM A 27/A 27M and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Carbon steel bolts having special wedge-shaped heads, nuts, washers, and shims shall be provided and galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Slotted-type concrete inserts shall consist of galvanized 1/8-inch thick pressed steel plate conforming to ASTM A 283/A 283M; they shall be of box-type welded construction with slot designed to receive 3/4-inch diameter square-head bolt with knockout cover; and shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Section 05 51 00 - Page 9 For Official Use Only
C.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.14 A.
MASONRY ANCHORAGE DEVICES Masonry anchorage devices shall consist of expansion shields complying with AASHTO M 314, ASTM E 488 and ASTM C 514 as follows: 1. Lead expansion shields shall be provided for machine screws and bolts 1/4 inch and smaller; head-out embedded nut type, single unit class, Group I, Type 1, Class 1. Lead expansion shields shall be provided for machine screws and bolts larger than 1/4 inch in size; head-out embedded nut type, multiple unit class, Group I, Type 1, Class 2. Bolt anchor expansion shields shall be provided for lag bolts; zinc-alloy, long shield anchors class, Group II, Type 1, Class 1. Bolt anchor expansion shields shall be provided for bolts; closed-end bottom bearing class, Group II, Type 2, Class 1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Toggle bolts shall be tumble-wing type, conforming to ASTM A 325, ASTM A 449 and ASTM C 636/C 636M, type, class, and style as required. FASTENERS Zinc-coated fasteners shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M and shall be used for exterior applications or where built into exterior walls or floor systems. Fasteners shall be selected for the type, grade, and class required for the installation of steel stair items. Standard bolts and nuts shall be regular hexagon-head conforming to ASTM A 307, Grade A. Lag bolts shall be square-head conforming to ASME B18.2.1. Machine screws cadmium-plated steel conforming to ASME B18.6.3. Wood screws shall be flat-head carbon steel conforming to ASME B18.6.1. Plain washers shall be round, general-assembly-grade, carbon steel conforming to ANSI B18.22.1. Lockwashers shall be helical spring, carbon steel conforming to. GENERAL FABRICATION Metal Stairs shall detail plans and elevations at not less than 1 inch to 1 foot. Drawings shall also provide details of sections and connections at not less than 3 inches to 1 foot. They shall also detail setting drawings, diagrams, templates for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous metal items having integral anchors. Contractor shall use materials of size and thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, of required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in finished product for intended use. Materials shall be worked to dimensions indicated on approved detail drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Type of Section 05 51 00 - Page 10 For Official Use Only
2.15 A.
B.
C. D. E. F.
G. 2.16 A.
B.
Ft. Detrick, MD
materials indicated or specified shall be used for the various components of work. C. Exposed work shall be formed true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Exposed edges shall be eased to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch. Metal corners shall be bent to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work. Corners and seams shall be welded continuously and in accordance with the recommendations of AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Exposed connections shall be formed with hairline joints that are flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Exposed fasteners of the type indicated shall be used or, if not indicated, Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts shall be used. Anchorage of the type indicated shall be provided and coordinated with the supporting structure. Anchoring devices shall be fabricated and spaced as indicated and as required to provide adequate support for the intended use of the work. Hot-rolled steel bars shall be used for work fabricated from bar stock unless work is indicated or specified to be fabricated from cold-finished or cold-rolled stock. PROTECTIVE COATING Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter. Thoroughly clean all steel of all loose mill scale by power wire-brushing or sand blasting. Remove all rust, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter and other foreign matter by wire brushing or scraping (power wire brushing if necessary). Grind smooth any sharp projections. Oil and grease deposits shall be removed by solvent. Shop prime paint; one coat. all steel members, except galvanized items, after they are prepared, shall be painted before shipping. All surfaces shall be painted, except machined surfaces, surfaces which are to be welded and surfaces to be encased in concrete. Comply with SSPC PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Paint shall be applied thoroughly and evenly on the surfaces and worked into the joints and other open surfaces. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. Surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall be given two coats. Dry film thickness per coat of prime paint shall be not less than 2.4 mils. Interior Stairs Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Exterior Steelwork shall be hot dipped galvanized as indicated in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M for steel and iron products and ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware. Abraded surfaces and cut ends of galvanized members shall be touched up with zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer, or an approved galvanizing repair compound.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.17 A.
B.
C.
D.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.18 2.18.1 A.
STEEL STAIRS General Welding shall be used for joining pieces together. Units shall be fabricated so that bolts and other fastenings do not appear on finish surfaces. Joints shall be made true and tight, and connections between parts shall be lightproof tight. Continuous welds shall be ground smooth where exposed. Metal Stairs units shall be constructed to sizes and arrangements indicated. Entire assembly shall be constructed to support a minimum live load of 100 pounds per square foot. Framing, hangers, columns, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components shall be provided as required for the support of stairs and platforms. Stair Framing Stringers of structural steel channels, or plates, or a combination thereof shall be fabricated as indicated. Closures for exposed ends of strings shall be provided. Platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members shall be constructed as indicated. Headers shall be bolted to stringers and newels. Framing members shall be bolted to stringers and headers. Riser, Subtread, and Subplatform Metal Pans Metal pans shall be formed of 0.1084-inch (12-gage) thick structural steel sheets, conforming to ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Grade 36. Pans shall be shaped to configuration indicated. Riser and subtread metal pans shall be constructed with steel angle supporting brackets, of size indicated, welded to stringers. Metal pans shall be secured to brackets with rivets or welds.
B.
2.18.2 A.
B.
2.18.3 A.
B.
Subplatform metal pans shall be secured to platform frames with welds. 2.18.4 Metal Safety Nosings
Cast metal abrasive, nonskid type, shall be 4 inches wide by full length of step between strings. Contractor shall fabricate to thickness, profile, and surface pattern as indicated. Each nosing shall be equipped with integral anchors for embedding in pan fill material, and shall be spaced not more than 4 inches from each end and not more than 15 inches on center. 2.18.5 A. Floor Grating Treads and Platforms Floor grating treads and platforms shall comply with ASTM A 6/A 6M, ASTM A 29/A 29M and NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." Pattern, spacing, and bar sizes shall be as indicated: Galvanized finish shall conform to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Grating treads shall be fabricated with steel plate nosing on one edge and with steel angle or steel plate carrier at each end for string connections. Treads shall be secured to strings with bolts.
Ft. Detrick, MD
C.
Grating platforms shall be fabricated with nosing matching that on grating treads at landings. Toe-plates shall be provided at open-sided edges of floor grating to platform framing members. Stair Railings and Handrails Steel pipe railings, consisting of top rail, intermediate rail, posts and handrails, shall be provided at walls. Unless otherwise indicated, 1-1/2-inch nominal size, standard weight, carbon steel pipe shall be provided and shall conform to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B. Railings shall conform to requirements of 29 CFR 1910, Section 23. Posts, rails, and corners shall be joined by one of the following methods: 1. Flush-type steel railing fittings, welded and ground smooth, with railing splice locks secured with 3/8-inch hexagonal recessed-head setscrews. Mitered and welded joints made by fitting post to top rail and intermediate rail to post, mitering corners, groove welding joints, and grinding smooth, butt railing splices, reinforced by a tight-fitting interior sleeve not less than 6 inches long.
2.18.6 A.
B.
2.
C.
Railings may be bent at corners instead of joining, provided the bends are uniformly formed in jigs with cylindrical cross section of pipe maintained throughout the entire bend. Removable railing sections shall be provided as indicated. Kickplates shall be provided between railing posts where indicated, and shall consist of 1/8-inch steel flat bars not less than 6 inches high. Kickplates shall be secured as indicated. Exterior railings, including pipe, fittings, brackets, fasteners, and other ferrous metal components, shall be galvanized. Black steel pipe shall be provided for interior railings. Where railings are to be galvanized, vent holes provided in railings and posts for galvanizing shall be located at underside of rails and at lowest elevations of horizontal or sloped rails and at bottom of posts such that all railings are drainable. Steel Framing for Concrete Stairs
D. E.
F.
G.
2.18.7
Fabricated units shall be customized to the dimensions and details indicated, and modified as required to fit actual dimensions of the supporting structure. Welded construction shall be used for fabrication of steel components. Unless otherwise indicated, 14-gage steel risers shall be provided. Components shall be arranged to receive finish materials as indicated. PART 3 3.1 A. EXECUTION INSPECTION Verify all dimensions as well as the work of other Sections which adjoins the work herein. Such work of other Sections shall be inspected before the installation of items herein specified. Section 05 51 00 - Page 13 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Measurements of adjoining work shall be taken, so that the work herein specified shall fit closely into the spaces provided therefore, and so as to provide proper access and clearance at valves, gauges or other equipment. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. If any unusual conditions are encountered, Shop Drawings showing the nature and location of conditions shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer and AE for determination prior to fabrication. B. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, calculate dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to calculated dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. Field check Project for access, provisions for anchorage, and other conditions that affect work specified herein. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer and AE and have been corrected. Start of installation implies acceptance of conditions as satisfactory for proper installation of metal fabrications. Defects resulting from improper preparation or untimely installation shall be corrected at no cost to the Government. ERECTION Install work in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Erect work plumb, level and true, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. Field join and weld to match standard of shop joining and welding. Hide mechanical fasteners whenever possible. Where not hidden, use flush countersunk fasteners. Field Welding: 1. Comply with the following requirements:
C.
D.
3.2 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
2. 3. 4.
3.3 A.
STAIR RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS Railings shall be adjusted prior to securing in place to ensure proper matching at butting joints and correct alignment throughout their Section 05 51 00 - Page 14 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
length. Posts shall be spaced not more than 8 feet on center. Posts shall be plumbed in each direction. Posts shall be secured to stair stringers by welding. Posts and rail ends shall be secured to building construction as follows: 1. Posts shall be anchored to interior concrete floor slabs with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and and anchored into the floor slab with expansion anchors and bolts. Posts shall be anchored to structural steel with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to the steel supporting members. Rail ends shall be anchored into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into the wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts, unless indicated otherwise. Rail ends shall be anchored to steel with steel oval or round flanges welded to tail ends and bolted to the structural steel members, unless indicated otherwise. Rail ends shall be anchored to steel-framed gypsum board assemblies with steel oval or round flanges fastened directly to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads, unless indicated otherwise.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Handrails shall be secured to walls by means of wall brackets and wall return fitting at handrail ends. Brackets of malleable iron castings shall be provided, with 1-1/2 inch clearance from the finish wall surface to the inside of handrail pipe. Brackets shall be located not more than 60 inches on center. Wall brackets shall be secured to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled in expansion shields and lag bolts shall be used. For hollow masonry anchorage, toggle bolts having square heads shall be used. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads.
2.
3.
3.4
FIELD WELDING
Procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work shall comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.5 A. TOUCHUP AND REPAIR Verify that installation is neat and flush in appearance, and that there are no burrs, projections, or defects that might snag fingers or clothing. Correct deficiencies.
Ft. Detrick, MD
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. Touch-up field welds and damages with shop primer. -- End of Section --
C.
D.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 05 71 00 ORNAMENTAL STAIRS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2006; Errata 2006) Structural Welding Code - Steel
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 167 (1999; R 2004) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip (2007a) Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service (2006) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes (2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength (2005) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel (1972) Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality (2007) Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes (2006a) Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes
ASTM A 269
ASTM A 276
ASTM A 307
ASTM A 36/A 36M
ASTM A 366
ASTM A 500/A 500M
ASTM A 992/A 992M
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM) NAAMM MFM (1988) Metal Finishes Manual
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC) SSPC SP 3 Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 (2004; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning Section 05 71 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
SSPC SP 6
(2000; E 2004) Commercial Blast Cleaning
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC) U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 40 CFR 59 National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products
1.2 1.2.1
SECTION INCLUDES Custom Stair in Atrium.
Ornamental Stairs: A. B. Hanger rods, clip angles and other devices for attachment to structure. Custom ornamental handrail/guardrail assemblies are specified in Section 05 72 00 ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS. Support and Installation
1.2.2
Coordinate with Section 05 72 00 ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS for support and installation of ornamental metal and glass railing assemblies at Stair. 1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATION
Wood handrail shall meet applicable requirements of Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY. Coordinate with Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY for matching of species, color, grain, and finish with other woodwork. 1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Unless otherwise specified, follow Design and Performance Criteria specified in Section 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS. 1.5 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. SD-02 Shop Drawings Ornamental Stairs; G, AE Show elevations, details, profiles, sizes, connections, seam locations, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners and accessories. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 71 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
SD-03 Product Data LEED Submittals SD-04 Samples Metal; G, AE Three samples, at least 12 inches long, of each metal finish required. Prepare samples on material of same alloy, thickness, and profile to be used. SD-05 Design Data Design Calculations; G, AE Signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Maryland. SD-07 Certificates Statement of Fabricator/Supplier/Installer Welder qualifications Welding Procedures shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M Certificates for Welder Qualification shall be in accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Qualifications for Welding Work," of this section. 1.6 LEED REQUIREMENTS
Follow Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) REQUIREMENTS. 1.6.1 Credit MR 4.1 and 4.2
List of proposed materials with recycled content. A. Indicate cost, post-consumer recycled content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2
1.6.2
Product Data indicating location of regional material for regionally extracted, harvested, or recovered materials. A. Include statement indicating cost and distance from manufacturer to Project for each regionally manufactured material. Include statement indicating cost and distance from point of extraction, harvest, or recovery to Project for each raw material used in regionally manufactured materials. Credit EQ 4.1
B.
1.6.3
Product Data for adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building indicating VOC content of each product used. List each product including the manufacturer's name, product name, specific VOC data and the Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 71 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
corresponding allowable VOC. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24). 1.6.4 Credit EQ 4.2
Product Data for paints and coatings used on the interior of the building indicating chemical composition and VOC content of each product used. List each product including the manufacturer's name, product name, specific VOC data and the corresponding allowable VOC. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24). 1.7 1.7.1 QUALIFICATIONS Fabricator/Supplier/Installer
Firm having at least 5 years' documented experience in fabricating and installing work of this magnitude and quality. 1.7.2 Welder Qualifications
AWS Certified. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise specified, follow Regulatory Requirements specified in Section 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Follow Section 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS. 1.9.1 Damage Products Damaged products will not be accepted.
Inspect for damage upon arrival. 1.9.2 Store Products
Store products under cover where practicable; otherwise above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Best Commercial Quality
Use best commercial quality metals with forms straight and true; no scratches, nubs, scars, creases, buckles, ripples, or chatter marks. 2.1.2 Materials
Select materials for surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes when exposed to view. Exposed-to-view surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, "oil-canning", discolorations, dings, or other imperfections are not acceptable.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.2 2.2.1
MATERIALS Wide Flange Shapes
ASTM A 992/A 992M. 2.2.2 Angles, Channels, and Plates
ASTM A 500/A 500M 2.2.4 Sheet Steel
ASTM A 366, cold rolled, 14 gauge minimum, unless required to be heavier to meet design load criteria. 2.2.5 Stainless Steel
Type 302 or 304; ASTM A 276, ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 269 as applicable to purpose required. 2.2.6 Welding Material
AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. 2.2.7 Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Other Fasteners Use stainless steel fasteners to secure stainless steel
ASTM A 307. components. 2.2.8
Ungalvanized Steel Primer
Subject to compliance with requirements, the following manufacturers and products named include, but are not limited to: A. B. Benjamin Moore; Rust Inhibitive Primer 168. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer (B50 series) or Steel Spec Universal Primer. Laminated Polymer Panels Panelite
2.2.9
Design Standard Manufacturer:
Laminated tubular polycarbonate honeycomb core with fiberglass reinforced polyester sheet facings and high pressure glass cloth laminate facing with Class A flame spread of 20 and smoke development of 200 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Panel weight, 1.0 psf. Panel thickness +/-.010". Color as selected by Architect. Framing System: Aluminum framing and support system fabricated from 6063 T5 alloy aluminum. Main framing members have minimum depth of 1=5/8" with nominal wall thickness of .125 to .080. Glazing rebates shall not be less than 5/8" in height. Corners shall be mitered, heavy angle reinforced, cold welded and hydraulically crimped. All aluminum shall have clear anodized finish. Provide framing members as indicated on the drawings. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 71 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.3
FABRICATION
Fabricate components required for anchorage to each other and to building structure. Form sections to required shapes and sizes with true angles and curves. Provide necessary rebates and brackets for assembly. 2.3.1 Railing Assemblies and Handrails
As specified in Section 05 72 00 ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS. 2.3.2 A. Joints and Welds Grind contact surfaces of connected members true. Assemble parts so that joints will be secure, tight, and practically unnoticeable, without use of filling compound. Weld parts where thickness of section permits. Where exposed mechanical fasteners are required, use flush countersunk type, unobtrusively located, consistent with design. Except as otherwise shown or specified, welds exposed to view shall be continuous for full length of connection. Use welding method appropriate for metal and finish used, and which develops strength required to comply with structural performance criteria. Fully weld steel-to-steel connections, continuous on all sides, unless otherwise shown or specified. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. Where cutting, welding, or grinding is required for fitting and jointing, restore finishes to eliminate evidence of corrections. Support and Anchorage
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3.3
Coordinate with other Sections to provide support and anchorage for treads, risers, railings and other materials to be used in stair assembly. 2.3.4 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.1.1 Stringer Covers FINISHES Steel Surface Preparation
Blast clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6. Surfaces that will be exposed in spaces above ceiling or in attic spaces, crawl spaces, furred spaces, and chases may be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 3 in lieu of being blast cleaned. Wash cleaned surfaces which become contaminated with rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants with solvents until thoroughly clean. Steel to be embedded in concrete shall be free of dirt and grease. Do not paint or galvanize bearing surfaces, including contact surfaces within slip critical joints, but coat with rust preventative Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 71 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
applied in the shop. 2.4.1.2 A. Pretreatment, Priming and Painting
Apply pretreatment, primer, and paint in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Prime paint for field finishing. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete or where field welding is required. Stainless Steel
B. C.
2.4.2
NAAMM MFM No. 4. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 EXECUTION PREPARATION Verify alignment with adjacent construction. Integral Anchors
Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of items having integral anchors which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Deliver anchors to applicable trades for installation. 3.1.3 Connecting Stairs to Structure
Install anchors, plates, angles, hangers and struts for connecting stairs to structure. 3.2 3.2.1 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION Performance
Install work plumb, level and true, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 3.2.2 Finishes
Do not cut or abrade finishes which cannot be completely restored in field. Cut, alter and refinish these items in shop. 3.2.3 Standard of Shop
Field join and weld to match standard of shop joining and welding. Hide mechanical fasteners whenever possible. Where not hidden, use flush countersunk fasteners. 3.2.4 Joints Grind welds smooth.
Make joints flush, tight, and securely fastened. 3.2.5 Finish
Touch up field welds and damages to specified finish. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 71 00 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 05 72 00 ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2006; Errata 2006) Structural Welding Code - Steel
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 123/A 123M (2002) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products (1999; R 2004) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip (2007a) Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service (2006) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes (2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength (2005) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel (2004) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless (1999; R 2004) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip Process (2003a) Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes (2007) Standing Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM A 167
ASTM A 269
ASTM A 276
ASTM A 307
ASTM A 36/A 36M
ASTM A 53
ASTM A 47/A 47M
ASTM A 500
ASTM B 117
Ft. Detrick, MD
ASTM D 822
(2001; R 2006) Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC) SSPC SP 7 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES (2007) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
Handrails and Railings: A. B. Glass railing with fittings at Atrium stairs. Wall-mounted and glass railing system-mounted wood handrails with fittings at Atrium stairs. Steel Railing with decorative design grating panel infill at exterior stairs from Level 2 Atrium. Steel Railing with decorative design grating panel infill at exterior stairs from Level 2 Atrium. DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
C.
D.
1.3
Unless otherwise specified, follow Design and Performance Criteria specified in Section 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. SD-02 Shop Drawings Glass Railing at Atrium Stairs; G, AE Wall and Glass Railing System; G, AE Steel Railing with Decorative Design Grating Panel; G, AE Show, layout, profiles, materials, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Glass Railings and Wood Handrails at Atrium Stair, fabrication and installation drawings. Steel Railings and Steel Handrails at Exterior Stairs from Level 2 Atrium, fabrication and installation drawings. SD-03 Product Data Glass Railing at Atrium Stairs; G, AE Wall and Glass Railing System; G, AE Steel Railing with Decorative Design Grating Panel; G, AE LEED Submittals Manufacturer's catalog data showing compliance with specified requirements shall include manufacturers specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, and anchor details. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 72 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
SD-04 Samples Glass Railing; G, AE Wall bracket; G, AE Wood Handrail; G, AE Grating Panel Infill; G, AE Glass supports, handrail brackets, and twelve inch long section of wood handrail for glass railings and wood handrails at Atrium stair Wood finish samples for color selection. Decorative steel grating, handrail brackets, and other hardware and fittings for steel railings and steel handrails at Exterior Stair from Level 2 Atrium Submit minimum 12 inch by 12 inch decorative steel grating infill panel. SD-05 Design Data Structural calculations; G, AE Seismic control calculations; G, AE For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer maintaining current registration in the State of the Project and who is responsible for their preparation. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise specified in this section, follow Regulatory Requirements specified in Section 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS. 1.5.1 Seismic Control Requirements
Follow Section 01 41 50 SEISMIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Angles, Channels, and Plates
ASTM A 500. 2.1.3 Steel Pipe
ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. 2.1.4 Fittings for Steel Pipe
Standard malleable iron fittings ASTM A 47/A 47M.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.1.5
Stainless Steel
Type 304L; ASTM A 276, ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 269 as applicable to purpose required. 2.1.6 Welding Material
AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. 2.1.7 Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Other Fasteners Use stainless steel fasteners to secure stainless steel
ASTM A 307. components. 2.2 2.2.1
GLASS RAILING AT ATRIUM STAIRS Design Standard Manufacturer ZeTera System Satin
Mogg Constructive Inc. Design Standard Product: Stainless steel. 2.2.2 Glass
1/2 inch thick clear tempered safety glass, meeting ANSI Z97.1 and Consumer Product Safety Commission Standard 16 CFR 1201 C1 and C11. Provide rounded and polished top edge where top rail is not used. 2.3 WALL AND GLASS RAILING SYSTEM MOUNTED WOOD HANDRAILS
AT ATRIUM STAIRS 2.3.1 Glass Railing System Bracket
ZeTera Railing Bracket, brushed finish stainless steel; anchors and mounting accessories as required. 2.3.2 Wall Bracket
Design Standard Manufacturer: The Wagner Co.; Design Standard Product: Wagnerail Mounting Bracket LU201, Satin Stainless. 2.3.3 Wood Handrail
2 inch diameter, continuous maple wood stained to selected color and finished with transparent catalyzed polyurethane (AWI Finish No. 5). 2.4 STEEL RAILING WITH DECORATIVE DESIGN GRATING PANEL INFILL AND HANDRAILS
AT EXTERIOR STAIRS FROM LEVEL 2 ATRIUM 2.4.1 Design Follow Regulatory
Design railings to resist specified live loads. Requirements in 05 51 00. 2.4.2 Design Standard Manufacturer
A & T Iron Works, Inc.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.4.2.1 A. B.
Characteristics ORSOGRIL BRITOSTEROPE
Design Standard Product:
Type: Electro-Forge welded steel System
2.4.2.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. G.
Spacing of vertical sections at 2-7/16 inches. Spacing of horizontal sections at 5-3/16 inches. Vertical section measurements at 1-3/16 inch by 5/32 inch. Horizontal tie at 1/4 inch. Framing bar at 1-3/16 inch by 5/32 inch. Hole at 7/16 inch. Top and bottom rails shall be "clear" with no slots or holes. Accessories
2.4.2.3 A. B.
Connection bolts and anchor studs shall be stainless steel. Provide gate hardware required for a secure complete system. Fabrication
2.4.2.4
Perform all work in accordance with manufacturing specifications. 2.4.2.5 A. Finishing
Hot-Dip Galvanized Base Coat: Galvanize steel members and components to ensure product encapsulation to ASTM A 123/A 123M. Commercial Brush Blast: Brush Blast all steel members and components to ensure inter-coat adhesion to SSPC SP 7. Electro-Static Powder Top Coat. Apply Thermo-Set Polyester Powder at 3 to 5 mils (DFT) at 400 Degree Fahrenheit for 20 to 25 minutes to ASTM B 117 and ASTM D 822 Color shall be as indicated. Handrails
B.
C. D.
E. 2.4.3
Provide steel handrails, including inserts in concrete, steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53 or structural tubing conforming to ASTM A 500, Grade A or B of equivalent strength. Provide steel railings of 1-1/2 inches nominal size. Exterior railings shall be hot-dip galvanized and finished to match steel railing with decorative design grating panels. 2.4.3.1 Design
Design handrails to resist specified live loads, and in accordance with NAAMM PR, provide the same size rail and post. Follow Regulatory Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 72 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Requirements in Section 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS. 2.4.3.2 A. Fabrication
Mitered and welded joints made by fitting post to top rail and intermediate rail to post, mitering corners, groove welding joints, and grinding smooth. Butt railing splices and reinforce them by a tight fitting interior sleeve not less than 6 inches long. Where railings are to be galvanized, vent holes provided in railings and posts for galvanizing shall be located at underside of rails and at lowest elevations of horizontal or sloped rails and at bottom of posts such that all railings are drainable. Where ends of railings are exposed, close ends with welded on caps. Provide 90 degree mitered elbow. Terminate railings 1/2 inch from wall. EXECUTION INSPECTION AND PREPARATION Verify that surfaces are ready to receive railings and handrails, and that necessary blocking or internal framing has been installed. Coordinate with Section 09 22 00 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES for mounting of wall rails on metal stud partitions. Brackets must be connected to studs or other internal framing/metal strapping. INSTALLATION, INTERIOR
B.
C.
PART 3 3.1 A.
B.
3.2
At Atrium Stair 3.2.1 Cut and Miter
Cut and miter components to configuration shown. 3.2.2 Spacing
Space brackets as shown but not to exceed 4 feet on center. 3.2.3 Fitting
Install components plumb and level, or at correct rake, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. Anchor securely to structure. 3.2.4 Concealment
Conceal bolts and screws wherever possible. Where they cannot be concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. 3.2.5 Protective Coverings
Install protective coverings on railings and hand railings until Substantial Completion. 3.3 INSTALLATION, EXTERIOR
Install fabricated materials and components in accordance with manufacturer's data for steel railing with decorative design grating panel Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 05 72 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
infill. A. Erect components in holes that have been formed in concrete or core-drilled or as specified in the drawings. Railings and posts shall be adjusted prior to securing in place to ensure proper matching at butting joints and correct alignment throughout their length. Posts shall be spaced as indicated. Posts shall be plumbed in each direction. Panels shall be pitched as indicated. Panels shall be level where panels are not indicated to be pitched. After posts have been set in place and properly supported to hold them in line and on grade, fill the annular space to the depth shown on detail drawing with non-slip grout. Apply epoxy sealer after grout has hardened. hole to form a 1/4 inch wash. Trowel to fill and seal
B.
C.
D.
E.
Exercise care when installing components so as not to damage finished surface. Touch-up finished surfaces, where applicable to match factory applied coating.
F.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI B18.2.1 (1996; Errata 2003) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series (1981; R 1995) Metric Round Head Short Square Neck Bolts (1981; R 1997) Wood Screws (Inch Series)
ANSI B18.5.2.1M
ANSI B18.6.1
AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION (AWPA) AWPA C1 (2003) All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes (2003) Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes (2003) Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes (2003) Structural Lumber Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes (2002) Plywood - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes (2003) Standard for Preservative Treatment of Structural Glued Laminated Members and Lamination Before Gluing of Southern Pine, Coastal Douglas Fir, Hemfir and Western Hemlock by Pressure Processes (2001) Standard for Inspection of Treated Wood Products (1996) Brands Used on Forest Products (2001; R 2002) Fire Retardant Formulations (2004) Nonpressure Preservatives (2001; R 2005) Standard for Waterborne Preservatives Section 06 10 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
AWPA C2
AWPA C9
AWPA C20
AWPA C27
AWPA C28
AWPA M2
AWPA M6 AWPA P17 AWPA P18 AWPA P5
Ft. Detrick, MD
AWPA T1
(2004; R 2005) Use Category System: Processing and Treatment Standard (2004; R 2005) Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
AWPA U1
ASME B18.2.2
(1987; R 2005) Standard for Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series) (1982; R 2000) Metric Round Head Square Neck Bolts
ASME B18.5.2.2M
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 307 (2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength (1993) High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and Studs (2007) Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing
ASTM A 687
ASTM D 2898
FM GLOBAL (FM) FM DS 1-49 (2000) Perimeter Flashing
FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL (FSC) FSC STD 01 001 (2000) Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship
GREEN SEAL (GS) GS-36 (2000) Commercial Adhesives SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD) SCAQMD Rule #1168 (1989; R 2005) Adhesive and Sealant Applications
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE (DOC) PS1 (1995) Construction and Industrial Plywood (APA V995) U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA) CID A-A-1923 (Rev A; Notice 1) Shield, Expansion (Lag, Machine and Externally Threaded Wedge Bolt Anchors) (Rev A; Notice 1) Shield, Expansion (Self Drilling Tubular Expansion Shell Bolt Section 06 10 00 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
CID A-A-1924
Ft. Detrick, MD
Anchors CID A-A-1925 (Rev A; Notice 1) Shield Expansion (Nail Anchors) (Rev E) Bolt, Toggle: Sleeve, Screw and Expansion
FS FF-B-588
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC) SUBMITTALS
1.2
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Nailers and Nailing Strips; G, AR Drawings of field erection details, including materials and methods of fastening nailers in conformance with Factory Mutual wind uplift rated systems specified in other Sections of these specifications. SD-03 Product Data Local/Regional Materials; (LEED) Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project. Fire-retardant treatment Submit documentation verifying that no urea-formaldehyde resins were used. Adhesives; (LEED) Submit manufacturer's product data, indicating VOC content. SD-06 Test Reports Preservative-treated lumber and plywood SD-07 Certificates Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification; (LEED)
Ft. Detrick, MD
Certificates of grade Preservative treatment SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Take-back program Include contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse. SD-11 Closeout Submittals Local/Regional Materials; (LEED) LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook. Adhesives; (LEED) LEED documentation relative to low emitting materials credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook. Certified Wood; (LEED) LEED documentation relative to certified wood credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook. 1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Store, protect, handle, and install prefabricated structural elements in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. Store materials off the ground to provide proper ventilation, with drainage to avoid standing water, and protection against ground moisture and dampness. Store materials with a moisture barrier at both the ground level and as a cover forming a well ventilated enclosure. Adhere to requirements for stacking, lifting, bracing, cutting, notching, and special fastening requirements. Remove defective and damaged materials and provide new materials. Store separated reusable wood waste convenient to cutting station and area of work. 1.4 1.4.1 GRADING AND MARKING Plywood
Mark each sheet with the mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over the quality of the plywood. The mark shall identify the plywood by species group or span rating, exposure durability classification, grade, and compliance with PS1. Surfaces that are to be exposed to view shall not bear grademarks or other types of identifying marks.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.4.2
Preservative-Treated Lumber and Plywood
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of treated wood products. Each treated piece shall be inspected in accordance with AWPA M2 and permanently marked or branded, by the producer, in accordance with AWPA M6. The Contractor shall provide Contracting Officer's Representative (COR) with the inspection report of an approved independent inspection agency that offered products comply with applicable AWPA Standards. The appropriate Quality Mark on each piece will be accepted, in lieu of inspection reports, as evidence of compliance with applicable AWPA treatment standards. 1.4.3 Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber
Mark each piece in accordance with AWPA M6, except pieces that are to be natural or transparent finished. In addition, exterior fire-retardant lumber shall be distinguished by a permanent penetrating blue stain. Labels of a nationally recognized independent testing agency will be accepted as evidence of conformance to the fire-retardant requirements of AWPA M6. 1.4.4 Hardboard, Gypsum Board, and Fiberboard
Mark each sheet or bundle to identify the standard under which the material is produced and the producer. 1.5 SIZES AND SURFACING
Size references, unless otherwise specified, are nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the standard under which the product is produced. 1.6 MOISTURE CONTENT
Air-dry or kiln-dry lumber. Kiln-dry treated lumber after treatment. Maximum moisture content of wood products shall be as follows at the time of delivery to the job site: a. Moisture content shall be in accordance with standard under which the product is produced.
1.7
PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
Treat wood products with waterborne wood preservatives conforming to AWPA P5. Pressure treatment of wood products shall conform to the requirements of AWPA U1 and AWPA T1. Pressure-treated wood products shall not contain arsenic, chromium, or other agents classified as carcinogenic, probably carcinogenic, or possibly carcinogenic to humans (compounds in Groups 1, 2A, or 2B) by the International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC), Lyon, France. Pressure-treated wood products shall not exceed the limits of the U.S. EPA's Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP), and shall not be classified as hazardous waste. Submit certification from treating plant stating chemicals and process used and net amount of preservatives retained are in conformance with specified standards.lumber and timber in accordance with AWPA C1 and AWPA C2, and plywood in accordance with AWPA C1 and AWPA C9. Treat structural glued laminated timber in accordance with AWPA C1 and AWPA C28. a. 0.25 pcf intended for above ground use. Section 06 10 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
b. 1.7.1
Nailers, edge strips, crickets, curbs, and cants for roof decks.
New Construction
Use a boron-based preservative conforming to AWPA P18, sodium silicate wood mineralization process, or Ammoniacal Copper Quaternary Compound to treat wood. Use boron-based preservatives for above-ground applications only. 1.8 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT
Fire-retardant treated wood shall be pressure treated in accordance with AWPA C20 for lumber and AWPA C27 for plywood. Material use shall be defined in AWPA C20 and AWPA C27 for Exterior Type. with fire retardants conforming to AWPA P17. Fire retardant treatment of wood products shall conform to the requirements of AWPA U1, Commodity Specification H and AWPA T1, Section 8.8. Treatment and performance inspection shall be by an independent and qualified testing agency that establishes performance ratings. Each piece or bundle of treated material shall bear identification of the testing agency to indicate performance in accordance with such rating. Treated materials to be exposed to rain wetting shall be subjected to an accelerated weathering technique in accordance with ASTM D 2898 prior to being tested. Such items which will not be inside a building, and such items which will be exposed to heat or high humidity, shall receive exterior fire-retardant treatment. Fire-retardant-treated wood products shall be free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate, and formaldehyde. Items to be treated include the following: a. 1.9 1.9.1 Plywood backboards for Electrical and Communications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Certificates of Grade
Submit certificates attesting that products meet the grade requirements specified in lieu of grade markings where appearance is important and grade marks will deface material. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
During and immediately after installation of treated wood at interior spaces, provide temporary ventilation. 1.11 1.11.1 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Wood and materials may be locally available. 1.11.2 Certified Wood
Wood products shall be FSC-certified as specified herein. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total certified wood requirements.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.11.3
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification
Use FSC-certified wood where specified. Provide letter of certification signed by lumber supplier. Indicate compliance with FSC STD 01 001 and identify certifying organization. Submit FSC certification numbers; identify each certified product on a line-item basis. Submit copies of invoices bearing the FSC certification numbers. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Virgin Lumber
Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. Avoid companies who buy, sell, or use old growth timber in their operations, when possible. Lumber shall be FSC-certified. 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.1.1 LUMBER PLYWOOD Other Uses Plywood Plywood shall be FSC-certified.
Plywood for backboards. 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.1.1 OTHER MATERIALS
Miscellaneous Wood Members Nonstress Graded Members
Members shall include bridging, corner bracing, furring, grounds, and nailing strips. Members shall be in accordance with TABLE I for the species used. Sizes shall be as follows unless otherwise shown: Member _________ Bridging Size (inch) _____________ 1 x 3 or 1 x 4 for use between members 2 x 12 and smaller; 2 x 4 for use between members larger than 2 x 12. 1 x 4. 1 x 2. Plaster thickness by 1-1/2. 1 x 3 or 1 x 4 when used as shingle base or interior finish, otherwise 2 inch stock.
Corner bracing Furring Grounds Nailing strips
2.4.1.2
Blocking
Blocking shall be standard or number 2 grade. Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 06 10 00 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.4.2
Adhesives
Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials, GS-36, SCAQMD Rule #1168, and as specified. Use water-based adhesives with maximum VOC content of 15 grams/liter for all interior applications. Interior adhesives, sealants, primers and sealants used as filler must meet the requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit. 2.5 ROUGH HARDWARE
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, rough hardware shall be of the type and size necessary for the project requirements. Sizes, types, and spacing of fastenings of manufactured building materials shall be as recommended by the product manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or specified. Fasteners may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content. Rough hardware exposed to the weather or embedded in or in contact with preservative treated wood, exterior masonry, or concrete walls or slabs shall be zinc-coated. Nails and fastenings for fire-retardant treated lumber and woodwork exposed to the weather shall be copper alloy. 2.5.1 Bolts, Nuts, Studs, and Rivets
ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.5.2.1M, ASME B18.5.2.2M, ASME B18.2.2, and ASTM A 687. 2.5.2 Anchor Bolts
ASTM A 307, size as indicated, complete with nuts and washers. 2.5.3 Expansion Shields Except as shown otherwise,
CID A-A-1923, CID A-A-1924, and CID A-A-1925. maximum size of devices shall be 3/8 inch. 2.5.4 Lag Screws and Lag Bolts
ANSI B18.2.1. 2.5.5 Toggle Bolts
FS FF-B-588. 2.5.6 Wood Screws
ANSI B18.6.1. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Anchors in Masonry
Embed anchor bolts not less than 15 inches in masonry unit walls and provide each with a nut and a 2 inch diameter washer at bottom end. Fully grout bolts with mortar.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.1.2
Anchors in Concrete
Embed anchor bolts not less than 8 inches in poured concrete walls and provide each with a nut and a 2 inch diameter washer at bottom end. A bent end may be substituted for the nut and washer; bend shall be not less than 90 degrees. Powder-actuated fasteners spaced 3 feet o.c. may be provided in lieu of bolts for single thickness plates on concrete. 3.2 3.2.1 MISCELLANEOUS Wood Roof Nailers, Edge Strips, Crickets, Curbs, and Cants
Provide sizes and configurations indicated or specified and anchored securely to continuous construction. 3.2.1.1 Roof Edge Strips and Nailers
Provide at perimeter of roof, around openings through roof, and where roofs abut walls, curbs, and other vertical surfaces. Except where indicated otherwise, nailers shall be 6 inches wide and the same thickness as the insulation. Anchor nailers securely to underlying construction. Anchor perimeter nailers in accordance with FM DS 1-49. 3.2.1.2 Crickets, Cants, and Curbs
Provide wood saddles or crickets, cant strips, curbs for scuttles and ventilators, and wood nailers bolted to tops of concrete or masonry curbs and at expansion joints, as indicated, specified, or necessary.. 3.2.2 Wood Blocking
Provide proper sizes and shapes at proper locations for the installation and attachment of wood and other finish materials, fixtures, equipment, and items indicated or specified. 3.2.3 Wood Grounds
Provide for fastening wood trim, finish materials, and other items to plastered walls and ceilings. Install grounds in proper alignment and true with an 8 foot straightedge. 3.2.4 Wood Furring
Provide where shown and as necessary for facing materials specified. Except as shown otherwise, furring strips shall be nominal one by 3, continuous, and spaced 16 inches o.c. Erect furring vertically or horizontally as necessary. Nail furring strips to masonry. Do not use wood plugs. Provide furring strips around openings, behind bases, and at angles and corners. Furring shall be plumb, rigid, and level and shall be shimmed as necessary to provide a true, even plane with surfaces suitable to receive the finish required. Form furring for offsets and breaks in walls or ceilings on 1 by 4 wood strips spaced 16 inches o.c. 3.2.5 Temporary Closures
Provide with hinged doors and padlocks and install during construction at exterior doorways and other ground level openings that are not otherwise closed. Cover windows and other unprotected openings with polyethylene or other approved material, stretched on wood frames. Provide dustproof Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 06 10 00 - Page 9 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
barrier partitions to isolate areas as directed. 3.2.6 Temporary Centering, Bracing, and Shoring
Provide for the support and protection of masonry work during construction. . Forms and centering for cast-in-place concrete work are specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. 3.3 a. WASTE MANAGEMENT In accordance with the Waste Management Plan and as specified. Separate and reuse scrap sheet materials larger than 2 square feet, framing members larger than 16 inches, and multiple offcuts of any size larger than 12 inches. Clearly separate damaged wood and other scrap lumber for acceptable alternative uses on site, including bracing, blocking, cripples, ties, and shims. Separate composite wood from other wood types and recycle or reuse. Coordinate with manufacturer for take-back program and submit manufacturer's policy statement on program. Set aside scrap plastic lumber and return to manufacturer for recycling into new product. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials. Fold up metal banding, flatten, and recycle. Separate treated, stained, painted, and contaminated wood and place in designated area for hazardous materials. Dispose of according to local regulations. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, or other wood waste buried in fill or on the ground, unless for planned future use Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. Compost sawdust. Do not burn scrap lumber that has been pressure treated, or lumber that is less than one year old. -- End of Section --
b.
c.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS COMMITTEE (ALSC) ALSC PS 20 (1970) American Softwood Lumber Standard
AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION (AWPA) AWPA C1 (2003) All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes (2003) Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes (2003) Structural Lumber Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes (2002) Plywood - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes (2003) Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes (2001) Standard for Inspection of Treated Wood Products (2002) Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA) APA PS 1 (1995) Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI) AWI Qual Stds (8th Edition) AWI Quality Standards
AWPA C2
AWPA C20
AWPA C27
AWPA C9
AWPA M2
AWPA M4
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME B18.2.1 (1996; Addenda A 1999; Errata 2003; R 2005) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series) (1987; R 2005) Standard for Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series) Section 06 20 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
ASME B18.2.2
Ft. Detrick, MD
ASME B18.6.1
(1981; R 1997) Wood Screws (Inch Series)
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 687 (1993) High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and Studs (2007) Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing (2006) Nails for Use with Wood and Wood-Base Materials
ASTM D 2898
ASTM F 547
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA) BHMA A156.9 (2003) Cabinet Hardware
COMPOSITE PANEL ASSOCIATION (CPA) CPA A208.1 (2002) Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) For Interior Applications
FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL (FSC) FSC STD 01 001 (2000) Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship
HARDWOOD PLYWOOD AND VENEER ASSOCIATION (HPVA) HPVA HP-1 (2004) American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA LD 3 (2005) Standard for High-Pressure Decorative Laminates
SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB) SPIB 1003 (2002) Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE (DOC) PS-58 (1974) Basic Hardboard U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC) WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU (WCLIB) WCLIB 17 (2000) Standard Grading Rules
Ft. Detrick, MD
WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA) WWPA G-5 (1998) Western Lumber Grading Rules WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (WDMA) WDMA I.S. 4 (2000) Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork
WOOD MOULDING AND MILLWORK PRODUCERS ASSOCIATION (WMMPA) WMMPA WM 6 (1987) Industry Standard for Non-Pressure Treating of Wood Millwork
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings; G, AE SD-03 Product Data Accessories; G, AE Hardware; G, AE Panels; G, AE Manufacturer's printed data, showing texture, density, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Wood Items; G, AE, and Trim; G, AE Manufacturer's printed data indicating the usage of engineered or recycled wood products, and environmentally safe preservatives. SD-04 Samples Veneer; G, AE Three 12 inch square samples each from three veneer houses of each species of cut shown or specified; in order to provide a range for selection and coordination of color and graining. Solid Hardwood; G, AE Three 12 inch square samples each from three hardwood houses of each species of cut shown or specified, in order to provide a range for selection and coordination of color and graining. Transparent Finish; G, AE Three 12 inch square samples of each, applied to selected wood Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 06 20 00 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
veneer. Hardware; G, AE Samples shall be of sufficient size to show patterns, color ranges, and types, as applicable, of the material proposed to be used. SD-07 Certificates Certificates of grade Certificates of compliance Certificates of flitches Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification 1.3 DETAIL DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit detail drawings showing fabricated items and special mill and woodwork items. Drawings shall indicate materials and details of construction, methods of fastening, erection, and installation. 1.4 CERTIFICATES a. Provide certificates of grade from the grading agency on graded but unmarked lumber or plywood attesting that materials meet the grade requirements specified herein. Provide certificates of compliance unless materials bear certification markings or statements. Provide certificates of flitches selected were purchased for this work.
b.
c.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver lumber, plywood, trim, and millwork to job site in an undamaged condition. Stack materials to ensure ventilation and drainage. Protect against dampness before and after delivery. Store materials under cover in a well-ventilated enclosure and protect against extreme changes in temperature and humidity; maintain storage location under constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent. Do not store products in building until wet trade materials are dry. 1.6 1.6.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Lumber
Identify each piece or each bundle of lumber, millwork, and trim by the grade mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency that is certified by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade the species. 1.6.2 Plywood
Each sheet of plywood shall bear the mark of a recognized association or Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 06 20 00 - Page 4 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over quality of the plywood. Mark shall identify plywood by species group or span rating, and shall show exposure durability classification, grade, and compliance with APA PS 1. 1.6.3 Hardboard
Materials shall bear a marking or statement identifying the producer and the applicable standard. 1.6.4 Pressure-Treated Lumber and Plywood
Each treated piece shall be inspected in accordance with AWPA M2. 1.6.5 Nonpressure-Treated Woodwork and Millwork
Mark, stamp, or label, indicating compliance with WDMA I.S. 4. 1.6.6 Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber
Each piece to bear Underwriters Laboratories label or the label of another nationally recognized independent testing laboratory. 1.7 1.7.1 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Certified Wood
Wood products shall be FSC-certified as specified herein. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total certified wood requirements. 1.7.2 Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification
Use FSC-certified wood where specified. Provide letter of certification signed by lumber supplier. Indicate compliance with FSC STD 01 001 and identify certifying organization. Submit FSC certification numbers; identify each certified product on a line-item basis. Submit copies of invoices bearing the FSC certification numbers. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS WOOD Sizes and Patterns of Wood Products
Yard and board lumber sizes shall conform to ALSC PS 20. Provide shaped lumber and millwork in the patterns indicated and standard patterns of the association covering the species. Size references, unless otherwise specified, are nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the applicable standard. 2.1.2 Trim, Finish, and Frames
Provide species and grades listed for materials to be paint finished. Provide materials that are to be stain, natural, or transparent finished one grade higher than that listed. Provide species indicated for materials to be transparent finished. Run trim, except window stools and aprons with hollow backs.
Ft. Detrick, MD
TABLE OF GRADES FOR WOOD TO RECEIVE PAINT FINISH Interior Trim, Finish, and Frames All Species: C & Btr. Select (Choice & Btr Idaho White Pine) or Superior Finish.
Grading Rules WWPA G-5 grading rules
Species Aspen Douglas Fir-Larch Douglas Fir-South Engelmann Spruce -Lodgepole Pine Engelmann Spruce Hem-Fir Idaho White Pine Lodgepole Pine Mountain Hemlock Mountain Hemlock -Hem-Fir Ponderosa PineSugar Pine (Ponderosa Pine -Lodgepole Pine) Western Hemlock Douglas Fir-Larch Hem-Fir Mountain Hemlock Sitka Spruce Western Cedars Western Hemlock Southern Pine
WCLIB 17 standard grading rules
All Species: VG
C & Btr
SPIB 1003 grading rules
C & Btr
2.1.3
Utility Shelving
Utility shelving shall be painted MDF or wheatboard with clear finish and 1-1/2 inch solid lumber drop edge. 2.1.4 Hardwood Plywood
HPVA HP-1, Type II (Interior), Premium (A) Grade, hardwood veneer core construction, face veneers of maple, of thickness indicated. 2.1.5 Hardboard
PS-58, standard type, 1/4 inch thick. 2.1.6 Particleboard and Wheatboard
CPA A208.1, Grade 1-M-2 or 2-M-2 or better. 2.1.7 Stairs Risers one inch nominal
Treads 1 1/4 inches thickness, clear maple. finish lumber.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.1.8
Shoe Mold
Clear maple, 1/2 by 5/8 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2.1.9 Wood Seats
Clear maple hardwood, not less than 1 5/8 inches thick, with rounded edges. Provide stainless steel stanchions or brackets . 2.1.10 Wood Handrails and Wall Bases Provide clear
Clear maple hardwood, in sizes and profiles as indicated. urethane finish as specified.. 2.1.11 Wood Bumpers
Clear maple, dressed to size indicated and with outer edges beveled. 2.1.12 a. Wood Panel Assembly Assembly configurations, sizes, and profiles as indicated. clear urethane finish as specified. Provide
b.
Hardwood Face Veneer: Clear cherry and maple species, plain sawn. Selected for uniform color and grain quality capable of transparent finish. Grain match adjacent sheet to random matching. Transparent Finish: Grade A veneer or better. Solid Hardwood Edge Band and Base: Clear maple. Selected for uniform color and grain quality capable of transparent finish. Transparent Finish: Grade A or better. Particleboard: Medium density, CPA A208.1 Grade 1-M-2, density 45 pcf; moisture resistant; fire retardant treated. TRIM Wood
c.
d.
2.2 2.2.1
Trim, including door and window casing, shall be species and grade listed in TABLE I at the end of this section. Sizes shall be as indicated. 2.3 2.3.1 COUNTER TOPS Laminated Plastic
NEMA LD 3. 2.3.1.1 Countertop Finish Color and pattern shall be as
Grade GP 50 or PF 42, satin finish. indicated on A5 series drawings. 2.3.1.2 BK 20. Backing Sheet
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.3.2
Solid Surface
As specified in Section 06 61 16 SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS. 2.4 MOISTURE CONTENT OF WOOD PRODUCTS
Air-dry or kiln-dry lumber. Kiln-dry treated lumber after treatment. Maximum moisture content of wood products at time of delivery to the job site, and when installed, shall be as follows: a. Interior Finish Lumber, Trim, and Millwork 1 1/4 Inches Nominal or Less in Thickness: 6 percent on 85 percent of the pieces and 8 percent on remainder. Moisture content of other materials shall be in accordance with the applicable standards.
b.
2.5 2.5.1
PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT OF WOOD PRODUCTS Nonpressure Treatment
Treat woodwork and millwork, such as exterior trim, door trim, and window trim, in accordance with WDMA I.S. 4, with either 2 percent copper napthenate, 3 percent zinc napthenate, or 1.8 percent copper-8-quinolinolate. Provide a liberal brushcoat of preservative treatment to field cuts and holes. 2.5.2 Pressure Treatment
Lumber and plywood used in contact with masonry or concrete shall be treated with water-borne preservative listed in AWPA P5 in accordance with AWPA C1, AWPA C2, and AWPA C9, as applicable, and inspected in accordance with AWPA M2. Identify treatment on each piece of material by the quality mark of an agency accredited by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee. Plywood shall be treated to a reflection level as follows: Millwork in contact with water or concrete shall be preservative-treated in accordance with WMMPA WM 6. Exposed areas of treated wood that are cut or drilled after treatment shall receive a field treatment in accordance with AWPA M4. 2.6 2.6.1 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT Wood Products
Fire-retardant treated lumber shall be pressure treated in accordance with AWPA C20. Fire-retardant treated plywood shall be pressure treated in accordance with AWPA C27. Material use shall be defined in AWPA C20 and AWPA C27 for Interior Type A and Exterior Type. Treatment and performance inspection shall be by a qualified independent testing agency that establishes performance ratings. Each piece or bundle of treated material shall bear identification of the testing agency to indicate performance with such rating. Treated materials to be exposed to rain wetting shall be subjected to an accelerated weathering technique in accordance with ASTM D 2898, Method A, prior to being tested for compliance with AWPA C20 or AWPA C27.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.7
HARDWARE
Provide sizes, types, and spacings of manufactured building materials recommended by the product manufacturer except as otherwise indicated or specified. 2.7.1 Wood Screws
ASME B18.6.1. 2.7.2 Bolts, Nuts, Lag Screws, and Studs
ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.2.2, and ASTM A 687. 2.7.3 Nails
Nails shall be the size and type best suited for the purpose and shall conform to ASTM F 547. Nails shall be hot-dip galvanized or aluminum when used on exterior work. For siding, length of nails shall be sufficient to extend 1-1/2 inches into supports, including wood sheathing over framing. Screws for use where nailing is impractical shall be size best suited for purpose. 2.7.4 Adjustable Shelf Standards
BHMA A156.9, Type as indicated on drawings, with shelf rests Type as indicated on drawings. 2.7.5 Vertical Slotted Shelf Standards
BHMA A156.9, Type as indicated, with shelf brackets Type as indicated. 2.7.6 Closet Hanger Rods
Chromium-plated steel rods, not less than one inch diameter by 18 gage. Rods may be adjustable with integral mounting brackets if smaller tube is one inch by 18 gage. Provide intermediate support bracket for rods more than 48 inches long. 2.8 2.8.1 FABRICATION Quality Standards (QS)
The terms "Premium," "Custom," and "Economy" refer to the quality grades defined in AWI Qual Stds. Items not specified to be of a specific grade shall be Custom grade. The AWI QS is superseded by all contract document requirements indicated or stated herein. 2.8.2 Countertops
Fabricate with lumber and a core of particleboard or MDF, glued and screwed to form an integral unit. Bond laminated plastic under pressure to exposed surfaces, using type of glue recommended by plastic manufacturer, and bond a backing sheet under pressure to underside of countertop. Countertop unit shall be, cove moulding, and Style A back splash, and covered with NEMA LD 3, Grade PF 42 plastic. Back splash shall be not less than 3 1/2 inches nor more than 4 1/2 inches high.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.8.3
Cabinets
Wall and base cabinets shall be of the same construction and appearances. Fabricate with solid ends and frame fronts, or with frames all around. Frames shall be solid hardwood not less than 3/4 by 1 1/2 inches. Ends, bottom, back, partitions, and doors shall be hardwood plywood. Mortise and tenon, dovetail, or dowel and glue joints to produce a rigid unit. Cover exposed edges of plywood with hardwood strips. Doors, frames, and solid exposed ends shall be 3/4 inch thick; bottom, partitions, and framed ends 1/2 inch minimum; shelves 5/8 inch minimum; back 1/4 inch minimum. 2.8.3.1 Cabinet Hardware
BHMA A156.9. Provide hardware for each door, including two self-closing hinges. Provide two side-mounted metal drawer slides, full extension, for each drawer. Hardware exposed to view shall be bright chromium plated. 2.8.3.2 Finish
Provide a natural factory finish on wood surfaces after fabrication. Finish shall be fabricator's standard natural finish, except that it shall be equivalent to one coat of sealer and one coat of spar varnish on all surfaces and a second coat of spar varnish on surfaces exposed to view. Sand lightly and wipe clean between coats. 2.8.4 2.8.4.1 Casework With Transparent Finish (CTF) AWI Quality Grade (CTF)
Premium grade. 2.8.4.2 Construction (CTF)
Details shall conform to flush overlay design. 2.8.4.3 Exposed Parts
As indicated on Finish Legend drawing, high pressure laminate. 2.8.4.4 Semi-Exposed Parts
As specified in the AWI Qual Stds for the grade selected. 2.8.5 2.8.5.1 Casework With High Pressure Laminate Finish (CHPL) AWI Quality Grade (CHPL)
Premium grade. 2.8.5.2 Construction (CHPL)
Details shall conform to flush overlay design. 2.8.5.3 Exposed Surfaces
High pressure laminate, as scheduled.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.8.5.4
Semi-Exposed Surfaces
As specified in the AWI Qual Stds for the grade selected. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION FINISH WORK
Provide sizes, materials, and designs as indicated and as specified. Apply primer to finish work before installing. Where practicable, shop assemble and finish items of built-up millwork. Joints shall be tight and constructed in a manner to conceal shrinkage. Miter trim and moldings at exterior angles and cope at interior angles and at returns. Material shall show no warp after installation. Install millwork and trim in maximum practical lengths. Fasten finish work with finish nails. Provide blind nailing where practicable. Set face nails for putty stopping. 3.1.1 Interior Finish Work Provide window and door
After installation, sand exposed surfaces smooth. trim in single lengths. 3.1.2 Bases
Flat member with a molded top and maple shoe mold. Fasten base to framing or to grounds. Nail shoe mold to the base. Set after finish flooring is in place. 3.1.3 Finish Stair Work
Fit, nail, screw, bolt, and glue stair work together to form a strong rigid structure without squeaks or vibrations. Anchor newels and posts securely to rough stair framing. Cut newels, posts, and drops accurately around floor construction to make tight fit. Install balusters into treads and landings with glue. Install railing with straight runs following slope of stairs and with smooth curve turns. Return railing profile at ends and secure joints with bolts and nuts. Secure railing to posts and newels with concealed anchors. Support wall rails on metal brackets spaced near ends and not over 5 feet o.c. 3.2 SHELVING
One inch nominal thick wood shelf material or 3/4 or 23/32 inch thick plywood shelf material supported substantially with end and intermediate supports and arranged to prevent buckling and sagging. 3.2.1 Storage Rooms
Provide storage rooms with shelves of size and arrangement as indicated 11 1/4 inches wide, bottom shelf 18 inches above the floor, top shelf 18 inches below the ceiling, and intermediate shelves approximately 18 inches apart. 3.2.2 Room Closets
Provide two shelves 11 1/4 inches wide. Support lower shelf by hook strips at back and ends, and provide full-length wood or metal clothes hanger rods unless indicated otherwise.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.3 3.3.1
MISCELLANEOUS Counters
Construct as indicated. Conceal fastenings where practicable, fit counter neatly, install in a rigid and substantial manner, and scribe to adjoining surfaces. Provide counter sections in longest lengths practicable; keep joints in tops to a minimum; and where joints are necessary, provide tight hairline joints drawn up with concealed-type heavy pull-up bolts. Glue joints with water-resistant glue and, in addition, make rigid and substantial with screws, bolts, or other approved fastenings. 3.3.2 Cabinets
Install level, plumb, and tight against adjacent walls. Secure cabinets to walls with concealed toggle bolts, and secure top to cabinet with concealed screws. Make cut-outs for fixtures to templates supplied by fixture manufacturer. Carefully locate cut-outs for pipes so that edges of holes will be covered by escutcheons. 3.3.3 Wood Panel Assembly
Use concealed attachments as indicated; do not use nails or screws to secure panel assembly. Panels shall require no site cutting which will alter faces, or sequencing of panels or other features along that run. 3.3.4 Wood Bumpers
Bore, countersink, and bolt in place where indicated. 3.4 INTERIOR TRIM
Interior trim shall be installed straight, plumb, level and with closely fitted joints. Exposed surfaces shall be machine sanded at the mill. Work shall be coped at returns and interior angles and mitered at external corners. Intersections of flatwork shall be shouldered to ease any inherent changes in plane. Window and door trim shall be provided in single lengths. Blind nailing shall be used to the extent practicable, and face nailing shall be set and stopped with a nonstaining putty to match the finish applied. Screws shall be used for attachment to metal; setting and stopping of screws shall be of the same quality as required where nails are used. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 06 41 16.00 10 LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI A161.2 (1998) Decorative Laminate Countertops, Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure (1999) Standard for Mat-Formed Wood Particle Board (2002) Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) For Interior Applications
ANSI A208.1
ANSI A208.2
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI) AWI Qual Stds (8th Edition) AWI Quality Standards
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM D 1037 (1999) Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials (2007b) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials (2006) Nails for Use with Wood and Wood-Base Materials
ASTM E 84
ASTM F 547
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA) BHMA A156.11 (2004) American National Standard for Cabinet Locks (2003) Cabinet Hardware
BHMA A156.9
WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (WDMA) WDMA I.S. 1-A (1997) Architectural Wood Flush Doors
Ft. Detrick, MD
1.2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Work in this section includes laminate clad custom casework cabinets, countertops,and other custom casework as shown on the drawings and as described in this specification. This Section includes high-pressure laminate surfacing and cabinet hardware. The Contractor shall comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS. All exposed and semi-exposed surfaces, whose finish is not otherwise noted on the drawings or finish schedule, shall be sanded smooth and shall receive a melamine finish. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. All items designated with a "G", including product literature, calculations, component data, certificates, diagrams, drawings, and samples shall be submitted concurrently in one complete system submittal. Omission of any required submittal item from the package shall be sufficient cause for disapproval of the entire submittal. Unless otherwise indicated in the submittal review commentary, disapproval of any item within the package shall require a re-submittal of the entire system package, in which all deficiencies shall be corrected. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Shop Drawings; G, AE Installation Shop drawings showing all fabricated casework items in plan view, elevations and cross-sections to accurately indicate materials used, details of construction, dimensions, methods of fastening and erection, and installation methods proposed. Shop drawing casework items shall be clearly cross-referenced to casework items located on the project drawings. Shop drawings shall include a color schedule of all casework items to include all countertop, exposed, and semi-exposed cabinet finishes to include finish material manufacturer, pattern, and color. SD-03 Product Data Wood Materials; G, AE Wood Finishes; G, AE Finish Schedule; G, AE Descriptive data which provides narrative written verification of all types of construction materials and finishes, methods of construction, etc. not clearly illustrated on the submitted shop drawings. Data shall provide written verification of conformance with AWI Qual Stds for the quality indicated to include materials, tolerances, and types of construction. Both the manufacturer of materials and the fabricator shall submit available literature which describes re-cycled product content, operations and processes in place that support efficient use of natural resources, energy efficiency, emissions of ozone depleting chemicals, management of water and operational waste, indoor Issued for Construction Section 06 41 16.00 10 - Page 2 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
environmental quality, and other production techniques supporting sustainable design and products. SD-04 Samples Plastic Laminates; G, AE Two samples of each plastic laminate pattern and color. Samples shall be a minimum of 5 by 7 inches in size. Tag samples to match those indicated on finish drawing A7.00 Cabinet Hardware; G, AE One sample of each cabinet hardware item specified to include hinges, pulls, drawer glides, Mock-ups; G, AE Provide Wall, floor and shelf unit with hardware and finishes as selected. SD-07 Certificates Laminate Clad Casework Quality Assurance A quality control statement which illustrates compliance with and understanding of AWI Qual Stds requirements, in general, and the specific AWI Qual Stds requirements provided in this specification. The quality control statement shall also certify a minimum of ten years Contractor's experience in laminate clad casework fabrication and construction. The quality control statement shall provide a list of a minimum of three successfully completed projects of a similar scope, size, and complexity, completed in the last five years. 1.4 a. QUALITY ASSURANCE Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, materials, construction methods, and fabrication shall conform to and comply with the premium grade quality standards as outlined in AWI Qual Stds, Section 400G and Section 400B for laminate clad cabinets. These standards shall apply in lieu of omissions or specific requirements in this specification. Contractors and their personnel engaged in the work shall be able to demonstrate successful experience with work of comparable extent, complexity and quality to that shown and specified. Contractor must demonstrate knowledge and understanding of AWI Qual Stds requirements for the quality grade indicated. Work installed in Atrium shall meet ASTM E 84 requirements and shall be Class A fire rated. MOCK-UPS
b.
1.5
Prior to final approval of shop drawings, a full-size mock-up shall be provided of a typical floor cabinet, wall cabinet and open shelf unit. The mock-up shall include all components and hardware necessary to illustrate a completed unit and shall include a minimum of one door and one drawer assembly. The completed mock-up shall include countertops and back splashes where specified. The mock-up shall utilize specified finishes in Issued for Construction Section 06 41 16.00 10 - Page 3 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
the patterns and colors as indicated on the drawing A7.00. Upon disapproval, the Contractor shall rework or remake the mock-up until approval is secured. Rejected units shall be removed from the jobsite. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the finished work. 1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Casework shall be delivered fully assembled. All units shall be delivered to the site in undamaged condition, stored off the ground in fully enclosed areas, and protected from damage. The storage area shall be well ventilated and not subject to extreme changes in temperature or humidity. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Work shall be coordinated with other trades. Units shall not be installed in any room or space until painting, and ceiling installation are complete within the room where the units are located. Floor cabinets shall be installed before resilient and/or carpet finished flooring materials are installed. Cabinets shall be installed after polished floor, fluid applied floors, terrazzo and other monolithic floor finishes are installed. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
Field measurements shall be verified as indicated in the shop drawings before fabrication. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 a. PRODUCTS WOOD MATERIALS Lumber All framing lumber shall be kiln-dried Grade III to dimensions as shown on the drawings. Frame front, where indicated on the drawings, shall be nominal 3/4 inch hardwood. Standing or running trim casework components which are specified to receive a transparent finish shall be maple hardwood species, plain sawn. Location, shape, and dimensions shall be as indicated on the drawings. Panel Products Plywood
b.
2.1.2 2.1.2.1
Plywood panels used for framing purposes shall be veneer core hardwood plywood, AWI Qual Stds Grade AA. Nominal thickness of plywood panels shall be as indicated in this specification and on the drawings. 2.1.2.2 Particleboard
Particleboard shall be industrial grade, medium density ( 40 to 50 pounds per cubic foot), 3/4 inch thick. A moisture-resistant particleboard in grade Type 2-M-2 or 2-M-3 shall be used as the substrate for plastic laminate covered components as located on the drawings and other areas subjected to moisture. Particleboard shall meet the minimum standards listed in ASTM D 1037 and ANSI A208.1.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.1.2.3
Engineered Panel Products (Wheatboard)
Engineered Panel products shall be fabricated from wheat straw. a. Design Standard Manufacturer: Environ Biocomposites 221 Mahr Drive, Mankato, MN 56001, Environ Biofiber Wheat Board. 1) Products complying with this specification may be provided by other manufacturers, including but not limited to: PrimeBoard, 2441 North 15th Street, Wahpeton, ND 58075.
b.
Description: Wheat straw fiberboard shall be made from harvested wheat straw fiber and be formaldehyde-free. Panels shall have a smooth surface. Reference Standards: Average density of 43 pounds per cubic foot (689 kg/m3), meeting or exceeding ANSI A208.1 M3 PB Standard specifications and ANSI A208.2 2002 Grade 130-MR50 MDF Standard specifications. Resin: Panels shall be manufactured using emissions-free synthetic resin. Resin shall be formaldehyde-free and produce no Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC's). Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 0.01 ppm. Fiber Source: Panels shall be manufactured using agricultural by-products or products for 100 percent of the cellulosic content of the panel derived from renewable fibers or particles, such as by-product streams from food production or manufacturing operations. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 8 percent, maximum. 3700 psi (25.5 N/mm2). 500,000 psi (3447 N/mm2).
c.
d.
e.
f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q.
Moisture Content: Modulus of Rupture:
Modulus of Elasticity: Internal Bond: Surface Bond:
110 psi (0.758 N/mm2). 240 psi (1.654 N/mm2). 300 lbf (1335 N). 251 lbf (1117 N).
Face Screw Holding Strength: Edge Screw Holding Strength: Hardness: 1,000 lbf (4448 N).
Thickness Tolerance: Flame spread:
0.003 inches (0.076 mm).
ASTM E 84 Class 3 or C.
Provide clear urethane finish on all surfaces. Medium Density Fiberboard
2.1.2.4
Medium density fiberboard (MDF) shall be an acceptable panel substrate where noted on the drawings. Medium density fiberboard shall meet the minimum standards listed in ANSI A208.2.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.2
SOLID POLYMER MATERIAL
Solid surfacing casework components shall conform to the requirements of Section 06 61 16 SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS. 2.3 HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE (HPDL)
Plastic laminates shall meet the requirements of NEMA LD 3 and ANSI A161.2 for high-pressure decorative laminates. Design, colors, surface finish and texture, and locations shall be as indicated on the drawing A7.00 Plastic laminate types and nominal minimum thicknesses for casework components shall be as indicated in the following paragraphs. 2.3.1 Horizontal General Purpose Standard (HGS) Grade
Horizontal general purpose standard grade plastic laminate shall be 0.048 inches (plus or minus 0.005 inches) in thickness. This laminate grade is intended for horizontal surfaces where postforming is not required. 2.3.2 Vertical General Purpose Standard (VGS) Grade
Vertical general purpose standard grade plastic laminate shall be 0.028 inches (plus or minus 0.004 inches) in thickness. This laminate grade is intended for exposed exterior vertical surfaces of casework components where postforming is not required. 2.3.3 Horizontal General Purpose Postformable (HGP) Grade
Horizontal general purpose postformable grade plastic laminate shall be 0.042 inches (plus or minus 0.005 inches) in thickness. This laminate grade is intended for horizontal surfaces where post forming is required. 2.3.4 Vertical General Purpose Postformable (VGP) Grade
Vertical general purpose postformable grade plastic laminate shall be 0.028 inches (plus or minus 0.004 inches) in thickness. This laminate grade is intended for exposed exterior vertical surfaces of components where postforming is required for curved surfaces. 2.3.5 Horizontal General Purpose Fire Rated (HGF) Grade
Horizontal general purpose fire rated grade plastic laminate shall be 0.048 inches (plus or minus 0.005 inches) in thickness. Laminate grade shall have a class 1, class A fire rating in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2.3.6 Vertical General Purpose Fire Rated (VGF) Grade
Vertical general purpose fire rated grade plastic laminate shall be 0.028 inches (plus or minus 0.004 inches) in thickness. This laminate grade shall have a class 1, class A fire rating in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2.3.7 Cabinet Liner Standard (CLS) Grade
Cabinet liner standard grade plastic laminate shall be 0.020 inches in thickness. This laminate grade is intended for light duty semi-exposed interior surfaces of casework components.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.3.8
Backing Sheet (BK) Grade
Undecorated backing sheet grade laminate is formulated specifically to be used on the backside of plastic laminated panel substrates to enhance dimensional stability of the substrate. Backing sheet thickness shall be 0.020 inches. Backing sheets shall be provided for all laminated casework components where plastic laminate finish is applied to only one surface of the component substrate. 2.4 THERMOSET DECORATIVE OVERLAYS (MELAMINE)
Thermoset decorative overlays (melamine panels) shall be used for casework cabinet interior, drawer interior, all semi-exposed surfaces. 2.5 EDGE BANDING
Edge banding for casework doors and drawer fronts shall be self edge with plastic laminate to match face of doors or drawers.. 2.6 CABINET HARDWARE
All hardware shall conform to BHMA A156.9, unless otherwise noted, and shall consist of the following components: a. b. Door Hinges: Concealed adjustable type, for a 170 degree opening.
Cabinet Pulls: Provide 8-13/16" long 13/32" diameter rod with satin stainless steel finish. Rod mounts on 5/16" diameter, 1-13/32" long posts. Cabinet Legs: Provide 1 inch diameter steel legs with polished chrome finish. Legs shall have a minimum 200 lbs. loading capability. Legs are adjustable at top. Provide heights as indicated on the drawings. Drawer Slide: Side mounted type, BHMA No. 100 with full extension and a minimum 100 pound load capacity. Slides shall include an integral stop to avoid accidental drawer removal. Adjustable Shelf Support System: Multiple holes with metal pin supports. Locks: where indicated on drawings provide Cylindrical (cam) type, 5-pin tumbler, brass with chrome-plated finish, and complying with BHMA A156.11, Grade 1. Exposed Hardware finishes: BHMA 630, satin stainless steel, unless indicated otherwise. ROD AND CABLE DISPLAY SYSTEM Rod and Cable Display System: Provide rod and cable display system for visual display boards. System consists of track, 3 mm stainless steel cable and display supports. Provide satin anodized aluminum finish. Design Standard Manufacturer: BN Industries. Products complying with this specification may be provided by other manufacturers, including but not limited to: 1) 2) Carl Stahl, DecorCable Shopkit Group Ltd.
b.
c.
d. e.
g.
2.6.1 a.
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3) 2.7
Nova Display, Inc.
FASTENERS
Nails, screws, and other suitable fasteners shall be the size and type best suited for the purpose and shall conform to ASTM F 547 where applicable. 2.8 2.8.1 ADHESIVES, CAULKS, AND SEALANTS Adhesives
Adhesives shall be of a formula and type recommended by AWI. Adhesives shall be selected for their ability to provide a durable, permanent bond and shall take into consideration such factors as materials to be bonded, expansion and contraction, bond strength, fire rating, and moisture resistance. Adhesives shall meet local regulations regarding VOC emissions and off-gassing. 2.8.1.1 Wood Joinery
Adhesives used to bond wood members shall be a Type II for interior use urea-formaldehyde resin formula. Adhesives shall withstand a bond test as described in WDMA I.S. 1-A. 2.8.1.2 Laminate Adhesive
Adhesive used to join high-pressure decorative laminate to wood shall be a water-based contact adhesive. 2.8.2 Caulk
Caulk used to fill voids and joints between laminated components and between laminated components and adjacent surfaces shall be clear, 100 percent silicone. 2.8.3 Sealant
Sealant shall be of a type and composition recommended by the substrate manufacturer to provide a moisture barrier at sink cutouts and all other locations where unfinished substrate edges may be subjected to moisture. 2.9 WOOD FINISHES
Paint, stain, varnish and their applications required for laminate clad casework components shall be clear urethaneas indicated in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 2.10 2.10.1 a. b. ACCESSORIES Glass and Glazing Glass required in laminated casework shall be 3/8 inch clear tempered. Encapsulated Resin panels in casework shall be 1/4 inch thick, in color as indicated on drawing A7.00. Grommets stainless steel material for cutouts with a diameter as
2.10.2
Grommets shall be
Ft. Detrick, MD
indicated, with liner in hole and caps. Locations shall be as indicated on the drawings. 2.11 GLASS DOORS AND TRACK
Provide sliding glass doors, fabricated from 1/4 inch thick tempered glass and aluminum sliding door track. Track shall have clear anodized finish,and steel rollers, Provide removable lock for each pair of doors. 2.12 BENCH CUSHION as indicated on drawings. Cushion shall be high thick, covered in fabric as indicated on drawings. A rated in accordance with ASTM E84. Provide fire fabric as required.
Provide bench cushions density foam, 4 inches Cushion shall be Class retardant treatment on 2.13 FABRICATION
Fabrication and assembly of components shall be accomplished at the shop site to the maximum extent possible. Construction and fabrication of cabinets and their components shall meet or exceed the requirements for AWI premium grade unless otherwise indicated in this specification. Cabinet style, in accordance with AWI Qual Stds, Section 400-G descriptions, shall be as indicated on the drawings. 2.13.1 2.13.1.1 Base and Wall Cabinet Case Body Cabinet Components
Frame members shall be glued-together, kiln-dried hardwood lumber. Top corners, bottom corners, and cabinet bottoms shall be braced with either hardwood blocks or water-resistant glue and nailed in place metal or plastic corner braces. Cabinet components shall be constructed from the following materials and thicknesses: a. Body Members (Ends, Divisions, Bottoms, and Tops): 3/4 inch medium density fiberboard (MDF) or veneer core plywood where noted panel product. Face Frames and Rails: Shelving: 3/4 inch MDF.
b. c. d. e. f. g.
3/4 inch veneer core plywood. 1/4 inch medium density fiberboard (MDF). 1/2 inch hardwood lumber.
Cabinet Backs:
Drawer Sides, Backs, and Subfronts: Drawer Bottoms:
1/4 inch medium density fiberboard (MDF) 3/4-inch medium density fiberboard (MDF).
Door and Drawer Fronts:
2.13.1.2 a.
Joinery Method for Case Body Members
Tops, Exposed Ends, and Bottoms. Stop dado, glued under pressure, and either nailed, stapled or screwed (fasteners will not be visible on exposed parts) Exposed End Corner and Face Frame Attachment. nailed. Butt joint, glued and
b.
Ft. Detrick, MD
c.
Cabinet Backs (Wall Hung Cabinets): Wall hung cabinet backs must not be relied upon to support the full weight of the cabinet and its anticipated load for hanging/mounting purposes. Method of back joinery and hanging/mounting mechanisms should transfer the load to case body members. Fabrication method shall be full bound, captured in grooves on cabinet sides, top, and bottom. Cabinet backs for floor standing cabinets shall be side bound, captured in grooves; glued and fastened to top and bottom. Cabinet Backs (Floor Standing Cabinets) Side bound, captured in grooves; glued and fastened to top and bottom. Wall Anchor Strips shall be required for all cabinets than 1/2 inch thick. Strips shall consist of minimum lumber, minimum 2-1/2 inches width; securely attached cabinet back - top and bottom for wall hung cabinets, floor standing cabinets. Cabinet Floor Base with backs less 1/2 inch thick to wall side of top only for
d.
e.
2.13.2
Floor cabinets shall be mounted on a base constructed of nominal 2 inch thick lumber. Base assembly components shall be treated lumber. Finished height for each cabinet base shall be as indicated on the drawings. Bottom edge of the cabinet door or drawer face shall be flush with top of base as indicated on the drawings. 2.13.3 Cabinet Door and Drawer Fronts
Door and drawer front edges shall be surfaced with high pressure plastic laminate , color and pattern to match exterior face laminate . 2.13.4 a. b. Drawer Assembly2.13.4.1 Drawer Assembly Joinery Method
Doweled, glued under pressure. Bottoms shall be set into sides, front, and back, with a minimum 3/8 inch standing shoulder. Shelving General Requirements 1/4 inch deep groove
2.13.5 2.13.5.1
Shelving shall be fabricated from 3/4 inch veneer core plywood. All shelving top and bottom surfaces shall be finished with HPDL plastic laminate. Shelf edges shall be finished in a HPDL plastic laminate. 2.13.5.2 Shelf Support System
The shelf support system shall be: Pin Hole Method. Holes shall be drilled on the interior surface of the cabinet side walls. Holes shall be evenly spaced in two vertical columns The holes in each column shall be spaced at 1 inch increments starting 6 inches from the cabinet interior bottom and extending to within 6 inches of the top interior surface of the cabinet. Holes shall be drilled to provide a level, stable surface when the shelf is resting on the shelf pins. Hole diameter shall be coordinated with pin insert size to provide a firm, tight fit. Issued for ConstructionSection 06 41 16.00 10 - Page 10 19 September 2008
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.13.6
Laminate Clad Countertops
Laminate countertop substrate shall be constructed of 3/4 inch medium density fiberboard (MDF). The substrate shall be moisture-resistant where countertops receive sinks, lavatories, or are subjected to liquids. All substrates shall have sink cutout edges sealed with appropriate sealant against moisture. No joints shall occur at any cutouts. A balanced backer sheet is required. 2.13.6.1 Edge Style
Front and exposed side countertop edges shall be in shapes and to dimensions as shown on the drawings. The countertop edge material shall be: Plastic laminate Self Edge. Flat, 90 degree "self " edge. Edge must be applied before top. Laminate edge shall overlap countertop laminate and shall be eased to eliminate sharp corners. 2.13.6.2 Laminate Clad Splashes be 3/4 inch medium density fiberboard. integral with countertop, coved to radius the drawings. Backsplash laminate adjacent countertop laminate.
Countertop splash substrate shall Laminate clad backsplash shall be and to dimensions as indicated on pattern and color shall match the 2.13.7 Laminate Application
Laminate application to substrates shall follow the recommended procedures and instructions of the laminate manufacturer and NEMA LD 3, using tools and devices specifically designed for laminate fabrication and application. Provide a balanced backer sheet (Grade BK) wherever only one surface of the component substrate requires a plastic laminate finish. Apply required grade of laminate in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes using one piece for full length only, using adhesives specified herein or as recommended by the manufacturer. Fit corners and joints hairline. All laminate edges shall be machined flush, filed, sanded, or buffed to remove machine marks and eased (sharp corners removed). Clean up at easing shall be such that no overlap of the member eased is visible. Fabrication shall conform to ANSI A161.2. Laminate types and grades for component surfaces shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated on the drawings: a. Base/Wall Cabinet Case Body. 1) Exterior (exposed) surfaces to include exposed and semi-exposed face frame surfaces: HPDL Grade VGS. Interior (semi-exposed) surfaces to include interior back wall, bottom, and side walls: Thermoset Decorative Overlay (melamine).
2)
b.
Adjustable Shelving. 1) 2) Top and bottom surfaces: HPDL Grade HGS. All edges: HPDL Grade VGS.
c.
Fixed Shelving.
Ft. Detrick, MD
1) 2) d.
Top and bottom surfaces: HPDL Grade HGS. Exposed edges: HPDL Grade VGS.
Door, Drawer Fronts, Access Panels. 1) Exterior (exposed) and interior (semi-exposed) faces: HPDL Grade VGS Edges: HPDL Grade VGS.
2) e.
Drawer Assembly. Interior and exterior surfaces: (melamine). Thermoset Decorative Overlay
f. Countertops and Splashes. Exposed and semi-exposed surfaces: HPDL Grade HGS g. Tolerances Flushness, flatness, and joint tolerances of laminated surfaces shall meet the AWI Qual Stds premium grade requirements. 2.13.8 2.13.8.1 Finishing Filling
No fasteners shall be exposed on laminated surfaces. All nails, screws, and other fasteners in non-laminated cabinet components shall be countersunk and the holes filled with wood filler consistent in color with the wood species. 2.13.8.2 Sanding
All surfaces requiring coatings shall be prepared by sanding with a grit and in a manner that scratches will not show in the final system. 2.13.8.3 Coatings
Types, method of application and location of casework finishes shall be in accordance with the finish schedule, drawings and Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. All cabinet reveals shall be painted. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION
Installation shall comply with applicable requirements for AWI Qual Stds premium quality standards. Countertops and fabricated assemblies shall be installed level, plumb, and true to line, in locations shown on the drawings. Cabinets and other laminate clad casework assemblies shall be attached and anchored securely to the floor and walls with mechanical fasteners that are appropriate for the wall and floor construction.
Ft. Detrick, MD
3.1.1 3.1.1.1
Anchoring Systems Floor
Base cabinets shall utilize a floor anchoring system. Anchoring and mechanical fasteners shall not be visible from the finished side of the casework assembly. Cabinet assemblies shall be attached to anchored bases without visible fasteners. Where assembly abutts a wall surface, anchoring shall include a minimum 1/2 inch thick lumber or panel product hanging strip, minimum 2-1/2 inch width; securely attached to the top of the wall side of the cabinet back. 3.1.1.2 Wall
Cabinet to be wall mounted shall utilize minimum 1/2 inch thick lumber or panel product hanging strips, minimum 2-1/2 inch width; securely attached to the wall side of the cabinet back, both top and bottom. 3.1.2 Countertops
Countertops shall be installed in locations as indicated on the drawings. Countertops shall be fastened to supporting casework structure with mechanical fasteners, hidden from view. All joints formed by the countertop or countertop splash and adjacent wall surfaces shall be filled with a clear silicone caulk. 3.1.3 Hardware
Casework hardware shall be installed in types and locations as indicated on the drawings. Where fully concealed European-style hinges are specified to be used with cabinet doors, the use of plastic or synthetic insertion dowels shall be used to receive 3/16 inch "Euroscrews". The use of wood screws without insertion dowels is prohibited. 3.1.4 Doors, Drawers and Removable Panels
The fitting of doors, drawers and removable panels shall be accomplished within target fitting tolerances for gaps and flushness in accordance with AWI Qual Stds premium grade requirements. 3.1.5 Plumbing Fixtures
Sinks, sink hardware, and other plumbing fixtures shall be installed in locations as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. 3.1.6 Glass
Glass and glazing shall be installed in the casework using methods and materials specified in Section 08 81 00 GLAZING in locations as indicated on the drawings. -- End of Section --
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 06 51 50 FIBERGLASS (FRP) GRATINGS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM D 635 (2006) Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position (2007b) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
ASTM E 84
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO) ISO 9001 (2000) Quality management systemsRequirements U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC) SUMMARY Section Includes
1.2 1.2.1
Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) items, with appurtenances, accessories and incidentals. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Fabrication; G, AR and installation details; G, AR
Ft. Detrick, MD
Include location of each item, dimensioned plans, sections and details of each grating location, attachment and anchorage devices, and other accessories and components. Indicate materials, core thicknesses, types, styles, finishes, connection details, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, accessories, type and size of fasteners, including part or catalog numbers. SD-03 Product Data Grating products; G, AR (LEED) Submit manufacturer s published literature including structural design data, structural properties data, grating load/deflection tables, corrosion resistance tables, certificates of compliance, test reports as applicable, concrete anchor systems and their allowable load tables. SD-04 Samples Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic; G, AR Sample pieces, 12 x 12 of each type of grating for acceptance by the AE as to quality and color. Sample pieces shall be manufactured by the method specified Approved samples will become basis for standard of acceptance of materials and workmanship. 1.4 1.4.1 A. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Manufacturer Minimum ten (10) years experience in design and manufacture of similar products and systems. ISO 9001 certified. Provide proof of certification from at least two other quality assurance programs for its facilities or products (UL, DNV, ABS, USCG, AARR). DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING General
B. C.
1.5 1.5.1
Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS. 1.5.2 Delivery
Deliver products in original, unbroken pallets, packages, containers, or bundles bearing manufacturer s label. 1.5.3 A. Storage Carefully handle products to prevent abrasion, cracking, chipping, twisting, and other deformations. Section 06 51 50 - Page 2 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
B. C.
Store items in enclosed area, free from contact with soil and water. Store adhesives, resins and their catalysts and hardeners in dry indoor storage facilities between 70 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.6
Verify actual locations of pits and other construction contiguous with FRP grating fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 1.7.1 COORDINATION Coordinate Installation
Coordinate installation of anchorages for FRP fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including framing that is to be embedded in concrete. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.8 1.8.1 WARRANTY Special Warranty
Provide manufacturer's 3 year warranty on FRP products against defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS, GENERAL Composition
Composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in qualities, quantities, properties, arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet design requirements and dimensions as specified in the Contract Documents. 2.1.2 Fiberglass Reinforcement
Combination of continuous roving, continuous strand mat, and surfacing veil in sufficient quantities as needed by application and/or physical properties required. 2.1.3 Resins
Vinyl ester with chemical formulations as necessary to provide corrosion resistance, strength and other physical properties as required. 2.1.4 Surface Finish
Smooth, resin-rich, free of voids and without dry spots, cracks, crazes or unreinforced areas. Glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against exposure due to wear or weathering. 2.1.5 Ultraviolet Light Protection
Provide integral UV inhibitors in resin for FRP products exposed to weather.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.1.6
Flame Spread
Tested flame spread rating: 15 or less in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2.1.7 Burn Rate
Tested burn time: less than 30 seconds and extent of burn rate of less than or equal to 10 millimeters in accordance with ASTM D 635. 2.1.8 Hold-Down Clips
Type 316 stainless steel. 2.2 2.2.1 PULTRUDED GRATING Grating Components
High strength and high stiffness pultruded elements having between 60 and 70 percent glass content (by weight) of continuous roving and continuous strand mat fiberglass reinforcements. 2.2.2 Bearing Bars
Interlocked and epoxied in place with two-piece cross rod system, below walking surface of grating, to provide a mechanical and chemical lock. 2.2.3 Non-Slip Surfacing
Quartz grit bonded and baked to top surface of finished grating product. Texture selected by AE. 2.2.4 Color
As selected by AE. 2.2.5 Mesh Configuration
Meet manufacturers design standard requirements. 2.2.6 Load/Deflection
Meet manufacturer s published safe recommended loadings, and design standard. 2.2.7 Manufacturers
Fibergrate Composite Structures Incorporated, McNichols, or GEF Incorporate. 2.2.7.1 Fiberglass Grating Type 1
Design Standard: McNichols Pultruded Fiberglass Wide T-Bar Grating, MS T-1815 1-1/2 inches Height T-shaped Bearing Bars Spaced 2 inches on center, 0.375 inch open space, with Fine/Pool surface grit. Structural performance characteristics: 0.031 inch maximum deflection with a 750 pounds/foot of width concentrated load on an 18 inches span, 0.004 inch maximum deflection with a 100 pounds/square foot uniform load on an 18 inch span.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.2.7.2
Fiberglass Grating Type 2
Design Standard: McNichols Pultruded Fiberglass Wide T-Bar Grating, MS T-3320 2 inch Height T-shaped Bearing Bars Spaced 1.5 inches on center, 0.50 inch open space, with Regular surface grit. Structural performance characteristics: 0.178 inch maximum deflection with a 750 pounds/foot of width concentrated load on a 48 inches span, 0.059 inch maximum deflection with a 100 pounds/square foot uniform load on a 48 inches span. 2.2.7.3 Fiberglass Grating Type 3
Design Standard: McNichols Pultruded Fiberglass Wide T-Bar Grating, MS T-1815 1-1/2 inches Height T-shaped Bearing Bars Spaced 2 inches on center, 0.375 inch open space, with Fine/Pool surface grit. Structural performance characteristics: 0.064 inch maximum deflection with a 750 pounds/foot of width concentrated load on an 24 inches span, 0.011 inch maximum deflection with a 100 pounds/square foot uniform load on an 24 inch span. 2.2.7.4 Fiberglass Grating Type 4
Design Standard: McNichols Pultruded Fiberglass Wide T-Bar Grating, MS T-3320 2 inch Height T-shaped Bearing Bars Spaced 1.5 inches on center, 0.50 inch open space, with Regular surface grit. Structural performance characteristics: 0.180 inch maximum deflection with a 400 pounds/foot of width concentrated load on a 60 inches span, 0.141 inch maximum deflection with a 100 pounds/square foot uniform load on a 60 inches span. 2.2.8 FRP Structural Shapes
Embed angle frame: as required for thickness of grating, complete with continuous integral anchor. 2.3 2.3.1 FABRICATION - GENERAL Dimensions
Verify dimensions on site prior to fabrication. Determine correct size and locations of required holes or cutouts from field dimensions before grating fabrication. 2.3.2 Layout
Each grating section shall be readily removable. Provide openings and holes where indicated. Provide grating supports at openings in grating where necessary to meet load/deflection requirements. Grating openings which fit around protrusions (pipes, cables, machinery, etc.) shall be discontinuous at approximately centerline of opening so each section of grating is readily removable. 2.3.3 Sealing
Coat shop fabricated grating cuts with compatible resin to provide corrosion resistance. 2.3.4 Hold-Down Clips
Space hold-down clips at maximum four-feet apart with minimum four clips per piece of grating, or as recommended by manufacturer.
Ft. Detrick, MD
2.3.5
Anchorage
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 A. B. EXECUTION INSTALLATION General Verify dimensions before field assembly and installation. Set gratings plumb, square, and true to line in locations shown on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing FRP fabrications to in-place construction. Set FRP fabrication accurately in location, alignment and elevation. Ensure edges and surfaces are level, plumb, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in form work for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. Hold-Down Clips
C.
D.
E.
3.1.2
Lock grating panels securely in place with hold-down clips. 3.1.3 Field Cutting
Field cut and drill FRP products with carbide or diamond tipped bits and blades in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.1.4 Sealing
Seal cut or drilled surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.1.5 Items Damaged
Replace items damaged in course of installation.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SECTION 06 61 16 SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI A108.1 ANSI Z124.3 ANSI Z124.6 (2005) Installation of Ceramic Tile (1995) Plastic Lavatories (1997) Plastic Sinks
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM D 2583 (2007) Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor (1998; R 2005) Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics (2003) Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics (2003) Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between Minus 30 degrees C and 30 degrees C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer (2007b) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials (1996; R 2002) Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi
ASTM D 570
ASTM D 638
ASTM D 696
ASTM E 84
ASTM G 21
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF) NSF 51 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION (2002) Food Equipment Materials
Work in this section includes countertops, encapsulated resin and other items utilizing solid polymer (solid surfacing) fabrication as shown on the Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 06 61 16 - Page 1 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
drawings, listed in the Finish Legend and as described in this specification. Do not change source of supply for materials after work has started, if the appearance of finished work would be affected. Variation in component size and location of openings to be plus or minus 1/8 inch. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings; G, AR Installation Detail Drawings indicating locations, dimensions, component sizes, fabrication and joint details, attachment provisions, installation details, and coordination requirements with adjacent work. SD-03 Product Data Solid polymer material Qualifications Fabrications Product data indicating product description, fabrication information, and compliance with specified performance requirements for solid polymer, joint adhesive, sealants, and heat reflective tape. Both the manufacturer of materials and the fabricator shall submit a detailed description of operations and processes in place that support efficient use of natural resources, energy efficiency, emissions of ozone depleting chemicals, management of water and operational waste, indoor environmental quality, and other production techniques supporting sustainable design and products. SD-04 Samples Material; G, AR A minimum 4 by 4 inch sample of each color and pattern for approval. Samples shall indicate full range of color and pattern variation. Approved samples shall be retained as a standard for this work. Counter and Vanity Tops; G, AR A minimum 1 foot wide by 6 inch deep, full size sample for each type of counter top shown on the project drawings. The sample shall include the edge profile and backsplash as detailed on the project drawings. Solid polymer material shall be of a pattern and color as indicated on the drawings. Sample shall include at least one seam. Approved sample shall be retained as standard for this work.
Ft. Detrick, MD
SD-06 Test Reports Solid polymer material Test report results from an independent testing laboratory attesting that the submitted solid polymer material meets or exceeds each of the specified performance requirements. SD-07 Certificates Fabrications Qualifications Solid polymer manufacturer's certification attesting to fabricator qualification approval. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Clean-up A minimum of six copies of maintenance data indicating manufacturer's care, repair and cleaning instructions. Maintenance video shall be provided, if available. Maintenance kit for matte finishes shall be submitted. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Materials shall not be delivered to project site until areas are ready for installation. Components and materials shall be delivered to the site undamaged, in containers clearly marked and labeled with manufacturer's name. Materials shall be stored indoors and adequate precautions taken to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Protective coverings shall be provided to prevent physical damage or staining following installation, for duration of project. 1.5 WARRANTY
Manufacturer's warranty of ten years against defects in materials, excluding damages caused by physical or chemical abuse or excessive heat, shall be provided. Warranty shall provide for material and labor for replacement or repair of defective material for a period of ten years after component installation. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
To insure warranty coverage, solid polymer fabricators shall be certified to fabricate by the solid polymer material manufacturer being utilized. All fabrications shall be marked with the fabricator's certification label affixed in an inconspicuous location. Fabricators shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience working with solid polymer materials. 1.7 MOCK-UP
The Contractor shall submit Detail Drawings as specified in the Submittals paragraph, under SD-02. Prior to final approval of shop drawings, a full-size mock-up shall be provided of a typical countertop where multiple units are required. The mock-up shall include all solid polymer components required to provide a completed unit. The mock-up shall utilize finishes in patterns and colors indicated on the drawings. Should the mock-up not Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 06 61 16 - Page 3 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
be approved, the Contractor shall re-work or remake it until approval is secured. Rejected units shall be removed from the jobsite. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the finished work. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIAL
Solid polymer material shall be a homogeneous filled solid polymer; not coated, laminated or of a composite construction; meeting ANSI Z124.3 and ANSI Z124.6 requirements. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties specified. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.01 inch shall be repairable by sanding or polishing. Material thickness shall be as indicated on the drawings. In no case shall material be less than 1/4 inch in thickness. 2.1.1 Cast,100 Percent Acrylic Polymer Solid Surfacing Material
Cast, 100 percent acrylic solid polymer material shall be composed of acrylic polymer, mineral fillers, and pigments and shall meet the following minimum performance requirements: PROPERTY REQUIREMENT (min. or max.) 5800 psi (min.) 55-Barcol Impressor (min.) .000023 in/in/F (max.) No Change TEST PROCEDURE
Tensile Strength Hardness
ASTM D 638 ASTM D 2583
Thermal Expansion Boiling water Surface Resistance High Temperature Resistance Impact Resistance (Ball drop) 1/4-inch sheet
ASTM D 696 NEMA LD 3-3.05
No Change
NEMA LD 3-3.06
NEMA LD 3-303
36 inches, 1/2 lb ball, no failure 140 inches, 1/2 lb ball, no failure 200 inches, 1/2 lb ball, no failure No growth ASTM G 21
1/2-inch sheet
3/4-inch sheet
Mold and Mildew Growth Bacteria Growth Liquid Absorption (Weight in 24 hrs.)
No Growth
ASTM G 21
0.1 percent max.
ASTM D 570
Ft. Detrick, MD
PROPERTY Flammability Flame Spread Smoke Developed Sanitation 2.1.2
REQUIREMENT (min. or max.)
TEST PROCEDURE ASTM E 84
25 max. 30 max "Food Contact inches approval NSF 51
Acrylic-modified Polymer Solid Surfacing Material
Cast, solid polymer material shall be composed of a formulation containing acrylic and polyester polymers, mineral fillers, and pigments. Acrylic polymer content shall be not less than 5 percent and not more than 10 percent in order to meet the following minimum performance requirements:
PROPERTY
REQUIREMENT (min. or max.) 4100 psi (min.) 50-Barcol Impressor (min.) .000023 in/in/F (max.)
TEST PROCEDURE
Tensile Strength Hardness
ASTM D 638 ASTM D 2583
Thermal Expansion
ASTM D 696
Surface Resistance (Weight in 24 hrs.) High Temperature Resistance Impact Resistance (Ball drop) 1/4-inch sheet
0.1 percent max. No Change
ASTM D 570 NEMA LD 3-3.06
NEMA LD 3-303
36 inches, 1/2 lb ball, no failure 140 inches, 1/2 lb ball, no failure 200 inch, 1/2 lb ball, no failure No growth ASTM G 21
1/2-inch sheet
3/4-inch sheet
Mold and Mildew Growth Bacteria Growth Liquid Absorption (Weight in 24 hrs.) Flammability Flame Spread Smoke Developed
No Growth
ASTM G 21
0.6 percent max.
ASTM D 570 ASTM E 84
25 max. 100 max.
Ft. Detrick, MD
PROPERTY Sanitation 2.1.3 A.
REQUIREMENT (min. or max.) "Food Contact" approval
TEST PROCEDURE NSF 51
Material Patterns and Colors Design Standard Manufacturer is listed for each on Finish Legend Drawing. Patterns and colors for all solid polymer components and fabrications shall be those indicated on the project drawings. Pattern and color shall occur, and shall be consistent in appearance, throughout the entire depth (thickness) of the solid polymer material. Surface Finish
B.
2.1.4
Exposed finished surfaces and edges shall receive a uniform appearance. Exposed surface finish shall be matte gloss rating of 5-20. 2.2 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS
Accessory products, as specified below, shall be manufactured by the solid polymer manufacturer or shall be products approved by the solid polymer manufacturer for use with the solid polymer materials being specified. 2.2.1 Seam Adhesive
Seam adhesive shall be a two-part adhesive kit to create permanent, inconspicuous, non-porous, hard seams and joints by chemical bond between solid polymer materials and components to create a monolithic appearance of the fabrication. Adhesive shall be approved by the solid polymer manufacturer. Adhesive shall be color-matched to the surfaces being bonded where solid-colored, solid polymer materials are being bonded together. The seam adhesive shall be clear or color matched where particulate patterned, solid polymer materials are being bonded together. 2.2.2 Panel Adhesive
Panel adhesive shall be neoprene based panel adhesive meeting ANSI A108.1, Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listed. This adhesive shall be used to bond solid polymer components to adjacent and underlying substrates. 2.2.3 Silicone Sealant
Sealant shall be a mildew-resistant, FDA and UL listed silicone sealant or caulk in a clear formulation. The silicone sealant shall be approved for use by the solid polymer manufacturer. Sealant shall be used to seal all expansion joints between solid polymer components and all joints between solid polymer components and other adjacent surfaces such as walls, floors, ceiling, and plumbing fixtures. 2.2.4 Conductive Tape
Conductive tape shall be manufacturer's standard foil tape, 4 mils thick, applied around the edges of cut outs containing hot or cold appliances. 2.2.5 Insulating Felt Tape
Insulating tape shall be manufacturer's standard product for use with Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 06 61 16 - Page 6 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
drop-in food wells used in commercial food service applications to insulate solid polymer surfaces from hot or cold appliances. 2.2.6 Heat Reflective Tape
Heat reflective tape as recommended by the solid polymer manufacturer for use with cutouts for heat sources. 2.2.7 Mounting Hardware
Provide mounting hardware, including sink/bowl clips, inserts and fasteners for attachment of undermount sinks and lavatories. 2.3 FABRICATIONS
Components shall be factory or shop fabricated to sizes and shapes indicated, to the greatest extent practical, in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's requirements. Factory cutouts shall be provided for sinks, lavatories, and plumbing fixtures where indicated on the drawings. Contours and radii shall be routed to template, with edges smooth. Defective and inaccurate work will be rejected. 2.3.1 Joints and Seams
Joints and seams shall be formed between solid polymer components using manufacturer's approved seam adhesive. Joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and without voids to create a monolithic appearance. 2.3.2 Edge Finishing
Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform appearance and finish. Edge shapes and treatments, including any inserts, shall be as detailed on the drawings. Rout all cutouts, then sand all edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work. 2.3.3 Counter and Vanity Top Splashes
Backsplashes and end splashes shall be fabricated from 1/2 inch thick solid surfacing material and shall be provided to dimensions and shapes as indicated on the drawings. Backsplashes and end splashes shall be provided for all counter tops and vanity tops at locations indicated on the drawings. Backsplashes shall be shop fabricated and be permanently attached. 2.3.3.1 Permanently Attached Backsplash
Permanently attached backsplashes shall be attached straight with seam adhesive to form a 90 degree transition. 2.3.3.2 End Splashes
End splashes shall be provided loose for installation at the jobsite after horizontal surfaces to which they are to be attached have been installed. 2.3.4 Counter and Vanity Tops
All solid surfacing, solid polymer counter top and vanity top components shall be fabricated from 1/2 inch thick material. Edge details, dimensions, locations, and quantities shall be as indicated on the Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 06 61 16 - Page 7 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
Drawings. Attach 2 inch wide reinforcing strip of polymer material under each horizontal counter top seam. 2.3.4.1 Counter Top With Sink
Vitreous China Sink: Countertops with sinks shall include cutouts to template as furnished by the sink manufacturer. Manufacturer's standard sink mounting hardware for vitreous china rimless undermount installation shall be provided. Seam between sink and counter top shall be sealed with silicone sealant. Sink, faucet, and plumbing requirements shall be in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. 2.3.4.2 Vanity Tops With Bowls
Vitreous China Bowl: Countertops with vitreous china bowls shall include cutouts to template as furnished by the sink manufacturer. Manufacturer's standard sink mounting hardware for vitreous china rimless undermount installation shall be provided. Seam between sink and counter top shall be sealed with silicone sealant. Sink, faucet, and plumbing requirements shall be in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. 2.3.5 Toilet/Shower Partition System
Specified in Section 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION COORDINATION
In most instances, installation of solid polymer fabricated components and assemblies will require strong, correctly located structural support provided by other trades. To provide a stable, sound, secure installation, close coordination is required between the solid polymer fabricator/installer and other trades to insure that necessary structural wall support, cabinet counter top structural support, proper clearances, and other supporting components are provided for the installation of wall panels, countertops, shelving, and all other solid polymer fabrications to the degree and extent recommended by the solid polymer manufacturer. Contractor shall appropriate staging areas for solid polymer fabrications. 3.2 3.2.1 INSTALLATION Components
All components and fabricated units shall be installed plumb, level, and rigid. Field joints between solid polymer components to provide a monolithic appearance shall be made using solid polymer manufacturer's approved seam adhesives, with joints inconspicuous in the finished work. Metal or vitreous china sinks and lavatory bowls shall be attached to counter tops using solid polymer manufacturer's recommended clear silicone sealant and mounting hardware. Solid polymer sinks and bowls shall be installed using a color-matched seam adhesive. 3.2.2 Silicone Sealant
A clear, silicone sealant or caulk shall be used to seal all expansion joints between solid polymer components and all joints between solid polymer components and other adjacent surfaces such as walls, floors, ceiling, and plumbing fixtures. Sealant bead shall be smooth and uniform Issued for Construction 19 September 2008 Section 06 61 16 - Page 8 For Official Use Only
Ft. Detrick, MD
in appearance and shall be the minimum size necessary to bridge any gaps between the solid surfacing material and the adjacent surface. Bead shall be continuous and run the entire length of the joint being sealed. 3.2.3 Plumbing
Plumbing connections to sinks and lavatories shall be made in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. 3.3 CLEAN-UP
Components shall be cleaned after installation and covered to protect against damage during completion of the remaining project items. Components damaged after installation by other trades will be repaired or replaced at the General Contractor's cost. Component supplier will provide a repair/replace cost estimate to the General Contractor who shall approve estimate before repairs are made. The Contractor shall submit maintenance data as specified in the Submittals paragraph, under SD-10. -- End of Section --

Specifications Vol 1 Div 1-6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specifications Vol 1 Div 1-6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

US Army Corps of Engineers Baltimore District

Phase I - Primary Building Package

F.O.U.O. - For Official Use Only

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 20 00 04 43 30 04 72 00 MASONRY CUT STONE CAST STONE

53 00.00 10 01.00 10 14.00 10 00 00 13

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 00 00 31 40 00 31 63 26 EARTHWORK SHORING AND UNDERPINNING DRILLED PIERS (CAISSONS)

-- End of Project Table of Contents --

SECTION 01 00 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

Section 01 00 00 - Page 1 For Official Use Only

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

Section 01 00 00 - Page 5 For Official Use Only

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

Section 01 00 00 - Page 6 For Official Use Only

Not Applicable. -- End of Section --

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

Section 01 00 00 - Page 7 For Official Use Only

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATIONS

PRECAUTIONS AFTER OPERATIONS

NOTE: PERMIT VALID ON DAY OF OPERATION AT ONE LOCATION ONLY

DA FORM 5383-R, SEP 92

EDITION OF JAN 85 IS OBSOLETE

USAMRIID Replacement MAC II Sensitive Controls

Functional Security Design Architecture and Configuration for AIS Applications

Medium DoDI 8500.2, Information Assurance (IA) Implementation, 06 February 2003

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

For Official Use Only

USAMRIID Replacement MAC II Sensitive Controls

DISA Web Server STIG, Low Version 5, 26 July 2004

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

For Official Use Only

USAMRIID Replacement MAC II Sensitive Controls

System Library Management Controls

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

For Official Use Only

USAMRIID Replacement MAC II Sensitive Controls

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

For Official Use Only

USAMRIID Replacement MAC II Sensitive Controls

Remote Access Enclave Boundary for User Defense Functions

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

For Official Use Only

USAMRIID Replacement MAC II Sensitive Controls

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

For Official Use Only

USAMRIID Replacement MAC II Sensitive Controls

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

For Official Use Only

USAMRIID Replacement MAC II Sensitive Controls

Data Change Controls

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

For Official Use Only

USAMRIID Replacement MAC II Sensitive Controls

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

For Official Use Only

USAMRIID Replacement MAC II Sensitive Controls

Marking and Labeling

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

For Official Use Only

USAMRIID Replacement MAC II Sensitive Controls

Issued for Construction 19 September 2008

For Official Use Only